initial commit of ebook 37310HEADmain

12 files changed, 38951 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/37310-0.txt b/37310-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0aaf798
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37310-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8618 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water, by 
+Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water
+       Exciting Adventures on a Summer Cruise Through the Panama Canal
+
+Author: Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+Release Date: September 4, 2011 [EBook #37310]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: “I AM SORRY YOU INTERFERED WITH US,” SAID THE MAN.
+“YOU’LL FIND BEFORE LONG THAT YOU HAVE DONE WRONG.” _Page 57_.]
+
+
+
+
+                                  The
+                       Blue Grass Seminary Girls
+                              On the Water
+
+                                   OR
+
+                 Exciting Adventures on a Summer Cruise
+                        Through the Panama Canal
+
+                       By Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+                               AUTHOR OF
+
+         “The Blue Grass Seminary Girls’ Vacation Adventures,”
+           “The Blue Grass Seminary Girls in the Mountains,”
+                        “The Blue Grass Seminary
+                      Girls’ Christmas Holidays.”
+
+                           A. L. BURT COMPANY
+
+                          PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+                            Copyright, 1916
+                         By A. L. Burt Company
+
+               THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER
+
+
+
+
+THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.—PLANNING A TRIP.
+
+
+“Dad, we want to take a trip.”
+
+The speaker was Shirley Willing, a typical Kentucky girl, slender of
+figure, vivacious of manner, and extremely pretty. With her father, she
+stood on the big, sunny front porch of the Willing farmhouse. As she
+again was about to address her father, a second young girl, who, it
+could be seen at a glance, was of about Shirley’s years, joined them.
+
+This was Mabel Ashton, Shirley’s particular friend and life chum.
+Shirley greeted her with a smile, and Mr. Willing’s face also wrinkled
+pleasantly.
+
+“I was just telling Dad that we want to take a trip this summer,”
+explained Shirley.
+
+Mabel smiled.
+
+“We have talked it all over,” she agreed, “and we just want to go some
+place.”
+
+“Where?” asked Mr. Willing briefly.
+
+“Why, we—we—want to go to—to—where is it we want to go, Shirley?”
+asked Mabel in some confusion.
+
+“We hadn’t decided on that yet, Dad,” laughed Shirley. “But we don’t
+want to stay here on this old farm all summer.”
+
+“And what are you going to do with both your old Dads—leave them
+behind?” asked Mr. Willing seriously.
+
+“We would like to have you go with us, Dad, but we know you won’t.”
+
+“Why won’t we?”
+
+“Well, I—we,—I—you never have gone with us.”
+
+“It’s never too late to mend our ways,” declared her father dryly.
+“Perhaps we shall this time.”
+
+Both girls clapped their hands, and scampered about the porch eagerly.
+At last Shirley stopped her antics, and standing directly before her
+father, took him by the coat with both hands.
+
+“Do you mean it, Dad?” she asked.
+
+Mr. Willing nodded.
+
+“Yes. Ashton and I have decided that the next time you two youngsters go
+away from home we are going with you. When you are by yourselves you get
+into too much mischief. Now where is it you want to go?”
+
+“We haven’t the slightest idea,” was the reply.
+
+Mr. Willing turned to Mabel.
+
+“You call your father out here and we’ll talk this thing over,” he told
+her.
+
+Mabel hastened to obey, and while she is searching for her father, we
+shall take time to introduce Shirley Willing and Mabel Ashton more fully
+to the reader.
+
+The two girls had been friends ever since they could remember. Born and
+raised within a few doors of each other in the little town of Paris,
+Bourbon county, Kentucky, they had been inseparable companions from the
+time they were able to walk. This friendship was strengthened by the
+fact that their fathers had been bosom friends before them.
+
+While the girls were still young, Shirley’s mother died, and a short
+time later Mr. Willing purchased a large farm on the Bethlehem Pike,
+three miles from town. It was less than a year later that Mabel’s mother
+passed into the great Beyond, and Mr. Ashton bought a farm adjoining
+that of his old friend. And here they had lived ever since.
+
+When Shirley reached the age of fourteen, she conceived the idea of
+going away to school. Mabel announced that she was going with her. The
+objections of their fathers they soon overcame, and at last found
+themselves installed as pupils of the Bluegrass Seminary in Lexington.
+Here, because of their kind-heartedness and their many good deeds, they
+were soon among the most popular girls of the school.
+
+Being athletically inclined, they were prominent in all branches of
+girls’ sports. Their chief pleasure was horseback riding, in which art
+there were few more proficient. In fact, Shirley once had saved her
+father’s fortune by carrying the Willing colors to victory in the great
+Kentucky Derby, as related in “The Bluegrass Seminary Girls on
+Vacation.”
+
+Naturally modest, they nevertheless had been made, soon after their
+arrival at the seminary, members of the Glee Club, for it was found that
+both possessed voices of rare excellence. During the second Christmas
+vacation, with other members of the Glee Club, they had toured the
+larger eastern cities, and through entertainments had lifted a large
+debt that threatened the end of the Seminary.
+
+Both girls also possessed great courage, as they had proved on more than
+one occasion, and they had had many exciting adventures, one of the most
+important of which was the settling of a mountain feud in which they had
+faced great danger unflinchingly, as related in “The Bluegrass Seminary
+Girls on Motorcycles.”
+
+The summer vacation now had just begun. Shirley and Mabel had returned
+from Lexington two days before this story opens. At the Willing place
+they found Mr. Ashton, who had been very ill for some years, and had
+been making his home with his friend while his daughter was away at
+school.
+
+But now Mr. Ashton was greatly improved, as Mabel found to her great
+joy. He was gaining daily and recovering lost weight and strength.
+
+Mabel, searching for her father in response to Mr. Willing’s request,
+found him in the sitting room. She went up to him and took him by the
+hand.
+
+“Come on Dad,” she said.
+
+Mr. Ashton—“colonel” he was always called by his friends—allowed
+himself to be pulled toward the door.
+
+“What’s up?” he asked.
+
+“Mr. Willing, Shirley and I want to have a talk with you,” was the
+reply.
+
+“H-mm-m,” muttered the colonel, “must be something you two want. Have
+you succeeded in twisting Willing around your fingers?”
+
+“The idea, Dad!” exclaimed Mabel. “You know neither Shirley nor I would
+think of trying to do a thing like that.”
+
+Colonel Ashton grinned.
+
+“Wouldn’t you?” he asked dryly. “I’m not so sure of that.”
+
+Father and daughter made their way to the front porch, where Shirley and
+her father were deep in conversation. Colonel Ashton dropped into a
+chair, and Mabel sat down at his feet.
+
+“Ashton,” said Mr. Willing, “these girls say they want to go some place.
+What do you think about it?”
+
+Mr. Ashton was silent for some moments. He did not seem to be surprised.
+
+“Where do they want to go?” he asked at length.
+
+“We don’t know, Dad,” said Mabel. “We just want to take a trip.”
+
+“And,” Shirley broke in, “my Dad says you and he might come with us.”
+
+Mr. Ashton looked at his old friend in surprise.
+
+“You say that, Willing?” he demanded.
+
+“Yes, Colonel, I did. Why not, eh? You and I are getting along in years
+and have earned a vacation. I’m agreeable, if you are.”
+
+“I don’t know but you are right,” was the slow reply. “I guess I am well
+enough to travel. I’ll go.”
+
+Mabel jumped quickly to her feet, and hugged him. Shirley performed a
+similar operation on her father.
+
+“Then,” said Mr. Willing, disengaging himself at last, “the only
+question to be settled is, where shall we go?”
+
+“This is a pretty sizeable country, Willing,” said the colonel, “I guess
+there are plenty of places to go.”
+
+“I had thought of Atlantic City,” said Mabel.
+
+“And what had you thought of?” demanded Mr. Willing of Shirley.
+
+“Well,” was the reply, “there were two things I wanted to do, and I
+don’t know which I shall choose.”
+
+“Let’s hear them,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+“You know, Dad, ever since Mabel and I went away with the Glee Club, we
+have both been anxious to take a trip on one of the big ocean steamers.
+That is one thing I would like to do.”
+
+“And where would you like to go?”
+
+“Any place. Across the ocean.”
+
+“Well, we won’t do that,” said Colonel Ashton. “This European war makes
+it too risky. We might be sunk by one of those German submarines.”
+
+“Right, Colonel,” agreed Mr. Willing. He turned again to Shirley, “and
+the other thing you would like to do?” he questioned.
+
+“I should like to go to the Panama Exposition in San Francisco.”
+
+Mabel jumped to her feet and clapped her hands.
+
+“That’s where I should like to go, too,” she cried. “Why didn’t I think
+of it before?”
+
+Mr. Willing considered.
+
+“Well,” he said at length, “I don’t know why we can’t do both of those
+things, Shirley.”
+
+“But the ocean trip, Dad. Where would we go?”
+
+“To San Francisco,” was the reply.
+
+“But, how—”
+
+“You must remember that the Panama Canal is open to traffic, daughter,”
+explained Mr. Willing. “We can take a steamer from New York direct to
+San Francisco. Besides, I should like to have a look at the canal, with
+its great locks and other interesting things. The construction of the
+canal is considered one of the greatest of all feats of engineering.”
+
+Colonel Ashton nodded his head emphatically.
+
+“I should like to take that trip myself,” he declared.
+
+“Then we shall consider that matter settled,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+“And when can we start, dad?” asked Shirley eagerly.
+
+“Well, we will not be able to leave here for a week or ten days. I have
+some business affairs that must be put in order before I can get away.
+Besides, you two girls will want clothes and things, and you can’t get
+those in a minute.”
+
+“We’ll go to town this afternoon and get some things,” declared Mabel.
+
+“All right,” laughed Mr. Willing, “but just the same it will take you at
+least a week to get yourselves ready. Then I shall have to make
+arrangements for our passage, find out when we leave New York and attend
+to other details. It will take time.”
+
+“But we shall go as soon as possible, Dad?” asked Shirley.
+
+“Yes,” was the reply. “You may make sure of that. We shall go as soon as
+possible. Hello—who’s that?”
+
+The others gazed in the direction of his pointing finger. Through the
+pike gate, at that moment, came a solitary horseman.
+
+“I wonder who he is?” exclaimed Shirley.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.—AN ADDITION TO THE PARTY.
+
+
+The horseman came closer.
+
+Suddenly Shirley gave an exclamation of delight. She had recognized the
+visitor even at this distance, which was too great for the others to
+perceive his identity. Mabel looked at her chum in astonishment.
+
+“Dick!” cried Shirley.
+
+Now Mabel understood, and even Mr. Willing allowed a slight smile to
+steal across his face.
+
+Shirley ran down the steps from the porch and hurried toward the distant
+yard gate. The girl and the horseman arrived at about the same time, and
+those on the porch saw the rider lift his cap and dismount.
+
+Then he led the horse through the gate, closed it behind him and with
+the bridle in his hand continued his way to the house afoot, Shirley
+walking by his side.
+
+“Dick!” cried Shirley again, as the rider dismounted at the gate upon
+sight of her. “What are you doing here? I am glad to see you.”
+
+“I was in Paris on a little business,” replied the young man, “and I
+thought I wouldn’t go away without paying my respects to you and your
+father.”
+
+At the house Mr. Willing greeted the young man warmly, for, from
+previous meetings, he had taken a liking to Dick.
+
+Dick Stanley was a native of Cincinnati, O. He was without parents, and
+after having met Shirley under exciting circumstances, he had given up a
+rough set of companions and at length had obtained a place as office boy
+on one of the big Louisville newspapers. But Dick had not remained an
+office boy long, and he was now one of the most competent and best liked
+reporters on the paper.
+
+He had been sent to Paris for a certain piece of news—“on a story,” in
+his words, the words of the newspaper world—and he had just completed
+his work successfully. Therefore he had hired a horse and come to the
+Willing farm for a few words with his friends before going back to
+Louisville.
+
+“I’m glad to see you, young man,” said Mr. Willing in greeting. “It has
+been some time since we have had the pleasure of your company.”
+
+“Thank you, sir,” was the reply. “I am always glad to be here.”
+
+He shook hands with Mr. Ashton and Mabel.
+
+Now Shirley proceeded to tell him of the trip they were going to take,
+and Dick was greatly interested.
+
+“I should like to see the canal,” he said. “I have been reading quite a
+bit about it, and it is very interesting.”
+
+“You are right, young man,” agreed Mr. Willing.
+
+“It is one of the wonders of the world.” He paused, struck by a sudden
+idea. Then he said slowly, looking squarely at Dick:
+
+“How would you like to go with us?”
+
+“I’d like it fine,” declared Dick, with a smile. “I wish it could be
+done.”
+
+“Well, it can be done,” said Mr. Willing quietly.
+
+Dick, as well as Shirley and Mabel, looked at Mr. Willing in surprise.
+
+“Dad!” exclaimed Shirley. “What do you mean?”
+
+“Just what I say,” was the reply. “I am going to take Dick with us.”
+
+Dick shook his head slowly.
+
+“I appreciate your kindness, Mr. Willing,” he said quietly, “but I
+cannot accept such generosity.”
+
+“Can’t, eh?” blustered Mr. Willing, “and why not, I’d like to know. I am
+not in the habit of having my invitations refused, sir!”
+
+Again Dick smiled.
+
+“It is very kind of you to ask me,” he said, “but I do not feel that I
+should accept. Of course, I have the money for the trip, but I do not
+feel I can afford to spend it. Besides, I could not leave the paper for
+so long a time.”
+
+“Couldn’t leave the paper!” echoed Mr. Willing.
+
+“I’ll speak a few words to my friend Col. Harperson, the owner, and he
+will see that you are given an indefinite vacation.”
+
+“No, sir, thank you, I don’t think it can be done.”
+
+“I’ll tell you,” said Mr. Willing, trying a new line, for he had made up
+his mind to have Dick accompany them, “you will be able to do some
+writing on the trip. The sights you will see should mean money to you.
+You should be able to write many interesting articles when you get
+back.”
+
+Dick apparently was impressed with this line of reasoning. And now
+Shirley added her voice to the colonel’s.
+
+“Please, come, Dick?” she said.
+
+“Well,” said the young man after hesitating a long while, “I’ll tell you
+what I’ll do. If I can make arrangements to get off indefinitely, I’ll
+go.”
+
+Shirley clapped her hands.
+
+“I’m sure you can,” she cried.
+
+And Mr. Willing muttered to himself:
+
+“I’ll fix it with Harperson!”
+
+The discussion of the trip now became general, and Dick was acquainted
+with the time they expected to depart.
+
+“You will remain here over night, of course,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+“Thank you, sir, I shall be glad to.”
+
+“Then we’ll put off our shopping till to-morrow, Mabel,” said Shirley.
+
+All day the three young people talked eagerly of the coming trip, and
+Shirley tried to get Dick to promise that he would go, whether he was
+able to get off or not. But this Dick would not do.
+
+“If they agree to let me off, all right,” was his decision.
+
+They sat up and talked till late that night, but Mr. Willing finally put
+an end to this conversation.
+
+“Shirley,” he said severely, “are you going to keep that young man
+talking all night? How do you expect him to catch the early train in the
+morning?”
+
+“Well, I would have gone any time he told me,” pouted Shirley.
+
+“I don’t suppose he would have told you if you had kept him talking all
+night,” replied Mr. Willing dryly.
+
+Dick arose and bade the others good night. A few moments later Shirley
+and Mabel retired to their room, where they lay for a long time before
+sleep overcame them, so excited were they at the prospect of the great
+trip.
+
+“I’m glad Dick is going,” said Mabel, “but I don’t suppose I am half as
+glad as you are.”
+
+“Why not?” demanded Shirley.
+
+“Oh, just because,” replied Mabel, laughing.
+
+“I don’t see anything to laugh at,” declared Shirley.
+
+“You don’t? No, I guess you don’t. Do you know, I’d give a whole lot if
+some nice boy like Dick would come all this way to see me.”
+
+“He came to see you as well as me,” said Shirley.
+
+“Oh no he didn’t. If I had been the only girl here, Dick would not have
+been on hand to-day. Besides, if it wasn’t for you I’m sure he wouldn’t
+even think of taking the trip to San Francisco.”
+
+“But he wants to see something of the Panama Canal.”
+
+“My goodness! you didn’t use to be so dense,” exclaimed Mabel.
+
+“Dense?” repeated Shirley. “What do you mean, Mabel?”
+
+“That’s right, keep it up,” exclaimed Mabel. “I won’t say anything more.
+Are you going into town to-morrow?”
+
+“Yes, I thought we would go in as soon as Dick had gone.”
+
+“That suits me. We’ll have to get a lot of things.”
+
+“I should say so. Why, I haven’t a single decent thing to wear.”
+
+“We’ll put in a good supply, so we won’t have to buy anything while we
+are away. My! but won’t it be a nice trip?”
+
+“Won’t it though. I can hardly wait for the time to come.”
+
+“Nor I. But let’s get some sleep or we won’t want to get up in the
+morning.”
+
+Both closed their eyes and tried to sleep. But they had too much on
+their minds to go to sleep immediately, and it was long minutes before
+drowsiness overcame them and they lost themselves, only to dream that
+they were sailing across the ocean.
+
+The following morning they accompanied Dick to Wright’s station, where
+he took a train for Lexington. There he would have to change for
+Louisville.
+
+“Let us know as soon as possible?” called Shirley, as he climbed aboard.
+
+“I will,” replied Dick. “I’ll write immediately I have learned one thing
+or the other.”
+
+The train moved away.
+
+Shirley and Mabel returned to the house, where Mr. Willing was waiting
+for them with the automobile.
+
+“Ashton and I have decided to do a little shopping on our own hook,” he
+explained. “We want to spruce up a bit. Daughter, do you suppose there
+will be any nice-looking, middle-aged ladies aboard the boat? If so, why
+Ashton and I—”
+
+“Dad!” interrupted Shirley.
+
+“Well, all right. Of course if you object,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+All the rest of the day the girls put in shopping. Dresses and frocks
+for all occasions they bought, besides a couple of outing costumes.
+
+“I don’t know how long it takes to get to San Francisco from New York,”
+said Shirley, “so we had best be prepared.”
+
+But when the day was over they found they had not completed their
+shopping, and would have to return again on the morrow.
+
+Mr. Willing, during the day, transacted his business and found out the
+date of sailing from New York. Taking it for granted that Dick would
+accompany them, he purchased a ticket and made accommodations for him as
+well as the others.
+
+“How long shall we be gone, Dad?” asked Shirley, as the automobile sped
+homeward.
+
+“Well, let’s see. This is the fourth of June. We shall leave New York on
+the fifteenth. I should say we would be back by the middle of August.”
+
+“And will we come back the same way?”
+
+“No; we’ll come back by rail. One way by boat will be enough. You’ll
+have seen plenty of water by the time you reach San Francisco.”
+
+“I hope Dick decides to go with us,” said Shirley.
+
+“And so do I,” declared Mabel.
+
+“Oh, he’ll go, all right,” remarked Mr. Willing.
+
+And the latter was right. Three days later Shirley stood before her
+father with an open letter in her hand.
+
+“It’s from Dick,” she explained. “He says he is going with us.”
+
+Mr. Willing chuckled.
+
+“I see Harperson is still a friend of mine,” he muttered to himself.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.—OFF FOR NEW YORK.
+
+
+It was the morning of the twelfth of June that the party of five went
+early to Paris to catch the eight o’clock train for Cincinnati. Dick had
+arrived the night before, and in spite of the fact that they would have
+to be up very early in the morning, all sat up talking, for the young
+people were too excited to go to sleep.
+
+All through the long hours of the night the girls tossed about, scarcely
+closing their eyes. They were up with the break of day, which was soon
+after four o’clock.
+
+At last the time for departure came, and they jumped gaily into the
+large automobile which was to take them to town.
+
+“What time shall we leave Cincinnati, sir?” Dick asked of Mr. Willing,
+as the train pulled out from the station.
+
+“Twelve o’clock,” was the reply. “We’ll get there a little after eleven,
+which will give us time to get across town to the Pennsylvania station.
+I have made reservations on the New York train.”
+
+Nevertheless it lacked only twenty minutes of the noon hour when the
+train pulled into Cincinnati.
+
+“Hurry girls,” ordered Mr. Willing. “We have no time to lose. We can
+just about make it.”
+
+They dashed through the station and out the Third street entrance, where
+Mr. Willing immediately engaged two taxicabs.
+
+“Pennsylvania Station!” he ordered, and they were off at a good gait.
+
+Through the narrow streets congested with traffic they were forced to go
+more slowly, and Mr. Willing looked at his watch impatiently from time
+to time.
+
+“Seven minutes!” he said, and they were still some distance from their
+destination, and then the first cab stopped to let a car pass in front
+of it.
+
+“Hurry!” commanded Mr. Willing of his driver. “We haven’t got all day to
+get there. Let the street cars do the waiting after this.”
+
+The chauffeur nodded and the cab leaped forward, scattering pedestrians
+right and left, darting in and out among other vehicles, avoiding a
+collision as though by a miracle. The second cab came close behind.
+
+At last the station was reached and all dismounted hurriedly. With Mr.
+Willing in the lead they ran through the station to the train shed. Here
+the conductor had just called “All aboard!”
+
+Mr. Willing heard him, and urged the others on faster. They passed
+through the gate, Mr. Willing assisted the girls and Colonel Ashton up
+the steps, then climbed up himself. And as he did so, Shirley, who had
+turned to look at him, cried:
+
+“Where’s Dick?”
+
+Mr. Willing looked around, then stood nonplussed. Dick was not here. The
+train began to move.
+
+There came a shout from behind and a young man came dashing after the
+train. Shirley cried out in alarm. It was Dick.
+
+The train had gathered headway now and was slipping along beneath the
+shed more rapidly. Dick sprinted, gained, clutched the handrail of the
+car and swung himself aboard just as the train gathered even greater
+speed.
+
+He climbed to the platform, wiped the moisture from his brow, fanned
+himself vigorously and then smiled.
+
+“Close call, that,” he exclaimed.
+
+“Young man,” said Mr. Willing dryly, “hereafter let there be no
+loitering behind. You gave me a scare and I don’t care for any more of
+the same.”
+
+“Daddy!” exclaimed Shirley. “I am sure Dick didn’t do it intentionally.”
+
+“No, sir,” agreed Dick. “As I followed after you I bumped into a lady
+and knocked her suitcase from her hand. It came open and the contents
+scattered about. For a moment I forgot all about the train and stopped
+to help her pick them up. Then I happened to remember we were late, and
+ran after you.”
+
+“Your gallantry is bound to get you in trouble if you are not careful,”
+commented Mr. Willing.
+
+They went inside.
+
+Mr. Willing had engaged the two drawing rooms, one at either end of the
+car. Dick and the two older men were to occupy one and the two girls the
+other.
+
+It was almost eight o’clock when the train pulled into Pittsburgh. They
+had just finished dinner, so Dick stepped off to look about for a few
+moments.
+
+As he stood beside the steps of the Pullman, another man, probably
+several years his senior, approached and engaged him in conversation. He
+was an agreeable sort of a chap. He spoke English with the faintest of
+accents, however, and this Dick was not slow to notice.
+
+It appeared that the man had a berth on the same car, and they climbed
+aboard together. In the smoking compartment was Mr. Willing, to whom
+Dick introduced the newcomer. Mr. Ashton came in a few moments later,
+and all sat talking.
+
+The stranger, who introduced himself as Henry Bristow, made himself very
+agreeable and Mr. Willing took an instant liking to him.
+
+During the course of the conversation, Dick chanced to mention that they
+would sail from New York for San Francisco on the fifteenth.
+
+“On what ship?” demanded Bristow eagerly.
+
+“_Yucatan_,” was the reply.
+
+“Is that so?” exclaimed the other. “I shall sail on the same vessel.”
+
+“For San Francisco?” asked Dick in surprise.
+
+“That all depends,” was the answer. “I shall only take passage as far as
+Colon. Whether I shall go further depends upon my—upon circumstances.”
+
+“We shall be glad to have you as a fellow passenger,” declared Mr.
+Willing. “As you are going to be such, you must meet my daughter, and
+the daughter of the colonel here.”
+
+“I shall be pleased,” was the reply.
+
+He accompanied the others to the drawing room, where introductions
+followed.
+
+Young Bristow conversed fluently upon many topics and the others were
+delighted with him. From his remarks it was gathered that he had
+traveled considerably.
+
+He spoke familiarly of New York, Chicago, San Francisco, and apparently
+had a personal knowledge of London, Paris, Berlin and other European
+cities. He was equally as well acquainted with the larger southern
+cities.
+
+The two girls were eager listeners to the tales of his travels, and even
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton gave an attentive ear to these stories.
+
+“And where do you live?” asked Mr. Willing suddenly. “What did you say
+your business is?”
+
+The young man’s face suddenly turned red.
+
+“My home is in New York,” he replied quietly, “and as for my business, I
+fear that must remain a secret for the present.”
+
+“Daddy, you shouldn’t be so inquisitive,” said Shirley with a smile.
+
+“I’m sure I’m sorry,” apologized her father. “I didn’t mean—”
+
+“Say no more about it,” replied the young man with a pleasant smile.
+“For certain reasons, I am not now able to reveal the nature of my
+business.”
+
+Dick had been thinking rapidly. Suspicions had entered his head, and he
+could not shake them off. And still he knew that they would sound
+foolish to another.
+
+“I’ll keep them to myself,” he said, “but I’ll keep an eye open.”
+
+The train was just pulling into North Philadelphia when Shirley and
+Mabel opened their eyes the next morning. Mabel glanced at her watch.
+
+“Seven o’clock,” she exclaimed. “We’ll have to hurry, Shirley. You know
+these fast trains don’t take long to reach New York from here. Besides,
+we want to get breakfast on the train.”
+
+They dressed as rapidly as possible, and emerged from their drawing room
+just in time to see young Bristow stride down the aisle.
+
+He gave them a cheery “good morning” and turned as Mr. Willing came up.
+
+“I hope you will join us at breakfast, sir,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+The young man accepted, and as Dick and Colonel Ashton appeared at this
+moment, all made their way to the diner together.
+
+“Where shall you stay in New York, sir?” asked Bristow of Mr. Willing.
+
+“At the McAlpin,” was the reply. “We shall spend the two days looking
+about the city, going aboard the _Yucatan_ a couple of hours before time
+for her departure.”
+
+Bristow turned to Dick.
+
+“I shall look you up either this afternoon or to-morrow, and we’ll take
+a stroll,” he said.
+
+“I’ll be glad to walk with you,” Dick replied.
+
+Breakfast over, they returned to the Pullman, where they began to get
+their things together, for they were close to New York.
+
+Half an hour later the train plunged into the tunnel under the Hudson
+river. Mr. Willing, who had been to New York before, explained how the
+tunnel had been constructed and gave other interesting information.
+
+“You wouldn’t think we were in a tunnel,” exclaimed Shirley. “There is
+no smoke.”
+
+“Electric engine,” replied Mr. Willing.
+
+“And we go right under the river?”
+
+“Yes.”
+
+“My goodness!” exclaimed Mabel. “Just to think that there is a river
+running right over the top of us. Suppose it would come through.”
+
+Mr. Willing smiled.
+
+“It won’t,” he said quietly.
+
+And now the porter came for their baggage, and carried it to the
+vestibule. The conductor poked his head in the door and called out:
+
+“New York!”
+
+“Here we are,” exclaimed Shirley eagerly. “The city I have always wanted
+to see. The greatest city in the world!”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.—DICK HAS AN ADVENTURE.
+
+
+The two days spent in New York City were days of wonder to Shirley,
+Mabel and Dick. They were on the go every minute of the time,
+sightseeing. From one end of the city to the other they travelled with
+wide-open eyes.
+
+The great skyscrapers impressed them, perhaps, more than any one other
+thing, though they saw much to amaze them; and next to the great
+buildings they were impressed by the crowds.
+
+Crowds they had seen in some of the other large cities, but never
+anything like this.
+
+They took a trip to Coney Island on the second day, and the girls were
+for going back again that night. Mr. Willing agreed, and they were about
+to fare forth from the hotel, when young Bristow was announced.
+
+“I’ve come to take you for that promised stroll,” he told Dick.
+
+Dick looked at the others inquiringly.
+
+“You go with him,” nodded Colonel Ashton, “the rest of us can get along
+without you for one evening.”
+
+“If I’m breaking up a party—” began Bristow.
+
+“Never mind,” said the colonel with a wave of his hand. “You two young
+fellows run along. We don’t need you.”
+
+“All right, sir,” agreed Dick.
+
+Personally he was glad to have a chance to look about the town a little
+with one of his own age. The others took their departure, and soon
+Bristow and Dick also left the hotel.
+
+“I would have looked you up sooner but I have been terribly busy,”
+explained Bristow. “I have had important matters to attend to, and this
+is the first time I have been at liberty. Where would you like to go?”
+
+“Any place you say,” said Dick with a smile. “You know more about this
+place than I do.”
+
+“I guess you’re right,” was the smiling response, “we’ll wander up
+Broadway aways and watch the theater crowds.”
+
+They did so, and continued to stroll about for an hour.
+
+Gradually the crowd thinned out, although there were many pedestrians on
+the street. As they stood for a moment in front of the Herald building
+on Herald square, Dick, chancing to turn suddenly, became conscious of a
+pair of eyes looking steadily at his companion. He called the other’s
+attention to it, and as the latter glanced about the man turned and
+moved off.
+
+Dick thought no more of the matter until several blocks further along he
+perceived the same figure slinking furtively after them.
+
+“That man is following us,” he said to Bristow.
+
+The face of the latter grew hard.
+
+“We’ll see,” he said.
+
+At that moment they were passing Forty-second Street, and Bristow swung
+sharply around the corner. Dick followed him. They walked several
+blocks, until they stood beneath the tracks of the Sixth Avenue
+elevated. Here Bristow again turned sharply, and drew up in a doorway.
+He stopped as Dick came up beside him.
+
+A moment later the figure of the man Dick believed was following them
+came around the corner. The man’s hat was pulled over his eyes, and he
+did not glance up as he passed the doorway. Bristow and Dick turned and
+doubled back around the corner.
+
+“He was after us, all right,” said Bristow with a laugh, “but I guess we
+have given him the slip.”
+
+But in this he was mistaken.
+
+“I wonder what on earth we are being followed for?” muttered Dick to
+himself, as they turned down Broadway. “Something queer about this
+fellow Bristow. That man is not following us for nothing.”
+
+Several hours later they stopped in a little restaurant for a bite to
+eat, “after which I’ll take you home,” said Bristow.
+
+The restaurant was crowded, and a little while later the waiter seated
+another man at their table. Dick gave him a quick glance and then
+stifled an exclamation of surprise.
+
+The newcomer was the same man who had followed them so recently.
+
+Dick leaned over and whispered to Bristow.
+
+“So?” said Bristow. “We’ll see what he wants.”
+
+He looked the man squarely in the eyes and demanded:
+
+“What are you following me for?”
+
+The man looked at him and smiled pleasantly.
+
+“I just want to keep you in sight,” he replied.
+
+“Why?”
+
+“You know, I guess. You don’t want me to speak right out, do you?”
+
+“Well, no,” replied Bristow, “but I’ll thank you to follow me no
+longer.”
+
+“Sorry,” was the reply, “but I am afraid I shall have to.”
+
+“I warn you,” said Bristow quietly, “to let me alone. Is that plain
+enough?”
+
+“Perfectly plain,” was the reply. “I’m sorry I can’t accommodate you.”
+
+He resumed his eating.
+
+Dick and Bristow finished their meal first and rose to go. The other man
+waited until they were at the door, then picked up his check and
+followed them. And so when they passed out, he was right behind them
+once more.
+
+“I don’t like this idea of being followed,” said Dick. “What’s he want,
+anyhow?”
+
+“We’ll get rid of him,” replied Bristow, absolutely ignoring Dick’s
+second question.
+
+He turned down a side street, and they walked for three or four blocks,
+at length coming to a rather darker street. Here Bristow slipped around
+the corner and motioned Dick to silence.
+
+The footsteps of their pursuer came to their ears. He drew nearer.
+Bristow advanced close to the edge of the building.
+
+“What are you going to do?” asked Dick.
+
+“You’ll see,” was the brief response.
+
+As the man came into view, Bristow suddenly struck out with his right
+fist, and the man toppled over.
+
+Bristow turned to Dick.
+
+“Come!” he said quietly.
+
+With one look at the fallen man Dick obeyed, and they were soon beyond
+pursuit.
+
+Dick had been taken by surprise by the suddenness of Bristow’s attack.
+Try as he would he could see no reason for it. He, as well as Bristow,
+objected to being followed, but Dick would not have taken such measures
+to elude his pursuer.
+
+He followed his companion without a word, however, and soon they were
+back at the hotel.
+
+The others had not returned, but Bristow sat down, announcing that he
+had something important to say to Mr. Willing when the latter did get
+back.
+
+Half an hour later, Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and the two girls came
+in.
+
+“Well, I see you beat us,” exclaimed Mr. Willing. “Have a good time?”
+
+“Yes, sir,” replied Dick.
+
+“Mr. Willing,” said Bristow, “I have something of importance to say to
+you.”
+
+“All right, sir,” came the answer, “out with it.”
+
+“Will you all promise to repeat nothing of what I may say?”
+
+“Why all this air of secrecy?” demanded Mr. Willing.
+
+“That I cannot tell you, sir.”
+
+“Of course we’ll promise, Mr. Bristow,” declared Shirley. “Surely, Dad,
+there is no reason why we should tell any one anything.”
+
+Mr. Willing nodded.
+
+“I will promise for myself and the others,” he said.
+
+“Very well, sir. What I would say is this: Take my advice, and under no
+circumstances sail on the _Yucatan_ to-morrow!”
+
+Mr. Willing gazed at the young man in perfect amazement, as did the
+others in the room. Mr. Willing was the first to regain his composure.
+
+“Why?” he asked quietly.
+
+“I can’t go into explanations,” replied the young man hurriedly; “all I
+can do is warn you that it is not safe.”
+
+“And why isn’t it safe?” asked Shirley, now taking a hand in the
+conversation.
+
+“That I cannot tell you, either. But you all know that a state of war
+exists between the countries of Europe.”
+
+“What has that to do with us?” asked Shirley.
+
+“You are asking me hard questions,” said Bristow, “and I cannot answer
+as I would like to. Let it be enough that there is danger because of it.
+And if there should even be no danger aboard the _Yucatan_, it will
+exist in Colon.”
+
+“In Colon?”
+
+“Yes. One week from to-day Colon will no longer be safe!”
+
+“It is my belief you are out of your head, young man,” declared Mr.
+Willing grimly.
+
+Bristow shook his head positively.
+
+“I am telling you facts,” he declared. “I can’t say any more.”
+
+“And why won’t we be safe aboard the _Yucatan_?” demanded Shirley. “The
+ship isn’t going to sink, is it?”
+
+“No, but—”
+
+“No European country will dare to molest it,” declared Dick, “and I can
+see no reason why there should be danger at Colon.”
+
+“I was afraid I couldn’t convince you,” said Bristow. “However, I have
+done my best. Good night.”
+
+He bowed and left the room.
+
+“What do you suppose he is talking about, Dad?” asked Shirley.
+
+“I don’t know,” was the reply, “and I don’t care.”
+
+“All buncombe,” agreed Colonel Ashton.
+
+“Well, I don’t care what it is,” exclaimed Shirley. “We have set our
+hearts on this trip, and we are going to take it. That’s all there is
+about that.”
+
+“Good for you, Shirley,” agreed Mabel.
+
+Dick Stanley was the only member of the party who did not speak. He sat
+quietly in his chair, thinking.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.—ABOARD THE YUCATAN.
+
+
+The _Yucatan_, upon leaving New York, did not head straight for Colon.
+Her route took her down the coast, where she would make several stops.
+The first would be at Savannah, then Jacksonville, and the third, and
+last before touching at Colon, would be Havana, Cuba.
+
+Mr. Willing had selected this vessel for the simple reason that it did
+put in at these southern ports, for he wished to give the girls an
+opportunity of seeing as much as possible on the journey. After rounding
+into the Pacific, following her passage of the Panama Canal, the vessel
+was scheduled to put in at the seaports of several of the Central
+American republics and one or two Mexican ports.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton, Dick and the two girls stood forward on the
+gallery deck of the great ship as she got under way and slowly backed
+out of her slip into the North River.
+
+It was early afternoon, the sun shone brightly and it was very warm. All
+day the city had sweltered beneath the terrible heat, but as the ship
+gradually gathered headway a breeze sprang up and blew refreshingly
+across the deck.
+
+“This is something like it,” declared Mr. Willing, removing his yachting
+cap and passing his handkerchief over his forehead.
+
+The awnings were stretched, and all took the steamer chairs they had
+secured. These they pulled close to the rail, and then gazed off across
+the water.
+
+Directly the Statue of Liberty came into view. The girls gazed at it
+curiously as they passed and headed for the open sea.
+
+Gradually the lofty spires of the great buildings faded from view, and
+then the Statue of Liberty disappeared. To starboard could be seen the
+distant shore of New Jersey, and to port nothing but the broad expanse
+of the Atlantic.
+
+Darkness descended and with it a cooler breeze.
+
+“Time to eat,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+They made their way to the dining room below, where they were seated at
+the captain’s table. The supper was excellent, far beyond Shirley’s
+expectations. The meal over they returned on deck.
+
+Mr. Willing had secured a suite of four rooms well forward on the
+promenade deck, and after enjoying the cooling breeze for some time, all
+made their way there.
+
+The strains of a band now floated to them from the main salon. They made
+their way out. Then the three young people started on a tour of the
+ship. They took in everything with breathless interest.
+
+“This is indeed a floating palace,” commented Shirley.
+
+“Isn’t it though,” agreed Mabel.
+
+Dick was no less enthusiastic in his praise.
+
+After a stroll about they rejoined the two elder men in the salon. Then
+it was that Shirley bethought herself of the fact that young Bristow had
+said he would be aboard.
+
+“I haven’t seen anything of him,” she said.
+
+Neither had the others.
+
+“Perhaps he missed the boat,” said Mabel.
+
+“I’ll have a look at the passenger list,” said Dick.
+
+He did so, and there he saw “Henry Bristow, New York,” and the number of
+his stateroom. He went up and knocked on the door.
+
+“Come in,” called a voice.
+
+Dick entered the room, then started back in surprise.
+
+Bristow lay propped up in bed, reading. Around his head was a white
+bandage. Dick hastened to his side.
+
+“Why, what is the matter?” he exclaimed.
+
+“Accident,” replied Bristow, with a slight smile, and volunteered no
+further information.
+
+Dick did not press him for an explanation. After some little talk, in
+the course of which Bristow said he did not require anything and
+announced that he would be perfectly fit on the morrow, Dick took his
+leave and rejoined the others.
+
+“And how was he hurt?” asked Mr. Willing, after Dick had reported what
+he had learned.
+
+“He didn’t say and I didn’t ask him,” he replied. “But I am sure there
+is something strange about it, sir.”
+
+“I am beginning to think that myself,” agreed Colonel Ashton. “He’s a
+queer one. Now, I wonder why he warned us not to sail on this ship?”
+
+“It’s too deep for me,” declared Dick.
+
+“I have it,” exclaimed Shirley suddenly. “Perhaps he is an agent of one
+of the foreign countries, England or Germany.”
+
+Dick looked at the girl in unfeigned surprise.
+
+“What makes you think that?” he asked.
+
+“I don’t know. I don’t really believe it; I just happened to think of
+it. Wouldn’t it be fun if he was?”
+
+“Well, that all depends,” replied Dick. “It depends on what his business
+aboard would be.”
+
+“But what could it be in such a case?” questioned Mabel.
+
+“Well, it might be lots of things. But I don’t put any stock in such an
+explanation.”
+
+“Nor I,” declared Mr. Willing. “It’s my belief the young man is in
+trouble of some kind, and I’d like to help him out if I could. I like
+him.”
+
+“And so do I,” agreed Mabel.
+
+“To tell the truth, I don’t know whether I do or not,” said Dick slowly.
+“He’s agreeable, and all that; but there is something very peculiar
+about him. I am sure there is something wrong.”
+
+“If I get a good chance, I shall ask him,” declared Mabel.
+
+“You’ll have about the same luck Dad did when he asked him his
+business,” retorted Shirley, “and that wasn’t much.”
+
+“Take my advice, all of you, and let him alone,” remarked Colonel
+Ashton.
+
+“That is good advice, Ashton,” declared Mr. Willing. “But come, it’s
+bedtime and we shall want to be about early in the morning to enjoy some
+of this ocean breeze.”
+
+An hour later all were asleep.
+
+Had they been about they would have seen a strange sight.
+
+On the upper deck aft, as the ship’s bell chimed midnight, three men sat
+in deep conversation. Two of them were strangers, but the third Shirley
+or any of her party would immediately have recognized as Henry Bristow.
+
+And there would also have been something else noticeable. The bandage
+had been removed from his head, nor was there wound nor swelling to show
+why it should have been tied up in the first place.
+
+The three men talked for perhaps fifteen minutes in low whispers and
+then parted, going their several ways.
+
+As he had promised, Bristow was about the ship the following morning,
+but his head was once more bandaged. Mabel, true to her words of the
+night before, seized the first opportunity and asked him how he had been
+injured.
+
+“That,” was the quiet reply, “I cannot say.”
+
+Mabel was highly indignant, and took herself off, leaving the young man
+smiling after her. Then he shrugged his shoulders and walked away.
+
+All morning the sun shone warm and bright, though it was not too hot for
+comfort. It was shortly after noon when the passengers were treated to
+an interesting sight.
+
+Some distance to port came the smoke of another ship, and as it drew
+nearer an air of subdued excitement became apparent on the _Yucatan_.
+
+“Armed cruiser off the port bow, sir!” came the hail from the lookout.
+
+All rushed toward the rail, and stood looking at the large ship of war,
+as she bore down toward them. There was no flag at her masthead, and so
+the passengers were unable to determine her nationality.
+
+“What can she be?” exclaimed Shirley.
+
+“British, I suppose,” was Dick’s answer. “She’ll show her colors
+presently, I guess.”
+
+Dick was right. Five minutes later the British ensign was run up the
+masthead and fluttered in the breeze.
+
+A great cheer broke from most of the passengers aboard the _Yucatan_.
+Shirley and Mabel joined in it.
+
+At that moment Dick caught sight of the face of Bristow, who stood near.
+His lips were compressed, and he scowled fiercely.
+
+“He’s no Englishman, that’s sure,” muttered the young man to himself.
+
+Suddenly, from across the water, came the sound of a big gun, and a
+solid shot struck the water dead ahead of the _Yucatan_.
+
+Immediately her engines were stopped, and the passenger steamer came to
+a stop.
+
+Instantly wild alarm spread over the ship.
+
+“We’ve been fired on,” cried Shirley. “Will they sink us?”
+
+Dick smiled.
+
+“Oh, I guess not,” he replied. “That’s just a signal to heave-to and
+give an account of ourselves.”
+
+“But what business have they stopping an American ship?” exclaimed
+Shirley.
+
+“It is permissible under the laws of war,” explained Dick. “You see, the
+_Yucatan_ might be an enemy flying the American flag. As soon as they
+find out we are all right, they will allow us to proceed.”
+
+“And would we have to stop just the same for a German?”
+
+“Of course.”
+
+“I wouldn’t like that,” declared Shirley. “I don’t mind the English. My
+grandmother was English, you know.”
+
+“Well, I guess my sympathies are a little that way, too,” agreed Dick.
+
+The wireless now began to sputter as messages were exchanged between the
+_Yucatan_ and the British cruiser. The latter had approached close
+enough to make out the _Yucatan_, and now signalled her to proceed on
+her course.
+
+As the big ship of war turned and made off, a second ovation was given
+her by the passengers. Men waved their hats and women their
+handkerchiefs.
+
+Suddenly Shirley seized Dick by the arm, and pointed, whispering:
+
+“Look at that!”
+
+Far aft, Henry Bristow gazed across the water at the British cruiser,
+and Shirley had perceived that there was hate in his eyes. Even as Dick
+looked in the direction Shirley pointed, Bristow raised a fist and shook
+it fiercely at the receding war vessel, while strange words issued from
+between his lips.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.—SHIRLEY LENDS AID.
+
+
+“Look, Mabel, did you see that woman steal that bolt of silk?”
+
+It was Shirley who spoke. They stood among the crowd that thronged the
+largest department store in Savannah, Ga. The _Yucatan_ had put into
+Savannah early that morning, and learning that the vessel would not get
+under way again until late in the afternoon, Shirley and Mabel had gone
+uptown to purchase a few souvenirs of the Georgia city.
+
+It was just after entering the store that Shirley’s attention was
+attracted by the peculiar actions of a young woman who darted somewhat
+furtively from one counter to another. While the attention of the clerks
+was given to customers, Shirley had seen the woman slip a bolt of
+expensive silk from the counter and hide it under a long flowing cape,
+which she wore in spite of the heat.
+
+Mabel shook her head negatively in response to Shirley’s question.
+
+“Which one?” she asked.
+
+Shirley pointed to the figure of the woman who was now gazing at a
+pretty array of expensive laces. Both girls watched her carefully; and
+directly, as the crowd about her became more dense, they saw her hand go
+stealthily forth and take several small bolts of the high-priced
+material.
+
+“Well what do you think of that?” demanded Mabel. “I have heard of such
+things, but I never expected to see it. What shall we do?”
+
+“Nothing,” replied Shirley decidedly. “It’s none of our business.”
+
+“But won’t the poor clerks have to make good the loss?”
+
+“I don’t know about that. But if we get mixed up in it we are likely to
+gain too much notoriety. Let’s move away from here.”
+
+They pushed their way through the crowd when Shirley came suddenly into
+violent contact with a figure hurrying from the opposite direction. The
+latter drew back and lifted his cap.
+
+“Miss Willing,” he said. “I beg your pardon. I didn’t look where I was
+going.”
+
+Shirley glanced up in surprise at hearing her name spoken. Then she
+recognized the figure with whom she had collided.
+
+“Why, Mr. Bristow,” she said. “I thought I left you aboard the
+_Yucatan_?”
+
+“I came ashore to do a little shopping, as you young ladies call it,”
+replied Bristow with a laugh. “I shall have to hurry on.”
+
+He lifted his cap and was gone.
+
+The two girls continued to stroll about through the store, eyeing the
+bargains appreciatively.
+
+“Well, I guess we have seen enough,” said Mabel finally. “We may as well
+return to the ship.”
+
+As they started toward the door they became aware of the sounds of
+confusion behind them. For a moment they hesitated, then their curiosity
+overcame them and they turned back.
+
+Far down the aisle a large crowd had gathered. The girls could hear the
+loud tones of one of the floor walkers calling for the store detective.
+Shirley and Mabel elbowed their way through the crowd, and presently
+were able to see what was going on.
+
+Shirley uttered an exclamation of amazement and clutched Mabel by the
+arm.
+
+“Look at that!” she cried in a low voice.
+
+And well might she have been amazed. For there, in the center of the
+crowd, his arm grasped tightly by the big floor walker, was Henry
+Bristow.
+
+His face was red and he was plainly very angry. However, he was making
+no effort to release himself. He controlled himself with an effort and
+spoke.
+
+“I tell you you are making a mistake,” he said quietly, and his voice
+carried to the two girls.
+
+“Is that so?” sneered the floor walker. “So you deny you are a
+shop-lifter, eh? Well, I didn’t suppose you would admit it. How do you
+account for the possession of this valuable piece of lace the clerk saw
+you getting away with?”
+
+“It must have caught on my coat,” was the reply. “I didn’t try to steal
+it.”
+
+“You didn’t, eh? We’ll see as soon as the house detective arrives. I
+reckon you have plenty of stuff stowed away in your pockets.”
+
+“Well, I haven’t,” declared Bristow angrily. “You’re going to be sorry
+for this before you get through.”
+
+“Well what do you think of that?” demanded Mabel, who had stood with
+open mouth during this conversation.
+
+“I think that he is innocent,” declared Shirley.
+
+She glanced quickly around the store, and as she did so her eyes fell
+upon the woman she had so recently seen appropriating articles from the
+counter.
+
+“There goes the woman who did it,” she declared, pointing.
+
+Mabel looked and nodded her head.
+
+The woman was coming directly toward them, pushing her way through the
+crowd vigorously. Shirley stepped forward and barred her progress.
+
+At the same moment Shirley raised her voice and called out:
+
+“That man is innocent, Mr. Floorwalker. Here is the shop-lifter.”
+
+The woman again tried to push by Shirley, but the latter maneuvered so
+as to be directly in front of her at every step.
+
+Shirley’s words caused a commotion. Willing hands darted out and seized
+the woman, and she was taken before the man who still grasped young
+Bristow by the arm.
+
+Shirley and Mabel pushed their way forward.
+
+“I saw this woman steal a bolt of silk and some laces,” declared
+Shirley. “I would have said nothing about it had not Mr. Bristow, whom I
+know, been accused.”
+
+“It isn’t true!” cried the woman. “The girl is in the plot with the
+man.”
+
+Shirley’s face grew red.
+
+“I am not!” she declared. “This woman is guilty. She put the things
+under that long cape.”
+
+The floor walker was plainly mystified. He glanced from one to the
+other.
+
+“Well, it will do no harm to have a look,” he declared. He turned to the
+woman. “Will you remove your cape, madam?”
+
+The woman drew back, and pulled the garment closer about her.
+
+“No, I won’t!” she declared, “I—”
+
+“Very well,” said the floor walker. “I shall have the floor matron
+search you.”
+
+He turned and called to one of the clerks. But the woman waited for no
+more. With a single move she took off her cape, and threw it to the
+floor.
+
+“There,” she said, throwing out her arms, “you may see that I have
+nothing.”
+
+“I saw her take them,” declared Shirley, looking at the woman in
+surprise, for she could not see a sign of a stolen article.
+
+A frown gathered on the floor walker’s face as he glanced at Shirley.
+
+“This looks rather bad for you.” he said to her pointedly.
+
+Shirley took a step back.
+
+“What do you mean?” she asked in no little alarm.
+
+“It seems that the lady is telling the truth. What was your object in
+accusing her?”
+
+“I tell you I saw her take them,” declared Shirley again.
+
+The floor walker shrugged his shoulders.
+
+It was Mabel who finally cleared up the situation. The woman’s cape
+still lay on the floor where she had thrown it. Mabel stooped down to
+pick it up, and as she did so the woman also snatched at it.
+
+But Mabel was the quicker of the two and captured the garment. Quickly
+she turned it wrong side out, and as she did so there was a gasp from
+the crowd.
+
+For the inside of the coat was literally filled with secret pockets.
+Mabel thrust her hand in and pulled out the bolt of silk. She held it
+above her head.
+
+“Here it is!” she cried.
+
+“I bought and paid for that,” sputtered the angry woman.
+
+One after another Mabel now produced other articles of value, which she
+exposed to the view of the crowd. And in each case the woman’s
+explanation was the same:
+
+“I paid for that!”
+
+But the floor walker was not to be fooled, nor was the manager of the
+store, who came up at that moment. The former released his hold on young
+Bristow and made him an abject apology.
+
+One of the women detectives was called, and the shop-lifter turned over
+to her. Then the manager addressed Shirley and Mabel.
+
+“I owe you two young ladies a debt of gratitude,” he said. “This
+shop-lifting has been going on for a month or more and we have lost
+heavily. Thanks to you I believe we have the culprit at last. Without
+your assistance she would have escaped.”
+
+Shirley and Mabel acknowledged this praise with slight inclinations of
+the heads, and then Shirley spoke to Young Bristow, who stood near.
+
+“Are you going back to the boat, Mr. Bristow? We shall be glad of your
+company.”
+
+The young man accepted this invitation, and the three made their way
+from the store.
+
+“I can’t thank you enough, either of you,” he declared as they walked
+along. “I was in a ticklish position, and but for your assistance might
+have been put to no end of trouble.”
+
+“How did you happen to be accused?” asked Shirley.
+
+“Why, I was walking through the aisle, and because of the crowd I was
+shoved against the counter. A piece of lace caught on a button of my
+coat, and I dragged it with me as I went by. Then the girl behind the
+counter cried out that some one had stolen something. The floor walker
+saw the lace caught in my coat and collared me. That’s all.”
+
+“I see,” said Shirley, and added with a smile: “You certainly did look
+funny there!”
+
+“Did I? Well, I didn’t feel very funny. I was afraid I would be held
+long enough to make me miss the ship, and I can’t afford to do that.”
+
+“Then your business in Colon is very important?” asked Mabel.
+
+Young Bristow looked at her in silence for some moments, and Mabel grew
+red as she thought she was to be rebuffed again. But she wasn’t. Bristow
+finally answered her question.
+
+“Very important,” he said quietly.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.—MABEL SHOWS HER COURAGE.
+
+
+“By the way,” said Shirley as they walked along, “how is your wound? I
+see you have removed the bandage.”
+
+A startled expression flitted across the young man’s face, but neither
+girl perceived it.
+
+“It’s much better,” he made answer. “Not even a scar left. It didn’t
+amount to much, after all.”
+
+Fifteen minutes later they were back aboard the _Yucatan_, where Shirley
+related their experiences to others of their party.
+
+“I’ll have to keep a closer watch on you two,” declared Mr. Willing.
+“Every time you get away by yourselves you run into trouble. And you
+won’t always come out of it so easily.”
+
+Several hours later the big steamship moved majestically out of the
+harbor and soon was headed down the coast once more. She came to anchor
+again the following morning at Jacksonville, the last American port at
+which she would touch until she reached San Diego, California. The
+Willing party went ashore again, but this time, true to his word, Mr.
+Willing would not permit the girls to wander away by themselves.
+
+As they strolled about, Shirley became suddenly ill. She knew it was
+nothing serious, brought on probably by the excessive heat. Therefore
+she informed the others that she was going back aboard the ship, as she
+wished to lie down. Mabel agreed to go with her.
+
+The fathers saw the two girls into a taxicab, which soon dropped them at
+the pier, where they immediately went to their suite.
+
+Shirley felt much better now that she was out of the sun, and lying down
+on the sofa picked up a book and commenced to read. Mabel sat down at a
+little desk to write a letter.
+
+In spite of the cooling breeze made by the electric fan in the room, it
+was still rather warm, and Mabel left the outer door open to get what
+breeze they could from over the water. Mabel was in the first room, and
+Shirley in the one beyond.
+
+Suddenly Mabel heard footsteps running down the deck toward their suite.
+She glanced up idly, wondering why any one should put himself to so much
+exertion on such a hot day, and even as she looked up a figure darted
+into the room and closed the door behind him.
+
+Mabel jumped quickly to her feet and faced the newcomer, who, she now
+perceived, held a revolver in his hand.
+
+Mabel was not frightened by the sight of the weapon, for she was not
+unacquainted with the use of firearms and had faced more than one
+dangerous situation; but as the man turned and faced her, she uttered a
+cry of amazement.
+
+The man was Henry Bristow.
+
+Bristow, who had not perceived that the room was occupied, turned at the
+sound of Mabel’s voice, his revolver half raised. At sight of Mabel he
+dropped his arm, and removed his cap.
+
+“Please pardon me for this intrusion,” he said quietly. “I did not know
+the cabin was occupied nor whose it was. I just happened to see the door
+open, and I slipped in.”
+
+“What is the matter?” asked Mabel, who realized that something must be
+wrong.
+
+“Oh, nothing,” was the reply.
+
+Before Mabel could utter another word, there was a loud knock on the
+closed door.
+
+Shirley, in response to the knock, came in from the next room. She took
+in the situation at a glance, but did not betray her surprise by so much
+as an exclamation. She advanced quickly toward Mabel and young Bristow.
+
+“What is wrong?” she asked in a low voice.
+
+Bristow waved his revolver toward the door.
+
+“They want me,” he said. “I can’t allow you girls to be drawn into this,
+so I shall go out.”
+
+A dark expression passed over his face, and his hand tightened on the
+revolver. Shirley became alarmed.
+
+She motioned him to the room beyond.
+
+“You go in there,” she said. “No one will bother you.”
+
+For a moment Bristow hesitated, then he bowed and passed in. As he went
+by her, Mabel reached out and relieved him of his revolver. Bristow
+started to protest, then changed his mind and said nothing.
+
+Mabel motioned to Shirley.
+
+“You go in too,” she said. “I’ll stay here.”
+
+Shirley obeyed without a word. Then Mabel walked to the little center
+table, and put the revolver in the drawer.
+
+Came another sharp knock on the door. Mabel advanced and threw it open.
+
+Three men stood in the doorway, and all removed their hats at sight of
+her.
+
+“What is it?” demanded Mabel.
+
+“We are searching for a man named Von Blusen, who is aboard this ship.
+We trailed him down the deck here, and he disappeared. Have you seen
+him?”
+
+“I know no one by that name,” returned Mabel.
+
+“He’s a young fellow,” went on the spokesman of the three, “and a very
+smooth-spoken chap. All the other cabins are locked but this one. I
+happen to know that this door was open a few minutes ago. I thought he
+might possibly have come in here?”
+
+He looked at Mabel inquiringly.
+
+“I know no one by that name,” declared the girl again.
+
+“Perhaps you know him by some other name, then?”
+
+Mabel did not reply.
+
+The man became suspicious.
+
+“I am afraid we shall have to search this cabin, miss,” he said. “I am
+not convinced he is not in here.”
+
+“What is it you want with this man?” asked Mabel, her curiosity getting
+the better of her.
+
+“Well, I don’t mind telling you. Von Blusen is a German and I have been
+tipped off that he is up to some mischief, I don’t know just what. My
+orders are to take him ashore and turn him over to the U. S.
+authorities.”
+
+“And who are you?” demanded Mabel.
+
+“Me? Why, I’m a United States special officer.”
+
+He threw back his coat and exposed a badge, which he covered hurriedly.
+Mabel, therefore, did not see it clearly. Something seemed to tell her,
+however, that the man was not telling the truth.
+
+She stepped back quickly to the little center table, and as the first
+man advanced after her, she quickly opened the drawer and produced
+Bristow’s revolver, which she levelled at the three men.
+
+“You can’t come in here,” she said quietly.
+
+The foremost man drew back, as did the others.
+
+“But, miss,” said the spokesman, “we must search the cabin. I am sure
+Von Blusen came in here. Will you deny it?”
+
+“I don’t have to deny it,” declared Mabel angrily. “If you are United
+States officers, as you claim, you will have some means of
+identification.”
+
+“I showed you my badge,” said the man.
+
+“Yes, and you were careful that I didn’t get a good look at it.”
+
+“But we must make the search.”
+
+“Then you must have an order. I know that much. I know you have to have
+a piece of paper, or something—a warrant I believe it is called.”
+
+“I haven’t any warrant now,” was the reply, “but I am going to make the
+search just the same.”
+
+He stepped forward, but Mabel covered him with her revolver.
+
+“You have come in here against my command,” she said quietly, “and I
+should be perfectly justified in shooting you, as I would a burglar.”
+
+The man sought to temporize.
+
+“Now, see here miss—” he began.
+
+Mabel took a step forward. She was growing angry.
+
+“You just get right out of here,” she exclaimed.
+
+The man drew back a step and scratched his head perplexedly.
+
+“Miss,” he said, “you are making a big mistake to shield this man. I
+tell you he is plotting mischief which may involve the United States in
+war. We must have him before the ship sails.”
+
+“Well, you won’t get him in here,” declared the girl.
+
+Again the man hesitated, then seemed on the point of moving forward
+again.
+
+“I warn you for the last time to get out of here,” said Mabel very
+quietly.
+
+Once more her revolver came to bear on the man, and he drew back,
+throwing up his hands with a gesture of dismay. Then he turned to his
+companions.
+
+“What can we do against that?” he asked. “We can’t use a girl roughly,
+and if the ship gets beyond the three-mile limit, we can’t get him till
+we reach Colon.”
+
+“Guess we’ll have to wait then,” said one of the others.
+
+“Yep, guess we will.”
+
+The leader turned to Mabel and made her a low bow.
+
+“I’m sorry you interfered with us,” he said. “You’ll find before long
+that you have done wrong.”
+
+“Perhaps I shall,” said Mabel; “but I couldn’t permit you to invade my
+cabin.”
+
+“Tell you what, Tim,” said one of the men, “we’ll just camp out here and
+get him when he comes out. He’s likely to come out before we sail.”
+
+“Good idea,” agreed the leader. “We’ll do it.”
+
+Again he made a low bow to Mabel and followed his men out.
+
+“Sorry to have troubled you,” he muttered as he took his departure.
+
+Shirley and Bristow now came in from the other room.
+
+“You did splendidly, Miss Ashton,” declared Bristow warmly. “I was
+afraid you would allow them to enter.”
+
+Before Mabel could reply there came the sound of voices outside. One,
+raised in anger, was that of Mr. Willing. A moment later, followed by
+Colonel Ashton and Dick, he entered the room.
+
+His gaze fell upon Henry Bristow.
+
+“So,” he growled, “it’s you they’re after, eh?”
+
+“Yes, sir,” returned Bristow quietly.
+
+“Well, you sit down over there, young man,” said Mr. Willing, pointing
+to a chair. “I’m going to tell you a few things, and I don’t care
+whether you like them or not.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.—THEIR FIRST QUARREL.
+
+
+Shirley and Mabel glanced at Mr. Willing in surprise. Young Bristow took
+the seat indicated, and the others also sat down.
+
+“First,” said Mr. Willing to Bristow, “I am going to ask you a question
+or two. If you refuse to answer, I shall, of course, draw my own
+conclusions.”
+
+The young man nodded.
+
+“Proceed, sir,” he said.
+
+“All right. Now, in the first place, are you connected, in any capacity,
+with the German government?”
+
+“That I cannot answer,” was the reply.
+
+“Very good! Now, then, are you aboard this ship at the command of the
+German government?”
+
+“I cannot answer that question, either, sir.”
+
+“Suit yourself. Is it not a fact that those with whom you come in
+contact—those who seem to be your friends—are in danger because of
+their associations with you?”
+
+“I suppose you are right, sir.”
+
+“Just as I expected,” declared Mr. Willing. “Now I’ve got this to say.
+Already you have been the means of getting my daughter and the colonel’s
+daughter into your scrapes. They have come to your assistance twice.
+Also Dick has been with you on one adventure. You will admit that, of
+course?”
+
+“Of course, sir.”
+
+“Good. Then here is my ultimatum: I want you to keep away from me and
+mine. I don’t want you to cross this threshold again; and I don’t want
+you to speak to any of us should you chance to encounter us. Do I make
+myself plain?”
+
+“Perfectly, sir,” replied Bristow rising from his chair, his face pale.
+
+“I am glad I do,” declared Mr. Willing. “I haven’t any use for a spy, be
+he German or English. Now you can get out of here.”
+
+Without a word Bristow moved toward the door. But Mabel leaped forward
+and barred his path. She turned to Mr. Willing.
+
+“Surely you wouldn’t send him out to be captured?” she exclaimed. “Those
+men are waiting for him out there.”
+
+“That is none of our affair,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+“I agree with Mabel in that,” declared Shirley. “If he goes out before
+we are beyond the three-mile limit, he will be taken prisoner.”
+
+“And if he isn’t there is no telling what may happen,” commented Mr.
+Willing.
+
+“Dad,” said Shirley, “please let him stay until we have passed the
+three-mile limit? Please!”
+
+Mr. Willing hesitated.
+
+“Well, I agree,” he said at length.
+
+Bristow spoke to Mr. Willing.
+
+“I shall stay, sir,” he said, “but it is because I must avoid capture if
+it is possible. Otherwise I wouldn’t stay in the same room with you.”
+
+Mr. Willing smiled. He didn’t mind that kind of talk, but not so
+Shirley. She sprang to her feet and faced Bristow angrily.
+
+“How dare you speak to my father like that?” she demanded. “How dare
+you?”
+
+Bristow turned his head away, and made no reply.
+
+Mabel quickly came to the support of Bristow.
+
+“And why shouldn’t he?” she asked. “He hasn’t done anything and your
+father was very mean.”
+
+“Why, Mabel,” exclaimed Shirley in surprise.
+
+“I mean it,” declared Mabel. “Your father was mean.”
+
+“He couldn’t be too mean to a German,” exclaimed Shirley.
+
+“You people make me tired,” declared Mabel angrily. “Why are you forever
+jumping on the Germans? They are in the right and they are going to
+win.”
+
+“They are not!” This from Shirley. “The English are going to win, and I
+hope they do!”
+
+“And I hope the Germans win,” declared Mabel.
+
+“Shirley! Mabel!”
+
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton had now taken a hand in the conversation.
+But both girls were too angry to heed them.
+
+“And just because this man is a German you are all against him. If he
+were English you would be shaking hands with him.”
+
+Mabel was losing control of herself.
+
+“Why, Mabel,” said Shirley. “You know that is not true.”
+
+“I know it is true,” declared the girl.
+
+Colonel Ashton took her firmly by the arm.
+
+“Mabel, I am surprised at you,” he said. “Go to your room.”
+
+“It’s Shirley’s room, it’s not mine,” cried Mabel.
+
+Shirley advanced toward her friend.
+
+“Mabel, what do you mean?” she asked quietly.
+
+“You know what I mean. You told me I wasn’t telling the truth.”
+
+Shirley compressed her lips and stepped back.
+
+Mr. Willing took a hand in the conversation.
+
+“Unless this foolishness ceases we shall leave the boat at Havana and
+return home immediately,” he said quietly. “I will have none of this.”
+
+“I don’t care,” declared Shirley, also now very angry.
+
+“Neither do I,” this from Mabel.
+
+“Shirley, go to your room,” ordered Mr. Willing. “I am your father and I
+will be obeyed.”
+
+Shirley glanced at her father’s stern face, and obeyed. She knew that
+when he looked like that he was not to be trifled with.
+
+“Mabel, you go with her,” said Colonel Ashton quietly.
+
+Mabel hesitated.
+
+“Do you hear me?” asked the colonel.
+
+Mabel also realized that she had gone too far. She made her way after
+Shirley.
+
+Inside their room the girls did not speak to each other. In the heart of
+each there was a peculiar feeling, and each knew that, in a measure, she
+was to blame. But neither was ready to give in yet.
+
+It was their first quarrel.
+
+Outside Mr. Willing turned to young Bristow.
+
+“This,” he said, “is your doing. And when you once set foot outside this
+cabin, don’t you ever cross my path again.”
+
+The _Yucatan_ was under way now, and from the window Mr. Willing could
+see the three men still waiting on the outside. But at last they took
+their departure and Mr. Willing knew they had passed beyond the
+three-mile limit. He turned again to Bristow.
+
+“Now Bristow or Von Blusen or whatever your name is,” he said, “get
+out.”
+
+Bristow turned a dark look upon him.
+
+“You have insulted me,” he said, “and you shall pay for it.”
+
+“I couldn’t insult you, you little whipper-snapper,” said Mr. Willing
+angrily. “Are you going to get out of here?”
+
+“When I’ve had my say,” declared the young man angrily. “If it were not
+that I am on important business I would chastise you right now.”
+
+“Is it because you have important business or because you are a child?”
+asked Mr. Willing smiling.
+
+Bristow took a threatening step forward, but now Dick took a hand.
+
+“That’s enough of this,” he said sternly, and putting forth a hand he
+pushed Bristow back.
+
+The latter’s face turned a dull red, and he struck at Dick, who promptly
+slapped him across the face. Dick also was angry now.
+
+“You shall pay for that blow,” shouted Bristow. “I can’t fight you now,
+but when I have completed my work I shall seek you out.”
+
+“I won’t be very hard to find,” declared Dick. “Now get out.”
+
+He took the infuriated Bristow by the neck and the bottom of the coat
+and ran him out the door. Then he closed it after him.
+
+“Rather a fiery young man, that,” remarked Colonel Ashton grimly.
+
+“Rather,” agreed Mr. Willing dryly. He turned to the other room and
+called: “Shirley! Mabel!”
+
+A moment later the two girls came forth. Mr. Willing looked at them
+severely for some moments before he spoke.
+
+“You should both be ashamed of yourselves,” he said at last. “The idea
+of such foolishness. Why, you have never quarreled before.”
+
+“And there will be no more of it,” declared Colonel Ashton grimly. “At
+the next sign of trouble we shall turn right around and go home.”
+
+“Well, Mabel started it,” declared Shirley.
+
+“I did not, you started it,” exclaimed Mabel.
+
+“Shirley!” said Mr. Willing.
+
+“Mabel!” exclaimed Colonel Ashton.
+
+The girls became silent, but continued to glare at each other.
+
+Then, suddenly, a smile broke over Shirley’s face. Her father breathed
+more freely. Even Colonel Ashton looked at the two girls eagerly.
+
+Then Shirley advanced toward Mabel and held out her hand.
+
+“I’m sorry for what I said, Mabel,” she declared earnestly.
+
+For a moment Mabel hesitated, but for a moment only. Then she jumped
+quickly forward, and ignoring her friend’s outstretched hand, threw her
+arms around her and broke into tears.
+
+“It was all my fault,” she sobbed. “You didn’t say anything.”
+
+“Yes I did, too,” said Shirley. “It was as much my fault as it was
+yours.”
+
+“No it wasn’t.”
+
+“Yes it was.”
+
+“It was not.”
+
+The two girls drew back from each other.
+
+“I say it was,” declared Shirley.
+
+“And I say it wasn’t,” declared Mabel.
+
+“What is the matter with you two?” demanded Mr. Willing, stepping
+between them.
+
+“Nothing, Dad,” said Shirley, smiling again. She turned again to Mabel.
+
+“I’m sorry,” she said quietly.
+
+“And so am I,” said Mabel.
+
+Once more they fell into each other’s arms, laughing happily. Then, arm
+in arm, they turned and made their way to their own rooms, absolutely
+ignoring the presence of the others.
+
+Dick, who had felt decidedly uncomfortable during this scene, grinned
+foolishly. Colonel Ashton laughed aloud, and Mr. Willing smiled.
+
+“Funny things happen, my boy,” exclaimed the latter, slapping Dick on
+the back. “You learn something every minute.”
+
+And in the other room Mabel said:
+
+“We shall never, never quarrel again.”
+
+“Never!” agreed Shirley.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.—ADRIFT.
+
+
+In the distance the Cuban city of Havana was slipping slowly from sight.
+Aft on the promenade deck Shirley, Mabel and the others of the party,
+together with many other passengers, were casting last looks at the
+island metropolis.
+
+The sun was just sinking below the horizon, but there were still several
+hours before darkness would fall. The view was indeed picturesque and
+the passengers were impressed with it.
+
+The steamship _Yucatan_ was now on the last leg of her journey toward
+Colon.
+
+In the main salon a crowd of men had gathered. On the upper deck, the
+gallery deck, the promenade deck and the main deck they had also
+gathered in knots. They blocked the main staircase and the exits from
+the engine room below.
+
+A group somewhat larger than the rest had assembled about the captain’s
+cabin. A close observer would have noticed that each man among these
+different groups wore a peculiar little button in the lapel of his coat.
+
+Each group was silent. It appeared that they were waiting for something.
+Now a young man appeared and spoke to the first group holding his open
+watch in his hand. Then he passed on to the next, then to the next,
+until he had approached all. Then he took his place with the others near
+the bridge, and waited, watch in hand.
+
+Suddenly he pulled a little whistle from his pocket, put it to his lips,
+waited a moment, and then blew a shrill blast, that penetrated to the
+farthest part of the ship.
+
+Instantly the various groups of men wearing the button of peculiar
+design came to action.
+
+The passengers on the promenade deck, the Willing party among them,
+found themselves under the muzzles of many revolvers. On the gallery,
+the deck, the main salon, the grand stairway a like condition prevailed.
+
+Only the men who guarded the exit from the engine and boiler rooms were
+inactive, but these stood with drawn revolvers.
+
+A dozen men swarmed from the bridge into the wheel house, where they
+confronted the pilot, the Captain, the first and second officers, who
+chanced to be there together. Officers in other parts of the ship also
+had been held up.
+
+The surprise had been complete. The _Yucatan_ was at the mercy of this
+army of conspirators, whoever they chanced to be.
+
+Shirley and Mabel had eyed the strange proceedings upon their section of
+the ship with no less amazement than the rest of the passengers. Mr.
+Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick were equally astonished.
+
+“What is it, a wholesale hold-up?” demanded the colonel.
+
+“Worse, I’m afraid,” declared Mr. Willing.
+
+“I know!” exclaimed Shirley suddenly. “Mr. Bristow is concerned in
+this.”
+
+“My goodness! I believe you are right Shirley,” declared Mabel.
+
+“I know I am right,” returned Shirley positively. “This is why he sailed
+on the _Yucatan_.”
+
+In the meantime the captors of the vessel had relieved all on board of
+whatever weapons they had. They had made a systematic search of the
+cabins, while some of their number kept the crew and passengers covered.
+Of the many aboard the ship the only ones who did not know what had
+happened were the engine crew and stokers.
+
+The wireless had been among the first points seized, and the operator
+had had no opportunity of sending a message.
+
+And now a young man moved about among the passengers, assuring them that
+there was no danger so long as they kept quiet. This young man came aft
+on the promenade deck where the Willing party stood.
+
+Even as Shirley had surmised, he was Henry Bristow.
+
+He smiled as he approached them.
+
+“Well,” growled Mr. Willing, “I see you have put the thing through.”
+
+“Part of it sir, part of it,” was the reply. “The rest is to come.”
+
+“What are you going to do now, Mr. Bristow?” asked Mabel.
+
+The latter smiled at her.
+
+“Captain Von Blusen, if you please, Miss Ashton,” he said, “I am no
+longer Henry Bristow, but Captain Friederich Von Blusen, of His Imperial
+Majesty’s service.”
+
+“And what are you going to do with the ship?” asked Shirley.
+
+“Why, we shall do a little cruising,” was the reply. “We have
+established a naval base off the coast of Cuba, but we have no ships on
+this side of the Atlantic. Therefore we must have ships. This is the
+first.”
+
+“And what are you going to do with us, captain?” asked Mabel.
+
+“Ah, that is the hard part,” was the reply, “but, before starting, we
+came to a conclusion, though none of the passengers is likely to be
+pleased. We shall set you adrift in small boats.”
+
+The others staggered back in dismay.
+
+“Impossible,” declared Mr. Willing. “Surely you are not barbarians.”
+
+“The law of necessity must be obeyed,” replied the captain.
+
+He took his departure.
+
+“The cold-blooded scoundrel,” declared Colonel Ashton. “This is what we
+get for helping him to escape.”
+
+“And that is my fault,” declared Mabel.
+
+“Well, there is no use talking about it now,” said Dick. “It’s too
+late.”
+
+An hour later the new crew began getting out the boats, and all the
+passengers provided themselves with life preservers. Fortunately, the
+weather was calm and the sea smooth and there was little likelihood of a
+storm at this time of year.
+
+With everything in readiness, Captain Von Blusen once more approached
+the Willing party, and drew Mabel slightly to one side in spite of the
+protests of the others.
+
+“Miss Ashton,” he said, “in your cabin the other day you spoke of your
+sympathies to the German cause. Now I shall tell you something, for you
+have done much for me. Advise the others to make no attempt to reach
+Colon, should they be picked up.”
+
+“And why not?” demanded Shirley.
+
+The captain hesitated.
+
+“Well, there is no harm in telling you,” he said at last. “Of course,
+you may not know that Germany is trying to bring the United States into
+this war on her side. We have at last found a way. Just off Colon are
+several Japanese warships. We shall near them unobserved, and signal by
+wireless that a certain thing must be done, representing ourselves as
+one of the Japanese battleships.
+
+“Naturally, we shall be refused permission. Now we have a new invention
+that would enable us to destroy Colon from a distance, and in our
+message we shall threaten this unless the supposed Japanese demand is
+granted. Do you understand?”
+
+Mabel nodded her head slowly. She was beyond words.
+
+“And when the demand is refused,” continued the captain “we shall use
+some of this new explosive. That will mean war between Japan and the
+United States, and therefore, England also, as she is Japan’s ally. Do
+you see?”
+
+“Yes, I see,” said Mabel quietly.
+
+“And what do you think of the plan?”
+
+“I think it is contemptible,” declared Mabel.
+
+“But, but—” began the captain.
+
+“I don’t care to hear any more,” said Mabel. “But you will not succeed,
+I am sure of that. You can not succeed.”
+
+She turned on her heel and made her way back to the others, the captain
+standing as if rooted to the deck as he stared after her.
+
+Mabel turned the matter over in her mind. She felt certain that the
+captain had been boasting, and the more she thought it over the more she
+became convinced of it. Therefore, she decided to say nothing about it
+to the others.
+
+Under the muzzles of the revolvers of the captors of the big steamship,
+captain, officers, crew and passengers now took their places in the
+small boats, and were lowered over the side.
+
+Each boat was well stocked with provisions and water, for the Germans
+had no mind to set their prisoners adrift and let them starve or perish
+of thirst.
+
+The shore of Cuba was not far away, and, with steady rowing by the men,
+it would be possible for them to reach there within twelve hours.
+Besides, there was always the chance they would be picked up by a
+passing vessel.
+
+Fortunately, the passenger list was not large. The bulk of it had been
+made up of the men who had later captured the ship. Therefore, officers,
+passengers and crew included, there were not more than three hundred set
+adrift.
+
+The engine room crew had been impressed into service by the Germans.
+
+The Willing party found themselves in the boat with the captain and
+perhaps a dozen other passengers. As the boat struck the water, and the
+men began to row away from the big steamship at the captain’s command,
+Shirley and Mabel were badly frightened.
+
+In spite of the cheering words spoken by their fathers, Dick and other
+male passengers, they did not bear up very well. As they looked first in
+one direction and then the other and saw nothing but water, they broke
+into tears. The small boat looked very small indeed to be at large upon
+the water.
+
+Presently all the boats were launched, and rowed some distance from the
+steamer. There they stopped as a sudden blast signified that the big
+ship was about to get under way and leave them.
+
+It began to grow dark. The electric lights aboard the large vessel
+glowed suddenly, and slowly the brilliantly lighted floating palace made
+off in the gathering darkness.
+
+As it went away and left them to the mercies of the sea, cries of
+anguish, despair and condemnation were hurled after the men who had thus
+set the passengers and crew adrift. Women sobbed, and men stood up in
+the boats and shook their fists after the steamship _Yucatan_.
+
+And then the great ship disappeared from sight. The men in the small
+boats renewed their work at the oars, and the boats moved toward the
+distant Cuban coast.
+
+Adding to the fearfulness of their condition, darkness descended upon
+them like a pall.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.—COLON.
+
+
+At a word from Mr. Willing, after several hours of rowing, Shirley and
+Mabel cuddled up in their end of the boat and tried to sleep; but this
+they found impossible, and all through the night they gazed out over the
+dark waters.
+
+Here and there the lights in the other boats were visible, but before
+morning they had lost sight of these. When the first faint streaks of
+dawn appeared in the east there was not another boat to be seen. They
+had become separated in the night.
+
+The almost twenty passengers in the little craft ate of the food that
+had been provided and drank of the water. Thus refreshed, and with the
+sun now appearing above the horizon, their predicament did not seem as
+serious as it had during the blackness of the night.
+
+There was not an object in sight to break the monotony of the water, and
+the boat rocked gently on the easy swell of the sea. The men bent to the
+oars again and sent the little craft skimming through the water.
+
+Came a cry from the man at the rudder, and the eyes of the others
+followed his gaze toward the distant horizon. They beheld a faint cloud
+in the otherwise clear sky.
+
+“Steamer!” cried the first man.
+
+The cloud approached nearer and at last the outline of a ship, appearing
+very small at that distance, could be made out. It was headed on a
+course that would bring it almost directly in the path of the smaller
+boat.
+
+As the hull of the vessel grew larger by its approach, occasional cheers
+broke from the lips of those in the little craft. So far it was
+impossible to tell whether the castaways had been sighted or not; but as
+the big ship neared them—now scarcely more than a mile away—the shrill
+blast of the steamer’s whistle split the air. The small boat with its
+passengers had been discovered. The passengers raised another cheer.
+
+Rapidly the large vessel bore down on them, and the little craft bobbed
+swiftly toward it. At last they came alongside.
+
+“Ladies first!” cried the captain of the _Yucatan_.
+
+Shirley and Mabel were the first over the rail, where they stood
+awaiting the arrival of the others.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick were the last to go aboard, and no
+sooner were the refugees all on deck than the big vessel resumed her
+course. The captain motioned them to his cabin.
+
+The ship upon which they now found themselves proved to be the
+_Reliance_, with a cargo of freight from New Orleans for Colon.
+
+This the captain explained when he learned where the erstwhile refugees
+were bound.
+
+“We can’t offer you the same accommodations you had aboard the
+_Yucatan_,” he said, “but you are welcome to the best we have.”
+
+“And we are indeed glad to get it, captain,” Shirley spoke up.
+
+“No doubt, no doubt,” smiled the captain. “All night in an open boat is
+no pleasure trip, even if this is the month of June,” and he ordered
+them assigned quarters forward.
+
+While by no means as large and pretentious as those on the _Yucatan_,
+the cabins were nevertheless clean and comfortable.
+
+“We can thank our stars that we were fortunate enough to be picked up so
+soon,” declared Dick.
+
+“What can have become of the other boats?” asked Mabel.
+
+“Probably reached the Cuban shore,” replied Colonel Ashton. “We are
+doubtless the only ones that lost our course. The others more than
+likely stuck close together.”
+
+“I hope they are all safe,” declared Shirley.
+
+“I am sure they are,” returned her father.
+
+“Now,” said Colonel Ashton, “the thing to be considered is, what to do
+when we reach Colon. Shall we take another steamer and continue our
+course, or shall we turn about and go home?”
+
+“We don’t want to go home, Dad,” exclaimed Shirley. “You won’t give up
+the trip to San Francisco, will you?”
+
+“No, I think not,” was the reply. “We can replenish our wardrobes in
+Colon sufficiently to get to Frisco, and we can do the rest of our
+buying there. No, we shall go on.”
+
+The girls clapped their hands in delight. Both had feared that the
+disaster might put an untimely end to their summer vacation.
+
+“What do you suppose the Germans intend doing with the _Yucatan_?” asked
+Dick.
+
+“Well, you heard the captain speak of a naval base on the coast of Cuba.
+They probably will run in there, put some big guns aboard and start out
+on a privateering cruise. There have been a couple of such German
+raiders, and they did considerable damage to British merchant ships
+before they were chased to the safety of internment in Newport News.”
+
+“I guess that is about what they plan to do,” agreed Dick. “I’ll surely
+have one experience of which to write when I get back to work.”
+
+An hour later the party was gathered on deck, when the captain of the
+_Yucatan_ approached.
+
+“The first thing I shall do is to report this to General Fullaway, at
+Colon,” he declared.
+
+“General Fullaway!” exclaimed Mr. Willing. “You don’t mean General Hugh
+Fullaway?”
+
+“The same,” replied the captain. “Do you know him?”
+
+“Well, rather,” replied Mr. Willing. “We were schoolmates years ago, and
+have been close friends since. He comes from my home town. I shall look
+him up. But I didn’t know he was in command in Colon.”
+
+“He has only been recently put in command,” was the reply. “I too know
+him well.”
+
+The _Reliance_ proved to be a very slow vessel, and it was days before
+the city of Colon was sighted.
+
+At the entrance to the Panama Canal, Colon is a very picturesque city.
+Since work on the canal was begun, bringing thousands of Americans to
+the country, it has been more or less metropolitan in character, at the
+same time retaining its South American atmosphere.
+
+Shirley and Mabel looked about with wonder as they made their way
+through the dirty narrow streets toward the hotel. This, however, they
+found to be strictly up to date in all respects, and they were soon
+installed in comfortable quarters.
+
+Several hours later, Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton left the hotel,
+announcing that they were going to pay their respects to General
+Fullaway. They were back several hours later and informed Shirley, Mabel
+and Dick that they were to dine with the general in his quarters that
+night.
+
+The girls were naturally excited at this prospect, and spent most of the
+day in the purchase of suitable garments. Dick, as well as Mr. Willing
+and Colonel Ashton, also purchased more clothing to take the place of
+what had been lost when they were set adrift from the _Yucatan_.
+
+General Fullaway had already heard the story from the captain of the
+_Yucatan_, but supper over, he desired to hear it once more from his
+guests.
+
+Mr. Willing related their first meeting with the German commander, who
+had introduced himself as Henry Bristow when they had first met. He told
+of the experience aboard the _Yucatan_ while the vessel was tied up at
+Jacksonville.
+
+“You did wrong not to let the men take him, no matter who they were,”
+was General Fullaway’s verdict.
+
+“I realize that now,” said Mr. Willing, “but who could have suspected
+such a gigantic plot?”
+
+“It was a gigantic plot,” agreed the general, “and was carried out
+excellently. It must have been well planned.”
+
+“Mr. Bristow warned us not to come to Colon, general,” spoke up Shirley.
+
+“He did?” exclaimed the general in surprise. “And why, pray?”
+
+“Well, he said it wasn’t safe,” replied Shirley.
+
+“Hm-m-m,” muttered the general, with a smile. “And did he tell you why?”
+
+“No, sir.”
+
+“I thought not,” laughed the general.
+
+“But he told me, general,” put in Mabel.
+
+The others looked at the girl in surprise, but Mabel bore up steadily
+under their scrutiny.
+
+“What do you mean, Mabel?” demanded Colonel Ashton.
+
+“You remember when he took me aside just before we were set adrift,
+father?” asked Mabel.
+
+“Yes, of course.”
+
+“That’s when he told me, but it seemed so absurd and impossible that I
+didn’t repeat it.”
+
+“What was it, Miss Ashton?” asked General Fullaway. “Will you tell us?”
+
+“He said that Colon was in danger,” replied Mabel, and she repeated the
+conversation she had had with Captain Von Blusen aboard the _Yucatan_.
+
+The others listened to her with breathless interest, and there were
+exclamations of surprise when she concluded.
+
+“Absurd,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+“Impossible,” Colonel Ashton agreed.
+
+“It would seem so, on the face of it,” said General Fullaway, “and I
+suppose it is. It is true, there are two Japanese warships off the
+entrance to the Canal. They have not been allowed to pass through
+because several German merchant vessels are here. As soon as they have
+cleared, of course we shall permit the Japs to go through.”
+
+“And have the Japs objected to the delay?” asked Mr. Willing.
+
+“They have indeed. They have demanded permission to pass, which has been
+refused. That was yesterday. But this tale of yours,” the general turned
+to Mabel, “is incredible. I suppose the German commander told it to you
+to frighten you.”
+
+“I suppose that was his reason,” Mabel agreed.
+
+At this moment an orderly entered the room and gave a message to General
+Fullaway. The latter read it, and then turned to Mabel again.
+
+“It seems that your warning may bear fruit, after all,” he said quietly.
+
+“Why, sir?” asked the girl eagerly.
+
+“Why, this message I have here,” said the general, tapping the paper
+with his finger, “is, or seems to be at least, a communication from the
+Japanese commander. He says if his ships are not allowed to pass through
+the canal to-morrow, he will destroy the city of Colon!”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.—A WAR SCARE.
+
+
+An air of intense anticipation pervaded the General’s dining room.
+
+Shirley finally broke the silence.
+
+“And will you give them permission, general?” she asked.
+
+“Not without such instructions from Washington,” was the reply. “My
+duties are clearly defined. The Japanese ships cannot pass through the
+canal while German merchantmen are in Colon harbor. However, I am not at
+all sure the message is from the Japs.”
+
+“You mean—the _Yucatan_,” asked Dick.
+
+General Fullaway nodded.
+
+“I wouldn’t be at all surprised,” he replied quietly. “I shall
+communicate with Washington at once, repeating the story you have told
+me.”
+
+He left the room, and returned in a few moments with a slip of paper
+which he gave to the officer who had brought the message.
+
+“I should have a reply in a couple of hours,” he told the others. “Would
+you care to wait and hear the result?”
+
+“Indeed we would,” declared Shirley.
+
+It was almost three hours later before the reply came. General Fullaway
+read the message in silence, then turned to the others.
+
+“Your story must be true, Miss Ashton,” he said. “Washington seems to
+have had some rumor of it. The cruiser _Tennessee_, now stationed here,
+has been ordered to take the _Yucatan_ in charge.”
+
+“Will there be a battle?” demanded Mabel anxiously.
+
+“I do not think so. The _Yucatan_, armed though she probably is by this
+time, would hardly be a match for the _Tennessee_.”
+
+“I wish we could go with her,” declared Shirley.
+
+“So do I,” agreed Dick.
+
+General Fullaway was silent for some moments, and then he said:
+
+“Perhaps it can be done. There will be no danger. I don’t believe
+Captain Ainslee would object. The _Tennessee_ will not sail before
+morning. I shall communicate with the captain immediately, and let you
+know before morning. He will probably wish to hear your story anyhow.”
+
+Shirley, Mabel and the others returned to the hotel, where they prepared
+for bed. Mr. Willing was just about to retire when there was a knock at
+the door. Opening it, a bellboy passed him a message. It was from
+General Fullaway and said that Captain Ainslee would expect the Willing
+party aboard the _Tennessee_ by 8 o’clock in the morning.
+
+Mr. Willing called this piece of news to Dick and the two girls, and all
+were greatly pleased.
+
+“Just think of taking a trip on a warship!” exclaimed Shirley.
+
+All were about early the next morning and were soon at the pier, where
+they found that a cutter from the _Tennessee_ had been sent to meet
+them. Captain Ainslee himself greeted them as they made their way over
+the side of the cruiser, and conducted them to his cabin.
+
+Here he left them for a few minutes while he gave orders to get the ship
+under way. Directly it began to move slowly through the waters of the
+harbor, Captain Ainslee returned to the others.
+
+“Now,” he said to Mabel, “I should be glad to hear your story at first
+hand.”
+
+Mabel repeated it and the captain listened attentively.
+
+“To tell the truth,” he said, “this may be more serious than I supposed.
+If Germany is bent upon drawing the United States into the war, the
+_Yucatan_ may not surrender so easily.”
+
+“You don’t mean she is likely to fight?” asked Mr. Willing in some
+alarm.
+
+“That’s just what I mean,” was the reply.
+
+And Captain Ainslee proved a good prophet.
+
+It was well after noon when a cry from the lookout brought all to deck.
+
+“Steamer off the port bow!” it came.
+
+The two girls rushed to the deck with the others. The ships were still
+too far apart for those aboard the cruiser to make out the other
+plainly, and the wireless was immediately put in action.
+
+“German converted cruiser _Kaiserin_!” came the reply to Captain
+Ainslee’s message.
+
+“I desire to come aboard you,” was the message flashed back. “Heave to!”
+
+The vessels drew nearer together, until at last Captain Ainslee knew the
+other vessel was in range of the _Tennessee’s_ big guns.
+
+“I was afraid he would run,” he explained. “Now I shall make my demand
+for surrender. It’s the _Yucatan_ as you can see.”
+
+The wireless was again put to working, and a demand made upon the German
+to surrender.
+
+“What for?” came the question.
+
+“Theft of United States vessel and threatening destruction of Colon,”
+was the reply flashed back.
+
+Captain Von Blusen must have realized that the game was up. The
+_Yucatan_ was brought quickly about and turned to run.
+
+“Clear for action!” came the command aboard the _Tennessee_.
+
+Shirley, Mabel and the others of the party found themselves hurried back
+into the Captain’s private cabin. There, through the port-hole, they
+watched the preparations for battle.
+
+The girls were greatly interested, and in spite of the fact that they
+knew they were in danger, they did not lose their coolness nor their
+courage.
+
+Realizing that the passenger ship was probably faster than the cruiser,
+Captain Ainslee wasted no further time. The great forward turret gun
+spoke with a roar, and Shirley and Mabel cried out at the terrific
+noise.
+
+They could watch the progress of the big shell as it sped toward the
+_Yucatan_, where it kicked up the water but a few yards to port. Again
+and again the big gun spoke, and then there was a cheer from the crew as
+a shell struck home.
+
+Twice more the _Yucatan_ was hit, and, while not in a vital spot, her
+speed was suddenly reduced. The _Tennessee_ dashed on.
+
+Then came the first shot from the enemy. The spray flew high beside the
+cruiser as a shell struck the water to larboard. Before she could fire
+again, another shell from the _Tennessee’s_ forward turret gun crashed
+aboard her.
+
+Then a white flag was run up the _Yucatan’s_ masthead.
+
+The firing aboard the _Tennessee_ ceased, and the cruiser bore down on
+the enemy.
+
+Boats were hurriedly lowered, manned and darted across the water to take
+charge of the _Yucatan_. Half an hour later one of them returned bearing
+the German commander and his officers. They were conducted to the
+captain’s cabin immediately.
+
+Henry Bristow—now Captain Von Blusen—at first did not see the members
+of the Willing party in the cabin, and he faced Captain Ainslee angrily.
+
+“What is the meaning of this outrage?” he demanded.
+
+Captain Ainslee smiled.
+
+“Come, come, captain,” he said. “Why this air of wounded dignity? Surely
+you won’t attempt to deny that you stole the _Yucatan_?”
+
+“Of course I deny it,” was the reply.
+
+“And I suppose you will also deny sending a message to the commandant at
+Colon, threatening to blow up the city?”
+
+“That is absurd,” was the reply.
+
+Captain Ainslee motioned to Mabel, and she stepped forward.
+
+“Do you recognize this young lady, captain?” demanded the commander of
+the _Tennessee_.
+
+As the other’s eyes rested upon Mabel, he stepped back in surprise and a
+look of genuine alarm passed over his face. Then it grew dark. He was
+very angry.
+
+“So,” he exclaimed, “this is the way you show your sympathy for Germany,
+eh?”
+
+“What is Germany to me?” demanded Mabel hotly. “I’m no German.”
+
+“But you said—”
+
+“I said that because I was angry at the time. You have made trouble
+enough for us. I’m glad you have been captured.”
+
+“Further denial is useless, captain,” declared Captain Ainslee. “I don’t
+believe you will dispute the young lady’s words.”
+
+Von Blusen turned away angrily, and his gaze rested on Dick and the
+others for the first time.
+
+“I see you are all here,” he said. Then to Dick, “And I have not
+forgotten that I have a debt to settle with you.”
+
+He stepped quickly across the cabin and before the others were aware of
+what he intended to do, he struck Dick sharply across the face with the
+back of his hand.
+
+Dick was on his feet in an instant and would have leaped upon his
+assailant had not the others stayed him.
+
+“Captain!” cried the commander of the _Tennessee_, “you forget yourself!
+If that is the way you Germans conduct yourselves no wonder the whole
+world is against you. Another move like that and I’ll have you put in
+irons!”
+
+The German captain drew back but said nothing.
+
+“Now,” continued Captain Ainslee, “I would like to know the meaning of
+this affair you have been mixed up in. Is Germany seeking war with the
+United States?”
+
+“Why not?” was the reply. “The United States has been against us, why
+shouldn’t we be against her?”
+
+“It’s your own evil consciences that make you think that,” replied
+Captain Ainslee. “The United States has been strictly neutral in this
+war. But an accounting for this will be demanded of the Kaiser.”
+
+“And he’ll give it,” thundered the captain, striking the table with his
+fist. “He’ll give it!”
+
+“Maybe he will, but he’ll be sorry,” declared Shirley, who could keep
+quiet no longer. “Uncle Sam will stand no foolishness from the Kaiser.”
+
+Captain Von Blusen smiled at her scornfully.
+
+“We shall come over here some day and take the United States,” he said.
+
+“You’ll be surprised when you try it,” said Shirley angrily.
+
+“Shirley!” exclaimed Mr. Willing. “Keep quiet!”
+
+“I don’t care,” cried Shirley. “Anybody knows Uncle Sam can whip
+Germany, and all the rest of them, too, for that matter.”
+
+Again Mr. Willing would have enjoined the girl to silence, but Captain
+Ainslee stayed him with uplifted hand.
+
+“Let her alone,” he chuckled. “That is the spirit I like to see!”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.—ABOARD THE YUCATAN.
+
+
+The _Tennessee_ returned immediately to Colon, followed by the
+_Yucatan_, now manned by a crew of American sailors. The run was made
+quickly, and darkness had just descended when the ships came to anchor
+and the Willing party made their way ashore and returned to their hotel.
+
+Captain Von Blusen and the members of his crew were immediately turned
+over to the Canal Zone authorities, pending orders from Washington.
+
+What was the surprise of Shirley and the others, upon reaching the
+hotel, to find there others of the passengers who had been set adrift
+when the _Yucatan_ was captured by the German conspirators. They greeted
+each other warmly.
+
+“We were picked up by a steamer and just reached here this afternoon,”
+one of the women passengers explained to Shirley and Mabel. “We had
+about given you up for lost. The rest of us are all here.”
+
+“And so is the _Yucatan_,” replied Shirley.
+
+In response to exclamations of astonishment, she related the story of
+the recapture of the vessel.
+
+“Then we shall be allowed to continue our trip, I suppose,” remarked one
+of the passengers.
+
+“Unless the government decides to hold on to the steamer,” said another.
+
+But the government did not, and the following day the full crew of the
+_Yucatan_ was once more aboard the vessel, and it was announced that she
+would resume her journey the following morning.
+
+The day was spent by most of the passengers viewing the sights of
+interest in the canal zone and in the city of Colon proper.
+
+A few words concerning the Panama Canal will not be amiss here.
+
+The canal was opened to smaller vessels on August 5, 1914, but the
+official opening did not take place until much later, being attended
+with elaborate ceremonies.
+
+The canal is about fifty miles in length from deep water in the
+Caribbean Sea to deep water in the Pacific Ocean. It ranges in width
+from 300 to 1,000 feet with an average bottom width of almost 700 feet.
+The Gatun dam along its crest is 8,000 feet long.
+
+The construction of the canal is considered one of the greatest feats of
+engineering of all time and was accomplished at a tremendous cost. The
+land was secured by treaty from Colombia at great expense and resulted
+in considerable trouble between the United States and the South American
+republic.
+
+It is provided by treaties that the canal shall be open to the vessels
+of all nations, merchantmen, or ships of war, in times of war as well in
+times of peace; but strict rules of neutrality have been provided for
+the passage of war vessels.
+
+All this Mr. Willing explained to the others during the day. With the
+coming of night, the passengers began to go aboard the _Yucatan_ for the
+ship was to sail at an early hour and it was deemed advisable to be
+aboard the night before.
+
+Therefore, when Shirley and Mabel arose and went on deck, the _Yucatan_
+already had started its passage through the canal. The girls stood upon
+the upper deck aft and looked about with interest; but after an hour of
+this they grew tired and went down to breakfast.
+
+The passage of the canal would require about ten hours and Shirley
+remarked to Mabel that she would be glad when they were on the Pacific
+and sailing up the coast.
+
+“And so will I,” agreed Mabel. “Of course it is nice to see all these
+things, but they don’t interest me a whole lot.”
+
+“I feel the same way. To tell the truth I shall be glad to get to San
+Francisco. From what I have heard, the Exposition must be beautiful.”
+
+“Indeed it must. By the way, I wonder what will be done with Henry
+Bristow—I mean Captain Von Blusen?”
+
+“I don’t know,” replied Shirley. “However, I suppose he will be taken to
+Washington.”
+
+“He seemed a very nice young man. I wouldn’t have thought he was a
+German.”
+
+“Well, I suppose there are nice Germans as well as any other kind,”
+replied Shirley with a laugh. “But I wonder why they took such chances?”
+
+“Orders, I reckon. The Germans have shown great daring and bravery in
+this war.”
+
+“I should say they have. I wonder if the United States will be drawn
+into the war.”
+
+“My goodness gracious! I hope not! Why, Daddy might have to go.”
+
+“Oh I guess not,” laughed Shirley. “He is too old for that, except as a
+last resort.”
+
+“But Dick might have to go.”
+
+“That’s so; but I don’t think there will be any war between the United
+States and Germany. We could whip them easily.”
+
+“I suppose the Germans think they could whip us just as well as we
+believe we can whip them.”
+
+“But I know we can whip them.”
+
+“Well, I’m not so sure. But one thing is certain, we won’t have to go to
+war. That’s the advantage of being a girl.”
+
+“Oh I don’t know,” said Shirley, “I believe I would like to go.”
+
+“Not for me,” declared Mabel. “Still, I might be willing to go as a Red
+Cross nurse.”
+
+“That’s what I meant,” replied Shirley.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick now joined them, and they discussed
+recent happenings.
+
+“You don’t suppose there is any chance of Von Blusen getting away, sir?”
+asked Dick of Mr. Willing.
+
+Mr. Willing looked at him and smiled.
+
+“Afraid he’ll come after you?” he asked.
+
+“No, not exactly sir,” replied Dick. “I just wondered, that’s all.”
+
+“I don’t think there is. I’m sure I don’t want to be on the same ship
+with him again. He’ll make mischief wherever he is.”
+
+But Mr. Willing was to be disappointed in this wish, as it turned out
+later.
+
+Noon came and passed and still the big steamship was in the canal; but
+with the coming of the supper hour the Pacific ocean became visible in
+the distance.
+
+It was the first time that Dick, Shirley or Mabel had seen the Pacific,
+and they stared ahead for a long time.
+
+“I don’t see as it looks any different from the Atlantic,” declared
+Shirley.
+
+“What did you expect?” asked Mabel. “Think you were going to see the
+name on it?”
+
+“Not exactly. I don’t know just what I expected, but I thought it would
+look different.”
+
+The others laughed.
+
+“It might feel a little different in case a big storm came up,” said
+Dick.
+
+“I don’t want to be in a storm on any water,” declared Shirley with
+decision.
+
+“I should say not,” Mabel agreed. “A storm is bad enough with lots of
+dry land under your feet.”
+
+The sun was just disappearing below the horizon when the _Yucatan_ at
+last stuck her nose into the waters of the Pacific ocean.
+
+“Well, here we are in the Pacific at last,” said Colonel Ashton. “Do you
+feel any difference, Shirley?”
+
+“Not a bit,” replied the girl with a smile.
+
+Mr. Willing looked at the sky.
+
+“I guess there will be no storm on this trip,” he said.
+
+Half an hour later all went below to supper.
+
+They had almost finished a delightful meal when their attention was
+attracted by the sound of a scuffle on deck. All rushed hastily up.
+
+There, struggling with a knot of sailors, was a single man. His back was
+turned to the girls as they made their way on deck, and at first they
+did not recognize him.
+
+He was giving a good account of himself, striking out with such force
+and skill as gave evidence of much training in the use of his fists; but
+the sailors were too many for him, and he was at last overpowered and
+thrown to the deck.
+
+Rude hands jerked him to his feet and it was then that Shirley and Mabel
+obtained their first look at his face.
+
+Shirley started back with a cry of utter amazement. Then a name leaped
+to her lips, and was repeated by all the passengers within sight.
+
+“Captain Von Blusen!”
+
+“How in the world did he get here?” exclaimed Shirley.
+
+“I can’t imagine,” declared Mabel, staring with open mouth.
+
+Captain Anderson of the _Yucatan_ now hastened down from the bridge and
+confronted the prisoner.
+
+“What are you doing on my ship and how did you get here?” he demanded
+angrily.
+
+Captain Von Blusen smiled at him.
+
+“I just escaped, that’s all,” he replied. “You treated me so well before
+that I thought I would take passage with you. Besides it was the least
+likely place I would be looked for.”
+
+“But how did you escape?” demanded the captain.
+
+“That would be telling,” was the reply, and the young man smiled
+tantalizingly. “However, it will do no harm to say that I have good
+friends in Colon.”
+
+“Well, I’ll guarantee you won’t do any more harm aboard my ship,”
+declared the captain angrily.
+
+He turned to his first officer. “Have him put in irons!”
+
+“Very good, sir,” replied the first officer, and advanced toward the
+prisoner.
+
+“One moment,” said the latter drawing himself up. “I did not come here
+with any ill motive,” still addressing the captain, “and I desire to
+give my parole.”
+
+“And what good is your parole?” demanded Captain Anderson.
+
+“One gentleman is always ready to accept the word of another gentleman,”
+said Von Blusen slowly. “I give my word to make no attempt to escape.”
+
+The captain hesitated, then waved an arm expressively.
+
+“Very well,” he said. “Your parole is accepted.”
+
+He returned to the bridge, and the sailors released Von Blusen. The
+latter walked over to where the Willing party were gathered.
+
+“Well, here I am again,” he said with a smile.
+
+“I see you are,” replied Mabel, and deliberately turned her back on him.
+
+The young man’s face became red. He turned on his heel and walked off
+without another word.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.—ASHORE IN COSTA RICA.
+
+
+The steamship _Yucatan_ was swinging slowly into a little harbor. Land,
+visible for the first time since leaving the Panama Canal, was now close
+at hand.
+
+“What place is this?” asked Shirley of Dick, who stood forward gazing
+over the rail by her side.
+
+Dick consulted his guide book, remarking: “I can’t remember the name of
+these outlandish places.”
+
+“It’s Punta Arenas,” he said at last, looking up. “Costa Rica, you
+know,” he added in explanation.
+
+“And what are we putting in here for?”
+
+“You’ll have to ask the captain about that,” replied Dick. “It’s too
+deep for me.”
+
+The vessel came to anchor some distance from shore. It was announced
+that the ship would lay there for several hours, and the captain gave
+notice that those desiring to land would be taken off in the small
+boats.
+
+Shirley immediately announced her intention of being one of the landing
+party, and loath to let the girl go alone, Mr. Willing and the others
+also determined to go ashore.
+
+Half an hour later found them strolling about the dirty looking narrow
+streets of the little town.
+
+Poorly-dressed natives, men, women and children, eyed them queerly as
+they walked along, the latter following them for blocks begging for
+money. Shirley would have given one of the children a piece of silver
+but for the first officer of the ship, who stayed her.
+
+“Give money to one of them and the rest will follow you forever,” he
+explained.
+
+“But they look so dirty and hungry,” protested Shirley.
+
+“Perhaps they are,” was the officer’s reply, “but take no chances with
+them.”
+
+Shirley followed his advice, as did the others of the party, and the
+dirty native children soon let them alone. When the party started back,
+however, the children trailed them once more, begging piteously for
+money.
+
+At the wharf Shirley, unheeding the advice of the officer, turned and
+tossed a silver quarter toward them.
+
+Instantly the place became a scene of wild confusion. There was a
+scramble as boys and girls dived headlong for the piece of silver. Loud
+cries filled the air.
+
+A little girl raised up with the piece of money clutched tightly in her
+hand and started to run. But the others were upon her in an instant, and
+threw her to the ground, striking and clawing as they tried to take the
+quarter away from her.
+
+Shirley looked at the disorder she had caused in amazement.
+
+“My goodness!” she exclaimed. “I had no idea they were so savage.”
+
+She watched the struggle.
+
+Now a boy had secured the quarter and tried to escape with it. But he
+fared no better than had the girl, and soon was beneath the pile of
+struggling bodies. The children fought savagely, biting, screaming,
+kicking and scratching.
+
+The party from the steamship watched with interest.
+
+“See what you did, Shirley,” cried Mabel. “Just watch them fight.”
+
+“I won’t do it again,” declared Shirley. “Some of them will be badly
+hurt.”
+
+At this moment a newcomer appeared upon the scene. He walked slowly, and
+plainly was in no particular hurry. Shirley glanced at him curiously.
+
+He was attired in a dark blue uniform. A revolver and sword hung at his
+side. He was short but stout, and a black mustache curled fiercely
+upward.
+
+He was just what Shirley took him to be, an officer of the Costa Rican
+army.
+
+He advanced into the mass of struggling children and pushed the
+combatants aside without ceremony. As they looked up and perceived him,
+the fighters turned and fled.
+
+The sight was indeed comical and Shirley and all the others laughed long
+and loud.
+
+One little boy, before taking to his heels, stooped quickly and picked
+up the quarter, which had rolled a short distance away. But even as he
+started to run, the native officer reached out a hand and caught him by
+the shoulder.
+
+In vain did the boy struggle to free himself, biting and kicking. He was
+no match for the man, and at last he dropped the piece of silver. The
+officer then released him and looked around.
+
+While the Americans still watched him he stooped, picked up the quarter,
+turned it over in his hand once or twice, spun it in the air, caught it
+as it came down and thrust it in his pocket. Then, without a glance to
+right or left, he turned and stalked away.
+
+“There!” exclaimed the ship’s officer, “you can see what has happened to
+your quarter. It’s what happens to most of those thrown to the children
+by tourists.”
+
+“It’s an outrage!” declared Shirley. “I wouldn’t have given him
+anything. Isn’t there something we can do about it?”
+
+“Not a thing,” was the reply. “It is legitimate graft. But watch, now,
+you’ll see what the little folks do.”
+
+As the native officer continued to swagger along, from behind houses and
+from down streets a hail of rocks and stones dropped upon him. The
+children, divided in the fight for the quarter, had joined forces
+against this common enemy and were pelting him vigorously.
+
+“Good!” exclaimed Mabel. “I am glad of it. I hope they hurt him, the big
+coward.”
+
+The native officer stopped and glared around angrily at his small
+assailants for a moment, while the rocks and stones fell on him faster
+than before. One struck him in the face. This was too much for his
+courage. He took to his heels, and with the mob of children in close
+pursuit, was soon lost to sight.
+
+“I hope they get him,” declared Shirley vehemently.
+
+“They won’t, though,” replied the officer of the _Yucatan_. “If he were
+to turn on them they’d stop and, from a safe place, continue their
+bombardment. He’ll find shelter some place.”
+
+Before they could return to the launch which would take them back to the
+ship, the swarm of children again came into view, rushing for them.
+
+“Quick!” cried the officer, “into the boat. They’ll run right over us.
+They’ve caught a sight of silver and they won’t let us alone until we
+give them some, or until we are out of reach.”
+
+He hustled the others toward the small boat at a run, and succeeded in
+getting them in before the native children reached the water’s edge.
+Then the boat put off for the ship.
+
+A cry of anger went up from the shore.
+
+“Duck!” cried the officer, himself taking his place in the stern and
+grasping the rudder.
+
+His warning came not a moment too soon.
+
+A shower of missiles, hurled with unerring aim, fell upon the little
+craft. Disappointed in their quest, the native children were now bent on
+revenge.
+
+As fast as they could pick them up and throw, rocks went skimming across
+the water, falling on both sides, and in front and behind the boat.
+Several dropped aboard.
+
+One, in falling, just skimmed the back of Shirley’s head as she stooped
+over in the boat. Dick immediately squeezed in behind her, and another,
+thrown with unerring aim, carried away his hat. Fortunately however,
+this broke the force of the stone, and it fell to the bottom of the boat
+without doing any further damage.
+
+The boat was drawing out of danger now, and the occupants sat up again
+and drew breaths of relief. Only the stronger of the tots could now
+reach them with their missiles, and the distance was too great for
+accurate throwing, so those in the boats felt perfectly safe.
+
+Upon the shore the crowd of native boys and girls gave vent to cries of
+rage at thus being deprived of their revenge. They danced about
+excitedly and waved their hands in angry gestures.
+
+At this juncture another native officer hove in sight, and the crowd
+turned on him. Again rocks, stones and other weapons came into play as
+the children turned upon him to vent their wrath. For a moment the
+officer seemed on the point of charging into the crowd, then changed his
+mind, wheeled on his heel and took to flight. The young ones gave chase,
+their shouts and cries carrying across the water to the occupants of the
+boat.
+
+“Well!” exclaimed Shirley, now that they were out of harm’s way at last,
+“they are vicious little things, aren’t they?”
+
+“Rather,” replied the officer dryly. “If a person fell into their hands
+it would go hard with him.”
+
+“But what makes them so fierce?” asked Mabel, greatly interested.
+
+“That’s hard to say. However, it probably is because they are half
+starved and look upon the whole world as a common foe. More than one
+tourist has received rough treatment at their hands.”
+
+“And will they attack any one like that?” asked Dick.
+
+“Not unless he shows money,” was the reply. “That is the remarkable part
+about it. No matter how much a man may have in his pocket they will not
+attack him unless they catch sight of silver or gold. One glimpse of it,
+however, seems to drive them wild.”
+
+The officer gave his attention to the boat for a moment, and then
+continued:
+
+“Another thing, as you have just observed. They will fight each other,
+but let a third party interfere and they will all jump on him.”
+
+“Just like a quarrel between a man and his wife, eh?” asked Mr. Willing
+with a smile.
+
+“Exactly. They’re a queer lot, and you will find them about the same in
+all Central and South American countries.”
+
+The small boat now rubbed gently against the side of the _Yucatan_ and
+the passengers scrambled up the ladder to the deck.
+
+“We were lucky to get out of that with whole skins,” declared Shirley,
+when all once more stood on deck.
+
+“I should say we were,” agreed Mabel.
+
+“Perhaps this experience will teach you to heed the advice of others,
+daughter,” said Mr. Willing dryly.
+
+“I won’t try and play the good Samaritan to native children any more,
+Dad,” said Shirley smiling.
+
+A long blast from the ship’s whistle, followed by the clanking of chains
+as the anchor was drawn in, the vibrations of the engines became
+noticeable, and, with her nose pointed to the open sea, the steamship
+_Yucatan_ resumed her journey.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.—U. S. S. PRAIRIE.
+
+
+“Steamship off the port bow, sir!”
+
+It was the cry of the lookout.
+
+All eyes were turned in the direction indicated. There, showing dimly
+through the gathering darkness, steamed a dark gray shape. Another
+glance from the lookout was enough to convince him of the vessel’s
+identity.
+
+“United States cruiser, sir!” came his call.
+
+“Can you make her out?” asked the captain’s voice from the bridge.
+
+The lookout was silent for several minutes, and then called back:
+
+“Cruiser _Prairie_, sir.”
+
+There was a muttered ejaculation from the captain. Shirley, standing
+near, caught the words:
+
+“Wonder what she’s doing in these waters? She was in Bluefields the last
+I heard of her. Must be trouble of some kind or she wouldn’t be here.”
+
+The two ships exchanged messages, the nature of which were unknown to
+the passengers, however. Both continued on their course.
+
+Morning showed to the passengers the cruiser proceeding ahead of them.
+All day the two ships retained their relative positions and when night
+came on they were unchanged.
+
+When Shirley awoke the following morning the _Yucatan_ was stationary.
+Shirley and Mabel dressed quickly and went on deck. There they found
+that they were in a little harbor. Shirley asked a question of one of
+the other passengers.
+
+“Where are we?”
+
+“Port of Corinto, Nicaragua,” was the reply.
+
+At this moment a small boat was just about to be lowered. Shirley and
+Mabel rushed up to the first officer, who was in command of it.
+
+“Can we go with you?” she asked.
+
+The officer hesitated, then: “I see no reason why you cannot,” with a
+smile. “Jump in.”
+
+The girls obeyed and a few moments later were being rowed toward the
+not-far-distant shore. There the boat drew up at the wharf, and,
+signalling to the girls to accompany him if they so desired, the officer
+leaped lightly ashore and lent them a helping hand. The sailors were
+ordered to await his return.
+
+“Where are you going?” asked Shirley.
+
+“American consulate,” was the reply. “There has been some trouble here,
+and Captain Anderson has sent me to find out what it's all about.”
+
+At the consulate Shirley and Mabel remained outside, while the first
+officer was closeted with the consul.
+
+“We might as well walk around a bit,” Shirley decided. “There is no
+telling how long he may remain there.”
+
+Mabel was nothing loath, and they made their way to the street. Here
+they walked along slowly, looking curiously at the native Nicaraguans
+and the queer buildings, all of old Spanish architecture and design.
+
+“None of this for me,” was Shirley’s decision half an hour later.
+
+“Nor me,” agreed Mabel. “I want to live in civilization.”
+
+Unconsciously the girls had wandered further from the consulate than
+they realized, and as they were on the point of turning back Mabel
+caught sight of a familiar figure.
+
+“Captain Von Blusen!” she exclaimed, catching Shirley by the arm.
+
+Shirley caught her breath and gazed in the direction Mabel pointed.
+
+It was true. There, slinking along furtively, was the gallant captain
+and he was walking along at a rapid rate.
+
+“Wonder where he is going and why he’s in such a hurry?” asked Mabel.
+
+“I don’t know,” returned Shirley, “but I’ll warrant he is up to no
+good.”
+
+“But he has given his parole to make no attempt to escape.”
+
+“I don’t imagine he’ll set much store by that if he sees a good
+opportunity to get away.”
+
+Shirley would have continued her way back, but Mabel said:
+
+“Wait a moment, Shirley. Perhaps, by following him a bit, we may learn
+something useful. What do you say?”
+
+For a moment Shirley hesitated, but for a moment only.
+
+“Perhaps we can,” she said then. “There can be no danger if we keep out
+of sight. Come on.”
+
+The German was now some distance ahead of them, and taking care to avoid
+being seen should he turn suddenly, the girls followed him.
+
+But apparently Captain Von Blusen had no idea that he would be followed.
+He strode rapidly along and not once did he turn his head.
+
+“He must have been here before,” Shirley decided. “He seems to know
+where he is going.”
+
+For another ten minutes they followed him, and then Shirley halted.
+
+“I am afraid we had better go back,” she said. “We may get lost.”
+
+“Oh I guess not,” declared Mabel. “And besides we have plenty of time.
+The ship will probably stay here most of the day. Come on, Shirley.”
+
+Shirley allowed herself to be led along.
+
+They had now approached the outskirts of the little town, and the young
+German struck off through a clump of trees. At the edge of these Shirley
+stopped abruptly.
+
+“We won’t follow him any further,” she said decisively. “It might be
+dangerous.”
+
+“I guess you are right,” agreed Mabel. “I wish he had stayed where we
+could keep track of him.”
+
+“So do I. But he didn’t. We had better be getting back.”
+
+They turned and started to retrace their footsteps, but even as they did
+so the footsteps of a large body of men came toward them. They were not
+yet in sight, but the men were coming right down the street through
+which the girls must go on their way back.
+
+Mabel looked at Shirley in alarm.
+
+“What shall we do?” she exclaimed.
+
+“We’ll just have to put on a bold face and walk right along,” declared
+Shirley. “Come.”
+
+She started out slowly, Mabel walking by her side.
+
+A moment later there appeared ahead of them, advancing at a rapid march,
+a body of armed men. Shirley and Mabel shrank close to the side of the
+street to give the marchers as much room as possible.
+
+At first it seemed the girls would get by without trouble, for the first
+troop had passed them, paying no attention to their presence.
+
+But as the officer in command of the troop came abreast of them, a
+command suddenly rang out:
+
+“Halt!”
+
+The troop stopped abruptly, and grounded their arms. Shirley and Mabel
+also paused, as they believed the words were meant for them. Then,
+seeing the soldiers pause, they moved on again. But again came the cry
+of “Halt.”
+
+The girls halted in their tracks.
+
+The commander, whom they perceived was a man well along toward seventy,
+but who nevertheless walked perfectly erect and who looked very imposing
+in his bright military uniform, advanced toward them.
+
+“What are you young ladies doing here?” he asked courteously, in
+English.
+
+“We were just walking about the city, sir,” replied Shirley, her voice
+trembling somewhat in spite of the efforts she made to keep it steady.
+
+“Where do you come from?”
+
+“Steamship in the harbor, sir.”
+
+“You mean the cruiser?”
+
+“No, sir,” replied Mabel. “The passenger steamer, sir.”
+
+“H-m-mm-m,” muttered the officer.
+
+Before he could speak further there came, from the town, the sound of
+more rapidly approaching footsteps.
+
+“Come with me,” cried the Nicaraguan officer quickly, “if you go on you
+will be hurt. Come quickly.”
+
+He urged his men on with a sharp command.
+
+Shirley and Mabel hung back.
+
+“Quick!” cried the general again. “There will be fighting here in a few
+minutes, and if you are in the way you are likely to be hurt.”
+
+A squad of men, at his command, surrounded the two girls, and they were
+forced to go along whether or no.
+
+The troop dashed quickly for the shelter of the woods in which the girls
+had seen Captain Von Blusen disappear a few moments before.
+
+Once in the shelter of the trees, the officer in command gave several
+sharp orders, and the troop divided into three parts. Then they flitted
+rapidly further in among the trees.
+
+Shirley and Mabel, now badly frightened, found themselves with the
+commanding officer’s section. They could see that they were bearing off
+to the right and several times would have spoken, but the officer
+silenced them with a gesture.
+
+“I shall answer your questions later,” he said once.
+
+Although the girls did not know just what was the matter, they realized
+that the Nicaraguans were fleeing from another, and, supposedly, a
+larger body of men.
+
+“I hope they overtake us. I want to get back to Dad,” cried Mabel.
+
+“And I hope they don’t,” exclaimed Shirley.
+
+“Why, Shirley!”
+
+“I mean it. If they do overtake us it may mean a battle, and then we
+would be in danger. As long as we keep away from them we are safe.
+Besides, Dad will find us some way. Our fathers and Dick won’t permit us
+to be carried off.”
+
+“I reckon you are right, Shirley,” Mabel agreed finally. “Besides, there
+is an American cruiser near. They’ll have the bluejackets out searching
+for us.”
+
+“And they will find us, too,” declared Mabel.
+
+“I hope they hurry up and come,” exclaimed Shirley. “I’m badly
+frightened, but I don’t want to show it. The thing to do is to make the
+officer think we are not a bit scared.”
+
+“We’ll try,” said Mabel calmly.
+
+For an hour they continued on their way, and then suddenly the force
+began to increase as men appeared from other directions and joined the
+main body.
+
+Although the girls did not know it, these were the same men who had
+scattered at the first sign of pursuit. They had made a detour to throw
+the pursuers off the track.
+
+At last the commander called a halt. Then he approached the two girls.
+
+“I guess I had better explain why I insisted on your coming with us,” he
+said with a pleasant smile.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.—AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE.
+
+
+“If you please,” said Shirley.
+
+The officer gazed at both girls admiringly.
+
+“You take it coolly enough,” he declared. “Many in your places would be
+badly frightened.”
+
+“Surely there is nothing to be afraid of,” said Mabel, determined to
+show as bold a front as possible.
+
+“No,” said the officer, “there isn’t.” He looked at them closely. “I
+wonder if either of you happen to know who I am?” he asked.
+
+Shirley shook her head negatively.
+
+“I’m sure I don’t,” said Mabel.
+
+“Then I must introduce myself,” was the reply. “I am General Pedro
+Garcia, President of the republic of Nicaragua.”
+
+Both girls looked at him in the utmost surprise.
+
+“You may well be surprised,” said the general, a touch of bitterness in
+his tone, it seemed to Shirley, “and no doubt you are to see the
+President of the country in such a predicament?”
+
+Shirley didn’t know much about Nicaragua, but she decided she might as
+well agree with him, as he seemed to expect it.
+
+“Yes, sir,” she said.
+
+“And I am surprised to find myself in such a position,” said the
+President. “I shall explain. With my men I am fleeing from the
+revolutionists.”
+
+“Revolutionists?” echoed Shirley.
+
+“Exactly. I was in Corinto with some of my army for diplomatic purposes.
+While absent from Managua there was an uprising. It seems to have been
+well planned, for it broke out in all parts of the republic at once,
+even here in Corinto.”
+
+“I was surprised with my men this morning and was forced to flee. That’s
+about all there is to it.”
+
+“But why did you bring us with you?” demanded Shirley. “Why didn’t you
+allow us to return to our ship.”
+
+“Because you might never have reached there,” replied the President
+quietly. “You would probably have fallen into the hands of the
+revolutionists. While you are with me you are safe.”
+
+There was no doubting the sincerity in the President’s voice, and both
+girls unconsciously breathed easier.
+
+“Besides,” continued the general, “your presence may help me a bit.”
+
+“In what way sir?” asked Mabel.
+
+“Well, there is a United States cruiser in Corinto harbor. When you are
+missed the natural supposition will be that you have fallen into the
+hands of the revolutionists. The U. S. sailors will be sent after you,
+and will be likely to attack my foes.”
+
+“I see,” said Shirley with a slight smile. “Then you did not save us
+from an altogether unselfish motive.”
+
+“My dear young ladies, consider,” said the President, “it is better for
+both of us.”
+
+“I don’t doubt you, sir,” replied Shirley; “but just the same I would
+rather be safe aboard our ship.”
+
+“And so you shall be, if it is within my power to put you there,”
+declared the President of Nicaragua warmly.
+
+At this moment two of the general’s troopers approached, dragging a
+third man between them. Shirley and Mabel fell back a few feet.
+
+“Hello! Who have we here?” demanded President Garcia.
+
+“Prisoner, sir,” replied one of the men.
+
+“Release him,” said the President. “I shall talk to him myself. Who are
+you, and what are you doing here?” he demanded sharply.
+
+Shirley and Mabel both started at the sound of the prisoner’s voice. He
+was none other than Captain von Blusen.
+
+“I’m Captain von Blusen, of the German navy,” was the reply. “I have
+been held prisoner aboard an American ship, and have but recently
+escaped. I am seeking Colonel Hernandez.”
+
+“Hernandez!” exclaimed President Garcia, stepping back in surprise. “The
+leader of the revolutionists!”
+
+“And may I ask your name, sir?” said Captain von Blusen.
+
+“I,” said the general, “am the President of Nicaragua.”
+
+The prisoner gave vent to a long whistle and a look of dismay passed
+over his face. It was gone in a moment, however, and he turned to the
+President with a smile.
+
+“I am fortunate in finding you, sir,” he said. “I am authorized by my
+government to make you a proposition.”
+
+“Well, I shall hear it,” said the President.
+
+“I am authorized to offer you a large sum of money for the privilege of
+establishing a German naval base on the Pacific coast of Nicaragua.”
+
+“Enough!” cried the general with a wave of his hand. “It shall not be
+done if I can prevent it. Germany indeed. Were I able, I myself should
+draw a sword against her. You will find no German sympathy in these
+parts.”
+
+Captain von Blusen bowed his head. He said nothing further on the
+subject.
+
+“What will you do with me?” he asked.
+
+“I shall hold you until the rebels have been put down,” was the reply.
+“Then you shall be released. I wouldn’t trust you now.”
+
+He signalled two of his men and the young German officer was led away
+between them.
+
+At this moment another officer rushed up to the general.
+
+“Our presence has been discovered, sir,” he gasped. “The enemy is
+approaching.”
+
+Shirley and Mabel now perceived that the President of the Republic of
+Nicaragua, in spite of his advanced years, was a man of action.
+
+He turned rapidly from one to another of his officers, and these dashed
+quickly away. A moment later the few troops began to move, and the girls
+realized that President Garcia had taken some steps to offset the
+advance of the revolutionists.
+
+They found themselves going along with the troops.
+
+“My goodness! I wish we were back on the ship,” exclaimed Shirley.
+
+“You don’t wish it any more than I do,” declared Mabel. “I am more
+frightened than you are. Suppose there should be a battle. What would
+happen to us?”
+
+Shirley shrugged her shoulders.
+
+“You know as much about it as I do,” she made answer.
+
+Mabel looked at her in amazement.
+
+“Why, Shirley Willing!” she exclaimed. “Aren’t you afraid? I am scared
+half to death.”
+
+“I am just as badly frightened as you are,” declared Shirley. “I may not
+look it, but I am.”
+
+“I don’t believe you are frightened at all,” said Mabel.
+
+In spite of the seriousness of the situation and her declaration that
+she was badly frightened, Shirley was forced to smile at her friend’s
+words.
+
+“Well, perhaps I’m not so awfully scared,” she confessed. “I’m anxious
+to see what is going to happen.”
+
+“I know what is going to happen,” was the reply. “We are going to get
+hurt!”
+
+Mabel broke down and began to cry.
+
+Shirley took her chum gently in her arms, and stroked her hair.
+
+“There, there!” she said. “Stop crying. No one is going to hurt us. You
+are just overwrought, that’s all.”
+
+“I just know we are going to be shot—and—and killed,” sobbed Mabel.
+
+“Nonsense,” said Shirley sharply. “Look up now and stop that crying. We
+are perfectly safe. Stop crying.”
+
+Mabel looked up suddenly at the sharpness in her chum’s tone, but her
+tears soon were dried away. Shirley, in speaking as she had, had done
+the best thing possible. She had realized that it was time for sharp
+words and not for sympathy.
+
+After a march of perhaps a half hour, President Garcia called another
+halt, and then summoned his officers into consultation.
+
+The two girls stood close, but they could not make out what was being
+said. At length the general dismissed his officers with a gesture, and
+as they scattered to their respective posts, the general approached the
+two girls.
+
+“We are going to make a sharp turn to the south here,” he said quietly,
+“and then we shall move back and engage the enemy. That will put you
+safely behind us. Now, if I were you, I would bear off slightly to the
+right, and then go straight ahead. In that way you will be out of
+danger. If the firing comes closer to you, make another wide detour,
+turn about and try to make your way back to the ship. But I would not do
+that until after the battle ceases.”
+
+“Thank you, sir,” said Shirley. “We shall do as you suggest. We thank
+you for your thoughtfulness in keeping us from falling into the hands of
+the revolutionists. May you come through the battle unharmed, and may
+you be successful.”
+
+She extended her hand, and the President bent over it gravely.
+
+“I thank you for your good wishes,” he said quietly.
+
+Mabel also now advanced and extended her hand, and the President bent
+over it.
+
+“Good luck to you, Mr. President,” said Mabel.
+
+“I thank you, too, young lady,” said the President simply. “Now heed my
+injunction and betake yourselves to a place of safety. We shall advance
+at once.”
+
+Once more he bowed low to them, swung sharply about on his heel and was
+gone. With hoarse commands from the officers, the troops faced to the
+left and marched off.
+
+“I guess we had better be moving, Shirley,” said Mabel.
+
+Instead of turning to the right, they went straight back.
+
+“It should be safer here,” said Mabel as they hurried along. “The
+revolutionists are liable to advance on the right as well as on the
+left!”
+
+“I wish we could get some place where we could see,” declared Shirley.
+
+Mabel stooped in her tracks and gazed at her friend in the utmost
+astonishment.
+
+“Shirley!” she exclaimed. “Surely you don’t mean that?”
+
+“Of course I mean it. If we could only find some place where it is
+safe.”
+
+Unconsciously the girls had borne off to the left, and now suddenly they
+came upon a clearing in the midst of the woods. And as they glanced
+back, they saw the Nicaraguan government troops advancing across it.
+
+But even as they looked the troops came to a halt, and most of them fell
+to their knees. Shirley looked around quickly. Directly behind her was a
+large tree.
+
+“If we haven’t forgotten our tomboy days we’ll climb up there and watch
+the battle,” she declared.
+
+She led the way, and in spite of her misgivings, Mabel followed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.—THE GIRLS SEE A BATTLE.
+
+
+As Shirley and Mabel, from their shelter among the branches, peered
+across the plain, they saw puffs of smoke issue from the now kneeling
+body of men. Sharp reports came to their ears. The only man still
+standing erect, as they could see plainly, was President Garcia, who,
+with upraised sword, was directing the movement of his men.
+
+A man dropped his rifle and fell to the ground, and Mabel shrieked.
+
+“My goodness!” she exclaimed a moment later. “This is terrible,
+Shirley!”
+
+Shirley’s lips were compressed, and for a moment she turned her eyes
+away.
+
+The firing became louder now, and for the first time the girls noticed
+that President Garcia and his men were retreating toward them.
+
+“We had better get down out of here!” exclaimed Mabel. “We may be
+struck.”
+
+Shirley agreed, and they were about to descend, when, from behind them,
+came rapid footsteps, indicating the approach of a considerable number
+of men. Shirley and Mabel became silent.
+
+A moment later a score of dark-visaged Nicaraguans, with rifles ready
+for instant use, appeared and took up their position at the edge of the
+little woods, several of them falling flat under the very tree in which
+the two girls were perched.
+
+Mabel uttered an exclamation as the first volley was fired by these
+newcomers. In spite of the fact that she was prepared for it, the sharp
+reports of the weapons had wrung a cry of surprise from her. Shirley,
+more calm, uttered no sound.
+
+The girls could now see that the men beneath them were a part of
+President Garcia’s force, for they were shooting over the heads of their
+companions, apparently in an effort to cover the retreat of the main
+body.
+
+The latter now retreated more rapidly and at length joined forces with
+the men beneath the trees. Shirley and Mabel could hear their
+conversation plainly, but as it was carried on in Spanish, they could
+not make out the trend of it.
+
+For perhaps fifteen minutes President Garcia’s men held their position,
+firing at the enemy from the shelter of the trees.
+
+The plight of the two girls was much more serious than either realized,
+for a chance bullet was likely to hit one of them at any moment. And yet
+they felt safer in the tree than they would have felt among the soldiers
+on the ground.
+
+So far the enemy had contented themselves with lying flat on the ground
+some distance away and firing at the trees, but now, as Shirley
+perceived by peering across the plain, they were preparing for a charge.
+
+A moment later there was a wild yell, and they came forward on the run.
+They spread out as they came on, and here and there a man fell over,
+struck down by a rifle bullet.
+
+In spite of their great danger both girls became lost in wonder at the
+sight, and stared ahead with straining eyes. Shirley was brought to
+herself by the sound of something buzzing past her head. She knew in a
+moment what is was.
+
+“Mabel!” she cried. “Climb as high as you can or we shall be shot!”
+
+She scrambled higher up among the branches, and Mabel followed suit.
+
+Here no bullets flew past them, and looking down they saw that President
+Garcia was ordering his men to retreat.
+
+The government troops disappeared further back in the woods, and now the
+danger came from their bullets rather than from those of the enemy. The
+girls were in a ticklish situation and they were fully alive to their
+peril.
+
+The enemy pushed further into the woods, pursuing the government troops.
+The bullets flew less thick, the sound of firing became fainter and
+fainter, and then died away in the distance.
+
+Shirley roused herself from the trance in which she seemed to have
+fallen.
+
+“Come, Mabel,” she said. “Let’s get down and get back to the ship before
+some of them come back.”
+
+Mabel was nothing loath, and quickly the girls slid to the ground and
+advanced to the edge of the clearing. Here they stopped for a moment,
+looking about them.
+
+Several figures were sprawled about on the ground. The girls shuddered.
+
+“It is terrible,” said Shirley.
+
+“Don’t look at them,” urged Mabel. “Let’s run.”
+
+But as they were about to take to their heels, they were startled by the
+sound of a voice directly behind them.
+
+“Ha!” it said.
+
+The girls wheeled in their tracks to confront a man with rifle levelled
+directly at them. A cry of fear was rung from Mabel’s lips, but Shirley
+said nothing.
+
+The man advanced and the girls shrank back. A torrent of words poured
+from the man’s lips, but it was absolutely unintelligible to either of
+the girls.
+
+Shirley made a gesture, indicating that they did not understand, and the
+man said:
+
+“Americanos?”
+
+“Yes,” replied Shirley. “Do you speak English?”
+
+“Si!” replied the man, “a leetle!”
+
+“We want to go away,” said Shirley eagerly. “We belong on the ship in
+the harbor.”
+
+“No! Stay here. General Orizaba will return soon,” said the man in
+broken English.
+
+Shirley started to protest, but the man made a threatening gesture with
+his rifle.
+
+The two girls looked at each other in dismay.
+
+“Out of the frying pan into the fire, Mabel,” declared Shirley. “I guess
+we shall have to stay.”
+
+There was apparently no help for it. They sat down upon the grass to
+await the arrival of General Orizaba, who, they rightly guessed, was the
+commander of the revolutionary forces.
+
+Their captor stood vigilant guard. Apparently he was determined to allow
+them no chance to escape. He sat some distance away, with his rifle
+across his knees. The two girls settled themselves with their backs to a
+large tree, and made themselves as comfortable as they could under the
+circumstances.
+
+There was a snapping of a twig behind them, and Shirley glanced about
+uneasily.
+
+“S-s-h-h,” came a low voice. “Keep still and show no surprise.”
+
+Both girls recognized the voice in an instant.
+
+They maintained their composure well, and spoke only to each other.
+
+“It’s Dick!” whispered Shirley.
+
+“I know it,” replied Mabel.
+
+“Then we are safe.”
+
+The girls’ guard now put an end to their conversation. Rising he
+approached them and commanded:
+
+“Silence!”
+
+He did not hear soft footsteps passing beyond him, nor did he turn in
+time to see a figure leap from behind a tree and spring at him. The
+first he realized of his danger was when a pair of strong arms went
+round him, and he was hurled violently to the ground, his rifle flying
+from his hands.
+
+“Get the rifle, Shirley!” called Dick, as he and his opponent struggled
+for mastery.
+
+Shirley leaped forward, stopped, and when she arose she held the rifle.
+
+For a moment she considered the advisability of advancing and lending
+Dick a hand, then concluded that he was more than a match for the
+Nicaraguan. Besides, the figures were locked in such close embrace that
+she couldn’t have aided Dick if she would.
+
+Now Dick succeeded in shaking off the grip of his opponent, and sprang
+to his feet. The Nicaraguan did likewise, and sprang back.
+
+As Dick leaped forward again, the man’s hand went to his holster, and a
+revolver flashed in his hand.
+
+But before he could bring the weapon to bear, Shirley stepped quickly
+forward, levelled her rifle at him, and in a clear sharp voice, cried:
+
+“Halt!”
+
+The man wheeled quickly and as he did so, Dick sprang upon him from
+behind. A quick blow sent the revolver hurling several feet away, and
+then Dick stepped back to give free play to his boxing skill.
+
+The Nicaraguan rushed at him, but Dick stepped lightly aside, and as the
+man went by, carried on by the impetus of his rush, Dick struck out
+straight and true from the shoulder.
+
+The Nicaraguan crumpled up in a heap on the ground.
+
+Shirley and Mabel ran quickly to Dick’s side.
+
+“Are you hurt, Dick?” asked Shirley anxiously.
+
+“No!” was the smiling rejoinder, “but I would have been if you had not
+been prompt with that rifle. That’s all that saved me.”
+
+“How did you find us?” asked Mabel.
+
+“Followed you. We became alarmed at your absence and I said I thought I
+could find you. I imagined you had gone for a stroll, and when I saw
+this bunch of pirates going through the town I guessed that you would
+fall into their hands. I came along after them and just as I was about
+to go on I saw you climbing down from the tree.”
+
+“Well, you didn’t arrive a minute too soon,” declared Shirley. “We were
+badly frightened, weren’t we Mabel?”
+
+“I know I was,” was her chum’s reply. She turned to Dick. “But how——”
+
+“I’ll explain later,” interrupted Dick. “The thing to do now is to get
+away from here before they return. Come on.”
+
+The girls started on ahead of him, and Dick turned for a glance over his
+shoulder.
+
+Then he uttered an exclamation of alarm, and shouted:
+
+“Run!”
+
+For in that quick glance over his shoulder he had perceived the return
+of the revolutionists.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.—MABEL BRINGS THE BLUEJACKETS.
+
+
+Shirley and Mabel needed no further urging, and took to their heels.
+Dick followed close behind.
+
+In the one brief glance in which he had perceived the return of the
+soldiers, Dick had been unable to determine whether their presence had
+been discovered, but he believed it wise to take a chance. Hence his
+command to run.
+
+The three sped lightly over the ground and had gone some distance when
+they heard a shout from behind, followed by the sharp reports of several
+rifles.
+
+Dick stopped suddenly and called to the girls to halt. They obeyed
+instantly.
+
+“There is no use being shot,” said Dick quietly, “and although they are
+poor shots they would be sure to hit one of us sooner or later.”
+
+“Then what shall we do?” cried Mabel.
+
+“There is only one thing to do,” was the reply. “Surrender.”
+
+“Dick is right,” agreed Shirley. “It is foolish to attempt to escape.”
+
+In the meantime the band of revolutionists had been coming toward them,
+and at length surrounded the three figures. A man, who appeared to be
+the leader, though he wore no uniform nor mark of distinction, advanced
+and addressed Dick.
+
+“Who are you and what are you doing here?” he demanded in English.
+
+Dick explained, and the man heard him through quietly.
+
+“And who was it hurt Pedro back there?” and the leader waved toward the
+spot where Dick had struggled with the Nicaraguan.
+
+“I did,” he replied quietly, and explained the cause of the fight.
+
+“Well, you will have to stand trial for attacking one of my men,” said
+the leader. “I am General Orizaba.”
+
+He signalled for his men to surround the three, which was soon done, and
+they continued their march back toward the city.
+
+“Every step in this direction is better for us,” said Dick to the two
+girls, as they marched along. “We’ll get out of this trouble some way,
+be sure of that.”
+
+“Oh, I know no harm will come to us as long as you are here,” replied
+Shirley.
+
+“Thanks,” said Dick dryly. “But I don’t see how I can do much for any of
+us right now.”
+
+“Something will turn up,” said Shirley positively.
+
+“I hope it turns up soon,” declared Mabel.
+
+But if the prisoners hoped to be taken directly back to town they were
+doomed to disappointment.
+
+After crossing the clearing in the woods, General Orizaba led his men to
+the left, where after an hour’s march, he called a halt. Then he again
+approached the prisoners.
+
+“We shall camp here,” he said. “Here, also, you shall be tried for
+attacking Pedro.”
+
+Dick made no reply, but Shirley did
+
+“We are Americans,” she said, “and you don’t dare to interfere with us.”
+
+“I don’t, eh?” was the reply. “You shall see.”
+
+Pedro, it now appeared, had been revived and brought along. The general
+motioned for him to approach. He pointed to Dick and spoke in Spanish.
+It was impossible to tell what they were talking about, but all three
+were keen enough to know that it boded no good for them.
+
+The general turned again to Dick.
+
+“Pedro says you struck him without warning and without provocation,” he
+said. “I have decided, therefore, to dispense with the trial, and to fix
+your punishment myself.”
+
+“I warn you——” began Dick.
+
+“Caramba!” roared the leader, becoming very angry. “What do I care for
+your warnings, or for your friends either?”
+
+“There is an American cruiser in the harbor,” said Dick quietly. “The
+commander knows where I am, and if I am not back within two hours, he
+will land a force of sailors to see why.”
+
+General Orizaba seemed to hesitate, following these words. Then he
+became even angrier than before. He was about to speak, when a horseman
+clattered up.
+
+The general turned to him and they conversed in low tones. Then the
+horseman dismounted, and leaving his horse, made his way to where the
+rest of the revolutionists sat upon the ground some distance away.
+
+General Orizaba again faced Dick.
+
+“Dog of an Americano!” he thundered. “You shall be shot for daring to
+interfere with one of my men.”
+
+Dick only smiled.
+
+“I guess you don’t mean that,” he replied quietly.
+
+“I don’t, eh? You shall see.” He paused a moment. “But you shall live
+until sunset.”
+
+He turned to call one of his men; and at that moment, Mabel, who stood
+closest to the riderless horse, suddenly leaped forward and sprang upon
+the animal’s back.
+
+So sudden was her movement that for a moment the Nicaraguans failed to
+realize her intention.
+
+That moment was sufficient for Mabel to seize the reins and turn the
+horse’s head toward the city. Then she dug her heels into his flanks and
+away they went.
+
+Dick and Shirley were no less surprised than the Nicaraguans, and both
+uttered cries of alarm.
+
+General Orizaba darted forward with an ejaculation, and called to his
+men.
+
+“Shoot!” he cried.
+
+Rifles were brought to bear, but the horse had gained his stride and was
+galloping along like the wind. Volley after volley was fired after the
+girl, but thanks to the movement of the horse and the poor marksmanship
+of the Nicaraguans, Mabel was not touched.
+
+Rapidly she rode, nor did she draw rein when she entered the town but
+galloped straight to the pier. Here still lay the small boat of the
+_Yucatan_, manned by its crew. Rapidly explaining the situation, the
+girl urged the sailors back to the ship without waiting the return of
+the first officer, who was some place in the town.
+
+About the ship, Mabel found that Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were
+ashore searching for the girls, and so she went straight to Captain
+Anderson. That worthy acted promptly. He quickly signalled the cruiser
+_Prairie_, which Mabel, saw for the first time, perceived lay close by.
+
+The _Prairie_ signalled for the captain and Mabel to come aboard, which
+they did without loss of time. In a few words Mabel explained the
+situation to the commander of the cruiser.
+
+Action came quickly.
+
+A bugle sounded, piping the crew to quarters. The commander detailed a
+landing party of one hundred and fifty marines and sailors. These were
+quickly rowed to the shore—Mabel going with them as a guide, for she
+refused to be left behind.
+
+Once ashore, the girl led the way toward where she had left her friends,
+the men going forward at the double-quick, their weapons ready for
+instant use.
+
+When General Orizaba perceived that Mabel had made good her flight, his
+anger knew no bounds. He berated his men roundly and danced about like a
+madman. Then he turned to Dick.
+
+“But you shall not escape!” he declared.
+
+“You’ll have a squad of marines down on you in a few minutes,” replied
+Dick with a cheerful smile. “Then where will you be?”
+
+“Bah!” said the angry general. “What are a few marines? We can drive
+them back.”
+
+“Think so, do you?” asked Dick. “I’m afraid you’ll be surprised.”
+
+“You shall see,” declared the angry leader. “You shall live until you
+see your countrymen defeated.”
+
+“Guess I shall live a long time then,” said Dick, with a smile.
+
+The smile angered the leader, and he stepped close to Dick and slapped
+him across the face.
+
+Dick’s anger boiled up and he promptly sent his fist crashing into the
+general’s face, knocking him down.
+
+The young man regretted this act the next moment, for he knew that
+probably he had brought matters to a crisis.
+
+General Orizaba sprang to his feet and with a shout drew his revolver
+and covered Dick.
+
+Shirley screamed. Then General Orizaba lowered his revolver.
+
+“No, I won’t do it yet,” he said. “I promised you should see your
+countrymen defeated, and so you shall. I shall kill you later.”
+
+“Thanks,” said Dick.
+
+In spite of his apparent nonchalance, he breathed easier, however, for
+he had been at the point of death, and none knew it better than he did.
+
+“We are all right now,” he told Shirley in a low voice. “The marines and
+sailors will soon be here, and these fellows can’t stand up against
+them.”
+
+Shirley smiled at him bravely.
+
+“I know it,” she replied quietly.
+
+Now the leader of the revolutionists signalled two of his men to bind
+the prisoners. This was soon done, and they were taken well to one side
+of what proved to be the line of battle.
+
+“I do this so I may be sure you will be saved for me,” said General
+Orizaba with an evil smile. “It would be nice to have you shot down by
+American bullets, but I would rather do it myself. Besides, from here,
+you can see us defeat the Americanos.”
+
+“Many thanks for your kindness,” returned Dick. “I’ll speak a word for
+you when you are in the hands of the Americanos, as you call them.”
+
+“That,” was the reply, “will never be.”
+
+Dick shrugged his shoulders.
+
+“Have it your own way,” he said.
+
+Came a shout from one of the men who had been sent forward on scout
+duty.
+
+“The Americanos!” he cried.
+
+General Orizaba hurried toward him. Dick and Shirley drew a breath of
+relief.
+
+An instant later a long line of hurrying blue figures came into view.
+Shirley and Dick looked at them with pride in their eyes.
+
+The marines and sailors advanced at the double.
+
+“Crack! Crack! Crack! Crack!”
+
+The battle had begun!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.—END OF THE REVOLT.
+
+
+The Nicaraguans met the first charge of the bluejackets bravely enough,
+but they were now opposed to men who knew not the meaning of the word
+defeat, nor what it meant to retreat. Under the first fire from the
+Americans they wavered; at the next they began to fall back and at the
+third they turned and fled.
+
+Dick and Shirley, bound as they were, nevertheless could see how the
+fighting progressed, while thanks to the thoughtfulness of the
+revolutionary leader they were out of danger themselves.
+
+But now that the day was going against the enemy, Dick feared that
+General Orizaba, mindful of his threat, would return to his prisoners
+before seeking safety in flight. Therefore he began to devise a way of
+escape.
+
+After some effort he succeeded in getting out his pocket knife. Then,
+holding it in one of his bound hands, he bent his head and opened the
+big blade with his teeth. Fortunately the rope with which he was bound
+was not thick, and the knife was sharp.
+
+For perhaps ten minutes, holding the knife in his mouth by the handle,
+Dick sawed at the bonds on his hands. At last the rope parted. Quickly
+he untied his feet, and then unbound Shirley, who also arose to her
+feet.
+
+The Nicaraguan forces were now in full retreat, and as Dick would have
+led Shirley forward toward the town, a single figure burst into sight.
+As the man came closer Shirley and Dick could see anger and hate written
+large on his features. They recognized him upon the instant.
+
+“Orizaba!” exclaimed Shirley.
+
+“And come to fulfill his promise, I guess,” agreed Dick quietly.
+
+“Run!” cried Shirley.
+
+“What’s the use?” asked Dick. “He has a gun.”
+
+It was true. In the hands of the defeated revolutionary leader was a
+revolver of heavy caliber, and he flourished it as he came toward them.
+
+Dick turned to Shirley.
+
+“You get back out of sight!” he commanded. “I can handle this fellow!”
+
+Shirley protested.
+
+“But—but,——” she began.
+
+“Quick!” exclaimed Dick. “He is very angry and for that reason will be
+easier to handle. I don’t believe he could hit a barn door now.”
+
+Shirley followed Dick’s command and withdrew a short distance, although
+she was still in plain sight of the infuriated Nicaraguan.
+
+Standing quietly, with his hands on his hips, Dick awaited the attack of
+the Nicaraguan. A full hundred yards away, but still running, the latter
+opened fire with his revolver.
+
+“Good!” thought Dick to himself. “He can’t hit me that way, and his
+shells will soon be gone.”
+
+Five times Orizaba fired, and each time the bullet went wild.
+
+Shirley, from her place of safety, watched the encounter breathlessly.
+She stood with clenched fists and awaited the outcome of each shot
+anxiously.
+
+A sixth time Orizaba’s revolver spoke.
+
+Dick staggered, and Shirley gave utterance to a scream, while a laugh of
+derision came from the Nicaraguan.
+
+But the latter’s mirth was destined to be short-lived. Dick, still with
+a smile on his face in spite of the dull pain in his left arm where
+Orizaba’s last bullet had struck, stepped forward to meet his enemy in
+his mad rush.
+
+They came together with a shock and tumbled to the ground, where Orizaba
+clawed desperately at Dick’s face and eyes.
+
+
+“So that’s your game, eh?” muttered Dick to himself.
+
+He protected his face with his injured arm, while with the uninjured one
+he rained a shower of blows upon the Nicaraguan’s face. The latter soon
+tired of this and sprang to his feet. Dick also arose.
+
+There was a cry of alarm from Shirley as Orizaba stepped back. His hand
+went to his belt, and a knife flashed in the air. But Dick, quick as a
+cat, gave him no time to use it.
+
+He realized his danger in an instant and acted promptly. With a shout he
+sprang forward, and seized the upraised arm with his right hand. He
+twisted it fiercely, and the Nicaraguan gave a cry of pain as he
+released his hold on the knife and stepped back.
+
+As he did so, Dick drove his right fist into his face, and General
+Orizaba tumbled to the ground, where he lay still.
+
+At the same moment there was a cheer from close at hand and, turning,
+Dick saw a dozen marines who had gathered about to watch the contest.
+Shirley came forward anxiously.
+
+“Are you hurt Dick?” she asked.
+
+“Not much, I guess,” was the reply. “He winged me with the last shot,
+but I am sure it is nothing serious.”
+
+“He’s all right,” shouted one of the marines, as they gathered about him
+and congratulated him upon his fight.
+
+Shirley turned on them angrily.
+
+“And you stood off and left him to be killed,” she exclaimed. “You ought
+to be ashamed of yourselves.”
+
+“Oh, we know he could handle that fellow,” was the response, but the men
+looked at one another somewhat sheepishly.
+
+Their reason for not interfering was perfectly apparent. They had
+enjoyed the spectacle of Dick and Orizaba locked in combat, and had felt
+morally certain Dick would come out on top.
+
+“Just the same, he might have been badly hurt!” said Shirley, by no
+means convinced.
+
+“Oh, they did all right,” said Dick with a laugh. “Come Shirley, let’s
+get back to the ship and I’ll have the surgeon look at this arm.”
+
+“Are you hurt, Jack?” asked one of the men stepping forward.
+
+“Bullet in the arm,” was Dick’s reply; and he added: “But my name is not
+Jack.”
+
+“Everybody is Jack to us,” was the answer. “But had we known you were
+wounded we would have taken that fellow off your hands. Come on, there
+is Dr. Thomas over there.”
+
+Dick and Shirley followed the marines to where the surgeon was engaged
+in bandaging the wounds of an American sailor, the only man who had been
+touched by one of the enemy’s bullets.
+
+He bound Dick’s arm up quickly, remarking that it would be as good as
+new in a day or two.
+
+“Shirley!”
+
+It was Mabel’s voice, and turning, Shirley saw her chum rushing toward
+her. She ran to meet her and the greeting was affectionate.
+
+“How dared you take such a chance, Mabel?” demanded Shirley.
+
+“Well, somebody had to do it, and I was closest the horse,” was the
+reply. “I knew they couldn’t hit me.”
+
+“Nevertheless, it was a desperate risk,” said Dick, who came up at that
+moment. “I expected to see your horse go tumbling.”
+
+“But how did you get aid so quickly?” demanded Shirley.
+
+Mabel explained.
+
+“And they made me go back when the fighting began,” she continued. “I
+wanted to hunt you up immediately, but the lieutenant wouldn’t let me.”
+
+“I should say not,” declared Dick.
+
+“Shirley was in danger. Why shouldn’t I have been there?” demanded
+Mabel. “I saw Dick and the general fighting and I came forward as fast
+as I could,” the girl continued, “and when I saw the Nicaraguan go down
+I knew our troubles were over.”
+
+“And where is Dad?” asked Shirley.
+
+“I didn’t see him,” replied Mabel. “I suppose they are looking for us in
+some other part of the town. I’ll bet they are badly frightened.”
+
+“I fear so too,” replied Shirley. “I guess we had better get back as
+soon as we can. But we shall have to thank the lieutenant first.”
+
+That officer declared that he wanted no thanks.
+
+“We are glad to have been able to take a shot at those fellows,” he
+said. “We have been wanting to do it for a long time, but this is the
+first opportunity we have had. We—Hello!”
+
+He broke off suddenly. Riding rapidly toward them was a large body of
+men, and above them floated a white flag. They dismounted some distance
+away, and one approached.
+
+The girls recognized this man immediately. He was President Garcia.
+
+He rode up to the lieutenant, and introduced himself.
+
+“And I would like the person of Orizaba delivered to me,” he said
+quietly.
+
+“You shall have him,” replied the lieutenant. “It will save us trouble.”
+
+The unfortunate revolutionist, fully recovered now, was turned over to
+the President of Nicaragua and marched away. Then President Garcia
+appeared to perceive Shirley and Mabel for the first time. He raised his
+hat to them.
+
+“I am pleased that the senoritas have escaped safely,” he said quietly,
+and making a low bow to them, he turned his horse about, and a moment
+later was gone.
+
+The lieutenant in command of the marines now ordered his men back to
+their ship, and the girls accompanied them on their return march through
+the town. Dark looks were cast at them from all sides, but none ventured
+a word.
+
+“You may see they don’t love us very much in these parts,” said the
+lieutenant with a smile. “They would welcome a chance to shoot us all.”
+
+At the pier the two girls saw their fathers approaching rapidly, and
+they ran forward to meet them. The meeting was affectionate, for both
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton had been greatly alarmed at their long
+absence.
+
+“I am going to keep my eye on you in the future,” declared Mr. Willing.
+
+The girls only laughed. Both men were profuse in their praise of Dick’s
+gallant actions, and Colonel Ashton declared:
+
+“It’s a good thing we brought him along, Willing.”
+
+The marines gave the Willing party a rousing cheer as they stepped into
+the _Yucatan’s_ small boat and were rowed back to the vessel.
+
+“I’m glad to see you back,” declared Captain Anderson. “We’re late now.
+We shall leave here at once.” He turned to the first officer. “You may
+get under way immediately, sir!”
+
+And as the _Yucatan_ steamed from the harbor, the passengers gathered
+about the two girls, demanding an account of their experiences.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.—A GUATEMALA ADVENTURE.
+
+
+“This,” said Captain Anderson, waving his hand, as the steamer entered a
+little harbor, “is Champerico, the only Guatemalan port at which we
+shall touch. It is the last Central American republic we shall see.
+Would you care to go ashore?”
+
+“I would like to go,” said Shirley, with a sidelong look at her father.
+
+“You won’t go unless I do,” was Mr. Willing’s ultimatum. “You have been
+in trouble enough. I’m going to keep you in sight.” He turned to Colonel
+Ashton. “Would you care to go ashore, Ashton?”
+
+“Why, yes,” was the reply.
+
+“Good. Then we shall all go,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+“You can go with me,” said Captain Anderson. “I am going to pay my
+respects to the American consul.”
+
+An hour later a small boat put off from the ship and headed shoreward.
+In it, besides Captain Anderson and the crew, were Mr. Willing, Colonel
+Ashton, Dick, Shirley and Mabel.
+
+“We’ll keep out of trouble this time,” commented Mr. Willing.
+
+They accompanied Captain Anderson to the United States consulate, where
+they were introduced to the consul. An hour later they all started back
+toward the boat.
+
+As they walked down one of the dirty streets Captain Anderson espied a
+figure slinking along.
+
+“Hey!” he cried. “There goes that scoundrel Von Blusen, who broke his
+parole and ran away at Corinto. I’ll get him!”
+
+He darted hurriedly across the street, and laid a hand on the young
+man’s shoulder. The latter looked up in surprise, and then perceiving
+Captain Anderson, jerked suddenly free and took to his heels, running
+directly toward the Willing party.
+
+“Head him off!” cried Captain Anderson, and Dick and the two men leaped
+to obey.
+
+Straight at them rushed the young German officer, and a few feet away
+hurled himself forward with a powerful spring. He struck the three
+squarely, and all went to the ground in a tangled heap.
+
+Von Blusen was the first to regain his feet. He raised a hand as though
+to strike one of his fallen adversaries, but the approach of Captain
+Anderson at that moment caused him to turn and flee quickly.
+
+The captain made after him at top speed, calling upon him to halt.
+Around the block they ran, and then, unconsciously doubling back, Von
+Blusen once more found himself bearing down on Dick and Mr. Willing and
+Colonel Ashton.
+
+A moment later Captain Anderson, panting, hove in sight and gasped out:
+
+“Stop him!”
+
+This time the three spread out, so they would have a better chance of
+halting the fugitive. The latter ran straight at Mr. Willing and the
+force of the contact sent both to the ground. As Von Blusen arose
+Colonel Ashton leaped for him.
+
+But the German was too quick for the colonel, and missing his grasp, the
+latter sprawled on the street. Von Blusen turned just in time to meet
+Dick with a hard blow to the face, and Dick toppled over.
+
+Then Von Blusen darted up a little alleyway.
+
+Unmindful of his intention to keep a close eye on the girls, Mr.
+Willing, now red with anger, made after him, as did the colonel, Captain
+Anderson and Dick.
+
+The girls found themselves alone in the street.
+
+The noise of the chase had attracted many spectators, among them several
+members of the native police.
+
+Suddenly Captain Von Blusen emerged from the alleyway on the dead run,
+his pursuers close on his trail.
+
+Perceiving one man thus followed by many, the native officers decided to
+interfere. Von Blusen darted past them, evading their outstretched arms
+by dodging neatly; but the others were not so fortunate.
+
+Pursuers and native police collided with a shock, and there was a tangle
+of arms and legs as they rolled in the dirty street. The officers freed
+themselves first, and drawing their revolvers stood by while the others
+arose.
+
+One of them broke into a torrent of Spanish.
+
+Captain Anderson, the only member of the party who spoke the language,
+halted in his tracks.
+
+“I’m an American citizen,” he told the policeman. “Take your hands off
+me,” this to one of the officers who insisted upon holding him by the
+arm.
+
+The officer chattered volubly and clung to the arm.
+
+Captain Anderson freed his arm with a quick wrench, and tapped the
+officer lightly on the shoulder with his hand.
+
+“Caramba!” roared the Guatemalan, and levelled his revolver at the
+captain.
+
+“Caramba yourself!” cried the captain, and extending his arm suddenly,
+he took the pistol away from the little officer.
+
+The latter stamped the ground angrily and broke into another torrent of
+unintelligible words.
+
+But Captain Anderson now perceived he had acted rashly in thus giving
+way to his temper. The blood of the other native officers was aroused,
+and they surrounded the Americans gesticulating vigorously.
+
+At that moment Captain Von Blusen, who had been hovering just around the
+corner, reappeared, and approaching the officers, addressed them in
+Spanish.
+
+“These men tried to rob me,” he declared. “I want them arrested!”
+
+“Si señor! It shall be done!” replied one of the officers.
+
+“I’ll go with you to make the charge,” continued the young German.
+
+“Si señor!” said the native officer.
+
+Turning, he motioned for the four to precede him. Captain Anderson was
+inclined to hang back, as were the others, but a word from Captain Von
+Blusen decided them to go on.
+
+“They’ll shoot if you don’t go,” declared Von Blusen with a smile.
+
+Shirley and Mabel, who had been standing nearby while all this was going
+on, now made as though to approach, but Mr. Willing waved them back.
+
+“Go back to the consulate and tell the consul what has happened,” he
+called to her.
+
+The girls turned to go, but Von Blusen, realizing what was going on,
+called to the officers to stop them.
+
+“Run!” cried Captain Anderson, who was the only one who understood the
+import of the German’s words.
+
+“Halt!” cried one of the Guatemalans, as the girls broke into a run.
+
+But the girls did not understand him, and if they had, their actions
+would have been the same.
+
+They set out for the consulate at top speed and they did not stop, in
+spite of pursuit and cries of “Halt!” until they dashed in the door.
+
+The consul greeted them with an exclamation of surprise.
+
+“What’s the matter?” he demanded.
+
+Shirley explained.
+
+“And hurry,” she added tearfully, “they will lock them up in a dirty old
+jail.”
+
+The consul was forced to smile.
+
+“Oh, well, I guess it won’t hurt them any,” he replied.
+
+The girls looked at him in astonishment, and Shirley opened her mouth to
+speak. The consul silenced her with a gesture.
+
+“I’ll get them out, all right,” he assured them.
+
+He looked at his watch and continued.
+
+“It is now ten o’clock. I think I can safely promise to have them back
+aboard the _Yucatan_ by five o’clock.”
+
+“Five o’clock!” repeated Shirley. “And where will they be all that
+time?”
+
+“Jail,” was the brief reply.
+
+Shirley could not repress an exclamation of dismay.
+
+“But can’t you hurry?” she exclaimed.
+
+“Now don’t you fret,” said the consul. “There is certain red tape that
+must be gone through, and it will take time. Besides, it is needless to
+hurry. In this country no one hurries. If I seem unduly excited it will
+take longer than ever.”
+
+“Please do the best you can, then,” said Shirley.
+
+“I shall,” replied the consul. “In the meantime, you two girls return
+aboard the _Yucatan_. I’ll call my secretary and have him escort you
+back.”
+
+In response to his summons a young man appeared and the consul
+instructed him to see them back aboard their ship.
+
+“Yes, sir,” said the young man. “Come,” to the girls.
+
+He accompanied them to the wharf, where he instructed the sailors to
+take them aboard and then return and await the arrival of the captain
+and the others.
+
+It was almost six o’clock when Shirley and Mabel, gazing toward shore,
+perceived the little boat of the _Yucatan_ bobbing toward them. As it
+drew close they could make out the faces of their fathers, Dick and
+Captain Anderson.
+
+A short time later all appeared on deck. Their clothing was ruffled and
+dirty, and it was plain to the girls that their fathers were not in the
+best of temper. Nevertheless Shirley could not repress a slight dig at
+them.
+
+First she approached Captain Anderson.
+
+“And did you capture Captain Von Blusen?” she asked.
+
+“No,” grumbled the captain. “I hope I never set eyes on him again.”
+
+“Dad,” said Shirley, “do you remember what you said to us about getting
+into trouble?”
+
+Mr. Willing growled some unintelligible reply.
+
+“We’ve never been in jail yet, Dad,” continued Shirley slyly. “Were
+you?”
+
+Mr. Willing glanced at his daughter and seemed about to make some sharp
+response. Then he controlled himself and spoke:
+
+“Yes, we were in jail,” he growled. “We spent the best part of the day
+there.”
+
+“Well,” said Shirley, “you are always getting in trouble. I reckon Mabel
+and I will have to keep closer watch on you.”
+
+“I am sure of it,” declared Mabel.
+
+Dick smiled, but there was no amusement on the faces of Mr. Willing nor
+Colonel Ashton. They scowled at their daughters.
+
+“Now, Dad,” continued Shirley, “did Captain Von Blusen—”
+
+“Will you be quiet?” demanded Mr. Willing. “Haven’t we had enough
+trouble for one day without all this chatter. Come, Ashton, we’ll go to
+our cabin.”
+
+Shirley, Mabel and Dick broke into a loud laugh as the two stalked away
+arm in arm, looking neither to the right nor left.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.—UP THE MEXICAN COAST.
+
+
+The passengers aboard the _Yucatan_ gazed curiously at the approaching
+battle cruiser.
+
+It was the morning following the departure from Champerico, and the
+_Yucatan_ had been halted by a shot fired across her bow. Officers and
+passengers alike were curious as to the identity of the cruiser.
+
+So far she had shown no colors.
+
+“Do you suppose she is English?” asked Shirley of Dick, as they gazed
+over the rail at the oncoming stranger.
+
+“Must be either English or Japanese,” replied Dick. “Not much chance of
+any other vessel being in these waters, unless, of course, she is a
+United States cruiser. But that can’t be, because she would not have
+halted us.”
+
+Signs of activity became apparent aboard the cruiser, and the colors
+were run up the masthead. For a moment they could not be distinguished,
+but as the breeze caught the ensign, a gasp went up from the passengers,
+with here and there a cheer.
+
+For the colors thus displayed were the red, white and black of Germany!
+
+“My goodness! Will she shoot us?” exclaimed Shirley in some dismay.
+
+“Hardly,” declared Dick. “I don’t believe Germany wants to go to war
+with the United States.”
+
+There came a message from the German to Captain Anderson:
+
+“I am coming aboard!”
+
+A few moments later a boat put off from the cruiser, and soon scraped
+alongside the _Yucatan_. An officer appeared over the side and was
+greeted by Captain Anderson.
+
+“How did you get here?” was his first question. “I had reason to believe
+the _Yucatan_ was now in other waters.”
+
+“Well,” replied Captain Anderson dryly, “your little piracy scheme
+didn’t work, you see.”
+
+The German officer controlled his temper with an effort.
+
+“Have you a passenger by the name of Bristow aboard?”
+
+“Oh,” said the captain, “you mean Von Blusen. We did have him aboard, in
+irons. I released him on parole, and he broke it. I’ll never trust
+another German.”
+
+The German officer drew himself up angrily.
+
+“Have a care, sir!” he exclaimed. “You seem to forget that I can sink
+you on a moment’s notice.”
+
+“Oh, no I don’t. But I’m sure you won’t. Already you have troubles
+enough. I’ll thank you to dispose of your business immediately and then
+get off my ship.”
+
+“I’ll have a look at your papers,” said the German shortly.
+
+Captain Anderson led the way to his cabin.
+
+As they talked, the passengers on deck noticed smoke upon the horizon.
+Save for this little blur and the German cruiser there was nothing else
+in sight but water.
+
+The blur became larger, and at last took the shape of a vessel. As it
+drew nearer it could be seen that it was a battle cruiser. It bore down
+toward the German cruiser at full speed.
+
+“I hope it’s an Englishman,” declared Shirley.
+
+“Probably is,” said her father, “although it may be a Jap.”
+
+Still the German officer was in the cabin with Captain Anderson.
+
+Suddenly the head of another German officer appeared over the rail of
+the _Yucatan_ and dashed toward the captain’s cabin. A moment later both
+reappeared, dropped over the side and the boat made back toward the
+cruiser.
+
+The _Yucatan_ was very close, and now, at a command from Captain
+Anderson, she got under way.
+
+“If that other cruiser is a Britisher, there is bound to be a fight, and
+we don’t want to be in the way,” explained the captain. “We’ll stand off
+at a distance and look on.”
+
+This plan met the approval of the passengers, and as the _Yucatan_
+steamed toward a safe spot all eyes were turned upon the second cruiser
+waiting for her to show her colors.
+
+And at last they were unfurled, and a cheer rang the length of the ship.
+The British ensign fluttered from the mast.
+
+The German cruiser, immediately the identity of the other was
+determined, turned to flee. She seemed fully as large as the British
+ship, and there were comments of surprise aboard the _Yucatan_ that she
+didn’t offer to accept battle.
+
+But there was to be no escape for the German. The British cruiser gave
+chase, and it was soon apparent that she was much faster than the foe.
+
+There was a heavy crash as her big guns opened fire on the stern of the
+enemy. The _Yucatan’s_ passengers watched eagerly for the result.
+
+The German cruiser seemed to stagger in her stride, and a cloud of wood
+and steel flew in the air. The first shot had struck home, and in some
+manner had disabled the engines of the German. Escape being impossible,
+the latter turned to give battle.
+
+Immediately the British cruiser reduced her speed.
+
+Shirley and Mabel stood at the rail of the _Yucatan_ with clasped hands
+and strained faces.
+
+“And to think that we shall see a real sea fight!” exclaimed Mabel.
+
+“But think of the poor sailors,” said Shirley.
+
+“Of course,” said Mabel, “but they may be saved. Perhaps the German
+commander will surrender.”
+
+“I am sure he won’t,” declared Shirley.
+
+“No, he won’t surrender,” said Dick. “Whatever else you may say of the
+Germans, their bravery cannot be doubted.”
+
+Now the first gun on the German cruiser spoke, and a shell plowed up the
+water alongside the Britisher.
+
+“They’ll have the range in a minute,” said Dick, “and then they’ll go at
+it hammer and tongs.”
+
+He was right. The next shot from the German burst squarely over her
+enemy’s forward turret, putting it out of commission.
+
+There was a cheer from the few German passengers aboard the _Yucatan_.
+
+But the British cruiser more than evened up the score with her next
+shot.
+
+A shell burst squarely amidships on the German. A moment later there was
+a terrific explosion.
+
+The German cruiser seemed to part in the middle. It staggered crazily.
+She had been wounded unto death, as every passenger aboard the _Yucatan_
+realized.
+
+Men flung themselves into the sea, and struck out in the direction of
+the _Yucatan_.
+
+Captain Anderson was a humane man, and while the matter possibly was
+none of his business, he determined to aid the unfortunate victims. He
+ordered the ship’s lifeboats manned and lowered.
+
+“Look!” cried Shirley.
+
+Another terrific explosion drowned her voice. The German cruiser
+suddenly sprang into a brilliant sheet of flame, seemed to leap in the
+air, then disappeared.
+
+The calm waters of the Pacific closed over her. She was gone.
+
+Shirley and Mabel held their breath in speechless amazement. It seemed
+to them incredible that such a great ship could have been sent to the
+bottom in such a short time.
+
+“The poor sailors!” exclaimed Shirley. “I hope they will all be saved.”
+
+“They won’t be,” declared Captain Anderson, who had come up and now
+stood among the others. “With my glass I saw the commander on the bridge
+a moment before the ship went down. He has gone with her, and so,
+probably, have most of his officers.”
+
+He lifted his cap from his head, as did the passengers.
+
+“It’s a terrible thing, this war,” continued the Captain. “How many went
+down I do not know; but how many of those who did knew what they were
+fighting for? Not many.”
+
+Meanwhile the little lifeboats of the _Yucatan_ were helping the crews
+of the British cruiser pick up the survivors. The work went on with the
+utmost haste, for there were many who could not swim.
+
+Fortunately most of those who had jumped just before the explosion were
+saved. These were all taken aboard the British cruiser, and a short time
+later the British commander came aboard the _Yucatan_.
+
+Shirley and Mabel looked with some awe at this British sea fighter. He
+seemed a veritable hero in their eyes. Once on deck, he strode toward
+Captain Anderson with quick steps, his carriage erect.
+
+“I thank you for your assistance in saving many helpless sailors,” he
+said to Captain Anderson. “Without your aid many would have perished.”
+
+“How badly is your ship damaged, sir?” asked Captain Anderson, asking
+the question that was uppermost in the minds of all aboard the
+_Yucatan_.
+
+“Very little, sir,” was the reply. “Two guns shot to pieces, and five
+men injured. No man was killed. There was also some slight damage to the
+engine room. It was a notable victory.”
+
+“Indeed it was!” cried Shirley, who could keep silent no longer.
+
+The British sea captain gazed at her for a moment, then bowed slightly.
+
+Shirley’s face grew red at her own boldness, but she said nothing more.
+
+The commander of the British cruiser followed Captain Anderson to the
+latter’s cabin, where he inspected the ship’s papers. Half an hour later
+he made his way over the side of the _Yucatan_ and was soon back aboard
+the cruiser.
+
+Immediately he had left, the _Yucatan_ got under way and continued her
+journey up the Mexican coast.
+
+All the passengers remained on deck gazing after the British cruiser,
+which had turned in the opposite direction; and until she was lost to
+sight in the distance, a faint smoke marking her location, hardly an eye
+was taken from her.
+
+“Well, Shirley,” said Mr. Willing, “what did you think of the battle?”
+
+“It was wonderful,” replied the girl, clasping her hands. “I am glad the
+English won.”
+
+“And so am I,” agreed her father. “How do you think you would like to be
+a sailor aboard a man-o’-war.”
+
+“I’d love it!” declared Shirley with enthusiasm.
+
+Dick looked at her peculiarly.
+
+“I believe you would,” he said quietly at last, and, turning on his
+heel, he went below.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.—A WOMAN PLOTTER.
+
+
+Aboard the _Yucatan_ was a woman passenger, who, on the trip up the
+Pacific, had made herself very agreeable to the members of the Willing
+party. She was not an American although she spoke English fluently, with
+the slightest of accents. Neither Shirley nor Mabel had asked her
+nationality, but they had agreed that she must be a Spaniard.
+
+The woman had given her name as Mrs. Miguel Sebastian and this
+strengthened the belief of the members of the Willing party that she was
+a native of one of the Latin countries. She had come aboard the ship for
+the first time at Colon, but for several days had kept to her stateroom,
+so the passengers had not seen much of her.
+
+She was young, hardly more than twenty-five, slender, rather light
+complexioned for a Spaniard, and extremely pretty. Since leaving
+Champerico she had been much in the company of Shirley and Mabel, and
+both girls had taken an instinctive liking to her.
+
+She had travelled much, apparently, and told them tales of many lands.
+Her husband, she said, was abroad in Europe, but would join her in San
+Francisco within a month. She was well posted on current events, and
+seemed to have the history of Mexico at her finger tips.
+
+It was while the _Yucatan_ was steaming into the harbor of Acapulco, the
+first Mexican port at which they were to touch, that Mrs. Sebastian
+related some of the history of the revolution-torn republic.
+
+“I have always been greatly interested in Mexico,” she told the girls,
+as the three leaned over the rail this morning. “I have spent several
+years in the country. I have friends here in Acapulco, and I shall make
+an effort to see them while here. Would you care to go with me?”
+
+“We would love to,” declared Shirley, “but I don’t know whether Dad will
+consent to our going without him.”
+
+“We shall see,” returned Mrs. Sebastian. “I can promise you a dinner
+that you will never forget. Nowhere outside of Mexico can you get real
+Mexican food, and it will be something to remember.”
+
+Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and Dick now joined the others on deck, and
+Shirley asked for permission to accompany Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+Mr. Willing appeared somewhat dubious, but Mrs. Sebastian also asked him
+to consent.
+
+“I’ll promise to return them to you safely,” she said with a smile.
+
+“In that event, I shall give my consent to their going, madam,” returned
+Colonel Ashton gallantly.
+
+“And I,” agreed Mr. Willing.
+
+“Thanks so much,” said Mrs. Sebastian, “and I’ll go and ask Captain
+Anderson just how long we shall remain here.”
+
+She walked away.
+
+“Mr. Willing,” said Dick, “it may appear wrong, but somehow or other I
+don’t exactly trust that woman.”
+
+“Pooh!” replied Mr. Willing. “What does a youngster like you know?”
+
+“Perhaps I am wrong,” replied Dick, “but something tells me she is not
+to be trusted. She is up to some mischief.”
+
+“Why, Dick!” exclaimed Shirley. “Don’t you want us to go?”
+
+“To tell the truth I don’t,” was the reply.
+
+“Young man,” said Colonel Ashton, “you will learn, as you grow older,
+not to jump to such rash conclusions. Mrs. Sebastian is a gentlewoman.”
+
+“Right you are, Ashton,” declared Mr. Willing. “We’re old enough to
+know, eh?”
+
+The two men smiled at each other and walked away, leaving the young
+people together.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian returned a few moments later.
+
+“Captain Anderson says we shall be here until evening,” she said, “so we
+shall have plenty of time for our trip ashore. He says we may go in the
+first boat, so you girls had better run along to your cabin and get
+ready. Mr. Stanley will entertain me until you return.”
+
+Shirley and Mabel hurried away, and Dick and Mrs. Sebastian stood
+together looking across the water at the shore, which was drawing closer
+rapidly.
+
+“Where are you going when you get ashore?” asked Dick abruptly.
+
+“Why, I am going to call upon a friend,” was the smiling reply.
+
+“Then you have been here before?” questioned Dick.
+
+“Many times.”
+
+“Mrs. Sebastian,” said Dick quietly, “are you a Mexican?”
+
+The woman started back in surprise.
+
+“Why, no,” she replied at last. “I was born in Spain. Why do you ask?”
+
+“I just wondered,” was Dick’s evasive answer. “By the way, I suppose it
+is perfectly peaceful here now?”
+
+“Yes, indeed,” was the reply. “I guess the fighting is all over, now
+that General Villa has been successful in Chihuahua and other northern
+states.”
+
+“But there has been trouble down here?”
+
+“Oh yes, but it is all over. Besides, the revolutionists probably have
+not enough money to buy arms and ammunition.”
+
+“Why don’t they steal them? It wouldn’t be the first time.”
+
+Mrs. Sebastian’s face turned red.
+
+“What do you mean?” she asked angrily.
+
+“I am sorry I offended you,” Dick apologized. “I spoke thoughtlessly.”
+
+“Say no more about it,” said Mrs. Sebastian with a laugh. “I am
+naturally touchy on that subject, for I have friends who were of the
+revolutionary party.”
+
+“I see,” replied Dick, and the subject was changed as Shirley and Mabel
+returned to them.
+
+Half an hour later the _Yucatan_ dropped anchor a mile off shore and the
+small boats were lowered for such passengers as desired to land.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian, Shirley and Mabel soon found themselves in the first
+boat and making shoreward at a good clip.
+
+“We shall be back in plenty of time,” Mrs. Sebastian had called to Mr.
+Willing just before they took their places in the boat.
+
+The men nodded and waved their hands, and the occupants of the boat
+returned the salute.
+
+Now the small boat scraped the shore, and an officer sprang out and lent
+a hand to the passengers. Mrs. Sebastian was the first to go ashore, and
+Shirley and Mabel followed a moment later.
+
+The little street that ran along the water front was crowded with
+natives, dirty, ragged and unkempt, with here and there a gaily bedecked
+Mexican. They did not present a very inviting aspect, and the two girls
+shrank close to Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+The latter paid no attention to the natives, but pushed her way through
+the crowd with never a glance to right or left. She continued along the
+street until they came upon a long line of dilapidated cabs.
+
+She signalled to one of the drivers, who opened the door. Mrs. Sebastian
+motioned the girls to climb in, spoke a few quick words in Spanish to
+the driver and entered the cab. A moment later they were being driven
+through the dirty streets as fast as the old horse could go.
+
+“I thought my friend might be at the landing to meet me,” the woman
+explained, “but as I didn’t see anything of her, I thought best to drive
+right to her home.”
+
+Shirley and Mabel nodded their understanding of this, and turned to view
+the passing sights.
+
+After an hour’s drive the cab pulled up before a house somewhat larger
+than the rest, and the cabman dismounted and threw open the door.
+
+“Here we are at last,” said Mrs. Sebastian as she alighted and motioned
+the girls to follow. Then she gave the cabman a single piece of silver
+and turned to the heavy door.
+
+This she opened without the formality of a knock, and led the way across
+a small patio—a courtyard—in the center of what appeared to be the
+house itself. Here they brought up against another door, and Mrs.
+Sebastian knocked sharply three times.
+
+There was a moment’s delay, then the door swung open and a man’s face
+appeared.
+
+At sight of Mrs. Sebastian the man stepped back with a bow, and Mrs.
+Sebastian, followed by the two girls, swept by him.
+
+The door slammed behind them.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian led the way into a small but luxuriously furnished room
+off the main hall, where she turned to the man who had followed them,
+and spoke a few words in Spanish. The man bowed and departed.
+
+“I told him to announce our arrival,” explained Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+The girls surveyed the interior of the handsome apartment curiously.
+
+“I had no idea they lived so well in Mexico,” said Shirley.
+
+“Nor I,” declared Mabel.
+
+“The upper classes live as well in Mexico as elsewhere,” replied Mrs.
+Sebastian. “It is only the poorer—or peon—class that you have heard
+about, apparently.”
+
+Footsteps sounded without and a moment later a handsomely attired woman
+entered the room, followed a moment later by a fancifully garbed man.
+The woman rushed up to Mrs. Sebastian and they greeted each other
+affectionately. The man also appeared glad to see the visitor.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian then presented the girls, and it developed that both Don
+Miguel and his wife—for so they were introduced—spoke English. They
+made the girls welcome, and told them to make themselves at home.
+
+“I have promised them a real Mexican dinner,” explained Mrs. Sebastian
+with a little laugh.
+
+“They shall have it,” replied Don Miguel, throwing wide his arms.
+
+“And now,” said Mrs. Sebastian, “where can we have a talk?”
+
+“In the next room,” was the reply.
+
+“Good! I am sure my young friends will excuse me for half an hour.”
+
+She looked inquiringly at the two girls. The latter nodded, and the Don
+and two women made their way from the room.
+
+The moment they were gone, Shirley and Mabel began an inspection of the
+room. There were two windows, both of which looked on the street and
+both of which were barred.
+
+Shirley uttered an exclamation.
+
+“Barred!” she said.
+
+“That’s nothing,” laughed Mabel. “Surely you remember all windows are
+barred in Mexico.”
+
+“That’s so,” agreed Shirley.
+
+After some further inspection of the room, Mabel crossed to the door
+through which they had come, and turned the knob. Then her face paled
+and she stepped back with an exclamation of alarm.
+
+“What’s the matter, Mabel?” asked Shirley.
+
+For a moment Mabel did not reply. Again she turned the knob and then she
+stepped back and looked at Shirley.
+
+“It’s locked!” she declared.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.—CAPTAIN VON BLUSEN BOBS UP AGAIN.
+
+
+“Are you sure?” asked Shirley, her face also turning a shade whiter.
+
+“Try it yourself,” replied Mabel.
+
+Shirley advanced and laid hold of the knob, but the door would not open.
+
+The girls looked at each other in alarm.
+
+“I never heard that they always locked the doors in Mexico,” said Mabel.
+
+“Nor I,” agreed Shirley. “Do you suppose it was an accident?”
+
+“I don’t know what to think,” replied Mabel.
+
+There was no denying the fact that both girls were badly frightened.
+They darted hither and thither about the room, seeking a means of
+egress; but there was none and they finally sat down.
+
+“It must have been an accident,” said Shirley at last. “Surely Mrs.
+Sebastian would have no reason for wishing to keep us prisoners.”
+
+“That’s what I think,” Mabel agreed. “The door must have locked itself.”
+
+“Well, all we can do is wait for some one to return,” said Shirley.
+
+And so they waited.
+
+As the minutes passed, each seemingly more slowly than the one that had
+gone before, the fright of the girls increased.
+
+An hour passed and still Mrs. Sebastian had not returned.
+
+Shirley was about to speak, when they heard the sounds of footsteps
+outside and the doorknob turned. The door opened and Mrs. Sebastian
+stepped in smiling.
+
+“I had no idea I had been gone so long,” she exclaimed. “Why didn’t you
+call me? You have been as quiet as mice.”
+
+Shirley and Mabel each drew a breath of great relief.
+
+“Then you didn’t lock us in purposely?” asked Mabel.
+
+“Lock you in? What do you mean?”
+
+“The door was locked and we couldn’t get out. That’s why we were so
+quiet,” replied Shirley, laughing. “We thought you had locked us in.”
+
+“The idea!” exclaimed Mrs. Sebastian. “The door locked?” She approached
+and examined it. Then she looked up with a smile. “Why, the catch is
+on,” she exclaimed, smiling. “And were you frightened?”
+
+“No, not much,” replied Mabel slowly. “We knew it must have been locked
+accidentally.”
+
+“Of course,” replied the woman. “Now would you care to wash up a bit?
+Dinner will be ready in fifteen minutes.”
+
+The girls nodded and the woman led the way. Fifteen minutes later all
+were seated in the cozy dining room, where Shirley and Mabel had their
+first introduction to Mexican cooking.
+
+Each girl sampled everything that was placed before her, and in spite of
+their efforts to try and enjoy the meal, disappointment was written
+large on their features. Mrs. Sebastian noticed this and laughed, while
+the donna and her husband smiled slightly.
+
+“So you don’t like the Mexican dishes,” said Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+“Well, they are a little too hot for me,” said Shirley, somewhat
+ruefully.
+
+“Try some of these tortillas,” said the man, “perhaps you will find them
+to your liking, though they are warm.”
+
+The girls tried some, but with no better result. They finally gave up in
+despair.
+
+The meal over, Mrs. Sebastian led the way back to the other room, which
+apparently was the parlor. Here all sat down to talk and the girls spent
+a very pleasant afternoon.
+
+Finally Shirley looked at her watch. “What time did Captain Anderson say
+we would leave?” she asked of Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+“Soon after five o’clock,” was the reply. “Why?”
+
+“It’s almost four now,” replied Shirley. “Hadn’t we better be going?”
+
+“Oh, no, we have plenty of time,” was the answer. “It will not take us
+so long to get back.”
+
+Shirley subsided, and the others continued the conversation.
+
+At half past four Shirley again mentioned the time. Mrs. Sebastian
+arose, spoke a few words to the others in Spanish, and then came over to
+Shirley.
+
+“I have decided,” she said, laying a hand on the girl’s shoulder, “to
+remain here over night and go on by train to-morrow. Will not you and
+Mabel stay with me?”
+
+“I am sorry, but we can’t do that,” replied Shirley. “If you will call a
+cab for us and direct the driver, we shall not trouble you to take us
+back to the boat.”
+
+“But we should like to have you stay,” said the donna.
+
+“We would indeed be glad to do so, but father would worry,” said Mabel.
+
+The Don also added his voice, but the girls turned a deaf ear. Both
+arose and put on their hats. Then they approached to tell their hosts
+good-bye.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian spoke quickly to the Don and his wife in Spanish. Then
+she turned to the girls.
+
+“Come,” she said, “remove your hats and stay.”
+
+“It is impossible,” replied Mabel.
+
+“We would be glad to if we could,” said Shirley, “but we must hurry now,
+or we shall be too late, and the ship will go without us.”
+
+The girls turned toward the door.
+
+“One moment,” said Mrs. Sebastian, raising a hand.
+
+The girls halted in their tracks.
+
+“We must insist upon your staying over with us,” said the woman quietly.
+
+“But—” began Shirley.
+
+“I said we must insist,” repeated Mrs. Sebastian. “You may as well
+remove your hats.”
+
+Both girls stared at her in utter astonishment. Shirley was the first to
+grasp the significance of the situation.
+
+“Then it is true!” she exclaimed; “the door was locked! We are
+prisoners!”
+
+The man of the house bowed low.
+
+“Prisoners, or guests,” he said. “It shall be as you prefer.”
+
+Shirley did not reply, but leaped quickly toward the door. The others
+were across the room and could not interfere. The door swung open, and
+Shirley called out:
+
+“Quick, Mabel! Run!”
+
+Mabel sprang after her friend.
+
+But the time taken to open the door proved costly. Before Shirley could
+dart through it, Mrs. Sebastian had her by both shoulders, while the
+other woman held Mabel powerless.
+
+Then they led the girls back into the room and bade them sit down.
+Perceiving the uselessness of resistance, the girls obeyed.
+
+Mabel immediately broke into tears, and Shirley threw her arms about
+her.
+
+“Don’t cry, dearie,” she exclaimed. “We are in no danger. They will not
+dare to harm us.”
+
+She gazed at their three captors angrily.
+
+“What do you want with us?” she demanded.
+
+“You shall know in good time,” replied Mrs. Sebastian gruffly.
+
+Her manner had undergone a sudden change. She was no longer the
+good-natured, smiling companion of the steamer. Her face was hard, and
+she seemed to have aged ten years.
+
+She turned to the other woman.
+
+“Bring paper, pen and ink,” she commanded.
+
+The latter hurried away to obey this order, and returned a few moments
+later, bearing the required articles, which she placed on a table.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian drew up several chairs and motioned the two girls, who
+had been staring at them curiously, to take the seats.
+
+Both realized it would be useless to refuse and did as commanded. Mrs.
+Sebastian passed the paper, pen and ink to Shirley.
+
+“Write as I dictate,” she ordered.
+
+Here Shirley protested.
+
+“What is it you wish me to write?” she asked.
+
+“You’ll hear quick enough,” was the reply. “Write.”
+
+Shirley replaced the pen gently on the table.
+
+“Not until you tell me what you want me to write, and to whom,” she
+replied quietly.
+
+The others looked at her in surprise, then conversed a few moments in
+Spanish. At last Mrs. Sebastian said:
+
+“The letter is to your father and to Colonel Ashton. It will contain a
+demand for $20,000—$10,000 apiece—for your return.”
+
+Shirley rose suddenly to her feet and gave a cry of amazement.
+
+“You mean that we are to be held for ransom?” she exclaimed in unbelief.
+
+“Exactly,” replied the man.
+
+“And so you are robbers,” exclaimed Shirley scornfully.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian’s face flushed.
+
+“No,” she replied quietly. “But the patriotic forces in Mexico are in
+need of money. We have taken this means of getting it for them. Your
+fathers are rich. They will not miss the money, and it will mean so much
+to us.”
+
+“And if we refuse to write?” asked Shirley.
+
+“You probably will spend the remainder of your days in Mexico. But you
+won’t refuse. Come now, write as I dictate.”
+
+“May I speak to my friend in private first?” asked Shirley.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian hesitated. Then:
+
+“Yes, but be quick.”
+
+Shirley and Mabel put their heads close together.
+
+“Shall I write the letter, Mabel?” asked Shirley.
+
+“Yes,” was the instant reply. “Then Dad will know we are in danger and
+just what sort of danger. It is the only way we can get word to the
+others. I know they will find us.”
+
+“I guess you’re right,” agreed Shirley.
+
+She returned to her place at the table, and picked up the pen.
+
+“Dictate and I shall write,” she said.
+
+“I am glad to see you are so sensible,” smiled Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+She dictated and Shirley wrote. When she had finished she had both girls
+affix their signatures, and then address an envelope.
+
+She clapped her hands and a young native boy entered the room. To him
+Mrs. Sebastian gave the letter and spoke in Spanish, whereupon the boy
+hurried away.
+
+Hardly had he gone when there came three sharp knocks at the door
+without. The conspirators looked at each other in alarm, and the hopes
+of Shirley and Mabel rose suddenly.
+
+But the latter were doomed to disappointment. Mrs. Sebastian left the
+room, only to return a few moments later followed by the figure of a
+man.
+
+Shirley took one look at him, and gave a cry of surprise.
+
+The newcomer was Captain Von Blusen!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.—THE SEARCHING PARTY.
+
+
+A long blast from the whistle of the _Yucatan_ broke the stillness of
+late afternoon.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick, who were peering shoreward from
+the deck of the steamer with straining eyes, looked anxiously at each
+other.
+
+“What can be detaining them?” exclaimed the former.
+
+“I am sure I don’t know,” returned Colonel Ashton. “They probably will
+be here in a few minutes.”
+
+A boat put off from shore; it was the last of the _Yucatan’s_ small
+craft, which had been awaiting the return of late passengers. It was too
+far away for the watchers to identify those aboard it.
+
+Mr. Willing breathed a sigh of relief.
+
+“I guess they are coming at last,” he said.
+
+The three watched the approach of the boat eagerly. At last it came
+close enough to make out the occupants. There was not a woman aboard.
+
+Cries of alarm issued from the lips of the three watchers. At the same
+moment there came another blast from the steamer’s siren.
+
+“They are not in the boat!” exclaimed Dick. “What shall we do?”
+
+Mr. Willing did not stop to reply. He hurried toward the bridge where
+Captain Anderson stood, ready to give the signal to up-anchor
+immediately the small boat was hoisted aboard.
+
+Mr. Willing, closely followed by Colonel Ashton and Dick, rushed up to
+him.
+
+“Captain!” exclaimed Mr. Willing. “My daughter and the colonel’s
+daughter and Mrs. Sebastian are still ashore. They are not in the last
+boat. What is to be done?”
+
+The captain turned the matter over in his mind.
+
+“We should be on our way now,” he replied at last. “I am afraid we shall
+have to go without them.”
+
+Mr. Willing let out a roar of protest.
+
+“No you don’t!” he cried. “You can’t go and leave my daughter behind
+like that.”
+
+“Well, what would you have me do?” asked the captain.
+
+“Wait!” was the reply. “Wait for them!”
+
+The captain looked at his watch.
+
+“It’s five thirty now,” he said. “I shall wait until six thirty.”
+
+With this the others were forced to be content.
+
+“If they haven’t come then, we’ll have the captain set us ashore,” said
+the colonel.
+
+The passengers from the last boat came over the side, and Mr. Willing
+questioned them eagerly. None had seen any sign of the missing ones.
+
+Dick, gazing over the rail, uttered a cry and pointed across the water.
+
+A boat was putting off from shore and coming toward the steamer.
+
+“I guess they are coming at last,” said Colonel Ashton. “I’ll read Mabel
+a lecture when she gets here.”
+
+As the boat approached closer it became evident that it had but a single
+occupant; and as it drew still nearer, that the occupant was a young
+native.
+
+Captain Anderson hailed him through his megaphone.
+
+“What do you want?” he shouted in Spanish.
+
+“Message for Señor Willing!” came the reply.
+
+Five minutes later, bowing and scraping, the boy put a message into Mr.
+Willing’s hands.
+
+The latter tore it open quickly and his eyes devoured the words in a
+moment. Then he gave a cry of rage.
+
+“What’s the matter?” asked Colonel Ashton and Dick in a single voice.
+
+For reply, Mr. Willing read them the contents of the letter—a demand
+for $20,000 if the girls were ever to be seen again.
+
+Mr. Willing and the others rushed again toward the captain on the
+bridge. The captain read the letter gravely.
+
+“I wish I could help you, sir,” he said at last. “But it is impossible.
+I must get under way within half an hour.
+
+“Hey! Where you going?” This last to the native boy who had suddenly
+leaped into the water, climbed into his boat and was making off toward
+the shore.
+
+“Get him!” cried the captain to his first officer.
+
+One of the _Yucatan’s_ boats put off and gave chase.
+
+But the distance was too great to overtake the fugitive, and it was soon
+apparent that he would make his escape.
+
+“If we had laid hold of him we might have learned something,” said
+Captain Anderson. “He knows where the girls are. But it’s too late now.”
+
+“What can we do?” demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+
+“My advice,” said the captain, “is that you stay behind and put the
+matter in the hands of the American consul. He can tell you better what
+to do than I can.”
+
+“Where did the message say to leave the money, Willing?” asked Colonel
+Ashton.
+
+Mr. Willing passed him the letter.
+
+“Nine o’clock, southeast corner San Francisco street, Tuesday. Check
+payable to Miguel Martinez will do. Come alone,” read the colonel.
+
+“H-m-m, must have lots of confidence in themselves if they can use a
+check.”
+
+“Now gentlemen,” said Captain Anderson, “the best I can do is to set you
+ashore. I must get under way immediately. I’m sorry, but I have my other
+passengers to think of.”
+
+Mr. Willing acknowledged the justice of this.
+
+“Give us ten minutes to get some things together and a boat to set us
+ashore then,” he said.
+
+The captain consented, and Dick and the two men hastened to their
+cabins, where they gathered what few belongings they could.
+
+“We’ll have the captain dispose of the rest in Frisco,” said the
+colonel. “We’ll get them when we get there.”
+
+This the captain agreed to do, and ten minutes later the three were
+rushing shoreward in the steamer’s powerful gasoline launch. Immediately
+they clambered out, the launch put back to the ship.
+
+“Reckon we had better go straight to the consulate, colonel,” said Mr.
+Willing.
+
+“Right. But how are we going to find it?”
+
+“I’ll try some of these natives. Some of ’em must speak English.”
+
+After two unsuccessful attempts, Mr. Willing was successful in his
+quest.
+
+Half an hour later they were in the presence of the American Consul, Mr.
+Edwards, to whom they explained the matter.
+
+“What are they, a band of robbers?” asked Dick.
+
+“I should say they are probably revolutionists,” replied the consul.
+“The situation here is peculiar. All factions are at war with each
+other. The latest so-called patriots are followers of Carranza, and I
+happen to know are without funds. If they can’t pay their men they will
+lose them. I wouldn’t be surprised if they were the ones who had
+captured your daughters.”
+
+“Well, what are we going to do about it?” demanded Mr. Willing.
+
+“To tell the truth, there isn’t much we can do. Officially, I am
+powerless. The United States hasn’t recognized the Carranza faction, and
+for that reason I cannot call on its agents officially. However, I can
+pay a personal call upon Señor Jorge Hernandez. He may know something.”
+
+“Then let’s get busy at once,” cried Dick.
+
+“I don’t suppose you care to pay this ransom, Mr. Willing?” asked the
+consul.
+
+“I’ll pay it if I can’t get my daughter back any other way. If she is in
+danger I shall pay it anyhow.”
+
+“I am sure that she is in no danger of violence,” returned the consul.
+“They would not harm an American at this crisis. All they will do is to
+hold her in the hope that eventually you will pay. I would advise
+against paying the ransom at once.”
+
+“I shall follow your advice, sir,” said Mr. Willing. “You know more
+about these brutes than I do.”
+
+“Then we shall call on Hernandez,” said the consul. “Come.”
+
+He called a cab, and all were soon at the home of Señor Hernandez, who
+Consul Edwards explained, was one of the foremost of the revolutionists
+in western Mexico.
+
+Señor Hernandez received them cordially, and expressed surprise at the
+story Mr. Willing related. He even called his wife into consultation.
+
+“If our party is concerned in this matter I am not aware of it,” he told
+them. “I shall make inquiries, and if I find it is true, someone shall
+pay dearly.”
+
+“Oh, some of your fellows have captured them all right,” declared Dick
+angrily. “I wouldn’t be surprised if you know all about it.”
+
+“Sir!” exclaimed the Mexican, drawing himself up.
+
+“Mr. Stanley!” exclaimed the consul. “You forget yourself!”
+
+Even Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton apologized to the Mexican for Dick’s
+outburst.
+
+“Say no more about it, señors,” was the suave reply. “Youth is always
+hot-headed, you know.”
+
+“I didn’t say it because I am hot-headed,” declared Dick. “I said it
+because I mean it.”
+
+Hernandez gazed at the others with an air of wounded dignity.
+
+“If I am to be insulted, I shall not continue the interview longer,” he
+said.
+
+“The boy meant no harm, señor,” said the consul. “He is just angry,
+that’s all.”
+
+“Then, I shall speak more with you if he is excused,” was the reply.
+
+The consul looked at Dick.
+
+“You had better go outside,” he said. “You have already made trouble
+enough.”
+
+Dick was on the point of making an angry retort, but checked himself.
+
+“Very well,” he said. “I shall wait for you without.”
+
+He left the room, and went out on to the street, where he stood gazing
+first this way and then that while he waited for the appearance of the
+others.
+
+A man swung sharply past him in the darkness. Dick was caught by the
+other’s erect carriage, plainly that of a military man.
+
+“Too tall for a Mexican,” muttered Dick. “I’ll have a look at him.”
+
+He followed. Under a dim street light half a block away the man paused
+to light a cigar. The flare of the match lighted up his features.
+
+“Von Blusen!” exclaimed Dick. “I’ll bet he is mixed up in this in some
+way. I’ll follow him.”
+
+Taking pains to avoid being discovered, he set out on Von Blusen’s
+trail.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.—FLIGHT.
+
+
+When Mrs. Sebastian entered the room where Shirley and Mabel were held
+prisoners, followed by Captain Von Blusen, she immediately addressed her
+fellow conspirators.
+
+“This,” she said, indicating the German officer, “is Captain Von Blusen,
+a German naval officer. He informs me that he is seeking, for his
+government, a naval base on the Pacific. In return for this the German
+government will pay handsomely.”
+
+“In that event,” replied the Mexican, who it now developed was none
+other than Miguel Martinez, “we may do business. Take a seat, señor.”
+
+Von Blusen did so, and for the first time his eyes fell upon the two
+girls.
+
+“Miss Ashton! Miss Willing!” he exclaimed. “What are you doing here?”
+
+“We are prisoners,” replied Shirley bitterly.
+
+“Why?” demanded the captain.
+
+“Held for ransom,” replied Shirley.
+
+The captain smiled.
+
+“A good idea,” he said turning to the others. “An excellent manner in
+which to raise money, providing you are not caught.”
+
+“I was not aware that you were acquainted with these young ladies,” said
+Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+“Oh, yes indeed! I know them well,” was the reply. “In fact I have a
+little score to settle with them myself. One of our best laid plans was
+foiled because of them.”
+
+“So?” queried Martinez. “Will you explain, captain?”
+
+“With pleasure.”
+
+The captain did so, and the others listened with amazement to the story
+of the plot to capture the _Yucatan_, and its ultimate outcome.
+
+“They are smart girls,” declared Mrs. Sebastian, “but this time I
+believe we have them safe.”
+
+“I sincerely hope so,” was the reply.
+
+An hour later the girls were left alone.
+
+“What on earth shall we do?” exclaimed Mabel.
+
+“There is nothing we can do,” replied Shirley. “We must wait for some
+one to rescue us.”
+
+“Do you suppose there is anything in what Captain Von Blusen gave as his
+reason for being here?”
+
+“Of course; but the thing that puzzles me is how he got here so soon.
+You remember how we left him?”
+
+“Yes. But he’s a very resourceful man. I wish he were on our side.”
+
+“So do I. If he were, we might get away.”
+
+It was after seven o’clock when Mrs. Sebastian, Martinez and his wife
+reentered the room.
+
+“We have had no reply from your fathers as yet,” said the former.
+“However, we did not really expect one. It is to be hoped for your sakes
+that they leave the money to-night.”
+
+“I don’t believe they will,” replied Shirley quietly.
+
+“So much the worse for you then.”
+
+At this moment a native boy came in and announced that the American
+consul was without, accompanied by two strangers, and that he desired
+immediate communication with Señor Hernandez.
+
+“Well, they are on the trail,” said Martinez, with a laugh. “I wonder
+what the consul would think if he knew that Hernandez and Martinez were
+one and the same person. Well, I shall see the consul. You be very quiet
+in here, for you know how sounds carry in this house.”
+
+Mrs. Sebastian nodded, and Martinez, alias Hernandez, made his way from
+the room.
+
+He returned an hour later with a smile on his face.
+
+“I’ve thrown them off the track, all right,” he said gleefully. “I was
+startled for a moment, though. There was a little whipper-snapper with
+the two Americanos—Señor Stanley is his name—and he accused me of
+knowing the whereabouts of the prisoners. I denied it, and Consul
+Edwards rebuked him and sent him from the room.”
+
+At this moment there came footsteps running rapidly down the hall, and a
+moment later Captain Von Blusen burst in excitedly.
+
+“Quick!” he cried. “We must get away from here.”
+
+“Here! here!” said Hernandez calmly. “What is the matter? Give an
+account of yourself.”
+
+“I was walking along the street,” said Von Blusen, “when I came across
+one of the Americans from aboard the _Yucatan_.”
+
+“Who?” demanded Mrs. Sebastian anxiously.
+
+“Young Stanley,” cried the captain.
+
+“Stanley?” repeated the others.
+
+“Yes. I heard someone following me, and I waited for him to come up.
+When I saw who it was I hit him with my fist and knocked him down. He
+was up in a moment, though, and pitched into me. We had quite a tussle,
+but I finally managed to get away and come here to warn you.”
+
+“And were you followed?”
+
+“I don’t know.”
+
+“The Kaiser must be proud of you,” sneered Hernandez. “If you have
+botched his plans as you have ours, he would have you shot. Come,” he
+turned to the two women, “the game is up. We shall have to fly. If the
+Americano has followed this man here, my connection must soon be
+discovered. Consul Edwards will suspect. We must fly!”
+
+“Where?” exclaimed Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+“Mazatlan. We have just time to catch the night train. Hurry!”
+
+The two women turned and dashed from the room and Hernandez turned to
+the girls.
+
+“Put on your hats,” he said gruffly.
+
+The girls obeyed without a word, for they could see the man was very
+angry.
+
+Then he turned to Captain Von Blusen.
+
+“As for you,” he said, “you keep out of my sight in the future. Approach
+me again and I will have you shot.”
+
+“But—” began the captain.
+
+Hernandez produced a revolver which he levelled at the German.
+
+“I guess I had better do it now,” he declared. “It will save trouble.”
+
+His finger tightened on the trigger.
+
+But before he could fire, Shirley sprang forward with a cry and seized
+the arm that held the revolver.
+
+Hernandez whirled on her angrily, but as he did so, Captain Von Blusen
+sprang forward and struck the man a heavy blow on the head with his
+fist. Hernandez toppled over.
+
+Captain Von Blusen turned to the girls.
+
+“I can do you no good here,” he said hurriedly. “I’ll tell your friends
+where you are being taken and we shall save you.”
+
+He darted from the room and disappeared.
+
+Shirley and Mabel made as though to follow him, but before they reached
+the door, the two women reappeared. Mrs. Sebastian took in the situation
+with a quick glance and bent over Hernandez, who was now stirring
+feebly. Directly he sat up and his gaze roved about the room.
+
+“Where did he go?” he cried.
+
+“Who?” asked his wife.
+
+“The German! The man who knocked me down.”
+
+“He’s gone,” said Mrs. Sebastian. “Come, Hernandez, we have no time to
+lose.”
+
+Hernandez staggered to his feet, and his gaze rested on Shirley. He took
+a threatening step forward.
+
+“You—” he began.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian threw herself between them.
+
+“There will be no harm done these girls while I am here,” she said
+quietly. “Please remember that.”
+
+As Hernandez still seemed on the point of trying to get at Shirley, the
+woman suddenly produced a revolver, which she levelled directly at him.
+
+“Stand back!” she cried. “Haven’t you any sense? Don’t you know what
+would happen should harm befall either of these girls?”
+
+“She is right,” said the man’s wife. “Come, let us go.”
+
+Hernandez muttered to himself, but he turned away.
+
+In response to his call the native boy again appeared and announced that
+a closed cab was at the door.
+
+Hernandez led the way, and Mrs. Sebastian motioned for the girls to
+follow him. The two women brought up the rear.
+
+Outside all climbed into the cab and were soon being driven away.
+
+Neither girl uttered a word as the cab bumped along the uneven street,
+but each was badly frightened. For half an hour the cab continued its
+way and then it came to a stop.
+
+“Not a word!” ordered Hernandez of the two girls, as he prepared to
+alight.
+
+The girls had sense enough to obey this injunction and went into the
+little station, dimly lighted, and boarded the waiting train without so
+much as speaking to each other.
+
+As Shirley glanced back over her shoulder while climbing up the steps,
+she caught sight of a familiar figure lurking in the shadows. She could
+not be certain, but she felt positive that the man was Captain Von
+Blusen.
+
+Captors and captives took seats at the rear end of the last car, where
+they sat in silence until the train began to move. Then, for the first
+time, did Hernandez breath in relief.
+
+“Safe enough now,” he declared.
+
+“But they may telegraph ahead and have us detained,” said his wife.
+
+“No one knows we have come this way save Captain Von Blusen,” was the
+reply, “and it will not be to his interests to interfere with us.”
+
+Shirley and Mabel now found themselves able to converse without being
+overheard by the others.
+
+“I saw Captain Von Blusen in the station as we climbed aboard,” said
+Shirley.
+
+“Do you think he will help us?” asked Mabel.
+
+“I don’t know, but some way I feel that he will. He seemed sincere
+enough when he spoke just before he left.”
+
+“My goodness gracious! I hope something turns up soon!” exclaimed Mabel.
+“Our Dads must be worried to death.”
+
+“Well, if Dick is on the trail, I am sure we shall be rescued,” declared
+Shirley.
+
+“You have lots of confidence in Dick, haven’t you?” asked Mabel.
+
+“Of course. Why shouldn’t I have?”
+
+“Well, I hope we are rescued soon.”
+
+“Some way, I believe we shall be,” declared Shirley.
+
+The train sped on through the darkness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.—ON THE TRAIL.
+
+
+It will now be necessary to go back a little ways.
+
+When Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing, and U. S. Consul Edwards left the home
+of Hernandez, alias Martinez, following their brief interview, they
+looked about for Dick who had said he would wait for them on the
+outside; but having set forth on the trail of Captain Blusen, Dick, of
+course, was not in sight.
+
+“Guess the young man has gone back to the consulate in a huff,” said the
+consul with a slight smile.
+
+“He shouldn’t have spoken as he did,” declared Mr. Willing.
+
+“Is there any chance that he was right in his conjectures?” asked
+Colonel Ashton slowly.
+
+“Hardly,” replied the consul dryly. “Hernandez is a queer man, but he
+would hardly do a thing like that.”
+
+“Well, I don’t know,” replied the colonel. “I have found that you never
+go far wrong when you listen to what a newspaper reporter says. They
+seem to smell out these things.”
+
+“He’s on the wrong scent now,” declared Edwards.
+
+At the consulate they could find no trace of Dick.
+
+“What can have happened?” demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+
+“Oh, he’ll turn up,” declared the consul. “We’ll wait.”
+
+They sat down to await the return of Dick, meanwhile talking over what
+was best to be done.
+
+Meantime, Dick, on the trail of Captain Von Blusen, was having troubles
+of his own. He had approached too close behind the German, and the
+latter had realized he was being followed.
+
+Rounding a corner, the German officer stopped abruptly. As Dick swung
+around the corner he recognized him instantly and struck out with his
+fist. The blow caught Dick on the side of the head and he went down.
+
+He was up in a moment, however, and grappled with his opponent. In this
+sort of fighting the German was no match for Dick, but he finally
+succeeded in breaking the latter’s hold, and took to his heels.
+
+Dick ran after him.
+
+Unconsciously the German took the direction from which he had just come,
+and not stopping to think that he might be followed, had thus betrayed
+the rendezvous. He ran straight to Hernandez’ home, as we already know,
+and Dick recognized it.
+
+Captain Von Blusen entered by the back door, and there Dick stopped. He
+had seen enough to tell him just how the situation stood, and realizing
+that he could accomplish little himself and that haste therefore was
+essential, he hurried back to the consulate.
+
+“Where have you been?” cried Mr. Willing jumping to his feet as Dick
+burst into the room.
+
+“I’ve been trailing Von Blusen, sir.”
+
+“Von Blusen!”
+
+“Yes, sir, and I have learned enough to warrant my belief that Hernandez
+is concerned in the disappearance of Shirley and Mabel.”
+
+In a few words he related what had occurred.
+
+Consul Edwards drummed upon the table with his fingers for several
+minutes. Then he rose to his feet.
+
+“You must be right,” he said, “although it seems impossible. Are you
+armed?”
+
+The others shook their heads. The consul left the room and returned a
+moment later with a revolver for each.
+
+“We may not need them, but it’s best to be prepared,” he said grimly.
+
+“What are you going to do?” asked Colonel Ashton.
+
+“We shall go back and call on Hernandez. In my official capacity, of
+course, I could not do this, but I’m willing to take a chance. We’ll
+search the house from top to bottom.”
+
+They did not enter the home of Hernandez by the manner in which they had
+gone before. Dick led the way to the place he had seen Captain Von
+Blusen enter, and tried the door.
+
+To his surprise it opened easily, and Dick, with weapon ready, led the
+way in. From first one room to the other they went, Consul Edwards
+lighting the way with a pocket searchlight.
+
+Suddenly Dick stooped and picked up something. The consul turned the
+light on it. It was a small handkerchief. Dick looked it over for a mark
+of identification. In the corner he saw two initials, “S. W.”
+
+He passed it to Mr. Willing.
+
+“Shirley’s!” exclaimed the latter, after a glance at it.
+
+“We are on the right track,” declared the consul.
+
+They continued the search of the house, but not a soul could they find.
+From top to bottom and back again they went, but the result, of course,
+was the same.
+
+At last they were forced to give it up.
+
+“I have it!” exclaimed Dick suddenly. “Von Blusen warned them and they
+have taken the girls some place else.”
+
+“That’s it, of course,” said the consul. “Well there is nothing more we
+can do to-night, but I’ll promise to have the town raked with a
+fine-tooth comb the first thing in the morning. If they are here, we
+shall find them before noon.”
+
+“But where can they be to-night?” demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+
+The consul shrugged his shoulders.
+
+“_Quien sabe?_ as the natives say,” he replied. “However, you may make
+sure they are in no danger.”
+
+With this the others were forced to be content, and Edwards led the way
+back to the consulate. Here he suggested cigars before all should turn
+in for the night, and they sat down to talk over the situation.
+
+“I’ll have every house in town searched from top to bottom in the
+morning,” said the consul. “They must be here, so we shall of course
+find them.”
+
+“I wish there was something we could do to-night,” declared Dick. “This
+inaction makes me restless.”
+
+“It makes me that way too, young man,” declared Mr. Willing, “but the
+consul undoubtedly knows best. We shall leave it to him.”
+
+Consul Edwards looked at Dick inquisitively.
+
+“What I would like to have you tell me,” he said, “is why you suspected
+Hernandez in the first place?”
+
+“I don’t know exactly,” replied Dick slowly. “But he is a shifty-eyed
+old villain, and can’t look at you. I have learned that a man like that
+is not to be trusted. I was morally certain he was lying. I don’t know
+why, but I just seemed to feel it.”
+
+“Well, you figured it out and no mistake. I wouldn’t be surprised now to
+learn that Hernandez and Martinez are one and the same person.”
+
+“They are!” came a voice from one of the open windows.
+
+The four within the room started suddenly to their feet, and the consul
+advanced.
+
+“Who and what are you?” he called, with his hand resting on his
+revolver. “Come out and show yourself.”
+
+There was a sound of someone climbing in the window, and a moment later
+a man stood before them. Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and Dick leaped to
+their feet with cries of amazement.
+
+The newcomer was Captain Von Blusen.
+
+Dick took a quick stride forward, and his hand grasped the young German
+by the collar of his coat.
+
+“I’ll guarantee you won’t get away this time,” he said grimly.
+
+“Who are you and what do you want here?” demanded the consul, who had
+never seen the officer before.
+
+“This,” said Dick to the consul, “is the man who gave the warning in
+time to allow the girls to be taken to some other hiding place.”
+
+“Is that true, sir?” demanded the consul, taking a step forward.
+
+Von Blusen nodded.
+
+“It is,” he replied briefly.
+
+“Then you shall answer to me for your part in this outrage,” declared
+Mr. Willing, advancing with great anger.
+
+“And to me,” declared Colonel Ashton, also advancing.
+
+Captain Von Blusen raised a hand.
+
+“One moment, gentlemen,” he said calmly.
+
+“Give the man a chance to speak,” said the consul. “He shall not get
+away, and I’ll give you my word he’ll do no further mischief. What have
+you to say for yourself?”
+
+“Well, I can tell you where the two young ladies have been taken.”
+
+“You can?” exclaimed the colonel eagerly. “Where?”
+
+“Mazatlan!”
+
+“Mazatlan? Where is Mazatlan?” demanded the consul.
+
+“As to that I cannot say. They left on the train not half an hour ago.”
+
+“Are you sure?”
+
+“Positive. I followed to make certain, that I might tell you.”
+
+“And why are you so interested in telling us?” asked Dick skeptically.
+
+“For one reason, because Miss Willing saved my life no longer than an
+hour ago,” was the calm reply.
+
+“It is true,” he continued, seeing that the others eyed him in
+amazement.
+
+He then went into details of the scene that had occurred following his
+return to Hernandez after his fight with Dick in the street.
+
+“But how are we going to find them in Mazatlan?” exclaimed Colonel
+Ashton.
+
+“You might wire ahead and have them taken from the train,” suggested
+Dick.
+
+“No, I have a better plan than that,” declared the consul.
+
+“What is it?” asked the others eagerly.
+
+“We’ll kill two birds with one stone. I’ll wire the American consular
+agent there to have them shadowed when they leave the train. Then we’ll
+not only be able to rescue the young ladies, but the Mexican authorities
+will nab the plotters.”
+
+“An excellent plan,” declared Colonel Ashton. “Now how shall we get
+there?”
+
+“There is not another train till morning,” said the consul, “but,” and a
+twinkle came into his eyes, “if you have the price, I can guarantee to
+have a special engine and one car ready to go within the hour, and I can
+promise a clear track ahead.”
+
+“Let’s have it no matter what the cost!” roared Mr. Willing. “I want my
+girl back as soon as I can get her!”
+
+“And so do I,” shouted Colonel Ashton.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.—IN MAZATLAN.
+
+
+It was a long tedious journey to Mazatlan, and it was after noon of the
+following day when Shirley and Mabel followed their captors from the
+train upon which they had spent the night and morning.
+
+“I’m glad to get off that train, I don’t care what happens,” said Mabel
+as the five made their way through the dingy-looking station.
+
+“I should say so,” agreed Shirley. “I’m so sleepy I could fall right
+over here.”
+
+“I managed to get a few winks during the night,” returned Mabel. “I
+curled up in the seat.”
+
+“I couldn’t sleep that way. I tried, but it was no use.”
+
+They had now reached the street side of the station, and here Hernandez
+signalled a passing cab. Into this the girls were thrust and then the
+two women and the man climbed in. Hernandez gave an address to the
+driver, and the cab whirled away.
+
+None of the occupants saw a man, who had been loitering about the
+station when the train pulled in, hail a second cab and come after them.
+This was the man who had been delegated to shadow them upon the request,
+by wire, of Consul Edwards at Acapulco.
+
+To Shirley and Mabel it seemed that they rode through the streets of the
+city for hours before the cab stopped its bumping and drew up before a
+typical Mexican native house in the outskirts of the town. Hernandez and
+the two women climbed out, and the girls followed them into the house.
+
+The man in the pursuing cab ordered his driver to halt while still some
+distance away. Then he dismissed the driver and approached the house
+afoot. He saw the five figures enter the dwelling and approached no
+nearer, but took a stand some distance away, where from time to time, he
+looked at his watch.
+
+An hour passed, then two, and at length the man turned and walked away.
+
+Inside the house Shirley and Mabel had been shown to a back room, the
+windows of which they saw were heavily barred. Mrs. Sebastian
+accompanied them.
+
+“Now girls,” she said, “if you are quiet and make no trouble, I am sure
+that you will be freed before long.”
+
+“You mean we won’t have to wait for ransom?” asked Shirley eagerly.
+
+“No, I don’t mean that. But I am sure the money will be paid over within
+a day or two.”
+
+“And we shall have to stay here all that time?”
+
+“Yes. I wish I could interest you in our cause. You could do lots for us
+if you chose.”
+
+“Thanks, but I don’t care to listen to the troubles of criminals,”
+declared Shirley.
+
+The woman’s face turned red.
+
+“You do us an injustice,” she replied. “What I have done has been for my
+country.”
+
+“I thought you were a Spaniard,” interrupted Mabel.
+
+“I am, on my mother’s side,” was the reply. “My father was a Mexican.”
+
+“Well, I wouldn’t be mixed up in any such business,” declared Mabel. “I
+think you should be punished for the manner in which you got us in your
+power.”
+
+“But it was for my country. Surely you can understand that?”
+
+“No, I can’t understand it,” declared Shirley. “It’s robbery that you
+are attempting.”
+
+The woman shrugged her shoulders.
+
+“There is no use talking to you,” she said.
+
+She went out of the room, locking the door behind her.
+
+“Well, here we are,” said Mabel, with a wry look at her chum. “Now, what
+are we going to do?”
+
+“I wish we could escape,” declared Shirley. “I’ll tell you what. The
+next time we hear any one coming, we’ll stand behind the door, and as
+soon as they come in we’ll slip out and run. If we can reach the street
+some one may help us.”
+
+“There will be no harm trying,” Mabel agreed. “They won’t hurt us, I am
+sure.”
+
+It was several hours later before they had the opportunity of putting
+their plan to the test.
+
+“Quick! Here comes some one!” whispered Shirley.
+
+She took her stand behind the door and Mabel joined her there. A key
+turned in the lock, and the door swung slowly inward. The girls were out
+of sight behind the door.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian, being unable to see them, advanced into the room with a
+startled exclamation, and looked hurriedly about. Seizing a moment when
+the woman was looking the other way, Shirley, closely followed by Mabel,
+dashed from her place of concealment and out the door.
+
+Mabel was just disappearing through the door when Mrs. Sebastian wheeled
+suddenly about and caught sight of her. The woman sprang forward with a
+cry, but Mabel, in passing, had seized the knob of the door and pulled
+it to after her.
+
+It was the work of an instant to turn the key in the lock, and Mrs.
+Sebastian was safe in the girls’ recent prison.
+
+“Now what?” said Shirley when Mabel had come up to her.
+
+From the room they had just quitted a series of blows were rained on the
+door, and Mrs. Sebastian’s voice could be heard calling for help.
+
+“No one knows she’s in there so if the disturbance is heard they’ll
+think it is us,” declared Mabel. “If we are silent and careful now, we
+may be able to get out.”
+
+Shirley advanced cautiously and peered into the next room. Then she
+returned to Mabel.
+
+“No getting out that way,” she whispered.
+
+Mabel advanced and looked into the room beyond. In it sat Hernandez and
+his wife.
+
+Shirley nodded her head.
+
+“No, we can’t get out there,” she agreed.
+
+The girls looked about for some other means of escape.
+
+They now stood in what appeared to be a long and narrow hall, and at
+Shirley’s whispered suggestion they went back along it. Far to the rear
+they could see a faint beam of light and Shirley’s heart beat faster
+with renewed hope.
+
+At last they came to a high window, through which the light streamed. It
+was out of reach of the girls, but Shirley found a chair which she
+dragged forth and mounted. Her shoulders now were on a level with the
+window.
+
+The girl uttered an exclamation of satisfaction.
+
+“What is it, Shirley?” asked Mabel breathlessly.
+
+“We can get out here,” was the reply, “the window is not barred.”
+
+“Hurry then,” cried Mabel anxiously. “I’ll come right after you.”
+
+Shirley wasted no further words. She drew herself to the sill, and
+looked down. Then she shuddered slightly. It was a long drop, fully
+twenty feet.
+
+But Shirley did not hesitate, for she realized that the jump must be
+taken. She lowered herself until she clung to the window with her hands,
+then released her hold and dropped.
+
+She fell in a sprawling heap, and she felt a sharp pain in her ankle. In
+spite of this, she was up in an instant, however, and turned her eyes to
+the window, where Mabel’s head had just appeared.
+
+The latter drew herself to the window sill, and then glanced down at the
+ground.
+
+“I can’t do it, Shirley,” she exclaimed.
+
+“Of course you can,” called her chum. “Lower yourself as far as you can
+and then drop.”
+
+Mabel maneuvered about the window trying to get into such a position
+that she could lower herself. But her fright was such that she was
+afraid to loose her hold long enough to change her position. She looked
+down at Shirley helplessly.
+
+“I tell you I can’t,” she declared.
+
+“But you must, Mabel,” replied Shirley anxiously. “Hurry!”
+
+Again Mabel moved about, but the result was the same.
+
+“Mabel! Jump!” cried Shirley.
+
+Mabel now began to cry, as she moved about a little on her perch.
+
+“I—I—can’t, Sh-Shirley,” she said. “I am afraid!”
+
+“My goodness!” muttered Shirley to herself. “What shall I do? I can’t
+climb back up there after her.”
+
+She considered the matter for several moments, the while Mabel sat in
+the window and sobbed. Then Shirley reached a decision, and acted
+immediately.
+
+“Quick, Mabel! Here comes Hernandez!” cried Shirley.
+
+Mabel’s hesitancy and fright vanished on the instant. Quickly she
+lowered herself by her hands and dropped to the ground. She fell in a
+heap, but was unhurt and was up again in a moment.
+
+“Where is he?” she asked.
+
+Shirley was forced to laugh.
+
+“I just said that to get you down,” she returned. “If I hadn’t you would
+have stayed up there all day.”
+
+Mabel’s tension also relaxed, and the girls moved slowly away from the
+house, Shirley finding that her ankle had stopped hurting and was not
+even swollen.
+
+“Where shall we go?” asked Mabel.
+
+“American consulate, I reckon,” replied the girl, “if we can find it.”
+
+“We must find it,” said Mabel firmly.
+
+“Yes but how. Neither of us can speak Spanish.”
+
+“Then we must find a Mexican who speaks English. We should have no
+trouble doing that.”
+
+The girls had been walking along rapidly, for they wished to put as much
+space as possible between them and their recent prison; but at the same
+time they did not run for they did not wish to attract attention by the
+appearance of undue haste.
+
+Suddenly there came a cry from behind. Unconsciously both girls stopped
+in their tracks and looked back over their shoulders. But one look was
+enough.
+
+“Run!”
+
+“Run!” cried Shirley in the same breath.
+
+Dashing after them as fast as his stout body would permit, was
+Hernandez.
+
+Shirley and Mabel wasted no time in deciding what was best to be done.
+
+Keeping as close to each other as possible, they took to their heels and
+dashed madly along the street.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.—DICK IN PERIL.
+
+
+The special train bearing Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton, Dick and Captain
+Von Blusen arrived in Mazatlan only two hours after that on which
+Shirley and Mabel had reached the city. The four went at once to the
+American consulate.
+
+Consul Edwards had been unable to accompany them, but after sending the
+telegram requesting that the fugitives be shadowed, he had written a
+note to Consul Harrington at Mazatlan and this he had given to Mr.
+Willing as a means of introduction.
+
+Mr. Willing sent in the letter to the consul, and the latter received
+them immediately.
+
+“I have a man shadowing the fugitives,” said the consul. “I told him to
+report here the minute he was sure he had run his quarry to earth.”
+
+“Is there no danger they will elude him?” asked Dick anxiously.
+
+“Not much,” was the smiling reply. “Fisher was formerly a newspaperman
+and has had considerable experience along that line.”
+
+And the consul was right. A short time later Fisher appeared.
+
+“Have you found their refuge?” was Colonel Ashton’s first question after
+the introductions had been made.
+
+“I followed a man, two women and two girls to a native house in the
+eastern extremity of the city,” was the reply. “I have no doubt they are
+the right ones.”
+
+“Good,” returned the consul. “Now the first thing to do is to enlist the
+support of General Seauterey, the commandant of the city. Without him we
+can do practically nothing. But he will be glad to capture Hernandez.”
+
+The consul took his departure, announcing that he would return as soon
+as possible.
+
+Dick left the room announcing that he would take a little stroll
+outside. Mr. Willing enjoined him to be back by the time the consul
+returned.
+
+Dick, thinking deeply, was unconscious of the passing of time and the
+distance which he had walked. At last he roused himself from his reverie
+and looked at his watch.
+
+“Great Scott!” he exclaimed. “I have been gone more than an hour. I had
+better hurry back.”
+
+He gazed about him, and saw that he was in an evil-looking part of the
+town. He swung about on his heel and set out in the direction from which
+he had come.
+
+As he passed a narrow street, even dirtier-looking than the rest, an arm
+suddenly shot out and dealt him a blow across the head, knocking him to
+the ground.
+
+Dick was stunned by the force of the blow, but he was by no means
+deprived of his coolness nor resourcefulness. He rolled over quickly
+several times, seeking to put as much distance as possible between
+himself and his unseen opponent, and then scrambled quickly to his feet.
+
+Two men bore down on him. Short wiry Mexicans they were, and one held a
+knife in his hand. Dick took one look at them, then turned and ran.
+
+But the force of the blow he had just received made it impossible for
+him to run far, and soon he turned, and with his back to the wall of a
+house, faced his adversaries.
+
+Just out of striking distance the latter halted, and spoke to him in
+Spanish. Dick shook his hand, indicating that he did not understand.
+
+“Speak English,” he said.
+
+The men conversed together in low tones, then one of them spoke a single
+English word to Dick:
+
+“Money!”
+
+“Oh, I see,” said Dick, “you want my money, eh? Well, you won’t get it.
+I need it myself.”
+
+He shook his head at the men, and they gesticulated angrily, one of them
+raising his knife. Then, with a cry, they sprang forward.
+
+Dick was in a serious predicament and he realized it. But he determined
+to do his best. As the men closed on him, Dick struck out. One of the
+men staggered back.
+
+At that moment there came the sound of pattering feet down the street.
+The men drew back. A second later two running figures came into sight,
+and Dick cried out in amazement.
+
+The figures were Shirley and Mabel, and even as Dick recognized them a
+third form came into view, and this Dick immediately recognized as that
+of Hernandez.
+
+“Shirley! Mabel!” called Dick.
+
+The girls half halted in their stride, and then, with glad cries, came
+toward him.
+
+The men who had attacked Dick, seeing the approach of another man,
+turned and made their way to the next corner, where they stood to watch
+developments.
+
+Hernandez, perceiving that he had but one to contend with, and this a
+young man, advanced confidently. Shirley and Mabel had now reached
+Dick’s side, and the three faced the Mexican.
+
+Without a word Hernandez’s hand went to his pocket, but Dick was too
+quick for him.
+
+“No you don’t,” he cried, and sprang forward.
+
+His right fist shot out with stunning force, and the Mexican rolled on
+the ground, his revolver, which he had succeeded in drawing, being
+hurled from his hand.
+
+Dick quickly took each girl by the arm and urged them along.
+
+“Hurry!” he cried.
+
+What he feared came to pass.
+
+Hernandez got quickly to his feet, and perceiving the men who had so
+recently attacked Dick, he beckoned them to him.
+
+As the men came up, he waved his arm at the figures of the two girls and
+the young man.
+
+“Catch them!” he shouted. “Reward!”
+
+The men needed no further urging, but dashed after the three. Dick urged
+the girls along as swiftly as they could go, casting occasional glances
+over his shoulder. He hoped against hope that assistance would come from
+some quarter.
+
+But not a sign of a native officer did he see. The few people they
+passed looked at them curiously, and must have realized the aspect of
+things by the noise of the pursuers, but none offered to lend a helping
+hand.
+
+Several times Dick was on the point of turning back to face the
+pursuers, but he determined only to do this as a last resort to give the
+girls time to get away while he held the others back.
+
+He led the girls sharply around a corner and they ran as fast as they
+could along the dirty street. But the pursuers were gaining, as Dick
+perceived by a quick glance over his shoulder. Then Dick made his
+decision.
+
+As he rounded the next corner he whispered to the girls:
+
+“Run hard!”
+
+He released their arms and stopped, just out of sight from the pursuers.
+
+A moment later they came into view, and Dick was upon them in an
+instant, striking right and left as swiftly as he could. Just as it
+seemed there was a chance of his overcoming his two foes, a third figure
+joined in the fray.
+
+This was Hernandez himself, and he turned the balance in the favor of
+Dick’s enemies.
+
+Shirley and Mabel had gone on a few feet when Dick had turned back, for
+they had not known what he was about to do. They missed him in a moment,
+however, and stopped to see what had become of him.
+
+They saw the struggling knot of men, and Shirley cried:
+
+“Oh! Dick will be hurt! What shall we do?”
+
+“What can we do?” demanded Mabel. “Dick said to run. I guess we had
+better run.”
+
+“And leave him there like that? I should say not.”
+
+“But what can we do?” asked Mabel, in consternation.
+
+“I don’t know. But I am not going to run away.”
+
+And Shirley resolutely made her way back toward the fighters. Mabel
+followed.
+
+But aid came for Dick even as it had for his first two enemies. And the
+aid was from an unexpected source.
+
+“Hello!” exclaimed a voice in English. “What’s going on here?”
+
+“Help!” cried Dick in English.
+
+“An American, eh,” said the voice, “and three greasers attacking him
+with knives. Here goes.”
+
+Dick felt his enemies give way before him, all but one, and this one he
+sent to the ground with a hard blow to the face. Then he gazed about.
+Nearby stood Shirley and Mabel, and upon the ground were the other two
+Mexicans. Dick looked at the man who had come to his rescue, and gave a
+cry of astonishment.
+
+“Captain Anderson!”
+
+The commander of the _Yucatan_ was no less surprised. He surveyed Dick
+and the two girls critically.
+
+“How in the name of all that’s wonderful did you all get together again
+and how did you beat me here?” demanded the captain.
+
+Dick explained his arrival in a few words, and then Shirley took up the
+story.
+
+“But we had no idea of the _Yucatan_ was here,” said Dick.
+
+“I landed not fifteen minutes ago,” replied the captain. “Of course a
+train runs faster than a boat, which is the reason you are here ahead of
+me. Now I guess you had better return aboard with me.”
+
+“We’ll go to the consulate first,” declared Dick. “The others are
+probably still there.”
+
+“Good idea,” replied the captain. “I was on my way there now.”
+
+He led the way, and the others followed.
+
+But when they reached there they learned, much to the disappointment of
+both girls, that neither the consul nor any of the others were about.
+
+“Consul Harrington and his visitors accompanied General Seauterey and a
+squad of soldiers,” a clerk explained. “They left not fifteen minutes
+ago.”
+
+“Too bad,” declared Captain Anderson. He turned to the girls. “Will you
+remain here or come aboard?” he asked.
+
+“We’ll go aboard, thanks,” replied Shirley. “I want to get out of this
+city and this country. We can leave word with the clerk here, and
+Mabel’s father and mine will come aboard as soon as they return.”
+
+“Right you are,” agreed Captain Anderson. He addressed the clerk. “When
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton return with the consul,” he said, “you
+tell them to come aboard the _Yucatan_ immediately. I have important
+news for them.”
+
+“Very well, sir,” said the clerk.
+
+“Why didn’t you tell him to tell Dad we had been rescued?” asked Mabel.
+
+“Why,” replied the captain with a smile, “I was saving that for a little
+surprise.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.—ALL ABOARD AGAIN.
+
+
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton, to go back to the time that Dick left
+them after the departure of Consul Harrington, were greatly alarmed when
+the boy failed to return immediately. Half an hour after his departure
+Consul Harrington returned with General Seauterey and half a dozen
+troopers.
+
+The general announced that he was not only willing but eager to round up
+Hernandez, who, he said, was the real head of the revolution in Western
+Mexico. Mr. Willing expressed his alarm over Dick’s safety, and they
+waited ten minutes.
+
+“I’ll have my clerk tell him to wait when he comes in,” said the consul.
+“There is no use delaying longer.”
+
+To this Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton agreed.
+
+“Dick is always turning up missing,” declared the colonel.
+
+“But he always turns up safe again,” replied Mr. Willing.
+
+“Oh, he’ll be back all right,” said the consul. “He can hardly have
+fallen into any danger this time.”
+
+Fisher, the man who had trailed the conspirators to their lair, now
+summoned two automobiles, and the party climbed in. The trip to the
+house where the girls had been confined was made in record time, and a
+short distance away a halt was called.
+
+General Seauterey and his men now took the lead, and surrounded the
+house. The general himself approached the door and knocked on it loudly.
+There was no response, but a second sharp knock brought a voice from
+behind the door. It was a woman’s voice and it said:
+
+“What is wanted?”
+
+“Open the door!” demanded the general.
+
+“Who are you?”
+
+“General Seauterey.”
+
+There was an exclamation of dismay from within, and the sound of
+retreating footsteps. Again the general pounded on the door. There was
+no response and he called to two of his men.
+
+“Break down the door,” he instructed them.
+
+The heavy rifle butts of the soldiers crashed against the wood,
+shattering it. Several hard kicks and it was in splinters. With drawn
+revolver General Seauterey led the way.
+
+Two soldiers, Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Captain Von Blusen
+followed him. The others remained on guard without to prevent the escape
+of the fugitives.
+
+Through the house strode the general, throwing wide the doors of the
+various rooms. And at last he brought up against another locked door.
+This was burst in as had been the first, and the general advanced first.
+
+Came a shot from the room, and the general staggered back, then moved
+forward again. At the far side of the room were two figures, the general
+could just make out in the darkness.
+
+“Hands up!” he cried.
+
+“Don’t shoot!” came in a woman’s voice. “We surrender!”
+
+“Come forward then,” said the general.
+
+Two women, who proved to be Mrs. Hernandez and Mrs. Sebastian, advanced
+shrinking.
+
+“Where is Hernandez?” demanded the general.
+
+“He is not here,” was the reply. “We expect him back any moment.”
+
+“Where is he?”
+
+“He went after the two prisoners, who escaped.”
+
+“Your prisoners have escaped?” demanded the general.
+
+“Yes.”
+
+The general turned to one of his men.
+
+“Call the others within,” he ordered.
+
+The other four troopers came into the house, followed by the Americans
+and the German captain. Mr. Willing was the first to see Mrs. Sebastian,
+and he sprang toward her.
+
+“What have you done with my daughter, madam?” he demanded.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian shrank back from him.
+
+Colonel Ashton also stepped forward and angrily demanded that Mabel be
+produced at once. Then Mrs. Sebastian spoke.
+
+“They have escaped!” she declared.
+
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were skeptical. Mrs. Sebastian saw that
+they did not believe her.
+
+“It is true,” she declared. “They locked me in a room and jumped from a
+window. Hernandez has gone after them.”
+
+“We’ll wait here for Hernandez to return,” decided General Seauterey.
+“We’ll get him when he comes back, and if he has the prisoners it will
+save us further search.”
+
+None doubted that this was the best plan, and so all sat down to wait,
+General Seauterey meanwhile keeping watch at the door himself.
+
+Suddenly he sprang to his feet.
+
+“Here he comes—alone!” he cried.
+
+He motioned his men to the door.
+
+“He’ll run when he sees the broken door,” he said. “I’ll command him to
+halt. If he doesn’t obey, fire.”
+
+It was as the general had predicted. When Hernandez saw the broken door,
+he stopped in surprise. Then he turned and would have run. General
+Seauterey stepped forward and shouted:
+
+“Halt!”
+
+Hernandez paid no heed.
+
+“Fire!” cried the general.
+
+Two puffs of smoke and two sharp cracks. Hernandez fell to the ground,
+but sat up in a moment and seized his left foot in his hand, at the same
+time moaning with pain.
+
+“Good work, men!” cried the general. “Go and bring him here!”
+
+Two of the soldiers obeyed, and Hernandez was soon in the house.
+
+“Where are the two prisoners?” demanded the general.
+
+Hernandez looked at him and sneered.
+
+“Find out,” he said.
+
+“So I will,” returned the general.
+
+He motioned to his men.
+
+“Bind the prisoners and put them in the car outside,” he ordered.
+
+Then he led the way from the house.
+
+“I shall have this man questioned more fully,” he said to the consul,
+“and I shall send you a message to the consulate within an hour. He will
+not fail to tell what he knows of the prisoners.”
+
+With this Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were forced to be content,
+although the anxiety of each was growing at every minute.
+
+The Mexicans and their prisoners climbed into one of the automobiles,
+and the Americans and Captain von Blusen into the other. They were
+whirled back to the consulate.
+
+The clerk addressed Mr. Willing.
+
+“Captain Anderson, of the Steamship _Yucatan_, was here a few moments
+ago, sir,” he said. “He desires your presence aboard immediately. He
+says he has important news for you.”
+
+“Regarding my daughter?” asked Mr. Willing eagerly.
+
+“He didn’t say, sir,” replied the clerk.
+
+“Come, Ashton,” cried Mr. Willing excitedly. “Perhaps Captain Anderson
+has learned something.”
+
+“I shall accompany you,” said Captain von Blusen.
+
+The others offered no objection and the three hurried away together, Mr.
+Willing telling Consul Harrington that they would let him know the
+result of their trip.
+
+At the water front they were fortunate enough to find an unengaged
+boatman, who offered to put them aboard the _Yucatan_ for a fair price.
+
+“Never mind the price,” said Mr. Willing. “Hurry and get us there.”
+
+The boatman wasted no time, and soon they were heading for the big
+steamship as fast as they could go.
+
+Dusk was just falling as they went swiftly over the water, and none
+could but think what a pretty spectacle the great ship made with her
+thousands of electric lights shining brightly.
+
+“And that’s the ship you attempted to get away with, Captain Von
+Blusen,” said Mr. Willing.
+
+“Yes, and would have gotten away with but for Miss Ashton,” replied the
+captain. “However, I bear no ill will. It is the fortune of war.”
+
+“And we bear you no ill will, captain,” declared Colonel Ashton. “It is
+true that you have made us considerable trouble, but I appreciate your
+position in the matter. I know that you were acting under orders.”
+
+“Thank you,” replied the captain.
+
+“I can say the same, sir,” declared Mr. Willing, “Here, at the last, you
+have been of service to us, and in view of that, things that have gone
+before must be overlooked.”
+
+“Thank you, sir.”
+
+The little boat now scraped alongside the _Yucatan_. Several moments
+later the three were aboard the big steamship and rushing toward Captain
+Anderson’s quarters.
+
+Their arrival had been reported before they came aboard, and so they
+found Captain Anderson alone.
+
+“Glad to see you gentlemen again,” said the captain, shaking hands with
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton. He looked Captain Von Blusen over
+coldly. “I shall talk to you later,” he added.
+
+Captain Von Blusen bowed.
+
+“Oh, he is all right, captain,” said Mr. Willing. “He has been of great
+aid to us in searching for our daughters.”
+
+“So?” Captain Anderson’s stern expression relaxed a trifle. “I am glad
+to hear it.”
+
+He held out his hand, and the young German grasped it.
+
+“You but did your duty, as you saw it, I suppose,” said Captain
+Anderson.
+
+“What is the piece of news you have for us, Captain Anderson?” asked
+Colonel Willing, who had been waiting impatiently for the commander of
+the _Yucatan_ to broach the subject that had called them aboard.
+
+“Have chairs, gentlemen,” said the captain, ignoring the question.
+
+The others sat down, the older men twisting about uneasily. At last Mr.
+Willing could stand it no longer.
+
+“Captain,” he cried, jumping to his feet, “if you have any words of our
+daughters, tell us. Don’t keep us in suspense any longer.”
+
+Captain Anderson gazed at him steadily for a few moments, then arose,
+and walked to a door in his cabin.
+
+“I have three prisoners here I would like you to see,” he said quietly.
+
+With a sudden movement he threw wide the door, and there stepped forth
+first Dick, then Shirley, then Mabel.
+
+The two men absolutely ignored Dick, who stepped aside.
+
+With glad cries the others rushed toward each other. Shirley found
+herself clasped in her father’s arms, and Mabel and her father also
+clung tight together. Then they stepped back and looked at each other.
+
+“This is my little surprise,” said Captain Anderson with a smile.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.—“CAPTAIN VON BLUSEN.”
+
+
+“And when we found you had escaped we didn’t know where to look for
+you,” said Mr. Willing, in concluding the story of the search.
+
+“We never doubted that we should get away in some manner,” declared
+Shirley. “We were sure you would find us, but when the chance for escape
+came we took advantage of it.”
+
+“And where did you get to when you left the consulate?” demanded Colonel
+Ashton of Dick.
+
+Dick explained.
+
+“And if Captain Anderson had not arrived so opportunely, there is no
+telling what might have happened,” he declared. “He put the enemy to
+rout.”
+
+“It wasn’t much of a job,” replied the captain, waving aside Mr.
+Willing’s thanks. “I just touched two of them with my fists and they
+went down.”
+
+“I reckon you didn’t touch them very gently, captain,” said Colonel
+Ashton, with a grim smile.
+
+“Well, perhaps not,” answered Captain Anderson, “but it was no time for
+half way measures.” He turned to Captain Von Blusen. “And what am I to
+do with you?” he asked.
+
+“I should be glad if you would take me to San Francisco,” was the reply.
+
+Captain Anderson turned this over in his mind.
+
+“You have made much trouble for me,” he said finally, “and besides, the
+United States authorities may be looking for you, for all I know.
+However, I have no such information, and as you seem to have turned over
+a new leaf, I shall do so.”
+
+“Thank you, captain.”
+
+“I would advise you, however,” continued the captain, “to go ashore at
+the first American port instead of going to Frisco. The authorities may
+be on the lookout for you, and I don’t know what they would do with you.
+Your theft of the _Yucatan_ was nothing short of piracy.”
+
+“I suppose you are right,” returned Captain Von Blusen, “and I shall act
+upon your advice. What is the first United States port at which you
+shall touch?”
+
+“San Diego.”
+
+“Then I shall go ashore there.”
+
+“Very well, unless, of course, in the meantime I should receive word to
+hold you.”
+
+“But you won’t report the captain’s presence here?” exclaimed Shirley
+hopefully.
+
+“No; I shall say nothing about it unless I am asked.”
+
+“Thank you again, captain,” said the young officer.
+
+He turned on his heel and left the room.
+
+“When shall we get under way again, captain?” asked Colonel Ashton.
+
+“First thing in the morning,” was the reply. “We’ll probably be out of
+sight of land when you tumble out.”
+
+“We can’t get away from here any too quick to suit me,” declared
+Shirley.
+
+“No, indeed,” Mabel agreed. “We have had trouble enough to last us for a
+long time to come. The sooner we get back to civilization the better.”
+
+“And that goes for all of us,” agreed Mr. Willing.
+
+“I’m glad to have you back aboard the _Yucatan_,” declared Captain
+Anderson. “To tell the truth, I didn’t expect to see you in Mazatlan. I
+felt sure you would eventually find the young ladies safe and sound, but
+I feared I should have to make the rest of the trip without you. I tell
+you, it made me feel good to run across young Stanley here this
+afternoon.”
+
+“It didn’t make you feel as good as it did me, captain,” returned Dick
+significantly.
+
+“Well, perhaps not under the circumstances,” laughed the captain. “The
+only one of our passengers who will not complete the trip is Mrs.
+Sebastian.”
+
+“And a good thing for all concerned,” declared Colonel Ashton. “I don’t
+see how she fooled us so completely, Willing.”
+
+“She did though,” returned Mr. Willing. “I would never have suspected
+her of having any ulterior motives.”
+
+“You wouldn’t listen to me,” said Dick. “I suspected her from the first.
+Now I can say ‘I told you so.’”
+
+“We’ll place more confidence in your foresight in the future,” declared
+the colonel.
+
+“I don’t want to run you away,” said Captain Anderson, “but it’s my
+belief you had all better turn in. You look fagged out, the whole bunch
+of you. Sleep is the best remedy.”
+
+“You are right, captain,” declared Shirley. “I feel as though I could go
+to sleep standing on my feet.”
+
+They bade the captain good-night, thanked him again for his assistance,
+and made their way to their cabin, where, after some further talk, all
+turned in.
+
+So completely were they exhausted that it was after eight o’clock the
+following morning when Shirley, the first to awake, sprang up. She
+glanced out the window of her stateroom. The sun shone brightly, and
+from the barely perceptible motion of the steamer she knew they were
+moving.
+
+She called Mabel, and the girls dressed quickly. Shirley knocked on the
+next door and aroused the others, and an hour later, after a hearty
+breakfast, all stood forward on the promenade deck enjoying the fresh
+morning breeze.
+
+There was not a speck of land in sight and would not be for hours. An
+hour later Captain Von Blusen joined them and after awhile Captain
+Anderson stopped to exchange a few words.
+
+It was while the commander of the _Yucatan_ was there that there came a
+hail from the lookout.
+
+“Smoke to the leeward, sir!”
+
+All glanced in the direction indicated. There, upon the distant horizon,
+was a faint cloud of smoke. As they gazed it presently took shape, and
+half an hour later it did not take the second cry of the lookout to tell
+them the approaching vessel was a battle cruiser of the first class.
+
+“Wonder what this one is?” said Shirley, as the vessel drew nearer.
+
+“I don’t know. It might be German. It has been supposed there were two
+German vessels in these waters, but we have already encountered one.
+This may be another.”
+
+“It’s hardly possible, though,” said Mr. Willing. “Captain Von Blusen,
+to your knowledge, are there any German ships of war in these waters?”
+
+“I can’t answer that question definitely, sir,” he replied. “All I can
+say is that it is possible.”
+
+“I don’t believe this is a German,” said Dick. “But whatever she is she
+is coming right toward us.”
+
+It was true. The stranger was shaping a course that would intercept the
+_Yucatan_ several miles ahead.
+
+“I wonder if she will stop us?” said Mabel.
+
+“Of course,” replied Captain Von Blusen. “The commander will probably
+come aboard to have a look at the ship’s papers.”
+
+“Will he interfere with you?” asked Mabel.
+
+“Hardly,” was the reply. “In spite of the fact that I am a German, he
+will not dare to interfere with me aboard a neutral ship.”
+
+“Boom!”
+
+It was the sound of a great gun aboard the cruiser.
+
+“Signal to heave-to,” said Captain Anderson.
+
+He made his way to the bridge, and in response to his command, the
+_Yucatan_ came to a pause. Then all eagerly waited for the cruiser to
+show her colors.
+
+“German!” was the audible gasp from the passengers as the red, white and
+black of the German Empire were unfurled at the masthead.
+
+“I am coming aboard you,” was the message the German commander flashed
+to Captain Anderson.
+
+A small boat put off from the cruiser and soon bumped alongside the
+_Yucatan_. A moment later an officer in a smart uniform came over the
+side. He made his way at once to where Captain Anderson stood on the
+bridge.
+
+“Is this the way you meet a German naval officer?” he demanded angrily.
+
+Captain Anderson looked at him in surprise.
+
+“What would you have me do?” he demanded, taking a step forward.
+
+“And when you address me, say sir!” exclaimed the German, who seemed
+rather young and possessed of much self-importance. “You should have met
+me as I came over-side.”
+
+“Say sir to you, eh?” exclaimed Captain Anderson. “If you don’t get off
+my ship in five minutes I’ll throw you over the rail.”
+
+The German officer stepped back, and half drew a revolver. Captain
+Anderson advanced another step.
+
+But interference came from an unexpected source.
+
+Captain Von Blusen, who had stood close enough to overhear this
+conversation, suddenly ascended to the bridge. He walked quickly up
+behind the German officer, and seizing him by the shoulder, swung him
+around sharply.
+
+“You forget yourself, Lieutenant Von Meyers!” he said angrily. “Get back
+to your boat!”
+
+The German lieutenant gazed at this newcomer threateningly, then a look
+of the greatest astonishment passed over his face. He took three quick
+steps backward.
+
+Captain Von Blusen stood perfectly erect, one hand pointing toward the
+small boat from which the German lieutenant had just climbed to the deck
+of the _Yucatan_. He said no further word.
+
+And while officers and passengers of the _Yucatan_ looked on in
+amazement, the German lieutenant took two quick steps forward again,
+fell upon one knee, took Captain Von Blusen’s other hand and touched it
+with his lips!
+
+Then he arose, saluted, and walked rapidly away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX.—THROUGH THE GOLDEN GATE.
+
+
+There was an audible gasp from passengers and crew, and the same
+question was upon every lip:
+
+“Who is he?”
+
+As the German lieutenant reached the side of the ship, Captain Von
+Blusen spoke again:
+
+“Lieutenant Von Meyers!”
+
+The lieutenant turned about sharply, and came to attention.
+
+“You will wait with the boat. I shall go with you.”
+
+The lieutenant saluted again and stood stiffly erect in his tracks.
+
+Captain Von Blusen turned to Captain Anderson.
+
+“I shall relieve you of the responsibility of my presence immediately,
+captain,” he said quietly. “I shall go aboard the cruiser.”
+
+Captain Anderson was too much taken by surprise to mutter more than:
+
+“Very well, sir.”
+
+Why he added the “sir” the captain could not have told, but there was
+something in the bearing of the man that faced him that called it forth
+involuntarily.
+
+Captain Von Blusen held out his hand, and the commander of the _Yucatan_
+grasped it.
+
+“Good luck to you, sir,” said the latter.
+
+“And to you,” returned Captain Von Blusen.
+
+He descended from the bridge, and made his way to where the Willing
+party stood gazing at him in open-eyed wonder.
+
+The German officer first addressed Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton.
+
+“I am sorry that I have been the means of putting you to so much
+trouble,” he said, with a slight bow, “but whatever I did I considered
+in line with my duty. Please believe that.”
+
+“I have no doubt of it,” replied Mr. Willing.
+
+“Nor I,” agreed Colonel Ashton.
+
+Captain Von Blusen now turned to Dick, and with the slightest of smiles
+he extended his hand.
+
+“As you and I had a little difficulty,” he said, “I pray you will
+overlook it.”
+
+Dick grasped the extended hand, as he replied.
+
+“Why, of course. I guess I am a bit hot-headed once in a while.”
+
+“No more than I am,” returned Captain Von Blusen. “It has been my chief
+fault.”
+
+He pressed Dick’s hand once more, and then turned to the two girls, who
+had been too stunned by what they had witnessed, to speak.
+
+The captain extended a hand to each in turn and Shirley and Mabel shook
+hands with him.
+
+“I am pleased to have met you, Miss Ashton,” he said courteously, “and
+you, Miss Willing, and I regret that I have been the means of causing
+you unpleasantness. But as I have said to your fathers, what I did was
+but in the line of duty. Now I must say good-bye, but when the war is
+over,” he looked at Mabel, “I hope that I shall see you both again.”
+
+He bowed low, and before the girls could reply, he made his way toward
+the spot where the German lieutenant stood awaiting him. He motioned the
+latter to precede him over the side, and was just about to follow, when
+he seemed to think of something.
+
+He walked quickly back across the deck to where Shirley and Mabel stood,
+and spoke.
+
+“I suppose you all wonder who I am,” he said quietly, “and while I would
+greatly like to satisfy your curiosity, I fear it is impossible at this
+time.”
+
+Now Shirley found her tongue.
+
+“You can at least tell us whether you are of royal birth,” she cried.
+
+Again Captain Von Blusen bowed low.
+
+“I cannot say yes, nor can I deny it,” he answered.
+
+“Then your name is not really Captain Von Blusen?”
+
+The captain smiled and bowed, but made no reply.
+
+Now Mabel spoke.
+
+“Captain,” she said quietly, “for by such name only can we know you now,
+we should, of course, be honored with your confidence, but if you cannot
+speak at this time, I for one shall ask you no questions.”
+
+Captain Von Blusen took her hand and bent over it gallantly.
+
+“I thank you, Miss Ashton,” he replied quietly. “Some day I hope to be
+able to confide in you.”
+
+He bowed to the others, and turning sharply on his heel, made his way to
+the side of the ship and clambered over the rail.
+
+Now the passengers hurried to the side of the ship, and gazed with
+something like awe at the boat that made swiftly for the German cruiser.
+
+Captain Anderson did not give the signal to get under way until the
+cruiser’s launch was being hoisted aboard, when there broke out from the
+cruiser a salvo of guns.
+
+“A salute!” cried Captain Anderson, raising his voice to make himself
+heard. “He is some one of importance. Now I wonder——”
+
+He broke off suddenly, as he counted the number of guns and, in his
+mind, ran over the list of relatives of the German Emperor. Then his
+clouded brow cleared, and he smiled.
+
+“If he wishes to keep it a secret, I am not the man to betray it,” he
+said to himself.
+
+That Captain Anderson knew who “Captain Von Blusen” really was there
+could be no doubt, but the commander of the _Yucatan_ kept his promise
+to himself and confided to no one, in spite of the questions that were
+poured on him later.
+
+Now Captain Anderson gave the signal to get under way, and the _Yucatan_
+slowly gathered headway. The German cruiser remained stationary as the
+_Yucatan_ approached, and the big steamship passed her less than a
+quarter of a mile away.
+
+There, on the bridge of the cruiser, with the commander of the vessel
+and his officers standing at attention, stood “Captain Von Blusen.” The
+passengers waved their hands at him, and he, in return, lifted his cap
+and made a low bow.
+
+Then the passengers aboard the _Yucatan_ saw him turn to the man they
+could make out was the commander of the cruiser and give a sharp
+command. The latter repeated it to one of his officers, and a moment
+later a second salvo broke out from the cruiser. At the same time the
+German flag at the masthead was dipped in salute.
+
+“That,” said Captain Anderson calmly, “is a fine token of respect. Too
+bad we haven’t the guns with which to return it.”
+
+He gave an order, however, and the American ensign at the masthead of
+the _Yucatan_ returned the salute.
+
+These courtesies having been exchanged, all became bustle and hurry
+aboard the German cruiser, as the passengers on the _Yucatan_ could see.
+Men dashed hurriedly hither and thither, and a moment later the cruiser
+swung slowly about and headed due south.
+
+“And that is the last we shall see of Captain Von Blusen,” declared
+Shirley. “I wonder who he is.”
+
+“I haven’t any idea,” returned Mabel slowly, “but there can be no
+question that he is of high rank.”
+
+“No, there can be no question about that,” agreed Mr. Willing, who had
+overheard this conversation. “I should say that he is a member of the
+Imperial German family.”
+
+“Then what is he doing in the United States?”
+
+“I have learned a couple of Mexican words,” replied Mr. Willing. “Quien
+sabe?” (Who knows.)
+
+“But he said we should hear from him when the war is over,” declared
+Mabel.
+
+“Yes,” said Shirley, “he said ‘we’ but he meant you.”
+
+Mabel’s face turned a trifle red.
+
+“What do you mean?” she asked in some confusion.
+
+Shirley laughed.
+
+“I guess you know what I mean, all right,” she made reply. “Do you
+remember saying something like that to me once?”
+
+“But I had reason to,” protested Mabel. “It was so plain in Dick’s
+case.”
+
+“No more so than in Captain Von Blusen’s case,” declared Shirley.
+
+“I don’t see——”
+
+“Oh, yes you do. You mean you just won’t admit it. Well, you don’t have
+to. Why, what makes your face so red, Mabel?”
+
+“I don’t know what you are talking about,” declared Mabel, and turning
+about quickly, she rushed to her cabin, leaving Shirley laughing to
+herself.
+
+The steamship _Yucatan_ was forging ahead at full speed now, and was
+rapidly lessening the distance to the first California port—San Diego.
+
+“Dad,” said Shirley, “isn’t there a second fair at San Diego?”
+
+“Yes,” replied her father, “why?”
+
+“Well then, why can’t we stop off there for a day or two and go on to
+San Francisco by rail?”
+
+“We can if you wish it,” replied Mr. Willing.
+
+“Then let’s do, Dad.”
+
+“All right.”
+
+And so it was arranged. Shirley went below where she and Mabel
+immediately began gathering their things together so that they would be
+ready to leave the boat the moment it docked at San Diego.
+
+There was no question that the girls had become great favorites with all
+the passengers. Many pressed them to continue the trip to San Francisco,
+Captain Anderson being one of the most anxious to keep them aboard as
+long as possible.
+
+“I don’t know what I shall do without you,” he told Shirley and Mabel.
+“We have had lots of excitement on this voyage, more than ever before,
+and you two girls have been mainly responsible for it. I hope that I
+shall see you again some time.”
+
+“Why,” said Shirley, “there are many more summers coming, and if we ever
+decide to make this trip again we shall not ever think of taking any
+boat but yours.”
+
+“May the time come soon,” said the captain.
+
+The passengers bade them an affectionate good-bye as they left the
+_Yucatan_ at San Diego, and then they entered a taxi and were driven to
+a hotel, where they once more made themselves comfortable for a stay
+ashore.
+
+They spent two days at the San Diego exposition, and then took a train
+for San Francisco to view, as Shirley expressed it, “the greatest sight
+they ever expected to see.”
+
+And none of the party was a whit disappointed in the great exposition.
+In fact, it was far beyond expectations. For two weeks they remained in
+the California metropolis, spending every minute possible upon the large
+exposition grounds overlooking the Golden Gate and the broad expanse to
+the Pacific.
+
+When the time came for them to betake themselves homeward, it was with
+regret that they realized it would be long before they could again hope
+to see the beauties of the far-off state of California.
+
+There remains yet one incident to be told.
+
+Two weeks after their return home, Mabel received a registered package
+postmarked Rome, Italy. Eagerly she ran to her room with it, where she
+opened it in solitude; nor could she repress a cry of admiration when
+she drew out a beautifully bejeweled cross, patterned after the Iron
+Cross of Germany—the Iron Cross with which the German Emperor decorates
+his troops for bravery.
+
+With it there was a brief note, with the signature “Captain Von Blusen.”
+
+Looking closer at the piece of paper on which the message was written,
+Mabel perceived a seal of peculiar design. She ran hastily for her
+dictionary, and turned to the seals of the various nations.
+
+There was a striking similarity between the seal on the paper and the
+Imperial German seal, as reproduced, in colors, in her big dictionary.
+
+For perhaps half an hour the girl sat silent, musing.
+
+“Can it be possible?” she asked herself at last “I wonder——”
+
+She rushed downstairs to consult Shirley, who at that moment was holding
+a tete-a-tete with Dick on the sunny front porch.
+
+                                THE END.
+
+
+
+
+The Blue Grass Seminary Girls Series
+
+By CAROLYN JUDSON BURNETT
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding, Price, 40c. per Volume
+
+_Splendid Stories of the Adventures of a Group of Charming Girls_
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS’ VACATION ADVENTURES; or, Shirley
+  Willing to the Rescue.
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS’ CHRISTMAS HOLIDAYS; or, A Four Weeks’
+  Tour with the Glee Club.
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS IN THE MOUNTAINS; or, Shirley Willing
+  on a Mission of Peace.
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER; or, Exciting Adventures
+  on a Summer’s Cruise Through the Panama Canal.
+
+The Mildred Series
+
+By MARTHA FINLEY
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding, Price, 40c. per Volume
+
+_A Companion Series to the Famous “Elsie” Books by the Same Author_
+
+                        MILDRED KEITH
+                        MILDRED’S MARRIED LIFE
+                        MILDRED AT ROSELANDS
+                        MILDRED AT HOME
+                        MILDRED AND ELSIE
+                        MILDRED’S BOYS AND GIRLS
+                        MILDRED’S NEW DAUGHTER
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The Camp Fire Girls Series
+
+By HILDEGARD G. FREY. The only series of stories for Camp Fire Girls
+endorsed by the officials of the Camp Fire Girls Organization.
+
+PRICE, 40 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or, The Winnebagos go Camping.
+
+  This lively Camp Fire group and their Guardian go back to Nature in
+  a camp in the wilds of Maine, and pile up more adventures in one
+  summer than they have had in all their previous vacations put
+  together. Before the summer is over they have transformed Gladys,
+  the frivolous boarding school girl, into a genuine Winnebago.
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT SCHOOL, or, The Wohelo Weavers.
+
+  It is the custom of the Winnebagos to weave the events of their
+  lives into symbolic bead bands, instead of keeping a diary. All
+  commendatory doings are worked out in bright colors, but every time
+  the Law of the Camp Fire is broken it must be recorded in black. How
+  these seven live wire girls strive to infuse into their school life
+  the spirit of Work, Health and Love and yet manage to get into more
+  than their share of mischief, is told in this story.
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT ONOWAY HOUSE; or, The Magic Garden.
+
+  Migwan is determined to go to college, and not being strong enough
+  to work indoors earns the money by raising fruits and vegetables.
+  The Winnebagos all turn a hand to help the cause along and the
+  “goings-on” at Onoway Homes that summer make the foundations shake
+  with laughter.
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS GO MOTORING; or, Along the Road that Leads the Way.
+
+  The Winnebagos take a thousand mile auto trip. The “pinching” of
+  Nyoda, the fire in the country inn, the runaway girl and the
+  dead-earnest hare and hound chase combine to make these three weeks
+  the most exciting the Winnebagos have ever experienced.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The AMY E. BLANCHARD Series
+
+Miss Blanchard has won an enviable reputation as a writer of short
+stories for girls. Her books are thoroughly wholesome in every way and
+her style is full of charm. The titles described below will be splendid
+additions to every girl’s library.
+
+Handsomely bound in cloth, full library size. Illustrated by L. J.
+Bridgman. Price, 60 cents per volume, postpaid.
+
+THE GLAD LADY. A spirited account of a remarkably pleasant vacation
+spent in an unfrequented part of northern Spain. This summer, which
+promised at the outset to be very quiet, proved to be exactly the
+opposite. Event follows event in rapid succession and the story ends
+with the culmination of at least two happy romances. The story
+throughout is interwoven with vivid descriptions of real places and
+people of which the general public knows very little. These add greatly
+to the reader’s interest.
+
+WIT’S END. Instilled with life, color and individuality, this story of
+true love cannot fail to attract and hold to its happy end the reader’s
+eager attention. The word pictures are masterly; while the poise of
+narrative and description is marvellously preserved.
+
+A JOURNEY OF JOY. A charming story of the travels and adventures of two
+young American girls, and an elderly companion in Europe. It is not only
+well told, but the amount of information contained will make it a very
+valuable addition to the library of any girl who anticipates making a
+similar trip. Their many pleasant experiences end in the culmination of
+two happy romances, all told in the happiest vein.
+
+TALBOT’S ANGLES. A charming romance of Southern life. Talbot’s Angles is
+a beautiful old estate located on the Eastern Shore of Maryland. The
+death of the owner and the ensuing legal troubles render it necessary
+for our heroine, the present owner, to leave the place which has been in
+her family for hundreds of years and endeavor to earn her own living.
+Another claimant for the property appearing on the scene complicates
+matters still more. The untangling of this mixed-up condition of affairs
+makes an extremely interesting story.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent prepaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York
+
+
+
+
+The Girl Chum’s Series
+
+ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.
+
+ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.
+
+A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular
+authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full
+of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives,
+vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers.
+
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS.
+
+  BENHURST, CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning.
+
+  BERTHA’S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris.
+
+  BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison.
+
+  DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row.
+
+  FUSSBUDGET’S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham.
+
+  HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings.
+
+  JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage.
+
+  KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl’s Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow.
+
+  LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder.
+
+  MARJORIBANKS. A Girl’s Story. By Elvirton Wright.
+
+  MISS CHARITY’S HOUSE. By Howe Benning.
+
+  MISS ELLIOT’S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring
+  Corning.
+
+  MISS MALCOLM’S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow.
+
+  ONE GIRL’S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning.
+
+  PEN’S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright.
+
+  RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne.
+
+  THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The Girl Comrade’s Series
+
+ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.
+
+ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.
+
+A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular
+authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full
+of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives,
+vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers.
+
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS.
+
+  A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER. By I. T. Thurston.
+
+  ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+
+  ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L.
+  Rouse.
+
+  BUBBLES. A Girl’s Story. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+
+  HELEN BEATON, COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+
+  JOYCE’S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  MISS ASHTON’S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl’s Story. By Mrs. S. S.
+  Robbins.
+
+  NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Spies Series
+
+These stories are based on Important historical events, scenes wherein
+boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of
+history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home
+life, and accurate in every particular.
+
+Handsome Cloth Bindings
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS.
+
+  A story of the part they took in its defence. By William P. Chipman.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY.
+
+  A boy’s story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL.
+
+  A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT.
+
+  A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE.
+
+  The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. By James
+  Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY.
+
+  The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS.
+
+  The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots to drive
+  the British from that State. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX.
+
+  The story of General Marion and his young spies. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN.
+
+  The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette in the Siege of
+  Yorktown. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA.
+
+  The story of how the young spies helped the Continental Army at
+  Valley Forge. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD.
+
+  The story of the part they took in its brave defence. By William P.
+  Chipman.
+
+THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK.
+
+  The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of General
+  Washington. By James Otis.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street. New York
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Scout Series
+
+By HERBERT CARTER
+
+New stories of Camp Life, telling the wonderful and thrilling adventures
+of the Boys of the Silver Fox Patrol.
+
+Handsome Cloth Bindings
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; or, Marooned Among the Game Fish
+Poachers.
+
+  Through a queer freak of fate, Thad Brewster and his comrades of the
+  Silver Fox Patrol find themselves in somewhat the same predicament
+  that confronted dear old Robinson Crusoe; only it is on the Great
+  Lakes that they are wrecked instead of the salty sea. You will admit
+  that those Cranford scouts are a lively and entertaining bunch of
+  fellows.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp.
+
+  New and startling experiences awaited the tried comrades of camp and
+  trail, when they visit the Southland. But their knowledge of
+  woodcraft enabled them to meet and overcome all difficulties.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS’ FIRST CAMP FIRE; or, Scouting with the Silver Fox
+Patrol.
+
+  This book is brimming over with thrilling adventure, woods lore and
+  the story of the wonderful experiences that befell the Cranford
+  troop of Boy Scouts when spending a part of their vacation in the
+  wilderness.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners.
+
+  Those lads who have read The Boy Scouts’ First Camp Fire will be
+  delighted to read this story. It tells of the strange and mysterious
+  adventures that happened to the Patrol in their trip through the
+  “mountains of the sky” in the Moonshiners’ Paradise of the old Tar
+  Heel State, North Carolina.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; or, Scouting through the Big Game Country.
+
+  The story recites the many adventures that befell the members of the
+  Silver Fox Patrol with wild animals of the forest trails, as well as
+  the desperate men who had sought a refuge in this lonely country.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or, The New Test for the Silver Fox
+Patrol
+
+  In the rough field of experience the tenderfoots and greenhorns of
+  the Silver Fox Patrol are fast learning to take care of themselves
+  when abroad. Thad and his chums have a wonderful experience when
+  they are employed by the State of Maine to act as Fire Wardens.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; or, The Search for the Lost
+Tenderfoot
+
+  A serious calamity threatens the Silver Fox Patrol when on one of
+  their vacation trips to the wonderland of the great Northwest. How
+  apparent disaster is bravely met and overcome by Thad and his
+  friends, forms the main theme of the story, which abounds in plenty
+  of humor, and hairbreadth escapes.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; or, The Secret of The Hidden Silver Mine.
+
+  By this time the boys of the Silver Fox Patrol have learned through
+  experience how to rough it upon a long hike. Their tour takes them
+  into the wildest region of the great Rocky Mountains, and here they
+  meet with many strange adventures.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA.
+
+  A story of Burgoyne’s defeat in 1777.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Chums Series
+
+By WILMER M. ELY
+
+In this series of remarkable stories by Wilmer M. Ely are described the
+adventures of two boy chums—Charley West and Walter Hazard—in the
+great swamps of interior Florida and among the cays off the Florida
+Coast, and through the Bahama Islands. These are real, live boys, and
+their experiences are well worth following.
+
+In Handsome Cloth Bindings
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+THE BOY CHUMS ON INDIAN RIVER; or, The Boy Partners, of the Schooner
+“Orphan.”
+
+  In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard meet deadly
+  rattlesnakes: have a battle with a wild panther; are attacked by
+  outlaws: their boat is towed by a swordfish; they are shipwrecked by
+  a monster manatee fish, and pass safely through many exciting scenes
+  of danger. This book should be read first.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS ON HAUNTED ISLAND; or, Hunting for Pearls in the Bahama
+Islands.
+
+  This book tells the story of the boy chums’ adventures on the
+  schooner “Eager Quest,” hunting for pearls among the Bahama Islands.
+  Their hairbreadth escapes from the treacherous quicksands and
+  dangerous waterspouts, and their rescue from the wicked wreckers are
+  fully told.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST; or, Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida
+Everglades.
+
+  The story of the boy chums hunting the blue herons and the pink and
+  white egrets for their plumes in the forests of Florida is full of
+  danger and excitement. In this story is fully told how the chums
+  encountered the Indians; their battles with the escaped convicts;
+  their fight with the wild boars and alligators; and many exciting
+  encounters and escapes. This is the third story of the boy chums’
+  adventures.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS’ PERILOUS CRUISE; or, Searching for Wreckage on the
+Florida Coast
+
+  This story of the boy chums’ adventures on and off the Florida Coast
+  describes many scenes of daring and adventure, in hunting for ships
+  stranded and cargoes washed ashore. The boy chums passed through
+  many exciting scenes, their conflicts with the Cuban wreckers; the
+  loss of their vessel, the “Eager Quest,” they will long remember.
+  This is the fourth book of adventures which the boy chums
+  experienced.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO; or, a Dangerous Cruise with the
+Greek Spongers.
+
+  This story of the boy chums hunting for sponges is filled with many
+  adventures. The dangers of gathering sponges are fully described;
+  the chums meet with sharks and alligators; and they are cast away on
+  a desert island. Their rescue and arrival home make a most
+  interesting story. This is the fifth book of adventures of the boy
+  chums.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS CRUISING IN FLORIDA WATERS; or, the Perils and Dangers of
+the Fishing Fleet.
+
+  In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard embark upon a new and
+  dangerous quest for fortune. With their old and tried comrades,
+  Captain Westfield and the little negro, Chris, they join the great
+  army of fishermen that yearly search the Florida seas for the
+  thousands of kinds of rare fish and water creatures that abound
+  there. The Florida waters hide many strange and unknown dangers. The
+  perils the chums encounter from weird fishes and creatures of the
+  sea and the menace of hurricanes and shipwreck, make very
+  interesting and instructive reading. This is the sixth book of
+  adventures of the boy chums.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the
+Water, by Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37310-0.txt or 37310-0.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/3/1/37310/
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/37310-0.zip b/37310-0.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28eac52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37310-0.zip
diff --git a/37310-8.txt b/37310-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2b2689b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37310-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8618 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water, by 
+Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water
+       Exciting Adventures on a Summer Cruise Through the Panama Canal
+
+Author: Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+Release Date: September 4, 2011 [EBook #37310]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: "I AM SORRY YOU INTERFERED WITH US," SAID THE MAN.
+"YOU'LL FIND BEFORE LONG THAT YOU HAVE DONE WRONG." _Page 57_.]
+
+
+
+
+                                  The
+                       Blue Grass Seminary Girls
+                              On the Water
+
+                                   OR
+
+                 Exciting Adventures on a Summer Cruise
+                        Through the Panama Canal
+
+                       By Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+                               AUTHOR OF
+
+         "The Blue Grass Seminary Girls' Vacation Adventures,"
+           "The Blue Grass Seminary Girls in the Mountains,"
+                        "The Blue Grass Seminary
+                      Girls' Christmas Holidays."
+
+                           A. L. BURT COMPANY
+
+                          PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+                            Copyright, 1916
+                         By A. L. Burt Company
+
+               THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER
+
+
+
+
+THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.--PLANNING A TRIP.
+
+
+"Dad, we want to take a trip."
+
+The speaker was Shirley Willing, a typical Kentucky girl, slender of
+figure, vivacious of manner, and extremely pretty. With her father, she
+stood on the big, sunny front porch of the Willing farmhouse. As she
+again was about to address her father, a second young girl, who, it
+could be seen at a glance, was of about Shirley's years, joined them.
+
+This was Mabel Ashton, Shirley's particular friend and life chum.
+Shirley greeted her with a smile, and Mr. Willing's face also wrinkled
+pleasantly.
+
+"I was just telling Dad that we want to take a trip this summer,"
+explained Shirley.
+
+Mabel smiled.
+
+"We have talked it all over," she agreed, "and we just want to go some
+place."
+
+"Where?" asked Mr. Willing briefly.
+
+"Why, we--we--want to go to--to--where is it we want to go, Shirley?"
+asked Mabel in some confusion.
+
+"We hadn't decided on that yet, Dad," laughed Shirley. "But we don't
+want to stay here on this old farm all summer."
+
+"And what are you going to do with both your old Dads--leave them
+behind?" asked Mr. Willing seriously.
+
+"We would like to have you go with us, Dad, but we know you won't."
+
+"Why won't we?"
+
+"Well, I--we,--I--you never have gone with us."
+
+"It's never too late to mend our ways," declared her father dryly.
+"Perhaps we shall this time."
+
+Both girls clapped their hands, and scampered about the porch eagerly.
+At last Shirley stopped her antics, and standing directly before her
+father, took him by the coat with both hands.
+
+"Do you mean it, Dad?" she asked.
+
+Mr. Willing nodded.
+
+"Yes. Ashton and I have decided that the next time you two youngsters go
+away from home we are going with you. When you are by yourselves you get
+into too much mischief. Now where is it you want to go?"
+
+"We haven't the slightest idea," was the reply.
+
+Mr. Willing turned to Mabel.
+
+"You call your father out here and we'll talk this thing over," he told
+her.
+
+Mabel hastened to obey, and while she is searching for her father, we
+shall take time to introduce Shirley Willing and Mabel Ashton more fully
+to the reader.
+
+The two girls had been friends ever since they could remember. Born and
+raised within a few doors of each other in the little town of Paris,
+Bourbon county, Kentucky, they had been inseparable companions from the
+time they were able to walk. This friendship was strengthened by the
+fact that their fathers had been bosom friends before them.
+
+While the girls were still young, Shirley's mother died, and a short
+time later Mr. Willing purchased a large farm on the Bethlehem Pike,
+three miles from town. It was less than a year later that Mabel's mother
+passed into the great Beyond, and Mr. Ashton bought a farm adjoining
+that of his old friend. And here they had lived ever since.
+
+When Shirley reached the age of fourteen, she conceived the idea of
+going away to school. Mabel announced that she was going with her. The
+objections of their fathers they soon overcame, and at last found
+themselves installed as pupils of the Bluegrass Seminary in Lexington.
+Here, because of their kind-heartedness and their many good deeds, they
+were soon among the most popular girls of the school.
+
+Being athletically inclined, they were prominent in all branches of
+girls' sports. Their chief pleasure was horseback riding, in which art
+there were few more proficient. In fact, Shirley once had saved her
+father's fortune by carrying the Willing colors to victory in the great
+Kentucky Derby, as related in "The Bluegrass Seminary Girls on
+Vacation."
+
+Naturally modest, they nevertheless had been made, soon after their
+arrival at the seminary, members of the Glee Club, for it was found that
+both possessed voices of rare excellence. During the second Christmas
+vacation, with other members of the Glee Club, they had toured the
+larger eastern cities, and through entertainments had lifted a large
+debt that threatened the end of the Seminary.
+
+Both girls also possessed great courage, as they had proved on more than
+one occasion, and they had had many exciting adventures, one of the most
+important of which was the settling of a mountain feud in which they had
+faced great danger unflinchingly, as related in "The Bluegrass Seminary
+Girls on Motorcycles."
+
+The summer vacation now had just begun. Shirley and Mabel had returned
+from Lexington two days before this story opens. At the Willing place
+they found Mr. Ashton, who had been very ill for some years, and had
+been making his home with his friend while his daughter was away at
+school.
+
+But now Mr. Ashton was greatly improved, as Mabel found to her great
+joy. He was gaining daily and recovering lost weight and strength.
+
+Mabel, searching for her father in response to Mr. Willing's request,
+found him in the sitting room. She went up to him and took him by the
+hand.
+
+"Come on Dad," she said.
+
+Mr. Ashton--"colonel" he was always called by his friends--allowed
+himself to be pulled toward the door.
+
+"What's up?" he asked.
+
+"Mr. Willing, Shirley and I want to have a talk with you," was the
+reply.
+
+"H-mm-m," muttered the colonel, "must be something you two want. Have
+you succeeded in twisting Willing around your fingers?"
+
+"The idea, Dad!" exclaimed Mabel. "You know neither Shirley nor I would
+think of trying to do a thing like that."
+
+Colonel Ashton grinned.
+
+"Wouldn't you?" he asked dryly. "I'm not so sure of that."
+
+Father and daughter made their way to the front porch, where Shirley and
+her father were deep in conversation. Colonel Ashton dropped into a
+chair, and Mabel sat down at his feet.
+
+"Ashton," said Mr. Willing, "these girls say they want to go some place.
+What do you think about it?"
+
+Mr. Ashton was silent for some moments. He did not seem to be surprised.
+
+"Where do they want to go?" he asked at length.
+
+"We don't know, Dad," said Mabel. "We just want to take a trip."
+
+"And," Shirley broke in, "my Dad says you and he might come with us."
+
+Mr. Ashton looked at his old friend in surprise.
+
+"You say that, Willing?" he demanded.
+
+"Yes, Colonel, I did. Why not, eh? You and I are getting along in years
+and have earned a vacation. I'm agreeable, if you are."
+
+"I don't know but you are right," was the slow reply. "I guess I am well
+enough to travel. I'll go."
+
+Mabel jumped quickly to her feet, and hugged him. Shirley performed a
+similar operation on her father.
+
+"Then," said Mr. Willing, disengaging himself at last, "the only
+question to be settled is, where shall we go?"
+
+"This is a pretty sizeable country, Willing," said the colonel, "I guess
+there are plenty of places to go."
+
+"I had thought of Atlantic City," said Mabel.
+
+"And what had you thought of?" demanded Mr. Willing of Shirley.
+
+"Well," was the reply, "there were two things I wanted to do, and I
+don't know which I shall choose."
+
+"Let's hear them," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"You know, Dad, ever since Mabel and I went away with the Glee Club, we
+have both been anxious to take a trip on one of the big ocean steamers.
+That is one thing I would like to do."
+
+"And where would you like to go?"
+
+"Any place. Across the ocean."
+
+"Well, we won't do that," said Colonel Ashton. "This European war makes
+it too risky. We might be sunk by one of those German submarines."
+
+"Right, Colonel," agreed Mr. Willing. He turned again to Shirley, "and
+the other thing you would like to do?" he questioned.
+
+"I should like to go to the Panama Exposition in San Francisco."
+
+Mabel jumped to her feet and clapped her hands.
+
+"That's where I should like to go, too," she cried. "Why didn't I think
+of it before?"
+
+Mr. Willing considered.
+
+"Well," he said at length, "I don't know why we can't do both of those
+things, Shirley."
+
+"But the ocean trip, Dad. Where would we go?"
+
+"To San Francisco," was the reply.
+
+"But, how--"
+
+"You must remember that the Panama Canal is open to traffic, daughter,"
+explained Mr. Willing. "We can take a steamer from New York direct to
+San Francisco. Besides, I should like to have a look at the canal, with
+its great locks and other interesting things. The construction of the
+canal is considered one of the greatest of all feats of engineering."
+
+Colonel Ashton nodded his head emphatically.
+
+"I should like to take that trip myself," he declared.
+
+"Then we shall consider that matter settled," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"And when can we start, dad?" asked Shirley eagerly.
+
+"Well, we will not be able to leave here for a week or ten days. I have
+some business affairs that must be put in order before I can get away.
+Besides, you two girls will want clothes and things, and you can't get
+those in a minute."
+
+"We'll go to town this afternoon and get some things," declared Mabel.
+
+"All right," laughed Mr. Willing, "but just the same it will take you at
+least a week to get yourselves ready. Then I shall have to make
+arrangements for our passage, find out when we leave New York and attend
+to other details. It will take time."
+
+"But we shall go as soon as possible, Dad?" asked Shirley.
+
+"Yes," was the reply. "You may make sure of that. We shall go as soon as
+possible. Hello--who's that?"
+
+The others gazed in the direction of his pointing finger. Through the
+pike gate, at that moment, came a solitary horseman.
+
+"I wonder who he is?" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.--AN ADDITION TO THE PARTY.
+
+
+The horseman came closer.
+
+Suddenly Shirley gave an exclamation of delight. She had recognized the
+visitor even at this distance, which was too great for the others to
+perceive his identity. Mabel looked at her chum in astonishment.
+
+"Dick!" cried Shirley.
+
+Now Mabel understood, and even Mr. Willing allowed a slight smile to
+steal across his face.
+
+Shirley ran down the steps from the porch and hurried toward the distant
+yard gate. The girl and the horseman arrived at about the same time, and
+those on the porch saw the rider lift his cap and dismount.
+
+Then he led the horse through the gate, closed it behind him and with
+the bridle in his hand continued his way to the house afoot, Shirley
+walking by his side.
+
+"Dick!" cried Shirley again, as the rider dismounted at the gate upon
+sight of her. "What are you doing here? I am glad to see you."
+
+"I was in Paris on a little business," replied the young man, "and I
+thought I wouldn't go away without paying my respects to you and your
+father."
+
+At the house Mr. Willing greeted the young man warmly, for, from
+previous meetings, he had taken a liking to Dick.
+
+Dick Stanley was a native of Cincinnati, O. He was without parents, and
+after having met Shirley under exciting circumstances, he had given up a
+rough set of companions and at length had obtained a place as office boy
+on one of the big Louisville newspapers. But Dick had not remained an
+office boy long, and he was now one of the most competent and best liked
+reporters on the paper.
+
+He had been sent to Paris for a certain piece of news--"on a story," in
+his words, the words of the newspaper world--and he had just completed
+his work successfully. Therefore he had hired a horse and come to the
+Willing farm for a few words with his friends before going back to
+Louisville.
+
+"I'm glad to see you, young man," said Mr. Willing in greeting. "It has
+been some time since we have had the pleasure of your company."
+
+"Thank you, sir," was the reply. "I am always glad to be here."
+
+He shook hands with Mr. Ashton and Mabel.
+
+Now Shirley proceeded to tell him of the trip they were going to take,
+and Dick was greatly interested.
+
+"I should like to see the canal," he said. "I have been reading quite a
+bit about it, and it is very interesting."
+
+"You are right, young man," agreed Mr. Willing.
+
+"It is one of the wonders of the world." He paused, struck by a sudden
+idea. Then he said slowly, looking squarely at Dick:
+
+"How would you like to go with us?"
+
+"I'd like it fine," declared Dick, with a smile. "I wish it could be
+done."
+
+"Well, it can be done," said Mr. Willing quietly.
+
+Dick, as well as Shirley and Mabel, looked at Mr. Willing in surprise.
+
+"Dad!" exclaimed Shirley. "What do you mean?"
+
+"Just what I say," was the reply. "I am going to take Dick with us."
+
+Dick shook his head slowly.
+
+"I appreciate your kindness, Mr. Willing," he said quietly, "but I
+cannot accept such generosity."
+
+"Can't, eh?" blustered Mr. Willing, "and why not, I'd like to know. I am
+not in the habit of having my invitations refused, sir!"
+
+Again Dick smiled.
+
+"It is very kind of you to ask me," he said, "but I do not feel that I
+should accept. Of course, I have the money for the trip, but I do not
+feel I can afford to spend it. Besides, I could not leave the paper for
+so long a time."
+
+"Couldn't leave the paper!" echoed Mr. Willing.
+
+"I'll speak a few words to my friend Col. Harperson, the owner, and he
+will see that you are given an indefinite vacation."
+
+"No, sir, thank you, I don't think it can be done."
+
+"I'll tell you," said Mr. Willing, trying a new line, for he had made up
+his mind to have Dick accompany them, "you will be able to do some
+writing on the trip. The sights you will see should mean money to you.
+You should be able to write many interesting articles when you get
+back."
+
+Dick apparently was impressed with this line of reasoning. And now
+Shirley added her voice to the colonel's.
+
+"Please, come, Dick?" she said.
+
+"Well," said the young man after hesitating a long while, "I'll tell you
+what I'll do. If I can make arrangements to get off indefinitely, I'll
+go."
+
+Shirley clapped her hands.
+
+"I'm sure you can," she cried.
+
+And Mr. Willing muttered to himself:
+
+"I'll fix it with Harperson!"
+
+The discussion of the trip now became general, and Dick was acquainted
+with the time they expected to depart.
+
+"You will remain here over night, of course," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"Thank you, sir, I shall be glad to."
+
+"Then we'll put off our shopping till to-morrow, Mabel," said Shirley.
+
+All day the three young people talked eagerly of the coming trip, and
+Shirley tried to get Dick to promise that he would go, whether he was
+able to get off or not. But this Dick would not do.
+
+"If they agree to let me off, all right," was his decision.
+
+They sat up and talked till late that night, but Mr. Willing finally put
+an end to this conversation.
+
+"Shirley," he said severely, "are you going to keep that young man
+talking all night? How do you expect him to catch the early train in the
+morning?"
+
+"Well, I would have gone any time he told me," pouted Shirley.
+
+"I don't suppose he would have told you if you had kept him talking all
+night," replied Mr. Willing dryly.
+
+Dick arose and bade the others good night. A few moments later Shirley
+and Mabel retired to their room, where they lay for a long time before
+sleep overcame them, so excited were they at the prospect of the great
+trip.
+
+"I'm glad Dick is going," said Mabel, "but I don't suppose I am half as
+glad as you are."
+
+"Why not?" demanded Shirley.
+
+"Oh, just because," replied Mabel, laughing.
+
+"I don't see anything to laugh at," declared Shirley.
+
+"You don't? No, I guess you don't. Do you know, I'd give a whole lot if
+some nice boy like Dick would come all this way to see me."
+
+"He came to see you as well as me," said Shirley.
+
+"Oh no he didn't. If I had been the only girl here, Dick would not have
+been on hand to-day. Besides, if it wasn't for you I'm sure he wouldn't
+even think of taking the trip to San Francisco."
+
+"But he wants to see something of the Panama Canal."
+
+"My goodness! you didn't use to be so dense," exclaimed Mabel.
+
+"Dense?" repeated Shirley. "What do you mean, Mabel?"
+
+"That's right, keep it up," exclaimed Mabel. "I won't say anything more.
+Are you going into town to-morrow?"
+
+"Yes, I thought we would go in as soon as Dick had gone."
+
+"That suits me. We'll have to get a lot of things."
+
+"I should say so. Why, I haven't a single decent thing to wear."
+
+"We'll put in a good supply, so we won't have to buy anything while we
+are away. My! but won't it be a nice trip?"
+
+"Won't it though. I can hardly wait for the time to come."
+
+"Nor I. But let's get some sleep or we won't want to get up in the
+morning."
+
+Both closed their eyes and tried to sleep. But they had too much on
+their minds to go to sleep immediately, and it was long minutes before
+drowsiness overcame them and they lost themselves, only to dream that
+they were sailing across the ocean.
+
+The following morning they accompanied Dick to Wright's station, where
+he took a train for Lexington. There he would have to change for
+Louisville.
+
+"Let us know as soon as possible?" called Shirley, as he climbed aboard.
+
+"I will," replied Dick. "I'll write immediately I have learned one thing
+or the other."
+
+The train moved away.
+
+Shirley and Mabel returned to the house, where Mr. Willing was waiting
+for them with the automobile.
+
+"Ashton and I have decided to do a little shopping on our own hook," he
+explained. "We want to spruce up a bit. Daughter, do you suppose there
+will be any nice-looking, middle-aged ladies aboard the boat? If so, why
+Ashton and I--"
+
+"Dad!" interrupted Shirley.
+
+"Well, all right. Of course if you object," said Mr. Willing.
+
+All the rest of the day the girls put in shopping. Dresses and frocks
+for all occasions they bought, besides a couple of outing costumes.
+
+"I don't know how long it takes to get to San Francisco from New York,"
+said Shirley, "so we had best be prepared."
+
+But when the day was over they found they had not completed their
+shopping, and would have to return again on the morrow.
+
+Mr. Willing, during the day, transacted his business and found out the
+date of sailing from New York. Taking it for granted that Dick would
+accompany them, he purchased a ticket and made accommodations for him as
+well as the others.
+
+"How long shall we be gone, Dad?" asked Shirley, as the automobile sped
+homeward.
+
+"Well, let's see. This is the fourth of June. We shall leave New York on
+the fifteenth. I should say we would be back by the middle of August."
+
+"And will we come back the same way?"
+
+"No; we'll come back by rail. One way by boat will be enough. You'll
+have seen plenty of water by the time you reach San Francisco."
+
+"I hope Dick decides to go with us," said Shirley.
+
+"And so do I," declared Mabel.
+
+"Oh, he'll go, all right," remarked Mr. Willing.
+
+And the latter was right. Three days later Shirley stood before her
+father with an open letter in her hand.
+
+"It's from Dick," she explained. "He says he is going with us."
+
+Mr. Willing chuckled.
+
+"I see Harperson is still a friend of mine," he muttered to himself.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.--OFF FOR NEW YORK.
+
+
+It was the morning of the twelfth of June that the party of five went
+early to Paris to catch the eight o'clock train for Cincinnati. Dick had
+arrived the night before, and in spite of the fact that they would have
+to be up very early in the morning, all sat up talking, for the young
+people were too excited to go to sleep.
+
+All through the long hours of the night the girls tossed about, scarcely
+closing their eyes. They were up with the break of day, which was soon
+after four o'clock.
+
+At last the time for departure came, and they jumped gaily into the
+large automobile which was to take them to town.
+
+"What time shall we leave Cincinnati, sir?" Dick asked of Mr. Willing,
+as the train pulled out from the station.
+
+"Twelve o'clock," was the reply. "We'll get there a little after eleven,
+which will give us time to get across town to the Pennsylvania station.
+I have made reservations on the New York train."
+
+Nevertheless it lacked only twenty minutes of the noon hour when the
+train pulled into Cincinnati.
+
+"Hurry girls," ordered Mr. Willing. "We have no time to lose. We can
+just about make it."
+
+They dashed through the station and out the Third street entrance, where
+Mr. Willing immediately engaged two taxicabs.
+
+"Pennsylvania Station!" he ordered, and they were off at a good gait.
+
+Through the narrow streets congested with traffic they were forced to go
+more slowly, and Mr. Willing looked at his watch impatiently from time
+to time.
+
+"Seven minutes!" he said, and they were still some distance from their
+destination, and then the first cab stopped to let a car pass in front
+of it.
+
+"Hurry!" commanded Mr. Willing of his driver. "We haven't got all day to
+get there. Let the street cars do the waiting after this."
+
+The chauffeur nodded and the cab leaped forward, scattering pedestrians
+right and left, darting in and out among other vehicles, avoiding a
+collision as though by a miracle. The second cab came close behind.
+
+At last the station was reached and all dismounted hurriedly. With Mr.
+Willing in the lead they ran through the station to the train shed. Here
+the conductor had just called "All aboard!"
+
+Mr. Willing heard him, and urged the others on faster. They passed
+through the gate, Mr. Willing assisted the girls and Colonel Ashton up
+the steps, then climbed up himself. And as he did so, Shirley, who had
+turned to look at him, cried:
+
+"Where's Dick?"
+
+Mr. Willing looked around, then stood nonplussed. Dick was not here. The
+train began to move.
+
+There came a shout from behind and a young man came dashing after the
+train. Shirley cried out in alarm. It was Dick.
+
+The train had gathered headway now and was slipping along beneath the
+shed more rapidly. Dick sprinted, gained, clutched the handrail of the
+car and swung himself aboard just as the train gathered even greater
+speed.
+
+He climbed to the platform, wiped the moisture from his brow, fanned
+himself vigorously and then smiled.
+
+"Close call, that," he exclaimed.
+
+"Young man," said Mr. Willing dryly, "hereafter let there be no
+loitering behind. You gave me a scare and I don't care for any more of
+the same."
+
+"Daddy!" exclaimed Shirley. "I am sure Dick didn't do it intentionally."
+
+"No, sir," agreed Dick. "As I followed after you I bumped into a lady
+and knocked her suitcase from her hand. It came open and the contents
+scattered about. For a moment I forgot all about the train and stopped
+to help her pick them up. Then I happened to remember we were late, and
+ran after you."
+
+"Your gallantry is bound to get you in trouble if you are not careful,"
+commented Mr. Willing.
+
+They went inside.
+
+Mr. Willing had engaged the two drawing rooms, one at either end of the
+car. Dick and the two older men were to occupy one and the two girls the
+other.
+
+It was almost eight o'clock when the train pulled into Pittsburgh. They
+had just finished dinner, so Dick stepped off to look about for a few
+moments.
+
+As he stood beside the steps of the Pullman, another man, probably
+several years his senior, approached and engaged him in conversation. He
+was an agreeable sort of a chap. He spoke English with the faintest of
+accents, however, and this Dick was not slow to notice.
+
+It appeared that the man had a berth on the same car, and they climbed
+aboard together. In the smoking compartment was Mr. Willing, to whom
+Dick introduced the newcomer. Mr. Ashton came in a few moments later,
+and all sat talking.
+
+The stranger, who introduced himself as Henry Bristow, made himself very
+agreeable and Mr. Willing took an instant liking to him.
+
+During the course of the conversation, Dick chanced to mention that they
+would sail from New York for San Francisco on the fifteenth.
+
+"On what ship?" demanded Bristow eagerly.
+
+"_Yucatan_," was the reply.
+
+"Is that so?" exclaimed the other. "I shall sail on the same vessel."
+
+"For San Francisco?" asked Dick in surprise.
+
+"That all depends," was the answer. "I shall only take passage as far as
+Colon. Whether I shall go further depends upon my--upon circumstances."
+
+"We shall be glad to have you as a fellow passenger," declared Mr.
+Willing. "As you are going to be such, you must meet my daughter, and
+the daughter of the colonel here."
+
+"I shall be pleased," was the reply.
+
+He accompanied the others to the drawing room, where introductions
+followed.
+
+Young Bristow conversed fluently upon many topics and the others were
+delighted with him. From his remarks it was gathered that he had
+traveled considerably.
+
+He spoke familiarly of New York, Chicago, San Francisco, and apparently
+had a personal knowledge of London, Paris, Berlin and other European
+cities. He was equally as well acquainted with the larger southern
+cities.
+
+The two girls were eager listeners to the tales of his travels, and even
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton gave an attentive ear to these stories.
+
+"And where do you live?" asked Mr. Willing suddenly. "What did you say
+your business is?"
+
+The young man's face suddenly turned red.
+
+"My home is in New York," he replied quietly, "and as for my business, I
+fear that must remain a secret for the present."
+
+"Daddy, you shouldn't be so inquisitive," said Shirley with a smile.
+
+"I'm sure I'm sorry," apologized her father. "I didn't mean--"
+
+"Say no more about it," replied the young man with a pleasant smile.
+"For certain reasons, I am not now able to reveal the nature of my
+business."
+
+Dick had been thinking rapidly. Suspicions had entered his head, and he
+could not shake them off. And still he knew that they would sound
+foolish to another.
+
+"I'll keep them to myself," he said, "but I'll keep an eye open."
+
+The train was just pulling into North Philadelphia when Shirley and
+Mabel opened their eyes the next morning. Mabel glanced at her watch.
+
+"Seven o'clock," she exclaimed. "We'll have to hurry, Shirley. You know
+these fast trains don't take long to reach New York from here. Besides,
+we want to get breakfast on the train."
+
+They dressed as rapidly as possible, and emerged from their drawing room
+just in time to see young Bristow stride down the aisle.
+
+He gave them a cheery "good morning" and turned as Mr. Willing came up.
+
+"I hope you will join us at breakfast, sir," said Mr. Willing.
+
+The young man accepted, and as Dick and Colonel Ashton appeared at this
+moment, all made their way to the diner together.
+
+"Where shall you stay in New York, sir?" asked Bristow of Mr. Willing.
+
+"At the McAlpin," was the reply. "We shall spend the two days looking
+about the city, going aboard the _Yucatan_ a couple of hours before time
+for her departure."
+
+Bristow turned to Dick.
+
+"I shall look you up either this afternoon or to-morrow, and we'll take
+a stroll," he said.
+
+"I'll be glad to walk with you," Dick replied.
+
+Breakfast over, they returned to the Pullman, where they began to get
+their things together, for they were close to New York.
+
+Half an hour later the train plunged into the tunnel under the Hudson
+river. Mr. Willing, who had been to New York before, explained how the
+tunnel had been constructed and gave other interesting information.
+
+"You wouldn't think we were in a tunnel," exclaimed Shirley. "There is
+no smoke."
+
+"Electric engine," replied Mr. Willing.
+
+"And we go right under the river?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"My goodness!" exclaimed Mabel. "Just to think that there is a river
+running right over the top of us. Suppose it would come through."
+
+Mr. Willing smiled.
+
+"It won't," he said quietly.
+
+And now the porter came for their baggage, and carried it to the
+vestibule. The conductor poked his head in the door and called out:
+
+"New York!"
+
+"Here we are," exclaimed Shirley eagerly. "The city I have always wanted
+to see. The greatest city in the world!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.--DICK HAS AN ADVENTURE.
+
+
+The two days spent in New York City were days of wonder to Shirley,
+Mabel and Dick. They were on the go every minute of the time,
+sightseeing. From one end of the city to the other they travelled with
+wide-open eyes.
+
+The great skyscrapers impressed them, perhaps, more than any one other
+thing, though they saw much to amaze them; and next to the great
+buildings they were impressed by the crowds.
+
+Crowds they had seen in some of the other large cities, but never
+anything like this.
+
+They took a trip to Coney Island on the second day, and the girls were
+for going back again that night. Mr. Willing agreed, and they were about
+to fare forth from the hotel, when young Bristow was announced.
+
+"I've come to take you for that promised stroll," he told Dick.
+
+Dick looked at the others inquiringly.
+
+"You go with him," nodded Colonel Ashton, "the rest of us can get along
+without you for one evening."
+
+"If I'm breaking up a party--" began Bristow.
+
+"Never mind," said the colonel with a wave of his hand. "You two young
+fellows run along. We don't need you."
+
+"All right, sir," agreed Dick.
+
+Personally he was glad to have a chance to look about the town a little
+with one of his own age. The others took their departure, and soon
+Bristow and Dick also left the hotel.
+
+"I would have looked you up sooner but I have been terribly busy,"
+explained Bristow. "I have had important matters to attend to, and this
+is the first time I have been at liberty. Where would you like to go?"
+
+"Any place you say," said Dick with a smile. "You know more about this
+place than I do."
+
+"I guess you're right," was the smiling response, "we'll wander up
+Broadway aways and watch the theater crowds."
+
+They did so, and continued to stroll about for an hour.
+
+Gradually the crowd thinned out, although there were many pedestrians on
+the street. As they stood for a moment in front of the Herald building
+on Herald square, Dick, chancing to turn suddenly, became conscious of a
+pair of eyes looking steadily at his companion. He called the other's
+attention to it, and as the latter glanced about the man turned and
+moved off.
+
+Dick thought no more of the matter until several blocks further along he
+perceived the same figure slinking furtively after them.
+
+"That man is following us," he said to Bristow.
+
+The face of the latter grew hard.
+
+"We'll see," he said.
+
+At that moment they were passing Forty-second Street, and Bristow swung
+sharply around the corner. Dick followed him. They walked several
+blocks, until they stood beneath the tracks of the Sixth Avenue
+elevated. Here Bristow again turned sharply, and drew up in a doorway.
+He stopped as Dick came up beside him.
+
+A moment later the figure of the man Dick believed was following them
+came around the corner. The man's hat was pulled over his eyes, and he
+did not glance up as he passed the doorway. Bristow and Dick turned and
+doubled back around the corner.
+
+"He was after us, all right," said Bristow with a laugh, "but I guess we
+have given him the slip."
+
+But in this he was mistaken.
+
+"I wonder what on earth we are being followed for?" muttered Dick to
+himself, as they turned down Broadway. "Something queer about this
+fellow Bristow. That man is not following us for nothing."
+
+Several hours later they stopped in a little restaurant for a bite to
+eat, "after which I'll take you home," said Bristow.
+
+The restaurant was crowded, and a little while later the waiter seated
+another man at their table. Dick gave him a quick glance and then
+stifled an exclamation of surprise.
+
+The newcomer was the same man who had followed them so recently.
+
+Dick leaned over and whispered to Bristow.
+
+"So?" said Bristow. "We'll see what he wants."
+
+He looked the man squarely in the eyes and demanded:
+
+"What are you following me for?"
+
+The man looked at him and smiled pleasantly.
+
+"I just want to keep you in sight," he replied.
+
+"Why?"
+
+"You know, I guess. You don't want me to speak right out, do you?"
+
+"Well, no," replied Bristow, "but I'll thank you to follow me no
+longer."
+
+"Sorry," was the reply, "but I am afraid I shall have to."
+
+"I warn you," said Bristow quietly, "to let me alone. Is that plain
+enough?"
+
+"Perfectly plain," was the reply. "I'm sorry I can't accommodate you."
+
+He resumed his eating.
+
+Dick and Bristow finished their meal first and rose to go. The other man
+waited until they were at the door, then picked up his check and
+followed them. And so when they passed out, he was right behind them
+once more.
+
+"I don't like this idea of being followed," said Dick. "What's he want,
+anyhow?"
+
+"We'll get rid of him," replied Bristow, absolutely ignoring Dick's
+second question.
+
+He turned down a side street, and they walked for three or four blocks,
+at length coming to a rather darker street. Here Bristow slipped around
+the corner and motioned Dick to silence.
+
+The footsteps of their pursuer came to their ears. He drew nearer.
+Bristow advanced close to the edge of the building.
+
+"What are you going to do?" asked Dick.
+
+"You'll see," was the brief response.
+
+As the man came into view, Bristow suddenly struck out with his right
+fist, and the man toppled over.
+
+Bristow turned to Dick.
+
+"Come!" he said quietly.
+
+With one look at the fallen man Dick obeyed, and they were soon beyond
+pursuit.
+
+Dick had been taken by surprise by the suddenness of Bristow's attack.
+Try as he would he could see no reason for it. He, as well as Bristow,
+objected to being followed, but Dick would not have taken such measures
+to elude his pursuer.
+
+He followed his companion without a word, however, and soon they were
+back at the hotel.
+
+The others had not returned, but Bristow sat down, announcing that he
+had something important to say to Mr. Willing when the latter did get
+back.
+
+Half an hour later, Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and the two girls came
+in.
+
+"Well, I see you beat us," exclaimed Mr. Willing. "Have a good time?"
+
+"Yes, sir," replied Dick.
+
+"Mr. Willing," said Bristow, "I have something of importance to say to
+you."
+
+"All right, sir," came the answer, "out with it."
+
+"Will you all promise to repeat nothing of what I may say?"
+
+"Why all this air of secrecy?" demanded Mr. Willing.
+
+"That I cannot tell you, sir."
+
+"Of course we'll promise, Mr. Bristow," declared Shirley. "Surely, Dad,
+there is no reason why we should tell any one anything."
+
+Mr. Willing nodded.
+
+"I will promise for myself and the others," he said.
+
+"Very well, sir. What I would say is this: Take my advice, and under no
+circumstances sail on the _Yucatan_ to-morrow!"
+
+Mr. Willing gazed at the young man in perfect amazement, as did the
+others in the room. Mr. Willing was the first to regain his composure.
+
+"Why?" he asked quietly.
+
+"I can't go into explanations," replied the young man hurriedly; "all I
+can do is warn you that it is not safe."
+
+"And why isn't it safe?" asked Shirley, now taking a hand in the
+conversation.
+
+"That I cannot tell you, either. But you all know that a state of war
+exists between the countries of Europe."
+
+"What has that to do with us?" asked Shirley.
+
+"You are asking me hard questions," said Bristow, "and I cannot answer
+as I would like to. Let it be enough that there is danger because of it.
+And if there should even be no danger aboard the _Yucatan_, it will
+exist in Colon."
+
+"In Colon?"
+
+"Yes. One week from to-day Colon will no longer be safe!"
+
+"It is my belief you are out of your head, young man," declared Mr.
+Willing grimly.
+
+Bristow shook his head positively.
+
+"I am telling you facts," he declared. "I can't say any more."
+
+"And why won't we be safe aboard the _Yucatan_?" demanded Shirley. "The
+ship isn't going to sink, is it?"
+
+"No, but--"
+
+"No European country will dare to molest it," declared Dick, "and I can
+see no reason why there should be danger at Colon."
+
+"I was afraid I couldn't convince you," said Bristow. "However, I have
+done my best. Good night."
+
+He bowed and left the room.
+
+"What do you suppose he is talking about, Dad?" asked Shirley.
+
+"I don't know," was the reply, "and I don't care."
+
+"All buncombe," agreed Colonel Ashton.
+
+"Well, I don't care what it is," exclaimed Shirley. "We have set our
+hearts on this trip, and we are going to take it. That's all there is
+about that."
+
+"Good for you, Shirley," agreed Mabel.
+
+Dick Stanley was the only member of the party who did not speak. He sat
+quietly in his chair, thinking.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.--ABOARD THE YUCATAN.
+
+
+The _Yucatan_, upon leaving New York, did not head straight for Colon.
+Her route took her down the coast, where she would make several stops.
+The first would be at Savannah, then Jacksonville, and the third, and
+last before touching at Colon, would be Havana, Cuba.
+
+Mr. Willing had selected this vessel for the simple reason that it did
+put in at these southern ports, for he wished to give the girls an
+opportunity of seeing as much as possible on the journey. After rounding
+into the Pacific, following her passage of the Panama Canal, the vessel
+was scheduled to put in at the seaports of several of the Central
+American republics and one or two Mexican ports.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton, Dick and the two girls stood forward on the
+gallery deck of the great ship as she got under way and slowly backed
+out of her slip into the North River.
+
+It was early afternoon, the sun shone brightly and it was very warm. All
+day the city had sweltered beneath the terrible heat, but as the ship
+gradually gathered headway a breeze sprang up and blew refreshingly
+across the deck.
+
+"This is something like it," declared Mr. Willing, removing his yachting
+cap and passing his handkerchief over his forehead.
+
+The awnings were stretched, and all took the steamer chairs they had
+secured. These they pulled close to the rail, and then gazed off across
+the water.
+
+Directly the Statue of Liberty came into view. The girls gazed at it
+curiously as they passed and headed for the open sea.
+
+Gradually the lofty spires of the great buildings faded from view, and
+then the Statue of Liberty disappeared. To starboard could be seen the
+distant shore of New Jersey, and to port nothing but the broad expanse
+of the Atlantic.
+
+Darkness descended and with it a cooler breeze.
+
+"Time to eat," said Mr. Willing.
+
+They made their way to the dining room below, where they were seated at
+the captain's table. The supper was excellent, far beyond Shirley's
+expectations. The meal over they returned on deck.
+
+Mr. Willing had secured a suite of four rooms well forward on the
+promenade deck, and after enjoying the cooling breeze for some time, all
+made their way there.
+
+The strains of a band now floated to them from the main salon. They made
+their way out. Then the three young people started on a tour of the
+ship. They took in everything with breathless interest.
+
+"This is indeed a floating palace," commented Shirley.
+
+"Isn't it though," agreed Mabel.
+
+Dick was no less enthusiastic in his praise.
+
+After a stroll about they rejoined the two elder men in the salon. Then
+it was that Shirley bethought herself of the fact that young Bristow had
+said he would be aboard.
+
+"I haven't seen anything of him," she said.
+
+Neither had the others.
+
+"Perhaps he missed the boat," said Mabel.
+
+"I'll have a look at the passenger list," said Dick.
+
+He did so, and there he saw "Henry Bristow, New York," and the number of
+his stateroom. He went up and knocked on the door.
+
+"Come in," called a voice.
+
+Dick entered the room, then started back in surprise.
+
+Bristow lay propped up in bed, reading. Around his head was a white
+bandage. Dick hastened to his side.
+
+"Why, what is the matter?" he exclaimed.
+
+"Accident," replied Bristow, with a slight smile, and volunteered no
+further information.
+
+Dick did not press him for an explanation. After some little talk, in
+the course of which Bristow said he did not require anything and
+announced that he would be perfectly fit on the morrow, Dick took his
+leave and rejoined the others.
+
+"And how was he hurt?" asked Mr. Willing, after Dick had reported what
+he had learned.
+
+"He didn't say and I didn't ask him," he replied. "But I am sure there
+is something strange about it, sir."
+
+"I am beginning to think that myself," agreed Colonel Ashton. "He's a
+queer one. Now, I wonder why he warned us not to sail on this ship?"
+
+"It's too deep for me," declared Dick.
+
+"I have it," exclaimed Shirley suddenly. "Perhaps he is an agent of one
+of the foreign countries, England or Germany."
+
+Dick looked at the girl in unfeigned surprise.
+
+"What makes you think that?" he asked.
+
+"I don't know. I don't really believe it; I just happened to think of
+it. Wouldn't it be fun if he was?"
+
+"Well, that all depends," replied Dick. "It depends on what his business
+aboard would be."
+
+"But what could it be in such a case?" questioned Mabel.
+
+"Well, it might be lots of things. But I don't put any stock in such an
+explanation."
+
+"Nor I," declared Mr. Willing. "It's my belief the young man is in
+trouble of some kind, and I'd like to help him out if I could. I like
+him."
+
+"And so do I," agreed Mabel.
+
+"To tell the truth, I don't know whether I do or not," said Dick slowly.
+"He's agreeable, and all that; but there is something very peculiar
+about him. I am sure there is something wrong."
+
+"If I get a good chance, I shall ask him," declared Mabel.
+
+"You'll have about the same luck Dad did when he asked him his
+business," retorted Shirley, "and that wasn't much."
+
+"Take my advice, all of you, and let him alone," remarked Colonel
+Ashton.
+
+"That is good advice, Ashton," declared Mr. Willing. "But come, it's
+bedtime and we shall want to be about early in the morning to enjoy some
+of this ocean breeze."
+
+An hour later all were asleep.
+
+Had they been about they would have seen a strange sight.
+
+On the upper deck aft, as the ship's bell chimed midnight, three men sat
+in deep conversation. Two of them were strangers, but the third Shirley
+or any of her party would immediately have recognized as Henry Bristow.
+
+And there would also have been something else noticeable. The bandage
+had been removed from his head, nor was there wound nor swelling to show
+why it should have been tied up in the first place.
+
+The three men talked for perhaps fifteen minutes in low whispers and
+then parted, going their several ways.
+
+As he had promised, Bristow was about the ship the following morning,
+but his head was once more bandaged. Mabel, true to her words of the
+night before, seized the first opportunity and asked him how he had been
+injured.
+
+"That," was the quiet reply, "I cannot say."
+
+Mabel was highly indignant, and took herself off, leaving the young man
+smiling after her. Then he shrugged his shoulders and walked away.
+
+All morning the sun shone warm and bright, though it was not too hot for
+comfort. It was shortly after noon when the passengers were treated to
+an interesting sight.
+
+Some distance to port came the smoke of another ship, and as it drew
+nearer an air of subdued excitement became apparent on the _Yucatan_.
+
+"Armed cruiser off the port bow, sir!" came the hail from the lookout.
+
+All rushed toward the rail, and stood looking at the large ship of war,
+as she bore down toward them. There was no flag at her masthead, and so
+the passengers were unable to determine her nationality.
+
+"What can she be?" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"British, I suppose," was Dick's answer. "She'll show her colors
+presently, I guess."
+
+Dick was right. Five minutes later the British ensign was run up the
+masthead and fluttered in the breeze.
+
+A great cheer broke from most of the passengers aboard the _Yucatan_.
+Shirley and Mabel joined in it.
+
+At that moment Dick caught sight of the face of Bristow, who stood near.
+His lips were compressed, and he scowled fiercely.
+
+"He's no Englishman, that's sure," muttered the young man to himself.
+
+Suddenly, from across the water, came the sound of a big gun, and a
+solid shot struck the water dead ahead of the _Yucatan_.
+
+Immediately her engines were stopped, and the passenger steamer came to
+a stop.
+
+Instantly wild alarm spread over the ship.
+
+"We've been fired on," cried Shirley. "Will they sink us?"
+
+Dick smiled.
+
+"Oh, I guess not," he replied. "That's just a signal to heave-to and
+give an account of ourselves."
+
+"But what business have they stopping an American ship?" exclaimed
+Shirley.
+
+"It is permissible under the laws of war," explained Dick. "You see, the
+_Yucatan_ might be an enemy flying the American flag. As soon as they
+find out we are all right, they will allow us to proceed."
+
+"And would we have to stop just the same for a German?"
+
+"Of course."
+
+"I wouldn't like that," declared Shirley. "I don't mind the English. My
+grandmother was English, you know."
+
+"Well, I guess my sympathies are a little that way, too," agreed Dick.
+
+The wireless now began to sputter as messages were exchanged between the
+_Yucatan_ and the British cruiser. The latter had approached close
+enough to make out the _Yucatan_, and now signalled her to proceed on
+her course.
+
+As the big ship of war turned and made off, a second ovation was given
+her by the passengers. Men waved their hats and women their
+handkerchiefs.
+
+Suddenly Shirley seized Dick by the arm, and pointed, whispering:
+
+"Look at that!"
+
+Far aft, Henry Bristow gazed across the water at the British cruiser,
+and Shirley had perceived that there was hate in his eyes. Even as Dick
+looked in the direction Shirley pointed, Bristow raised a fist and shook
+it fiercely at the receding war vessel, while strange words issued from
+between his lips.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.--SHIRLEY LENDS AID.
+
+
+"Look, Mabel, did you see that woman steal that bolt of silk?"
+
+It was Shirley who spoke. They stood among the crowd that thronged the
+largest department store in Savannah, Ga. The _Yucatan_ had put into
+Savannah early that morning, and learning that the vessel would not get
+under way again until late in the afternoon, Shirley and Mabel had gone
+uptown to purchase a few souvenirs of the Georgia city.
+
+It was just after entering the store that Shirley's attention was
+attracted by the peculiar actions of a young woman who darted somewhat
+furtively from one counter to another. While the attention of the clerks
+was given to customers, Shirley had seen the woman slip a bolt of
+expensive silk from the counter and hide it under a long flowing cape,
+which she wore in spite of the heat.
+
+Mabel shook her head negatively in response to Shirley's question.
+
+"Which one?" she asked.
+
+Shirley pointed to the figure of the woman who was now gazing at a
+pretty array of expensive laces. Both girls watched her carefully; and
+directly, as the crowd about her became more dense, they saw her hand go
+stealthily forth and take several small bolts of the high-priced
+material.
+
+"Well what do you think of that?" demanded Mabel. "I have heard of such
+things, but I never expected to see it. What shall we do?"
+
+"Nothing," replied Shirley decidedly. "It's none of our business."
+
+"But won't the poor clerks have to make good the loss?"
+
+"I don't know about that. But if we get mixed up in it we are likely to
+gain too much notoriety. Let's move away from here."
+
+They pushed their way through the crowd when Shirley came suddenly into
+violent contact with a figure hurrying from the opposite direction. The
+latter drew back and lifted his cap.
+
+"Miss Willing," he said. "I beg your pardon. I didn't look where I was
+going."
+
+Shirley glanced up in surprise at hearing her name spoken. Then she
+recognized the figure with whom she had collided.
+
+"Why, Mr. Bristow," she said. "I thought I left you aboard the
+_Yucatan_?"
+
+"I came ashore to do a little shopping, as you young ladies call it,"
+replied Bristow with a laugh. "I shall have to hurry on."
+
+He lifted his cap and was gone.
+
+The two girls continued to stroll about through the store, eyeing the
+bargains appreciatively.
+
+"Well, I guess we have seen enough," said Mabel finally. "We may as well
+return to the ship."
+
+As they started toward the door they became aware of the sounds of
+confusion behind them. For a moment they hesitated, then their curiosity
+overcame them and they turned back.
+
+Far down the aisle a large crowd had gathered. The girls could hear the
+loud tones of one of the floor walkers calling for the store detective.
+Shirley and Mabel elbowed their way through the crowd, and presently
+were able to see what was going on.
+
+Shirley uttered an exclamation of amazement and clutched Mabel by the
+arm.
+
+"Look at that!" she cried in a low voice.
+
+And well might she have been amazed. For there, in the center of the
+crowd, his arm grasped tightly by the big floor walker, was Henry
+Bristow.
+
+His face was red and he was plainly very angry. However, he was making
+no effort to release himself. He controlled himself with an effort and
+spoke.
+
+"I tell you you are making a mistake," he said quietly, and his voice
+carried to the two girls.
+
+"Is that so?" sneered the floor walker. "So you deny you are a
+shop-lifter, eh? Well, I didn't suppose you would admit it. How do you
+account for the possession of this valuable piece of lace the clerk saw
+you getting away with?"
+
+"It must have caught on my coat," was the reply. "I didn't try to steal
+it."
+
+"You didn't, eh? We'll see as soon as the house detective arrives. I
+reckon you have plenty of stuff stowed away in your pockets."
+
+"Well, I haven't," declared Bristow angrily. "You're going to be sorry
+for this before you get through."
+
+"Well what do you think of that?" demanded Mabel, who had stood with
+open mouth during this conversation.
+
+"I think that he is innocent," declared Shirley.
+
+She glanced quickly around the store, and as she did so her eyes fell
+upon the woman she had so recently seen appropriating articles from the
+counter.
+
+"There goes the woman who did it," she declared, pointing.
+
+Mabel looked and nodded her head.
+
+The woman was coming directly toward them, pushing her way through the
+crowd vigorously. Shirley stepped forward and barred her progress.
+
+At the same moment Shirley raised her voice and called out:
+
+"That man is innocent, Mr. Floorwalker. Here is the shop-lifter."
+
+The woman again tried to push by Shirley, but the latter maneuvered so
+as to be directly in front of her at every step.
+
+Shirley's words caused a commotion. Willing hands darted out and seized
+the woman, and she was taken before the man who still grasped young
+Bristow by the arm.
+
+Shirley and Mabel pushed their way forward.
+
+"I saw this woman steal a bolt of silk and some laces," declared
+Shirley. "I would have said nothing about it had not Mr. Bristow, whom I
+know, been accused."
+
+"It isn't true!" cried the woman. "The girl is in the plot with the
+man."
+
+Shirley's face grew red.
+
+"I am not!" she declared. "This woman is guilty. She put the things
+under that long cape."
+
+The floor walker was plainly mystified. He glanced from one to the
+other.
+
+"Well, it will do no harm to have a look," he declared. He turned to the
+woman. "Will you remove your cape, madam?"
+
+The woman drew back, and pulled the garment closer about her.
+
+"No, I won't!" she declared, "I--"
+
+"Very well," said the floor walker. "I shall have the floor matron
+search you."
+
+He turned and called to one of the clerks. But the woman waited for no
+more. With a single move she took off her cape, and threw it to the
+floor.
+
+"There," she said, throwing out her arms, "you may see that I have
+nothing."
+
+"I saw her take them," declared Shirley, looking at the woman in
+surprise, for she could not see a sign of a stolen article.
+
+A frown gathered on the floor walker's face as he glanced at Shirley.
+
+"This looks rather bad for you." he said to her pointedly.
+
+Shirley took a step back.
+
+"What do you mean?" she asked in no little alarm.
+
+"It seems that the lady is telling the truth. What was your object in
+accusing her?"
+
+"I tell you I saw her take them," declared Shirley again.
+
+The floor walker shrugged his shoulders.
+
+It was Mabel who finally cleared up the situation. The woman's cape
+still lay on the floor where she had thrown it. Mabel stooped down to
+pick it up, and as she did so the woman also snatched at it.
+
+But Mabel was the quicker of the two and captured the garment. Quickly
+she turned it wrong side out, and as she did so there was a gasp from
+the crowd.
+
+For the inside of the coat was literally filled with secret pockets.
+Mabel thrust her hand in and pulled out the bolt of silk. She held it
+above her head.
+
+"Here it is!" she cried.
+
+"I bought and paid for that," sputtered the angry woman.
+
+One after another Mabel now produced other articles of value, which she
+exposed to the view of the crowd. And in each case the woman's
+explanation was the same:
+
+"I paid for that!"
+
+But the floor walker was not to be fooled, nor was the manager of the
+store, who came up at that moment. The former released his hold on young
+Bristow and made him an abject apology.
+
+One of the women detectives was called, and the shop-lifter turned over
+to her. Then the manager addressed Shirley and Mabel.
+
+"I owe you two young ladies a debt of gratitude," he said. "This
+shop-lifting has been going on for a month or more and we have lost
+heavily. Thanks to you I believe we have the culprit at last. Without
+your assistance she would have escaped."
+
+Shirley and Mabel acknowledged this praise with slight inclinations of
+the heads, and then Shirley spoke to Young Bristow, who stood near.
+
+"Are you going back to the boat, Mr. Bristow? We shall be glad of your
+company."
+
+The young man accepted this invitation, and the three made their way
+from the store.
+
+"I can't thank you enough, either of you," he declared as they walked
+along. "I was in a ticklish position, and but for your assistance might
+have been put to no end of trouble."
+
+"How did you happen to be accused?" asked Shirley.
+
+"Why, I was walking through the aisle, and because of the crowd I was
+shoved against the counter. A piece of lace caught on a button of my
+coat, and I dragged it with me as I went by. Then the girl behind the
+counter cried out that some one had stolen something. The floor walker
+saw the lace caught in my coat and collared me. That's all."
+
+"I see," said Shirley, and added with a smile: "You certainly did look
+funny there!"
+
+"Did I? Well, I didn't feel very funny. I was afraid I would be held
+long enough to make me miss the ship, and I can't afford to do that."
+
+"Then your business in Colon is very important?" asked Mabel.
+
+Young Bristow looked at her in silence for some moments, and Mabel grew
+red as she thought she was to be rebuffed again. But she wasn't. Bristow
+finally answered her question.
+
+"Very important," he said quietly.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.--MABEL SHOWS HER COURAGE.
+
+
+"By the way," said Shirley as they walked along, "how is your wound? I
+see you have removed the bandage."
+
+A startled expression flitted across the young man's face, but neither
+girl perceived it.
+
+"It's much better," he made answer. "Not even a scar left. It didn't
+amount to much, after all."
+
+Fifteen minutes later they were back aboard the _Yucatan_, where Shirley
+related their experiences to others of their party.
+
+"I'll have to keep a closer watch on you two," declared Mr. Willing.
+"Every time you get away by yourselves you run into trouble. And you
+won't always come out of it so easily."
+
+Several hours later the big steamship moved majestically out of the
+harbor and soon was headed down the coast once more. She came to anchor
+again the following morning at Jacksonville, the last American port at
+which she would touch until she reached San Diego, California. The
+Willing party went ashore again, but this time, true to his word, Mr.
+Willing would not permit the girls to wander away by themselves.
+
+As they strolled about, Shirley became suddenly ill. She knew it was
+nothing serious, brought on probably by the excessive heat. Therefore
+she informed the others that she was going back aboard the ship, as she
+wished to lie down. Mabel agreed to go with her.
+
+The fathers saw the two girls into a taxicab, which soon dropped them at
+the pier, where they immediately went to their suite.
+
+Shirley felt much better now that she was out of the sun, and lying down
+on the sofa picked up a book and commenced to read. Mabel sat down at a
+little desk to write a letter.
+
+In spite of the cooling breeze made by the electric fan in the room, it
+was still rather warm, and Mabel left the outer door open to get what
+breeze they could from over the water. Mabel was in the first room, and
+Shirley in the one beyond.
+
+Suddenly Mabel heard footsteps running down the deck toward their suite.
+She glanced up idly, wondering why any one should put himself to so much
+exertion on such a hot day, and even as she looked up a figure darted
+into the room and closed the door behind him.
+
+Mabel jumped quickly to her feet and faced the newcomer, who, she now
+perceived, held a revolver in his hand.
+
+Mabel was not frightened by the sight of the weapon, for she was not
+unacquainted with the use of firearms and had faced more than one
+dangerous situation; but as the man turned and faced her, she uttered a
+cry of amazement.
+
+The man was Henry Bristow.
+
+Bristow, who had not perceived that the room was occupied, turned at the
+sound of Mabel's voice, his revolver half raised. At sight of Mabel he
+dropped his arm, and removed his cap.
+
+"Please pardon me for this intrusion," he said quietly. "I did not know
+the cabin was occupied nor whose it was. I just happened to see the door
+open, and I slipped in."
+
+"What is the matter?" asked Mabel, who realized that something must be
+wrong.
+
+"Oh, nothing," was the reply.
+
+Before Mabel could utter another word, there was a loud knock on the
+closed door.
+
+Shirley, in response to the knock, came in from the next room. She took
+in the situation at a glance, but did not betray her surprise by so much
+as an exclamation. She advanced quickly toward Mabel and young Bristow.
+
+"What is wrong?" she asked in a low voice.
+
+Bristow waved his revolver toward the door.
+
+"They want me," he said. "I can't allow you girls to be drawn into this,
+so I shall go out."
+
+A dark expression passed over his face, and his hand tightened on the
+revolver. Shirley became alarmed.
+
+She motioned him to the room beyond.
+
+"You go in there," she said. "No one will bother you."
+
+For a moment Bristow hesitated, then he bowed and passed in. As he went
+by her, Mabel reached out and relieved him of his revolver. Bristow
+started to protest, then changed his mind and said nothing.
+
+Mabel motioned to Shirley.
+
+"You go in too," she said. "I'll stay here."
+
+Shirley obeyed without a word. Then Mabel walked to the little center
+table, and put the revolver in the drawer.
+
+Came another sharp knock on the door. Mabel advanced and threw it open.
+
+Three men stood in the doorway, and all removed their hats at sight of
+her.
+
+"What is it?" demanded Mabel.
+
+"We are searching for a man named Von Blusen, who is aboard this ship.
+We trailed him down the deck here, and he disappeared. Have you seen
+him?"
+
+"I know no one by that name," returned Mabel.
+
+"He's a young fellow," went on the spokesman of the three, "and a very
+smooth-spoken chap. All the other cabins are locked but this one. I
+happen to know that this door was open a few minutes ago. I thought he
+might possibly have come in here?"
+
+He looked at Mabel inquiringly.
+
+"I know no one by that name," declared the girl again.
+
+"Perhaps you know him by some other name, then?"
+
+Mabel did not reply.
+
+The man became suspicious.
+
+"I am afraid we shall have to search this cabin, miss," he said. "I am
+not convinced he is not in here."
+
+"What is it you want with this man?" asked Mabel, her curiosity getting
+the better of her.
+
+"Well, I don't mind telling you. Von Blusen is a German and I have been
+tipped off that he is up to some mischief, I don't know just what. My
+orders are to take him ashore and turn him over to the U. S.
+authorities."
+
+"And who are you?" demanded Mabel.
+
+"Me? Why, I'm a United States special officer."
+
+He threw back his coat and exposed a badge, which he covered hurriedly.
+Mabel, therefore, did not see it clearly. Something seemed to tell her,
+however, that the man was not telling the truth.
+
+She stepped back quickly to the little center table, and as the first
+man advanced after her, she quickly opened the drawer and produced
+Bristow's revolver, which she levelled at the three men.
+
+"You can't come in here," she said quietly.
+
+The foremost man drew back, as did the others.
+
+"But, miss," said the spokesman, "we must search the cabin. I am sure
+Von Blusen came in here. Will you deny it?"
+
+"I don't have to deny it," declared Mabel angrily. "If you are United
+States officers, as you claim, you will have some means of
+identification."
+
+"I showed you my badge," said the man.
+
+"Yes, and you were careful that I didn't get a good look at it."
+
+"But we must make the search."
+
+"Then you must have an order. I know that much. I know you have to have
+a piece of paper, or something--a warrant I believe it is called."
+
+"I haven't any warrant now," was the reply, "but I am going to make the
+search just the same."
+
+He stepped forward, but Mabel covered him with her revolver.
+
+"You have come in here against my command," she said quietly, "and I
+should be perfectly justified in shooting you, as I would a burglar."
+
+The man sought to temporize.
+
+"Now, see here miss--" he began.
+
+Mabel took a step forward. She was growing angry.
+
+"You just get right out of here," she exclaimed.
+
+The man drew back a step and scratched his head perplexedly.
+
+"Miss," he said, "you are making a big mistake to shield this man. I
+tell you he is plotting mischief which may involve the United States in
+war. We must have him before the ship sails."
+
+"Well, you won't get him in here," declared the girl.
+
+Again the man hesitated, then seemed on the point of moving forward
+again.
+
+"I warn you for the last time to get out of here," said Mabel very
+quietly.
+
+Once more her revolver came to bear on the man, and he drew back,
+throwing up his hands with a gesture of dismay. Then he turned to his
+companions.
+
+"What can we do against that?" he asked. "We can't use a girl roughly,
+and if the ship gets beyond the three-mile limit, we can't get him till
+we reach Colon."
+
+"Guess we'll have to wait then," said one of the others.
+
+"Yep, guess we will."
+
+The leader turned to Mabel and made her a low bow.
+
+"I'm sorry you interfered with us," he said. "You'll find before long
+that you have done wrong."
+
+"Perhaps I shall," said Mabel; "but I couldn't permit you to invade my
+cabin."
+
+"Tell you what, Tim," said one of the men, "we'll just camp out here and
+get him when he comes out. He's likely to come out before we sail."
+
+"Good idea," agreed the leader. "We'll do it."
+
+Again he made a low bow to Mabel and followed his men out.
+
+"Sorry to have troubled you," he muttered as he took his departure.
+
+Shirley and Bristow now came in from the other room.
+
+"You did splendidly, Miss Ashton," declared Bristow warmly. "I was
+afraid you would allow them to enter."
+
+Before Mabel could reply there came the sound of voices outside. One,
+raised in anger, was that of Mr. Willing. A moment later, followed by
+Colonel Ashton and Dick, he entered the room.
+
+His gaze fell upon Henry Bristow.
+
+"So," he growled, "it's you they're after, eh?"
+
+"Yes, sir," returned Bristow quietly.
+
+"Well, you sit down over there, young man," said Mr. Willing, pointing
+to a chair. "I'm going to tell you a few things, and I don't care
+whether you like them or not."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.--THEIR FIRST QUARREL.
+
+
+Shirley and Mabel glanced at Mr. Willing in surprise. Young Bristow took
+the seat indicated, and the others also sat down.
+
+"First," said Mr. Willing to Bristow, "I am going to ask you a question
+or two. If you refuse to answer, I shall, of course, draw my own
+conclusions."
+
+The young man nodded.
+
+"Proceed, sir," he said.
+
+"All right. Now, in the first place, are you connected, in any capacity,
+with the German government?"
+
+"That I cannot answer," was the reply.
+
+"Very good! Now, then, are you aboard this ship at the command of the
+German government?"
+
+"I cannot answer that question, either, sir."
+
+"Suit yourself. Is it not a fact that those with whom you come in
+contact--those who seem to be your friends--are in danger because of
+their associations with you?"
+
+"I suppose you are right, sir."
+
+"Just as I expected," declared Mr. Willing. "Now I've got this to say.
+Already you have been the means of getting my daughter and the colonel's
+daughter into your scrapes. They have come to your assistance twice.
+Also Dick has been with you on one adventure. You will admit that, of
+course?"
+
+"Of course, sir."
+
+"Good. Then here is my ultimatum: I want you to keep away from me and
+mine. I don't want you to cross this threshold again; and I don't want
+you to speak to any of us should you chance to encounter us. Do I make
+myself plain?"
+
+"Perfectly, sir," replied Bristow rising from his chair, his face pale.
+
+"I am glad I do," declared Mr. Willing. "I haven't any use for a spy, be
+he German or English. Now you can get out of here."
+
+Without a word Bristow moved toward the door. But Mabel leaped forward
+and barred his path. She turned to Mr. Willing.
+
+"Surely you wouldn't send him out to be captured?" she exclaimed. "Those
+men are waiting for him out there."
+
+"That is none of our affair," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"I agree with Mabel in that," declared Shirley. "If he goes out before
+we are beyond the three-mile limit, he will be taken prisoner."
+
+"And if he isn't there is no telling what may happen," commented Mr.
+Willing.
+
+"Dad," said Shirley, "please let him stay until we have passed the
+three-mile limit? Please!"
+
+Mr. Willing hesitated.
+
+"Well, I agree," he said at length.
+
+Bristow spoke to Mr. Willing.
+
+"I shall stay, sir," he said, "but it is because I must avoid capture if
+it is possible. Otherwise I wouldn't stay in the same room with you."
+
+Mr. Willing smiled. He didn't mind that kind of talk, but not so
+Shirley. She sprang to her feet and faced Bristow angrily.
+
+"How dare you speak to my father like that?" she demanded. "How dare
+you?"
+
+Bristow turned his head away, and made no reply.
+
+Mabel quickly came to the support of Bristow.
+
+"And why shouldn't he?" she asked. "He hasn't done anything and your
+father was very mean."
+
+"Why, Mabel," exclaimed Shirley in surprise.
+
+"I mean it," declared Mabel. "Your father was mean."
+
+"He couldn't be too mean to a German," exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"You people make me tired," declared Mabel angrily. "Why are you forever
+jumping on the Germans? They are in the right and they are going to
+win."
+
+"They are not!" This from Shirley. "The English are going to win, and I
+hope they do!"
+
+"And I hope the Germans win," declared Mabel.
+
+"Shirley! Mabel!"
+
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton had now taken a hand in the conversation.
+But both girls were too angry to heed them.
+
+"And just because this man is a German you are all against him. If he
+were English you would be shaking hands with him."
+
+Mabel was losing control of herself.
+
+"Why, Mabel," said Shirley. "You know that is not true."
+
+"I know it is true," declared the girl.
+
+Colonel Ashton took her firmly by the arm.
+
+"Mabel, I am surprised at you," he said. "Go to your room."
+
+"It's Shirley's room, it's not mine," cried Mabel.
+
+Shirley advanced toward her friend.
+
+"Mabel, what do you mean?" she asked quietly.
+
+"You know what I mean. You told me I wasn't telling the truth."
+
+Shirley compressed her lips and stepped back.
+
+Mr. Willing took a hand in the conversation.
+
+"Unless this foolishness ceases we shall leave the boat at Havana and
+return home immediately," he said quietly. "I will have none of this."
+
+"I don't care," declared Shirley, also now very angry.
+
+"Neither do I," this from Mabel.
+
+"Shirley, go to your room," ordered Mr. Willing. "I am your father and I
+will be obeyed."
+
+Shirley glanced at her father's stern face, and obeyed. She knew that
+when he looked like that he was not to be trifled with.
+
+"Mabel, you go with her," said Colonel Ashton quietly.
+
+Mabel hesitated.
+
+"Do you hear me?" asked the colonel.
+
+Mabel also realized that she had gone too far. She made her way after
+Shirley.
+
+Inside their room the girls did not speak to each other. In the heart of
+each there was a peculiar feeling, and each knew that, in a measure, she
+was to blame. But neither was ready to give in yet.
+
+It was their first quarrel.
+
+Outside Mr. Willing turned to young Bristow.
+
+"This," he said, "is your doing. And when you once set foot outside this
+cabin, don't you ever cross my path again."
+
+The _Yucatan_ was under way now, and from the window Mr. Willing could
+see the three men still waiting on the outside. But at last they took
+their departure and Mr. Willing knew they had passed beyond the
+three-mile limit. He turned again to Bristow.
+
+"Now Bristow or Von Blusen or whatever your name is," he said, "get
+out."
+
+Bristow turned a dark look upon him.
+
+"You have insulted me," he said, "and you shall pay for it."
+
+"I couldn't insult you, you little whipper-snapper," said Mr. Willing
+angrily. "Are you going to get out of here?"
+
+"When I've had my say," declared the young man angrily. "If it were not
+that I am on important business I would chastise you right now."
+
+"Is it because you have important business or because you are a child?"
+asked Mr. Willing smiling.
+
+Bristow took a threatening step forward, but now Dick took a hand.
+
+"That's enough of this," he said sternly, and putting forth a hand he
+pushed Bristow back.
+
+The latter's face turned a dull red, and he struck at Dick, who promptly
+slapped him across the face. Dick also was angry now.
+
+"You shall pay for that blow," shouted Bristow. "I can't fight you now,
+but when I have completed my work I shall seek you out."
+
+"I won't be very hard to find," declared Dick. "Now get out."
+
+He took the infuriated Bristow by the neck and the bottom of the coat
+and ran him out the door. Then he closed it after him.
+
+"Rather a fiery young man, that," remarked Colonel Ashton grimly.
+
+"Rather," agreed Mr. Willing dryly. He turned to the other room and
+called: "Shirley! Mabel!"
+
+A moment later the two girls came forth. Mr. Willing looked at them
+severely for some moments before he spoke.
+
+"You should both be ashamed of yourselves," he said at last. "The idea
+of such foolishness. Why, you have never quarreled before."
+
+"And there will be no more of it," declared Colonel Ashton grimly. "At
+the next sign of trouble we shall turn right around and go home."
+
+"Well, Mabel started it," declared Shirley.
+
+"I did not, you started it," exclaimed Mabel.
+
+"Shirley!" said Mr. Willing.
+
+"Mabel!" exclaimed Colonel Ashton.
+
+The girls became silent, but continued to glare at each other.
+
+Then, suddenly, a smile broke over Shirley's face. Her father breathed
+more freely. Even Colonel Ashton looked at the two girls eagerly.
+
+Then Shirley advanced toward Mabel and held out her hand.
+
+"I'm sorry for what I said, Mabel," she declared earnestly.
+
+For a moment Mabel hesitated, but for a moment only. Then she jumped
+quickly forward, and ignoring her friend's outstretched hand, threw her
+arms around her and broke into tears.
+
+"It was all my fault," she sobbed. "You didn't say anything."
+
+"Yes I did, too," said Shirley. "It was as much my fault as it was
+yours."
+
+"No it wasn't."
+
+"Yes it was."
+
+"It was not."
+
+The two girls drew back from each other.
+
+"I say it was," declared Shirley.
+
+"And I say it wasn't," declared Mabel.
+
+"What is the matter with you two?" demanded Mr. Willing, stepping
+between them.
+
+"Nothing, Dad," said Shirley, smiling again. She turned again to Mabel.
+
+"I'm sorry," she said quietly.
+
+"And so am I," said Mabel.
+
+Once more they fell into each other's arms, laughing happily. Then, arm
+in arm, they turned and made their way to their own rooms, absolutely
+ignoring the presence of the others.
+
+Dick, who had felt decidedly uncomfortable during this scene, grinned
+foolishly. Colonel Ashton laughed aloud, and Mr. Willing smiled.
+
+"Funny things happen, my boy," exclaimed the latter, slapping Dick on
+the back. "You learn something every minute."
+
+And in the other room Mabel said:
+
+"We shall never, never quarrel again."
+
+"Never!" agreed Shirley.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.--ADRIFT.
+
+
+In the distance the Cuban city of Havana was slipping slowly from sight.
+Aft on the promenade deck Shirley, Mabel and the others of the party,
+together with many other passengers, were casting last looks at the
+island metropolis.
+
+The sun was just sinking below the horizon, but there were still several
+hours before darkness would fall. The view was indeed picturesque and
+the passengers were impressed with it.
+
+The steamship _Yucatan_ was now on the last leg of her journey toward
+Colon.
+
+In the main salon a crowd of men had gathered. On the upper deck, the
+gallery deck, the promenade deck and the main deck they had also
+gathered in knots. They blocked the main staircase and the exits from
+the engine room below.
+
+A group somewhat larger than the rest had assembled about the captain's
+cabin. A close observer would have noticed that each man among these
+different groups wore a peculiar little button in the lapel of his coat.
+
+Each group was silent. It appeared that they were waiting for something.
+Now a young man appeared and spoke to the first group holding his open
+watch in his hand. Then he passed on to the next, then to the next,
+until he had approached all. Then he took his place with the others near
+the bridge, and waited, watch in hand.
+
+Suddenly he pulled a little whistle from his pocket, put it to his lips,
+waited a moment, and then blew a shrill blast, that penetrated to the
+farthest part of the ship.
+
+Instantly the various groups of men wearing the button of peculiar
+design came to action.
+
+The passengers on the promenade deck, the Willing party among them,
+found themselves under the muzzles of many revolvers. On the gallery,
+the deck, the main salon, the grand stairway a like condition prevailed.
+
+Only the men who guarded the exit from the engine and boiler rooms were
+inactive, but these stood with drawn revolvers.
+
+A dozen men swarmed from the bridge into the wheel house, where they
+confronted the pilot, the Captain, the first and second officers, who
+chanced to be there together. Officers in other parts of the ship also
+had been held up.
+
+The surprise had been complete. The _Yucatan_ was at the mercy of this
+army of conspirators, whoever they chanced to be.
+
+Shirley and Mabel had eyed the strange proceedings upon their section of
+the ship with no less amazement than the rest of the passengers. Mr.
+Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick were equally astonished.
+
+"What is it, a wholesale hold-up?" demanded the colonel.
+
+"Worse, I'm afraid," declared Mr. Willing.
+
+"I know!" exclaimed Shirley suddenly. "Mr. Bristow is concerned in
+this."
+
+"My goodness! I believe you are right Shirley," declared Mabel.
+
+"I know I am right," returned Shirley positively. "This is why he sailed
+on the _Yucatan_."
+
+In the meantime the captors of the vessel had relieved all on board of
+whatever weapons they had. They had made a systematic search of the
+cabins, while some of their number kept the crew and passengers covered.
+Of the many aboard the ship the only ones who did not know what had
+happened were the engine crew and stokers.
+
+The wireless had been among the first points seized, and the operator
+had had no opportunity of sending a message.
+
+And now a young man moved about among the passengers, assuring them that
+there was no danger so long as they kept quiet. This young man came aft
+on the promenade deck where the Willing party stood.
+
+Even as Shirley had surmised, he was Henry Bristow.
+
+He smiled as he approached them.
+
+"Well," growled Mr. Willing, "I see you have put the thing through."
+
+"Part of it sir, part of it," was the reply. "The rest is to come."
+
+"What are you going to do now, Mr. Bristow?" asked Mabel.
+
+The latter smiled at her.
+
+"Captain Von Blusen, if you please, Miss Ashton," he said, "I am no
+longer Henry Bristow, but Captain Friederich Von Blusen, of His Imperial
+Majesty's service."
+
+"And what are you going to do with the ship?" asked Shirley.
+
+"Why, we shall do a little cruising," was the reply. "We have
+established a naval base off the coast of Cuba, but we have no ships on
+this side of the Atlantic. Therefore we must have ships. This is the
+first."
+
+"And what are you going to do with us, captain?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Ah, that is the hard part," was the reply, "but, before starting, we
+came to a conclusion, though none of the passengers is likely to be
+pleased. We shall set you adrift in small boats."
+
+The others staggered back in dismay.
+
+"Impossible," declared Mr. Willing. "Surely you are not barbarians."
+
+"The law of necessity must be obeyed," replied the captain.
+
+He took his departure.
+
+"The cold-blooded scoundrel," declared Colonel Ashton. "This is what we
+get for helping him to escape."
+
+"And that is my fault," declared Mabel.
+
+"Well, there is no use talking about it now," said Dick. "It's too
+late."
+
+An hour later the new crew began getting out the boats, and all the
+passengers provided themselves with life preservers. Fortunately, the
+weather was calm and the sea smooth and there was little likelihood of a
+storm at this time of year.
+
+With everything in readiness, Captain Von Blusen once more approached
+the Willing party, and drew Mabel slightly to one side in spite of the
+protests of the others.
+
+"Miss Ashton," he said, "in your cabin the other day you spoke of your
+sympathies to the German cause. Now I shall tell you something, for you
+have done much for me. Advise the others to make no attempt to reach
+Colon, should they be picked up."
+
+"And why not?" demanded Shirley.
+
+The captain hesitated.
+
+"Well, there is no harm in telling you," he said at last. "Of course,
+you may not know that Germany is trying to bring the United States into
+this war on her side. We have at last found a way. Just off Colon are
+several Japanese warships. We shall near them unobserved, and signal by
+wireless that a certain thing must be done, representing ourselves as
+one of the Japanese battleships.
+
+"Naturally, we shall be refused permission. Now we have a new invention
+that would enable us to destroy Colon from a distance, and in our
+message we shall threaten this unless the supposed Japanese demand is
+granted. Do you understand?"
+
+Mabel nodded her head slowly. She was beyond words.
+
+"And when the demand is refused," continued the captain "we shall use
+some of this new explosive. That will mean war between Japan and the
+United States, and therefore, England also, as she is Japan's ally. Do
+you see?"
+
+"Yes, I see," said Mabel quietly.
+
+"And what do you think of the plan?"
+
+"I think it is contemptible," declared Mabel.
+
+"But, but--" began the captain.
+
+"I don't care to hear any more," said Mabel. "But you will not succeed,
+I am sure of that. You can not succeed."
+
+She turned on her heel and made her way back to the others, the captain
+standing as if rooted to the deck as he stared after her.
+
+Mabel turned the matter over in her mind. She felt certain that the
+captain had been boasting, and the more she thought it over the more she
+became convinced of it. Therefore, she decided to say nothing about it
+to the others.
+
+Under the muzzles of the revolvers of the captors of the big steamship,
+captain, officers, crew and passengers now took their places in the
+small boats, and were lowered over the side.
+
+Each boat was well stocked with provisions and water, for the Germans
+had no mind to set their prisoners adrift and let them starve or perish
+of thirst.
+
+The shore of Cuba was not far away, and, with steady rowing by the men,
+it would be possible for them to reach there within twelve hours.
+Besides, there was always the chance they would be picked up by a
+passing vessel.
+
+Fortunately, the passenger list was not large. The bulk of it had been
+made up of the men who had later captured the ship. Therefore, officers,
+passengers and crew included, there were not more than three hundred set
+adrift.
+
+The engine room crew had been impressed into service by the Germans.
+
+The Willing party found themselves in the boat with the captain and
+perhaps a dozen other passengers. As the boat struck the water, and the
+men began to row away from the big steamship at the captain's command,
+Shirley and Mabel were badly frightened.
+
+In spite of the cheering words spoken by their fathers, Dick and other
+male passengers, they did not bear up very well. As they looked first in
+one direction and then the other and saw nothing but water, they broke
+into tears. The small boat looked very small indeed to be at large upon
+the water.
+
+Presently all the boats were launched, and rowed some distance from the
+steamer. There they stopped as a sudden blast signified that the big
+ship was about to get under way and leave them.
+
+It began to grow dark. The electric lights aboard the large vessel
+glowed suddenly, and slowly the brilliantly lighted floating palace made
+off in the gathering darkness.
+
+As it went away and left them to the mercies of the sea, cries of
+anguish, despair and condemnation were hurled after the men who had thus
+set the passengers and crew adrift. Women sobbed, and men stood up in
+the boats and shook their fists after the steamship _Yucatan_.
+
+And then the great ship disappeared from sight. The men in the small
+boats renewed their work at the oars, and the boats moved toward the
+distant Cuban coast.
+
+Adding to the fearfulness of their condition, darkness descended upon
+them like a pall.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.--COLON.
+
+
+At a word from Mr. Willing, after several hours of rowing, Shirley and
+Mabel cuddled up in their end of the boat and tried to sleep; but this
+they found impossible, and all through the night they gazed out over the
+dark waters.
+
+Here and there the lights in the other boats were visible, but before
+morning they had lost sight of these. When the first faint streaks of
+dawn appeared in the east there was not another boat to be seen. They
+had become separated in the night.
+
+The almost twenty passengers in the little craft ate of the food that
+had been provided and drank of the water. Thus refreshed, and with the
+sun now appearing above the horizon, their predicament did not seem as
+serious as it had during the blackness of the night.
+
+There was not an object in sight to break the monotony of the water, and
+the boat rocked gently on the easy swell of the sea. The men bent to the
+oars again and sent the little craft skimming through the water.
+
+Came a cry from the man at the rudder, and the eyes of the others
+followed his gaze toward the distant horizon. They beheld a faint cloud
+in the otherwise clear sky.
+
+"Steamer!" cried the first man.
+
+The cloud approached nearer and at last the outline of a ship, appearing
+very small at that distance, could be made out. It was headed on a
+course that would bring it almost directly in the path of the smaller
+boat.
+
+As the hull of the vessel grew larger by its approach, occasional cheers
+broke from the lips of those in the little craft. So far it was
+impossible to tell whether the castaways had been sighted or not; but as
+the big ship neared them--now scarcely more than a mile away--the shrill
+blast of the steamer's whistle split the air. The small boat with its
+passengers had been discovered. The passengers raised another cheer.
+
+Rapidly the large vessel bore down on them, and the little craft bobbed
+swiftly toward it. At last they came alongside.
+
+"Ladies first!" cried the captain of the _Yucatan_.
+
+Shirley and Mabel were the first over the rail, where they stood
+awaiting the arrival of the others.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick were the last to go aboard, and no
+sooner were the refugees all on deck than the big vessel resumed her
+course. The captain motioned them to his cabin.
+
+The ship upon which they now found themselves proved to be the
+_Reliance_, with a cargo of freight from New Orleans for Colon.
+
+This the captain explained when he learned where the erstwhile refugees
+were bound.
+
+"We can't offer you the same accommodations you had aboard the
+_Yucatan_," he said, "but you are welcome to the best we have."
+
+"And we are indeed glad to get it, captain," Shirley spoke up.
+
+"No doubt, no doubt," smiled the captain. "All night in an open boat is
+no pleasure trip, even if this is the month of June," and he ordered
+them assigned quarters forward.
+
+While by no means as large and pretentious as those on the _Yucatan_,
+the cabins were nevertheless clean and comfortable.
+
+"We can thank our stars that we were fortunate enough to be picked up so
+soon," declared Dick.
+
+"What can have become of the other boats?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Probably reached the Cuban shore," replied Colonel Ashton. "We are
+doubtless the only ones that lost our course. The others more than
+likely stuck close together."
+
+"I hope they are all safe," declared Shirley.
+
+"I am sure they are," returned her father.
+
+"Now," said Colonel Ashton, "the thing to be considered is, what to do
+when we reach Colon. Shall we take another steamer and continue our
+course, or shall we turn about and go home?"
+
+"We don't want to go home, Dad," exclaimed Shirley. "You won't give up
+the trip to San Francisco, will you?"
+
+"No, I think not," was the reply. "We can replenish our wardrobes in
+Colon sufficiently to get to Frisco, and we can do the rest of our
+buying there. No, we shall go on."
+
+The girls clapped their hands in delight. Both had feared that the
+disaster might put an untimely end to their summer vacation.
+
+"What do you suppose the Germans intend doing with the _Yucatan_?" asked
+Dick.
+
+"Well, you heard the captain speak of a naval base on the coast of Cuba.
+They probably will run in there, put some big guns aboard and start out
+on a privateering cruise. There have been a couple of such German
+raiders, and they did considerable damage to British merchant ships
+before they were chased to the safety of internment in Newport News."
+
+"I guess that is about what they plan to do," agreed Dick. "I'll surely
+have one experience of which to write when I get back to work."
+
+An hour later the party was gathered on deck, when the captain of the
+_Yucatan_ approached.
+
+"The first thing I shall do is to report this to General Fullaway, at
+Colon," he declared.
+
+"General Fullaway!" exclaimed Mr. Willing. "You don't mean General Hugh
+Fullaway?"
+
+"The same," replied the captain. "Do you know him?"
+
+"Well, rather," replied Mr. Willing. "We were schoolmates years ago, and
+have been close friends since. He comes from my home town. I shall look
+him up. But I didn't know he was in command in Colon."
+
+"He has only been recently put in command," was the reply. "I too know
+him well."
+
+The _Reliance_ proved to be a very slow vessel, and it was days before
+the city of Colon was sighted.
+
+At the entrance to the Panama Canal, Colon is a very picturesque city.
+Since work on the canal was begun, bringing thousands of Americans to
+the country, it has been more or less metropolitan in character, at the
+same time retaining its South American atmosphere.
+
+Shirley and Mabel looked about with wonder as they made their way
+through the dirty narrow streets toward the hotel. This, however, they
+found to be strictly up to date in all respects, and they were soon
+installed in comfortable quarters.
+
+Several hours later, Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton left the hotel,
+announcing that they were going to pay their respects to General
+Fullaway. They were back several hours later and informed Shirley, Mabel
+and Dick that they were to dine with the general in his quarters that
+night.
+
+The girls were naturally excited at this prospect, and spent most of the
+day in the purchase of suitable garments. Dick, as well as Mr. Willing
+and Colonel Ashton, also purchased more clothing to take the place of
+what had been lost when they were set adrift from the _Yucatan_.
+
+General Fullaway had already heard the story from the captain of the
+_Yucatan_, but supper over, he desired to hear it once more from his
+guests.
+
+Mr. Willing related their first meeting with the German commander, who
+had introduced himself as Henry Bristow when they had first met. He told
+of the experience aboard the _Yucatan_ while the vessel was tied up at
+Jacksonville.
+
+"You did wrong not to let the men take him, no matter who they were,"
+was General Fullaway's verdict.
+
+"I realize that now," said Mr. Willing, "but who could have suspected
+such a gigantic plot?"
+
+"It was a gigantic plot," agreed the general, "and was carried out
+excellently. It must have been well planned."
+
+"Mr. Bristow warned us not to come to Colon, general," spoke up Shirley.
+
+"He did?" exclaimed the general in surprise. "And why, pray?"
+
+"Well, he said it wasn't safe," replied Shirley.
+
+"Hm-m-m," muttered the general, with a smile. "And did he tell you why?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"I thought not," laughed the general.
+
+"But he told me, general," put in Mabel.
+
+The others looked at the girl in surprise, but Mabel bore up steadily
+under their scrutiny.
+
+"What do you mean, Mabel?" demanded Colonel Ashton.
+
+"You remember when he took me aside just before we were set adrift,
+father?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Yes, of course."
+
+"That's when he told me, but it seemed so absurd and impossible that I
+didn't repeat it."
+
+"What was it, Miss Ashton?" asked General Fullaway. "Will you tell us?"
+
+"He said that Colon was in danger," replied Mabel, and she repeated the
+conversation she had had with Captain Von Blusen aboard the _Yucatan_.
+
+The others listened to her with breathless interest, and there were
+exclamations of surprise when she concluded.
+
+"Absurd," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"Impossible," Colonel Ashton agreed.
+
+"It would seem so, on the face of it," said General Fullaway, "and I
+suppose it is. It is true, there are two Japanese warships off the
+entrance to the Canal. They have not been allowed to pass through
+because several German merchant vessels are here. As soon as they have
+cleared, of course we shall permit the Japs to go through."
+
+"And have the Japs objected to the delay?" asked Mr. Willing.
+
+"They have indeed. They have demanded permission to pass, which has been
+refused. That was yesterday. But this tale of yours," the general turned
+to Mabel, "is incredible. I suppose the German commander told it to you
+to frighten you."
+
+"I suppose that was his reason," Mabel agreed.
+
+At this moment an orderly entered the room and gave a message to General
+Fullaway. The latter read it, and then turned to Mabel again.
+
+"It seems that your warning may bear fruit, after all," he said quietly.
+
+"Why, sir?" asked the girl eagerly.
+
+"Why, this message I have here," said the general, tapping the paper
+with his finger, "is, or seems to be at least, a communication from the
+Japanese commander. He says if his ships are not allowed to pass through
+the canal to-morrow, he will destroy the city of Colon!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.--A WAR SCARE.
+
+
+An air of intense anticipation pervaded the General's dining room.
+
+Shirley finally broke the silence.
+
+"And will you give them permission, general?" she asked.
+
+"Not without such instructions from Washington," was the reply. "My
+duties are clearly defined. The Japanese ships cannot pass through the
+canal while German merchantmen are in Colon harbor. However, I am not at
+all sure the message is from the Japs."
+
+"You mean--the _Yucatan_," asked Dick.
+
+General Fullaway nodded.
+
+"I wouldn't be at all surprised," he replied quietly. "I shall
+communicate with Washington at once, repeating the story you have told
+me."
+
+He left the room, and returned in a few moments with a slip of paper
+which he gave to the officer who had brought the message.
+
+"I should have a reply in a couple of hours," he told the others. "Would
+you care to wait and hear the result?"
+
+"Indeed we would," declared Shirley.
+
+It was almost three hours later before the reply came. General Fullaway
+read the message in silence, then turned to the others.
+
+"Your story must be true, Miss Ashton," he said. "Washington seems to
+have had some rumor of it. The cruiser _Tennessee_, now stationed here,
+has been ordered to take the _Yucatan_ in charge."
+
+"Will there be a battle?" demanded Mabel anxiously.
+
+"I do not think so. The _Yucatan_, armed though she probably is by this
+time, would hardly be a match for the _Tennessee_."
+
+"I wish we could go with her," declared Shirley.
+
+"So do I," agreed Dick.
+
+General Fullaway was silent for some moments, and then he said:
+
+"Perhaps it can be done. There will be no danger. I don't believe
+Captain Ainslee would object. The _Tennessee_ will not sail before
+morning. I shall communicate with the captain immediately, and let you
+know before morning. He will probably wish to hear your story anyhow."
+
+Shirley, Mabel and the others returned to the hotel, where they prepared
+for bed. Mr. Willing was just about to retire when there was a knock at
+the door. Opening it, a bellboy passed him a message. It was from
+General Fullaway and said that Captain Ainslee would expect the Willing
+party aboard the _Tennessee_ by 8 o'clock in the morning.
+
+Mr. Willing called this piece of news to Dick and the two girls, and all
+were greatly pleased.
+
+"Just think of taking a trip on a warship!" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+All were about early the next morning and were soon at the pier, where
+they found that a cutter from the _Tennessee_ had been sent to meet
+them. Captain Ainslee himself greeted them as they made their way over
+the side of the cruiser, and conducted them to his cabin.
+
+Here he left them for a few minutes while he gave orders to get the ship
+under way. Directly it began to move slowly through the waters of the
+harbor, Captain Ainslee returned to the others.
+
+"Now," he said to Mabel, "I should be glad to hear your story at first
+hand."
+
+Mabel repeated it and the captain listened attentively.
+
+"To tell the truth," he said, "this may be more serious than I supposed.
+If Germany is bent upon drawing the United States into the war, the
+_Yucatan_ may not surrender so easily."
+
+"You don't mean she is likely to fight?" asked Mr. Willing in some
+alarm.
+
+"That's just what I mean," was the reply.
+
+And Captain Ainslee proved a good prophet.
+
+It was well after noon when a cry from the lookout brought all to deck.
+
+"Steamer off the port bow!" it came.
+
+The two girls rushed to the deck with the others. The ships were still
+too far apart for those aboard the cruiser to make out the other
+plainly, and the wireless was immediately put in action.
+
+"German converted cruiser _Kaiserin_!" came the reply to Captain
+Ainslee's message.
+
+"I desire to come aboard you," was the message flashed back. "Heave to!"
+
+The vessels drew nearer together, until at last Captain Ainslee knew the
+other vessel was in range of the _Tennessee's_ big guns.
+
+"I was afraid he would run," he explained. "Now I shall make my demand
+for surrender. It's the _Yucatan_ as you can see."
+
+The wireless was again put to working, and a demand made upon the German
+to surrender.
+
+"What for?" came the question.
+
+"Theft of United States vessel and threatening destruction of Colon,"
+was the reply flashed back.
+
+Captain Von Blusen must have realized that the game was up. The
+_Yucatan_ was brought quickly about and turned to run.
+
+"Clear for action!" came the command aboard the _Tennessee_.
+
+Shirley, Mabel and the others of the party found themselves hurried back
+into the Captain's private cabin. There, through the port-hole, they
+watched the preparations for battle.
+
+The girls were greatly interested, and in spite of the fact that they
+knew they were in danger, they did not lose their coolness nor their
+courage.
+
+Realizing that the passenger ship was probably faster than the cruiser,
+Captain Ainslee wasted no further time. The great forward turret gun
+spoke with a roar, and Shirley and Mabel cried out at the terrific
+noise.
+
+They could watch the progress of the big shell as it sped toward the
+_Yucatan_, where it kicked up the water but a few yards to port. Again
+and again the big gun spoke, and then there was a cheer from the crew as
+a shell struck home.
+
+Twice more the _Yucatan_ was hit, and, while not in a vital spot, her
+speed was suddenly reduced. The _Tennessee_ dashed on.
+
+Then came the first shot from the enemy. The spray flew high beside the
+cruiser as a shell struck the water to larboard. Before she could fire
+again, another shell from the _Tennessee's_ forward turret gun crashed
+aboard her.
+
+Then a white flag was run up the _Yucatan's_ masthead.
+
+The firing aboard the _Tennessee_ ceased, and the cruiser bore down on
+the enemy.
+
+Boats were hurriedly lowered, manned and darted across the water to take
+charge of the _Yucatan_. Half an hour later one of them returned bearing
+the German commander and his officers. They were conducted to the
+captain's cabin immediately.
+
+Henry Bristow--now Captain Von Blusen--at first did not see the members
+of the Willing party in the cabin, and he faced Captain Ainslee angrily.
+
+"What is the meaning of this outrage?" he demanded.
+
+Captain Ainslee smiled.
+
+"Come, come, captain," he said. "Why this air of wounded dignity? Surely
+you won't attempt to deny that you stole the _Yucatan_?"
+
+"Of course I deny it," was the reply.
+
+"And I suppose you will also deny sending a message to the commandant at
+Colon, threatening to blow up the city?"
+
+"That is absurd," was the reply.
+
+Captain Ainslee motioned to Mabel, and she stepped forward.
+
+"Do you recognize this young lady, captain?" demanded the commander of
+the _Tennessee_.
+
+As the other's eyes rested upon Mabel, he stepped back in surprise and a
+look of genuine alarm passed over his face. Then it grew dark. He was
+very angry.
+
+"So," he exclaimed, "this is the way you show your sympathy for Germany,
+eh?"
+
+"What is Germany to me?" demanded Mabel hotly. "I'm no German."
+
+"But you said--"
+
+"I said that because I was angry at the time. You have made trouble
+enough for us. I'm glad you have been captured."
+
+"Further denial is useless, captain," declared Captain Ainslee. "I don't
+believe you will dispute the young lady's words."
+
+Von Blusen turned away angrily, and his gaze rested on Dick and the
+others for the first time.
+
+"I see you are all here," he said. Then to Dick, "And I have not
+forgotten that I have a debt to settle with you."
+
+He stepped quickly across the cabin and before the others were aware of
+what he intended to do, he struck Dick sharply across the face with the
+back of his hand.
+
+Dick was on his feet in an instant and would have leaped upon his
+assailant had not the others stayed him.
+
+"Captain!" cried the commander of the _Tennessee_, "you forget yourself!
+If that is the way you Germans conduct yourselves no wonder the whole
+world is against you. Another move like that and I'll have you put in
+irons!"
+
+The German captain drew back but said nothing.
+
+"Now," continued Captain Ainslee, "I would like to know the meaning of
+this affair you have been mixed up in. Is Germany seeking war with the
+United States?"
+
+"Why not?" was the reply. "The United States has been against us, why
+shouldn't we be against her?"
+
+"It's your own evil consciences that make you think that," replied
+Captain Ainslee. "The United States has been strictly neutral in this
+war. But an accounting for this will be demanded of the Kaiser."
+
+"And he'll give it," thundered the captain, striking the table with his
+fist. "He'll give it!"
+
+"Maybe he will, but he'll be sorry," declared Shirley, who could keep
+quiet no longer. "Uncle Sam will stand no foolishness from the Kaiser."
+
+Captain Von Blusen smiled at her scornfully.
+
+"We shall come over here some day and take the United States," he said.
+
+"You'll be surprised when you try it," said Shirley angrily.
+
+"Shirley!" exclaimed Mr. Willing. "Keep quiet!"
+
+"I don't care," cried Shirley. "Anybody knows Uncle Sam can whip
+Germany, and all the rest of them, too, for that matter."
+
+Again Mr. Willing would have enjoined the girl to silence, but Captain
+Ainslee stayed him with uplifted hand.
+
+"Let her alone," he chuckled. "That is the spirit I like to see!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.--ABOARD THE YUCATAN.
+
+
+The _Tennessee_ returned immediately to Colon, followed by the
+_Yucatan_, now manned by a crew of American sailors. The run was made
+quickly, and darkness had just descended when the ships came to anchor
+and the Willing party made their way ashore and returned to their hotel.
+
+Captain Von Blusen and the members of his crew were immediately turned
+over to the Canal Zone authorities, pending orders from Washington.
+
+What was the surprise of Shirley and the others, upon reaching the
+hotel, to find there others of the passengers who had been set adrift
+when the _Yucatan_ was captured by the German conspirators. They greeted
+each other warmly.
+
+"We were picked up by a steamer and just reached here this afternoon,"
+one of the women passengers explained to Shirley and Mabel. "We had
+about given you up for lost. The rest of us are all here."
+
+"And so is the _Yucatan_," replied Shirley.
+
+In response to exclamations of astonishment, she related the story of
+the recapture of the vessel.
+
+"Then we shall be allowed to continue our trip, I suppose," remarked one
+of the passengers.
+
+"Unless the government decides to hold on to the steamer," said another.
+
+But the government did not, and the following day the full crew of the
+_Yucatan_ was once more aboard the vessel, and it was announced that she
+would resume her journey the following morning.
+
+The day was spent by most of the passengers viewing the sights of
+interest in the canal zone and in the city of Colon proper.
+
+A few words concerning the Panama Canal will not be amiss here.
+
+The canal was opened to smaller vessels on August 5, 1914, but the
+official opening did not take place until much later, being attended
+with elaborate ceremonies.
+
+The canal is about fifty miles in length from deep water in the
+Caribbean Sea to deep water in the Pacific Ocean. It ranges in width
+from 300 to 1,000 feet with an average bottom width of almost 700 feet.
+The Gatun dam along its crest is 8,000 feet long.
+
+The construction of the canal is considered one of the greatest feats of
+engineering of all time and was accomplished at a tremendous cost. The
+land was secured by treaty from Colombia at great expense and resulted
+in considerable trouble between the United States and the South American
+republic.
+
+It is provided by treaties that the canal shall be open to the vessels
+of all nations, merchantmen, or ships of war, in times of war as well in
+times of peace; but strict rules of neutrality have been provided for
+the passage of war vessels.
+
+All this Mr. Willing explained to the others during the day. With the
+coming of night, the passengers began to go aboard the _Yucatan_ for the
+ship was to sail at an early hour and it was deemed advisable to be
+aboard the night before.
+
+Therefore, when Shirley and Mabel arose and went on deck, the _Yucatan_
+already had started its passage through the canal. The girls stood upon
+the upper deck aft and looked about with interest; but after an hour of
+this they grew tired and went down to breakfast.
+
+The passage of the canal would require about ten hours and Shirley
+remarked to Mabel that she would be glad when they were on the Pacific
+and sailing up the coast.
+
+"And so will I," agreed Mabel. "Of course it is nice to see all these
+things, but they don't interest me a whole lot."
+
+"I feel the same way. To tell the truth I shall be glad to get to San
+Francisco. From what I have heard, the Exposition must be beautiful."
+
+"Indeed it must. By the way, I wonder what will be done with Henry
+Bristow--I mean Captain Von Blusen?"
+
+"I don't know," replied Shirley. "However, I suppose he will be taken to
+Washington."
+
+"He seemed a very nice young man. I wouldn't have thought he was a
+German."
+
+"Well, I suppose there are nice Germans as well as any other kind,"
+replied Shirley with a laugh. "But I wonder why they took such chances?"
+
+"Orders, I reckon. The Germans have shown great daring and bravery in
+this war."
+
+"I should say they have. I wonder if the United States will be drawn
+into the war."
+
+"My goodness gracious! I hope not! Why, Daddy might have to go."
+
+"Oh I guess not," laughed Shirley. "He is too old for that, except as a
+last resort."
+
+"But Dick might have to go."
+
+"That's so; but I don't think there will be any war between the United
+States and Germany. We could whip them easily."
+
+"I suppose the Germans think they could whip us just as well as we
+believe we can whip them."
+
+"But I know we can whip them."
+
+"Well, I'm not so sure. But one thing is certain, we won't have to go to
+war. That's the advantage of being a girl."
+
+"Oh I don't know," said Shirley, "I believe I would like to go."
+
+"Not for me," declared Mabel. "Still, I might be willing to go as a Red
+Cross nurse."
+
+"That's what I meant," replied Shirley.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick now joined them, and they discussed
+recent happenings.
+
+"You don't suppose there is any chance of Von Blusen getting away, sir?"
+asked Dick of Mr. Willing.
+
+Mr. Willing looked at him and smiled.
+
+"Afraid he'll come after you?" he asked.
+
+"No, not exactly sir," replied Dick. "I just wondered, that's all."
+
+"I don't think there is. I'm sure I don't want to be on the same ship
+with him again. He'll make mischief wherever he is."
+
+But Mr. Willing was to be disappointed in this wish, as it turned out
+later.
+
+Noon came and passed and still the big steamship was in the canal; but
+with the coming of the supper hour the Pacific ocean became visible in
+the distance.
+
+It was the first time that Dick, Shirley or Mabel had seen the Pacific,
+and they stared ahead for a long time.
+
+"I don't see as it looks any different from the Atlantic," declared
+Shirley.
+
+"What did you expect?" asked Mabel. "Think you were going to see the
+name on it?"
+
+"Not exactly. I don't know just what I expected, but I thought it would
+look different."
+
+The others laughed.
+
+"It might feel a little different in case a big storm came up," said
+Dick.
+
+"I don't want to be in a storm on any water," declared Shirley with
+decision.
+
+"I should say not," Mabel agreed. "A storm is bad enough with lots of
+dry land under your feet."
+
+The sun was just disappearing below the horizon when the _Yucatan_ at
+last stuck her nose into the waters of the Pacific ocean.
+
+"Well, here we are in the Pacific at last," said Colonel Ashton. "Do you
+feel any difference, Shirley?"
+
+"Not a bit," replied the girl with a smile.
+
+Mr. Willing looked at the sky.
+
+"I guess there will be no storm on this trip," he said.
+
+Half an hour later all went below to supper.
+
+They had almost finished a delightful meal when their attention was
+attracted by the sound of a scuffle on deck. All rushed hastily up.
+
+There, struggling with a knot of sailors, was a single man. His back was
+turned to the girls as they made their way on deck, and at first they
+did not recognize him.
+
+He was giving a good account of himself, striking out with such force
+and skill as gave evidence of much training in the use of his fists; but
+the sailors were too many for him, and he was at last overpowered and
+thrown to the deck.
+
+Rude hands jerked him to his feet and it was then that Shirley and Mabel
+obtained their first look at his face.
+
+Shirley started back with a cry of utter amazement. Then a name leaped
+to her lips, and was repeated by all the passengers within sight.
+
+"Captain Von Blusen!"
+
+"How in the world did he get here?" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"I can't imagine," declared Mabel, staring with open mouth.
+
+Captain Anderson of the _Yucatan_ now hastened down from the bridge and
+confronted the prisoner.
+
+"What are you doing on my ship and how did you get here?" he demanded
+angrily.
+
+Captain Von Blusen smiled at him.
+
+"I just escaped, that's all," he replied. "You treated me so well before
+that I thought I would take passage with you. Besides it was the least
+likely place I would be looked for."
+
+"But how did you escape?" demanded the captain.
+
+"That would be telling," was the reply, and the young man smiled
+tantalizingly. "However, it will do no harm to say that I have good
+friends in Colon."
+
+"Well, I'll guarantee you won't do any more harm aboard my ship,"
+declared the captain angrily.
+
+He turned to his first officer. "Have him put in irons!"
+
+"Very good, sir," replied the first officer, and advanced toward the
+prisoner.
+
+"One moment," said the latter drawing himself up. "I did not come here
+with any ill motive," still addressing the captain, "and I desire to
+give my parole."
+
+"And what good is your parole?" demanded Captain Anderson.
+
+"One gentleman is always ready to accept the word of another gentleman,"
+said Von Blusen slowly. "I give my word to make no attempt to escape."
+
+The captain hesitated, then waved an arm expressively.
+
+"Very well," he said. "Your parole is accepted."
+
+He returned to the bridge, and the sailors released Von Blusen. The
+latter walked over to where the Willing party were gathered.
+
+"Well, here I am again," he said with a smile.
+
+"I see you are," replied Mabel, and deliberately turned her back on him.
+
+The young man's face became red. He turned on his heel and walked off
+without another word.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.--ASHORE IN COSTA RICA.
+
+
+The steamship _Yucatan_ was swinging slowly into a little harbor. Land,
+visible for the first time since leaving the Panama Canal, was now close
+at hand.
+
+"What place is this?" asked Shirley of Dick, who stood forward gazing
+over the rail by her side.
+
+Dick consulted his guide book, remarking: "I can't remember the name of
+these outlandish places."
+
+"It's Punta Arenas," he said at last, looking up. "Costa Rica, you
+know," he added in explanation.
+
+"And what are we putting in here for?"
+
+"You'll have to ask the captain about that," replied Dick. "It's too
+deep for me."
+
+The vessel came to anchor some distance from shore. It was announced
+that the ship would lay there for several hours, and the captain gave
+notice that those desiring to land would be taken off in the small
+boats.
+
+Shirley immediately announced her intention of being one of the landing
+party, and loath to let the girl go alone, Mr. Willing and the others
+also determined to go ashore.
+
+Half an hour later found them strolling about the dirty looking narrow
+streets of the little town.
+
+Poorly-dressed natives, men, women and children, eyed them queerly as
+they walked along, the latter following them for blocks begging for
+money. Shirley would have given one of the children a piece of silver
+but for the first officer of the ship, who stayed her.
+
+"Give money to one of them and the rest will follow you forever," he
+explained.
+
+"But they look so dirty and hungry," protested Shirley.
+
+"Perhaps they are," was the officer's reply, "but take no chances with
+them."
+
+Shirley followed his advice, as did the others of the party, and the
+dirty native children soon let them alone. When the party started back,
+however, the children trailed them once more, begging piteously for
+money.
+
+At the wharf Shirley, unheeding the advice of the officer, turned and
+tossed a silver quarter toward them.
+
+Instantly the place became a scene of wild confusion. There was a
+scramble as boys and girls dived headlong for the piece of silver. Loud
+cries filled the air.
+
+A little girl raised up with the piece of money clutched tightly in her
+hand and started to run. But the others were upon her in an instant, and
+threw her to the ground, striking and clawing as they tried to take the
+quarter away from her.
+
+Shirley looked at the disorder she had caused in amazement.
+
+"My goodness!" she exclaimed. "I had no idea they were so savage."
+
+She watched the struggle.
+
+Now a boy had secured the quarter and tried to escape with it. But he
+fared no better than had the girl, and soon was beneath the pile of
+struggling bodies. The children fought savagely, biting, screaming,
+kicking and scratching.
+
+The party from the steamship watched with interest.
+
+"See what you did, Shirley," cried Mabel. "Just watch them fight."
+
+"I won't do it again," declared Shirley. "Some of them will be badly
+hurt."
+
+At this moment a newcomer appeared upon the scene. He walked slowly, and
+plainly was in no particular hurry. Shirley glanced at him curiously.
+
+He was attired in a dark blue uniform. A revolver and sword hung at his
+side. He was short but stout, and a black mustache curled fiercely
+upward.
+
+He was just what Shirley took him to be, an officer of the Costa Rican
+army.
+
+He advanced into the mass of struggling children and pushed the
+combatants aside without ceremony. As they looked up and perceived him,
+the fighters turned and fled.
+
+The sight was indeed comical and Shirley and all the others laughed long
+and loud.
+
+One little boy, before taking to his heels, stooped quickly and picked
+up the quarter, which had rolled a short distance away. But even as he
+started to run, the native officer reached out a hand and caught him by
+the shoulder.
+
+In vain did the boy struggle to free himself, biting and kicking. He was
+no match for the man, and at last he dropped the piece of silver. The
+officer then released him and looked around.
+
+While the Americans still watched him he stooped, picked up the quarter,
+turned it over in his hand once or twice, spun it in the air, caught it
+as it came down and thrust it in his pocket. Then, without a glance to
+right or left, he turned and stalked away.
+
+"There!" exclaimed the ship's officer, "you can see what has happened to
+your quarter. It's what happens to most of those thrown to the children
+by tourists."
+
+"It's an outrage!" declared Shirley. "I wouldn't have given him
+anything. Isn't there something we can do about it?"
+
+"Not a thing," was the reply. "It is legitimate graft. But watch, now,
+you'll see what the little folks do."
+
+As the native officer continued to swagger along, from behind houses and
+from down streets a hail of rocks and stones dropped upon him. The
+children, divided in the fight for the quarter, had joined forces
+against this common enemy and were pelting him vigorously.
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Mabel. "I am glad of it. I hope they hurt him, the big
+coward."
+
+The native officer stopped and glared around angrily at his small
+assailants for a moment, while the rocks and stones fell on him faster
+than before. One struck him in the face. This was too much for his
+courage. He took to his heels, and with the mob of children in close
+pursuit, was soon lost to sight.
+
+"I hope they get him," declared Shirley vehemently.
+
+"They won't, though," replied the officer of the _Yucatan_. "If he were
+to turn on them they'd stop and, from a safe place, continue their
+bombardment. He'll find shelter some place."
+
+Before they could return to the launch which would take them back to the
+ship, the swarm of children again came into view, rushing for them.
+
+"Quick!" cried the officer, "into the boat. They'll run right over us.
+They've caught a sight of silver and they won't let us alone until we
+give them some, or until we are out of reach."
+
+He hustled the others toward the small boat at a run, and succeeded in
+getting them in before the native children reached the water's edge.
+Then the boat put off for the ship.
+
+A cry of anger went up from the shore.
+
+"Duck!" cried the officer, himself taking his place in the stern and
+grasping the rudder.
+
+His warning came not a moment too soon.
+
+A shower of missiles, hurled with unerring aim, fell upon the little
+craft. Disappointed in their quest, the native children were now bent on
+revenge.
+
+As fast as they could pick them up and throw, rocks went skimming across
+the water, falling on both sides, and in front and behind the boat.
+Several dropped aboard.
+
+One, in falling, just skimmed the back of Shirley's head as she stooped
+over in the boat. Dick immediately squeezed in behind her, and another,
+thrown with unerring aim, carried away his hat. Fortunately however,
+this broke the force of the stone, and it fell to the bottom of the boat
+without doing any further damage.
+
+The boat was drawing out of danger now, and the occupants sat up again
+and drew breaths of relief. Only the stronger of the tots could now
+reach them with their missiles, and the distance was too great for
+accurate throwing, so those in the boats felt perfectly safe.
+
+Upon the shore the crowd of native boys and girls gave vent to cries of
+rage at thus being deprived of their revenge. They danced about
+excitedly and waved their hands in angry gestures.
+
+At this juncture another native officer hove in sight, and the crowd
+turned on him. Again rocks, stones and other weapons came into play as
+the children turned upon him to vent their wrath. For a moment the
+officer seemed on the point of charging into the crowd, then changed his
+mind, wheeled on his heel and took to flight. The young ones gave chase,
+their shouts and cries carrying across the water to the occupants of the
+boat.
+
+"Well!" exclaimed Shirley, now that they were out of harm's way at last,
+"they are vicious little things, aren't they?"
+
+"Rather," replied the officer dryly. "If a person fell into their hands
+it would go hard with him."
+
+"But what makes them so fierce?" asked Mabel, greatly interested.
+
+"That's hard to say. However, it probably is because they are half
+starved and look upon the whole world as a common foe. More than one
+tourist has received rough treatment at their hands."
+
+"And will they attack any one like that?" asked Dick.
+
+"Not unless he shows money," was the reply. "That is the remarkable part
+about it. No matter how much a man may have in his pocket they will not
+attack him unless they catch sight of silver or gold. One glimpse of it,
+however, seems to drive them wild."
+
+The officer gave his attention to the boat for a moment, and then
+continued:
+
+"Another thing, as you have just observed. They will fight each other,
+but let a third party interfere and they will all jump on him."
+
+"Just like a quarrel between a man and his wife, eh?" asked Mr. Willing
+with a smile.
+
+"Exactly. They're a queer lot, and you will find them about the same in
+all Central and South American countries."
+
+The small boat now rubbed gently against the side of the _Yucatan_ and
+the passengers scrambled up the ladder to the deck.
+
+"We were lucky to get out of that with whole skins," declared Shirley,
+when all once more stood on deck.
+
+"I should say we were," agreed Mabel.
+
+"Perhaps this experience will teach you to heed the advice of others,
+daughter," said Mr. Willing dryly.
+
+"I won't try and play the good Samaritan to native children any more,
+Dad," said Shirley smiling.
+
+A long blast from the ship's whistle, followed by the clanking of chains
+as the anchor was drawn in, the vibrations of the engines became
+noticeable, and, with her nose pointed to the open sea, the steamship
+_Yucatan_ resumed her journey.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.--U. S. S. PRAIRIE.
+
+
+"Steamship off the port bow, sir!"
+
+It was the cry of the lookout.
+
+All eyes were turned in the direction indicated. There, showing dimly
+through the gathering darkness, steamed a dark gray shape. Another
+glance from the lookout was enough to convince him of the vessel's
+identity.
+
+"United States cruiser, sir!" came his call.
+
+"Can you make her out?" asked the captain's voice from the bridge.
+
+The lookout was silent for several minutes, and then called back:
+
+"Cruiser _Prairie_, sir."
+
+There was a muttered ejaculation from the captain. Shirley, standing
+near, caught the words:
+
+"Wonder what she's doing in these waters? She was in Bluefields the last
+I heard of her. Must be trouble of some kind or she wouldn't be here."
+
+The two ships exchanged messages, the nature of which were unknown to
+the passengers, however. Both continued on their course.
+
+Morning showed to the passengers the cruiser proceeding ahead of them.
+All day the two ships retained their relative positions and when night
+came on they were unchanged.
+
+When Shirley awoke the following morning the _Yucatan_ was stationary.
+Shirley and Mabel dressed quickly and went on deck. There they found
+that they were in a little harbor. Shirley asked a question of one of
+the other passengers.
+
+"Where are we?"
+
+"Port of Corinto, Nicaragua," was the reply.
+
+At this moment a small boat was just about to be lowered. Shirley and
+Mabel rushed up to the first officer, who was in command of it.
+
+"Can we go with you?" she asked.
+
+The officer hesitated, then: "I see no reason why you cannot," with a
+smile. "Jump in."
+
+The girls obeyed and a few moments later were being rowed toward the
+not-far-distant shore. There the boat drew up at the wharf, and,
+signalling to the girls to accompany him if they so desired, the officer
+leaped lightly ashore and lent them a helping hand. The sailors were
+ordered to await his return.
+
+"Where are you going?" asked Shirley.
+
+"American consulate," was the reply. "There has been some trouble here,
+and Captain Anderson has sent me to find out what it's all about."
+
+At the consulate Shirley and Mabel remained outside, while the first
+officer was closeted with the consul.
+
+"We might as well walk around a bit," Shirley decided. "There is no
+telling how long he may remain there."
+
+Mabel was nothing loath, and they made their way to the street. Here
+they walked along slowly, looking curiously at the native Nicaraguans
+and the queer buildings, all of old Spanish architecture and design.
+
+"None of this for me," was Shirley's decision half an hour later.
+
+"Nor me," agreed Mabel. "I want to live in civilization."
+
+Unconsciously the girls had wandered further from the consulate than
+they realized, and as they were on the point of turning back Mabel
+caught sight of a familiar figure.
+
+"Captain Von Blusen!" she exclaimed, catching Shirley by the arm.
+
+Shirley caught her breath and gazed in the direction Mabel pointed.
+
+It was true. There, slinking along furtively, was the gallant captain
+and he was walking along at a rapid rate.
+
+"Wonder where he is going and why he's in such a hurry?" asked Mabel.
+
+"I don't know," returned Shirley, "but I'll warrant he is up to no
+good."
+
+"But he has given his parole to make no attempt to escape."
+
+"I don't imagine he'll set much store by that if he sees a good
+opportunity to get away."
+
+Shirley would have continued her way back, but Mabel said:
+
+"Wait a moment, Shirley. Perhaps, by following him a bit, we may learn
+something useful. What do you say?"
+
+For a moment Shirley hesitated, but for a moment only.
+
+"Perhaps we can," she said then. "There can be no danger if we keep out
+of sight. Come on."
+
+The German was now some distance ahead of them, and taking care to avoid
+being seen should he turn suddenly, the girls followed him.
+
+But apparently Captain Von Blusen had no idea that he would be followed.
+He strode rapidly along and not once did he turn his head.
+
+"He must have been here before," Shirley decided. "He seems to know
+where he is going."
+
+For another ten minutes they followed him, and then Shirley halted.
+
+"I am afraid we had better go back," she said. "We may get lost."
+
+"Oh I guess not," declared Mabel. "And besides we have plenty of time.
+The ship will probably stay here most of the day. Come on, Shirley."
+
+Shirley allowed herself to be led along.
+
+They had now approached the outskirts of the little town, and the young
+German struck off through a clump of trees. At the edge of these Shirley
+stopped abruptly.
+
+"We won't follow him any further," she said decisively. "It might be
+dangerous."
+
+"I guess you are right," agreed Mabel. "I wish he had stayed where we
+could keep track of him."
+
+"So do I. But he didn't. We had better be getting back."
+
+They turned and started to retrace their footsteps, but even as they did
+so the footsteps of a large body of men came toward them. They were not
+yet in sight, but the men were coming right down the street through
+which the girls must go on their way back.
+
+Mabel looked at Shirley in alarm.
+
+"What shall we do?" she exclaimed.
+
+"We'll just have to put on a bold face and walk right along," declared
+Shirley. "Come."
+
+She started out slowly, Mabel walking by her side.
+
+A moment later there appeared ahead of them, advancing at a rapid march,
+a body of armed men. Shirley and Mabel shrank close to the side of the
+street to give the marchers as much room as possible.
+
+At first it seemed the girls would get by without trouble, for the first
+troop had passed them, paying no attention to their presence.
+
+But as the officer in command of the troop came abreast of them, a
+command suddenly rang out:
+
+"Halt!"
+
+The troop stopped abruptly, and grounded their arms. Shirley and Mabel
+also paused, as they believed the words were meant for them. Then,
+seeing the soldiers pause, they moved on again. But again came the cry
+of "Halt."
+
+The girls halted in their tracks.
+
+The commander, whom they perceived was a man well along toward seventy,
+but who nevertheless walked perfectly erect and who looked very imposing
+in his bright military uniform, advanced toward them.
+
+"What are you young ladies doing here?" he asked courteously, in
+English.
+
+"We were just walking about the city, sir," replied Shirley, her voice
+trembling somewhat in spite of the efforts she made to keep it steady.
+
+"Where do you come from?"
+
+"Steamship in the harbor, sir."
+
+"You mean the cruiser?"
+
+"No, sir," replied Mabel. "The passenger steamer, sir."
+
+"H-m-mm-m," muttered the officer.
+
+Before he could speak further there came, from the town, the sound of
+more rapidly approaching footsteps.
+
+"Come with me," cried the Nicaraguan officer quickly, "if you go on you
+will be hurt. Come quickly."
+
+He urged his men on with a sharp command.
+
+Shirley and Mabel hung back.
+
+"Quick!" cried the general again. "There will be fighting here in a few
+minutes, and if you are in the way you are likely to be hurt."
+
+A squad of men, at his command, surrounded the two girls, and they were
+forced to go along whether or no.
+
+The troop dashed quickly for the shelter of the woods in which the girls
+had seen Captain Von Blusen disappear a few moments before.
+
+Once in the shelter of the trees, the officer in command gave several
+sharp orders, and the troop divided into three parts. Then they flitted
+rapidly further in among the trees.
+
+Shirley and Mabel, now badly frightened, found themselves with the
+commanding officer's section. They could see that they were bearing off
+to the right and several times would have spoken, but the officer
+silenced them with a gesture.
+
+"I shall answer your questions later," he said once.
+
+Although the girls did not know just what was the matter, they realized
+that the Nicaraguans were fleeing from another, and, supposedly, a
+larger body of men.
+
+"I hope they overtake us. I want to get back to Dad," cried Mabel.
+
+"And I hope they don't," exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"Why, Shirley!"
+
+"I mean it. If they do overtake us it may mean a battle, and then we
+would be in danger. As long as we keep away from them we are safe.
+Besides, Dad will find us some way. Our fathers and Dick won't permit us
+to be carried off."
+
+"I reckon you are right, Shirley," Mabel agreed finally. "Besides, there
+is an American cruiser near. They'll have the bluejackets out searching
+for us."
+
+"And they will find us, too," declared Mabel.
+
+"I hope they hurry up and come," exclaimed Shirley. "I'm badly
+frightened, but I don't want to show it. The thing to do is to make the
+officer think we are not a bit scared."
+
+"We'll try," said Mabel calmly.
+
+For an hour they continued on their way, and then suddenly the force
+began to increase as men appeared from other directions and joined the
+main body.
+
+Although the girls did not know it, these were the same men who had
+scattered at the first sign of pursuit. They had made a detour to throw
+the pursuers off the track.
+
+At last the commander called a halt. Then he approached the two girls.
+
+"I guess I had better explain why I insisted on your coming with us," he
+said with a pleasant smile.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.--AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE.
+
+
+"If you please," said Shirley.
+
+The officer gazed at both girls admiringly.
+
+"You take it coolly enough," he declared. "Many in your places would be
+badly frightened."
+
+"Surely there is nothing to be afraid of," said Mabel, determined to
+show as bold a front as possible.
+
+"No," said the officer, "there isn't." He looked at them closely. "I
+wonder if either of you happen to know who I am?" he asked.
+
+Shirley shook her head negatively.
+
+"I'm sure I don't," said Mabel.
+
+"Then I must introduce myself," was the reply. "I am General Pedro
+Garcia, President of the republic of Nicaragua."
+
+Both girls looked at him in the utmost surprise.
+
+"You may well be surprised," said the general, a touch of bitterness in
+his tone, it seemed to Shirley, "and no doubt you are to see the
+President of the country in such a predicament?"
+
+Shirley didn't know much about Nicaragua, but she decided she might as
+well agree with him, as he seemed to expect it.
+
+"Yes, sir," she said.
+
+"And I am surprised to find myself in such a position," said the
+President. "I shall explain. With my men I am fleeing from the
+revolutionists."
+
+"Revolutionists?" echoed Shirley.
+
+"Exactly. I was in Corinto with some of my army for diplomatic purposes.
+While absent from Managua there was an uprising. It seems to have been
+well planned, for it broke out in all parts of the republic at once,
+even here in Corinto."
+
+"I was surprised with my men this morning and was forced to flee. That's
+about all there is to it."
+
+"But why did you bring us with you?" demanded Shirley. "Why didn't you
+allow us to return to our ship."
+
+"Because you might never have reached there," replied the President
+quietly. "You would probably have fallen into the hands of the
+revolutionists. While you are with me you are safe."
+
+There was no doubting the sincerity in the President's voice, and both
+girls unconsciously breathed easier.
+
+"Besides," continued the general, "your presence may help me a bit."
+
+"In what way sir?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Well, there is a United States cruiser in Corinto harbor. When you are
+missed the natural supposition will be that you have fallen into the
+hands of the revolutionists. The U. S. sailors will be sent after you,
+and will be likely to attack my foes."
+
+"I see," said Shirley with a slight smile. "Then you did not save us
+from an altogether unselfish motive."
+
+"My dear young ladies, consider," said the President, "it is better for
+both of us."
+
+"I don't doubt you, sir," replied Shirley; "but just the same I would
+rather be safe aboard our ship."
+
+"And so you shall be, if it is within my power to put you there,"
+declared the President of Nicaragua warmly.
+
+At this moment two of the general's troopers approached, dragging a
+third man between them. Shirley and Mabel fell back a few feet.
+
+"Hello! Who have we here?" demanded President Garcia.
+
+"Prisoner, sir," replied one of the men.
+
+"Release him," said the President. "I shall talk to him myself. Who are
+you, and what are you doing here?" he demanded sharply.
+
+Shirley and Mabel both started at the sound of the prisoner's voice. He
+was none other than Captain von Blusen.
+
+"I'm Captain von Blusen, of the German navy," was the reply. "I have
+been held prisoner aboard an American ship, and have but recently
+escaped. I am seeking Colonel Hernandez."
+
+"Hernandez!" exclaimed President Garcia, stepping back in surprise. "The
+leader of the revolutionists!"
+
+"And may I ask your name, sir?" said Captain von Blusen.
+
+"I," said the general, "am the President of Nicaragua."
+
+The prisoner gave vent to a long whistle and a look of dismay passed
+over his face. It was gone in a moment, however, and he turned to the
+President with a smile.
+
+"I am fortunate in finding you, sir," he said. "I am authorized by my
+government to make you a proposition."
+
+"Well, I shall hear it," said the President.
+
+"I am authorized to offer you a large sum of money for the privilege of
+establishing a German naval base on the Pacific coast of Nicaragua."
+
+"Enough!" cried the general with a wave of his hand. "It shall not be
+done if I can prevent it. Germany indeed. Were I able, I myself should
+draw a sword against her. You will find no German sympathy in these
+parts."
+
+Captain von Blusen bowed his head. He said nothing further on the
+subject.
+
+"What will you do with me?" he asked.
+
+"I shall hold you until the rebels have been put down," was the reply.
+"Then you shall be released. I wouldn't trust you now."
+
+He signalled two of his men and the young German officer was led away
+between them.
+
+At this moment another officer rushed up to the general.
+
+"Our presence has been discovered, sir," he gasped. "The enemy is
+approaching."
+
+Shirley and Mabel now perceived that the President of the Republic of
+Nicaragua, in spite of his advanced years, was a man of action.
+
+He turned rapidly from one to another of his officers, and these dashed
+quickly away. A moment later the few troops began to move, and the girls
+realized that President Garcia had taken some steps to offset the
+advance of the revolutionists.
+
+They found themselves going along with the troops.
+
+"My goodness! I wish we were back on the ship," exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"You don't wish it any more than I do," declared Mabel. "I am more
+frightened than you are. Suppose there should be a battle. What would
+happen to us?"
+
+Shirley shrugged her shoulders.
+
+"You know as much about it as I do," she made answer.
+
+Mabel looked at her in amazement.
+
+"Why, Shirley Willing!" she exclaimed. "Aren't you afraid? I am scared
+half to death."
+
+"I am just as badly frightened as you are," declared Shirley. "I may not
+look it, but I am."
+
+"I don't believe you are frightened at all," said Mabel.
+
+In spite of the seriousness of the situation and her declaration that
+she was badly frightened, Shirley was forced to smile at her friend's
+words.
+
+"Well, perhaps I'm not so awfully scared," she confessed. "I'm anxious
+to see what is going to happen."
+
+"I know what is going to happen," was the reply. "We are going to get
+hurt!"
+
+Mabel broke down and began to cry.
+
+Shirley took her chum gently in her arms, and stroked her hair.
+
+"There, there!" she said. "Stop crying. No one is going to hurt us. You
+are just overwrought, that's all."
+
+"I just know we are going to be shot--and--and killed," sobbed Mabel.
+
+"Nonsense," said Shirley sharply. "Look up now and stop that crying. We
+are perfectly safe. Stop crying."
+
+Mabel looked up suddenly at the sharpness in her chum's tone, but her
+tears soon were dried away. Shirley, in speaking as she had, had done
+the best thing possible. She had realized that it was time for sharp
+words and not for sympathy.
+
+After a march of perhaps a half hour, President Garcia called another
+halt, and then summoned his officers into consultation.
+
+The two girls stood close, but they could not make out what was being
+said. At length the general dismissed his officers with a gesture, and
+as they scattered to their respective posts, the general approached the
+two girls.
+
+"We are going to make a sharp turn to the south here," he said quietly,
+"and then we shall move back and engage the enemy. That will put you
+safely behind us. Now, if I were you, I would bear off slightly to the
+right, and then go straight ahead. In that way you will be out of
+danger. If the firing comes closer to you, make another wide detour,
+turn about and try to make your way back to the ship. But I would not do
+that until after the battle ceases."
+
+"Thank you, sir," said Shirley. "We shall do as you suggest. We thank
+you for your thoughtfulness in keeping us from falling into the hands of
+the revolutionists. May you come through the battle unharmed, and may
+you be successful."
+
+She extended her hand, and the President bent over it gravely.
+
+"I thank you for your good wishes," he said quietly.
+
+Mabel also now advanced and extended her hand, and the President bent
+over it.
+
+"Good luck to you, Mr. President," said Mabel.
+
+"I thank you, too, young lady," said the President simply. "Now heed my
+injunction and betake yourselves to a place of safety. We shall advance
+at once."
+
+Once more he bowed low to them, swung sharply about on his heel and was
+gone. With hoarse commands from the officers, the troops faced to the
+left and marched off.
+
+"I guess we had better be moving, Shirley," said Mabel.
+
+Instead of turning to the right, they went straight back.
+
+"It should be safer here," said Mabel as they hurried along. "The
+revolutionists are liable to advance on the right as well as on the
+left!"
+
+"I wish we could get some place where we could see," declared Shirley.
+
+Mabel stooped in her tracks and gazed at her friend in the utmost
+astonishment.
+
+"Shirley!" she exclaimed. "Surely you don't mean that?"
+
+"Of course I mean it. If we could only find some place where it is
+safe."
+
+Unconsciously the girls had borne off to the left, and now suddenly they
+came upon a clearing in the midst of the woods. And as they glanced
+back, they saw the Nicaraguan government troops advancing across it.
+
+But even as they looked the troops came to a halt, and most of them fell
+to their knees. Shirley looked around quickly. Directly behind her was a
+large tree.
+
+"If we haven't forgotten our tomboy days we'll climb up there and watch
+the battle," she declared.
+
+She led the way, and in spite of her misgivings, Mabel followed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.--THE GIRLS SEE A BATTLE.
+
+
+As Shirley and Mabel, from their shelter among the branches, peered
+across the plain, they saw puffs of smoke issue from the now kneeling
+body of men. Sharp reports came to their ears. The only man still
+standing erect, as they could see plainly, was President Garcia, who,
+with upraised sword, was directing the movement of his men.
+
+A man dropped his rifle and fell to the ground, and Mabel shrieked.
+
+"My goodness!" she exclaimed a moment later. "This is terrible,
+Shirley!"
+
+Shirley's lips were compressed, and for a moment she turned her eyes
+away.
+
+The firing became louder now, and for the first time the girls noticed
+that President Garcia and his men were retreating toward them.
+
+"We had better get down out of here!" exclaimed Mabel. "We may be
+struck."
+
+Shirley agreed, and they were about to descend, when, from behind them,
+came rapid footsteps, indicating the approach of a considerable number
+of men. Shirley and Mabel became silent.
+
+A moment later a score of dark-visaged Nicaraguans, with rifles ready
+for instant use, appeared and took up their position at the edge of the
+little woods, several of them falling flat under the very tree in which
+the two girls were perched.
+
+Mabel uttered an exclamation as the first volley was fired by these
+newcomers. In spite of the fact that she was prepared for it, the sharp
+reports of the weapons had wrung a cry of surprise from her. Shirley,
+more calm, uttered no sound.
+
+The girls could now see that the men beneath them were a part of
+President Garcia's force, for they were shooting over the heads of their
+companions, apparently in an effort to cover the retreat of the main
+body.
+
+The latter now retreated more rapidly and at length joined forces with
+the men beneath the trees. Shirley and Mabel could hear their
+conversation plainly, but as it was carried on in Spanish, they could
+not make out the trend of it.
+
+For perhaps fifteen minutes President Garcia's men held their position,
+firing at the enemy from the shelter of the trees.
+
+The plight of the two girls was much more serious than either realized,
+for a chance bullet was likely to hit one of them at any moment. And yet
+they felt safer in the tree than they would have felt among the soldiers
+on the ground.
+
+So far the enemy had contented themselves with lying flat on the ground
+some distance away and firing at the trees, but now, as Shirley
+perceived by peering across the plain, they were preparing for a charge.
+
+A moment later there was a wild yell, and they came forward on the run.
+They spread out as they came on, and here and there a man fell over,
+struck down by a rifle bullet.
+
+In spite of their great danger both girls became lost in wonder at the
+sight, and stared ahead with straining eyes. Shirley was brought to
+herself by the sound of something buzzing past her head. She knew in a
+moment what is was.
+
+"Mabel!" she cried. "Climb as high as you can or we shall be shot!"
+
+She scrambled higher up among the branches, and Mabel followed suit.
+
+Here no bullets flew past them, and looking down they saw that President
+Garcia was ordering his men to retreat.
+
+The government troops disappeared further back in the woods, and now the
+danger came from their bullets rather than from those of the enemy. The
+girls were in a ticklish situation and they were fully alive to their
+peril.
+
+The enemy pushed further into the woods, pursuing the government troops.
+The bullets flew less thick, the sound of firing became fainter and
+fainter, and then died away in the distance.
+
+Shirley roused herself from the trance in which she seemed to have
+fallen.
+
+"Come, Mabel," she said. "Let's get down and get back to the ship before
+some of them come back."
+
+Mabel was nothing loath, and quickly the girls slid to the ground and
+advanced to the edge of the clearing. Here they stopped for a moment,
+looking about them.
+
+Several figures were sprawled about on the ground. The girls shuddered.
+
+"It is terrible," said Shirley.
+
+"Don't look at them," urged Mabel. "Let's run."
+
+But as they were about to take to their heels, they were startled by the
+sound of a voice directly behind them.
+
+"Ha!" it said.
+
+The girls wheeled in their tracks to confront a man with rifle levelled
+directly at them. A cry of fear was rung from Mabel's lips, but Shirley
+said nothing.
+
+The man advanced and the girls shrank back. A torrent of words poured
+from the man's lips, but it was absolutely unintelligible to either of
+the girls.
+
+Shirley made a gesture, indicating that they did not understand, and the
+man said:
+
+"Americanos?"
+
+"Yes," replied Shirley. "Do you speak English?"
+
+"Si!" replied the man, "a leetle!"
+
+"We want to go away," said Shirley eagerly. "We belong on the ship in
+the harbor."
+
+"No! Stay here. General Orizaba will return soon," said the man in
+broken English.
+
+Shirley started to protest, but the man made a threatening gesture with
+his rifle.
+
+The two girls looked at each other in dismay.
+
+"Out of the frying pan into the fire, Mabel," declared Shirley. "I guess
+we shall have to stay."
+
+There was apparently no help for it. They sat down upon the grass to
+await the arrival of General Orizaba, who, they rightly guessed, was the
+commander of the revolutionary forces.
+
+Their captor stood vigilant guard. Apparently he was determined to allow
+them no chance to escape. He sat some distance away, with his rifle
+across his knees. The two girls settled themselves with their backs to a
+large tree, and made themselves as comfortable as they could under the
+circumstances.
+
+There was a snapping of a twig behind them, and Shirley glanced about
+uneasily.
+
+"S-s-h-h," came a low voice. "Keep still and show no surprise."
+
+Both girls recognized the voice in an instant.
+
+They maintained their composure well, and spoke only to each other.
+
+"It's Dick!" whispered Shirley.
+
+"I know it," replied Mabel.
+
+"Then we are safe."
+
+The girls' guard now put an end to their conversation. Rising he
+approached them and commanded:
+
+"Silence!"
+
+He did not hear soft footsteps passing beyond him, nor did he turn in
+time to see a figure leap from behind a tree and spring at him. The
+first he realized of his danger was when a pair of strong arms went
+round him, and he was hurled violently to the ground, his rifle flying
+from his hands.
+
+"Get the rifle, Shirley!" called Dick, as he and his opponent struggled
+for mastery.
+
+Shirley leaped forward, stopped, and when she arose she held the rifle.
+
+For a moment she considered the advisability of advancing and lending
+Dick a hand, then concluded that he was more than a match for the
+Nicaraguan. Besides, the figures were locked in such close embrace that
+she couldn't have aided Dick if she would.
+
+Now Dick succeeded in shaking off the grip of his opponent, and sprang
+to his feet. The Nicaraguan did likewise, and sprang back.
+
+As Dick leaped forward again, the man's hand went to his holster, and a
+revolver flashed in his hand.
+
+But before he could bring the weapon to bear, Shirley stepped quickly
+forward, levelled her rifle at him, and in a clear sharp voice, cried:
+
+"Halt!"
+
+The man wheeled quickly and as he did so, Dick sprang upon him from
+behind. A quick blow sent the revolver hurling several feet away, and
+then Dick stepped back to give free play to his boxing skill.
+
+The Nicaraguan rushed at him, but Dick stepped lightly aside, and as the
+man went by, carried on by the impetus of his rush, Dick struck out
+straight and true from the shoulder.
+
+The Nicaraguan crumpled up in a heap on the ground.
+
+Shirley and Mabel ran quickly to Dick's side.
+
+"Are you hurt, Dick?" asked Shirley anxiously.
+
+"No!" was the smiling rejoinder, "but I would have been if you had not
+been prompt with that rifle. That's all that saved me."
+
+"How did you find us?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Followed you. We became alarmed at your absence and I said I thought I
+could find you. I imagined you had gone for a stroll, and when I saw
+this bunch of pirates going through the town I guessed that you would
+fall into their hands. I came along after them and just as I was about
+to go on I saw you climbing down from the tree."
+
+"Well, you didn't arrive a minute too soon," declared Shirley. "We were
+badly frightened, weren't we Mabel?"
+
+"I know I was," was her chum's reply. She turned to Dick. "But how----"
+
+"I'll explain later," interrupted Dick. "The thing to do now is to get
+away from here before they return. Come on."
+
+The girls started on ahead of him, and Dick turned for a glance over his
+shoulder.
+
+Then he uttered an exclamation of alarm, and shouted:
+
+"Run!"
+
+For in that quick glance over his shoulder he had perceived the return
+of the revolutionists.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.--MABEL BRINGS THE BLUEJACKETS.
+
+
+Shirley and Mabel needed no further urging, and took to their heels.
+Dick followed close behind.
+
+In the one brief glance in which he had perceived the return of the
+soldiers, Dick had been unable to determine whether their presence had
+been discovered, but he believed it wise to take a chance. Hence his
+command to run.
+
+The three sped lightly over the ground and had gone some distance when
+they heard a shout from behind, followed by the sharp reports of several
+rifles.
+
+Dick stopped suddenly and called to the girls to halt. They obeyed
+instantly.
+
+"There is no use being shot," said Dick quietly, "and although they are
+poor shots they would be sure to hit one of us sooner or later."
+
+"Then what shall we do?" cried Mabel.
+
+"There is only one thing to do," was the reply. "Surrender."
+
+"Dick is right," agreed Shirley. "It is foolish to attempt to escape."
+
+In the meantime the band of revolutionists had been coming toward them,
+and at length surrounded the three figures. A man, who appeared to be
+the leader, though he wore no uniform nor mark of distinction, advanced
+and addressed Dick.
+
+"Who are you and what are you doing here?" he demanded in English.
+
+Dick explained, and the man heard him through quietly.
+
+"And who was it hurt Pedro back there?" and the leader waved toward the
+spot where Dick had struggled with the Nicaraguan.
+
+"I did," he replied quietly, and explained the cause of the fight.
+
+"Well, you will have to stand trial for attacking one of my men," said
+the leader. "I am General Orizaba."
+
+He signalled for his men to surround the three, which was soon done, and
+they continued their march back toward the city.
+
+"Every step in this direction is better for us," said Dick to the two
+girls, as they marched along. "We'll get out of this trouble some way,
+be sure of that."
+
+"Oh, I know no harm will come to us as long as you are here," replied
+Shirley.
+
+"Thanks," said Dick dryly. "But I don't see how I can do much for any of
+us right now."
+
+"Something will turn up," said Shirley positively.
+
+"I hope it turns up soon," declared Mabel.
+
+But if the prisoners hoped to be taken directly back to town they were
+doomed to disappointment.
+
+After crossing the clearing in the woods, General Orizaba led his men to
+the left, where after an hour's march, he called a halt. Then he again
+approached the prisoners.
+
+"We shall camp here," he said. "Here, also, you shall be tried for
+attacking Pedro."
+
+Dick made no reply, but Shirley did
+
+"We are Americans," she said, "and you don't dare to interfere with us."
+
+"I don't, eh?" was the reply. "You shall see."
+
+Pedro, it now appeared, had been revived and brought along. The general
+motioned for him to approach. He pointed to Dick and spoke in Spanish.
+It was impossible to tell what they were talking about, but all three
+were keen enough to know that it boded no good for them.
+
+The general turned again to Dick.
+
+"Pedro says you struck him without warning and without provocation," he
+said. "I have decided, therefore, to dispense with the trial, and to fix
+your punishment myself."
+
+"I warn you----" began Dick.
+
+"Caramba!" roared the leader, becoming very angry. "What do I care for
+your warnings, or for your friends either?"
+
+"There is an American cruiser in the harbor," said Dick quietly. "The
+commander knows where I am, and if I am not back within two hours, he
+will land a force of sailors to see why."
+
+General Orizaba seemed to hesitate, following these words. Then he
+became even angrier than before. He was about to speak, when a horseman
+clattered up.
+
+The general turned to him and they conversed in low tones. Then the
+horseman dismounted, and leaving his horse, made his way to where the
+rest of the revolutionists sat upon the ground some distance away.
+
+General Orizaba again faced Dick.
+
+"Dog of an Americano!" he thundered. "You shall be shot for daring to
+interfere with one of my men."
+
+Dick only smiled.
+
+"I guess you don't mean that," he replied quietly.
+
+"I don't, eh? You shall see." He paused a moment. "But you shall live
+until sunset."
+
+He turned to call one of his men; and at that moment, Mabel, who stood
+closest to the riderless horse, suddenly leaped forward and sprang upon
+the animal's back.
+
+So sudden was her movement that for a moment the Nicaraguans failed to
+realize her intention.
+
+That moment was sufficient for Mabel to seize the reins and turn the
+horse's head toward the city. Then she dug her heels into his flanks and
+away they went.
+
+Dick and Shirley were no less surprised than the Nicaraguans, and both
+uttered cries of alarm.
+
+General Orizaba darted forward with an ejaculation, and called to his
+men.
+
+"Shoot!" he cried.
+
+Rifles were brought to bear, but the horse had gained his stride and was
+galloping along like the wind. Volley after volley was fired after the
+girl, but thanks to the movement of the horse and the poor marksmanship
+of the Nicaraguans, Mabel was not touched.
+
+Rapidly she rode, nor did she draw rein when she entered the town but
+galloped straight to the pier. Here still lay the small boat of the
+_Yucatan_, manned by its crew. Rapidly explaining the situation, the
+girl urged the sailors back to the ship without waiting the return of
+the first officer, who was some place in the town.
+
+About the ship, Mabel found that Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were
+ashore searching for the girls, and so she went straight to Captain
+Anderson. That worthy acted promptly. He quickly signalled the cruiser
+_Prairie_, which Mabel, saw for the first time, perceived lay close by.
+
+The _Prairie_ signalled for the captain and Mabel to come aboard, which
+they did without loss of time. In a few words Mabel explained the
+situation to the commander of the cruiser.
+
+Action came quickly.
+
+A bugle sounded, piping the crew to quarters. The commander detailed a
+landing party of one hundred and fifty marines and sailors. These were
+quickly rowed to the shore--Mabel going with them as a guide, for she
+refused to be left behind.
+
+Once ashore, the girl led the way toward where she had left her friends,
+the men going forward at the double-quick, their weapons ready for
+instant use.
+
+When General Orizaba perceived that Mabel had made good her flight, his
+anger knew no bounds. He berated his men roundly and danced about like a
+madman. Then he turned to Dick.
+
+"But you shall not escape!" he declared.
+
+"You'll have a squad of marines down on you in a few minutes," replied
+Dick with a cheerful smile. "Then where will you be?"
+
+"Bah!" said the angry general. "What are a few marines? We can drive
+them back."
+
+"Think so, do you?" asked Dick. "I'm afraid you'll be surprised."
+
+"You shall see," declared the angry leader. "You shall live until you
+see your countrymen defeated."
+
+"Guess I shall live a long time then," said Dick, with a smile.
+
+The smile angered the leader, and he stepped close to Dick and slapped
+him across the face.
+
+Dick's anger boiled up and he promptly sent his fist crashing into the
+general's face, knocking him down.
+
+The young man regretted this act the next moment, for he knew that
+probably he had brought matters to a crisis.
+
+General Orizaba sprang to his feet and with a shout drew his revolver
+and covered Dick.
+
+Shirley screamed. Then General Orizaba lowered his revolver.
+
+"No, I won't do it yet," he said. "I promised you should see your
+countrymen defeated, and so you shall. I shall kill you later."
+
+"Thanks," said Dick.
+
+In spite of his apparent nonchalance, he breathed easier, however, for
+he had been at the point of death, and none knew it better than he did.
+
+"We are all right now," he told Shirley in a low voice. "The marines and
+sailors will soon be here, and these fellows can't stand up against
+them."
+
+Shirley smiled at him bravely.
+
+"I know it," she replied quietly.
+
+Now the leader of the revolutionists signalled two of his men to bind
+the prisoners. This was soon done, and they were taken well to one side
+of what proved to be the line of battle.
+
+"I do this so I may be sure you will be saved for me," said General
+Orizaba with an evil smile. "It would be nice to have you shot down by
+American bullets, but I would rather do it myself. Besides, from here,
+you can see us defeat the Americanos."
+
+"Many thanks for your kindness," returned Dick. "I'll speak a word for
+you when you are in the hands of the Americanos, as you call them."
+
+"That," was the reply, "will never be."
+
+Dick shrugged his shoulders.
+
+"Have it your own way," he said.
+
+Came a shout from one of the men who had been sent forward on scout
+duty.
+
+"The Americanos!" he cried.
+
+General Orizaba hurried toward him. Dick and Shirley drew a breath of
+relief.
+
+An instant later a long line of hurrying blue figures came into view.
+Shirley and Dick looked at them with pride in their eyes.
+
+The marines and sailors advanced at the double.
+
+"Crack! Crack! Crack! Crack!"
+
+The battle had begun!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.--END OF THE REVOLT.
+
+
+The Nicaraguans met the first charge of the bluejackets bravely enough,
+but they were now opposed to men who knew not the meaning of the word
+defeat, nor what it meant to retreat. Under the first fire from the
+Americans they wavered; at the next they began to fall back and at the
+third they turned and fled.
+
+Dick and Shirley, bound as they were, nevertheless could see how the
+fighting progressed, while thanks to the thoughtfulness of the
+revolutionary leader they were out of danger themselves.
+
+But now that the day was going against the enemy, Dick feared that
+General Orizaba, mindful of his threat, would return to his prisoners
+before seeking safety in flight. Therefore he began to devise a way of
+escape.
+
+After some effort he succeeded in getting out his pocket knife. Then,
+holding it in one of his bound hands, he bent his head and opened the
+big blade with his teeth. Fortunately the rope with which he was bound
+was not thick, and the knife was sharp.
+
+For perhaps ten minutes, holding the knife in his mouth by the handle,
+Dick sawed at the bonds on his hands. At last the rope parted. Quickly
+he untied his feet, and then unbound Shirley, who also arose to her
+feet.
+
+The Nicaraguan forces were now in full retreat, and as Dick would have
+led Shirley forward toward the town, a single figure burst into sight.
+As the man came closer Shirley and Dick could see anger and hate written
+large on his features. They recognized him upon the instant.
+
+"Orizaba!" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"And come to fulfill his promise, I guess," agreed Dick quietly.
+
+"Run!" cried Shirley.
+
+"What's the use?" asked Dick. "He has a gun."
+
+It was true. In the hands of the defeated revolutionary leader was a
+revolver of heavy caliber, and he flourished it as he came toward them.
+
+Dick turned to Shirley.
+
+"You get back out of sight!" he commanded. "I can handle this fellow!"
+
+Shirley protested.
+
+"But--but,----" she began.
+
+"Quick!" exclaimed Dick. "He is very angry and for that reason will be
+easier to handle. I don't believe he could hit a barn door now."
+
+Shirley followed Dick's command and withdrew a short distance, although
+she was still in plain sight of the infuriated Nicaraguan.
+
+Standing quietly, with his hands on his hips, Dick awaited the attack of
+the Nicaraguan. A full hundred yards away, but still running, the latter
+opened fire with his revolver.
+
+"Good!" thought Dick to himself. "He can't hit me that way, and his
+shells will soon be gone."
+
+Five times Orizaba fired, and each time the bullet went wild.
+
+Shirley, from her place of safety, watched the encounter breathlessly.
+She stood with clenched fists and awaited the outcome of each shot
+anxiously.
+
+A sixth time Orizaba's revolver spoke.
+
+Dick staggered, and Shirley gave utterance to a scream, while a laugh of
+derision came from the Nicaraguan.
+
+But the latter's mirth was destined to be short-lived. Dick, still with
+a smile on his face in spite of the dull pain in his left arm where
+Orizaba's last bullet had struck, stepped forward to meet his enemy in
+his mad rush.
+
+They came together with a shock and tumbled to the ground, where Orizaba
+clawed desperately at Dick's face and eyes.
+
+
+"So that's your game, eh?" muttered Dick to himself.
+
+He protected his face with his injured arm, while with the uninjured one
+he rained a shower of blows upon the Nicaraguan's face. The latter soon
+tired of this and sprang to his feet. Dick also arose.
+
+There was a cry of alarm from Shirley as Orizaba stepped back. His hand
+went to his belt, and a knife flashed in the air. But Dick, quick as a
+cat, gave him no time to use it.
+
+He realized his danger in an instant and acted promptly. With a shout he
+sprang forward, and seized the upraised arm with his right hand. He
+twisted it fiercely, and the Nicaraguan gave a cry of pain as he
+released his hold on the knife and stepped back.
+
+As he did so, Dick drove his right fist into his face, and General
+Orizaba tumbled to the ground, where he lay still.
+
+At the same moment there was a cheer from close at hand and, turning,
+Dick saw a dozen marines who had gathered about to watch the contest.
+Shirley came forward anxiously.
+
+"Are you hurt Dick?" she asked.
+
+"Not much, I guess," was the reply. "He winged me with the last shot,
+but I am sure it is nothing serious."
+
+"He's all right," shouted one of the marines, as they gathered about him
+and congratulated him upon his fight.
+
+Shirley turned on them angrily.
+
+"And you stood off and left him to be killed," she exclaimed. "You ought
+to be ashamed of yourselves."
+
+"Oh, we know he could handle that fellow," was the response, but the men
+looked at one another somewhat sheepishly.
+
+Their reason for not interfering was perfectly apparent. They had
+enjoyed the spectacle of Dick and Orizaba locked in combat, and had felt
+morally certain Dick would come out on top.
+
+"Just the same, he might have been badly hurt!" said Shirley, by no
+means convinced.
+
+"Oh, they did all right," said Dick with a laugh. "Come Shirley, let's
+get back to the ship and I'll have the surgeon look at this arm."
+
+"Are you hurt, Jack?" asked one of the men stepping forward.
+
+"Bullet in the arm," was Dick's reply; and he added: "But my name is not
+Jack."
+
+"Everybody is Jack to us," was the answer. "But had we known you were
+wounded we would have taken that fellow off your hands. Come on, there
+is Dr. Thomas over there."
+
+Dick and Shirley followed the marines to where the surgeon was engaged
+in bandaging the wounds of an American sailor, the only man who had been
+touched by one of the enemy's bullets.
+
+He bound Dick's arm up quickly, remarking that it would be as good as
+new in a day or two.
+
+"Shirley!"
+
+It was Mabel's voice, and turning, Shirley saw her chum rushing toward
+her. She ran to meet her and the greeting was affectionate.
+
+"How dared you take such a chance, Mabel?" demanded Shirley.
+
+"Well, somebody had to do it, and I was closest the horse," was the
+reply. "I knew they couldn't hit me."
+
+"Nevertheless, it was a desperate risk," said Dick, who came up at that
+moment. "I expected to see your horse go tumbling."
+
+"But how did you get aid so quickly?" demanded Shirley.
+
+Mabel explained.
+
+"And they made me go back when the fighting began," she continued. "I
+wanted to hunt you up immediately, but the lieutenant wouldn't let me."
+
+"I should say not," declared Dick.
+
+"Shirley was in danger. Why shouldn't I have been there?" demanded
+Mabel. "I saw Dick and the general fighting and I came forward as fast
+as I could," the girl continued, "and when I saw the Nicaraguan go down
+I knew our troubles were over."
+
+"And where is Dad?" asked Shirley.
+
+"I didn't see him," replied Mabel. "I suppose they are looking for us in
+some other part of the town. I'll bet they are badly frightened."
+
+"I fear so too," replied Shirley. "I guess we had better get back as
+soon as we can. But we shall have to thank the lieutenant first."
+
+That officer declared that he wanted no thanks.
+
+"We are glad to have been able to take a shot at those fellows," he
+said. "We have been wanting to do it for a long time, but this is the
+first opportunity we have had. We--Hello!"
+
+He broke off suddenly. Riding rapidly toward them was a large body of
+men, and above them floated a white flag. They dismounted some distance
+away, and one approached.
+
+The girls recognized this man immediately. He was President Garcia.
+
+He rode up to the lieutenant, and introduced himself.
+
+"And I would like the person of Orizaba delivered to me," he said
+quietly.
+
+"You shall have him," replied the lieutenant. "It will save us trouble."
+
+The unfortunate revolutionist, fully recovered now, was turned over to
+the President of Nicaragua and marched away. Then President Garcia
+appeared to perceive Shirley and Mabel for the first time. He raised his
+hat to them.
+
+"I am pleased that the senoritas have escaped safely," he said quietly,
+and making a low bow to them, he turned his horse about, and a moment
+later was gone.
+
+The lieutenant in command of the marines now ordered his men back to
+their ship, and the girls accompanied them on their return march through
+the town. Dark looks were cast at them from all sides, but none ventured
+a word.
+
+"You may see they don't love us very much in these parts," said the
+lieutenant with a smile. "They would welcome a chance to shoot us all."
+
+At the pier the two girls saw their fathers approaching rapidly, and
+they ran forward to meet them. The meeting was affectionate, for both
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton had been greatly alarmed at their long
+absence.
+
+"I am going to keep my eye on you in the future," declared Mr. Willing.
+
+The girls only laughed. Both men were profuse in their praise of Dick's
+gallant actions, and Colonel Ashton declared:
+
+"It's a good thing we brought him along, Willing."
+
+The marines gave the Willing party a rousing cheer as they stepped into
+the _Yucatan's_ small boat and were rowed back to the vessel.
+
+"I'm glad to see you back," declared Captain Anderson. "We're late now.
+We shall leave here at once." He turned to the first officer. "You may
+get under way immediately, sir!"
+
+And as the _Yucatan_ steamed from the harbor, the passengers gathered
+about the two girls, demanding an account of their experiences.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.--A GUATEMALA ADVENTURE.
+
+
+"This," said Captain Anderson, waving his hand, as the steamer entered a
+little harbor, "is Champerico, the only Guatemalan port at which we
+shall touch. It is the last Central American republic we shall see.
+Would you care to go ashore?"
+
+"I would like to go," said Shirley, with a sidelong look at her father.
+
+"You won't go unless I do," was Mr. Willing's ultimatum. "You have been
+in trouble enough. I'm going to keep you in sight." He turned to Colonel
+Ashton. "Would you care to go ashore, Ashton?"
+
+"Why, yes," was the reply.
+
+"Good. Then we shall all go," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"You can go with me," said Captain Anderson. "I am going to pay my
+respects to the American consul."
+
+An hour later a small boat put off from the ship and headed shoreward.
+In it, besides Captain Anderson and the crew, were Mr. Willing, Colonel
+Ashton, Dick, Shirley and Mabel.
+
+"We'll keep out of trouble this time," commented Mr. Willing.
+
+They accompanied Captain Anderson to the United States consulate, where
+they were introduced to the consul. An hour later they all started back
+toward the boat.
+
+As they walked down one of the dirty streets Captain Anderson espied a
+figure slinking along.
+
+"Hey!" he cried. "There goes that scoundrel Von Blusen, who broke his
+parole and ran away at Corinto. I'll get him!"
+
+He darted hurriedly across the street, and laid a hand on the young
+man's shoulder. The latter looked up in surprise, and then perceiving
+Captain Anderson, jerked suddenly free and took to his heels, running
+directly toward the Willing party.
+
+"Head him off!" cried Captain Anderson, and Dick and the two men leaped
+to obey.
+
+Straight at them rushed the young German officer, and a few feet away
+hurled himself forward with a powerful spring. He struck the three
+squarely, and all went to the ground in a tangled heap.
+
+Von Blusen was the first to regain his feet. He raised a hand as though
+to strike one of his fallen adversaries, but the approach of Captain
+Anderson at that moment caused him to turn and flee quickly.
+
+The captain made after him at top speed, calling upon him to halt.
+Around the block they ran, and then, unconsciously doubling back, Von
+Blusen once more found himself bearing down on Dick and Mr. Willing and
+Colonel Ashton.
+
+A moment later Captain Anderson, panting, hove in sight and gasped out:
+
+"Stop him!"
+
+This time the three spread out, so they would have a better chance of
+halting the fugitive. The latter ran straight at Mr. Willing and the
+force of the contact sent both to the ground. As Von Blusen arose
+Colonel Ashton leaped for him.
+
+But the German was too quick for the colonel, and missing his grasp, the
+latter sprawled on the street. Von Blusen turned just in time to meet
+Dick with a hard blow to the face, and Dick toppled over.
+
+Then Von Blusen darted up a little alleyway.
+
+Unmindful of his intention to keep a close eye on the girls, Mr.
+Willing, now red with anger, made after him, as did the colonel, Captain
+Anderson and Dick.
+
+The girls found themselves alone in the street.
+
+The noise of the chase had attracted many spectators, among them several
+members of the native police.
+
+Suddenly Captain Von Blusen emerged from the alleyway on the dead run,
+his pursuers close on his trail.
+
+Perceiving one man thus followed by many, the native officers decided to
+interfere. Von Blusen darted past them, evading their outstretched arms
+by dodging neatly; but the others were not so fortunate.
+
+Pursuers and native police collided with a shock, and there was a tangle
+of arms and legs as they rolled in the dirty street. The officers freed
+themselves first, and drawing their revolvers stood by while the others
+arose.
+
+One of them broke into a torrent of Spanish.
+
+Captain Anderson, the only member of the party who spoke the language,
+halted in his tracks.
+
+"I'm an American citizen," he told the policeman. "Take your hands off
+me," this to one of the officers who insisted upon holding him by the
+arm.
+
+The officer chattered volubly and clung to the arm.
+
+Captain Anderson freed his arm with a quick wrench, and tapped the
+officer lightly on the shoulder with his hand.
+
+"Caramba!" roared the Guatemalan, and levelled his revolver at the
+captain.
+
+"Caramba yourself!" cried the captain, and extending his arm suddenly,
+he took the pistol away from the little officer.
+
+The latter stamped the ground angrily and broke into another torrent of
+unintelligible words.
+
+But Captain Anderson now perceived he had acted rashly in thus giving
+way to his temper. The blood of the other native officers was aroused,
+and they surrounded the Americans gesticulating vigorously.
+
+At that moment Captain Von Blusen, who had been hovering just around the
+corner, reappeared, and approaching the officers, addressed them in
+Spanish.
+
+"These men tried to rob me," he declared. "I want them arrested!"
+
+"Si se�or! It shall be done!" replied one of the officers.
+
+"I'll go with you to make the charge," continued the young German.
+
+"Si se�or!" said the native officer.
+
+Turning, he motioned for the four to precede him. Captain Anderson was
+inclined to hang back, as were the others, but a word from Captain Von
+Blusen decided them to go on.
+
+"They'll shoot if you don't go," declared Von Blusen with a smile.
+
+Shirley and Mabel, who had been standing nearby while all this was going
+on, now made as though to approach, but Mr. Willing waved them back.
+
+"Go back to the consulate and tell the consul what has happened," he
+called to her.
+
+The girls turned to go, but Von Blusen, realizing what was going on,
+called to the officers to stop them.
+
+"Run!" cried Captain Anderson, who was the only one who understood the
+import of the German's words.
+
+"Halt!" cried one of the Guatemalans, as the girls broke into a run.
+
+But the girls did not understand him, and if they had, their actions
+would have been the same.
+
+They set out for the consulate at top speed and they did not stop, in
+spite of pursuit and cries of "Halt!" until they dashed in the door.
+
+The consul greeted them with an exclamation of surprise.
+
+"What's the matter?" he demanded.
+
+Shirley explained.
+
+"And hurry," she added tearfully, "they will lock them up in a dirty old
+jail."
+
+The consul was forced to smile.
+
+"Oh, well, I guess it won't hurt them any," he replied.
+
+The girls looked at him in astonishment, and Shirley opened her mouth to
+speak. The consul silenced her with a gesture.
+
+"I'll get them out, all right," he assured them.
+
+He looked at his watch and continued.
+
+"It is now ten o'clock. I think I can safely promise to have them back
+aboard the _Yucatan_ by five o'clock."
+
+"Five o'clock!" repeated Shirley. "And where will they be all that
+time?"
+
+"Jail," was the brief reply.
+
+Shirley could not repress an exclamation of dismay.
+
+"But can't you hurry?" she exclaimed.
+
+"Now don't you fret," said the consul. "There is certain red tape that
+must be gone through, and it will take time. Besides, it is needless to
+hurry. In this country no one hurries. If I seem unduly excited it will
+take longer than ever."
+
+"Please do the best you can, then," said Shirley.
+
+"I shall," replied the consul. "In the meantime, you two girls return
+aboard the _Yucatan_. I'll call my secretary and have him escort you
+back."
+
+In response to his summons a young man appeared and the consul
+instructed him to see them back aboard their ship.
+
+"Yes, sir," said the young man. "Come," to the girls.
+
+He accompanied them to the wharf, where he instructed the sailors to
+take them aboard and then return and await the arrival of the captain
+and the others.
+
+It was almost six o'clock when Shirley and Mabel, gazing toward shore,
+perceived the little boat of the _Yucatan_ bobbing toward them. As it
+drew close they could make out the faces of their fathers, Dick and
+Captain Anderson.
+
+A short time later all appeared on deck. Their clothing was ruffled and
+dirty, and it was plain to the girls that their fathers were not in the
+best of temper. Nevertheless Shirley could not repress a slight dig at
+them.
+
+First she approached Captain Anderson.
+
+"And did you capture Captain Von Blusen?" she asked.
+
+"No," grumbled the captain. "I hope I never set eyes on him again."
+
+"Dad," said Shirley, "do you remember what you said to us about getting
+into trouble?"
+
+Mr. Willing growled some unintelligible reply.
+
+"We've never been in jail yet, Dad," continued Shirley slyly. "Were
+you?"
+
+Mr. Willing glanced at his daughter and seemed about to make some sharp
+response. Then he controlled himself and spoke:
+
+"Yes, we were in jail," he growled. "We spent the best part of the day
+there."
+
+"Well," said Shirley, "you are always getting in trouble. I reckon Mabel
+and I will have to keep closer watch on you."
+
+"I am sure of it," declared Mabel.
+
+Dick smiled, but there was no amusement on the faces of Mr. Willing nor
+Colonel Ashton. They scowled at their daughters.
+
+"Now, Dad," continued Shirley, "did Captain Von Blusen--"
+
+"Will you be quiet?" demanded Mr. Willing. "Haven't we had enough
+trouble for one day without all this chatter. Come, Ashton, we'll go to
+our cabin."
+
+Shirley, Mabel and Dick broke into a loud laugh as the two stalked away
+arm in arm, looking neither to the right nor left.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.--UP THE MEXICAN COAST.
+
+
+The passengers aboard the _Yucatan_ gazed curiously at the approaching
+battle cruiser.
+
+It was the morning following the departure from Champerico, and the
+_Yucatan_ had been halted by a shot fired across her bow. Officers and
+passengers alike were curious as to the identity of the cruiser.
+
+So far she had shown no colors.
+
+"Do you suppose she is English?" asked Shirley of Dick, as they gazed
+over the rail at the oncoming stranger.
+
+"Must be either English or Japanese," replied Dick. "Not much chance of
+any other vessel being in these waters, unless, of course, she is a
+United States cruiser. But that can't be, because she would not have
+halted us."
+
+Signs of activity became apparent aboard the cruiser, and the colors
+were run up the masthead. For a moment they could not be distinguished,
+but as the breeze caught the ensign, a gasp went up from the passengers,
+with here and there a cheer.
+
+For the colors thus displayed were the red, white and black of Germany!
+
+"My goodness! Will she shoot us?" exclaimed Shirley in some dismay.
+
+"Hardly," declared Dick. "I don't believe Germany wants to go to war
+with the United States."
+
+There came a message from the German to Captain Anderson:
+
+"I am coming aboard!"
+
+A few moments later a boat put off from the cruiser, and soon scraped
+alongside the _Yucatan_. An officer appeared over the side and was
+greeted by Captain Anderson.
+
+"How did you get here?" was his first question. "I had reason to believe
+the _Yucatan_ was now in other waters."
+
+"Well," replied Captain Anderson dryly, "your little piracy scheme
+didn't work, you see."
+
+The German officer controlled his temper with an effort.
+
+"Have you a passenger by the name of Bristow aboard?"
+
+"Oh," said the captain, "you mean Von Blusen. We did have him aboard, in
+irons. I released him on parole, and he broke it. I'll never trust
+another German."
+
+The German officer drew himself up angrily.
+
+"Have a care, sir!" he exclaimed. "You seem to forget that I can sink
+you on a moment's notice."
+
+"Oh, no I don't. But I'm sure you won't. Already you have troubles
+enough. I'll thank you to dispose of your business immediately and then
+get off my ship."
+
+"I'll have a look at your papers," said the German shortly.
+
+Captain Anderson led the way to his cabin.
+
+As they talked, the passengers on deck noticed smoke upon the horizon.
+Save for this little blur and the German cruiser there was nothing else
+in sight but water.
+
+The blur became larger, and at last took the shape of a vessel. As it
+drew nearer it could be seen that it was a battle cruiser. It bore down
+toward the German cruiser at full speed.
+
+"I hope it's an Englishman," declared Shirley.
+
+"Probably is," said her father, "although it may be a Jap."
+
+Still the German officer was in the cabin with Captain Anderson.
+
+Suddenly the head of another German officer appeared over the rail of
+the _Yucatan_ and dashed toward the captain's cabin. A moment later both
+reappeared, dropped over the side and the boat made back toward the
+cruiser.
+
+The _Yucatan_ was very close, and now, at a command from Captain
+Anderson, she got under way.
+
+"If that other cruiser is a Britisher, there is bound to be a fight, and
+we don't want to be in the way," explained the captain. "We'll stand off
+at a distance and look on."
+
+This plan met the approval of the passengers, and as the _Yucatan_
+steamed toward a safe spot all eyes were turned upon the second cruiser
+waiting for her to show her colors.
+
+And at last they were unfurled, and a cheer rang the length of the ship.
+The British ensign fluttered from the mast.
+
+The German cruiser, immediately the identity of the other was
+determined, turned to flee. She seemed fully as large as the British
+ship, and there were comments of surprise aboard the _Yucatan_ that she
+didn't offer to accept battle.
+
+But there was to be no escape for the German. The British cruiser gave
+chase, and it was soon apparent that she was much faster than the foe.
+
+There was a heavy crash as her big guns opened fire on the stern of the
+enemy. The _Yucatan's_ passengers watched eagerly for the result.
+
+The German cruiser seemed to stagger in her stride, and a cloud of wood
+and steel flew in the air. The first shot had struck home, and in some
+manner had disabled the engines of the German. Escape being impossible,
+the latter turned to give battle.
+
+Immediately the British cruiser reduced her speed.
+
+Shirley and Mabel stood at the rail of the _Yucatan_ with clasped hands
+and strained faces.
+
+"And to think that we shall see a real sea fight!" exclaimed Mabel.
+
+"But think of the poor sailors," said Shirley.
+
+"Of course," said Mabel, "but they may be saved. Perhaps the German
+commander will surrender."
+
+"I am sure he won't," declared Shirley.
+
+"No, he won't surrender," said Dick. "Whatever else you may say of the
+Germans, their bravery cannot be doubted."
+
+Now the first gun on the German cruiser spoke, and a shell plowed up the
+water alongside the Britisher.
+
+"They'll have the range in a minute," said Dick, "and then they'll go at
+it hammer and tongs."
+
+He was right. The next shot from the German burst squarely over her
+enemy's forward turret, putting it out of commission.
+
+There was a cheer from the few German passengers aboard the _Yucatan_.
+
+But the British cruiser more than evened up the score with her next
+shot.
+
+A shell burst squarely amidships on the German. A moment later there was
+a terrific explosion.
+
+The German cruiser seemed to part in the middle. It staggered crazily.
+She had been wounded unto death, as every passenger aboard the _Yucatan_
+realized.
+
+Men flung themselves into the sea, and struck out in the direction of
+the _Yucatan_.
+
+Captain Anderson was a humane man, and while the matter possibly was
+none of his business, he determined to aid the unfortunate victims. He
+ordered the ship's lifeboats manned and lowered.
+
+"Look!" cried Shirley.
+
+Another terrific explosion drowned her voice. The German cruiser
+suddenly sprang into a brilliant sheet of flame, seemed to leap in the
+air, then disappeared.
+
+The calm waters of the Pacific closed over her. She was gone.
+
+Shirley and Mabel held their breath in speechless amazement. It seemed
+to them incredible that such a great ship could have been sent to the
+bottom in such a short time.
+
+"The poor sailors!" exclaimed Shirley. "I hope they will all be saved."
+
+"They won't be," declared Captain Anderson, who had come up and now
+stood among the others. "With my glass I saw the commander on the bridge
+a moment before the ship went down. He has gone with her, and so,
+probably, have most of his officers."
+
+He lifted his cap from his head, as did the passengers.
+
+"It's a terrible thing, this war," continued the Captain. "How many went
+down I do not know; but how many of those who did knew what they were
+fighting for? Not many."
+
+Meanwhile the little lifeboats of the _Yucatan_ were helping the crews
+of the British cruiser pick up the survivors. The work went on with the
+utmost haste, for there were many who could not swim.
+
+Fortunately most of those who had jumped just before the explosion were
+saved. These were all taken aboard the British cruiser, and a short time
+later the British commander came aboard the _Yucatan_.
+
+Shirley and Mabel looked with some awe at this British sea fighter. He
+seemed a veritable hero in their eyes. Once on deck, he strode toward
+Captain Anderson with quick steps, his carriage erect.
+
+"I thank you for your assistance in saving many helpless sailors," he
+said to Captain Anderson. "Without your aid many would have perished."
+
+"How badly is your ship damaged, sir?" asked Captain Anderson, asking
+the question that was uppermost in the minds of all aboard the
+_Yucatan_.
+
+"Very little, sir," was the reply. "Two guns shot to pieces, and five
+men injured. No man was killed. There was also some slight damage to the
+engine room. It was a notable victory."
+
+"Indeed it was!" cried Shirley, who could keep silent no longer.
+
+The British sea captain gazed at her for a moment, then bowed slightly.
+
+Shirley's face grew red at her own boldness, but she said nothing more.
+
+The commander of the British cruiser followed Captain Anderson to the
+latter's cabin, where he inspected the ship's papers. Half an hour later
+he made his way over the side of the _Yucatan_ and was soon back aboard
+the cruiser.
+
+Immediately he had left, the _Yucatan_ got under way and continued her
+journey up the Mexican coast.
+
+All the passengers remained on deck gazing after the British cruiser,
+which had turned in the opposite direction; and until she was lost to
+sight in the distance, a faint smoke marking her location, hardly an eye
+was taken from her.
+
+"Well, Shirley," said Mr. Willing, "what did you think of the battle?"
+
+"It was wonderful," replied the girl, clasping her hands. "I am glad the
+English won."
+
+"And so am I," agreed her father. "How do you think you would like to be
+a sailor aboard a man-o'-war."
+
+"I'd love it!" declared Shirley with enthusiasm.
+
+Dick looked at her peculiarly.
+
+"I believe you would," he said quietly at last, and, turning on his
+heel, he went below.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.--A WOMAN PLOTTER.
+
+
+Aboard the _Yucatan_ was a woman passenger, who, on the trip up the
+Pacific, had made herself very agreeable to the members of the Willing
+party. She was not an American although she spoke English fluently, with
+the slightest of accents. Neither Shirley nor Mabel had asked her
+nationality, but they had agreed that she must be a Spaniard.
+
+The woman had given her name as Mrs. Miguel Sebastian and this
+strengthened the belief of the members of the Willing party that she was
+a native of one of the Latin countries. She had come aboard the ship for
+the first time at Colon, but for several days had kept to her stateroom,
+so the passengers had not seen much of her.
+
+She was young, hardly more than twenty-five, slender, rather light
+complexioned for a Spaniard, and extremely pretty. Since leaving
+Champerico she had been much in the company of Shirley and Mabel, and
+both girls had taken an instinctive liking to her.
+
+She had travelled much, apparently, and told them tales of many lands.
+Her husband, she said, was abroad in Europe, but would join her in San
+Francisco within a month. She was well posted on current events, and
+seemed to have the history of Mexico at her finger tips.
+
+It was while the _Yucatan_ was steaming into the harbor of Acapulco, the
+first Mexican port at which they were to touch, that Mrs. Sebastian
+related some of the history of the revolution-torn republic.
+
+"I have always been greatly interested in Mexico," she told the girls,
+as the three leaned over the rail this morning. "I have spent several
+years in the country. I have friends here in Acapulco, and I shall make
+an effort to see them while here. Would you care to go with me?"
+
+"We would love to," declared Shirley, "but I don't know whether Dad will
+consent to our going without him."
+
+"We shall see," returned Mrs. Sebastian. "I can promise you a dinner
+that you will never forget. Nowhere outside of Mexico can you get real
+Mexican food, and it will be something to remember."
+
+Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and Dick now joined the others on deck, and
+Shirley asked for permission to accompany Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+Mr. Willing appeared somewhat dubious, but Mrs. Sebastian also asked him
+to consent.
+
+"I'll promise to return them to you safely," she said with a smile.
+
+"In that event, I shall give my consent to their going, madam," returned
+Colonel Ashton gallantly.
+
+"And I," agreed Mr. Willing.
+
+"Thanks so much," said Mrs. Sebastian, "and I'll go and ask Captain
+Anderson just how long we shall remain here."
+
+She walked away.
+
+"Mr. Willing," said Dick, "it may appear wrong, but somehow or other I
+don't exactly trust that woman."
+
+"Pooh!" replied Mr. Willing. "What does a youngster like you know?"
+
+"Perhaps I am wrong," replied Dick, "but something tells me she is not
+to be trusted. She is up to some mischief."
+
+"Why, Dick!" exclaimed Shirley. "Don't you want us to go?"
+
+"To tell the truth I don't," was the reply.
+
+"Young man," said Colonel Ashton, "you will learn, as you grow older,
+not to jump to such rash conclusions. Mrs. Sebastian is a gentlewoman."
+
+"Right you are, Ashton," declared Mr. Willing. "We're old enough to
+know, eh?"
+
+The two men smiled at each other and walked away, leaving the young
+people together.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian returned a few moments later.
+
+"Captain Anderson says we shall be here until evening," she said, "so we
+shall have plenty of time for our trip ashore. He says we may go in the
+first boat, so you girls had better run along to your cabin and get
+ready. Mr. Stanley will entertain me until you return."
+
+Shirley and Mabel hurried away, and Dick and Mrs. Sebastian stood
+together looking across the water at the shore, which was drawing closer
+rapidly.
+
+"Where are you going when you get ashore?" asked Dick abruptly.
+
+"Why, I am going to call upon a friend," was the smiling reply.
+
+"Then you have been here before?" questioned Dick.
+
+"Many times."
+
+"Mrs. Sebastian," said Dick quietly, "are you a Mexican?"
+
+The woman started back in surprise.
+
+"Why, no," she replied at last. "I was born in Spain. Why do you ask?"
+
+"I just wondered," was Dick's evasive answer. "By the way, I suppose it
+is perfectly peaceful here now?"
+
+"Yes, indeed," was the reply. "I guess the fighting is all over, now
+that General Villa has been successful in Chihuahua and other northern
+states."
+
+"But there has been trouble down here?"
+
+"Oh yes, but it is all over. Besides, the revolutionists probably have
+not enough money to buy arms and ammunition."
+
+"Why don't they steal them? It wouldn't be the first time."
+
+Mrs. Sebastian's face turned red.
+
+"What do you mean?" she asked angrily.
+
+"I am sorry I offended you," Dick apologized. "I spoke thoughtlessly."
+
+"Say no more about it," said Mrs. Sebastian with a laugh. "I am
+naturally touchy on that subject, for I have friends who were of the
+revolutionary party."
+
+"I see," replied Dick, and the subject was changed as Shirley and Mabel
+returned to them.
+
+Half an hour later the _Yucatan_ dropped anchor a mile off shore and the
+small boats were lowered for such passengers as desired to land.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian, Shirley and Mabel soon found themselves in the first
+boat and making shoreward at a good clip.
+
+"We shall be back in plenty of time," Mrs. Sebastian had called to Mr.
+Willing just before they took their places in the boat.
+
+The men nodded and waved their hands, and the occupants of the boat
+returned the salute.
+
+Now the small boat scraped the shore, and an officer sprang out and lent
+a hand to the passengers. Mrs. Sebastian was the first to go ashore, and
+Shirley and Mabel followed a moment later.
+
+The little street that ran along the water front was crowded with
+natives, dirty, ragged and unkempt, with here and there a gaily bedecked
+Mexican. They did not present a very inviting aspect, and the two girls
+shrank close to Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+The latter paid no attention to the natives, but pushed her way through
+the crowd with never a glance to right or left. She continued along the
+street until they came upon a long line of dilapidated cabs.
+
+She signalled to one of the drivers, who opened the door. Mrs. Sebastian
+motioned the girls to climb in, spoke a few quick words in Spanish to
+the driver and entered the cab. A moment later they were being driven
+through the dirty streets as fast as the old horse could go.
+
+"I thought my friend might be at the landing to meet me," the woman
+explained, "but as I didn't see anything of her, I thought best to drive
+right to her home."
+
+Shirley and Mabel nodded their understanding of this, and turned to view
+the passing sights.
+
+After an hour's drive the cab pulled up before a house somewhat larger
+than the rest, and the cabman dismounted and threw open the door.
+
+"Here we are at last," said Mrs. Sebastian as she alighted and motioned
+the girls to follow. Then she gave the cabman a single piece of silver
+and turned to the heavy door.
+
+This she opened without the formality of a knock, and led the way across
+a small patio--a courtyard--in the center of what appeared to be the
+house itself. Here they brought up against another door, and Mrs.
+Sebastian knocked sharply three times.
+
+There was a moment's delay, then the door swung open and a man's face
+appeared.
+
+At sight of Mrs. Sebastian the man stepped back with a bow, and Mrs.
+Sebastian, followed by the two girls, swept by him.
+
+The door slammed behind them.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian led the way into a small but luxuriously furnished room
+off the main hall, where she turned to the man who had followed them,
+and spoke a few words in Spanish. The man bowed and departed.
+
+"I told him to announce our arrival," explained Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+The girls surveyed the interior of the handsome apartment curiously.
+
+"I had no idea they lived so well in Mexico," said Shirley.
+
+"Nor I," declared Mabel.
+
+"The upper classes live as well in Mexico as elsewhere," replied Mrs.
+Sebastian. "It is only the poorer--or peon--class that you have heard
+about, apparently."
+
+Footsteps sounded without and a moment later a handsomely attired woman
+entered the room, followed a moment later by a fancifully garbed man.
+The woman rushed up to Mrs. Sebastian and they greeted each other
+affectionately. The man also appeared glad to see the visitor.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian then presented the girls, and it developed that both Don
+Miguel and his wife--for so they were introduced--spoke English. They
+made the girls welcome, and told them to make themselves at home.
+
+"I have promised them a real Mexican dinner," explained Mrs. Sebastian
+with a little laugh.
+
+"They shall have it," replied Don Miguel, throwing wide his arms.
+
+"And now," said Mrs. Sebastian, "where can we have a talk?"
+
+"In the next room," was the reply.
+
+"Good! I am sure my young friends will excuse me for half an hour."
+
+She looked inquiringly at the two girls. The latter nodded, and the Don
+and two women made their way from the room.
+
+The moment they were gone, Shirley and Mabel began an inspection of the
+room. There were two windows, both of which looked on the street and
+both of which were barred.
+
+Shirley uttered an exclamation.
+
+"Barred!" she said.
+
+"That's nothing," laughed Mabel. "Surely you remember all windows are
+barred in Mexico."
+
+"That's so," agreed Shirley.
+
+After some further inspection of the room, Mabel crossed to the door
+through which they had come, and turned the knob. Then her face paled
+and she stepped back with an exclamation of alarm.
+
+"What's the matter, Mabel?" asked Shirley.
+
+For a moment Mabel did not reply. Again she turned the knob and then she
+stepped back and looked at Shirley.
+
+"It's locked!" she declared.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.--CAPTAIN VON BLUSEN BOBS UP AGAIN.
+
+
+"Are you sure?" asked Shirley, her face also turning a shade whiter.
+
+"Try it yourself," replied Mabel.
+
+Shirley advanced and laid hold of the knob, but the door would not open.
+
+The girls looked at each other in alarm.
+
+"I never heard that they always locked the doors in Mexico," said Mabel.
+
+"Nor I," agreed Shirley. "Do you suppose it was an accident?"
+
+"I don't know what to think," replied Mabel.
+
+There was no denying the fact that both girls were badly frightened.
+They darted hither and thither about the room, seeking a means of
+egress; but there was none and they finally sat down.
+
+"It must have been an accident," said Shirley at last. "Surely Mrs.
+Sebastian would have no reason for wishing to keep us prisoners."
+
+"That's what I think," Mabel agreed. "The door must have locked itself."
+
+"Well, all we can do is wait for some one to return," said Shirley.
+
+And so they waited.
+
+As the minutes passed, each seemingly more slowly than the one that had
+gone before, the fright of the girls increased.
+
+An hour passed and still Mrs. Sebastian had not returned.
+
+Shirley was about to speak, when they heard the sounds of footsteps
+outside and the doorknob turned. The door opened and Mrs. Sebastian
+stepped in smiling.
+
+"I had no idea I had been gone so long," she exclaimed. "Why didn't you
+call me? You have been as quiet as mice."
+
+Shirley and Mabel each drew a breath of great relief.
+
+"Then you didn't lock us in purposely?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Lock you in? What do you mean?"
+
+"The door was locked and we couldn't get out. That's why we were so
+quiet," replied Shirley, laughing. "We thought you had locked us in."
+
+"The idea!" exclaimed Mrs. Sebastian. "The door locked?" She approached
+and examined it. Then she looked up with a smile. "Why, the catch is
+on," she exclaimed, smiling. "And were you frightened?"
+
+"No, not much," replied Mabel slowly. "We knew it must have been locked
+accidentally."
+
+"Of course," replied the woman. "Now would you care to wash up a bit?
+Dinner will be ready in fifteen minutes."
+
+The girls nodded and the woman led the way. Fifteen minutes later all
+were seated in the cozy dining room, where Shirley and Mabel had their
+first introduction to Mexican cooking.
+
+Each girl sampled everything that was placed before her, and in spite of
+their efforts to try and enjoy the meal, disappointment was written
+large on their features. Mrs. Sebastian noticed this and laughed, while
+the donna and her husband smiled slightly.
+
+"So you don't like the Mexican dishes," said Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+"Well, they are a little too hot for me," said Shirley, somewhat
+ruefully.
+
+"Try some of these tortillas," said the man, "perhaps you will find them
+to your liking, though they are warm."
+
+The girls tried some, but with no better result. They finally gave up in
+despair.
+
+The meal over, Mrs. Sebastian led the way back to the other room, which
+apparently was the parlor. Here all sat down to talk and the girls spent
+a very pleasant afternoon.
+
+Finally Shirley looked at her watch. "What time did Captain Anderson say
+we would leave?" she asked of Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+"Soon after five o'clock," was the reply. "Why?"
+
+"It's almost four now," replied Shirley. "Hadn't we better be going?"
+
+"Oh, no, we have plenty of time," was the answer. "It will not take us
+so long to get back."
+
+Shirley subsided, and the others continued the conversation.
+
+At half past four Shirley again mentioned the time. Mrs. Sebastian
+arose, spoke a few words to the others in Spanish, and then came over to
+Shirley.
+
+"I have decided," she said, laying a hand on the girl's shoulder, "to
+remain here over night and go on by train to-morrow. Will not you and
+Mabel stay with me?"
+
+"I am sorry, but we can't do that," replied Shirley. "If you will call a
+cab for us and direct the driver, we shall not trouble you to take us
+back to the boat."
+
+"But we should like to have you stay," said the donna.
+
+"We would indeed be glad to do so, but father would worry," said Mabel.
+
+The Don also added his voice, but the girls turned a deaf ear. Both
+arose and put on their hats. Then they approached to tell their hosts
+good-bye.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian spoke quickly to the Don and his wife in Spanish. Then
+she turned to the girls.
+
+"Come," she said, "remove your hats and stay."
+
+"It is impossible," replied Mabel.
+
+"We would be glad to if we could," said Shirley, "but we must hurry now,
+or we shall be too late, and the ship will go without us."
+
+The girls turned toward the door.
+
+"One moment," said Mrs. Sebastian, raising a hand.
+
+The girls halted in their tracks.
+
+"We must insist upon your staying over with us," said the woman quietly.
+
+"But--" began Shirley.
+
+"I said we must insist," repeated Mrs. Sebastian. "You may as well
+remove your hats."
+
+Both girls stared at her in utter astonishment. Shirley was the first to
+grasp the significance of the situation.
+
+"Then it is true!" she exclaimed; "the door was locked! We are
+prisoners!"
+
+The man of the house bowed low.
+
+"Prisoners, or guests," he said. "It shall be as you prefer."
+
+Shirley did not reply, but leaped quickly toward the door. The others
+were across the room and could not interfere. The door swung open, and
+Shirley called out:
+
+"Quick, Mabel! Run!"
+
+Mabel sprang after her friend.
+
+But the time taken to open the door proved costly. Before Shirley could
+dart through it, Mrs. Sebastian had her by both shoulders, while the
+other woman held Mabel powerless.
+
+Then they led the girls back into the room and bade them sit down.
+Perceiving the uselessness of resistance, the girls obeyed.
+
+Mabel immediately broke into tears, and Shirley threw her arms about
+her.
+
+"Don't cry, dearie," she exclaimed. "We are in no danger. They will not
+dare to harm us."
+
+She gazed at their three captors angrily.
+
+"What do you want with us?" she demanded.
+
+"You shall know in good time," replied Mrs. Sebastian gruffly.
+
+Her manner had undergone a sudden change. She was no longer the
+good-natured, smiling companion of the steamer. Her face was hard, and
+she seemed to have aged ten years.
+
+She turned to the other woman.
+
+"Bring paper, pen and ink," she commanded.
+
+The latter hurried away to obey this order, and returned a few moments
+later, bearing the required articles, which she placed on a table.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian drew up several chairs and motioned the two girls, who
+had been staring at them curiously, to take the seats.
+
+Both realized it would be useless to refuse and did as commanded. Mrs.
+Sebastian passed the paper, pen and ink to Shirley.
+
+"Write as I dictate," she ordered.
+
+Here Shirley protested.
+
+"What is it you wish me to write?" she asked.
+
+"You'll hear quick enough," was the reply. "Write."
+
+Shirley replaced the pen gently on the table.
+
+"Not until you tell me what you want me to write, and to whom," she
+replied quietly.
+
+The others looked at her in surprise, then conversed a few moments in
+Spanish. At last Mrs. Sebastian said:
+
+"The letter is to your father and to Colonel Ashton. It will contain a
+demand for $20,000--$10,000 apiece--for your return."
+
+Shirley rose suddenly to her feet and gave a cry of amazement.
+
+"You mean that we are to be held for ransom?" she exclaimed in unbelief.
+
+"Exactly," replied the man.
+
+"And so you are robbers," exclaimed Shirley scornfully.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian's face flushed.
+
+"No," she replied quietly. "But the patriotic forces in Mexico are in
+need of money. We have taken this means of getting it for them. Your
+fathers are rich. They will not miss the money, and it will mean so much
+to us."
+
+"And if we refuse to write?" asked Shirley.
+
+"You probably will spend the remainder of your days in Mexico. But you
+won't refuse. Come now, write as I dictate."
+
+"May I speak to my friend in private first?" asked Shirley.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian hesitated. Then:
+
+"Yes, but be quick."
+
+Shirley and Mabel put their heads close together.
+
+"Shall I write the letter, Mabel?" asked Shirley.
+
+"Yes," was the instant reply. "Then Dad will know we are in danger and
+just what sort of danger. It is the only way we can get word to the
+others. I know they will find us."
+
+"I guess you're right," agreed Shirley.
+
+She returned to her place at the table, and picked up the pen.
+
+"Dictate and I shall write," she said.
+
+"I am glad to see you are so sensible," smiled Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+She dictated and Shirley wrote. When she had finished she had both girls
+affix their signatures, and then address an envelope.
+
+She clapped her hands and a young native boy entered the room. To him
+Mrs. Sebastian gave the letter and spoke in Spanish, whereupon the boy
+hurried away.
+
+Hardly had he gone when there came three sharp knocks at the door
+without. The conspirators looked at each other in alarm, and the hopes
+of Shirley and Mabel rose suddenly.
+
+But the latter were doomed to disappointment. Mrs. Sebastian left the
+room, only to return a few moments later followed by the figure of a
+man.
+
+Shirley took one look at him, and gave a cry of surprise.
+
+The newcomer was Captain Von Blusen!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.--THE SEARCHING PARTY.
+
+
+A long blast from the whistle of the _Yucatan_ broke the stillness of
+late afternoon.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick, who were peering shoreward from
+the deck of the steamer with straining eyes, looked anxiously at each
+other.
+
+"What can be detaining them?" exclaimed the former.
+
+"I am sure I don't know," returned Colonel Ashton. "They probably will
+be here in a few minutes."
+
+A boat put off from shore; it was the last of the _Yucatan's_ small
+craft, which had been awaiting the return of late passengers. It was too
+far away for the watchers to identify those aboard it.
+
+Mr. Willing breathed a sigh of relief.
+
+"I guess they are coming at last," he said.
+
+The three watched the approach of the boat eagerly. At last it came
+close enough to make out the occupants. There was not a woman aboard.
+
+Cries of alarm issued from the lips of the three watchers. At the same
+moment there came another blast from the steamer's siren.
+
+"They are not in the boat!" exclaimed Dick. "What shall we do?"
+
+Mr. Willing did not stop to reply. He hurried toward the bridge where
+Captain Anderson stood, ready to give the signal to up-anchor
+immediately the small boat was hoisted aboard.
+
+Mr. Willing, closely followed by Colonel Ashton and Dick, rushed up to
+him.
+
+"Captain!" exclaimed Mr. Willing. "My daughter and the colonel's
+daughter and Mrs. Sebastian are still ashore. They are not in the last
+boat. What is to be done?"
+
+The captain turned the matter over in his mind.
+
+"We should be on our way now," he replied at last. "I am afraid we shall
+have to go without them."
+
+Mr. Willing let out a roar of protest.
+
+"No you don't!" he cried. "You can't go and leave my daughter behind
+like that."
+
+"Well, what would you have me do?" asked the captain.
+
+"Wait!" was the reply. "Wait for them!"
+
+The captain looked at his watch.
+
+"It's five thirty now," he said. "I shall wait until six thirty."
+
+With this the others were forced to be content.
+
+"If they haven't come then, we'll have the captain set us ashore," said
+the colonel.
+
+The passengers from the last boat came over the side, and Mr. Willing
+questioned them eagerly. None had seen any sign of the missing ones.
+
+Dick, gazing over the rail, uttered a cry and pointed across the water.
+
+A boat was putting off from shore and coming toward the steamer.
+
+"I guess they are coming at last," said Colonel Ashton. "I'll read Mabel
+a lecture when she gets here."
+
+As the boat approached closer it became evident that it had but a single
+occupant; and as it drew still nearer, that the occupant was a young
+native.
+
+Captain Anderson hailed him through his megaphone.
+
+"What do you want?" he shouted in Spanish.
+
+"Message for Se�or Willing!" came the reply.
+
+Five minutes later, bowing and scraping, the boy put a message into Mr.
+Willing's hands.
+
+The latter tore it open quickly and his eyes devoured the words in a
+moment. Then he gave a cry of rage.
+
+"What's the matter?" asked Colonel Ashton and Dick in a single voice.
+
+For reply, Mr. Willing read them the contents of the letter--a demand
+for $20,000 if the girls were ever to be seen again.
+
+Mr. Willing and the others rushed again toward the captain on the
+bridge. The captain read the letter gravely.
+
+"I wish I could help you, sir," he said at last. "But it is impossible.
+I must get under way within half an hour.
+
+"Hey! Where you going?" This last to the native boy who had suddenly
+leaped into the water, climbed into his boat and was making off toward
+the shore.
+
+"Get him!" cried the captain to his first officer.
+
+One of the _Yucatan's_ boats put off and gave chase.
+
+But the distance was too great to overtake the fugitive, and it was soon
+apparent that he would make his escape.
+
+"If we had laid hold of him we might have learned something," said
+Captain Anderson. "He knows where the girls are. But it's too late now."
+
+"What can we do?" demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+
+"My advice," said the captain, "is that you stay behind and put the
+matter in the hands of the American consul. He can tell you better what
+to do than I can."
+
+"Where did the message say to leave the money, Willing?" asked Colonel
+Ashton.
+
+Mr. Willing passed him the letter.
+
+"Nine o'clock, southeast corner San Francisco street, Tuesday. Check
+payable to Miguel Martinez will do. Come alone," read the colonel.
+
+"H-m-m, must have lots of confidence in themselves if they can use a
+check."
+
+"Now gentlemen," said Captain Anderson, "the best I can do is to set you
+ashore. I must get under way immediately. I'm sorry, but I have my other
+passengers to think of."
+
+Mr. Willing acknowledged the justice of this.
+
+"Give us ten minutes to get some things together and a boat to set us
+ashore then," he said.
+
+The captain consented, and Dick and the two men hastened to their
+cabins, where they gathered what few belongings they could.
+
+"We'll have the captain dispose of the rest in Frisco," said the
+colonel. "We'll get them when we get there."
+
+This the captain agreed to do, and ten minutes later the three were
+rushing shoreward in the steamer's powerful gasoline launch. Immediately
+they clambered out, the launch put back to the ship.
+
+"Reckon we had better go straight to the consulate, colonel," said Mr.
+Willing.
+
+"Right. But how are we going to find it?"
+
+"I'll try some of these natives. Some of 'em must speak English."
+
+After two unsuccessful attempts, Mr. Willing was successful in his
+quest.
+
+Half an hour later they were in the presence of the American Consul, Mr.
+Edwards, to whom they explained the matter.
+
+"What are they, a band of robbers?" asked Dick.
+
+"I should say they are probably revolutionists," replied the consul.
+"The situation here is peculiar. All factions are at war with each
+other. The latest so-called patriots are followers of Carranza, and I
+happen to know are without funds. If they can't pay their men they will
+lose them. I wouldn't be surprised if they were the ones who had
+captured your daughters."
+
+"Well, what are we going to do about it?" demanded Mr. Willing.
+
+"To tell the truth, there isn't much we can do. Officially, I am
+powerless. The United States hasn't recognized the Carranza faction, and
+for that reason I cannot call on its agents officially. However, I can
+pay a personal call upon Se�or Jorge Hernandez. He may know something."
+
+"Then let's get busy at once," cried Dick.
+
+"I don't suppose you care to pay this ransom, Mr. Willing?" asked the
+consul.
+
+"I'll pay it if I can't get my daughter back any other way. If she is in
+danger I shall pay it anyhow."
+
+"I am sure that she is in no danger of violence," returned the consul.
+"They would not harm an American at this crisis. All they will do is to
+hold her in the hope that eventually you will pay. I would advise
+against paying the ransom at once."
+
+"I shall follow your advice, sir," said Mr. Willing. "You know more
+about these brutes than I do."
+
+"Then we shall call on Hernandez," said the consul. "Come."
+
+He called a cab, and all were soon at the home of Se�or Hernandez, who
+Consul Edwards explained, was one of the foremost of the revolutionists
+in western Mexico.
+
+Se�or Hernandez received them cordially, and expressed surprise at the
+story Mr. Willing related. He even called his wife into consultation.
+
+"If our party is concerned in this matter I am not aware of it," he told
+them. "I shall make inquiries, and if I find it is true, someone shall
+pay dearly."
+
+"Oh, some of your fellows have captured them all right," declared Dick
+angrily. "I wouldn't be surprised if you know all about it."
+
+"Sir!" exclaimed the Mexican, drawing himself up.
+
+"Mr. Stanley!" exclaimed the consul. "You forget yourself!"
+
+Even Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton apologized to the Mexican for Dick's
+outburst.
+
+"Say no more about it, se�ors," was the suave reply. "Youth is always
+hot-headed, you know."
+
+"I didn't say it because I am hot-headed," declared Dick. "I said it
+because I mean it."
+
+Hernandez gazed at the others with an air of wounded dignity.
+
+"If I am to be insulted, I shall not continue the interview longer," he
+said.
+
+"The boy meant no harm, se�or," said the consul. "He is just angry,
+that's all."
+
+"Then, I shall speak more with you if he is excused," was the reply.
+
+The consul looked at Dick.
+
+"You had better go outside," he said. "You have already made trouble
+enough."
+
+Dick was on the point of making an angry retort, but checked himself.
+
+"Very well," he said. "I shall wait for you without."
+
+He left the room, and went out on to the street, where he stood gazing
+first this way and then that while he waited for the appearance of the
+others.
+
+A man swung sharply past him in the darkness. Dick was caught by the
+other's erect carriage, plainly that of a military man.
+
+"Too tall for a Mexican," muttered Dick. "I'll have a look at him."
+
+He followed. Under a dim street light half a block away the man paused
+to light a cigar. The flare of the match lighted up his features.
+
+"Von Blusen!" exclaimed Dick. "I'll bet he is mixed up in this in some
+way. I'll follow him."
+
+Taking pains to avoid being discovered, he set out on Von Blusen's
+trail.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.--FLIGHT.
+
+
+When Mrs. Sebastian entered the room where Shirley and Mabel were held
+prisoners, followed by Captain Von Blusen, she immediately addressed her
+fellow conspirators.
+
+"This," she said, indicating the German officer, "is Captain Von Blusen,
+a German naval officer. He informs me that he is seeking, for his
+government, a naval base on the Pacific. In return for this the German
+government will pay handsomely."
+
+"In that event," replied the Mexican, who it now developed was none
+other than Miguel Martinez, "we may do business. Take a seat, se�or."
+
+Von Blusen did so, and for the first time his eyes fell upon the two
+girls.
+
+"Miss Ashton! Miss Willing!" he exclaimed. "What are you doing here?"
+
+"We are prisoners," replied Shirley bitterly.
+
+"Why?" demanded the captain.
+
+"Held for ransom," replied Shirley.
+
+The captain smiled.
+
+"A good idea," he said turning to the others. "An excellent manner in
+which to raise money, providing you are not caught."
+
+"I was not aware that you were acquainted with these young ladies," said
+Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+"Oh, yes indeed! I know them well," was the reply. "In fact I have a
+little score to settle with them myself. One of our best laid plans was
+foiled because of them."
+
+"So?" queried Martinez. "Will you explain, captain?"
+
+"With pleasure."
+
+The captain did so, and the others listened with amazement to the story
+of the plot to capture the _Yucatan_, and its ultimate outcome.
+
+"They are smart girls," declared Mrs. Sebastian, "but this time I
+believe we have them safe."
+
+"I sincerely hope so," was the reply.
+
+An hour later the girls were left alone.
+
+"What on earth shall we do?" exclaimed Mabel.
+
+"There is nothing we can do," replied Shirley. "We must wait for some
+one to rescue us."
+
+"Do you suppose there is anything in what Captain Von Blusen gave as his
+reason for being here?"
+
+"Of course; but the thing that puzzles me is how he got here so soon.
+You remember how we left him?"
+
+"Yes. But he's a very resourceful man. I wish he were on our side."
+
+"So do I. If he were, we might get away."
+
+It was after seven o'clock when Mrs. Sebastian, Martinez and his wife
+reentered the room.
+
+"We have had no reply from your fathers as yet," said the former.
+"However, we did not really expect one. It is to be hoped for your sakes
+that they leave the money to-night."
+
+"I don't believe they will," replied Shirley quietly.
+
+"So much the worse for you then."
+
+At this moment a native boy came in and announced that the American
+consul was without, accompanied by two strangers, and that he desired
+immediate communication with Se�or Hernandez.
+
+"Well, they are on the trail," said Martinez, with a laugh. "I wonder
+what the consul would think if he knew that Hernandez and Martinez were
+one and the same person. Well, I shall see the consul. You be very quiet
+in here, for you know how sounds carry in this house."
+
+Mrs. Sebastian nodded, and Martinez, alias Hernandez, made his way from
+the room.
+
+He returned an hour later with a smile on his face.
+
+"I've thrown them off the track, all right," he said gleefully. "I was
+startled for a moment, though. There was a little whipper-snapper with
+the two Americanos--Se�or Stanley is his name--and he accused me of
+knowing the whereabouts of the prisoners. I denied it, and Consul
+Edwards rebuked him and sent him from the room."
+
+At this moment there came footsteps running rapidly down the hall, and a
+moment later Captain Von Blusen burst in excitedly.
+
+"Quick!" he cried. "We must get away from here."
+
+"Here! here!" said Hernandez calmly. "What is the matter? Give an
+account of yourself."
+
+"I was walking along the street," said Von Blusen, "when I came across
+one of the Americans from aboard the _Yucatan_."
+
+"Who?" demanded Mrs. Sebastian anxiously.
+
+"Young Stanley," cried the captain.
+
+"Stanley?" repeated the others.
+
+"Yes. I heard someone following me, and I waited for him to come up.
+When I saw who it was I hit him with my fist and knocked him down. He
+was up in a moment, though, and pitched into me. We had quite a tussle,
+but I finally managed to get away and come here to warn you."
+
+"And were you followed?"
+
+"I don't know."
+
+"The Kaiser must be proud of you," sneered Hernandez. "If you have
+botched his plans as you have ours, he would have you shot. Come," he
+turned to the two women, "the game is up. We shall have to fly. If the
+Americano has followed this man here, my connection must soon be
+discovered. Consul Edwards will suspect. We must fly!"
+
+"Where?" exclaimed Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+"Mazatlan. We have just time to catch the night train. Hurry!"
+
+The two women turned and dashed from the room and Hernandez turned to
+the girls.
+
+"Put on your hats," he said gruffly.
+
+The girls obeyed without a word, for they could see the man was very
+angry.
+
+Then he turned to Captain Von Blusen.
+
+"As for you," he said, "you keep out of my sight in the future. Approach
+me again and I will have you shot."
+
+"But--" began the captain.
+
+Hernandez produced a revolver which he levelled at the German.
+
+"I guess I had better do it now," he declared. "It will save trouble."
+
+His finger tightened on the trigger.
+
+But before he could fire, Shirley sprang forward with a cry and seized
+the arm that held the revolver.
+
+Hernandez whirled on her angrily, but as he did so, Captain Von Blusen
+sprang forward and struck the man a heavy blow on the head with his
+fist. Hernandez toppled over.
+
+Captain Von Blusen turned to the girls.
+
+"I can do you no good here," he said hurriedly. "I'll tell your friends
+where you are being taken and we shall save you."
+
+He darted from the room and disappeared.
+
+Shirley and Mabel made as though to follow him, but before they reached
+the door, the two women reappeared. Mrs. Sebastian took in the situation
+with a quick glance and bent over Hernandez, who was now stirring
+feebly. Directly he sat up and his gaze roved about the room.
+
+"Where did he go?" he cried.
+
+"Who?" asked his wife.
+
+"The German! The man who knocked me down."
+
+"He's gone," said Mrs. Sebastian. "Come, Hernandez, we have no time to
+lose."
+
+Hernandez staggered to his feet, and his gaze rested on Shirley. He took
+a threatening step forward.
+
+"You--" he began.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian threw herself between them.
+
+"There will be no harm done these girls while I am here," she said
+quietly. "Please remember that."
+
+As Hernandez still seemed on the point of trying to get at Shirley, the
+woman suddenly produced a revolver, which she levelled directly at him.
+
+"Stand back!" she cried. "Haven't you any sense? Don't you know what
+would happen should harm befall either of these girls?"
+
+"She is right," said the man's wife. "Come, let us go."
+
+Hernandez muttered to himself, but he turned away.
+
+In response to his call the native boy again appeared and announced that
+a closed cab was at the door.
+
+Hernandez led the way, and Mrs. Sebastian motioned for the girls to
+follow him. The two women brought up the rear.
+
+Outside all climbed into the cab and were soon being driven away.
+
+Neither girl uttered a word as the cab bumped along the uneven street,
+but each was badly frightened. For half an hour the cab continued its
+way and then it came to a stop.
+
+"Not a word!" ordered Hernandez of the two girls, as he prepared to
+alight.
+
+The girls had sense enough to obey this injunction and went into the
+little station, dimly lighted, and boarded the waiting train without so
+much as speaking to each other.
+
+As Shirley glanced back over her shoulder while climbing up the steps,
+she caught sight of a familiar figure lurking in the shadows. She could
+not be certain, but she felt positive that the man was Captain Von
+Blusen.
+
+Captors and captives took seats at the rear end of the last car, where
+they sat in silence until the train began to move. Then, for the first
+time, did Hernandez breath in relief.
+
+"Safe enough now," he declared.
+
+"But they may telegraph ahead and have us detained," said his wife.
+
+"No one knows we have come this way save Captain Von Blusen," was the
+reply, "and it will not be to his interests to interfere with us."
+
+Shirley and Mabel now found themselves able to converse without being
+overheard by the others.
+
+"I saw Captain Von Blusen in the station as we climbed aboard," said
+Shirley.
+
+"Do you think he will help us?" asked Mabel.
+
+"I don't know, but some way I feel that he will. He seemed sincere
+enough when he spoke just before he left."
+
+"My goodness gracious! I hope something turns up soon!" exclaimed Mabel.
+"Our Dads must be worried to death."
+
+"Well, if Dick is on the trail, I am sure we shall be rescued," declared
+Shirley.
+
+"You have lots of confidence in Dick, haven't you?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Of course. Why shouldn't I have?"
+
+"Well, I hope we are rescued soon."
+
+"Some way, I believe we shall be," declared Shirley.
+
+The train sped on through the darkness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.--ON THE TRAIL.
+
+
+It will now be necessary to go back a little ways.
+
+When Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing, and U. S. Consul Edwards left the home
+of Hernandez, alias Martinez, following their brief interview, they
+looked about for Dick who had said he would wait for them on the
+outside; but having set forth on the trail of Captain Blusen, Dick, of
+course, was not in sight.
+
+"Guess the young man has gone back to the consulate in a huff," said the
+consul with a slight smile.
+
+"He shouldn't have spoken as he did," declared Mr. Willing.
+
+"Is there any chance that he was right in his conjectures?" asked
+Colonel Ashton slowly.
+
+"Hardly," replied the consul dryly. "Hernandez is a queer man, but he
+would hardly do a thing like that."
+
+"Well, I don't know," replied the colonel. "I have found that you never
+go far wrong when you listen to what a newspaper reporter says. They
+seem to smell out these things."
+
+"He's on the wrong scent now," declared Edwards.
+
+At the consulate they could find no trace of Dick.
+
+"What can have happened?" demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+
+"Oh, he'll turn up," declared the consul. "We'll wait."
+
+They sat down to await the return of Dick, meanwhile talking over what
+was best to be done.
+
+Meantime, Dick, on the trail of Captain Von Blusen, was having troubles
+of his own. He had approached too close behind the German, and the
+latter had realized he was being followed.
+
+Rounding a corner, the German officer stopped abruptly. As Dick swung
+around the corner he recognized him instantly and struck out with his
+fist. The blow caught Dick on the side of the head and he went down.
+
+He was up in a moment, however, and grappled with his opponent. In this
+sort of fighting the German was no match for Dick, but he finally
+succeeded in breaking the latter's hold, and took to his heels.
+
+Dick ran after him.
+
+Unconsciously the German took the direction from which he had just come,
+and not stopping to think that he might be followed, had thus betrayed
+the rendezvous. He ran straight to Hernandez' home, as we already know,
+and Dick recognized it.
+
+Captain Von Blusen entered by the back door, and there Dick stopped. He
+had seen enough to tell him just how the situation stood, and realizing
+that he could accomplish little himself and that haste therefore was
+essential, he hurried back to the consulate.
+
+"Where have you been?" cried Mr. Willing jumping to his feet as Dick
+burst into the room.
+
+"I've been trailing Von Blusen, sir."
+
+"Von Blusen!"
+
+"Yes, sir, and I have learned enough to warrant my belief that Hernandez
+is concerned in the disappearance of Shirley and Mabel."
+
+In a few words he related what had occurred.
+
+Consul Edwards drummed upon the table with his fingers for several
+minutes. Then he rose to his feet.
+
+"You must be right," he said, "although it seems impossible. Are you
+armed?"
+
+The others shook their heads. The consul left the room and returned a
+moment later with a revolver for each.
+
+"We may not need them, but it's best to be prepared," he said grimly.
+
+"What are you going to do?" asked Colonel Ashton.
+
+"We shall go back and call on Hernandez. In my official capacity, of
+course, I could not do this, but I'm willing to take a chance. We'll
+search the house from top to bottom."
+
+They did not enter the home of Hernandez by the manner in which they had
+gone before. Dick led the way to the place he had seen Captain Von
+Blusen enter, and tried the door.
+
+To his surprise it opened easily, and Dick, with weapon ready, led the
+way in. From first one room to the other they went, Consul Edwards
+lighting the way with a pocket searchlight.
+
+Suddenly Dick stooped and picked up something. The consul turned the
+light on it. It was a small handkerchief. Dick looked it over for a mark
+of identification. In the corner he saw two initials, "S. W."
+
+He passed it to Mr. Willing.
+
+"Shirley's!" exclaimed the latter, after a glance at it.
+
+"We are on the right track," declared the consul.
+
+They continued the search of the house, but not a soul could they find.
+From top to bottom and back again they went, but the result, of course,
+was the same.
+
+At last they were forced to give it up.
+
+"I have it!" exclaimed Dick suddenly. "Von Blusen warned them and they
+have taken the girls some place else."
+
+"That's it, of course," said the consul. "Well there is nothing more we
+can do to-night, but I'll promise to have the town raked with a
+fine-tooth comb the first thing in the morning. If they are here, we
+shall find them before noon."
+
+"But where can they be to-night?" demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+
+The consul shrugged his shoulders.
+
+"_Quien sabe?_ as the natives say," he replied. "However, you may make
+sure they are in no danger."
+
+With this the others were forced to be content, and Edwards led the way
+back to the consulate. Here he suggested cigars before all should turn
+in for the night, and they sat down to talk over the situation.
+
+"I'll have every house in town searched from top to bottom in the
+morning," said the consul. "They must be here, so we shall of course
+find them."
+
+"I wish there was something we could do to-night," declared Dick. "This
+inaction makes me restless."
+
+"It makes me that way too, young man," declared Mr. Willing, "but the
+consul undoubtedly knows best. We shall leave it to him."
+
+Consul Edwards looked at Dick inquisitively.
+
+"What I would like to have you tell me," he said, "is why you suspected
+Hernandez in the first place?"
+
+"I don't know exactly," replied Dick slowly. "But he is a shifty-eyed
+old villain, and can't look at you. I have learned that a man like that
+is not to be trusted. I was morally certain he was lying. I don't know
+why, but I just seemed to feel it."
+
+"Well, you figured it out and no mistake. I wouldn't be surprised now to
+learn that Hernandez and Martinez are one and the same person."
+
+"They are!" came a voice from one of the open windows.
+
+The four within the room started suddenly to their feet, and the consul
+advanced.
+
+"Who and what are you?" he called, with his hand resting on his
+revolver. "Come out and show yourself."
+
+There was a sound of someone climbing in the window, and a moment later
+a man stood before them. Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and Dick leaped to
+their feet with cries of amazement.
+
+The newcomer was Captain Von Blusen.
+
+Dick took a quick stride forward, and his hand grasped the young German
+by the collar of his coat.
+
+"I'll guarantee you won't get away this time," he said grimly.
+
+"Who are you and what do you want here?" demanded the consul, who had
+never seen the officer before.
+
+"This," said Dick to the consul, "is the man who gave the warning in
+time to allow the girls to be taken to some other hiding place."
+
+"Is that true, sir?" demanded the consul, taking a step forward.
+
+Von Blusen nodded.
+
+"It is," he replied briefly.
+
+"Then you shall answer to me for your part in this outrage," declared
+Mr. Willing, advancing with great anger.
+
+"And to me," declared Colonel Ashton, also advancing.
+
+Captain Von Blusen raised a hand.
+
+"One moment, gentlemen," he said calmly.
+
+"Give the man a chance to speak," said the consul. "He shall not get
+away, and I'll give you my word he'll do no further mischief. What have
+you to say for yourself?"
+
+"Well, I can tell you where the two young ladies have been taken."
+
+"You can?" exclaimed the colonel eagerly. "Where?"
+
+"Mazatlan!"
+
+"Mazatlan? Where is Mazatlan?" demanded the consul.
+
+"As to that I cannot say. They left on the train not half an hour ago."
+
+"Are you sure?"
+
+"Positive. I followed to make certain, that I might tell you."
+
+"And why are you so interested in telling us?" asked Dick skeptically.
+
+"For one reason, because Miss Willing saved my life no longer than an
+hour ago," was the calm reply.
+
+"It is true," he continued, seeing that the others eyed him in
+amazement.
+
+He then went into details of the scene that had occurred following his
+return to Hernandez after his fight with Dick in the street.
+
+"But how are we going to find them in Mazatlan?" exclaimed Colonel
+Ashton.
+
+"You might wire ahead and have them taken from the train," suggested
+Dick.
+
+"No, I have a better plan than that," declared the consul.
+
+"What is it?" asked the others eagerly.
+
+"We'll kill two birds with one stone. I'll wire the American consular
+agent there to have them shadowed when they leave the train. Then we'll
+not only be able to rescue the young ladies, but the Mexican authorities
+will nab the plotters."
+
+"An excellent plan," declared Colonel Ashton. "Now how shall we get
+there?"
+
+"There is not another train till morning," said the consul, "but," and a
+twinkle came into his eyes, "if you have the price, I can guarantee to
+have a special engine and one car ready to go within the hour, and I can
+promise a clear track ahead."
+
+"Let's have it no matter what the cost!" roared Mr. Willing. "I want my
+girl back as soon as I can get her!"
+
+"And so do I," shouted Colonel Ashton.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.--IN MAZATLAN.
+
+
+It was a long tedious journey to Mazatlan, and it was after noon of the
+following day when Shirley and Mabel followed their captors from the
+train upon which they had spent the night and morning.
+
+"I'm glad to get off that train, I don't care what happens," said Mabel
+as the five made their way through the dingy-looking station.
+
+"I should say so," agreed Shirley. "I'm so sleepy I could fall right
+over here."
+
+"I managed to get a few winks during the night," returned Mabel. "I
+curled up in the seat."
+
+"I couldn't sleep that way. I tried, but it was no use."
+
+They had now reached the street side of the station, and here Hernandez
+signalled a passing cab. Into this the girls were thrust and then the
+two women and the man climbed in. Hernandez gave an address to the
+driver, and the cab whirled away.
+
+None of the occupants saw a man, who had been loitering about the
+station when the train pulled in, hail a second cab and come after them.
+This was the man who had been delegated to shadow them upon the request,
+by wire, of Consul Edwards at Acapulco.
+
+To Shirley and Mabel it seemed that they rode through the streets of the
+city for hours before the cab stopped its bumping and drew up before a
+typical Mexican native house in the outskirts of the town. Hernandez and
+the two women climbed out, and the girls followed them into the house.
+
+The man in the pursuing cab ordered his driver to halt while still some
+distance away. Then he dismissed the driver and approached the house
+afoot. He saw the five figures enter the dwelling and approached no
+nearer, but took a stand some distance away, where from time to time, he
+looked at his watch.
+
+An hour passed, then two, and at length the man turned and walked away.
+
+Inside the house Shirley and Mabel had been shown to a back room, the
+windows of which they saw were heavily barred. Mrs. Sebastian
+accompanied them.
+
+"Now girls," she said, "if you are quiet and make no trouble, I am sure
+that you will be freed before long."
+
+"You mean we won't have to wait for ransom?" asked Shirley eagerly.
+
+"No, I don't mean that. But I am sure the money will be paid over within
+a day or two."
+
+"And we shall have to stay here all that time?"
+
+"Yes. I wish I could interest you in our cause. You could do lots for us
+if you chose."
+
+"Thanks, but I don't care to listen to the troubles of criminals,"
+declared Shirley.
+
+The woman's face turned red.
+
+"You do us an injustice," she replied. "What I have done has been for my
+country."
+
+"I thought you were a Spaniard," interrupted Mabel.
+
+"I am, on my mother's side," was the reply. "My father was a Mexican."
+
+"Well, I wouldn't be mixed up in any such business," declared Mabel. "I
+think you should be punished for the manner in which you got us in your
+power."
+
+"But it was for my country. Surely you can understand that?"
+
+"No, I can't understand it," declared Shirley. "It's robbery that you
+are attempting."
+
+The woman shrugged her shoulders.
+
+"There is no use talking to you," she said.
+
+She went out of the room, locking the door behind her.
+
+"Well, here we are," said Mabel, with a wry look at her chum. "Now, what
+are we going to do?"
+
+"I wish we could escape," declared Shirley. "I'll tell you what. The
+next time we hear any one coming, we'll stand behind the door, and as
+soon as they come in we'll slip out and run. If we can reach the street
+some one may help us."
+
+"There will be no harm trying," Mabel agreed. "They won't hurt us, I am
+sure."
+
+It was several hours later before they had the opportunity of putting
+their plan to the test.
+
+"Quick! Here comes some one!" whispered Shirley.
+
+She took her stand behind the door and Mabel joined her there. A key
+turned in the lock, and the door swung slowly inward. The girls were out
+of sight behind the door.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian, being unable to see them, advanced into the room with a
+startled exclamation, and looked hurriedly about. Seizing a moment when
+the woman was looking the other way, Shirley, closely followed by Mabel,
+dashed from her place of concealment and out the door.
+
+Mabel was just disappearing through the door when Mrs. Sebastian wheeled
+suddenly about and caught sight of her. The woman sprang forward with a
+cry, but Mabel, in passing, had seized the knob of the door and pulled
+it to after her.
+
+It was the work of an instant to turn the key in the lock, and Mrs.
+Sebastian was safe in the girls' recent prison.
+
+"Now what?" said Shirley when Mabel had come up to her.
+
+From the room they had just quitted a series of blows were rained on the
+door, and Mrs. Sebastian's voice could be heard calling for help.
+
+"No one knows she's in there so if the disturbance is heard they'll
+think it is us," declared Mabel. "If we are silent and careful now, we
+may be able to get out."
+
+Shirley advanced cautiously and peered into the next room. Then she
+returned to Mabel.
+
+"No getting out that way," she whispered.
+
+Mabel advanced and looked into the room beyond. In it sat Hernandez and
+his wife.
+
+Shirley nodded her head.
+
+"No, we can't get out there," she agreed.
+
+The girls looked about for some other means of escape.
+
+They now stood in what appeared to be a long and narrow hall, and at
+Shirley's whispered suggestion they went back along it. Far to the rear
+they could see a faint beam of light and Shirley's heart beat faster
+with renewed hope.
+
+At last they came to a high window, through which the light streamed. It
+was out of reach of the girls, but Shirley found a chair which she
+dragged forth and mounted. Her shoulders now were on a level with the
+window.
+
+The girl uttered an exclamation of satisfaction.
+
+"What is it, Shirley?" asked Mabel breathlessly.
+
+"We can get out here," was the reply, "the window is not barred."
+
+"Hurry then," cried Mabel anxiously. "I'll come right after you."
+
+Shirley wasted no further words. She drew herself to the sill, and
+looked down. Then she shuddered slightly. It was a long drop, fully
+twenty feet.
+
+But Shirley did not hesitate, for she realized that the jump must be
+taken. She lowered herself until she clung to the window with her hands,
+then released her hold and dropped.
+
+She fell in a sprawling heap, and she felt a sharp pain in her ankle. In
+spite of this, she was up in an instant, however, and turned her eyes to
+the window, where Mabel's head had just appeared.
+
+The latter drew herself to the window sill, and then glanced down at the
+ground.
+
+"I can't do it, Shirley," she exclaimed.
+
+"Of course you can," called her chum. "Lower yourself as far as you can
+and then drop."
+
+Mabel maneuvered about the window trying to get into such a position
+that she could lower herself. But her fright was such that she was
+afraid to loose her hold long enough to change her position. She looked
+down at Shirley helplessly.
+
+"I tell you I can't," she declared.
+
+"But you must, Mabel," replied Shirley anxiously. "Hurry!"
+
+Again Mabel moved about, but the result was the same.
+
+"Mabel! Jump!" cried Shirley.
+
+Mabel now began to cry, as she moved about a little on her perch.
+
+"I--I--can't, Sh-Shirley," she said. "I am afraid!"
+
+"My goodness!" muttered Shirley to herself. "What shall I do? I can't
+climb back up there after her."
+
+She considered the matter for several moments, the while Mabel sat in
+the window and sobbed. Then Shirley reached a decision, and acted
+immediately.
+
+"Quick, Mabel! Here comes Hernandez!" cried Shirley.
+
+Mabel's hesitancy and fright vanished on the instant. Quickly she
+lowered herself by her hands and dropped to the ground. She fell in a
+heap, but was unhurt and was up again in a moment.
+
+"Where is he?" she asked.
+
+Shirley was forced to laugh.
+
+"I just said that to get you down," she returned. "If I hadn't you would
+have stayed up there all day."
+
+Mabel's tension also relaxed, and the girls moved slowly away from the
+house, Shirley finding that her ankle had stopped hurting and was not
+even swollen.
+
+"Where shall we go?" asked Mabel.
+
+"American consulate, I reckon," replied the girl, "if we can find it."
+
+"We must find it," said Mabel firmly.
+
+"Yes but how. Neither of us can speak Spanish."
+
+"Then we must find a Mexican who speaks English. We should have no
+trouble doing that."
+
+The girls had been walking along rapidly, for they wished to put as much
+space as possible between them and their recent prison; but at the same
+time they did not run for they did not wish to attract attention by the
+appearance of undue haste.
+
+Suddenly there came a cry from behind. Unconsciously both girls stopped
+in their tracks and looked back over their shoulders. But one look was
+enough.
+
+"Run!"
+
+"Run!" cried Shirley in the same breath.
+
+Dashing after them as fast as his stout body would permit, was
+Hernandez.
+
+Shirley and Mabel wasted no time in deciding what was best to be done.
+
+Keeping as close to each other as possible, they took to their heels and
+dashed madly along the street.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.--DICK IN PERIL.
+
+
+The special train bearing Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton, Dick and Captain
+Von Blusen arrived in Mazatlan only two hours after that on which
+Shirley and Mabel had reached the city. The four went at once to the
+American consulate.
+
+Consul Edwards had been unable to accompany them, but after sending the
+telegram requesting that the fugitives be shadowed, he had written a
+note to Consul Harrington at Mazatlan and this he had given to Mr.
+Willing as a means of introduction.
+
+Mr. Willing sent in the letter to the consul, and the latter received
+them immediately.
+
+"I have a man shadowing the fugitives," said the consul. "I told him to
+report here the minute he was sure he had run his quarry to earth."
+
+"Is there no danger they will elude him?" asked Dick anxiously.
+
+"Not much," was the smiling reply. "Fisher was formerly a newspaperman
+and has had considerable experience along that line."
+
+And the consul was right. A short time later Fisher appeared.
+
+"Have you found their refuge?" was Colonel Ashton's first question after
+the introductions had been made.
+
+"I followed a man, two women and two girls to a native house in the
+eastern extremity of the city," was the reply. "I have no doubt they are
+the right ones."
+
+"Good," returned the consul. "Now the first thing to do is to enlist the
+support of General Seauterey, the commandant of the city. Without him we
+can do practically nothing. But he will be glad to capture Hernandez."
+
+The consul took his departure, announcing that he would return as soon
+as possible.
+
+Dick left the room announcing that he would take a little stroll
+outside. Mr. Willing enjoined him to be back by the time the consul
+returned.
+
+Dick, thinking deeply, was unconscious of the passing of time and the
+distance which he had walked. At last he roused himself from his reverie
+and looked at his watch.
+
+"Great Scott!" he exclaimed. "I have been gone more than an hour. I had
+better hurry back."
+
+He gazed about him, and saw that he was in an evil-looking part of the
+town. He swung about on his heel and set out in the direction from which
+he had come.
+
+As he passed a narrow street, even dirtier-looking than the rest, an arm
+suddenly shot out and dealt him a blow across the head, knocking him to
+the ground.
+
+Dick was stunned by the force of the blow, but he was by no means
+deprived of his coolness nor resourcefulness. He rolled over quickly
+several times, seeking to put as much distance as possible between
+himself and his unseen opponent, and then scrambled quickly to his feet.
+
+Two men bore down on him. Short wiry Mexicans they were, and one held a
+knife in his hand. Dick took one look at them, then turned and ran.
+
+But the force of the blow he had just received made it impossible for
+him to run far, and soon he turned, and with his back to the wall of a
+house, faced his adversaries.
+
+Just out of striking distance the latter halted, and spoke to him in
+Spanish. Dick shook his hand, indicating that he did not understand.
+
+"Speak English," he said.
+
+The men conversed together in low tones, then one of them spoke a single
+English word to Dick:
+
+"Money!"
+
+"Oh, I see," said Dick, "you want my money, eh? Well, you won't get it.
+I need it myself."
+
+He shook his head at the men, and they gesticulated angrily, one of them
+raising his knife. Then, with a cry, they sprang forward.
+
+Dick was in a serious predicament and he realized it. But he determined
+to do his best. As the men closed on him, Dick struck out. One of the
+men staggered back.
+
+At that moment there came the sound of pattering feet down the street.
+The men drew back. A second later two running figures came into sight,
+and Dick cried out in amazement.
+
+The figures were Shirley and Mabel, and even as Dick recognized them a
+third form came into view, and this Dick immediately recognized as that
+of Hernandez.
+
+"Shirley! Mabel!" called Dick.
+
+The girls half halted in their stride, and then, with glad cries, came
+toward him.
+
+The men who had attacked Dick, seeing the approach of another man,
+turned and made their way to the next corner, where they stood to watch
+developments.
+
+Hernandez, perceiving that he had but one to contend with, and this a
+young man, advanced confidently. Shirley and Mabel had now reached
+Dick's side, and the three faced the Mexican.
+
+Without a word Hernandez's hand went to his pocket, but Dick was too
+quick for him.
+
+"No you don't," he cried, and sprang forward.
+
+His right fist shot out with stunning force, and the Mexican rolled on
+the ground, his revolver, which he had succeeded in drawing, being
+hurled from his hand.
+
+Dick quickly took each girl by the arm and urged them along.
+
+"Hurry!" he cried.
+
+What he feared came to pass.
+
+Hernandez got quickly to his feet, and perceiving the men who had so
+recently attacked Dick, he beckoned them to him.
+
+As the men came up, he waved his arm at the figures of the two girls and
+the young man.
+
+"Catch them!" he shouted. "Reward!"
+
+The men needed no further urging, but dashed after the three. Dick urged
+the girls along as swiftly as they could go, casting occasional glances
+over his shoulder. He hoped against hope that assistance would come from
+some quarter.
+
+But not a sign of a native officer did he see. The few people they
+passed looked at them curiously, and must have realized the aspect of
+things by the noise of the pursuers, but none offered to lend a helping
+hand.
+
+Several times Dick was on the point of turning back to face the
+pursuers, but he determined only to do this as a last resort to give the
+girls time to get away while he held the others back.
+
+He led the girls sharply around a corner and they ran as fast as they
+could along the dirty street. But the pursuers were gaining, as Dick
+perceived by a quick glance over his shoulder. Then Dick made his
+decision.
+
+As he rounded the next corner he whispered to the girls:
+
+"Run hard!"
+
+He released their arms and stopped, just out of sight from the pursuers.
+
+A moment later they came into view, and Dick was upon them in an
+instant, striking right and left as swiftly as he could. Just as it
+seemed there was a chance of his overcoming his two foes, a third figure
+joined in the fray.
+
+This was Hernandez himself, and he turned the balance in the favor of
+Dick's enemies.
+
+Shirley and Mabel had gone on a few feet when Dick had turned back, for
+they had not known what he was about to do. They missed him in a moment,
+however, and stopped to see what had become of him.
+
+They saw the struggling knot of men, and Shirley cried:
+
+"Oh! Dick will be hurt! What shall we do?"
+
+"What can we do?" demanded Mabel. "Dick said to run. I guess we had
+better run."
+
+"And leave him there like that? I should say not."
+
+"But what can we do?" asked Mabel, in consternation.
+
+"I don't know. But I am not going to run away."
+
+And Shirley resolutely made her way back toward the fighters. Mabel
+followed.
+
+But aid came for Dick even as it had for his first two enemies. And the
+aid was from an unexpected source.
+
+"Hello!" exclaimed a voice in English. "What's going on here?"
+
+"Help!" cried Dick in English.
+
+"An American, eh," said the voice, "and three greasers attacking him
+with knives. Here goes."
+
+Dick felt his enemies give way before him, all but one, and this one he
+sent to the ground with a hard blow to the face. Then he gazed about.
+Nearby stood Shirley and Mabel, and upon the ground were the other two
+Mexicans. Dick looked at the man who had come to his rescue, and gave a
+cry of astonishment.
+
+"Captain Anderson!"
+
+The commander of the _Yucatan_ was no less surprised. He surveyed Dick
+and the two girls critically.
+
+"How in the name of all that's wonderful did you all get together again
+and how did you beat me here?" demanded the captain.
+
+Dick explained his arrival in a few words, and then Shirley took up the
+story.
+
+"But we had no idea of the _Yucatan_ was here," said Dick.
+
+"I landed not fifteen minutes ago," replied the captain. "Of course a
+train runs faster than a boat, which is the reason you are here ahead of
+me. Now I guess you had better return aboard with me."
+
+"We'll go to the consulate first," declared Dick. "The others are
+probably still there."
+
+"Good idea," replied the captain. "I was on my way there now."
+
+He led the way, and the others followed.
+
+But when they reached there they learned, much to the disappointment of
+both girls, that neither the consul nor any of the others were about.
+
+"Consul Harrington and his visitors accompanied General Seauterey and a
+squad of soldiers," a clerk explained. "They left not fifteen minutes
+ago."
+
+"Too bad," declared Captain Anderson. He turned to the girls. "Will you
+remain here or come aboard?" he asked.
+
+"We'll go aboard, thanks," replied Shirley. "I want to get out of this
+city and this country. We can leave word with the clerk here, and
+Mabel's father and mine will come aboard as soon as they return."
+
+"Right you are," agreed Captain Anderson. He addressed the clerk. "When
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton return with the consul," he said, "you
+tell them to come aboard the _Yucatan_ immediately. I have important
+news for them."
+
+"Very well, sir," said the clerk.
+
+"Why didn't you tell him to tell Dad we had been rescued?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Why," replied the captain with a smile, "I was saving that for a little
+surprise."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.--ALL ABOARD AGAIN.
+
+
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton, to go back to the time that Dick left
+them after the departure of Consul Harrington, were greatly alarmed when
+the boy failed to return immediately. Half an hour after his departure
+Consul Harrington returned with General Seauterey and half a dozen
+troopers.
+
+The general announced that he was not only willing but eager to round up
+Hernandez, who, he said, was the real head of the revolution in Western
+Mexico. Mr. Willing expressed his alarm over Dick's safety, and they
+waited ten minutes.
+
+"I'll have my clerk tell him to wait when he comes in," said the consul.
+"There is no use delaying longer."
+
+To this Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton agreed.
+
+"Dick is always turning up missing," declared the colonel.
+
+"But he always turns up safe again," replied Mr. Willing.
+
+"Oh, he'll be back all right," said the consul. "He can hardly have
+fallen into any danger this time."
+
+Fisher, the man who had trailed the conspirators to their lair, now
+summoned two automobiles, and the party climbed in. The trip to the
+house where the girls had been confined was made in record time, and a
+short distance away a halt was called.
+
+General Seauterey and his men now took the lead, and surrounded the
+house. The general himself approached the door and knocked on it loudly.
+There was no response, but a second sharp knock brought a voice from
+behind the door. It was a woman's voice and it said:
+
+"What is wanted?"
+
+"Open the door!" demanded the general.
+
+"Who are you?"
+
+"General Seauterey."
+
+There was an exclamation of dismay from within, and the sound of
+retreating footsteps. Again the general pounded on the door. There was
+no response and he called to two of his men.
+
+"Break down the door," he instructed them.
+
+The heavy rifle butts of the soldiers crashed against the wood,
+shattering it. Several hard kicks and it was in splinters. With drawn
+revolver General Seauterey led the way.
+
+Two soldiers, Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Captain Von Blusen
+followed him. The others remained on guard without to prevent the escape
+of the fugitives.
+
+Through the house strode the general, throwing wide the doors of the
+various rooms. And at last he brought up against another locked door.
+This was burst in as had been the first, and the general advanced first.
+
+Came a shot from the room, and the general staggered back, then moved
+forward again. At the far side of the room were two figures, the general
+could just make out in the darkness.
+
+"Hands up!" he cried.
+
+"Don't shoot!" came in a woman's voice. "We surrender!"
+
+"Come forward then," said the general.
+
+Two women, who proved to be Mrs. Hernandez and Mrs. Sebastian, advanced
+shrinking.
+
+"Where is Hernandez?" demanded the general.
+
+"He is not here," was the reply. "We expect him back any moment."
+
+"Where is he?"
+
+"He went after the two prisoners, who escaped."
+
+"Your prisoners have escaped?" demanded the general.
+
+"Yes."
+
+The general turned to one of his men.
+
+"Call the others within," he ordered.
+
+The other four troopers came into the house, followed by the Americans
+and the German captain. Mr. Willing was the first to see Mrs. Sebastian,
+and he sprang toward her.
+
+"What have you done with my daughter, madam?" he demanded.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian shrank back from him.
+
+Colonel Ashton also stepped forward and angrily demanded that Mabel be
+produced at once. Then Mrs. Sebastian spoke.
+
+"They have escaped!" she declared.
+
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were skeptical. Mrs. Sebastian saw that
+they did not believe her.
+
+"It is true," she declared. "They locked me in a room and jumped from a
+window. Hernandez has gone after them."
+
+"We'll wait here for Hernandez to return," decided General Seauterey.
+"We'll get him when he comes back, and if he has the prisoners it will
+save us further search."
+
+None doubted that this was the best plan, and so all sat down to wait,
+General Seauterey meanwhile keeping watch at the door himself.
+
+Suddenly he sprang to his feet.
+
+"Here he comes--alone!" he cried.
+
+He motioned his men to the door.
+
+"He'll run when he sees the broken door," he said. "I'll command him to
+halt. If he doesn't obey, fire."
+
+It was as the general had predicted. When Hernandez saw the broken door,
+he stopped in surprise. Then he turned and would have run. General
+Seauterey stepped forward and shouted:
+
+"Halt!"
+
+Hernandez paid no heed.
+
+"Fire!" cried the general.
+
+Two puffs of smoke and two sharp cracks. Hernandez fell to the ground,
+but sat up in a moment and seized his left foot in his hand, at the same
+time moaning with pain.
+
+"Good work, men!" cried the general. "Go and bring him here!"
+
+Two of the soldiers obeyed, and Hernandez was soon in the house.
+
+"Where are the two prisoners?" demanded the general.
+
+Hernandez looked at him and sneered.
+
+"Find out," he said.
+
+"So I will," returned the general.
+
+He motioned to his men.
+
+"Bind the prisoners and put them in the car outside," he ordered.
+
+Then he led the way from the house.
+
+"I shall have this man questioned more fully," he said to the consul,
+"and I shall send you a message to the consulate within an hour. He will
+not fail to tell what he knows of the prisoners."
+
+With this Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were forced to be content,
+although the anxiety of each was growing at every minute.
+
+The Mexicans and their prisoners climbed into one of the automobiles,
+and the Americans and Captain von Blusen into the other. They were
+whirled back to the consulate.
+
+The clerk addressed Mr. Willing.
+
+"Captain Anderson, of the Steamship _Yucatan_, was here a few moments
+ago, sir," he said. "He desires your presence aboard immediately. He
+says he has important news for you."
+
+"Regarding my daughter?" asked Mr. Willing eagerly.
+
+"He didn't say, sir," replied the clerk.
+
+"Come, Ashton," cried Mr. Willing excitedly. "Perhaps Captain Anderson
+has learned something."
+
+"I shall accompany you," said Captain von Blusen.
+
+The others offered no objection and the three hurried away together, Mr.
+Willing telling Consul Harrington that they would let him know the
+result of their trip.
+
+At the water front they were fortunate enough to find an unengaged
+boatman, who offered to put them aboard the _Yucatan_ for a fair price.
+
+"Never mind the price," said Mr. Willing. "Hurry and get us there."
+
+The boatman wasted no time, and soon they were heading for the big
+steamship as fast as they could go.
+
+Dusk was just falling as they went swiftly over the water, and none
+could but think what a pretty spectacle the great ship made with her
+thousands of electric lights shining brightly.
+
+"And that's the ship you attempted to get away with, Captain Von
+Blusen," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"Yes, and would have gotten away with but for Miss Ashton," replied the
+captain. "However, I bear no ill will. It is the fortune of war."
+
+"And we bear you no ill will, captain," declared Colonel Ashton. "It is
+true that you have made us considerable trouble, but I appreciate your
+position in the matter. I know that you were acting under orders."
+
+"Thank you," replied the captain.
+
+"I can say the same, sir," declared Mr. Willing, "Here, at the last, you
+have been of service to us, and in view of that, things that have gone
+before must be overlooked."
+
+"Thank you, sir."
+
+The little boat now scraped alongside the _Yucatan_. Several moments
+later the three were aboard the big steamship and rushing toward Captain
+Anderson's quarters.
+
+Their arrival had been reported before they came aboard, and so they
+found Captain Anderson alone.
+
+"Glad to see you gentlemen again," said the captain, shaking hands with
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton. He looked Captain Von Blusen over
+coldly. "I shall talk to you later," he added.
+
+Captain Von Blusen bowed.
+
+"Oh, he is all right, captain," said Mr. Willing. "He has been of great
+aid to us in searching for our daughters."
+
+"So?" Captain Anderson's stern expression relaxed a trifle. "I am glad
+to hear it."
+
+He held out his hand, and the young German grasped it.
+
+"You but did your duty, as you saw it, I suppose," said Captain
+Anderson.
+
+"What is the piece of news you have for us, Captain Anderson?" asked
+Colonel Willing, who had been waiting impatiently for the commander of
+the _Yucatan_ to broach the subject that had called them aboard.
+
+"Have chairs, gentlemen," said the captain, ignoring the question.
+
+The others sat down, the older men twisting about uneasily. At last Mr.
+Willing could stand it no longer.
+
+"Captain," he cried, jumping to his feet, "if you have any words of our
+daughters, tell us. Don't keep us in suspense any longer."
+
+Captain Anderson gazed at him steadily for a few moments, then arose,
+and walked to a door in his cabin.
+
+"I have three prisoners here I would like you to see," he said quietly.
+
+With a sudden movement he threw wide the door, and there stepped forth
+first Dick, then Shirley, then Mabel.
+
+The two men absolutely ignored Dick, who stepped aside.
+
+With glad cries the others rushed toward each other. Shirley found
+herself clasped in her father's arms, and Mabel and her father also
+clung tight together. Then they stepped back and looked at each other.
+
+"This is my little surprise," said Captain Anderson with a smile.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.--"CAPTAIN VON BLUSEN."
+
+
+"And when we found you had escaped we didn't know where to look for
+you," said Mr. Willing, in concluding the story of the search.
+
+"We never doubted that we should get away in some manner," declared
+Shirley. "We were sure you would find us, but when the chance for escape
+came we took advantage of it."
+
+"And where did you get to when you left the consulate?" demanded Colonel
+Ashton of Dick.
+
+Dick explained.
+
+"And if Captain Anderson had not arrived so opportunely, there is no
+telling what might have happened," he declared. "He put the enemy to
+rout."
+
+"It wasn't much of a job," replied the captain, waving aside Mr.
+Willing's thanks. "I just touched two of them with my fists and they
+went down."
+
+"I reckon you didn't touch them very gently, captain," said Colonel
+Ashton, with a grim smile.
+
+"Well, perhaps not," answered Captain Anderson, "but it was no time for
+half way measures." He turned to Captain Von Blusen. "And what am I to
+do with you?" he asked.
+
+"I should be glad if you would take me to San Francisco," was the reply.
+
+Captain Anderson turned this over in his mind.
+
+"You have made much trouble for me," he said finally, "and besides, the
+United States authorities may be looking for you, for all I know.
+However, I have no such information, and as you seem to have turned over
+a new leaf, I shall do so."
+
+"Thank you, captain."
+
+"I would advise you, however," continued the captain, "to go ashore at
+the first American port instead of going to Frisco. The authorities may
+be on the lookout for you, and I don't know what they would do with you.
+Your theft of the _Yucatan_ was nothing short of piracy."
+
+"I suppose you are right," returned Captain Von Blusen, "and I shall act
+upon your advice. What is the first United States port at which you
+shall touch?"
+
+"San Diego."
+
+"Then I shall go ashore there."
+
+"Very well, unless, of course, in the meantime I should receive word to
+hold you."
+
+"But you won't report the captain's presence here?" exclaimed Shirley
+hopefully.
+
+"No; I shall say nothing about it unless I am asked."
+
+"Thank you again, captain," said the young officer.
+
+He turned on his heel and left the room.
+
+"When shall we get under way again, captain?" asked Colonel Ashton.
+
+"First thing in the morning," was the reply. "We'll probably be out of
+sight of land when you tumble out."
+
+"We can't get away from here any too quick to suit me," declared
+Shirley.
+
+"No, indeed," Mabel agreed. "We have had trouble enough to last us for a
+long time to come. The sooner we get back to civilization the better."
+
+"And that goes for all of us," agreed Mr. Willing.
+
+"I'm glad to have you back aboard the _Yucatan_," declared Captain
+Anderson. "To tell the truth, I didn't expect to see you in Mazatlan. I
+felt sure you would eventually find the young ladies safe and sound, but
+I feared I should have to make the rest of the trip without you. I tell
+you, it made me feel good to run across young Stanley here this
+afternoon."
+
+"It didn't make you feel as good as it did me, captain," returned Dick
+significantly.
+
+"Well, perhaps not under the circumstances," laughed the captain. "The
+only one of our passengers who will not complete the trip is Mrs.
+Sebastian."
+
+"And a good thing for all concerned," declared Colonel Ashton. "I don't
+see how she fooled us so completely, Willing."
+
+"She did though," returned Mr. Willing. "I would never have suspected
+her of having any ulterior motives."
+
+"You wouldn't listen to me," said Dick. "I suspected her from the first.
+Now I can say 'I told you so.'"
+
+"We'll place more confidence in your foresight in the future," declared
+the colonel.
+
+"I don't want to run you away," said Captain Anderson, "but it's my
+belief you had all better turn in. You look fagged out, the whole bunch
+of you. Sleep is the best remedy."
+
+"You are right, captain," declared Shirley. "I feel as though I could go
+to sleep standing on my feet."
+
+They bade the captain good-night, thanked him again for his assistance,
+and made their way to their cabin, where, after some further talk, all
+turned in.
+
+So completely were they exhausted that it was after eight o'clock the
+following morning when Shirley, the first to awake, sprang up. She
+glanced out the window of her stateroom. The sun shone brightly, and
+from the barely perceptible motion of the steamer she knew they were
+moving.
+
+She called Mabel, and the girls dressed quickly. Shirley knocked on the
+next door and aroused the others, and an hour later, after a hearty
+breakfast, all stood forward on the promenade deck enjoying the fresh
+morning breeze.
+
+There was not a speck of land in sight and would not be for hours. An
+hour later Captain Von Blusen joined them and after awhile Captain
+Anderson stopped to exchange a few words.
+
+It was while the commander of the _Yucatan_ was there that there came a
+hail from the lookout.
+
+"Smoke to the leeward, sir!"
+
+All glanced in the direction indicated. There, upon the distant horizon,
+was a faint cloud of smoke. As they gazed it presently took shape, and
+half an hour later it did not take the second cry of the lookout to tell
+them the approaching vessel was a battle cruiser of the first class.
+
+"Wonder what this one is?" said Shirley, as the vessel drew nearer.
+
+"I don't know. It might be German. It has been supposed there were two
+German vessels in these waters, but we have already encountered one.
+This may be another."
+
+"It's hardly possible, though," said Mr. Willing. "Captain Von Blusen,
+to your knowledge, are there any German ships of war in these waters?"
+
+"I can't answer that question definitely, sir," he replied. "All I can
+say is that it is possible."
+
+"I don't believe this is a German," said Dick. "But whatever she is she
+is coming right toward us."
+
+It was true. The stranger was shaping a course that would intercept the
+_Yucatan_ several miles ahead.
+
+"I wonder if she will stop us?" said Mabel.
+
+"Of course," replied Captain Von Blusen. "The commander will probably
+come aboard to have a look at the ship's papers."
+
+"Will he interfere with you?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Hardly," was the reply. "In spite of the fact that I am a German, he
+will not dare to interfere with me aboard a neutral ship."
+
+"Boom!"
+
+It was the sound of a great gun aboard the cruiser.
+
+"Signal to heave-to," said Captain Anderson.
+
+He made his way to the bridge, and in response to his command, the
+_Yucatan_ came to a pause. Then all eagerly waited for the cruiser to
+show her colors.
+
+"German!" was the audible gasp from the passengers as the red, white and
+black of the German Empire were unfurled at the masthead.
+
+"I am coming aboard you," was the message the German commander flashed
+to Captain Anderson.
+
+A small boat put off from the cruiser and soon bumped alongside the
+_Yucatan_. A moment later an officer in a smart uniform came over the
+side. He made his way at once to where Captain Anderson stood on the
+bridge.
+
+"Is this the way you meet a German naval officer?" he demanded angrily.
+
+Captain Anderson looked at him in surprise.
+
+"What would you have me do?" he demanded, taking a step forward.
+
+"And when you address me, say sir!" exclaimed the German, who seemed
+rather young and possessed of much self-importance. "You should have met
+me as I came over-side."
+
+"Say sir to you, eh?" exclaimed Captain Anderson. "If you don't get off
+my ship in five minutes I'll throw you over the rail."
+
+The German officer stepped back, and half drew a revolver. Captain
+Anderson advanced another step.
+
+But interference came from an unexpected source.
+
+Captain Von Blusen, who had stood close enough to overhear this
+conversation, suddenly ascended to the bridge. He walked quickly up
+behind the German officer, and seizing him by the shoulder, swung him
+around sharply.
+
+"You forget yourself, Lieutenant Von Meyers!" he said angrily. "Get back
+to your boat!"
+
+The German lieutenant gazed at this newcomer threateningly, then a look
+of the greatest astonishment passed over his face. He took three quick
+steps backward.
+
+Captain Von Blusen stood perfectly erect, one hand pointing toward the
+small boat from which the German lieutenant had just climbed to the deck
+of the _Yucatan_. He said no further word.
+
+And while officers and passengers of the _Yucatan_ looked on in
+amazement, the German lieutenant took two quick steps forward again,
+fell upon one knee, took Captain Von Blusen's other hand and touched it
+with his lips!
+
+Then he arose, saluted, and walked rapidly away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX.--THROUGH THE GOLDEN GATE.
+
+
+There was an audible gasp from passengers and crew, and the same
+question was upon every lip:
+
+"Who is he?"
+
+As the German lieutenant reached the side of the ship, Captain Von
+Blusen spoke again:
+
+"Lieutenant Von Meyers!"
+
+The lieutenant turned about sharply, and came to attention.
+
+"You will wait with the boat. I shall go with you."
+
+The lieutenant saluted again and stood stiffly erect in his tracks.
+
+Captain Von Blusen turned to Captain Anderson.
+
+"I shall relieve you of the responsibility of my presence immediately,
+captain," he said quietly. "I shall go aboard the cruiser."
+
+Captain Anderson was too much taken by surprise to mutter more than:
+
+"Very well, sir."
+
+Why he added the "sir" the captain could not have told, but there was
+something in the bearing of the man that faced him that called it forth
+involuntarily.
+
+Captain Von Blusen held out his hand, and the commander of the _Yucatan_
+grasped it.
+
+"Good luck to you, sir," said the latter.
+
+"And to you," returned Captain Von Blusen.
+
+He descended from the bridge, and made his way to where the Willing
+party stood gazing at him in open-eyed wonder.
+
+The German officer first addressed Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton.
+
+"I am sorry that I have been the means of putting you to so much
+trouble," he said, with a slight bow, "but whatever I did I considered
+in line with my duty. Please believe that."
+
+"I have no doubt of it," replied Mr. Willing.
+
+"Nor I," agreed Colonel Ashton.
+
+Captain Von Blusen now turned to Dick, and with the slightest of smiles
+he extended his hand.
+
+"As you and I had a little difficulty," he said, "I pray you will
+overlook it."
+
+Dick grasped the extended hand, as he replied.
+
+"Why, of course. I guess I am a bit hot-headed once in a while."
+
+"No more than I am," returned Captain Von Blusen. "It has been my chief
+fault."
+
+He pressed Dick's hand once more, and then turned to the two girls, who
+had been too stunned by what they had witnessed, to speak.
+
+The captain extended a hand to each in turn and Shirley and Mabel shook
+hands with him.
+
+"I am pleased to have met you, Miss Ashton," he said courteously, "and
+you, Miss Willing, and I regret that I have been the means of causing
+you unpleasantness. But as I have said to your fathers, what I did was
+but in the line of duty. Now I must say good-bye, but when the war is
+over," he looked at Mabel, "I hope that I shall see you both again."
+
+He bowed low, and before the girls could reply, he made his way toward
+the spot where the German lieutenant stood awaiting him. He motioned the
+latter to precede him over the side, and was just about to follow, when
+he seemed to think of something.
+
+He walked quickly back across the deck to where Shirley and Mabel stood,
+and spoke.
+
+"I suppose you all wonder who I am," he said quietly, "and while I would
+greatly like to satisfy your curiosity, I fear it is impossible at this
+time."
+
+Now Shirley found her tongue.
+
+"You can at least tell us whether you are of royal birth," she cried.
+
+Again Captain Von Blusen bowed low.
+
+"I cannot say yes, nor can I deny it," he answered.
+
+"Then your name is not really Captain Von Blusen?"
+
+The captain smiled and bowed, but made no reply.
+
+Now Mabel spoke.
+
+"Captain," she said quietly, "for by such name only can we know you now,
+we should, of course, be honored with your confidence, but if you cannot
+speak at this time, I for one shall ask you no questions."
+
+Captain Von Blusen took her hand and bent over it gallantly.
+
+"I thank you, Miss Ashton," he replied quietly. "Some day I hope to be
+able to confide in you."
+
+He bowed to the others, and turning sharply on his heel, made his way to
+the side of the ship and clambered over the rail.
+
+Now the passengers hurried to the side of the ship, and gazed with
+something like awe at the boat that made swiftly for the German cruiser.
+
+Captain Anderson did not give the signal to get under way until the
+cruiser's launch was being hoisted aboard, when there broke out from the
+cruiser a salvo of guns.
+
+"A salute!" cried Captain Anderson, raising his voice to make himself
+heard. "He is some one of importance. Now I wonder----"
+
+He broke off suddenly, as he counted the number of guns and, in his
+mind, ran over the list of relatives of the German Emperor. Then his
+clouded brow cleared, and he smiled.
+
+"If he wishes to keep it a secret, I am not the man to betray it," he
+said to himself.
+
+That Captain Anderson knew who "Captain Von Blusen" really was there
+could be no doubt, but the commander of the _Yucatan_ kept his promise
+to himself and confided to no one, in spite of the questions that were
+poured on him later.
+
+Now Captain Anderson gave the signal to get under way, and the _Yucatan_
+slowly gathered headway. The German cruiser remained stationary as the
+_Yucatan_ approached, and the big steamship passed her less than a
+quarter of a mile away.
+
+There, on the bridge of the cruiser, with the commander of the vessel
+and his officers standing at attention, stood "Captain Von Blusen." The
+passengers waved their hands at him, and he, in return, lifted his cap
+and made a low bow.
+
+Then the passengers aboard the _Yucatan_ saw him turn to the man they
+could make out was the commander of the cruiser and give a sharp
+command. The latter repeated it to one of his officers, and a moment
+later a second salvo broke out from the cruiser. At the same time the
+German flag at the masthead was dipped in salute.
+
+"That," said Captain Anderson calmly, "is a fine token of respect. Too
+bad we haven't the guns with which to return it."
+
+He gave an order, however, and the American ensign at the masthead of
+the _Yucatan_ returned the salute.
+
+These courtesies having been exchanged, all became bustle and hurry
+aboard the German cruiser, as the passengers on the _Yucatan_ could see.
+Men dashed hurriedly hither and thither, and a moment later the cruiser
+swung slowly about and headed due south.
+
+"And that is the last we shall see of Captain Von Blusen," declared
+Shirley. "I wonder who he is."
+
+"I haven't any idea," returned Mabel slowly, "but there can be no
+question that he is of high rank."
+
+"No, there can be no question about that," agreed Mr. Willing, who had
+overheard this conversation. "I should say that he is a member of the
+Imperial German family."
+
+"Then what is he doing in the United States?"
+
+"I have learned a couple of Mexican words," replied Mr. Willing. "Quien
+sabe?" (Who knows.)
+
+"But he said we should hear from him when the war is over," declared
+Mabel.
+
+"Yes," said Shirley, "he said 'we' but he meant you."
+
+Mabel's face turned a trifle red.
+
+"What do you mean?" she asked in some confusion.
+
+Shirley laughed.
+
+"I guess you know what I mean, all right," she made reply. "Do you
+remember saying something like that to me once?"
+
+"But I had reason to," protested Mabel. "It was so plain in Dick's
+case."
+
+"No more so than in Captain Von Blusen's case," declared Shirley.
+
+"I don't see----"
+
+"Oh, yes you do. You mean you just won't admit it. Well, you don't have
+to. Why, what makes your face so red, Mabel?"
+
+"I don't know what you are talking about," declared Mabel, and turning
+about quickly, she rushed to her cabin, leaving Shirley laughing to
+herself.
+
+The steamship _Yucatan_ was forging ahead at full speed now, and was
+rapidly lessening the distance to the first California port--San Diego.
+
+"Dad," said Shirley, "isn't there a second fair at San Diego?"
+
+"Yes," replied her father, "why?"
+
+"Well then, why can't we stop off there for a day or two and go on to
+San Francisco by rail?"
+
+"We can if you wish it," replied Mr. Willing.
+
+"Then let's do, Dad."
+
+"All right."
+
+And so it was arranged. Shirley went below where she and Mabel
+immediately began gathering their things together so that they would be
+ready to leave the boat the moment it docked at San Diego.
+
+There was no question that the girls had become great favorites with all
+the passengers. Many pressed them to continue the trip to San Francisco,
+Captain Anderson being one of the most anxious to keep them aboard as
+long as possible.
+
+"I don't know what I shall do without you," he told Shirley and Mabel.
+"We have had lots of excitement on this voyage, more than ever before,
+and you two girls have been mainly responsible for it. I hope that I
+shall see you again some time."
+
+"Why," said Shirley, "there are many more summers coming, and if we ever
+decide to make this trip again we shall not ever think of taking any
+boat but yours."
+
+"May the time come soon," said the captain.
+
+The passengers bade them an affectionate good-bye as they left the
+_Yucatan_ at San Diego, and then they entered a taxi and were driven to
+a hotel, where they once more made themselves comfortable for a stay
+ashore.
+
+They spent two days at the San Diego exposition, and then took a train
+for San Francisco to view, as Shirley expressed it, "the greatest sight
+they ever expected to see."
+
+And none of the party was a whit disappointed in the great exposition.
+In fact, it was far beyond expectations. For two weeks they remained in
+the California metropolis, spending every minute possible upon the large
+exposition grounds overlooking the Golden Gate and the broad expanse to
+the Pacific.
+
+When the time came for them to betake themselves homeward, it was with
+regret that they realized it would be long before they could again hope
+to see the beauties of the far-off state of California.
+
+There remains yet one incident to be told.
+
+Two weeks after their return home, Mabel received a registered package
+postmarked Rome, Italy. Eagerly she ran to her room with it, where she
+opened it in solitude; nor could she repress a cry of admiration when
+she drew out a beautifully bejeweled cross, patterned after the Iron
+Cross of Germany--the Iron Cross with which the German Emperor decorates
+his troops for bravery.
+
+With it there was a brief note, with the signature "Captain Von Blusen."
+
+Looking closer at the piece of paper on which the message was written,
+Mabel perceived a seal of peculiar design. She ran hastily for her
+dictionary, and turned to the seals of the various nations.
+
+There was a striking similarity between the seal on the paper and the
+Imperial German seal, as reproduced, in colors, in her big dictionary.
+
+For perhaps half an hour the girl sat silent, musing.
+
+"Can it be possible?" she asked herself at last "I wonder----"
+
+She rushed downstairs to consult Shirley, who at that moment was holding
+a tete-a-tete with Dick on the sunny front porch.
+
+                                THE END.
+
+
+
+
+The Blue Grass Seminary Girls Series
+
+By CAROLYN JUDSON BURNETT
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding, Price, 40c. per Volume
+
+_Splendid Stories of the Adventures of a Group of Charming Girls_
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS' VACATION ADVENTURES; or, Shirley
+  Willing to the Rescue.
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS' CHRISTMAS HOLIDAYS; or, A Four Weeks'
+  Tour with the Glee Club.
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS IN THE MOUNTAINS; or, Shirley Willing
+  on a Mission of Peace.
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER; or, Exciting Adventures
+  on a Summer's Cruise Through the Panama Canal.
+
+The Mildred Series
+
+By MARTHA FINLEY
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding, Price, 40c. per Volume
+
+_A Companion Series to the Famous "Elsie" Books by the Same Author_
+
+                        MILDRED KEITH
+                        MILDRED'S MARRIED LIFE
+                        MILDRED AT ROSELANDS
+                        MILDRED AT HOME
+                        MILDRED AND ELSIE
+                        MILDRED'S BOYS AND GIRLS
+                        MILDRED'S NEW DAUGHTER
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The Camp Fire Girls Series
+
+By HILDEGARD G. FREY. The only series of stories for Camp Fire Girls
+endorsed by the officials of the Camp Fire Girls Organization.
+
+PRICE, 40 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or, The Winnebagos go Camping.
+
+  This lively Camp Fire group and their Guardian go back to Nature in
+  a camp in the wilds of Maine, and pile up more adventures in one
+  summer than they have had in all their previous vacations put
+  together. Before the summer is over they have transformed Gladys,
+  the frivolous boarding school girl, into a genuine Winnebago.
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT SCHOOL, or, The Wohelo Weavers.
+
+  It is the custom of the Winnebagos to weave the events of their
+  lives into symbolic bead bands, instead of keeping a diary. All
+  commendatory doings are worked out in bright colors, but every time
+  the Law of the Camp Fire is broken it must be recorded in black. How
+  these seven live wire girls strive to infuse into their school life
+  the spirit of Work, Health and Love and yet manage to get into more
+  than their share of mischief, is told in this story.
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT ONOWAY HOUSE; or, The Magic Garden.
+
+  Migwan is determined to go to college, and not being strong enough
+  to work indoors earns the money by raising fruits and vegetables.
+  The Winnebagos all turn a hand to help the cause along and the
+  "goings-on" at Onoway Homes that summer make the foundations shake
+  with laughter.
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS GO MOTORING; or, Along the Road that Leads the Way.
+
+  The Winnebagos take a thousand mile auto trip. The "pinching" of
+  Nyoda, the fire in the country inn, the runaway girl and the
+  dead-earnest hare and hound chase combine to make these three weeks
+  the most exciting the Winnebagos have ever experienced.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The AMY E. BLANCHARD Series
+
+Miss Blanchard has won an enviable reputation as a writer of short
+stories for girls. Her books are thoroughly wholesome in every way and
+her style is full of charm. The titles described below will be splendid
+additions to every girl's library.
+
+Handsomely bound in cloth, full library size. Illustrated by L. J.
+Bridgman. Price, 60 cents per volume, postpaid.
+
+THE GLAD LADY. A spirited account of a remarkably pleasant vacation
+spent in an unfrequented part of northern Spain. This summer, which
+promised at the outset to be very quiet, proved to be exactly the
+opposite. Event follows event in rapid succession and the story ends
+with the culmination of at least two happy romances. The story
+throughout is interwoven with vivid descriptions of real places and
+people of which the general public knows very little. These add greatly
+to the reader's interest.
+
+WIT'S END. Instilled with life, color and individuality, this story of
+true love cannot fail to attract and hold to its happy end the reader's
+eager attention. The word pictures are masterly; while the poise of
+narrative and description is marvellously preserved.
+
+A JOURNEY OF JOY. A charming story of the travels and adventures of two
+young American girls, and an elderly companion in Europe. It is not only
+well told, but the amount of information contained will make it a very
+valuable addition to the library of any girl who anticipates making a
+similar trip. Their many pleasant experiences end in the culmination of
+two happy romances, all told in the happiest vein.
+
+TALBOT'S ANGLES. A charming romance of Southern life. Talbot's Angles is
+a beautiful old estate located on the Eastern Shore of Maryland. The
+death of the owner and the ensuing legal troubles render it necessary
+for our heroine, the present owner, to leave the place which has been in
+her family for hundreds of years and endeavor to earn her own living.
+Another claimant for the property appearing on the scene complicates
+matters still more. The untangling of this mixed-up condition of affairs
+makes an extremely interesting story.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent prepaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York
+
+
+
+
+The Girl Chum's Series
+
+ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.
+
+ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.
+
+A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular
+authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full
+of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives,
+vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers.
+
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS.
+
+  BENHURST, CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning.
+
+  BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris.
+
+  BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison.
+
+  DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row.
+
+  FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham.
+
+  HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings.
+
+  JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage.
+
+  KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow.
+
+  LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder.
+
+  MARJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright.
+
+  MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning.
+
+  MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring
+  Corning.
+
+  MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow.
+
+  ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning.
+
+  PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright.
+
+  RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne.
+
+  THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The Girl Comrade's Series
+
+ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.
+
+ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.
+
+A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular
+authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full
+of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives,
+vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers.
+
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS.
+
+  A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER. By I. T. Thurston.
+
+  ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+
+  ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L.
+  Rouse.
+
+  BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+
+  HELEN BEATON, COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+
+  JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S.
+  Robbins.
+
+  NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Spies Series
+
+These stories are based on Important historical events, scenes wherein
+boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of
+history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home
+life, and accurate in every particular.
+
+Handsome Cloth Bindings
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS.
+
+  A story of the part they took in its defence. By William P. Chipman.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY.
+
+  A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL.
+
+  A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT.
+
+  A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE.
+
+  The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. By James
+  Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY.
+
+  The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS.
+
+  The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots to drive
+  the British from that State. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX.
+
+  The story of General Marion and his young spies. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN.
+
+  The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette in the Siege of
+  Yorktown. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA.
+
+  The story of how the young spies helped the Continental Army at
+  Valley Forge. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD.
+
+  The story of the part they took in its brave defence. By William P.
+  Chipman.
+
+THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK.
+
+  The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of General
+  Washington. By James Otis.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street. New York
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Scout Series
+
+By HERBERT CARTER
+
+New stories of Camp Life, telling the wonderful and thrilling adventures
+of the Boys of the Silver Fox Patrol.
+
+Handsome Cloth Bindings
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; or, Marooned Among the Game Fish
+Poachers.
+
+  Through a queer freak of fate, Thad Brewster and his comrades of the
+  Silver Fox Patrol find themselves in somewhat the same predicament
+  that confronted dear old Robinson Crusoe; only it is on the Great
+  Lakes that they are wrecked instead of the salty sea. You will admit
+  that those Cranford scouts are a lively and entertaining bunch of
+  fellows.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp.
+
+  New and startling experiences awaited the tried comrades of camp and
+  trail, when they visit the Southland. But their knowledge of
+  woodcraft enabled them to meet and overcome all difficulties.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMP FIRE; or, Scouting with the Silver Fox
+Patrol.
+
+  This book is brimming over with thrilling adventure, woods lore and
+  the story of the wonderful experiences that befell the Cranford
+  troop of Boy Scouts when spending a part of their vacation in the
+  wilderness.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners.
+
+  Those lads who have read The Boy Scouts' First Camp Fire will be
+  delighted to read this story. It tells of the strange and mysterious
+  adventures that happened to the Patrol in their trip through the
+  "mountains of the sky" in the Moonshiners' Paradise of the old Tar
+  Heel State, North Carolina.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; or, Scouting through the Big Game Country.
+
+  The story recites the many adventures that befell the members of the
+  Silver Fox Patrol with wild animals of the forest trails, as well as
+  the desperate men who had sought a refuge in this lonely country.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or, The New Test for the Silver Fox
+Patrol
+
+  In the rough field of experience the tenderfoots and greenhorns of
+  the Silver Fox Patrol are fast learning to take care of themselves
+  when abroad. Thad and his chums have a wonderful experience when
+  they are employed by the State of Maine to act as Fire Wardens.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; or, The Search for the Lost
+Tenderfoot
+
+  A serious calamity threatens the Silver Fox Patrol when on one of
+  their vacation trips to the wonderland of the great Northwest. How
+  apparent disaster is bravely met and overcome by Thad and his
+  friends, forms the main theme of the story, which abounds in plenty
+  of humor, and hairbreadth escapes.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; or, The Secret of The Hidden Silver Mine.
+
+  By this time the boys of the Silver Fox Patrol have learned through
+  experience how to rough it upon a long hike. Their tour takes them
+  into the wildest region of the great Rocky Mountains, and here they
+  meet with many strange adventures.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA.
+
+  A story of Burgoyne's defeat in 1777.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Chums Series
+
+By WILMER M. ELY
+
+In this series of remarkable stories by Wilmer M. Ely are described the
+adventures of two boy chums--Charley West and Walter Hazard--in the
+great swamps of interior Florida and among the cays off the Florida
+Coast, and through the Bahama Islands. These are real, live boys, and
+their experiences are well worth following.
+
+In Handsome Cloth Bindings
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+THE BOY CHUMS ON INDIAN RIVER; or, The Boy Partners, of the Schooner
+"Orphan."
+
+  In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard meet deadly
+  rattlesnakes: have a battle with a wild panther; are attacked by
+  outlaws: their boat is towed by a swordfish; they are shipwrecked by
+  a monster manatee fish, and pass safely through many exciting scenes
+  of danger. This book should be read first.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS ON HAUNTED ISLAND; or, Hunting for Pearls in the Bahama
+Islands.
+
+  This book tells the story of the boy chums' adventures on the
+  schooner "Eager Quest," hunting for pearls among the Bahama Islands.
+  Their hairbreadth escapes from the treacherous quicksands and
+  dangerous waterspouts, and their rescue from the wicked wreckers are
+  fully told.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST; or, Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida
+Everglades.
+
+  The story of the boy chums hunting the blue herons and the pink and
+  white egrets for their plumes in the forests of Florida is full of
+  danger and excitement. In this story is fully told how the chums
+  encountered the Indians; their battles with the escaped convicts;
+  their fight with the wild boars and alligators; and many exciting
+  encounters and escapes. This is the third story of the boy chums'
+  adventures.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS' PERILOUS CRUISE; or, Searching for Wreckage on the
+Florida Coast
+
+  This story of the boy chums' adventures on and off the Florida Coast
+  describes many scenes of daring and adventure, in hunting for ships
+  stranded and cargoes washed ashore. The boy chums passed through
+  many exciting scenes, their conflicts with the Cuban wreckers; the
+  loss of their vessel, the "Eager Quest," they will long remember.
+  This is the fourth book of adventures which the boy chums
+  experienced.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO; or, a Dangerous Cruise with the
+Greek Spongers.
+
+  This story of the boy chums hunting for sponges is filled with many
+  adventures. The dangers of gathering sponges are fully described;
+  the chums meet with sharks and alligators; and they are cast away on
+  a desert island. Their rescue and arrival home make a most
+  interesting story. This is the fifth book of adventures of the boy
+  chums.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS CRUISING IN FLORIDA WATERS; or, the Perils and Dangers of
+the Fishing Fleet.
+
+  In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard embark upon a new and
+  dangerous quest for fortune. With their old and tried comrades,
+  Captain Westfield and the little negro, Chris, they join the great
+  army of fishermen that yearly search the Florida seas for the
+  thousands of kinds of rare fish and water creatures that abound
+  there. The Florida waters hide many strange and unknown dangers. The
+  perils the chums encounter from weird fishes and creatures of the
+  sea and the menace of hurricanes and shipwreck, make very
+  interesting and instructive reading. This is the sixth book of
+  adventures of the boy chums.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the
+Water, by Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37310-8.txt or 37310-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/3/1/37310/
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/37310-8.zip b/37310-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c10205d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37310-8.zip
diff --git a/37310-h.zip b/37310-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..634110a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37310-h.zip
diff --git a/37310-h/37310-h.htm b/37310-h/37310-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02e44b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37310-h/37310-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,13081 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" >
+<head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" />
+    <meta content="The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water" name="DC.Title"/>
+    <meta content="Carolyn Judson Burnett" name="DC.Creator"/>
+    <meta content="en" name="DC.Language"/>
+    <meta content="1916" name="DC.Created"/>
+    <meta name="generator" content="ppgen (1.20) generated Sep 03, 2011 02:18 PM" />
+    <title>The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water</title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+        body                    {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%;}
+        p                       {margin-top:1ex; margin-bottom:0; text-align:justify;}
+        .pagenum                {display:inline; font-size:x-small; text-align:right; text-indent:0;
+                                 position:absolute; right:2%; padding:1px 3px; font-style:normal;
+                                 font-variant:normal; font-weight:normal; text-decoration:none;
+                                 background-color:inherit; border:1px solid #eee;}
+        .pncolor                {color:silver;}
+        h1                      {text-align:center; font-weight:normal;
+                                 font-size:1.4em; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:2em;}
+        h2                      {text-align:left; font-weight:normal;
+                                 font-size:1.2em; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:2em;}
+        h3                      {text-align:center; font-weight:bold;
+                                 font-size:0.9em; margin-top:1.5em; margin-bottom:1em;}
+        hr.pb                   {margin:30px 0; width:100%; border:none; border-top:thin dashed silver; clear:both;}
+        .sc                     {font-variant: small-caps;}
+        .center                 {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; text-align:center;}
+        .larger                 {font-size:larger;}
+        .smaller                {font-size:smaller;}
+        .figcenter              {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+        table.c                 {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+        .caption                {font-size: 80%;}
+        .sc                     {font-variant:small-caps}
+        div.center>:first-child      {margin: .5em auto 0 auto;text-align:center;}
+        div.center p            {margin: 0 auto; text-align:center;}
+    </style>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water, by 
+Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water
+       Exciting Adventures on a Summer Cruise Through the Panama Canal
+
+Author: Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+Release Date: September 4, 2011 [EBook #37310]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+<div><a name='illus-fpc' id='illus-fpc'></a></div>
+<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'>
+<a name='i001' id='i001'></a>
+<img src="images/illus-fpc.jpg" alt="“I AM SORRY YOU INTERFERED WITH US,” SAID THE MAN. “YOU’LL FIND BEFORE LONG THAT YOU HAVE DONE WRONG.” Page 57." title=""/><br />
+<span class='caption'>“I AM SORRY YOU INTERFERED WITH US,” SAID THE MAN. “YOU’LL FIND<br/>BEFORE LONG THAT YOU HAVE DONE WRONG.” <em>Page 57</em>.</span>
+</div>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<div class='center'>
+<p><span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:1.6em;font-weight:bold;'>Blue Grass Seminary Girls</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:1.6em;font-weight:bold;'>On the Water</span></p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p>OR</p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p><span style='font-size:1.2em;'>Exciting Adventures on a Summer Cruise</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:1.2em;'>Through the Panama Canal</span></p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p><span class='sc'>By Carolyn Judson Burnett</span></p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p>AUTHOR OF</p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>“The Blue Grass Seminary Girls’ Vacation Adventures,”</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>“The Blue Grass Seminary Girls in the Mountains,”</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>“The Blue Grass Seminary</span></p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>Girls’ Christmas Holidays.”</span></p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p>PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK</p>
+</div>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<div class='center'>
+<p>Copyright, 1916</p>
+<p><span class='sc'>By A. L. Burt Company</span></p>
+<p>&#160;</p>
+<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER</span></p>
+</div>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<h1>THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER.</h1>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_3'></a>3</span><a name='chI' id='chI'></a>CHAPTER I.—PLANNING A TRIP.</h2>
+<p>
+“Dad, we want to take a trip.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The speaker was Shirley Willing, a typical Kentucky
+girl, slender of figure, vivacious of manner,
+and extremely pretty. With her father, she stood
+on the big, sunny front porch of the Willing farmhouse.
+As she again was about to address her
+father, a second young girl, who, it could be seen at
+a glance, was of about Shirley’s years, joined them.
+</p>
+<p>
+This was Mabel Ashton, Shirley’s particular
+friend and life chum. Shirley greeted her with a
+smile, and Mr. Willing’s face also wrinkled pleasantly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I was just telling Dad that we want to take a
+trip this summer,” explained Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We have talked it all over,” she agreed, “and
+we just want to go some place.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_4'></a>4</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where?” asked Mr. Willing briefly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, we—we—want to go to—to—where is it
+we want to go, Shirley?” asked Mabel in some confusion.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We hadn’t decided on that yet, Dad,” laughed
+Shirley. “But we don’t want to stay here on this
+old farm all summer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And what are you going to do with both your
+old Dads—leave them behind?” asked Mr. Willing
+seriously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We would like to have you go with us, Dad, but
+we know you won’t.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why won’t we?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I—we,—I—you never have gone with
+us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s never too late to mend our ways,” declared
+her father dryly. “Perhaps we shall this time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Both girls clapped their hands, and scampered
+about the porch eagerly. At last Shirley stopped
+her antics, and standing directly before her father,
+took him by the coat with both hands.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Do you mean it, Dad?” she asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes. Ashton and I have decided that the next
+time you two youngsters go away from home we
+are going with you. When you are by yourselves
+you get into too much mischief. Now where is
+it you want to go?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We haven’t the slightest idea,” was the reply.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_5'></a>5</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing turned to Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You call your father out here and we’ll talk
+this thing over,” he told her.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel hastened to obey, and while she is searching
+for her father, we shall take time to introduce
+Shirley Willing and Mabel Ashton more fully
+to the reader.
+</p>
+<p>
+The two girls had been friends ever since they
+could remember. Born and raised within a few
+doors of each other in the little town of Paris,
+Bourbon county, Kentucky, they had been inseparable
+companions from the time they were able
+to walk. This friendship was strengthened by the
+fact that their fathers had been bosom friends before
+them.
+</p>
+<p>
+While the girls were still young, Shirley’s mother
+died, and a short time later Mr. Willing purchased
+a large farm on the Bethlehem Pike, three miles
+from town. It was less than a year later that
+Mabel’s mother passed into the great Beyond, and
+Mr. Ashton bought a farm adjoining that of his
+old friend. And here they had lived ever since.
+</p>
+<p>
+When Shirley reached the age of fourteen, she
+conceived the idea of going away to school. Mabel
+announced that she was going with her. The objections
+of their fathers they soon overcame, and
+at last found themselves installed as pupils of the
+Bluegrass Seminary in Lexington. Here, because
+of their kind-heartedness and their many good
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_6'></a>6</span>
+deeds, they were soon among the most popular girls
+of the school.
+</p>
+<p>
+Being athletically inclined, they were prominent
+in all branches of girls’ sports. Their chief pleasure
+was horseback riding, in which art there were
+few more proficient. In fact, Shirley once had
+saved her father’s fortune by carrying the Willing
+colors to victory in the great Kentucky Derby, as
+related in “The Bluegrass Seminary Girls on Vacation.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Naturally modest, they nevertheless had been
+made, soon after their arrival at the seminary,
+members of the Glee Club, for it was found that
+both possessed voices of rare excellence. During
+the second Christmas vacation, with other members
+of the Glee Club, they had toured the larger eastern
+cities, and through entertainments had lifted a
+large debt that threatened the end of the Seminary.
+</p>
+<p>
+Both girls also possessed great courage, as they
+had proved on more than one occasion, and they
+had had many exciting adventures, one of the most
+important of which was the settling of a mountain
+feud in which they had faced great danger unflinchingly,
+as related in “The Bluegrass Seminary Girls
+on Motorcycles.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The summer vacation now had just begun. Shirley
+and Mabel had returned from Lexington two
+days before this story opens. At the Willing place
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_7'></a>7</span>
+they found Mr. Ashton, who had been very ill for
+some years, and had been making his home with
+his friend while his daughter was away at school.
+</p>
+<p>
+But now Mr. Ashton was greatly improved, as
+Mabel found to her great joy. He was gaining
+daily and recovering lost weight and strength.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel, searching for her father in response to
+Mr. Willing’s request, found him in the sitting
+room. She went up to him and took him by the
+hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come on Dad,” she said.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Ashton—“colonel” he was always called by
+his friends—allowed himself to be pulled toward
+the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What’s up?” he asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Willing, Shirley and I want to have a talk
+with you,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“H-mm-m,” muttered the colonel, “must be
+something you two want. Have you succeeded in
+twisting Willing around your fingers?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“The idea, Dad!” exclaimed Mabel. “You know
+neither Shirley nor I would think of trying to do a
+thing like that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Colonel Ashton grinned.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wouldn’t you?” he asked dryly. “I’m not so
+sure of that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Father and daughter made their way to the front
+porch, where Shirley and her father were deep in
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_8'></a>8</span>
+conversation. Colonel Ashton dropped into a
+chair, and Mabel sat down at his feet.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Ashton,” said Mr. Willing, “these girls say they
+want to go some place. What do you think about
+it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Ashton was silent for some moments. He
+did not seem to be surprised.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where do they want to go?” he asked at length.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We don’t know, Dad,” said Mabel. “We just
+want to take a trip.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And,” Shirley broke in, “my Dad says you and
+he might come with us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Ashton looked at his old friend in surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You say that, Willing?” he demanded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, Colonel, I did. Why not, eh? You and
+I are getting along in years and have earned a vacation.
+I’m agreeable, if you are.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know but you are right,” was the slow
+reply. “I guess I am well enough to travel. I’ll
+go.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel jumped quickly to her feet, and hugged
+him. Shirley performed a similar operation on her
+father.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then,” said Mr. Willing, disengaging himself at
+last, “the only question to be settled is, where shall
+we go?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“This is a pretty sizeable country, Willing,” said
+the colonel, “I guess there are plenty of places to
+go.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_9'></a>9</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I had thought of Atlantic City,” said Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And what had you thought of?” demanded Mr.
+Willing of Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well,” was the reply, “there were two things I
+wanted to do, and I don’t know which I shall
+choose.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Let’s hear them,” said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You know, Dad, ever since Mabel and I went
+away with the Glee Club, we have both been anxious
+to take a trip on one of the big ocean steamers.
+That is one thing I would like to do.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And where would you like to go?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Any place. Across the ocean.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, we won’t do that,” said Colonel Ashton.
+“This European war makes it too risky. We
+might be sunk by one of those German submarines.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Right, Colonel,” agreed Mr. Willing. He
+turned again to Shirley, “and the other thing you
+would like to do?” he questioned.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should like to go to the Panama Exposition
+in San Francisco.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel jumped to her feet and clapped her hands.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s where I should like to go, too,” she cried.
+“Why didn’t I think of it before?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing considered.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well,” he said at length, “I don’t know why we
+can’t do both of those things, Shirley.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_10'></a>10</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“But the ocean trip, Dad. Where would we
+go?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“To San Francisco,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, how—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You must remember that the Panama Canal is
+open to traffic, daughter,” explained Mr. Willing.
+“We can take a steamer from New York direct to
+San Francisco. Besides, I should like to have a
+look at the canal, with its great locks and other
+interesting things. The construction of the canal
+is considered one of the greatest of all feats of
+engineering.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Colonel Ashton nodded his head emphatically.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should like to take that trip myself,” he declared.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then we shall consider that matter settled,”
+said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And when can we start, dad?” asked Shirley
+eagerly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, we will not be able to leave here for a
+week or ten days. I have some business affairs
+that must be put in order before I can get away.
+Besides, you two girls will want clothes and things,
+and you can’t get those in a minute.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll go to town this afternoon and get some
+things,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right,” laughed Mr. Willing, “but just the
+same it will take you at least a week to get yourselves
+ready. Then I shall have to make arrangements for our
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_11'></a>11</span>
+passage, find out when we leave New
+York and attend to other details. It will take
+time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But we shall go as soon as possible, Dad?” asked
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” was the reply. “You may make sure of
+that. We shall go as soon as possible. Hello—who’s
+that?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The others gazed in the direction of his pointing
+finger. Through the pike gate, at that moment,
+came a solitary horseman.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wonder who he is?” exclaimed Shirley.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chII' id='chII'></a>CHAPTER II.—AN ADDITION TO THE PARTY.</h2>
+<p>
+The horseman came closer.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly Shirley gave an exclamation of delight.
+She had recognized the visitor even at this distance,
+which was too great for the others to perceive
+his identity. Mabel looked at her chum in
+astonishment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dick!” cried Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now Mabel understood, and even Mr. Willing
+allowed a slight smile to steal across his face.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley ran down the steps from the porch and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_12'></a>12</span>
+hurried toward the distant yard gate. The girl and
+the horseman arrived at about the same time, and
+those on the porch saw the rider lift his cap and
+dismount.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then he led the horse through the gate, closed it
+behind him and with the bridle in his hand continued
+his way to the house afoot, Shirley walking
+by his side.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dick!” cried Shirley again, as the rider dismounted
+at the gate upon sight of her. “What
+are you doing here? I am glad to see you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I was in Paris on a little business,” replied the
+young man, “and I thought I wouldn’t go away
+without paying my respects to you and your
+father.”
+</p>
+<p>
+At the house Mr. Willing greeted the young man
+warmly, for, from previous meetings, he had taken
+a liking to Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick Stanley was a native of Cincinnati, O. He
+was without parents, and after having met Shirley
+under exciting circumstances, he had given up a
+rough set of companions and at length had obtained
+a place as office boy on one of the big Louisville
+newspapers. But Dick had not remained an office
+boy long, and he was now one of the most competent
+and best liked reporters on the paper.
+</p>
+<p>
+He had been sent to Paris for a certain piece of
+news—“on a story,” in his words, the words of the
+newspaper world—and he had just completed his
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_13'></a>13</span>
+work successfully. Therefore he had hired a horse
+and come to the Willing farm for a few words
+with his friends before going back to Louisville.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m glad to see you, young man,” said Mr. Willing
+in greeting. “It has been some time since we
+have had the pleasure of your company.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thank you, sir,” was the reply. “I am always
+glad to be here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He shook hands with Mr. Ashton and Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now Shirley proceeded to tell him of the trip
+they were going to take, and Dick was greatly interested.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should like to see the canal,” he said. “I have
+been reading quite a bit about it, and it is very interesting.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You are right, young man,” agreed Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is one of the wonders of the world.” He
+paused, struck by a sudden idea. Then he said
+slowly, looking squarely at Dick:
+</p>
+<p>
+“How would you like to go with us?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’d like it fine,” declared Dick, with a smile.
+“I wish it could be done.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, it can be done,” said Mr. Willing quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick, as well as Shirley and Mabel, looked at
+Mr. Willing in surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dad!” exclaimed Shirley. “What do you
+mean?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just what I say,” was the reply. “I am going
+to take Dick with us.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_14'></a>14</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick shook his head slowly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I appreciate your kindness, Mr. Willing,” he
+said quietly, “but I cannot accept such generosity.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Can’t, eh?” blustered Mr. Willing, “and why
+not, I’d like to know. I am not in the habit of having
+my invitations refused, sir!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Again Dick smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is very kind of you to ask me,” he said, “but
+I do not feel that I should accept. Of course, I
+have the money for the trip, but I do not feel I
+can afford to spend it. Besides, I could not leave
+the paper for so long a time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Couldn’t leave the paper!” echoed Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll speak a few words to my friend Col. Harperson,
+the owner, and he will see that you are given
+an indefinite vacation.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, sir, thank you, I don’t think it can be
+done.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll tell you,” said Mr. Willing, trying a new
+line, for he had made up his mind to have Dick
+accompany them, “you will be able to do some writing
+on the trip. The sights you will see should
+mean money to you. You should be able to write
+many interesting articles when you get back.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick apparently was impressed with this line of
+reasoning. And now Shirley added her voice to
+the colonel’s.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Please, come, Dick?” she said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well,” said the young man after hesitating a
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_15'></a>15</span>
+long while, “I’ll tell you what I’ll do. If I can
+make arrangements to get off indefinitely, I’ll go.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley clapped her hands.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m sure you can,” she cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+And Mr. Willing muttered to himself:
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll fix it with Harperson!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The discussion of the trip now became general,
+and Dick was acquainted with the time they expected
+to depart.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You will remain here over night, of course,”
+said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thank you, sir, I shall be glad to.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then we’ll put off our shopping till to-morrow,
+Mabel,” said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+All day the three young people talked eagerly of
+the coming trip, and Shirley tried to get Dick to
+promise that he would go, whether he was able to
+get off or not. But this Dick would not do.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If they agree to let me off, all right,” was his
+decision.
+</p>
+<p>
+They sat up and talked till late that night, but
+Mr. Willing finally put an end to this conversation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley,” he said severely, “are you going to
+keep that young man talking all night? How do
+you expect him to catch the early train in the morning?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I would have gone any time he told me,”
+pouted Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t suppose he would have told you if you
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_16'></a>16</span>
+had kept him talking all night,” replied Mr. Willing
+dryly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick arose and bade the others good night. A
+few moments later Shirley and Mabel retired to
+their room, where they lay for a long time before
+sleep overcame them, so excited were they at the
+prospect of the great trip.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m glad Dick is going,” said Mabel, “but I
+don’t suppose I am half as glad as you are.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why not?” demanded Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, just because,” replied Mabel, laughing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t see anything to laugh at,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You don’t? No, I guess you don’t. Do you
+know, I’d give a whole lot if some nice boy like
+Dick would come all this way to see me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He came to see you as well as me,” said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh no he didn’t. If I had been the only girl
+here, Dick would not have been on hand to-day.
+Besides, if it wasn’t for you I’m sure he wouldn’t
+even think of taking the trip to San Francisco.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But he wants to see something of the Panama
+Canal.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness! you didn’t use to be so dense,”
+exclaimed Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dense?” repeated Shirley. “What do you
+mean, Mabel?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s right, keep it up,” exclaimed Mabel. “I
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_17'></a>17</span>
+won’t say anything more. Are you going into
+town to-morrow?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, I thought we would go in as soon as Dick
+had gone.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That suits me. We’ll have to get a lot of
+things.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should say so. Why, I haven’t a single decent
+thing to wear.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll put in a good supply, so we won’t have
+to buy anything while we are away. My! but
+won’t it be a nice trip?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Won’t it though. I can hardly wait for the
+time to come.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nor I. But let’s get some sleep or we won’t
+want to get up in the morning.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Both closed their eyes and tried to sleep. But
+they had too much on their minds to go to sleep
+immediately, and it was long minutes before drowsiness
+overcame them and they lost themselves, only
+to dream that they were sailing across the ocean.
+</p>
+<p>
+The following morning they accompanied Dick
+to Wright’s station, where he took a train for Lexington.
+There he would have to change for Louisville.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Let us know as soon as possible?” called Shirley,
+as he climbed aboard.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I will,” replied Dick. “I’ll write immediately
+I have learned one thing or the other.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The train moved away.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_18'></a>18</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel returned to the house, where
+Mr. Willing was waiting for them with the automobile.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Ashton and I have decided to do a little shopping
+on our own hook,” he explained. “We want
+to spruce up a bit. Daughter, do you suppose there
+will be any nice-looking, middle-aged ladies aboard
+the boat? If so, why Ashton and I—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dad!” interrupted Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, all right. Of course if you object,” said
+Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+All the rest of the day the girls put in shopping.
+Dresses and frocks for all occasions they bought,
+besides a couple of outing costumes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know how long it takes to get to San
+Francisco from New York,” said Shirley, “so we
+had best be prepared.”
+</p>
+<p>
+But when the day was over they found they had
+not completed their shopping, and would have to
+return again on the morrow.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing, during the day, transacted his business
+and found out the date of sailing from New
+York. Taking it for granted that Dick would accompany
+them, he purchased a ticket and made
+accommodations for him as well as the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+“How long shall we be gone, Dad?” asked Shirley,
+as the automobile sped homeward.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, let’s see. This is the fourth of June.
+We shall leave New York on the fifteenth. I
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_19'></a>19</span>
+should say we would be back by the middle of August.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And will we come back the same way?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No; we’ll come back by rail. One way by boat
+will be enough. You’ll have seen plenty of water
+by the time you reach San Francisco.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I hope Dick decides to go with us,” said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And so do I,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, he’ll go, all right,” remarked Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+And the latter was right. Three days later Shirley
+stood before her father with an open letter in
+her hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s from Dick,” she explained. “He says he is
+going with us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing chuckled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I see Harperson is still a friend of mine,” he
+muttered to himself.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chIII' id='chIII'></a>CHAPTER III.—OFF FOR NEW YORK.</h2>
+<p>
+It was the morning of the twelfth of June that
+the party of five went early to Paris to catch the
+eight o’clock train for Cincinnati. Dick had arrived
+the night before, and in spite of the fact that
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_20'></a>20</span>
+they would have to be up very early in the morning,
+all sat up talking, for the young people were too excited
+to go to sleep.
+</p>
+<p>
+All through the long hours of the night the girls
+tossed about, scarcely closing their eyes. They
+were up with the break of day, which was soon
+after four o’clock.
+</p>
+<p>
+At last the time for departure came, and they
+jumped gaily into the large automobile which was
+to take them to town.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What time shall we leave Cincinnati, sir?” Dick
+asked of Mr. Willing, as the train pulled out from
+the station.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Twelve o’clock,” was the reply. “We’ll get
+there a little after eleven, which will give us time
+to get across town to the Pennsylvania station. I
+have made reservations on the New York train.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Nevertheless it lacked only twenty minutes of
+the noon hour when the train pulled into Cincinnati.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hurry girls,” ordered Mr. Willing. “We have
+no time to lose. We can just about make it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They dashed through the station and out the
+Third street entrance, where Mr. Willing immediately
+engaged two taxicabs.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Pennsylvania Station!” he ordered, and they
+were off at a good gait.
+</p>
+<p>
+Through the narrow streets congested with traffic
+they were forced to go more slowly, and Mr.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_21'></a>21</span>
+Willing looked at his watch impatiently from time
+to time.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Seven minutes!” he said, and they were still
+some distance from their destination, and then the
+first cab stopped to let a car pass in front of it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hurry!” commanded Mr. Willing of his driver.
+“We haven’t got all day to get there. Let the
+street cars do the waiting after this.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The chauffeur nodded and the cab leaped forward,
+scattering pedestrians right and left, darting
+in and out among other vehicles, avoiding a
+collision as though by a miracle. The second cab
+came close behind.
+</p>
+<p>
+At last the station was reached and all dismounted
+hurriedly. With Mr. Willing in the lead
+they ran through the station to the train shed.
+Here the conductor had just called “All aboard!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing heard him, and urged the others on
+faster. They passed through the gate, Mr. Willing
+assisted the girls and Colonel Ashton up the steps,
+then climbed up himself. And as he did so, Shirley,
+who had turned to look at him, cried:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where’s Dick?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing looked around, then stood nonplussed.
+Dick was not here. The train began to
+move.
+</p>
+<p>
+There came a shout from behind and a young
+man came dashing after the train. Shirley cried
+out in alarm. It was Dick.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_22'></a>22</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+The train had gathered headway now and was
+slipping along beneath the shed more rapidly.
+Dick sprinted, gained, clutched the handrail of the
+car and swung himself aboard just as the train
+gathered even greater speed.
+</p>
+<p>
+He climbed to the platform, wiped the moisture
+from his brow, fanned himself vigorously and then
+smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Close call, that,” he exclaimed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Young man,” said Mr. Willing dryly, “hereafter
+let there be no loitering behind. You gave
+me a scare and I don’t care for any more of the
+same.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Daddy!” exclaimed Shirley. “I am sure Dick
+didn’t do it intentionally.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, sir,” agreed Dick. “As I followed after
+you I bumped into a lady and knocked her suitcase
+from her hand. It came open and the contents
+scattered about. For a moment I forgot all about
+the train and stopped to help her pick them up.
+Then I happened to remember we were late, and
+ran after you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Your gallantry is bound to get you in trouble
+if you are not careful,” commented Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+They went inside.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing had engaged the two drawing rooms,
+one at either end of the car. Dick and the two
+older men were to occupy one and the two girls
+the other.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_23'></a>23</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+It was almost eight o’clock when the train pulled
+into Pittsburgh. They had just finished dinner, so
+Dick stepped off to look about for a few moments.
+</p>
+<p>
+As he stood beside the steps of the Pullman, another
+man, probably several years his senior, approached
+and engaged him in conversation. He
+was an agreeable sort of a chap. He spoke English
+with the faintest of accents, however, and this
+Dick was not slow to notice.
+</p>
+<p>
+It appeared that the man had a berth on the same
+car, and they climbed aboard together. In the
+smoking compartment was Mr. Willing, to whom
+Dick introduced the newcomer. Mr. Ashton came
+in a few moments later, and all sat talking.
+</p>
+<p>
+The stranger, who introduced himself as Henry
+Bristow, made himself very agreeable and Mr.
+Willing took an instant liking to him.
+</p>
+<p>
+During the course of the conversation, Dick
+chanced to mention that they would sail from New
+York for San Francisco on the fifteenth.
+</p>
+<p>
+“On what ship?” demanded Bristow eagerly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“<em>Yucatan</em>,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is that so?” exclaimed the other. “I shall sail
+on the same vessel.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“For San Francisco?” asked Dick in surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That all depends,” was the answer. “I shall
+only take passage as far as Colon. Whether I shall
+go further depends upon my—upon circumstances.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We shall be glad to have you as a fellow passenger,”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_24'></a>24</span>
+declared Mr. Willing. “As you are going to
+be such, you must meet my daughter, and the
+daughter of the colonel here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall be pleased,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+He accompanied the others to the drawing room,
+where introductions followed.
+</p>
+<p>
+Young Bristow conversed fluently upon many
+topics and the others were delighted with him.
+From his remarks it was gathered that he had traveled
+considerably.
+</p>
+<p>
+He spoke familiarly of New York, Chicago, San
+Francisco, and apparently had a personal knowledge
+of London, Paris, Berlin and other European
+cities. He was equally as well acquainted with the
+larger southern cities.
+</p>
+<p>
+The two girls were eager listeners to the tales
+of his travels, and even Mr. Willing and Colonel
+Ashton gave an attentive ear to these stories.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And where do you live?” asked Mr. Willing suddenly.
+“What did you say your business is?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The young man’s face suddenly turned red.
+</p>
+<p>
+“My home is in New York,” he replied quietly,
+“and as for my business, I fear that must remain
+a secret for the present.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Daddy, you shouldn’t be so inquisitive,” said
+Shirley with a smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m sure I’m sorry,” apologized her father. “I
+didn’t mean—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Say no more about it,” replied the young man
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_25'></a>25</span>
+with a pleasant smile. “For certain reasons, I am
+not now able to reveal the nature of my business.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick had been thinking rapidly. Suspicions had
+entered his head, and he could not shake them off.
+And still he knew that they would sound foolish
+to another.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll keep them to myself,” he said, “but I’ll keep
+an eye open.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The train was just pulling into North Philadelphia
+when Shirley and Mabel opened their eyes the
+next morning. Mabel glanced at her watch.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Seven o’clock,” she exclaimed. “We’ll have to
+hurry, Shirley. You know these fast trains don’t
+take long to reach New York from here. Besides,
+we want to get breakfast on the train.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They dressed as rapidly as possible, and emerged
+from their drawing room just in time to see young
+Bristow stride down the aisle.
+</p>
+<p>
+He gave them a cheery “good morning” and
+turned as Mr. Willing came up.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I hope you will join us at breakfast, sir,” said
+Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+The young man accepted, and as Dick and Colonel
+Ashton appeared at this moment, all made
+their way to the diner together.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where shall you stay in New York, sir?” asked
+Bristow of Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“At the McAlpin,” was the reply. “We shall
+spend the two days looking about the city, going
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_26'></a>26</span>
+aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> a couple of hours before time
+for her departure.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow turned to Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall look you up either this afternoon or to-morrow,
+and we’ll take a stroll,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll be glad to walk with you,” Dick replied.
+</p>
+<p>
+Breakfast over, they returned to the Pullman,
+where they began to get their things together, for
+they were close to New York.
+</p>
+<p>
+Half an hour later the train plunged into the
+tunnel under the Hudson river. Mr. Willing, who
+had been to New York before, explained how the
+tunnel had been constructed and gave other interesting
+information.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You wouldn’t think we were in a tunnel,” exclaimed
+Shirley. “There is no smoke.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Electric engine,” replied Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And we go right under the river?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness!” exclaimed Mabel. “Just to
+think that there is a river running right over the
+top of us. Suppose it would come through.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It won’t,” he said quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+And now the porter came for their baggage, and
+carried it to the vestibule. The conductor poked
+his head in the door and called out:
+</p>
+<p>
+“New York!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Here we are,” exclaimed Shirley eagerly.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_27'></a>27</span>
+“The city I have always wanted to see. The greatest
+city in the world!”
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chIV' id='chIV'></a>CHAPTER IV.—DICK HAS AN ADVENTURE.</h2>
+<p>
+The two days spent in New York City were
+days of wonder to Shirley, Mabel and Dick. They
+were on the go every minute of the time, sightseeing.
+From one end of the city to the other they
+travelled with wide-open eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+The great skyscrapers impressed them, perhaps,
+more than any one other thing, though they saw
+much to amaze them; and next to the great buildings
+they were impressed by the crowds.
+</p>
+<p>
+Crowds they had seen in some of the other large
+cities, but never anything like this.
+</p>
+<p>
+They took a trip to Coney Island on the second
+day, and the girls were for going back again that
+night. Mr. Willing agreed, and they were about
+to fare forth from the hotel, when young Bristow
+was announced.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ve come to take you for that promised stroll,”
+he told Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick looked at the others inquiringly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You go with him,” nodded Colonel Ashton, “the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_28'></a>28</span>
+rest of us can get along without you for one evening.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“If I’m breaking up a party—” began Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Never mind,” said the colonel with a wave of
+his hand. “You two young fellows run along.
+We don’t need you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right, sir,” agreed Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+Personally he was glad to have a chance to look
+about the town a little with one of his own age.
+The others took their departure, and soon Bristow
+and Dick also left the hotel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I would have looked you up sooner but I have
+been terribly busy,” explained Bristow. “I have
+had important matters to attend to, and this is the
+first time I have been at liberty. Where would you
+like to go?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Any place you say,” said Dick with a smile.
+“You know more about this place than I do.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess you’re right,” was the smiling response,
+“we’ll wander up Broadway aways and watch the
+theater crowds.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They did so, and continued to stroll about for
+an hour.
+</p>
+<p>
+Gradually the crowd thinned out, although there
+were many pedestrians on the street. As they
+stood for a moment in front of the Herald building
+on Herald square, Dick, chancing to turn suddenly,
+became conscious of a pair of eyes looking
+steadily at his companion. He called the other’s
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_29'></a>29</span>
+attention to it, and as the latter glanced about the
+man turned and moved off.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick thought no more of the matter until several
+blocks further along he perceived the same figure
+slinking furtively after them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That man is following us,” he said to Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+The face of the latter grew hard.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll see,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+At that moment they were passing Forty-second
+Street, and Bristow swung sharply around the
+corner. Dick followed him. They walked several
+blocks, until they stood beneath the tracks of the
+Sixth Avenue elevated. Here Bristow again
+turned sharply, and drew up in a doorway. He
+stopped as Dick came up beside him.
+</p>
+<p>
+A moment later the figure of the man Dick believed
+was following them came around the corner.
+The man’s hat was pulled over his eyes, and he
+did not glance up as he passed the doorway. Bristow
+and Dick turned and doubled back around the
+corner.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He was after us, all right,” said Bristow with
+a laugh, “but I guess we have given him the slip.”
+</p>
+<p>
+But in this he was mistaken.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wonder what on earth we are being followed
+for?” muttered Dick to himself, as they turned
+down Broadway. “Something queer about this fellow
+Bristow. That man is not following us for
+nothing.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_30'></a>30</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Several hours later they stopped in a little restaurant
+for a bite to eat, “after which I’ll take you
+home,” said Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+The restaurant was crowded, and a little while
+later the waiter seated another man at their table.
+Dick gave him a quick glance and then stifled an
+exclamation of surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+The newcomer was the same man who had followed
+them so recently.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick leaned over and whispered to Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So?” said Bristow. “We’ll see what he
+wants.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He looked the man squarely in the eyes and demanded:
+</p>
+<p>
+“What are you following me for?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The man looked at him and smiled pleasantly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I just want to keep you in sight,” he replied.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You know, I guess. You don’t want me to
+speak right out, do you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, no,” replied Bristow, “but I’ll thank you
+to follow me no longer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sorry,” was the reply, “but I am afraid I shall
+have to.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I warn you,” said Bristow quietly, “to let me
+alone. Is that plain enough?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perfectly plain,” was the reply. “I’m sorry I
+can’t accommodate you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He resumed his eating.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_31'></a>31</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick and Bristow finished their meal first and
+rose to go. The other man waited until they were
+at the door, then picked up his check and followed
+them. And so when they passed out, he was right
+behind them once more.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t like this idea of being followed,” said
+Dick. “What’s he want, anyhow?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll get rid of him,” replied Bristow, absolutely
+ignoring Dick’s second question.
+</p>
+<p>
+He turned down a side street, and they walked
+for three or four blocks, at length coming to a
+rather darker street. Here Bristow slipped around
+the corner and motioned Dick to silence.
+</p>
+<p>
+The footsteps of their pursuer came to their ears.
+He drew nearer. Bristow advanced close to the
+edge of the building.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What are you going to do?” asked Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’ll see,” was the brief response.
+</p>
+<p>
+As the man came into view, Bristow suddenly
+struck out with his right fist, and the man toppled
+over.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow turned to Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come!” he said quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+With one look at the fallen man Dick obeyed,
+and they were soon beyond pursuit.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick had been taken by surprise by the suddenness
+of Bristow’s attack. Try as he would he
+could see no reason for it. He, as well as Bristow,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_32'></a>32</span>
+objected to being followed, but Dick would not
+have taken such measures to elude his pursuer.
+</p>
+<p>
+He followed his companion without a word, however,
+and soon they were back at the hotel.
+</p>
+<p>
+The others had not returned, but Bristow sat
+down, announcing that he had something important
+to say to Mr. Willing when the latter did get
+back.
+</p>
+<p>
+Half an hour later, Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing
+and the two girls came in.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I see you beat us,” exclaimed Mr. Willing.
+“Have a good time?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, sir,” replied Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Willing,” said Bristow, “I have something
+of importance to say to you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right, sir,” came the answer, “out with it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Will you all promise to repeat nothing of what
+I may say?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why all this air of secrecy?” demanded Mr.
+Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That I cannot tell you, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course we’ll promise, Mr. Bristow,” declared
+Shirley. “Surely, Dad, there is no reason
+why we should tell any one anything.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I will promise for myself and the others,” he
+said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very well, sir. What I would say is this:
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_33'></a>33</span>
+Take my advice, and under no circumstances sail
+on the <em>Yucatan</em> to-morrow!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing gazed at the young man in perfect
+amazement, as did the others in the room. Mr.
+Willing was the first to regain his composure.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why?” he asked quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I can’t go into explanations,” replied the young
+man hurriedly; “all I can do is warn you that it
+is not safe.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And why isn’t it safe?” asked Shirley, now taking
+a hand in the conversation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That I cannot tell you, either. But you all
+know that a state of war exists between the countries
+of Europe.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What has that to do with us?” asked Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You are asking me hard questions,” said Bristow,
+“and I cannot answer as I would like to. Let
+it be enough that there is danger because of it.
+And if there should even be no danger aboard the
+<em>Yucatan</em>, it will exist in Colon.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“In Colon?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes. One week from to-day Colon will no
+longer be safe!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is my belief you are out of your head, young
+man,” declared Mr. Willing grimly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow shook his head positively.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am telling you facts,” he declared. “I can’t
+say any more.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And why won’t we be safe aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_34'></a>34</span>
+demanded Shirley. “The ship isn’t going to
+sink, is it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, but—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No European country will dare to molest it,”
+declared Dick, “and I can see no reason why there
+should be danger at Colon.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I was afraid I couldn’t convince you,” said Bristow.
+“However, I have done my best. Good
+night.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He bowed and left the room.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you suppose he is talking about, Dad?”
+asked Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know,” was the reply, “and I don’t care.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All buncombe,” agreed Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I don’t care what it is,” exclaimed Shirley.
+“We have set our hearts on this trip, and we
+are going to take it. That’s all there is about that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good for you, Shirley,” agreed Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick Stanley was the only member of the party
+who did not speak. He sat quietly in his chair,
+thinking.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_35'></a>35</span><a name='chV' id='chV'></a>CHAPTER V.—ABOARD THE YUCATAN.</h2>
+<p>
+The <em>Yucatan</em>, upon leaving New York, did not
+head straight for Colon. Her route took her down
+the coast, where she would make several stops.
+The first would be at Savannah, then Jacksonville,
+and the third, and last before touching at Colon,
+would be Havana, Cuba.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing had selected this vessel for the
+simple reason that it did put in at these southern
+ports, for he wished to give the girls an opportunity
+of seeing as much as possible on the journey.
+After rounding into the Pacific, following her passage
+of the Panama Canal, the vessel was scheduled
+to put in at the seaports of several of the Central
+American republics and one or two Mexican ports.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton, Dick and the two
+girls stood forward on the gallery deck of the great
+ship as she got under way and slowly backed out
+of her slip into the North River.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was early afternoon, the sun shone brightly
+and it was very warm. All day the city had sweltered
+beneath the terrible heat, but as the ship gradually
+gathered headway a breeze sprang up and
+blew refreshingly across the deck.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_36'></a>36</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“This is something like it,” declared Mr. Willing,
+removing his yachting cap and passing his
+handkerchief over his forehead.
+</p>
+<p>
+The awnings were stretched, and all took the
+steamer chairs they had secured. These they
+pulled close to the rail, and then gazed off across
+the water.
+</p>
+<p>
+Directly the Statue of Liberty came into view.
+The girls gazed at it curiously as they passed and
+headed for the open sea.
+</p>
+<p>
+Gradually the lofty spires of the great buildings
+faded from view, and then the Statue of Liberty
+disappeared. To starboard could be seen the distant
+shore of New Jersey, and to port nothing but
+the broad expanse of the Atlantic.
+</p>
+<p>
+Darkness descended and with it a cooler breeze.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Time to eat,” said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+They made their way to the dining room below,
+where they were seated at the captain’s table. The
+supper was excellent, far beyond Shirley’s expectations.
+The meal over they returned on deck.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing had secured a suite of four rooms
+well forward on the promenade deck, and after
+enjoying the cooling breeze for some time, all
+made their way there.
+</p>
+<p>
+The strains of a band now floated to them from
+the main salon. They made their way out. Then
+the three young people started on a tour of the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_37'></a>37</span>
+ship. They took in everything with breathless interest.
+</p>
+<p>
+“This is indeed a floating palace,” commented
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Isn’t it though,” agreed Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick was no less enthusiastic in his praise.
+</p>
+<p>
+After a stroll about they rejoined the two elder
+men in the salon. Then it was that Shirley bethought
+herself of the fact that young Bristow had
+said he would be aboard.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I haven’t seen anything of him,” she said.
+</p>
+<p>
+Neither had the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps he missed the boat,” said Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll have a look at the passenger list,” said
+Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+He did so, and there he saw “Henry Bristow,
+New York,” and the number of his stateroom.
+He went up and knocked on the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come in,” called a voice.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick entered the room, then started back in surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow lay propped up in bed, reading. Around
+his head was a white bandage. Dick hastened to
+his side.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, what is the matter?” he exclaimed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Accident,” replied Bristow, with a slight smile,
+and volunteered no further information.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick did not press him for an explanation.
+After some little talk, in the course of which Bristow
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_38'></a>38</span>
+said he did not require anything and announced
+that he would be perfectly fit on the morrow, Dick
+took his leave and rejoined the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And how was he hurt?” asked Mr. Willing,
+after Dick had reported what he had learned.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He didn’t say and I didn’t ask him,” he replied.
+“But I am sure there is something strange
+about it, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am beginning to think that myself,” agreed
+Colonel Ashton. “He’s a queer one. Now, I
+wonder why he warned us not to sail on this ship?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s too deep for me,” declared Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have it,” exclaimed Shirley suddenly. “Perhaps
+he is an agent of one of the foreign countries,
+England or Germany.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick looked at the girl in unfeigned surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What makes you think that?” he asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know. I don’t really believe it; I just
+happened to think of it. Wouldn’t it be fun if he
+was?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, that all depends,” replied Dick. “It depends
+on what his business aboard would be.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But what could it be in such a case?” questioned
+Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, it might be lots of things. But I don’t
+put any stock in such an explanation.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nor I,” declared Mr. Willing. “It’s my belief
+the young man is in trouble of some kind, and I’d
+like to help him out if I could. I like him.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_39'></a>39</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“And so do I,” agreed Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“To tell the truth, I don’t know whether I do or
+not,” said Dick slowly. “He’s agreeable, and all
+that; but there is something very peculiar about
+him. I am sure there is something wrong.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“If I get a good chance, I shall ask him,” declared
+Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’ll have about the same luck Dad did when
+he asked him his business,” retorted Shirley, “and
+that wasn’t much.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Take my advice, all of you, and let him alone,”
+remarked Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That is good advice, Ashton,” declared Mr.
+Willing. “But come, it’s bedtime and we shall want
+to be about early in the morning to enjoy some of
+this ocean breeze.”
+</p>
+<p>
+An hour later all were asleep.
+</p>
+<p>
+Had they been about they would have seen a
+strange sight.
+</p>
+<p>
+On the upper deck aft, as the ship’s bell chimed
+midnight, three men sat in deep conversation.
+Two of them were strangers, but the third Shirley
+or any of her party would immediately have recognized
+as Henry Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+And there would also have been something else
+noticeable. The bandage had been removed from
+his head, nor was there wound nor swelling to show
+why it should have been tied up in the first place.
+</p>
+<p>
+The three men talked for perhaps fifteen minutes
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_40'></a>40</span>
+in low whispers and then parted, going their several
+ways.
+</p>
+<p>
+As he had promised, Bristow was about the ship
+the following morning, but his head was once more
+bandaged. Mabel, true to her words of the night
+before, seized the first opportunity and asked him
+how he had been injured.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That,” was the quiet reply, “I cannot say.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel was highly indignant, and took herself off,
+leaving the young man smiling after her. Then he
+shrugged his shoulders and walked away.
+</p>
+<p>
+All morning the sun shone warm and bright,
+though it was not too hot for comfort. It was
+shortly after noon when the passengers were treated
+to an interesting sight.
+</p>
+<p>
+Some distance to port came the smoke of another
+ship, and as it drew nearer an air of subdued
+excitement became apparent on the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Armed cruiser off the port bow, sir!” came the
+hail from the lookout.
+</p>
+<p>
+All rushed toward the rail, and stood looking at
+the large ship of war, as she bore down toward
+them. There was no flag at her masthead, and so
+the passengers were unable to determine her nationality.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What can she be?” exclaimed Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“British, I suppose,” was Dick’s answer. “She’ll
+show her colors presently, I guess.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick was right. Five minutes later the British
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_41'></a>41</span>
+ensign was run up the masthead and fluttered in
+the breeze.
+</p>
+<p>
+A great cheer broke from most of the passengers
+aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>. Shirley and Mabel joined in
+it.
+</p>
+<p>
+At that moment Dick caught sight of the face
+of Bristow, who stood near. His lips were compressed,
+and he scowled fiercely.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He’s no Englishman, that’s sure,” muttered the
+young man to himself.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly, from across the water, came the sound
+of a big gun, and a solid shot struck the water dead
+ahead of the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+Immediately her engines were stopped, and the
+passenger steamer came to a stop.
+</p>
+<p>
+Instantly wild alarm spread over the ship.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ve been fired on,” cried Shirley. “Will
+they sink us?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, I guess not,” he replied. “That’s just a
+signal to heave-to and give an account of ourselves.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But what business have they stopping an American
+ship?” exclaimed Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is permissible under the laws of war,” explained
+Dick. “You see, the <em>Yucatan</em> might be an
+enemy flying the American flag. As soon as they
+find out we are all right, they will allow us to proceed.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_42'></a>42</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“And would we have to stop just the same for a
+German?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wouldn’t like that,” declared Shirley. “I
+don’t mind the English. My grandmother was
+English, you know.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I guess my sympathies are a little that
+way, too,” agreed Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+The wireless now began to sputter as messages
+were exchanged between the <em>Yucatan</em> and the British
+cruiser. The latter had approached close
+enough to make out the <em>Yucatan</em>, and now signalled
+her to proceed on her course.
+</p>
+<p>
+As the big ship of war turned and made off, a
+second ovation was given her by the passengers.
+Men waved their hats and women their handkerchiefs.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly Shirley seized Dick by the arm, and
+pointed, whispering:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look at that!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Far aft, Henry Bristow gazed across the water
+at the British cruiser, and Shirley had perceived
+that there was hate in his eyes. Even as Dick
+looked in the direction Shirley pointed, Bristow
+raised a fist and shook it fiercely at the receding
+war vessel, while strange words issued from between
+his lips.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_43'></a>43</span><a name='chVI' id='chVI'></a>CHAPTER VI.—SHIRLEY LENDS AID.</h2>
+<p>
+“Look, Mabel, did you see that woman steal that
+bolt of silk?”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was Shirley who spoke. They stood among
+the crowd that thronged the largest department
+store in Savannah, Ga. The <em>Yucatan</em> had put into
+Savannah early that morning, and learning that the
+vessel would not get under way again until late in
+the afternoon, Shirley and Mabel had gone uptown
+to purchase a few souvenirs of the Georgia city.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was just after entering the store that Shirley’s
+attention was attracted by the peculiar actions of a
+young woman who darted somewhat furtively from
+one counter to another. While the attention of the
+clerks was given to customers, Shirley had seen the
+woman slip a bolt of expensive silk from the counter
+and hide it under a long flowing cape, which she
+wore in spite of the heat.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel shook her head negatively in response to
+Shirley’s question.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Which one?” she asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley pointed to the figure of the woman who
+was now gazing at a pretty array of expensive laces.
+Both girls watched her carefully; and directly, as
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_44'></a>44</span>
+the crowd about her became more dense, they saw
+her hand go stealthily forth and take several small
+bolts of the high-priced material.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well what do you think of that?” demanded
+Mabel. “I have heard of such things, but I never
+expected to see it. What shall we do?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nothing,” replied Shirley decidedly. “It’s none
+of our business.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But won’t the poor clerks have to make good
+the loss?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know about that. But if we get mixed
+up in it we are likely to gain too much notoriety.
+Let’s move away from here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They pushed their way through the crowd when
+Shirley came suddenly into violent contact with a
+figure hurrying from the opposite direction. The
+latter drew back and lifted his cap.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Miss Willing,” he said. “I beg your pardon.
+I didn’t look where I was going.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley glanced up in surprise at hearing her
+name spoken. Then she recognized the figure with
+whom she had collided.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, Mr. Bristow,” she said. “I thought I
+left you aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I came ashore to do a little shopping, as you
+young ladies call it,” replied Bristow with a laugh.
+“I shall have to hurry on.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He lifted his cap and was gone.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_45'></a>45</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+The two girls continued to stroll about through
+the store, eyeing the bargains appreciatively.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I guess we have seen enough,” said Mabel
+finally. “We may as well return to the ship.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As they started toward the door they became
+aware of the sounds of confusion behind them.
+For a moment they hesitated, then their curiosity
+overcame them and they turned back.
+</p>
+<p>
+Far down the aisle a large crowd had gathered.
+The girls could hear the loud tones of one of the
+floor walkers calling for the store detective. Shirley
+and Mabel elbowed their way through the
+crowd, and presently were able to see what was
+going on.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley uttered an exclamation of amazement and
+clutched Mabel by the arm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look at that!” she cried in a low voice.
+</p>
+<p>
+And well might she have been amazed. For
+there, in the center of the crowd, his arm grasped
+tightly by the big floor walker, was Henry Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+His face was red and he was plainly very angry.
+However, he was making no effort to release himself.
+He controlled himself with an effort and
+spoke.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I tell you you are making a mistake,” he said
+quietly, and his voice carried to the two girls.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is that so?” sneered the floor walker. “So
+you deny you are a shop-lifter, eh? Well, I didn’t
+suppose you would admit it. How do you account
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_46'></a>46</span>
+for the possession of this valuable piece of lace the
+clerk saw you getting away with?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It must have caught on my coat,” was the reply.
+“I didn’t try to steal it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You didn’t, eh? We’ll see as soon as the house
+detective arrives. I reckon you have plenty of stuff
+stowed away in your pockets.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I haven’t,” declared Bristow angrily.
+“You’re going to be sorry for this before you get
+through.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well what do you think of that?” demanded
+Mabel, who had stood with open mouth during this
+conversation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I think that he is innocent,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+She glanced quickly around the store, and as she
+did so her eyes fell upon the woman she had so recently
+seen appropriating articles from the counter.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There goes the woman who did it,” she declared,
+pointing.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel looked and nodded her head.
+</p>
+<p>
+The woman was coming directly toward them,
+pushing her way through the crowd vigorously.
+Shirley stepped forward and barred her progress.
+</p>
+<p>
+At the same moment Shirley raised her voice and
+called out:
+</p>
+<p>
+“That man is innocent, Mr. Floorwalker. Here
+is the shop-lifter.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The woman again tried to push by Shirley, but
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_47'></a>47</span>
+the latter maneuvered so as to be directly in front
+of her at every step.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley’s words caused a commotion. Willing
+hands darted out and seized the woman, and she
+was taken before the man who still grasped young
+Bristow by the arm.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel pushed their way forward.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I saw this woman steal a bolt of silk and some
+laces,” declared Shirley. “I would have said nothing
+about it had not Mr. Bristow, whom I know,
+been accused.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It isn’t true!” cried the woman. “The girl is
+in the plot with the man.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley’s face grew red.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am not!” she declared. “This woman is
+guilty. She put the things under that long cape.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The floor walker was plainly mystified. He
+glanced from one to the other.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, it will do no harm to have a look,” he
+declared. He turned to the woman. “Will you
+remove your cape, madam?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The woman drew back, and pulled the garment
+closer about her.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, I won’t!” she declared, “I—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very well,” said the floor walker. “I shall
+have the floor matron search you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He turned and called to one of the clerks. But
+the woman waited for no more. With a single
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_48'></a>48</span>
+move she took off her cape, and threw it to the
+floor.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There,” she said, throwing out her arms, “you
+may see that I have nothing.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I saw her take them,” declared Shirley, looking
+at the woman in surprise, for she could not see a
+sign of a stolen article.
+</p>
+<p>
+A frown gathered on the floor walker’s face as
+he glanced at Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“This looks rather bad for you.” he said to her
+pointedly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley took a step back.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you mean?” she asked in no little
+alarm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It seems that the lady is telling the truth. What
+was your object in accusing her?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I tell you I saw her take them,” declared Shirley
+again.
+</p>
+<p>
+The floor walker shrugged his shoulders.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was Mabel who finally cleared up the situation.
+The woman’s cape still lay on the floor where she
+had thrown it. Mabel stooped down to pick it up,
+and as she did so the woman also snatched at it.
+</p>
+<p>
+But Mabel was the quicker of the two and captured
+the garment. Quickly she turned it wrong
+side out, and as she did so there was a gasp from
+the crowd.
+</p>
+<p>
+For the inside of the coat was literally filled
+with secret pockets. Mabel thrust her hand in and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_49'></a>49</span>
+pulled out the bolt of silk. She held it above her
+head.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Here it is!” she cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I bought and paid for that,” sputtered the angry
+woman.
+</p>
+<p>
+One after another Mabel now produced other
+articles of value, which she exposed to the view of
+the crowd. And in each case the woman’s explanation
+was the same:
+</p>
+<p>
+“I paid for that!”
+</p>
+<p>
+But the floor walker was not to be fooled, nor
+was the manager of the store, who came up at that
+moment. The former released his hold on young Bristow
+and made him an abject apology.
+</p>
+<p>
+One of the women detectives was called, and the
+shop-lifter turned over to her. Then the manager
+addressed Shirley and Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I owe you two young ladies a debt of gratitude,”
+he said. “This shop-lifting has been going on for
+a month or more and we have lost heavily. Thanks
+to you I believe we have the culprit at last. Without
+your assistance she would have escaped.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel acknowledged this praise with
+slight inclinations of the heads, and then Shirley
+spoke to Young Bristow, who stood near.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Are you going back to the boat, Mr. Bristow?
+We shall be glad of your company.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The young man accepted this invitation, and the
+three made their way from the store.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_50'></a>50</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I can’t thank you enough, either of you,” he
+declared as they walked along. “I was in a ticklish
+position, and but for your assistance might have
+been put to no end of trouble.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“How did you happen to be accused?” asked
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, I was walking through the aisle, and because
+of the crowd I was shoved against the
+counter. A piece of lace caught on a button of my
+coat, and I dragged it with me as I went by. Then
+the girl behind the counter cried out that some
+one had stolen something. The floor walker saw
+the lace caught in my coat and collared me. That’s
+all.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I see,” said Shirley, and added with a smile:
+“You certainly did look funny there!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Did I? Well, I didn’t feel very funny. I was
+afraid I would be held long enough to make me
+miss the ship, and I can’t afford to do that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then your business in Colon is very important?”
+asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Young Bristow looked at her in silence for some
+moments, and Mabel grew red as she thought she
+was to be rebuffed again. But she wasn’t. Bristow
+finally answered her question.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very important,” he said quietly.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_51'></a>51</span><a name='chVII' id='chVII'></a>CHAPTER VII.—MABEL SHOWS HER COURAGE.</h2>
+<p>
+“By the way,” said Shirley as they walked along,
+“how is your wound? I see you have removed the
+bandage.”
+</p>
+<p>
+A startled expression flitted across the young
+man’s face, but neither girl perceived it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s much better,” he made answer. “Not even
+a scar left. It didn’t amount to much, after all.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Fifteen minutes later they were back aboard the
+<em>Yucatan</em>, where Shirley related their experiences to
+others of their party.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll have to keep a closer watch on you two,”
+declared Mr. Willing. “Every time you get away
+by yourselves you run into trouble. And you won’t
+always come out of it so easily.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Several hours later the big steamship moved majestically
+out of the harbor and soon was headed
+down the coast once more. She came to anchor
+again the following morning at Jacksonville, the
+last American port at which she would touch until
+she reached San Diego, California. The Willing
+party went ashore again, but this time, true to his
+word, Mr. Willing would not permit the girls to
+wander away by themselves.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_52'></a>52</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+As they strolled about, Shirley became suddenly
+ill. She knew it was nothing serious, brought on
+probably by the excessive heat. Therefore she informed
+the others that she was going back aboard
+the ship, as she wished to lie down. Mabel agreed
+to go with her.
+</p>
+<p>
+The fathers saw the two girls into a taxicab,
+which soon dropped them at the pier, where they
+immediately went to their suite.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley felt much better now that she was out
+of the sun, and lying down on the sofa picked up a
+book and commenced to read. Mabel sat down at
+a little desk to write a letter.
+</p>
+<p>
+In spite of the cooling breeze made by the electric
+fan in the room, it was still rather warm, and
+Mabel left the outer door open to get what breeze
+they could from over the water. Mabel was in
+the first room, and Shirley in the one beyond.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly Mabel heard footsteps running down
+the deck toward their suite. She glanced up idly,
+wondering why any one should put himself to
+so much exertion on such a hot day, and even as
+she looked up a figure darted into the room and
+closed the door behind him.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel jumped quickly to her feet and faced the
+newcomer, who, she now perceived, held a revolver
+in his hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel was not frightened by the sight of the
+weapon, for she was not unacquainted with the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_53'></a>53</span>
+use of firearms and had faced more than one dangerous
+situation; but as the man turned and faced
+her, she uttered a cry of amazement.
+</p>
+<p>
+The man was Henry Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow, who had not perceived that the room
+was occupied, turned at the sound of Mabel’s voice,
+his revolver half raised. At sight of Mabel he
+dropped his arm, and removed his cap.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Please pardon me for this intrusion,” he said
+quietly. “I did not know the cabin was occupied
+nor whose it was. I just happened to see the door
+open, and I slipped in.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is the matter?” asked Mabel, who realized
+that something must be wrong.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, nothing,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+Before Mabel could utter another word, there
+was a loud knock on the closed door.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley, in response to the knock, came in from
+the next room. She took in the situation at a
+glance, but did not betray her surprise by so much
+as an exclamation. She advanced quickly toward
+Mabel and young Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is wrong?” she asked in a low voice.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow waved his revolver toward the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They want me,” he said. “I can’t allow you
+girls to be drawn into this, so I shall go out.”
+</p>
+<p>
+A dark expression passed over his face, and his
+hand tightened on the revolver. Shirley became
+alarmed.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_54'></a>54</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+She motioned him to the room beyond.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You go in there,” she said. “No one will
+bother you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+For a moment Bristow hesitated, then he bowed
+and passed in. As he went by her, Mabel reached
+out and relieved him of his revolver. Bristow
+started to protest, then changed his mind and said
+nothing.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel motioned to Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You go in too,” she said. “I’ll stay here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley obeyed without a word. Then Mabel
+walked to the little center table, and put the revolver
+in the drawer.
+</p>
+<p>
+Came another sharp knock on the door. Mabel
+advanced and threw it open.
+</p>
+<p>
+Three men stood in the doorway, and all removed
+their hats at sight of her.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it?” demanded Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We are searching for a man named Von
+Blusen, who is aboard this ship. We trailed him
+down the deck here, and he disappeared. Have
+you seen him?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know no one by that name,” returned Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He’s a young fellow,” went on the spokesman
+of the three, “and a very smooth-spoken chap. All
+the other cabins are locked but this one. I happen
+to know that this door was open a few minutes
+ago. I thought he might possibly have come in
+here?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_55'></a>55</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+He looked at Mabel inquiringly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know no one by that name,” declared the girl
+again.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps you know him by some other name,
+then?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel did not reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+The man became suspicious.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am afraid we shall have to search this cabin,
+miss,” he said. “I am not convinced he is not in
+here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it you want with this man?” asked
+Mabel, her curiosity getting the better of her.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I don’t mind telling you. Von Blusen is
+a German and I have been tipped off that he is up
+to some mischief, I don’t know just what. My
+orders are to take him ashore and turn him over
+to the U. S. authorities.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And who are you?” demanded Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Me? Why, I’m a United States special officer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He threw back his coat and exposed a badge,
+which he covered hurriedly. Mabel, therefore, did
+not see it clearly. Something seemed to tell her,
+however, that the man was not telling the truth.
+</p>
+<p>
+She stepped back quickly to the little center table,
+and as the first man advanced after her, she quickly
+opened the drawer and produced Bristow’s revolver,
+which she levelled at the three men.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You can’t come in here,” she said quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+The foremost man drew back, as did the others.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_56'></a>56</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, miss,” said the spokesman, “we must search
+the cabin. I am sure Von Blusen came in here.
+Will you deny it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t have to deny it,” declared Mabel angrily.
+“If you are United States officers, as you
+claim, you will have some means of identification.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I showed you my badge,” said the man.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, and you were careful that I didn’t get a
+good look at it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But we must make the search.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then you must have an order. I know that
+much. I know you have to have a piece of paper,
+or something—a warrant I believe it is called.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I haven’t any warrant now,” was the reply,
+“but I am going to make the search just the same.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He stepped forward, but Mabel covered him
+with her revolver.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You have come in here against my command,”
+she said quietly, “and I should be perfectly justified
+in shooting you, as I would a burglar.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The man sought to temporize.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now, see here miss—” he began.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel took a step forward. She was growing
+angry.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You just get right out of here,” she exclaimed.
+</p>
+<p>
+The man drew back a step and scratched his head
+perplexedly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Miss,” he said, “you are making a big mistake
+to shield this man. I tell you he is plotting mischief
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_57'></a>57</span>
+which may involve the United States in war.
+We must have him before the ship sails.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, you won’t get him in here,” declared the
+girl.
+</p>
+<p>
+Again the man hesitated, then seemed on the
+point of moving forward again.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I warn you for the last time to get out of here,”
+said Mabel very quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Once more her revolver came to bear on the
+man, and he drew back, throwing up his hands with
+a gesture of dismay. Then he turned to his companions.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What can we do against that?” he asked. “We
+can’t use a girl roughly, and if the ship gets beyond
+the three-mile limit, we can’t get him till we
+reach Colon.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Guess we’ll have to wait then,” said one of the
+others.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yep, guess we will.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The leader turned to Mabel and made her a low
+bow.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m sorry you interfered with us,” he said.
+“You’ll find before long that you have done wrong.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps I shall,” said Mabel; “but I couldn’t
+permit you to invade my cabin.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Tell you what, Tim,” said one of the men,
+“we’ll just camp out here and get him when he
+comes out. He’s likely to come out before we sail.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good idea,” agreed the leader. “We’ll do it.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_58'></a>58</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Again he made a low bow to Mabel and followed
+his men out.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sorry to have troubled you,” he muttered as
+he took his departure.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Bristow now came in from the other
+room.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You did splendidly, Miss Ashton,” declared
+Bristow warmly. “I was afraid you would allow
+them to enter.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Before Mabel could reply there came the sound
+of voices outside. One, raised in anger, was that
+of Mr. Willing. A moment later, followed by
+Colonel Ashton and Dick, he entered the room.
+</p>
+<p>
+His gaze fell upon Henry Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So,” he growled, “it’s you they’re after, eh?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, sir,” returned Bristow quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, you sit down over there, young man,”
+said Mr. Willing, pointing to a chair. “I’m going
+to tell you a few things, and I don’t care whether
+you like them or not.”
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chVIII' id='chVIII'></a>CHAPTER VIII.—THEIR FIRST QUARREL.</h2>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel glanced at Mr. Willing in
+surprise. Young Bristow took the seat indicated,
+and the others also sat down.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_59'></a>59</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“First,” said Mr. Willing to Bristow, “I am going
+to ask you a question or two. If you refuse
+to answer, I shall, of course, draw my own conclusions.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The young man nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Proceed, sir,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right. Now, in the first place, are you connected,
+in any capacity, with the German government?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That I cannot answer,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very good! Now, then, are you aboard this
+ship at the command of the German government?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I cannot answer that question, either, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Suit yourself. Is it not a fact that those with
+whom you come in contact—those who seem to be
+your friends—are in danger because of their associations
+with you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I suppose you are right, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just as I expected,” declared Mr. Willing.
+“Now I’ve got this to say. Already you have been
+the means of getting my daughter and the colonel’s
+daughter into your scrapes. They have come to
+your assistance twice. Also Dick has been with
+you on one adventure. You will admit that, of
+course?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good. Then here is my ultimatum: I want
+you to keep away from me and mine. I don’t want
+you to cross this threshold again; and I don’t want
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_60'></a>60</span>
+you to speak to any of us should you chance to
+encounter us. Do I make myself plain?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perfectly, sir,” replied Bristow rising from his
+chair, his face pale.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am glad I do,” declared Mr. Willing. “I
+haven’t any use for a spy, be he German or English.
+Now you can get out of here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Without a word Bristow moved toward the door.
+But Mabel leaped forward and barred his path.
+She turned to Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Surely you wouldn’t send him out to be captured?”
+she exclaimed. “Those men are waiting
+for him out there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That is none of our affair,” said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I agree with Mabel in that,” declared Shirley.
+“If he goes out before we are beyond the three-mile
+limit, he will be taken prisoner.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And if he isn’t there is no telling what may
+happen,” commented Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dad,” said Shirley, “please let him stay until
+we have passed the three-mile limit? Please!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing hesitated.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I agree,” he said at length.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow spoke to Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall stay, sir,” he said, “but it is because I
+must avoid capture if it is possible. Otherwise
+I wouldn’t stay in the same room with you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing smiled. He didn’t mind that kind
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_61'></a>61</span>
+of talk, but not so Shirley. She sprang to her feet
+and faced Bristow angrily.
+</p>
+<p>
+“How dare you speak to my father like that?”
+she demanded. “How dare you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow turned his head away, and made no reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel quickly came to the support of Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And why shouldn’t he?” she asked. “He
+hasn’t done anything and your father was very
+mean.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, Mabel,” exclaimed Shirley in surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I mean it,” declared Mabel. “Your father
+was mean.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He couldn’t be too mean to a German,” exclaimed
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You people make me tired,” declared Mabel angrily.
+“Why are you forever jumping on the Germans?
+They are in the right and they are going to
+win.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“They are not!” This from Shirley. “The
+English are going to win, and I hope they do!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And I hope the Germans win,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley! Mabel!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton had now taken
+a hand in the conversation. But both girls were
+too angry to heed them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And just because this man is a German you
+are all against him. If he were English you would
+be shaking hands with him.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_62'></a>62</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel was losing control of herself.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, Mabel,” said Shirley. “You know that
+is not true.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know it is true,” declared the girl.
+</p>
+<p>
+Colonel Ashton took her firmly by the arm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mabel, I am surprised at you,” he said. “Go
+to your room.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s Shirley’s room, it’s not mine,” cried Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley advanced toward her friend.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mabel, what do you mean?” she asked quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You know what I mean. You told me I wasn’t
+telling the truth.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley compressed her lips and stepped back.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing took a hand in the conversation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Unless this foolishness ceases we shall leave the
+boat at Havana and return home immediately,” he
+said quietly. “I will have none of this.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t care,” declared Shirley, also now very
+angry.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Neither do I,” this from Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley, go to your room,” ordered Mr. Willing.
+“I am your father and I will be obeyed.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley glanced at her father’s stern face, and
+obeyed. She knew that when he looked like that
+he was not to be trifled with.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mabel, you go with her,” said Colonel Ashton
+quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel hesitated.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Do you hear me?” asked the colonel.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_63'></a>63</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel also realized that she had gone too far.
+She made her way after Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Inside their room the girls did not speak to each
+other. In the heart of each there was a peculiar
+feeling, and each knew that, in a measure, she
+was to blame. But neither was ready to give in
+yet.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was their first quarrel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Outside Mr. Willing turned to young Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+“This,” he said, “is your doing. And when you
+once set foot outside this cabin, don’t you ever
+cross my path again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The <em>Yucatan</em> was under way now, and from the
+window Mr. Willing could see the three men still
+waiting on the outside. But at last they took their
+departure and Mr. Willing knew they had passed
+beyond the three-mile limit. He turned again to
+Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now Bristow or Von Blusen or whatever your
+name is,” he said, “get out.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow turned a dark look upon him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You have insulted me,” he said, “and you shall
+pay for it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I couldn’t insult you, you little whipper-snapper,”
+said Mr. Willing angrily. “Are you going
+to get out of here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“When I’ve had my say,” declared the young
+man angrily. “If it were not that I am on important
+business I would chastise you right now.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_64'></a>64</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is it because you have important business or
+because you are a child?” asked Mr. Willing smiling.
+</p>
+<p>
+Bristow took a threatening step forward, but now
+Dick took a hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s enough of this,” he said sternly, and putting
+forth a hand he pushed Bristow back.
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter’s face turned a dull red, and he struck
+at Dick, who promptly slapped him across the face.
+Dick also was angry now.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You shall pay for that blow,” shouted Bristow.
+“I can’t fight you now, but when I have
+completed my work I shall seek you out.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I won’t be very hard to find,” declared Dick.
+“Now get out.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He took the infuriated Bristow by the neck and
+the bottom of the coat and ran him out the door.
+Then he closed it after him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Rather a fiery young man, that,” remarked Colonel
+Ashton grimly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Rather,” agreed Mr. Willing dryly. He turned
+to the other room and called: “Shirley! Mabel!”
+</p>
+<p>
+A moment later the two girls came forth. Mr.
+Willing looked at them severely for some moments
+before he spoke.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You should both be ashamed of yourselves,”
+he said at last. “The idea of such foolishness.
+Why, you have never quarreled before.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And there will be no more of it,” declared Colonel
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_65'></a>65</span>
+Ashton grimly. “At the next sign of trouble
+we shall turn right around and go home.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, Mabel started it,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I did not, you started it,” exclaimed Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley!” said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mabel!” exclaimed Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls became silent, but continued to glare
+at each other.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then, suddenly, a smile broke over Shirley’s
+face. Her father breathed more freely. Even
+Colonel Ashton looked at the two girls eagerly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then Shirley advanced toward Mabel and held
+out her hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m sorry for what I said, Mabel,” she declared
+earnestly.
+</p>
+<p>
+For a moment Mabel hesitated, but for a moment
+only. Then she jumped quickly forward, and
+ignoring her friend’s outstretched hand, threw her
+arms around her and broke into tears.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It was all my fault,” she sobbed. “You didn’t
+say anything.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes I did, too,” said Shirley. “It was as much
+my fault as it was yours.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No it wasn’t.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes it was.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It was not.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The two girls drew back from each other.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I say it was,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And I say it wasn’t,” declared Mabel.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_66'></a>66</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is the matter with you two?” demanded
+Mr. Willing, stepping between them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nothing, Dad,” said Shirley, smiling again.
+She turned again to Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m sorry,” she said quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And so am I,” said Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Once more they fell into each other’s arms, laughing
+happily. Then, arm in arm, they turned and
+made their way to their own rooms, absolutely
+ignoring the presence of the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick, who had felt decidedly uncomfortable during
+this scene, grinned foolishly. Colonel Ashton
+laughed aloud, and Mr. Willing smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Funny things happen, my boy,” exclaimed the
+latter, slapping Dick on the back. “You learn
+something every minute.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And in the other room Mabel said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“We shall never, never quarrel again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Never!” agreed Shirley.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chIX' id='chIX'></a>CHAPTER IX.—ADRIFT.</h2>
+<p>
+In the distance the Cuban city of Havana was
+slipping slowly from sight. Aft on the promenade
+deck Shirley, Mabel and the others of the party,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_67'></a>67</span>
+together with many other passengers, were casting
+last looks at the island metropolis.
+</p>
+<p>
+The sun was just sinking below the horizon, but
+there were still several hours before darkness would
+fall. The view was indeed picturesque and the
+passengers were impressed with it.
+</p>
+<p>
+The steamship <em>Yucatan</em> was now on the last leg
+of her journey toward Colon.
+</p>
+<p>
+In the main salon a crowd of men had gathered.
+On the upper deck, the gallery deck, the promenade
+deck and the main deck they had also gathered in
+knots. They blocked the main staircase and the
+exits from the engine room below.
+</p>
+<p>
+A group somewhat larger than the rest had assembled
+about the captain’s cabin. A close observer
+would have noticed that each man among
+these different groups wore a peculiar little button
+in the lapel of his coat.
+</p>
+<p>
+Each group was silent. It appeared that they
+were waiting for something. Now a young man
+appeared and spoke to the first group holding his
+open watch in his hand. Then he passed on to
+the next, then to the next, until he had approached
+all. Then he took his place with the others near
+the bridge, and waited, watch in hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly he pulled a little whistle from his
+pocket, put it to his lips, waited a moment, and
+then blew a shrill blast, that penetrated to the
+farthest part of the ship.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_68'></a>68</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Instantly the various groups of men wearing the
+button of peculiar design came to action.
+</p>
+<p>
+The passengers on the promenade deck, the Willing
+party among them, found themselves under the
+muzzles of many revolvers. On the gallery, the
+deck, the main salon, the grand stairway a like condition
+prevailed.
+</p>
+<p>
+Only the men who guarded the exit from the
+engine and boiler rooms were inactive, but these
+stood with drawn revolvers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A dozen men swarmed from the bridge into the
+wheel house, where they confronted the pilot, the
+Captain, the first and second officers, who chanced
+to be there together. Officers in other parts of the
+ship also had been held up.
+</p>
+<p>
+The surprise had been complete. The <em>Yucatan</em>
+was at the mercy of this army of conspirators, whoever
+they chanced to be.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel had eyed the strange proceedings
+upon their section of the ship with no less
+amazement than the rest of the passengers. Mr.
+Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick were equally astonished.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it, a wholesale hold-up?” demanded the
+colonel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Worse, I’m afraid,” declared Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know!” exclaimed Shirley suddenly. “Mr.
+Bristow is concerned in this.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_69'></a>69</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness! I believe you are right Shirley,”
+declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know I am right,” returned Shirley positively.
+“This is why he sailed on the <em>Yucatan</em>.”
+</p>
+<p>
+In the meantime the captors of the vessel had
+relieved all on board of whatever weapons they
+had. They had made a systematic search of the
+cabins, while some of their number kept the crew
+and passengers covered. Of the many aboard the
+ship the only ones who did not know what had
+happened were the engine crew and stokers.
+</p>
+<p>
+The wireless had been among the first points
+seized, and the operator had had no opportunity
+of sending a message.
+</p>
+<p>
+And now a young man moved about among the
+passengers, assuring them that there was no danger
+so long as they kept quiet. This young man
+came aft on the promenade deck where the Willing
+party stood.
+</p>
+<p>
+Even as Shirley had surmised, he was Henry
+Bristow.
+</p>
+<p>
+He smiled as he approached them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well,” growled Mr. Willing, “I see you have
+put the thing through.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Part of it sir, part of it,” was the reply. “The
+rest is to come.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What are you going to do now, Mr. Bristow?”
+asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter smiled at her.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_70'></a>70</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain Von Blusen, if you please, Miss Ashton,”
+he said, “I am no longer Henry Bristow, but
+Captain Friederich Von Blusen, of His Imperial
+Majesty’s service.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And what are you going to do with the ship?”
+asked Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, we shall do a little cruising,” was the
+reply. “We have established a naval base off the
+coast of Cuba, but we have no ships on this side
+of the Atlantic. Therefore we must have ships.
+This is the first.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And what are you going to do with us, captain?”
+asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Ah, that is the hard part,” was the reply, “but,
+before starting, we came to a conclusion, though
+none of the passengers is likely to be pleased. We
+shall set you adrift in small boats.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The others staggered back in dismay.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Impossible,” declared Mr. Willing. “Surely
+you are not barbarians.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“The law of necessity must be obeyed,” replied
+the captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+He took his departure.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The cold-blooded scoundrel,” declared Colonel
+Ashton. “This is what we get for helping him to
+escape.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And that is my fault,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, there is no use talking about it now,” said
+Dick. “It’s too late.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_71'></a>71</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+An hour later the new crew began getting out
+the boats, and all the passengers provided themselves
+with life preservers. Fortunately, the
+weather was calm and the sea smooth and there was
+little likelihood of a storm at this time of year.
+</p>
+<p>
+With everything in readiness, Captain Von
+Blusen once more approached the Willing party,
+and drew Mabel slightly to one side in spite of the
+protests of the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Miss Ashton,” he said, “in your cabin the other
+day you spoke of your sympathies to the German
+cause. Now I shall tell you something, for you
+have done much for me. Advise the others to make
+no attempt to reach Colon, should they be picked
+up.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And why not?” demanded Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain hesitated.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, there is no harm in telling you,” he said
+at last. “Of course, you may not know that Germany
+is trying to bring the United States into this
+war on her side. We have at last found a way.
+Just off Colon are several Japanese warships. We
+shall near them unobserved, and signal by wireless
+that a certain thing must be done, representing ourselves
+as one of the Japanese battleships.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Naturally, we shall be refused permission.
+Now we have a new invention that would enable
+us to destroy Colon from a distance, and in our
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_72'></a>72</span>
+message we shall threaten this unless the supposed
+Japanese demand is granted. Do you understand?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel nodded her head slowly. She was beyond
+words.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And when the demand is refused,” continued the
+captain “we shall use some of this new explosive.
+That will mean war between Japan and the United
+States, and therefore, England also, as she is Japan’s
+ally. Do you see?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, I see,” said Mabel quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And what do you think of the plan?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I think it is contemptible,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But, but—” began the captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t care to hear any more,” said Mabel.
+“But you will not succeed, I am sure of that. You
+can not succeed.”
+</p>
+<p>
+She turned on her heel and made her way back
+to the others, the captain standing as if rooted to
+the deck as he stared after her.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel turned the matter over in her mind. She
+felt certain that the captain had been boasting, and
+the more she thought it over the more she became
+convinced of it. Therefore, she decided to say
+nothing about it to the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+Under the muzzles of the revolvers of the captors
+of the big steamship, captain, officers, crew and
+passengers now took their places in the small boats,
+and were lowered over the side.
+</p>
+<p>
+Each boat was well stocked with provisions and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_73'></a>73</span>
+water, for the Germans had no mind to set their
+prisoners adrift and let them starve or perish of
+thirst.
+</p>
+<p>
+The shore of Cuba was not far away, and, with
+steady rowing by the men, it would be possible
+for them to reach there within twelve hours. Besides,
+there was always the chance they would be
+picked up by a passing vessel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Fortunately, the passenger list was not large.
+The bulk of it had been made up of the men who
+had later captured the ship. Therefore, officers,
+passengers and crew included, there were not more
+than three hundred set adrift.
+</p>
+<p>
+The engine room crew had been impressed into
+service by the Germans.
+</p>
+<p>
+The Willing party found themselves in the boat
+with the captain and perhaps a dozen other passengers.
+As the boat struck the water, and the men
+began to row away from the big steamship at the
+captain’s command, Shirley and Mabel were badly
+frightened.
+</p>
+<p>
+In spite of the cheering words spoken by their
+fathers, Dick and other male passengers, they did
+not bear up very well. As they looked first in one
+direction and then the other and saw nothing but
+water, they broke into tears. The small boat looked
+very small indeed to be at large upon the water.
+</p>
+<p>
+Presently all the boats were launched, and rowed
+some distance from the steamer. There they
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_74'></a>74</span>
+stopped as a sudden blast signified that the big
+ship was about to get under way and leave them.
+</p>
+<p>
+It began to grow dark. The electric lights aboard
+the large vessel glowed suddenly, and slowly the
+brilliantly lighted floating palace made off in the
+gathering darkness.
+</p>
+<p>
+As it went away and left them to the mercies
+of the sea, cries of anguish, despair and condemnation
+were hurled after the men who had thus
+set the passengers and crew adrift. Women sobbed,
+and men stood up in the boats and shook their
+fists after the steamship <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+And then the great ship disappeared from sight.
+The men in the small boats renewed their work at
+the oars, and the boats moved toward the distant
+Cuban coast.
+</p>
+<p>
+Adding to the fearfulness of their condition,
+darkness descended upon them like a pall.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chX' id='chX'></a>CHAPTER X.—COLON.</h2>
+<p>
+At a word from Mr. Willing, after several hours
+of rowing, Shirley and Mabel cuddled up in their
+end of the boat and tried to sleep; but this they
+found impossible, and all through the night they
+gazed out over the dark waters.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_75'></a>75</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Here and there the lights in the other boats were
+visible, but before morning they had lost sight of
+these. When the first faint streaks of dawn appeared
+in the east there was not another boat to
+be seen. They had become separated in the night.
+</p>
+<p>
+The almost twenty passengers in the little craft
+ate of the food that had been provided and drank
+of the water. Thus refreshed, and with the sun
+now appearing above the horizon, their predicament
+did not seem as serious as it had during the
+blackness of the night.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was not an object in sight to break the
+monotony of the water, and the boat rocked gently
+on the easy swell of the sea. The men bent to the
+oars again and sent the little craft skimming through
+the water.
+</p>
+<p>
+Came a cry from the man at the rudder, and
+the eyes of the others followed his gaze toward
+the distant horizon. They beheld a faint cloud in
+the otherwise clear sky.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Steamer!” cried the first man.
+</p>
+<p>
+The cloud approached nearer and at last the outline
+of a ship, appearing very small at that distance,
+could be made out. It was headed on a
+course that would bring it almost directly in the
+path of the smaller boat.
+</p>
+<p>
+As the hull of the vessel grew larger by its approach,
+occasional cheers broke from the lips of
+those in the little craft. So far it was impossible
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_76'></a>76</span>
+to tell whether the castaways had been sighted or
+not; but as the big ship neared them—now scarcely
+more than a mile away—the shrill blast of the
+steamer’s whistle split the air. The small boat with
+its passengers had been discovered. The passengers
+raised another cheer.
+</p>
+<p>
+Rapidly the large vessel bore down on them, and
+the little craft bobbed swiftly toward it. At last
+they came alongside.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Ladies first!” cried the captain of the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel were the first over the rail,
+where they stood awaiting the arrival of the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick were the
+last to go aboard, and no sooner were the refugees
+all on deck than the big vessel resumed her course.
+The captain motioned them to his cabin.
+</p>
+<p>
+The ship upon which they now found themselves
+proved to be the <em>Reliance</em>, with a cargo of freight
+from New Orleans for Colon.
+</p>
+<p>
+This the captain explained when he learned where
+the erstwhile refugees were bound.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We can’t offer you the same accommodations
+you had aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>,” he said, “but you
+are welcome to the best we have.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And we are indeed glad to get it, captain,” Shirley
+spoke up.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No doubt, no doubt,” smiled the captain. “All
+night in an open boat is no pleasure trip, even if
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_77'></a>77</span>
+this is the month of June,” and he ordered them
+assigned quarters forward.
+</p>
+<p>
+While by no means as large and pretentious as
+those on the <em>Yucatan</em>, the cabins were nevertheless
+clean and comfortable.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We can thank our stars that we were fortunate
+enough to be picked up so soon,” declared Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What can have become of the other boats?”
+asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Probably reached the Cuban shore,” replied
+Colonel Ashton. “We are doubtless the only ones
+that lost our course. The others more than likely
+stuck close together.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I hope they are all safe,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am sure they are,” returned her father.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now,” said Colonel Ashton, “the thing to be
+considered is, what to do when we reach Colon.
+Shall we take another steamer and continue our
+course, or shall we turn about and go home?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We don’t want to go home, Dad,” exclaimed
+Shirley. “You won’t give up the trip to San Francisco,
+will you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, I think not,” was the reply. “We can replenish
+our wardrobes in Colon sufficiently to get
+to Frisco, and we can do the rest of our buying
+there. No, we shall go on.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls clapped their hands in delight. Both
+had feared that the disaster might put an untimely
+end to their summer vacation.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_78'></a>78</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you suppose the Germans intend doing
+with the <em>Yucatan</em>?” asked Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, you heard the captain speak of a naval
+base on the coast of Cuba. They probably will run
+in there, put some big guns aboard and start out
+on a privateering cruise. There have been a couple
+of such German raiders, and they did considerable
+damage to British merchant ships before they were
+chased to the safety of internment in Newport
+News.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess that is about what they plan to do,”
+agreed Dick. “I’ll surely have one experience of
+which to write when I get back to work.”
+</p>
+<p>
+An hour later the party was gathered on deck,
+when the captain of the <em>Yucatan</em> approached.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The first thing I shall do is to report this to
+General Fullaway, at Colon,” he declared.
+</p>
+<p>
+“General Fullaway!” exclaimed Mr. Willing.
+“You don’t mean General Hugh Fullaway?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“The same,” replied the captain. “Do you know
+him?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, rather,” replied Mr. Willing. “We were
+schoolmates years ago, and have been close friends
+since. He comes from my home town. I shall
+look him up. But I didn’t know he was in command
+in Colon.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He has only been recently put in command,”
+was the reply. “I too know him well.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The <em>Reliance</em> proved to be a very slow vessel,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_79'></a>79</span>
+and it was days before the city of Colon was
+sighted.
+</p>
+<p>
+At the entrance to the Panama Canal, Colon is a
+very picturesque city. Since work on the canal
+was begun, bringing thousands of Americans to the
+country, it has been more or less metropolitan in
+character, at the same time retaining its South
+American atmosphere.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel looked about with wonder as
+they made their way through the dirty narrow
+streets toward the hotel. This, however, they
+found to be strictly up to date in all respects, and
+they were soon installed in comfortable quarters.
+</p>
+<p>
+Several hours later, Mr. Willing and Colonel
+Ashton left the hotel, announcing that they were
+going to pay their respects to General Fullaway.
+They were back several hours later and informed
+Shirley, Mabel and Dick that they were to dine
+with the general in his quarters that night.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls were naturally excited at this prospect,
+and spent most of the day in the purchase of suitable
+garments. Dick, as well as Mr. Willing and
+Colonel Ashton, also purchased more clothing to
+take the place of what had been lost when they were
+set adrift from the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+General Fullaway had already heard the story
+from the captain of the <em>Yucatan</em>, but supper over,
+he desired to hear it once more from his guests.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing related their first meeting with the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_80'></a>80</span>
+German commander, who had introduced himself
+as Henry Bristow when they had first met. He
+told of the experience aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> while the
+vessel was tied up at Jacksonville.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You did wrong not to let the men take him,
+no matter who they were,” was General Fullaway’s
+verdict.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I realize that now,” said Mr. Willing, “but who
+could have suspected such a gigantic plot?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It was a gigantic plot,” agreed the general,
+“and was carried out excellently. It must have
+been well planned.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Bristow warned us not to come to Colon,
+general,” spoke up Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He did?” exclaimed the general in surprise.
+“And why, pray?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, he said it wasn’t safe,” replied Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hm-m-m,” muttered the general, with a smile.
+“And did he tell you why?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I thought not,” laughed the general.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But he told me, general,” put in Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+The others looked at the girl in surprise, but Mabel
+bore up steadily under their scrutiny.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you mean, Mabel?” demanded Colonel
+Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You remember when he took me aside just before
+we were set adrift, father?” asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, of course.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_81'></a>81</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s when he told me, but it seemed so absurd
+and impossible that I didn’t repeat it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What was it, Miss Ashton?” asked General
+Fullaway. “Will you tell us?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He said that Colon was in danger,” replied Mabel,
+and she repeated the conversation she had had
+with Captain Von Blusen aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+The others listened to her with breathless interest,
+and there were exclamations of surprise when
+she concluded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Absurd,” said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Impossible,” Colonel Ashton agreed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It would seem so, on the face of it,” said General
+Fullaway, “and I suppose it is. It is true,
+there are two Japanese warships off the entrance to
+the Canal. They have not been allowed to pass
+through because several German merchant vessels
+are here. As soon as they have cleared, of course
+we shall permit the Japs to go through.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And have the Japs objected to the delay?” asked
+Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They have indeed. They have demanded permission
+to pass, which has been refused. That was
+yesterday. But this tale of yours,” the general
+turned to Mabel, “is incredible. I suppose the German
+commander told it to you to frighten you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I suppose that was his reason,” Mabel agreed.
+</p>
+<p>
+At this moment an orderly entered the room and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_82'></a>82</span>
+gave a message to General Fullaway. The latter
+read it, and then turned to Mabel again.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It seems that your warning may bear fruit, after
+all,” he said quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, sir?” asked the girl eagerly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, this message I have here,” said the general,
+tapping the paper with his finger, “is, or seems
+to be at least, a communication from the Japanese
+commander. He says if his ships are not allowed
+to pass through the canal to-morrow, he will destroy
+the city of Colon!”
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXI' id='chXI'></a>CHAPTER XI.—A WAR SCARE.</h2>
+<p>
+An air of intense anticipation pervaded the General’s
+dining room.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley finally broke the silence.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And will you give them permission, general?”
+she asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not without such instructions from Washington,”
+was the reply. “My duties are clearly defined.
+The Japanese ships cannot pass through the
+canal while German merchantmen are in Colon harbor.
+However, I am not at all sure the message
+is from the Japs.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_83'></a>83</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“You mean—the <em>Yucatan</em>,” asked Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+General Fullaway nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wouldn’t be at all surprised,” he replied quietly.
+“I shall communicate with Washington at once, repeating
+the story you have told me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He left the room, and returned in a few moments
+with a slip of paper which he gave to the
+officer who had brought the message.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should have a reply in a couple of hours,” he
+told the others. “Would you care to wait and hear
+the result?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Indeed we would,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was almost three hours later before the reply
+came. General Fullaway read the message in silence,
+then turned to the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Your story must be true, Miss Ashton,” he
+said. “Washington seems to have had some rumor
+of it. The cruiser <em>Tennessee</em>, now stationed here,
+has been ordered to take the <em>Yucatan</em> in charge.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Will there be a battle?” demanded Mabel anxiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I do not think so. The <em>Yucatan</em>, armed though
+she probably is by this time, would hardly be a
+match for the <em>Tennessee</em>.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wish we could go with her,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So do I,” agreed Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+General Fullaway was silent for some moments,
+and then he said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps it can be done. There will be no danger. I
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_84'></a>84</span>
+don’t believe Captain Ainslee would object.
+The <em>Tennessee</em> will not sail before morning. I shall
+communicate with the captain immediately, and let
+you know before morning. He will probably wish
+to hear your story anyhow.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley, Mabel and the others returned to the
+hotel, where they prepared for bed. Mr. Willing
+was just about to retire when there was a knock
+at the door. Opening it, a bellboy passed him a
+message. It was from General Fullaway and said
+that Captain Ainslee would expect the Willing party
+aboard the <em>Tennessee</em> by 8 o’clock in the morning.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing called this piece of news to Dick
+and the two girls, and all were greatly pleased.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just think of taking a trip on a warship!” exclaimed
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+All were about early the next morning and were
+soon at the pier, where they found that a cutter
+from the <em>Tennessee</em> had been sent to meet them.
+Captain Ainslee himself greeted them as they made
+their way over the side of the cruiser, and conducted
+them to his cabin.
+</p>
+<p>
+Here he left them for a few minutes while he
+gave orders to get the ship under way. Directly
+it began to move slowly through the waters of the
+harbor, Captain Ainslee returned to the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now,” he said to Mabel, “I should be glad to
+hear your story at first hand.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_85'></a>85</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel repeated it and the captain listened attentively.
+</p>
+<p>
+“To tell the truth,” he said, “this may be more
+serious than I supposed. If Germany is bent upon
+drawing the United States into the war, the <em>Yucatan</em>
+may not surrender so easily.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You don’t mean she is likely to fight?” asked
+Mr. Willing in some alarm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s just what I mean,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+And Captain Ainslee proved a good prophet.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was well after noon when a cry from the
+lookout brought all to deck.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Steamer off the port bow!” it came.
+</p>
+<p>
+The two girls rushed to the deck with the others.
+The ships were still too far apart for those aboard
+the cruiser to make out the other plainly, and the
+wireless was immediately put in action.
+</p>
+<p>
+“German converted cruiser <em>Kaiserin</em>!” came the
+reply to Captain Ainslee’s message.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I desire to come aboard you,” was the message
+flashed back. “Heave to!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The vessels drew nearer together, until at last
+Captain Ainslee knew the other vessel was in range
+of the <em>Tennessee’s</em> big guns.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I was afraid he would run,” he explained.
+“Now I shall make my demand for surrender. It’s
+the <em>Yucatan</em> as you can see.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The wireless was again put to working, and a
+demand made upon the German to surrender.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_86'></a>86</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“What for?” came the question.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Theft of United States vessel and threatening
+destruction of Colon,” was the reply flashed back.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen must have realized that the
+game was up. The <em>Yucatan</em> was brought quickly
+about and turned to run.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Clear for action!” came the command aboard
+the <em>Tennessee</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley, Mabel and the others of the party found
+themselves hurried back into the Captain’s private
+cabin. There, through the port-hole, they watched
+the preparations for battle.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls were greatly interested, and in spite of
+the fact that they knew they were in danger, they
+did not lose their coolness nor their courage.
+</p>
+<p>
+Realizing that the passenger ship was probably
+faster than the cruiser, Captain Ainslee wasted no
+further time. The great forward turret gun spoke
+with a roar, and Shirley and Mabel cried out at the
+terrific noise.
+</p>
+<p>
+They could watch the progress of the big shell
+as it sped toward the <em>Yucatan</em>, where it kicked up
+the water but a few yards to port. Again and
+again the big gun spoke, and then there was a cheer
+from the crew as a shell struck home.
+</p>
+<p>
+Twice more the <em>Yucatan</em> was hit, and, while not
+in a vital spot, her speed was suddenly reduced.
+The <em>Tennessee</em> dashed on.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then came the first shot from the enemy. The
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_87'></a>87</span>
+spray flew high beside the cruiser as a shell struck
+the water to larboard. Before she could fire again,
+another shell from the <em>Tennessee’s</em> forward turret
+gun crashed aboard her.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then a white flag was run up the <em>Yucatan’s</em> masthead.
+</p>
+<p>
+The firing aboard the <em>Tennessee</em> ceased, and the
+cruiser bore down on the enemy.
+</p>
+<p>
+Boats were hurriedly lowered, manned and darted
+across the water to take charge of the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+Half an hour later one of them returned bearing
+the German commander and his officers. They
+were conducted to the captain’s cabin immediately.
+</p>
+<p>
+Henry Bristow—now Captain Von Blusen—at
+first did not see the members of the Willing party
+in the cabin, and he faced Captain Ainslee angrily.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is the meaning of this outrage?” he demanded.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Ainslee smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come, come, captain,” he said. “Why this air
+of wounded dignity? Surely you won’t attempt to
+deny that you stole the <em>Yucatan</em>?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course I deny it,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And I suppose you will also deny sending a message
+to the commandant at Colon, threatening to
+blow up the city?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That is absurd,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Ainslee motioned to Mabel, and she
+stepped forward.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_88'></a>88</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Do you recognize this young lady, captain?”
+demanded the commander of the <em>Tennessee</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+As the other’s eyes rested upon Mabel, he stepped
+back in surprise and a look of genuine alarm passed
+over his face. Then it grew dark. He was very
+angry.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So,” he exclaimed, “this is the way you show
+your sympathy for Germany, eh?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is Germany to me?” demanded Mabel
+hotly. “I’m no German.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But you said—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I said that because I was angry at the time.
+You have made trouble enough for us. I’m glad
+you have been captured.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Further denial is useless, captain,” declared
+Captain Ainslee. “I don’t believe you will dispute
+the young lady’s words.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Von Blusen turned away angrily, and his gaze
+rested on Dick and the others for the first time.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I see you are all here,” he said. Then to Dick,
+“And I have not forgotten that I have a debt to
+settle with you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He stepped quickly across the cabin and before
+the others were aware of what he intended to do, he
+struck Dick sharply across the face with the back
+of his hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick was on his feet in an instant and would
+have leaped upon his assailant had not the others
+stayed him.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_89'></a>89</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain!” cried the commander of the <em>Tennessee</em>,
+“you forget yourself! If that is the way
+you Germans conduct yourselves no wonder the
+whole world is against you. Another move like
+that and I’ll have you put in irons!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The German captain drew back but said nothing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now,” continued Captain Ainslee, “I would like
+to know the meaning of this affair you have been
+mixed up in. Is Germany seeking war with the
+United States?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why not?” was the reply. “The United States
+has been against us, why shouldn’t we be against
+her?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s your own evil consciences that make you
+think that,” replied Captain Ainslee. “The United
+States has been strictly neutral in this war. But
+an accounting for this will be demanded of the
+Kaiser.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And he’ll give it,” thundered the captain, striking
+the table with his fist. “He’ll give it!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Maybe he will, but he’ll be sorry,” declared Shirley,
+who could keep quiet no longer. “Uncle Sam
+will stand no foolishness from the Kaiser.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen smiled at her scornfully.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We shall come over here some day and take
+the United States,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’ll be surprised when you try it,” said Shirley
+angrily.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_90'></a>90</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley!” exclaimed Mr. Willing. “Keep
+quiet!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t care,” cried Shirley. “Anybody knows
+Uncle Sam can whip Germany, and all the rest of
+them, too, for that matter.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Again Mr. Willing would have enjoined the girl
+to silence, but Captain Ainslee stayed him with uplifted
+hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Let her alone,” he chuckled. “That is the spirit
+I like to see!”
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXII' id='chXII'></a>CHAPTER XII.—ABOARD THE YUCATAN.</h2>
+<p>
+The <em>Tennessee</em> returned immediately to Colon,
+followed by the <em>Yucatan</em>, now manned by a crew
+of American sailors. The run was made quickly,
+and darkness had just descended when the ships
+came to anchor and the Willing party made their
+way ashore and returned to their hotel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen and the members of his
+crew were immediately turned over to the Canal
+Zone authorities, pending orders from Washington.
+</p>
+<p>
+What was the surprise of Shirley and the others,
+upon reaching the hotel, to find there others of the
+passengers who had been set adrift when the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_91'></a>91</span>
+<em>Yucatan</em> was captured by the German conspirators.
+They greeted each other warmly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We were picked up by a steamer and just
+reached here this afternoon,” one of the women
+passengers explained to Shirley and Mabel. “We
+had about given you up for lost. The rest of us
+are all here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And so is the <em>Yucatan</em>,” replied Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+In response to exclamations of astonishment, she
+related the story of the recapture of the vessel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then we shall be allowed to continue our trip,
+I suppose,” remarked one of the passengers.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Unless the government decides to hold on to
+the steamer,” said another.
+</p>
+<p>
+But the government did not, and the following
+day the full crew of the <em>Yucatan</em> was once more
+aboard the vessel, and it was announced that she
+would resume her journey the following morning.
+</p>
+<p>
+The day was spent by most of the passengers
+viewing the sights of interest in the canal zone
+and in the city of Colon proper.
+</p>
+<p>
+A few words concerning the Panama Canal will
+not be amiss here.
+</p>
+<p>
+The canal was opened to smaller vessels on August
+5, 1914, but the official opening did not take
+place until much later, being attended with elaborate
+ceremonies.
+</p>
+<p>
+The canal is about fifty miles in length from deep
+water in the Caribbean Sea to deep water in the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_92'></a>92</span>
+Pacific Ocean. It ranges in width from 300 to
+1,000 feet with an average bottom width of almost
+700 feet. The Gatun dam along its crest is 8,000
+feet long.
+</p>
+<p>
+The construction of the canal is considered one
+of the greatest feats of engineering of all time
+and was accomplished at a tremendous cost. The
+land was secured by treaty from Colombia at great
+expense and resulted in considerable trouble between
+the United States and the South American
+republic.
+</p>
+<p>
+It is provided by treaties that the canal shall
+be open to the vessels of all nations, merchantmen,
+or ships of war, in times of war as well in
+times of peace; but strict rules of neutrality have
+been provided for the passage of war vessels.
+</p>
+<p>
+All this Mr. Willing explained to the others during
+the day. With the coming of night, the passengers
+began to go aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> for the ship
+was to sail at an early hour and it was deemed advisable
+to be aboard the night before.
+</p>
+<p>
+Therefore, when Shirley and Mabel arose and
+went on deck, the <em>Yucatan</em> already had started its
+passage through the canal. The girls stood upon
+the upper deck aft and looked about with interest;
+but after an hour of this they grew tired and went
+down to breakfast.
+</p>
+<p>
+The passage of the canal would require about
+ten hours and Shirley remarked to Mabel that she
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_93'></a>93</span>
+would be glad when they were on the Pacific and
+sailing up the coast.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And so will I,” agreed Mabel. “Of course it
+is nice to see all these things, but they don’t interest
+me a whole lot.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I feel the same way. To tell the truth I shall
+be glad to get to San Francisco. From what I
+have heard, the Exposition must be beautiful.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Indeed it must. By the way, I wonder what
+will be done with Henry Bristow—I mean Captain
+Von Blusen?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know,” replied Shirley. “However, I
+suppose he will be taken to Washington.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He seemed a very nice young man. I wouldn’t
+have thought he was a German.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I suppose there are nice Germans as well
+as any other kind,” replied Shirley with a laugh.
+“But I wonder why they took such chances?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Orders, I reckon. The Germans have shown
+great daring and bravery in this war.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should say they have. I wonder if the United
+States will be drawn into the war.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness gracious! I hope not! Why,
+Daddy might have to go.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh I guess not,” laughed Shirley. “He is too
+old for that, except as a last resort.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But Dick might have to go.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s so; but I don’t think there will be any
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_94'></a>94</span>
+war between the United States and Germany. We
+could whip them easily.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I suppose the Germans think they could whip
+us just as well as we believe we can whip them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But I know we can whip them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I’m not so sure. But one thing is certain,
+we won’t have to go to war. That’s the advantage
+of being a girl.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh I don’t know,” said Shirley, “I believe I
+would like to go.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not for me,” declared Mabel. “Still, I might
+be willing to go as a Red Cross nurse.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s what I meant,” replied Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick now
+joined them, and they discussed recent happenings.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You don’t suppose there is any chance of Von
+Blusen getting away, sir?” asked Dick of Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing looked at him and smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Afraid he’ll come after you?” he asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, not exactly sir,” replied Dick. “I just
+wondered, that’s all.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t think there is. I’m sure I don’t want
+to be on the same ship with him again. He’ll
+make mischief wherever he is.”
+</p>
+<p>
+But Mr. Willing was to be disappointed in this
+wish, as it turned out later.
+</p>
+<p>
+Noon came and passed and still the big steamship
+was in the canal; but with the coming of the supper
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_95'></a>95</span>
+hour the Pacific ocean became visible in the
+distance.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was the first time that Dick, Shirley or Mabel
+had seen the Pacific, and they stared ahead for
+a long time.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t see as it looks any different from the
+Atlantic,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What did you expect?” asked Mabel. “Think
+you were going to see the name on it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not exactly. I don’t know just what I expected,
+but I thought it would look different.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The others laughed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It might feel a little different in case a big
+storm came up,” said Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t want to be in a storm on any water,”
+declared Shirley with decision.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should say not,” Mabel agreed. “A storm
+is bad enough with lots of dry land under your
+feet.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The sun was just disappearing below the horizon
+when the <em>Yucatan</em> at last stuck her nose into the
+waters of the Pacific ocean.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, here we are in the Pacific at last,” said
+Colonel Ashton. “Do you feel any difference,
+Shirley?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not a bit,” replied the girl with a smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing looked at the sky.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess there will be no storm on this trip,” he
+said.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_96'></a>96</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Half an hour later all went below to supper.
+</p>
+<p>
+They had almost finished a delightful meal when
+their attention was attracted by the sound of a
+scuffle on deck. All rushed hastily up.
+</p>
+<p>
+There, struggling with a knot of sailors, was a
+single man. His back was turned to the girls as
+they made their way on deck, and at first they did
+not recognize him.
+</p>
+<p>
+He was giving a good account of himself, striking
+out with such force and skill as gave evidence
+of much training in the use of his fists; but the
+sailors were too many for him, and he was at last
+overpowered and thrown to the deck.
+</p>
+<p>
+Rude hands jerked him to his feet and it was
+then that Shirley and Mabel obtained their first look
+at his face.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley started back with a cry of utter amazement.
+Then a name leaped to her lips, and was
+repeated by all the passengers within sight.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain Von Blusen!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“How in the world did he get here?” exclaimed
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I can’t imagine,” declared Mabel, staring with
+open mouth.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson of the <em>Yucatan</em> now hastened
+down from the bridge and confronted the prisoner.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What are you doing on my ship and how did
+you get here?” he demanded angrily.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen smiled at him.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_97'></a>97</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I just escaped, that’s all,” he replied. “You
+treated me so well before that I thought I would
+take passage with you. Besides it was the least
+likely place I would be looked for.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But how did you escape?” demanded the captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That would be telling,” was the reply, and the
+young man smiled tantalizingly. “However, it
+will do no harm to say that I have good friends in
+Colon.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I’ll guarantee you won’t do any more
+harm aboard my ship,” declared the captain angrily.
+</p>
+<p>
+He turned to his first officer. “Have him put
+in irons!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very good, sir,” replied the first officer, and advanced
+toward the prisoner.
+</p>
+<p>
+“One moment,” said the latter drawing himself
+up. “I did not come here with any ill motive,”
+still addressing the captain, “and I desire to give my
+parole.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And what good is your parole?” demanded
+Captain Anderson.
+</p>
+<p>
+“One gentleman is always ready to accept the
+word of another gentleman,” said Von Blusen
+slowly. “I give my word to make no attempt to
+escape.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain hesitated, then waved an arm expressively.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very well,” he said. “Your parole is accepted.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_98'></a>98</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+He returned to the bridge, and the sailors released
+Von Blusen. The latter walked over to
+where the Willing party were gathered.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, here I am again,” he said with a smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I see you are,” replied Mabel, and deliberately
+turned her back on him.
+</p>
+<p>
+The young man’s face became red. He turned
+on his heel and walked off without another word.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXIII' id='chXIII'></a>CHAPTER XIII.—ASHORE IN COSTA RICA.</h2>
+<p>
+The steamship <em>Yucatan</em> was swinging slowly into
+a little harbor. Land, visible for the first time
+since leaving the Panama Canal, was now close at
+hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What place is this?” asked Shirley of Dick,
+who stood forward gazing over the rail by her
+side.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick consulted his guide book, remarking: “I
+can’t remember the name of these outlandish
+places.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s Punta Arenas,” he said at last, looking up.
+“Costa Rica, you know,” he added in explanation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And what are we putting in here for?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_99'></a>99</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’ll have to ask the captain about that,” replied
+Dick. “It’s too deep for me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The vessel came to anchor some distance from
+shore. It was announced that the ship would lay
+there for several hours, and the captain gave notice
+that those desiring to land would be taken off
+in the small boats.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley immediately announced her intention of
+being one of the landing party, and loath to let
+the girl go alone, Mr. Willing and the others also
+determined to go ashore.
+</p>
+<p>
+Half an hour later found them strolling about
+the dirty looking narrow streets of the little town.
+</p>
+<p>
+Poorly-dressed natives, men, women and children,
+eyed them queerly as they walked along, the
+latter following them for blocks begging for money.
+Shirley would have given one of the children a
+piece of silver but for the first officer of the ship,
+who stayed her.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Give money to one of them and the rest will
+follow you forever,” he explained.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But they look so dirty and hungry,” protested
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps they are,” was the officer’s reply, “but
+take no chances with them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley followed his advice, as did the others of
+the party, and the dirty native children soon let
+them alone. When the party started back, however, the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_100'></a>100</span>
+children trailed them once more, begging
+piteously for money.
+</p>
+<p>
+At the wharf Shirley, unheeding the advice of
+the officer, turned and tossed a silver quarter toward
+them.
+</p>
+<p>
+Instantly the place became a scene of wild confusion.
+There was a scramble as boys and girls
+dived headlong for the piece of silver. Loud cries
+filled the air.
+</p>
+<p>
+A little girl raised up with the piece of money
+clutched tightly in her hand and started to run.
+But the others were upon her in an instant, and
+threw her to the ground, striking and clawing as
+they tried to take the quarter away from her.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley looked at the disorder she had caused
+in amazement.
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness!” she exclaimed. “I had no idea
+they were so savage.”
+</p>
+<p>
+She watched the struggle.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now a boy had secured the quarter and tried to
+escape with it. But he fared no better than had
+the girl, and soon was beneath the pile of struggling
+bodies. The children fought savagely, biting,
+screaming, kicking and scratching.
+</p>
+<p>
+The party from the steamship watched with interest.
+</p>
+<p>
+“See what you did, Shirley,” cried Mabel. “Just
+watch them fight.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_101'></a>101</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I won’t do it again,” declared Shirley. “Some
+of them will be badly hurt.”
+</p>
+<p>
+At this moment a newcomer appeared upon the
+scene. He walked slowly, and plainly was in no
+particular hurry. Shirley glanced at him curiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+He was attired in a dark blue uniform. A revolver
+and sword hung at his side. He was short
+but stout, and a black mustache curled fiercely upward.
+</p>
+<p>
+He was just what Shirley took him to be, an officer
+of the Costa Rican army.
+</p>
+<p>
+He advanced into the mass of struggling children
+and pushed the combatants aside without ceremony.
+As they looked up and perceived him, the fighters
+turned and fled.
+</p>
+<p>
+The sight was indeed comical and Shirley and
+all the others laughed long and loud.
+</p>
+<p>
+One little boy, before taking to his heels, stooped
+quickly and picked up the quarter, which had rolled
+a short distance away. But even as he started to
+run, the native officer reached out a hand and caught
+him by the shoulder.
+</p>
+<p>
+In vain did the boy struggle to free himself, biting
+and kicking. He was no match for the man,
+and at last he dropped the piece of silver. The officer
+then released him and looked around.
+</p>
+<p>
+While the Americans still watched him he
+stooped, picked up the quarter, turned it over in
+his hand once or twice, spun it in the air, caught
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_102'></a>102</span>
+it as it came down and thrust it in his pocket.
+Then, without a glance to right or left, he turned
+and stalked away.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There!” exclaimed the ship’s officer, “you can
+see what has happened to your quarter. It’s what
+happens to most of those thrown to the children by
+tourists.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s an outrage!” declared Shirley. “I wouldn’t
+have given him anything. Isn’t there something we
+can do about it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not a thing,” was the reply. “It is legitimate
+graft. But watch, now, you’ll see what the little
+folks do.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As the native officer continued to swagger along,
+from behind houses and from down streets a hail
+of rocks and stones dropped upon him. The children,
+divided in the fight for the quarter, had joined
+forces against this common enemy and were pelting
+him vigorously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good!” exclaimed Mabel. “I am glad of it.
+I hope they hurt him, the big coward.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The native officer stopped and glared around angrily
+at his small assailants for a moment, while
+the rocks and stones fell on him faster than before.
+One struck him in the face. This was too much
+for his courage. He took to his heels, and with
+the mob of children in close pursuit, was soon lost
+to sight.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_103'></a>103</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I hope they get him,” declared Shirley vehemently.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They won’t, though,” replied the officer of the
+<em>Yucatan</em>. “If he were to turn on them they’d stop
+and, from a safe place, continue their bombardment.
+He’ll find shelter some place.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Before they could return to the launch which
+would take them back to the ship, the swarm of
+children again came into view, rushing for them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Quick!” cried the officer, “into the boat.
+They’ll run right over us. They’ve caught a sight
+of silver and they won’t let us alone until we give
+them some, or until we are out of reach.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He hustled the others toward the small boat at
+a run, and succeeded in getting them in before the
+native children reached the water’s edge. Then
+the boat put off for the ship.
+</p>
+<p>
+A cry of anger went up from the shore.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Duck!” cried the officer, himself taking his
+place in the stern and grasping the rudder.
+</p>
+<p>
+His warning came not a moment too soon.
+</p>
+<p>
+A shower of missiles, hurled with unerring aim,
+fell upon the little craft. Disappointed in their
+quest, the native children were now bent on revenge.
+</p>
+<p>
+As fast as they could pick them up and throw,
+rocks went skimming across the water, falling on
+both sides, and in front and behind the boat. Several
+dropped aboard.
+</p>
+<p>
+One, in falling, just skimmed the back of Shirley’s
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_104'></a>104</span>
+head as she stooped over in the boat. Dick
+immediately squeezed in behind her, and another,
+thrown with unerring aim, carried away his hat.
+Fortunately however, this broke the force of the
+stone, and it fell to the bottom of the boat without
+doing any further damage.
+</p>
+<p>
+The boat was drawing out of danger now, and
+the occupants sat up again and drew breaths of
+relief. Only the stronger of the tots could now
+reach them with their missiles, and the distance
+was too great for accurate throwing, so those in
+the boats felt perfectly safe.
+</p>
+<p>
+Upon the shore the crowd of native boys and
+girls gave vent to cries of rage at thus being deprived
+of their revenge. They danced about excitedly
+and waved their hands in angry gestures.
+</p>
+<p>
+At this juncture another native officer hove in
+sight, and the crowd turned on him. Again rocks,
+stones and other weapons came into play as the
+children turned upon him to vent their wrath. For
+a moment the officer seemed on the point of charging
+into the crowd, then changed his mind, wheeled
+on his heel and took to flight. The young ones
+gave chase, their shouts and cries carrying across
+the water to the occupants of the boat.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well!” exclaimed Shirley, now that they were
+out of harm’s way at last, “they are vicious little
+things, aren’t they?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Rather,” replied the officer dryly. “If a person fell
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_105'></a>105</span>
+into their hands it would go hard with
+him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But what makes them so fierce?” asked Mabel,
+greatly interested.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s hard to say. However, it probably is
+because they are half starved and look upon the
+whole world as a common foe. More than one
+tourist has received rough treatment at their hands.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And will they attack any one like that?” asked
+Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not unless he shows money,” was the reply.
+“That is the remarkable part about it. No matter
+how much a man may have in his pocket they will
+not attack him unless they catch sight of silver or
+gold. One glimpse of it, however, seems to drive
+them wild.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The officer gave his attention to the boat for a
+moment, and then continued:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Another thing, as you have just observed.
+They will fight each other, but let a third party
+interfere and they will all jump on him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just like a quarrel between a man and his wife,
+eh?” asked Mr. Willing with a smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Exactly. They’re a queer lot, and you will find
+them about the same in all Central and South
+American countries.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The small boat now rubbed gently against the
+side of the <em>Yucatan</em> and the passengers scrambled
+up the ladder to the deck.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_106'></a>106</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“We were lucky to get out of that with whole
+skins,” declared Shirley, when all once more stood
+on deck.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should say we were,” agreed Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps this experience will teach you to heed
+the advice of others, daughter,” said Mr. Willing
+dryly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I won’t try and play the good Samaritan to native
+children any more, Dad,” said Shirley smiling.
+</p>
+<p>
+A long blast from the ship’s whistle, followed by
+the clanking of chains as the anchor was drawn in,
+the vibrations of the engines became noticeable,
+and, with her nose pointed to the open sea, the
+steamship <em>Yucatan</em> resumed her journey.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXIV' id='chXIV'></a>CHAPTER XIV.—U. S. S. PRAIRIE.</h2>
+<p>
+“Steamship off the port bow, sir!”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was the cry of the lookout.
+</p>
+<p>
+All eyes were turned in the direction indicated.
+There, showing dimly through the gathering darkness,
+steamed a dark gray shape. Another glance
+from the lookout was enough to convince him of
+the vessel’s identity.
+</p>
+<p>
+“United States cruiser, sir!” came his call.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_107'></a>107</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Can you make her out?” asked the captain’s
+voice from the bridge.
+</p>
+<p>
+The lookout was silent for several minutes, and
+then called back:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Cruiser <em>Prairie</em>, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a muttered ejaculation from the captain.
+Shirley, standing near, caught the words:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wonder what she’s doing in these waters? She
+was in Bluefields the last I heard of her. Must be
+trouble of some kind or she wouldn’t be here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The two ships exchanged messages, the nature
+of which were unknown to the passengers, however.
+Both continued on their course.
+</p>
+<p>
+Morning showed to the passengers the cruiser
+proceeding ahead of them. All day the two ships
+retained their relative positions and when night
+came on they were unchanged.
+</p>
+<p>
+When Shirley awoke the following morning the
+<em>Yucatan</em> was stationary. Shirley and Mabel
+dressed quickly and went on deck. There they
+found that they were in a little harbor. Shirley
+asked a question of one of the other passengers.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where are we?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Port of Corinto, Nicaragua,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+At this moment a small boat was just about to be
+lowered. Shirley and Mabel rushed up to the first
+officer, who was in command of it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Can we go with you?” she asked.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_108'></a>108</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+The officer hesitated, then: “I see no reason
+why you cannot,” with a smile. “Jump in.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls obeyed and a few moments later were
+being rowed toward the not-far-distant shore.
+There the boat drew up at the wharf, and, signalling
+to the girls to accompany him if they so desired,
+the officer leaped lightly ashore and lent them
+a helping hand. The sailors were ordered to await
+his return.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where are you going?” asked Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“American consulate,” was the reply. “There
+has been some trouble here, and Captain Anderson
+has sent me to find out what it's all about.”
+</p>
+<p>
+At the consulate Shirley and Mabel remained outside,
+while the first officer was closeted with the
+consul.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We might as well walk around a bit,” Shirley
+decided. “There is no telling how long he may
+remain there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel was nothing loath, and they made their
+way to the street. Here they walked along slowly,
+looking curiously at the native Nicaraguans and
+the queer buildings, all of old Spanish architecture
+and design.
+</p>
+<p>
+“None of this for me,” was Shirley’s decision
+half an hour later.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nor me,” agreed Mabel. “I want to live in
+civilization.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Unconsciously the girls had wandered further
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_109'></a>109</span>
+from the consulate than they realized, and as they
+were on the point of turning back Mabel caught
+sight of a familiar figure.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain Von Blusen!” she exclaimed, catching
+Shirley by the arm.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley caught her breath and gazed in the direction
+Mabel pointed.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was true. There, slinking along furtively,
+was the gallant captain and he was walking along
+at a rapid rate.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wonder where he is going and why he’s in such
+a hurry?” asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know,” returned Shirley, “but I’ll warrant
+he is up to no good.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But he has given his parole to make no attempt
+to escape.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t imagine he’ll set much store by that if
+he sees a good opportunity to get away.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley would have continued her way back, but
+Mabel said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wait a moment, Shirley. Perhaps, by following
+him a bit, we may learn something useful.
+What do you say?”
+</p>
+<p>
+For a moment Shirley hesitated, but for a moment
+only.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps we can,” she said then. “There can
+be no danger if we keep out of sight. Come on.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The German was now some distance ahead of
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_110'></a>110</span>
+them, and taking care to avoid being seen should
+he turn suddenly, the girls followed him.
+</p>
+<p>
+But apparently Captain Von Blusen had no idea
+that he would be followed. He strode rapidly along
+and not once did he turn his head.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He must have been here before,” Shirley decided.
+“He seems to know where he is going.”
+</p>
+<p>
+For another ten minutes they followed him, and
+then Shirley halted.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am afraid we had better go back,” she said.
+“We may get lost.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh I guess not,” declared Mabel. “And besides
+we have plenty of time. The ship will probably
+stay here most of the day. Come on, Shirley.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley allowed herself to be led along.
+</p>
+<p>
+They had now approached the outskirts of the
+little town, and the young German struck off
+through a clump of trees. At the edge of these
+Shirley stopped abruptly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We won’t follow him any further,” she said
+decisively. “It might be dangerous.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess you are right,” agreed Mabel. “I wish
+he had stayed where we could keep track of him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“So do I. But he didn’t. We had better be
+getting back.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They turned and started to retrace their footsteps,
+but even as they did so the footsteps of a
+large body of men came toward them. They were
+not yet in sight, but the men were coming right
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_111'></a>111</span>
+down the street through which the girls must go
+on their way back.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel looked at Shirley in alarm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What shall we do?” she exclaimed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll just have to put on a bold face and walk
+right along,” declared Shirley. “Come.”
+</p>
+<p>
+She started out slowly, Mabel walking by her
+side.
+</p>
+<p>
+A moment later there appeared ahead of them,
+advancing at a rapid march, a body of armed men.
+Shirley and Mabel shrank close to the side of the
+street to give the marchers as much room as possible.
+</p>
+<p>
+At first it seemed the girls would get by without
+trouble, for the first troop had passed them, paying
+no attention to their presence.
+</p>
+<p>
+But as the officer in command of the troop came
+abreast of them, a command suddenly rang out:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Halt!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The troop stopped abruptly, and grounded their
+arms. Shirley and Mabel also paused, as they believed
+the words were meant for them. Then, seeing
+the soldiers pause, they moved on again. But
+again came the cry of “Halt.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls halted in their tracks.
+</p>
+<p>
+The commander, whom they perceived was a
+man well along toward seventy, but who nevertheless
+walked perfectly erect and who looked very
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_112'></a>112</span>
+imposing in his bright military uniform, advanced
+toward them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What are you young ladies doing here?” he
+asked courteously, in English.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We were just walking about the city, sir,” replied
+Shirley, her voice trembling somewhat in spite
+of the efforts she made to keep it steady.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where do you come from?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Steamship in the harbor, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You mean the cruiser?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, sir,” replied Mabel. “The passenger
+steamer, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“H-m-mm-m,” muttered the officer.
+</p>
+<p>
+Before he could speak further there came, from
+the town, the sound of more rapidly approaching
+footsteps.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come with me,” cried the Nicaraguan officer
+quickly, “if you go on you will be hurt. Come
+quickly.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He urged his men on with a sharp command.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel hung back.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Quick!” cried the general again. “There will
+be fighting here in a few minutes, and if you are in
+the way you are likely to be hurt.”
+</p>
+<p>
+A squad of men, at his command, surrounded
+the two girls, and they were forced to go along
+whether or no.
+</p>
+<p>
+The troop dashed quickly for the shelter of the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_113'></a>113</span>
+woods in which the girls had seen Captain Von
+Blusen disappear a few moments before.
+</p>
+<p>
+Once in the shelter of the trees, the officer in
+command gave several sharp orders, and the troop
+divided into three parts. Then they flitted rapidly
+further in among the trees.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel, now badly frightened, found
+themselves with the commanding officer’s section.
+They could see that they were bearing off to the
+right and several times would have spoken, but the
+officer silenced them with a gesture.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall answer your questions later,” he said
+once.
+</p>
+<p>
+Although the girls did not know just what was
+the matter, they realized that the Nicaraguans were
+fleeing from another, and, supposedly, a larger body
+of men.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I hope they overtake us. I want to get back to
+Dad,” cried Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And I hope they don’t,” exclaimed Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, Shirley!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I mean it. If they do overtake us it may mean
+a battle, and then we would be in danger. As
+long as we keep away from them we are safe. Besides,
+Dad will find us some way. Our fathers and
+Dick won’t permit us to be carried off.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I reckon you are right, Shirley,” Mabel agreed
+finally. “Besides, there is an American cruiser
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_114'></a>114</span>
+near. They’ll have the bluejackets out searching
+for us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And they will find us, too,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I hope they hurry up and come,” exclaimed
+Shirley. “I’m badly frightened, but I don’t want
+to show it. The thing to do is to make the officer
+think we are not a bit scared.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll try,” said Mabel calmly.
+</p>
+<p>
+For an hour they continued on their way, and
+then suddenly the force began to increase as men
+appeared from other directions and joined the main
+body.
+</p>
+<p>
+Although the girls did not know it, these were the
+same men who had scattered at the first sign of pursuit.
+They had made a detour to throw the pursuers
+off the track.
+</p>
+<p>
+At last the commander called a halt. Then he
+approached the two girls.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess I had better explain why I insisted on
+your coming with us,” he said with a pleasant smile.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXV' id='chXV'></a>CHAPTER XV.—AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE.</h2>
+<p>
+“If you please,” said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+The officer gazed at both girls admiringly.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_115'></a>115</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“You take it coolly enough,” he declared. “Many
+in your places would be badly frightened.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Surely there is nothing to be afraid of,” said
+Mabel, determined to show as bold a front as possible.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No,” said the officer, “there isn’t.” He looked
+at them closely. “I wonder if either of you happen
+to know who I am?” he asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley shook her head negatively.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m sure I don’t,” said Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then I must introduce myself,” was the reply.
+“I am General Pedro Garcia, President of the republic
+of Nicaragua.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Both girls looked at him in the utmost surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You may well be surprised,” said the general, a
+touch of bitterness in his tone, it seemed to Shirley,
+“and no doubt you are to see the President of
+the country in such a predicament?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley didn’t know much about Nicaragua, but
+she decided she might as well agree with him, as
+he seemed to expect it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, sir,” she said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And I am surprised to find myself in such a position,”
+said the President. “I shall explain. With
+my men I am fleeing from the revolutionists.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Revolutionists?” echoed Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Exactly. I was in Corinto with some of my
+army for diplomatic purposes. While absent from
+Managua there was an uprising. It seems to have
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_116'></a>116</span>
+been well planned, for it broke out in all parts of
+the republic at once, even here in Corinto.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I was surprised with my men this morning and
+was forced to flee. That’s about all there is to it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But why did you bring us with you?” demanded
+Shirley. “Why didn’t you allow us to return to
+our ship.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Because you might never have reached there,”
+replied the President quietly. “You would probably
+have fallen into the hands of the revolutionists.
+While you are with me you are safe.”
+</p>
+<p>
+There was no doubting the sincerity in the President’s
+voice, and both girls unconsciously breathed
+easier.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Besides,” continued the general, “your presence
+may help me a bit.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“In what way sir?” asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, there is a United States cruiser in Corinto
+harbor. When you are missed the natural supposition
+will be that you have fallen into the hands of
+the revolutionists. The U. S. sailors will be sent
+after you, and will be likely to attack my foes.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I see,” said Shirley with a slight smile. “Then
+you did not save us from an altogether unselfish
+motive.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“My dear young ladies, consider,” said the President,
+“it is better for both of us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t doubt you, sir,” replied Shirley; “but
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_117'></a>117</span>
+just the same I would rather be safe aboard our
+ship.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And so you shall be, if it is within my power
+to put you there,” declared the President of Nicaragua
+warmly.
+</p>
+<p>
+At this moment two of the general’s troopers approached,
+dragging a third man between them.
+Shirley and Mabel fell back a few feet.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hello! Who have we here?” demanded President
+Garcia.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Prisoner, sir,” replied one of the men.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Release him,” said the President. “I shall talk
+to him myself. Who are you, and what are you doing
+here?” he demanded sharply.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel both started at the sound of
+the prisoner’s voice. He was none other than Captain
+von Blusen.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m Captain von Blusen, of the German navy,”
+was the reply. “I have been held prisoner aboard
+an American ship, and have but recently escaped.
+I am seeking Colonel Hernandez.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hernandez!” exclaimed President Garcia, stepping
+back in surprise. “The leader of the revolutionists!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And may I ask your name, sir?” said Captain
+von Blusen.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I,” said the general, “am the President of
+Nicaragua.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The prisoner gave vent to a long whistle and a
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_118'></a>118</span>
+look of dismay passed over his face. It was gone
+in a moment, however, and he turned to the President
+with a smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am fortunate in finding you, sir,” he said. “I
+am authorized by my government to make you a
+proposition.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I shall hear it,” said the President.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am authorized to offer you a large sum of
+money for the privilege of establishing a German
+naval base on the Pacific coast of Nicaragua.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Enough!” cried the general with a wave of his
+hand. “It shall not be done if I can prevent it.
+Germany indeed. Were I able, I myself should
+draw a sword against her. You will find no German
+sympathy in these parts.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain von Blusen bowed his head. He said
+nothing further on the subject.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What will you do with me?” he asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall hold you until the rebels have been put
+down,” was the reply. “Then you shall be released.
+I wouldn’t trust you now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He signalled two of his men and the young German
+officer was led away between them.
+</p>
+<p>
+At this moment another officer rushed up to the
+general.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Our presence has been discovered, sir,” he
+gasped. “The enemy is approaching.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel now perceived that the President
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_119'></a>119</span>
+of the Republic of Nicaragua, in spite of his
+advanced years, was a man of action.
+</p>
+<p>
+He turned rapidly from one to another of his
+officers, and these dashed quickly away. A moment
+later the few troops began to move, and the girls
+realized that President Garcia had taken some steps
+to offset the advance of the revolutionists.
+</p>
+<p>
+They found themselves going along with the
+troops.
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness! I wish we were back on the
+ship,” exclaimed Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You don’t wish it any more than I do,” declared
+Mabel. “I am more frightened than you are.
+Suppose there should be a battle. What would happen
+to us?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley shrugged her shoulders.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You know as much about it as I do,” she made
+answer.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel looked at her in amazement.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, Shirley Willing!” she exclaimed. “Aren’t
+you afraid? I am scared half to death.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am just as badly frightened as you are,” declared
+Shirley. “I may not look it, but I am.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t believe you are frightened at all,” said
+Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+In spite of the seriousness of the situation and her
+declaration that she was badly frightened, Shirley
+was forced to smile at her friend’s words.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, perhaps I’m not so awfully scared,” she
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_120'></a>120</span>
+confessed. “I’m anxious to see what is going to
+happen.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know what is going to happen,” was the reply.
+“We are going to get hurt!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel broke down and began to cry.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley took her chum gently in her arms, and
+stroked her hair.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There, there!” she said. “Stop crying. No one
+is going to hurt us. You are just overwrought,
+that’s all.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I just know we are going to be shot—and—and
+killed,” sobbed Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nonsense,” said Shirley sharply. “Look up now
+and stop that crying. We are perfectly safe. Stop
+crying.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel looked up suddenly at the sharpness in her
+chum’s tone, but her tears soon were dried away.
+Shirley, in speaking as she had, had done the best
+thing possible. She had realized that it was time
+for sharp words and not for sympathy.
+</p>
+<p>
+After a march of perhaps a half hour, President
+Garcia called another halt, and then summoned his
+officers into consultation.
+</p>
+<p>
+The two girls stood close, but they could not make
+out what was being said. At length the general
+dismissed his officers with a gesture, and as they
+scattered to their respective posts, the general approached
+the two girls.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We are going to make a sharp turn to the south
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_121'></a>121</span>
+here,” he said quietly, “and then we shall move
+back and engage the enemy. That will put you
+safely behind us. Now, if I were you, I would bear
+off slightly to the right, and then go straight ahead.
+In that way you will be out of danger. If the firing
+comes closer to you, make another wide detour,
+turn about and try to make your way back to the
+ship. But I would not do that until after the battle
+ceases.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thank you, sir,” said Shirley. “We shall do
+as you suggest. We thank you for your thoughtfulness
+in keeping us from falling into the hands of
+the revolutionists. May you come through the battle
+unharmed, and may you be successful.”
+</p>
+<p>
+She extended her hand, and the President bent
+over it gravely.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I thank you for your good wishes,” he said
+quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel also now advanced and extended her hand,
+and the President bent over it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good luck to you, Mr. President,” said Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I thank you, too, young lady,” said the President
+simply. “Now heed my injunction and betake yourselves
+to a place of safety. We shall advance at
+once.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Once more he bowed low to them, swung sharply
+about on his heel and was gone. With hoarse commands
+from the officers, the troops faced to the
+left and marched off.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_122'></a>122</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess we had better be moving, Shirley,” said
+Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Instead of turning to the right, they went straight
+back.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It should be safer here,” said Mabel as they hurried
+along. “The revolutionists are liable to advance
+on the right as well as on the left!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wish we could get some place where we could
+see,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel stooped in her tracks and gazed at her
+friend in the utmost astonishment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley!” she exclaimed. “Surely you don’t
+mean that?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course I mean it. If we could only find some
+place where it is safe.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Unconsciously the girls had borne off to the left,
+and now suddenly they came upon a clearing in the
+midst of the woods. And as they glanced back, they
+saw the Nicaraguan government troops advancing
+across it.
+</p>
+<p>
+But even as they looked the troops came to a
+halt, and most of them fell to their knees. Shirley
+looked around quickly. Directly behind her was a
+large tree.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If we haven’t forgotten our tomboy days we’ll
+climb up there and watch the battle,” she declared.
+</p>
+<p>
+She led the way, and in spite of her misgivings,
+Mabel followed.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_123'></a>123</span><a name='chXVI' id='chXVI'></a>CHAPTER XVI.—THE GIRLS SEE A BATTLE.</h2>
+<p>
+As Shirley and Mabel, from their shelter among
+the branches, peered across the plain, they saw puffs
+of smoke issue from the now kneeling body of men.
+Sharp reports came to their ears. The only man
+still standing erect, as they could see plainly, was
+President Garcia, who, with upraised sword, was
+directing the movement of his men.
+</p>
+<p>
+A man dropped his rifle and fell to the ground,
+and Mabel shrieked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness!” she exclaimed a moment later.
+“This is terrible, Shirley!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley’s lips were compressed, and for a moment
+she turned her eyes away.
+</p>
+<p>
+The firing became louder now, and for the first
+time the girls noticed that President Garcia and
+his men were retreating toward them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We had better get down out of here!” exclaimed
+Mabel. “We may be struck.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley agreed, and they were about to descend,
+when, from behind them, came rapid footsteps, indicating
+the approach of a considerable number of
+men. Shirley and Mabel became silent.
+</p>
+<p>
+A moment later a score of dark-visaged
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_124'></a>124</span>
+Nicaraguans, with rifles ready for instant use, appeared
+and took up their position at the edge of the little
+woods, several of them falling flat under the very
+tree in which the two girls were perched.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel uttered an exclamation as the first volley
+was fired by these newcomers. In spite of the fact
+that she was prepared for it, the sharp reports of
+the weapons had wrung a cry of surprise from
+her. Shirley, more calm, uttered no sound.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls could now see that the men beneath
+them were a part of President Garcia’s force, for
+they were shooting over the heads of their companions,
+apparently in an effort to cover the retreat
+of the main body.
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter now retreated more rapidly and at
+length joined forces with the men beneath the trees.
+Shirley and Mabel could hear their conversation
+plainly, but as it was carried on in Spanish, they
+could not make out the trend of it.
+</p>
+<p>
+For perhaps fifteen minutes President Garcia’s
+men held their position, firing at the enemy from
+the shelter of the trees.
+</p>
+<p>
+The plight of the two girls was much more
+serious than either realized, for a chance bullet was
+likely to hit one of them at any moment. And yet
+they felt safer in the tree than they would have
+felt among the soldiers on the ground.
+</p>
+<p>
+So far the enemy had contented themselves with
+lying flat on the ground some distance away and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_125'></a>125</span>
+firing at the trees, but now, as Shirley perceived by
+peering across the plain, they were preparing for a
+charge.
+</p>
+<p>
+A moment later there was a wild yell, and they
+came forward on the run. They spread out as they
+came on, and here and there a man fell over, struck
+down by a rifle bullet.
+</p>
+<p>
+In spite of their great danger both girls became
+lost in wonder at the sight, and stared ahead with
+straining eyes. Shirley was brought to herself by
+the sound of something buzzing past her head. She
+knew in a moment what is was.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mabel!” she cried. “Climb as high as you can
+or we shall be shot!”
+</p>
+<p>
+She scrambled higher up among the branches, and
+Mabel followed suit.
+</p>
+<p>
+Here no bullets flew past them, and looking down
+they saw that President Garcia was ordering his
+men to retreat.
+</p>
+<p>
+The government troops disappeared further back
+in the woods, and now the danger came from their
+bullets rather than from those of the enemy. The
+girls were in a ticklish situation and they were fully
+alive to their peril.
+</p>
+<p>
+The enemy pushed further into the woods, pursuing
+the government troops. The bullets flew less
+thick, the sound of firing became fainter and fainter,
+and then died away in the distance.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_126'></a>126</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley roused herself from the trance in which
+she seemed to have fallen.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come, Mabel,” she said. “Let’s get down and
+get back to the ship before some of them come
+back.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel was nothing loath, and quickly the girls
+slid to the ground and advanced to the edge of the
+clearing. Here they stopped for a moment, looking
+about them.
+</p>
+<p>
+Several figures were sprawled about on the
+ground. The girls shuddered.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is terrible,” said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Don’t look at them,” urged Mabel. “Let’s run.”
+</p>
+<p>
+But as they were about to take to their heels, they
+were startled by the sound of a voice directly behind
+them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Ha!” it said.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls wheeled in their tracks to confront a
+man with rifle levelled directly at them. A cry of
+fear was rung from Mabel’s lips, but Shirley said
+nothing.
+</p>
+<p>
+The man advanced and the girls shrank back. A
+torrent of words poured from the man’s lips, but
+it was absolutely unintelligible to either of the girls.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley made a gesture, indicating that they did
+not understand, and the man said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Americanos?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” replied Shirley. “Do you speak English?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_127'></a>127</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Si!” replied the man, “a leetle!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We want to go away,” said Shirley eagerly.
+“We belong on the ship in the harbor.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No! Stay here. General Orizaba will return
+soon,” said the man in broken English.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley started to protest, but the man made a
+threatening gesture with his rifle.
+</p>
+<p>
+The two girls looked at each other in dismay.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Out of the frying pan into the fire, Mabel,” declared
+Shirley. “I guess we shall have to stay.”
+</p>
+<p>
+There was apparently no help for it. They sat
+down upon the grass to await the arrival of General
+Orizaba, who, they rightly guessed, was the
+commander of the revolutionary forces.
+</p>
+<p>
+Their captor stood vigilant guard. Apparently
+he was determined to allow them no chance to escape.
+He sat some distance away, with his rifle
+across his knees. The two girls settled themselves
+with their backs to a large tree, and made themselves
+as comfortable as they could under the circumstances.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a snapping of a twig behind them, and
+Shirley glanced about uneasily.
+</p>
+<p>
+“S-s-h-h,” came a low voice. “Keep still and
+show no surprise.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Both girls recognized the voice in an instant.
+</p>
+<p>
+They maintained their composure well, and spoke
+only to each other.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s Dick!” whispered Shirley.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_128'></a>128</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know it,” replied Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then we are safe.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls’ guard now put an end to their conversation.
+Rising he approached them and commanded:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Silence!”
+</p>
+<p>
+He did not hear soft footsteps passing beyond
+him, nor did he turn in time to see a figure leap
+from behind a tree and spring at him. The first
+he realized of his danger was when a pair of strong
+arms went round him, and he was hurled violently
+to the ground, his rifle flying from his hands.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Get the rifle, Shirley!” called Dick, as he and his
+opponent struggled for mastery.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley leaped forward, stopped, and when she
+arose she held the rifle.
+</p>
+<p>
+For a moment she considered the advisability of
+advancing and lending Dick a hand, then concluded
+that he was more than a match for the Nicaraguan.
+Besides, the figures were locked in such close embrace
+that she couldn’t have aided Dick if she
+would.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now Dick succeeded in shaking off the grip of his
+opponent, and sprang to his feet. The Nicaraguan
+did likewise, and sprang back.
+</p>
+<p>
+As Dick leaped forward again, the man’s hand
+went to his holster, and a revolver flashed in his
+hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+But before he could bring the weapon to bear,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_129'></a>129</span>
+Shirley stepped quickly forward, levelled her rifle
+at him, and in a clear sharp voice, cried:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Halt!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The man wheeled quickly and as he did so, Dick
+sprang upon him from behind. A quick blow sent
+the revolver hurling several feet away, and then
+Dick stepped back to give free play to his boxing
+skill.
+</p>
+<p>
+The Nicaraguan rushed at him, but Dick stepped
+lightly aside, and as the man went by, carried on
+by the impetus of his rush, Dick struck out straight
+and true from the shoulder.
+</p>
+<p>
+The Nicaraguan crumpled up in a heap on the
+ground.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel ran quickly to Dick’s side.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Are you hurt, Dick?” asked Shirley anxiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No!” was the smiling rejoinder, “but I would
+have been if you had not been prompt with that
+rifle. That’s all that saved me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“How did you find us?” asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Followed you. We became alarmed at your absence
+and I said I thought I could find you. I
+imagined you had gone for a stroll, and when I
+saw this bunch of pirates going through the town
+I guessed that you would fall into their hands. I
+came along after them and just as I was about to go
+on I saw you climbing down from the tree.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, you didn’t arrive a minute too soon,” declared
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_130'></a>130</span>
+Shirley. “We were badly frightened, weren’t
+we Mabel?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know I was,” was her chum’s reply. She
+turned to Dick. “But how——”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll explain later,” interrupted Dick. “The thing
+to do now is to get away from here before they
+return. Come on.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls started on ahead of him, and Dick
+turned for a glance over his shoulder.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then he uttered an exclamation of alarm, and
+shouted:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Run!”
+</p>
+<p>
+For in that quick glance over his shoulder he had
+perceived the return of the revolutionists.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXVII' id='chXVII'></a>CHAPTER XVII.—MABEL BRINGS THE BLUEJACKETS.</h2>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel needed no further urging,
+and took to their heels. Dick followed close behind.
+</p>
+<p>
+In the one brief glance in which he had perceived
+the return of the soldiers, Dick had been unable to
+determine whether their presence had been discovered,
+but he believed it wise to take a chance.
+Hence his command to run.
+</p>
+<p>
+The three sped lightly over the ground and had
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_131'></a>131</span>
+gone some distance when they heard a shout from
+behind, followed by the sharp reports of several
+rifles.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick stopped suddenly and called to the girls
+to halt. They obeyed instantly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There is no use being shot,” said Dick quietly,
+“and although they are poor shots they would be
+sure to hit one of us sooner or later.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then what shall we do?” cried Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There is only one thing to do,” was the reply.
+“Surrender.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dick is right,” agreed Shirley. “It is foolish to
+attempt to escape.”
+</p>
+<p>
+In the meantime the band of revolutionists had
+been coming toward them, and at length surrounded
+the three figures. A man, who appeared to be the
+leader, though he wore no uniform nor mark of
+distinction, advanced and addressed Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Who are you and what are you doing here?”
+he demanded in English.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick explained, and the man heard him through
+quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And who was it hurt Pedro back there?” and
+the leader waved toward the spot where Dick had
+struggled with the Nicaraguan.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I did,” he replied quietly, and explained the
+cause of the fight.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, you will have to stand trial for attacking one
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_132'></a>132</span>
+of my men,” said the leader. “I am General
+Orizaba.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He signalled for his men to surround the three,
+which was soon done, and they continued their
+march back toward the city.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Every step in this direction is better for us,”
+said Dick to the two girls, as they marched along.
+“We’ll get out of this trouble some way, be sure of
+that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, I know no harm will come to us as long
+as you are here,” replied Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thanks,” said Dick dryly. “But I don’t see how
+I can do much for any of us right now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Something will turn up,” said Shirley positively.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I hope it turns up soon,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+But if the prisoners hoped to be taken directly
+back to town they were doomed to disappointment.
+</p>
+<p>
+After crossing the clearing in the woods, General
+Orizaba led his men to the left, where after an
+hour’s march, he called a halt. Then he again approached
+the prisoners.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We shall camp here,” he said. “Here, also, you
+shall be tried for attacking Pedro.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick made no reply, but Shirley did
+</p>
+<p>
+“We are Americans,” she said, “and you don’t
+dare to interfere with us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t, eh?” was the reply. “You shall see.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Pedro, it now appeared, had been revived and
+brought along. The general motioned for him to
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_133'></a>133</span>
+approach. He pointed to Dick and spoke in Spanish.
+It was impossible to tell what they were talking
+about, but all three were keen enough to know
+that it boded no good for them.
+</p>
+<p>
+The general turned again to Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Pedro says you struck him without warning and
+without provocation,” he said. “I have decided,
+therefore, to dispense with the trial, and to fix your
+punishment myself.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I warn you——” began Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Caramba!” roared the leader, becoming very
+angry. “What do I care for your warnings, or for
+your friends either?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“There is an American cruiser in the harbor,”
+said Dick quietly. “The commander knows where
+I am, and if I am not back within two hours, he will
+land a force of sailors to see why.”
+</p>
+<p>
+General Orizaba seemed to hesitate, following
+these words. Then he became even angrier than before.
+He was about to speak, when a horseman
+clattered up.
+</p>
+<p>
+The general turned to him and they conversed
+in low tones. Then the horseman dismounted, and
+leaving his horse, made his way to where the rest
+of the revolutionists sat upon the ground some distance
+away.
+</p>
+<p>
+General Orizaba again faced Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dog of an Americano!” he thundered. “You
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_134'></a>134</span>
+shall be shot for daring to interfere with one of
+my men.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick only smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess you don’t mean that,” he replied quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t, eh? You shall see.” He paused a moment.
+“But you shall live until sunset.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He turned to call one of his men; and at that
+moment, Mabel, who stood closest to the riderless
+horse, suddenly leaped forward and sprang upon the
+animal’s back.
+</p>
+<p>
+So sudden was her movement that for a moment
+the Nicaraguans failed to realize her intention.
+</p>
+<p>
+That moment was sufficient for Mabel to seize the
+reins and turn the horse’s head toward the city.
+Then she dug her heels into his flanks and away
+they went.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick and Shirley were no less surprised than the
+Nicaraguans, and both uttered cries of alarm.
+</p>
+<p>
+General Orizaba darted forward with an ejaculation,
+and called to his men.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shoot!” he cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+Rifles were brought to bear, but the horse had
+gained his stride and was galloping along like the
+wind. Volley after volley was fired after the girl,
+but thanks to the movement of the horse and the
+poor marksmanship of the Nicaraguans, Mabel was
+not touched.
+</p>
+<p>
+Rapidly she rode, nor did she draw rein when
+she entered the town but galloped straight to the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_135'></a>135</span>
+pier. Here still lay the small boat of the <em>Yucatan</em>,
+manned by its crew. Rapidly explaining the
+situation, the girl urged the sailors back to the
+ship without waiting the return of the first officer,
+who was some place in the town.
+</p>
+<p>
+About the ship, Mabel found that Mr. Willing and
+Colonel Ashton were ashore searching for the girls,
+and so she went straight to Captain Anderson.
+That worthy acted promptly. He quickly signalled
+the cruiser <em>Prairie</em>, which Mabel, saw for the first
+time, perceived lay close by.
+</p>
+<p>
+The <em>Prairie</em> signalled for the captain and Mabel
+to come aboard, which they did without loss of time.
+In a few words Mabel explained the situation to the
+commander of the cruiser.
+</p>
+<p>
+Action came quickly.
+</p>
+<p>
+A bugle sounded, piping the crew to quarters.
+The commander detailed a landing party of one
+hundred and fifty marines and sailors. These were
+quickly rowed to the shore—Mabel going with them
+as a guide, for she refused to be left behind.
+</p>
+<p>
+Once ashore, the girl led the way toward where
+she had left her friends, the men going forward at
+the double-quick, their weapons ready for instant
+use.
+</p>
+<p>
+When General Orizaba perceived that Mabel had
+made good her flight, his anger knew no bounds.
+He berated his men roundly and danced about like a
+madman. Then he turned to Dick.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_136'></a>136</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“But you shall not escape!” he declared.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’ll have a squad of marines down on you in
+a few minutes,” replied Dick with a cheerful smile.
+“Then where will you be?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bah!” said the angry general. “What are a
+few marines? We can drive them back.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Think so, do you?” asked Dick. “I’m afraid
+you’ll be surprised.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You shall see,” declared the angry leader. “You
+shall live until you see your countrymen defeated.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Guess I shall live a long time then,” said Dick,
+with a smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+The smile angered the leader, and he stepped close
+to Dick and slapped him across the face.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick’s anger boiled up and he promptly sent his
+fist crashing into the general’s face, knocking him
+down.
+</p>
+<p>
+The young man regretted this act the next moment,
+for he knew that probably he had brought
+matters to a crisis.
+</p>
+<p>
+General Orizaba sprang to his feet and with a
+shout drew his revolver and covered Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley screamed. Then General Orizaba lowered
+his revolver.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, I won’t do it yet,” he said. “I promised
+you should see your countrymen defeated, and so
+you shall. I shall kill you later.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thanks,” said Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+In spite of his apparent nonchalance, he breathed
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_137'></a>137</span>
+easier, however, for he had been at the point of
+death, and none knew it better than he did.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We are all right now,” he told Shirley in a low
+voice. “The marines and sailors will soon be here,
+and these fellows can’t stand up against them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley smiled at him bravely.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I know it,” she replied quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now the leader of the revolutionists signalled
+two of his men to bind the prisoners. This was
+soon done, and they were taken well to one side of
+what proved to be the line of battle.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I do this so I may be sure you will be saved
+for me,” said General Orizaba with an evil smile.
+“It would be nice to have you shot down by American
+bullets, but I would rather do it myself.
+Besides, from here, you can see us defeat the Americanos.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Many thanks for your kindness,” returned Dick.
+“I’ll speak a word for you when you are in the
+hands of the Americanos, as you call them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That,” was the reply, “will never be.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick shrugged his shoulders.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Have it your own way,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+Came a shout from one of the men who had
+been sent forward on scout duty.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The Americanos!” he cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+General Orizaba hurried toward him. Dick and
+Shirley drew a breath of relief.
+</p>
+<p>
+An instant later a long line of hurrying blue
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_138'></a>138</span>
+figures came into view. Shirley and Dick looked
+at them with pride in their eyes.
+</p>
+<p>
+The marines and sailors advanced at the double.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Crack! Crack! Crack! Crack!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The battle had begun!
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXVIII' id='chXVIII'></a>CHAPTER XVIII.—END OF THE REVOLT.</h2>
+<p>
+The Nicaraguans met the first charge of the
+bluejackets bravely enough, but they were now opposed
+to men who knew not the meaning of the
+word defeat, nor what it meant to retreat. Under
+the first fire from the Americans they wavered;
+at the next they began to fall back and at the third
+they turned and fled.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick and Shirley, bound as they were, nevertheless
+could see how the fighting progressed, while
+thanks to the thoughtfulness of the revolutionary
+leader they were out of danger themselves.
+</p>
+<p>
+But now that the day was going against the
+enemy, Dick feared that General Orizaba, mindful
+of his threat, would return to his prisoners before
+seeking safety in flight. Therefore he began to
+devise a way of escape.
+</p>
+<p>
+After some effort he succeeded in getting out
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_139'></a>139</span>
+his pocket knife. Then, holding it in one of his
+bound hands, he bent his head and opened the big
+blade with his teeth. Fortunately the rope with
+which he was bound was not thick, and the knife
+was sharp.
+</p>
+<p>
+For perhaps ten minutes, holding the knife in
+his mouth by the handle, Dick sawed at the bonds
+on his hands. At last the rope parted. Quickly
+he untied his feet, and then unbound Shirley, who
+also arose to her feet.
+</p>
+<p>
+The Nicaraguan forces were now in full retreat,
+and as Dick would have led Shirley forward
+toward the town, a single figure burst into sight.
+As the man came closer Shirley and Dick could see
+anger and hate written large on his features. They
+recognized him upon the instant.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Orizaba!” exclaimed Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And come to fulfill his promise, I guess,” agreed
+Dick quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Run!” cried Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What’s the use?” asked Dick. “He has a gun.”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was true. In the hands of the defeated revolutionary
+leader was a revolver of heavy caliber, and
+he flourished it as he came toward them.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick turned to Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You get back out of sight!” he commanded.
+“I can handle this fellow!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley protested.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But—but,——” she began.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_140'></a>140</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Quick!” exclaimed Dick. “He is very angry
+and for that reason will be easier to handle. I
+don’t believe he could hit a barn door now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley followed Dick’s command and withdrew
+a short distance, although she was still in plain sight
+of the infuriated Nicaraguan.
+</p>
+<p>
+Standing quietly, with his hands on his hips, Dick
+awaited the attack of the Nicaraguan. A full hundred
+yards away, but still running, the latter opened
+fire with his revolver.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good!” thought Dick to himself. “He can’t
+hit me that way, and his shells will soon be gone.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Five times Orizaba fired, and each time the bullet
+went wild.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley, from her place of safety, watched the encounter
+breathlessly. She stood with clenched fists
+and awaited the outcome of each shot anxiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+A sixth time Orizaba’s revolver spoke.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick staggered, and Shirley gave utterance to a
+scream, while a laugh of derision came from the
+Nicaraguan.
+</p>
+<p>
+But the latter’s mirth was destined to be short-lived.
+Dick, still with a smile on his face in spite
+of the dull pain in his left arm where Orizaba’s
+last bullet had struck, stepped forward to meet his
+enemy in his mad rush.
+</p>
+<p>
+They came together with a shock and tumbled
+to the ground, where Orizaba clawed desperately at
+Dick’s face and eyes.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_141'></a>141</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“So that’s your game, eh?” muttered Dick to
+himself.
+</p>
+<p>
+He protected his face with his injured arm, while
+with the uninjured one he rained a shower of blows
+upon the Nicaraguan’s face. The latter soon tired
+of this and sprang to his feet. Dick also arose.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a cry of alarm from Shirley as Orizaba
+stepped back. His hand went to his belt, and a
+knife flashed in the air. But Dick, quick as a cat,
+gave him no time to use it.
+</p>
+<p>
+He realized his danger in an instant and acted
+promptly. With a shout he sprang forward, and
+seized the upraised arm with his right hand. He
+twisted it fiercely, and the Nicaraguan gave a cry of
+pain as he released his hold on the knife and stepped
+back.
+</p>
+<p>
+As he did so, Dick drove his right fist into his
+face, and General Orizaba tumbled to the ground,
+where he lay still.
+</p>
+<p>
+At the same moment there was a cheer from
+close at hand and, turning, Dick saw a dozen marines
+who had gathered about to watch the contest.
+Shirley came forward anxiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Are you hurt Dick?” she asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not much, I guess,” was the reply. “He winged
+me with the last shot, but I am sure it is nothing
+serious.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He’s all right,” shouted one of the marines,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_142'></a>142</span>
+as they gathered about him and congratulated him
+upon his fight.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley turned on them angrily.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And you stood off and left him to be killed,”
+she exclaimed. “You ought to be ashamed of yourselves.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, we know he could handle that fellow,”
+was the response, but the men looked at one another
+somewhat sheepishly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Their reason for not interfering was perfectly
+apparent. They had enjoyed the spectacle of Dick
+and Orizaba locked in combat, and had felt morally
+certain Dick would come out on top.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Just the same, he might have been badly hurt!”
+said Shirley, by no means convinced.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, they did all right,” said Dick with a laugh.
+“Come Shirley, let’s get back to the ship and I’ll
+have the surgeon look at this arm.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Are you hurt, Jack?” asked one of the men
+stepping forward.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bullet in the arm,” was Dick’s reply; and he
+added: “But my name is not Jack.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Everybody is Jack to us,” was the answer.
+“But had we known you were wounded we would
+have taken that fellow off your hands. Come on,
+there is Dr. Thomas over there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick and Shirley followed the marines to where
+the surgeon was engaged in bandaging the wounds
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_143'></a>143</span>
+of an American sailor, the only man who had been
+touched by one of the enemy’s bullets.
+</p>
+<p>
+He bound Dick’s arm up quickly, remarking that
+it would be as good as new in a day or two.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley!”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was Mabel’s voice, and turning, Shirley saw
+her chum rushing toward her. She ran to meet
+her and the greeting was affectionate.
+</p>
+<p>
+“How dared you take such a chance, Mabel?”
+demanded Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, somebody had to do it, and I was closest
+the horse,” was the reply. “I knew they couldn’t
+hit me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nevertheless, it was a desperate risk,” said
+Dick, who came up at that moment. “I expected
+to see your horse go tumbling.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But how did you get aid so quickly?” demanded
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel explained.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And they made me go back when the fighting
+began,” she continued. “I wanted to hunt you up
+immediately, but the lieutenant wouldn’t let me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should say not,” declared Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley was in danger. Why shouldn’t I have
+been there?” demanded Mabel. “I saw Dick and
+the general fighting and I came forward as fast as
+I could,” the girl continued, “and when I saw the
+Nicaraguan go down I knew our troubles were
+over.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_144'></a>144</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“And where is Dad?” asked Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I didn’t see him,” replied Mabel. “I suppose
+they are looking for us in some other part of the
+town. I’ll bet they are badly frightened.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I fear so too,” replied Shirley. “I guess we
+had better get back as soon as we can. But we
+shall have to thank the lieutenant first.”
+</p>
+<p>
+That officer declared that he wanted no thanks.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We are glad to have been able to take a shot at
+those fellows,” he said. “We have been wanting
+to do it for a long time, but this is the first opportunity
+we have had. We—Hello!”
+</p>
+<p>
+He broke off suddenly. Riding rapidly toward
+them was a large body of men, and above them
+floated a white flag. They dismounted some distance
+away, and one approached.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls recognized this man immediately. He
+was President Garcia.
+</p>
+<p>
+He rode up to the lieutenant, and introduced himself.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And I would like the person of Orizaba delivered
+to me,” he said quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You shall have him,” replied the lieutenant. “It
+will save us trouble.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The unfortunate revolutionist, fully recovered
+now, was turned over to the President of Nicaragua
+and marched away. Then President Garcia appeared
+to perceive Shirley and Mabel for the first
+time. He raised his hat to them.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_145'></a>145</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am pleased that the senoritas have escaped
+safely,” he said quietly, and making a low bow to
+them, he turned his horse about, and a moment
+later was gone.
+</p>
+<p>
+The lieutenant in command of the marines now
+ordered his men back to their ship, and the girls
+accompanied them on their return march through
+the town. Dark looks were cast at them from all
+sides, but none ventured a word.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You may see they don’t love us very much in
+these parts,” said the lieutenant with a smile.
+“They would welcome a chance to shoot us all.”
+</p>
+<p>
+At the pier the two girls saw their fathers approaching
+rapidly, and they ran forward to meet
+them. The meeting was affectionate, for both Mr.
+Willing and Colonel Ashton had been greatly
+alarmed at their long absence.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am going to keep my eye on you in the future,”
+declared Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls only laughed. Both men were profuse
+in their praise of Dick’s gallant actions, and Colonel
+Ashton declared:
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s a good thing we brought him along, Willing.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The marines gave the Willing party a rousing
+cheer as they stepped into the <em>Yucatan’s</em> small boat
+and were rowed back to the vessel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m glad to see you back,” declared Captain Anderson.
+“We’re late now. We shall leave here
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_146'></a>146</span>
+at once.” He turned to the first officer. “You may
+get under way immediately, sir!”
+</p>
+<p>
+And as the <em>Yucatan</em> steamed from the harbor,
+the passengers gathered about the two girls, demanding
+an account of their experiences.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXIX' id='chXIX'></a>CHAPTER XIX.—A GUATEMALA ADVENTURE.</h2>
+<p>
+“This,” said Captain Anderson, waving his hand,
+as the steamer entered a little harbor, “is Champerico,
+the only Guatemalan port at which we shall
+touch. It is the last Central American republic we
+shall see. Would you care to go ashore?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I would like to go,” said Shirley, with a sidelong
+look at her father.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You won’t go unless I do,” was Mr. Willing’s
+ultimatum. “You have been in trouble enough.
+I’m going to keep you in sight.” He turned to
+Colonel Ashton. “Would you care to go ashore,
+Ashton?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, yes,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good. Then we shall all go,” said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You can go with me,” said Captain Anderson.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_147'></a>147</span>
+“I am going to pay my respects to the American
+consul.”
+</p>
+<p>
+An hour later a small boat put off from the ship
+and headed shoreward. In it, besides Captain Anderson
+and the crew, were Mr. Willing, Colonel
+Ashton, Dick, Shirley and Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll keep out of trouble this time,” commented
+Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+They accompanied Captain Anderson to the
+United States consulate, where they were introduced
+to the consul. An hour later they all started
+back toward the boat.
+</p>
+<p>
+As they walked down one of the dirty streets
+Captain Anderson espied a figure slinking along.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hey!” he cried. “There goes that scoundrel
+Von Blusen, who broke his parole and ran away
+at Corinto. I’ll get him!”
+</p>
+<p>
+He darted hurriedly across the street, and laid a
+hand on the young man’s shoulder. The latter
+looked up in surprise, and then perceiving Captain
+Anderson, jerked suddenly free and took to his
+heels, running directly toward the Willing party.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Head him off!” cried Captain Anderson, and
+Dick and the two men leaped to obey.
+</p>
+<p>
+Straight at them rushed the young German officer,
+and a few feet away hurled himself forward
+with a powerful spring. He struck the three
+squarely, and all went to the ground in a tangled
+heap.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_148'></a>148</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Von Blusen was the first to regain his feet. He
+raised a hand as though to strike one of his fallen
+adversaries, but the approach of Captain Anderson
+at that moment caused him to turn and flee
+quickly.
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain made after him at top speed, calling
+upon him to halt. Around the block they ran,
+and then, unconsciously doubling back, Von Blusen
+once more found himself bearing down on Dick and
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+A moment later Captain Anderson, panting, hove
+in sight and gasped out:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Stop him!”
+</p>
+<p>
+This time the three spread out, so they would
+have a better chance of halting the fugitive. The
+latter ran straight at Mr. Willing and the force
+of the contact sent both to the ground. As Von
+Blusen arose Colonel Ashton leaped for him.
+</p>
+<p>
+But the German was too quick for the colonel,
+and missing his grasp, the latter sprawled on the
+street. Von Blusen turned just in time to meet
+Dick with a hard blow to the face, and Dick toppled
+over.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then Von Blusen darted up a little alleyway.
+</p>
+<p>
+Unmindful of his intention to keep a close eye
+on the girls, Mr. Willing, now red with anger,
+made after him, as did the colonel, Captain Anderson
+and Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls found themselves alone in the street.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_149'></a>149</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+The noise of the chase had attracted many spectators,
+among them several members of the native
+police.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly Captain Von Blusen emerged from the
+alleyway on the dead run, his pursuers close on his
+trail.
+</p>
+<p>
+Perceiving one man thus followed by many, the
+native officers decided to interfere. Von Blusen
+darted past them, evading their outstretched arms
+by dodging neatly; but the others were not so fortunate.
+</p>
+<p>
+Pursuers and native police collided with a shock,
+and there was a tangle of arms and legs as they
+rolled in the dirty street. The officers freed themselves
+first, and drawing their revolvers stood by
+while the others arose.
+</p>
+<p>
+One of them broke into a torrent of Spanish.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson, the only member of the party
+who spoke the language, halted in his tracks.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m an American citizen,” he told the policeman.
+“Take your hands off me,” this to one of the officers
+who insisted upon holding him by the arm.
+</p>
+<p>
+The officer chattered volubly and clung to the
+arm.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson freed his arm with a quick
+wrench, and tapped the officer lightly on the shoulder
+with his hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Caramba!” roared the Guatemalan, and levelled
+his revolver at the captain.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_150'></a>150</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Caramba yourself!” cried the captain, and extending
+his arm suddenly, he took the pistol away
+from the little officer.
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter stamped the ground angrily and broke
+into another torrent of unintelligible words.
+</p>
+<p>
+But Captain Anderson now perceived he had acted
+rashly in thus giving way to his temper. The blood
+of the other native officers was aroused, and they
+surrounded the Americans gesticulating vigorously.
+</p>
+<p>
+At that moment Captain Von Blusen, who had
+been hovering just around the corner, reappeared,
+and approaching the officers, addressed them in
+Spanish.
+</p>
+<p>
+“These men tried to rob me,” he declared. “I
+want them arrested!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Si señor! It shall be done!” replied one of the
+officers.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll go with you to make the charge,” continued
+the young German.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Si señor!” said the native officer.
+</p>
+<p>
+Turning, he motioned for the four to precede
+him. Captain Anderson was inclined to hang back,
+as were the others, but a word from Captain Von
+Blusen decided them to go on.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They’ll shoot if you don’t go,” declared Von
+Blusen with a smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel, who had been standing nearby
+while all this was going on, now made as though
+to approach, but Mr. Willing waved them back.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_151'></a>151</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Go back to the consulate and tell the consul
+what has happened,” he called to her.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls turned to go, but Von Blusen, realizing
+what was going on, called to the officers to stop
+them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Run!” cried Captain Anderson, who was the
+only one who understood the import of the German’s
+words.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Halt!” cried one of the Guatemalans, as the
+girls broke into a run.
+</p>
+<p>
+But the girls did not understand him, and if they
+had, their actions would have been the same.
+</p>
+<p>
+They set out for the consulate at top speed and
+they did not stop, in spite of pursuit and cries of
+“Halt!” until they dashed in the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+The consul greeted them with an exclamation of
+surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What’s the matter?” he demanded.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley explained.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And hurry,” she added tearfully, “they will lock
+them up in a dirty old jail.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The consul was forced to smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, well, I guess it won’t hurt them any,” he
+replied.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls looked at him in astonishment, and
+Shirley opened her mouth to speak. The consul
+silenced her with a gesture.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll get them out, all right,” he assured them.
+</p>
+<p>
+He looked at his watch and continued.
+</p>
+<div><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_152'></a>152</span></div>
+<p>
+“It is now ten o’clock. I think I can safely promise
+to have them back aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> by five
+o’clock.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Five o’clock!” repeated Shirley. “And where
+will they be all that time?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Jail,” was the brief reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley could not repress an exclamation of dismay.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But can’t you hurry?” she exclaimed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now don’t you fret,” said the consul. “There
+is certain red tape that must be gone through, and
+it will take time. Besides, it is needless to hurry.
+In this country no one hurries. If I seem unduly
+excited it will take longer than ever.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Please do the best you can, then,” said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall,” replied the consul. “In the meantime,
+you two girls return aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>. I’ll call
+my secretary and have him escort you back.”
+</p>
+<p>
+In response to his summons a young man appeared
+and the consul instructed him to see them
+back aboard their ship.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, sir,” said the young man. “Come,” to
+the girls.
+</p>
+<p>
+He accompanied them to the wharf, where he
+instructed the sailors to take them aboard and then
+return and await the arrival of the captain and the
+others.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was almost six o’clock when Shirley and Mabel,
+gazing toward shore, perceived the little boat
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_153'></a>153</span>
+of the <em>Yucatan</em> bobbing toward them. As it drew
+close they could make out the faces of their fathers,
+Dick and Captain Anderson.
+</p>
+<p>
+A short time later all appeared on deck. Their
+clothing was ruffled and dirty, and it was plain to
+the girls that their fathers were not in the best
+of temper. Nevertheless Shirley could not repress
+a slight dig at them.
+</p>
+<p>
+First she approached Captain Anderson.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And did you capture Captain Von Blusen?”
+she asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No,” grumbled the captain. “I hope I never
+set eyes on him again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dad,” said Shirley, “do you remember what
+you said to us about getting into trouble?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing growled some unintelligible reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ve never been in jail yet, Dad,” continued
+Shirley slyly. “Were you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing glanced at his daughter and seemed
+about to make some sharp response. Then he controlled
+himself and spoke:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, we were in jail,” he growled. “We spent
+the best part of the day there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well,” said Shirley, “you are always getting in
+trouble. I reckon Mabel and I will have to keep
+closer watch on you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am sure of it,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick smiled, but there was no amusement on the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_154'></a>154</span>
+faces of Mr. Willing nor Colonel Ashton. They
+scowled at their daughters.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now, Dad,” continued Shirley, “did Captain
+Von Blusen—”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Will you be quiet?” demanded Mr. Willing.
+“Haven’t we had enough trouble for one day without
+all this chatter. Come, Ashton, we’ll go to our
+cabin.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley, Mabel and Dick broke into a loud laugh
+as the two stalked away arm in arm, looking neither
+to the right nor left.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXX' id='chXX'></a>CHAPTER XX.—UP THE MEXICAN COAST.</h2>
+<p>
+The passengers aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> gazed curiously
+at the approaching battle cruiser.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was the morning following the departure from
+Champerico, and the <em>Yucatan</em> had been halted by a
+shot fired across her bow. Officers and passengers
+alike were curious as to the identity of the cruiser.
+</p>
+<p>
+So far she had shown no colors.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Do you suppose she is English?” asked Shirley
+of Dick, as they gazed over the rail at the oncoming
+stranger.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Must be either English or Japanese,” replied
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_155'></a>155</span>
+Dick. “Not much chance of any other vessel being
+in these waters, unless, of course, she is a
+United States cruiser. But that can’t be, because
+she would not have halted us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Signs of activity became apparent aboard the
+cruiser, and the colors were run up the masthead.
+For a moment they could not be distinguished, but
+as the breeze caught the ensign, a gasp went up
+from the passengers, with here and there a cheer.
+</p>
+<p>
+For the colors thus displayed were the red, white
+and black of Germany!
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness! Will she shoot us?” exclaimed
+Shirley in some dismay.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hardly,” declared Dick. “I don’t believe Germany
+wants to go to war with the United States.”
+</p>
+<p>
+There came a message from the German to Captain
+Anderson:
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am coming aboard!”
+</p>
+<p>
+A few moments later a boat put off from the
+cruiser, and soon scraped alongside the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+An officer appeared over the side and was greeted
+by Captain Anderson.
+</p>
+<p>
+“How did you get here?” was his first question.
+“I had reason to believe the <em>Yucatan</em> was now in
+other waters.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well,” replied Captain Anderson dryly, “your
+little piracy scheme didn’t work, you see.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The German officer controlled his temper with
+an effort.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_156'></a>156</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Have you a passenger by the name of Bristow
+aboard?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh,” said the captain, “you mean Von Blusen.
+We did have him aboard, in irons. I released
+him on parole, and he broke it. I’ll never trust
+another German.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The German officer drew himself up angrily.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Have a care, sir!” he exclaimed. “You seem
+to forget that I can sink you on a moment’s notice.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, no I don’t. But I’m sure you won’t. Already
+you have troubles enough. I’ll thank you
+to dispose of your business immediately and then
+get off my ship.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll have a look at your papers,” said the German
+shortly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson led the way to his cabin.
+</p>
+<p>
+As they talked, the passengers on deck noticed
+smoke upon the horizon. Save for this little blur
+and the German cruiser there was nothing else in
+sight but water.
+</p>
+<p>
+The blur became larger, and at last took the shape
+of a vessel. As it drew nearer it could be seen that
+it was a battle cruiser. It bore down toward the
+German cruiser at full speed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I hope it’s an Englishman,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Probably is,” said her father, “although it may
+be a Jap.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_157'></a>157</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Still the German officer was in the cabin with
+Captain Anderson.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly the head of another German officer appeared
+over the rail of the <em>Yucatan</em> and dashed toward
+the captain’s cabin. A moment later both
+reappeared, dropped over the side and the boat made
+back toward the cruiser.
+</p>
+<p>
+The <em>Yucatan</em> was very close, and now, at a command
+from Captain Anderson, she got under way.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If that other cruiser is a Britisher, there is
+bound to be a fight, and we don’t want to be in the
+way,” explained the captain. “We’ll stand off at
+a distance and look on.”
+</p>
+<p>
+This plan met the approval of the passengers,
+and as the <em>Yucatan</em> steamed toward a safe spot
+all eyes were turned upon the second cruiser waiting
+for her to show her colors.
+</p>
+<p>
+And at last they were unfurled, and a cheer rang
+the length of the ship. The British ensign fluttered
+from the mast.
+</p>
+<p>
+The German cruiser, immediately the identity of
+the other was determined, turned to flee. She
+seemed fully as large as the British ship, and there
+were comments of surprise aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>
+that she didn’t offer to accept battle.
+</p>
+<p>
+But there was to be no escape for the German.
+The British cruiser gave chase, and it was soon
+apparent that she was much faster than the foe.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a heavy crash as her big guns opened
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_158'></a>158</span>
+fire on the stern of the enemy. The <em>Yucatan’s</em>
+passengers watched eagerly for the result.
+</p>
+<p>
+The German cruiser seemed to stagger in her
+stride, and a cloud of wood and steel flew in the
+air. The first shot had struck home, and in some
+manner had disabled the engines of the German.
+Escape being impossible, the latter turned to give
+battle.
+</p>
+<p>
+Immediately the British cruiser reduced her speed.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel stood at the rail of the <em>Yucatan</em>
+with clasped hands and strained faces.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And to think that we shall see a real sea fight!”
+exclaimed Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But think of the poor sailors,” said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course,” said Mabel, “but they may be saved.
+Perhaps the German commander will surrender.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am sure he won’t,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, he won’t surrender,” said Dick. “Whatever
+else you may say of the Germans, their bravery
+cannot be doubted.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Now the first gun on the German cruiser spoke,
+and a shell plowed up the water alongside the Britisher.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They’ll have the range in a minute,” said Dick,
+“and then they’ll go at it hammer and tongs.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He was right. The next shot from the German
+burst squarely over her enemy’s forward turret,
+putting it out of commission.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_159'></a>159</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a cheer from the few German passengers
+aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+But the British cruiser more than evened up the
+score with her next shot.
+</p>
+<p>
+A shell burst squarely amidships on the German.
+A moment later there was a terrific explosion.
+</p>
+<p>
+The German cruiser seemed to part in the middle.
+It staggered crazily. She had been wounded unto
+death, as every passenger aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> realized.
+</p>
+<p>
+Men flung themselves into the sea, and struck out
+in the direction of the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson was a humane man, and while
+the matter possibly was none of his business, he
+determined to aid the unfortunate victims. He
+ordered the ship’s lifeboats manned and lowered.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Look!” cried Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Another terrific explosion drowned her voice.
+The German cruiser suddenly sprang into a brilliant
+sheet of flame, seemed to leap in the air, then disappeared.
+</p>
+<p>
+The calm waters of the Pacific closed over her.
+She was gone.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel held their breath in speechless
+amazement. It seemed to them incredible that such
+a great ship could have been sent to the bottom
+in such a short time.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The poor sailors!” exclaimed Shirley. “I hope
+they will all be saved.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_160'></a>160</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“They won’t be,” declared Captain Anderson,
+who had come up and now stood among the others.
+“With my glass I saw the commander on the bridge
+a moment before the ship went down. He has
+gone with her, and so, probably, have most of his
+officers.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He lifted his cap from his head, as did the passengers.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s a terrible thing, this war,” continued the
+Captain. “How many went down I do not know;
+but how many of those who did knew what they
+were fighting for? Not many.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Meanwhile the little lifeboats of the <em>Yucatan</em>
+were helping the crews of the British cruiser pick
+up the survivors. The work went on with the utmost
+haste, for there were many who could not
+swim.
+</p>
+<p>
+Fortunately most of those who had jumped just
+before the explosion were saved. These were all
+taken aboard the British cruiser, and a short time
+later the British commander came aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel looked with some awe at this
+British sea fighter. He seemed a veritable hero
+in their eyes. Once on deck, he strode toward Captain
+Anderson with quick steps, his carriage erect.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I thank you for your assistance in saving many
+helpless sailors,” he said to Captain Anderson.
+“Without your aid many would have perished.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_161'></a>161</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“How badly is your ship damaged, sir?” asked
+Captain Anderson, asking the question that was uppermost
+in the minds of all aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very little, sir,” was the reply. “Two guns
+shot to pieces, and five men injured. No man was
+killed. There was also some slight damage to the
+engine room. It was a notable victory.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Indeed it was!” cried Shirley, who could keep
+silent no longer.
+</p>
+<p>
+The British sea captain gazed at her for a moment,
+then bowed slightly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley’s face grew red at her own boldness, but
+she said nothing more.
+</p>
+<p>
+The commander of the British cruiser followed
+Captain Anderson to the latter’s cabin, where he
+inspected the ship’s papers. Half an hour later he
+made his way over the side of the <em>Yucatan</em> and was
+soon back aboard the cruiser.
+</p>
+<p>
+Immediately he had left, the <em>Yucatan</em> got under
+way and continued her journey up the Mexican
+coast.
+</p>
+<p>
+All the passengers remained on deck gazing after
+the British cruiser, which had turned in the opposite
+direction; and until she was lost to sight in the
+distance, a faint smoke marking her location, hardly
+an eye was taken from her.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, Shirley,” said Mr. Willing, “what did you
+think of the battle?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_162'></a>162</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“It was wonderful,” replied the girl, clasping
+her hands. “I am glad the English won.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And so am I,” agreed her father. “How do
+you think you would like to be a sailor aboard a
+man-o’-war.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’d love it!” declared Shirley with enthusiasm.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick looked at her peculiarly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I believe you would,” he said quietly at last, and,
+turning on his heel, he went below.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXXI' id='chXXI'></a>CHAPTER XXI.—A WOMAN PLOTTER.</h2>
+<p>
+Aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> was a woman passenger,
+who, on the trip up the Pacific, had made herself
+very agreeable to the members of the Willing party.
+She was not an American although she spoke English
+fluently, with the slightest of accents. Neither
+Shirley nor Mabel had asked her nationality, but
+they had agreed that she must be a Spaniard.
+</p>
+<p>
+The woman had given her name as Mrs. Miguel
+Sebastian and this strengthened the belief of the
+members of the Willing party that she was a native
+of one of the Latin countries. She had come
+aboard the ship for the first time at Colon, but for
+several days had kept to her stateroom, so the passengers
+had not seen much of her.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_163'></a>163</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+She was young, hardly more than twenty-five,
+slender, rather light complexioned for a Spaniard,
+and extremely pretty. Since leaving Champerico
+she had been much in the company of Shirley and
+Mabel, and both girls had taken an instinctive liking
+to her.
+</p>
+<p>
+She had travelled much, apparently, and told
+them tales of many lands. Her husband, she said,
+was abroad in Europe, but would join her in San
+Francisco within a month. She was well posted
+on current events, and seemed to have the history
+of Mexico at her finger tips.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was while the <em>Yucatan</em> was steaming into the
+harbor of Acapulco, the first Mexican port at which
+they were to touch, that Mrs. Sebastian related some
+of the history of the revolution-torn republic.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have always been greatly interested in
+Mexico,” she told the girls, as the three leaned over
+the rail this morning. “I have spent several years
+in the country. I have friends here in Acapulco,
+and I shall make an effort to see them while here.
+Would you care to go with me?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We would love to,” declared Shirley, “but I
+don’t know whether Dad will consent to our going
+without him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We shall see,” returned Mrs. Sebastian. “I can
+promise you a dinner that you will never forget.
+Nowhere outside of Mexico can you get real Mexican
+food, and it will be something to remember.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_164'></a>164</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and Dick now
+joined the others on deck, and Shirley asked for
+permission to accompany Mrs. Sebastian.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing appeared somewhat dubious, but
+Mrs. Sebastian also asked him to consent.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll promise to return them to you safely,” she
+said with a smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+“In that event, I shall give my consent to their
+going, madam,” returned Colonel Ashton gallantly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And I,” agreed Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thanks so much,” said Mrs. Sebastian, “and
+I’ll go and ask Captain Anderson just how long we
+shall remain here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+She walked away.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Willing,” said Dick, “it may appear wrong,
+but somehow or other I don’t exactly trust that
+woman.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Pooh!” replied Mr. Willing. “What does a
+youngster like you know?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Perhaps I am wrong,” replied Dick, “but something
+tells me she is not to be trusted. She is up
+to some mischief.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, Dick!” exclaimed Shirley. “Don’t you
+want us to go?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“To tell the truth I don’t,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Young man,” said Colonel Ashton, “you will
+learn, as you grow older, not to jump to such rash
+conclusions. Mrs. Sebastian is a gentlewoman.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_165'></a>165</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Right you are, Ashton,” declared Mr. Willing.
+“We’re old enough to know, eh?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The two men smiled at each other and walked
+away, leaving the young people together.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian returned a few moments later.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain Anderson says we shall be here until
+evening,” she said, “so we shall have plenty of time
+for our trip ashore. He says we may go in the
+first boat, so you girls had better run along to
+your cabin and get ready. Mr. Stanley will entertain
+me until you return.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel hurried away, and Dick and
+Mrs. Sebastian stood together looking across the
+water at the shore, which was drawing closer rapidly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where are you going when you get ashore?”
+asked Dick abruptly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, I am going to call upon a friend,” was
+the smiling reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then you have been here before?” questioned
+Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Many times.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mrs. Sebastian,” said Dick quietly, “are you a
+Mexican?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The woman started back in surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, no,” she replied at last. “I was born in
+Spain. Why do you ask?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I just wondered,” was Dick’s evasive answer.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_166'></a>166</span>
+“By the way, I suppose it is perfectly peaceful here
+now?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, indeed,” was the reply. “I guess the fighting
+is all over, now that General Villa has been
+successful in Chihuahua and other northern states.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But there has been trouble down here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh yes, but it is all over. Besides, the revolutionists
+probably have not enough money to buy
+arms and ammunition.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why don’t they steal them? It wouldn’t be
+the first time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian’s face turned red.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you mean?” she asked angrily.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am sorry I offended you,” Dick apologized.
+“I spoke thoughtlessly.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Say no more about it,” said Mrs. Sebastian with
+a laugh. “I am naturally touchy on that subject,
+for I have friends who were of the revolutionary
+party.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I see,” replied Dick, and the subject was changed
+as Shirley and Mabel returned to them.
+</p>
+<p>
+Half an hour later the <em>Yucatan</em> dropped anchor
+a mile off shore and the small boats were lowered
+for such passengers as desired to land.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian, Shirley and Mabel soon found
+themselves in the first boat and making shoreward
+at a good clip.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We shall be back in plenty of time,” Mrs. Sebastian
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_167'></a>167</span>
+had called to Mr. Willing just before they
+took their places in the boat.
+</p>
+<p>
+The men nodded and waved their hands, and
+the occupants of the boat returned the salute.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now the small boat scraped the shore, and an
+officer sprang out and lent a hand to the passengers.
+Mrs. Sebastian was the first to go ashore, and Shirley
+and Mabel followed a moment later.
+</p>
+<p>
+The little street that ran along the water front
+was crowded with natives, dirty, ragged and unkempt,
+with here and there a gaily bedecked Mexican.
+They did not present a very inviting aspect,
+and the two girls shrank close to Mrs. Sebastian.
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter paid no attention to the natives, but
+pushed her way through the crowd with never a
+glance to right or left. She continued along the
+street until they came upon a long line of dilapidated
+cabs.
+</p>
+<p>
+She signalled to one of the drivers, who opened
+the door. Mrs. Sebastian motioned the girls to
+climb in, spoke a few quick words in Spanish to
+the driver and entered the cab. A moment later
+they were being driven through the dirty streets as
+fast as the old horse could go.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I thought my friend might be at the landing to
+meet me,” the woman explained, “but as I didn’t
+see anything of her, I thought best to drive right
+to her home.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_168'></a>168</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel nodded their understanding of
+this, and turned to view the passing sights.
+</p>
+<p>
+After an hour’s drive the cab pulled up before
+a house somewhat larger than the rest, and the
+cabman dismounted and threw open the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Here we are at last,” said Mrs. Sebastian as
+she alighted and motioned the girls to follow.
+Then she gave the cabman a single piece of silver
+and turned to the heavy door.
+</p>
+<p>
+This she opened without the formality of a knock,
+and led the way across a small patio—a courtyard—in
+the center of what appeared to be the house
+itself. Here they brought up against another door,
+and Mrs. Sebastian knocked sharply three times.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a moment’s delay, then the door swung
+open and a man’s face appeared.
+</p>
+<p>
+At sight of Mrs. Sebastian the man stepped back
+with a bow, and Mrs. Sebastian, followed by the
+two girls, swept by him.
+</p>
+<p>
+The door slammed behind them.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian led the way into a small but
+luxuriously furnished room off the main hall, where
+she turned to the man who had followed them,
+and spoke a few words in Spanish. The man
+bowed and departed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I told him to announce our arrival,” explained
+Mrs. Sebastian.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls surveyed the interior of the handsome
+apartment curiously.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_169'></a>169</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I had no idea they lived so well in Mexico,”
+said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nor I,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The upper classes live as well in Mexico as
+elsewhere,” replied Mrs. Sebastian. “It is only the
+poorer—or peon—class that you have heard about,
+apparently.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Footsteps sounded without and a moment later
+a handsomely attired woman entered the room, followed
+a moment later by a fancifully garbed man.
+The woman rushed up to Mrs. Sebastian and they
+greeted each other affectionately. The man also
+appeared glad to see the visitor.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian then presented the girls, and it
+developed that both Don Miguel and his wife—for
+so they were introduced—spoke English. They
+made the girls welcome, and told them to make
+themselves at home.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have promised them a real Mexican dinner,”
+explained Mrs. Sebastian with a little laugh.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They shall have it,” replied Don Miguel, throwing
+wide his arms.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And now,” said Mrs. Sebastian, “where can we
+have a talk?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“In the next room,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good! I am sure my young friends will excuse
+me for half an hour.”
+</p>
+<p>
+She looked inquiringly at the two girls. The
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_170'></a>170</span>
+latter nodded, and the Don and two women made
+their way from the room.
+</p>
+<p>
+The moment they were gone, Shirley and Mabel
+began an inspection of the room. There were two
+windows, both of which looked on the street and
+both of which were barred.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley uttered an exclamation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Barred!” she said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s nothing,” laughed Mabel. “Surely you
+remember all windows are barred in Mexico.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s so,” agreed Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+After some further inspection of the room, Mabel
+crossed to the door through which they had come,
+and turned the knob. Then her face paled and she
+stepped back with an exclamation of alarm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What’s the matter, Mabel?” asked Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+For a moment Mabel did not reply. Again she
+turned the knob and then she stepped back and
+looked at Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s locked!” she declared.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXXII' id='chXXII'></a>CHAPTER XXII.—CAPTAIN VON BLUSEN BOBS UP AGAIN.</h2>
+<p>
+“Are you sure?” asked Shirley, her face also
+turning a shade whiter.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_171'></a>171</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Try it yourself,” replied Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley advanced and laid hold of the knob, but
+the door would not open.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls looked at each other in alarm.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I never heard that they always locked the doors
+in Mexico,” said Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nor I,” agreed Shirley. “Do you suppose it
+was an accident?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know what to think,” replied Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was no denying the fact that both girls
+were badly frightened. They darted hither and
+thither about the room, seeking a means of egress;
+but there was none and they finally sat down.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It must have been an accident,” said Shirley at
+last. “Surely Mrs. Sebastian would have no reason
+for wishing to keep us prisoners.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s what I think,” Mabel agreed. “The
+door must have locked itself.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, all we can do is wait for some one to
+return,” said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+And so they waited.
+</p>
+<p>
+As the minutes passed, each seemingly more
+slowly than the one that had gone before, the fright
+of the girls increased.
+</p>
+<p>
+An hour passed and still Mrs. Sebastian had not
+returned.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley was about to speak, when they heard the
+sounds of footsteps outside and the doorknob
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_172'></a>172</span>
+turned. The door opened and Mrs. Sebastian
+stepped in smiling.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I had no idea I had been gone so long,” she
+exclaimed. “Why didn’t you call me? You have
+been as quiet as mice.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel each drew a breath of great
+relief.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then you didn’t lock us in purposely?” asked
+Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Lock you in? What do you mean?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“The door was locked and we couldn’t get out.
+That’s why we were so quiet,” replied Shirley,
+laughing. “We thought you had locked us in.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“The idea!” exclaimed Mrs. Sebastian. “The
+door locked?” She approached and examined it.
+Then she looked up with a smile. “Why, the catch
+is on,” she exclaimed, smiling. “And were you
+frightened?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, not much,” replied Mabel slowly. “We
+knew it must have been locked accidentally.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course,” replied the woman. “Now would
+you care to wash up a bit? Dinner will be ready
+in fifteen minutes.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls nodded and the woman led the way.
+Fifteen minutes later all were seated in the cozy
+dining room, where Shirley and Mabel had their
+first introduction to Mexican cooking.
+</p>
+<p>
+Each girl sampled everything that was placed
+before her, and in spite of their efforts to try and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_173'></a>173</span>
+enjoy the meal, disappointment was written large
+on their features. Mrs. Sebastian noticed this and
+laughed, while the donna and her husband smiled
+slightly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So you don’t like the Mexican dishes,” said Mrs.
+Sebastian.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, they are a little too hot for me,” said
+Shirley, somewhat ruefully.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Try some of these tortillas,” said the man,
+“perhaps you will find them to your liking, though
+they are warm.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls tried some, but with no better result.
+They finally gave up in despair.
+</p>
+<p>
+The meal over, Mrs. Sebastian led the way back
+to the other room, which apparently was the parlor.
+Here all sat down to talk and the girls spent
+a very pleasant afternoon.
+</p>
+<p>
+Finally Shirley looked at her watch. “What
+time did Captain Anderson say we would leave?”
+she asked of Mrs. Sebastian.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Soon after five o’clock,” was the reply.
+“Why?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s almost four now,” replied Shirley. “Hadn’t
+we better be going?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, no, we have plenty of time,” was the answer.
+“It will not take us so long to get back.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley subsided, and the others continued the
+conversation.
+</p>
+<p>
+At half past four Shirley again mentioned the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_174'></a>174</span>
+time. Mrs. Sebastian arose, spoke a few words to
+the others in Spanish, and then came over to Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have decided,” she said, laying a hand on the
+girl’s shoulder, “to remain here over night and
+go on by train to-morrow. Will not you and Mabel
+stay with me?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am sorry, but we can’t do that,” replied Shirley.
+“If you will call a cab for us and direct the
+driver, we shall not trouble you to take us back
+to the boat.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But we should like to have you stay,” said the
+donna.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We would indeed be glad to do so, but father
+would worry,” said Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+The Don also added his voice, but the girls
+turned a deaf ear. Both arose and put on their
+hats. Then they approached to tell their hosts
+good-bye.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian spoke quickly to the Don and
+his wife in Spanish. Then she turned to the girls.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come,” she said, “remove your hats and stay.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is impossible,” replied Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We would be glad to if we could,” said Shirley,
+“but we must hurry now, or we shall be too late,
+and the ship will go without us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls turned toward the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+“One moment,” said Mrs. Sebastian, raising a
+hand.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_175'></a>175</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls halted in their tracks.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We must insist upon your staying over with
+us,” said the woman quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But—” began Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I said we must insist,” repeated Mrs. Sebastian.
+“You may as well remove your hats.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Both girls stared at her in utter astonishment.
+Shirley was the first to grasp the significance of the
+situation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then it is true!” she exclaimed; “the door was
+locked! We are prisoners!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The man of the house bowed low.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Prisoners, or guests,” he said. “It shall be as
+you prefer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley did not reply, but leaped quickly toward
+the door. The others were across the room and
+could not interfere. The door swung open, and
+Shirley called out:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Quick, Mabel! Run!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel sprang after her friend.
+</p>
+<p>
+But the time taken to open the door proved
+costly. Before Shirley could dart through it, Mrs.
+Sebastian had her by both shoulders, while the
+other woman held Mabel powerless.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then they led the girls back into the room and
+bade them sit down. Perceiving the uselessness of
+resistance, the girls obeyed.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel immediately broke into tears, and Shirley
+threw her arms about her.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_176'></a>176</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Don’t cry, dearie,” she exclaimed. “We are in
+no danger. They will not dare to harm us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+She gazed at their three captors angrily.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you want with us?” she demanded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You shall know in good time,” replied Mrs. Sebastian
+gruffly.
+</p>
+<p>
+Her manner had undergone a sudden change.
+She was no longer the good-natured, smiling companion
+of the steamer. Her face was hard, and
+she seemed to have aged ten years.
+</p>
+<p>
+She turned to the other woman.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bring paper, pen and ink,” she commanded.
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter hurried away to obey this order, and
+returned a few moments later, bearing the required
+articles, which she placed on a table.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian drew up several chairs and motioned
+the two girls, who had been staring at them
+curiously, to take the seats.
+</p>
+<p>
+Both realized it would be useless to refuse and
+did as commanded. Mrs. Sebastian passed the
+paper, pen and ink to Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Write as I dictate,” she ordered.
+</p>
+<p>
+Here Shirley protested.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it you wish me to write?” she asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You’ll hear quick enough,” was the reply.
+“Write.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley replaced the pen gently on the table.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not until you tell me what you want me to
+write, and to whom,” she replied quietly.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_177'></a>177</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+The others looked at her in surprise, then conversed
+a few moments in Spanish. At last Mrs.
+Sebastian said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“The letter is to your father and to Colonel
+Ashton. It will contain a demand for $20,000—$10,000
+apiece—for your return.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley rose suddenly to her feet and gave a cry
+of amazement.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You mean that we are to be held for ransom?”
+she exclaimed in unbelief.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Exactly,” replied the man.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And so you are robbers,” exclaimed Shirley
+scornfully.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian’s face flushed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No,” she replied quietly. “But the patriotic
+forces in Mexico are in need of money. We have
+taken this means of getting it for them. Your
+fathers are rich. They will not miss the money,
+and it will mean so much to us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And if we refuse to write?” asked Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You probably will spend the remainder of your
+days in Mexico. But you won’t refuse. Come
+now, write as I dictate.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“May I speak to my friend in private first?”
+asked Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian hesitated. Then:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, but be quick.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel put their heads close together.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shall I write the letter, Mabel?” asked Shirley.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_178'></a>178</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” was the instant reply. “Then Dad will
+know we are in danger and just what sort of danger.
+It is the only way we can get word to the
+others. I know they will find us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess you’re right,” agreed Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+She returned to her place at the table, and picked
+up the pen.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dictate and I shall write,” she said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am glad to see you are so sensible,” smiled
+Mrs. Sebastian.
+</p>
+<p>
+She dictated and Shirley wrote. When she had
+finished she had both girls affix their signatures,
+and then address an envelope.
+</p>
+<p>
+She clapped her hands and a young native boy
+entered the room. To him Mrs. Sebastian gave
+the letter and spoke in Spanish, whereupon the boy
+hurried away.
+</p>
+<p>
+Hardly had he gone when there came three sharp
+knocks at the door without. The conspirators
+looked at each other in alarm, and the hopes of
+Shirley and Mabel rose suddenly.
+</p>
+<p>
+But the latter were doomed to disappointment.
+Mrs. Sebastian left the room, only to return a few
+moments later followed by the figure of a man.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley took one look at him, and gave a cry
+of surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+The newcomer was Captain Von Blusen!
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_179'></a>179</span><a name='chXXIII' id='chXXIII'></a>CHAPTER XXIII.—THE SEARCHING PARTY.</h2>
+<p>
+A long blast from the whistle of the <em>Yucatan</em>
+broke the stillness of late afternoon.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick, who were
+peering shoreward from the deck of the steamer
+with straining eyes, looked anxiously at each other.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What can be detaining them?” exclaimed the
+former.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am sure I don’t know,” returned Colonel
+Ashton. “They probably will be here in a few
+minutes.”
+</p>
+<p>
+A boat put off from shore; it was the last of
+the <em>Yucatan’s</em> small craft, which had been awaiting
+the return of late passengers. It was too far away
+for the watchers to identify those aboard it.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing breathed a sigh of relief.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess they are coming at last,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+The three watched the approach of the boat eagerly.
+At last it came close enough to make out the
+occupants. There was not a woman aboard.
+</p>
+<p>
+Cries of alarm issued from the lips of the three
+watchers. At the same moment there came another
+blast from the steamer’s siren.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_180'></a>180</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“They are not in the boat!” exclaimed Dick.
+“What shall we do?”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing did not stop to reply. He hurried
+toward the bridge where Captain Anderson stood,
+ready to give the signal to up-anchor immediately
+the small boat was hoisted aboard.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing, closely followed by Colonel Ashton
+and Dick, rushed up to him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain!” exclaimed Mr. Willing. “My daughter
+and the colonel’s daughter and Mrs. Sebastian
+are still ashore. They are not in the last boat.
+What is to be done?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain turned the matter over in his mind.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We should be on our way now,” he replied at
+last. “I am afraid we shall have to go without
+them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing let out a roar of protest.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No you don’t!” he cried. “You can’t go and
+leave my daughter behind like that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, what would you have me do?” asked the
+captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wait!” was the reply. “Wait for them!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain looked at his watch.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s five thirty now,” he said. “I shall wait until
+six thirty.”
+</p>
+<p>
+With this the others were forced to be content.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If they haven’t come then, we’ll have the captain
+set us ashore,” said the colonel.
+</p>
+<p>
+The passengers from the last boat came over
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_181'></a>181</span>
+the side, and Mr. Willing questioned them eagerly.
+None had seen any sign of the missing ones.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick, gazing over the rail, uttered a cry and
+pointed across the water.
+</p>
+<p>
+A boat was putting off from shore and coming toward
+the steamer.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess they are coming at last,” said Colonel
+Ashton. “I’ll read Mabel a lecture when she gets
+here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As the boat approached closer it became evident
+that it had but a single occupant; and as it drew
+still nearer, that the occupant was a young native.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson hailed him through his megaphone.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you want?” he shouted in Spanish.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Message for Señor Willing!” came the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+Five minutes later, bowing and scraping, the boy
+put a message into Mr. Willing’s hands.
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter tore it open quickly and his eyes devoured
+the words in a moment. Then he gave a
+cry of rage.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What’s the matter?” asked Colonel Ashton and
+Dick in a single voice.
+</p>
+<p>
+For reply, Mr. Willing read them the contents
+of the letter—a demand for $20,000 if the girls
+were ever to be seen again.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing and the others rushed again toward
+the captain on the bridge. The captain read the
+letter gravely.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_182'></a>182</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wish I could help you, sir,” he said at last.
+“But it is impossible. I must get under way within
+half an hour.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hey! Where you going?” This last to the
+native boy who had suddenly leaped into the water,
+climbed into his boat and was making off toward
+the shore.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Get him!” cried the captain to his first officer.
+</p>
+<p>
+One of the <em>Yucatan’s</em> boats put off and gave
+chase.
+</p>
+<p>
+But the distance was too great to overtake the
+fugitive, and it was soon apparent that he would
+make his escape.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If we had laid hold of him we might have
+learned something,” said Captain Anderson. “He
+knows where the girls are. But it’s too late now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What can we do?” demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“My advice,” said the captain, “is that you stay
+behind and put the matter in the hands of the
+American consul. He can tell you better what to
+do than I can.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where did the message say to leave the money,
+Willing?” asked Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing passed him the letter.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nine o’clock, southeast corner San Francisco
+street, Tuesday. Check payable to Miguel Martinez
+will do. Come alone,” read the colonel.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_183'></a>183</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“H-m-m, must have lots of confidence in themselves
+if they can use a check.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now gentlemen,” said Captain Anderson, “the
+best I can do is to set you ashore. I must get under
+way immediately. I’m sorry, but I have my other
+passengers to think of.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing acknowledged the justice of this.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Give us ten minutes to get some things together
+and a boat to set us ashore then,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain consented, and Dick and the two men
+hastened to their cabins, where they gathered what
+few belongings they could.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll have the captain dispose of the rest in
+Frisco,” said the colonel. “We’ll get them when
+we get there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+This the captain agreed to do, and ten minutes
+later the three were rushing shoreward in the
+steamer’s powerful gasoline launch. Immediately
+they clambered out, the launch put back to the ship.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Reckon we had better go straight to the consulate,
+colonel,” said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Right. But how are we going to find it?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll try some of these natives. Some of ’em
+must speak English.”
+</p>
+<p>
+After two unsuccessful attempts, Mr. Willing
+was successful in his quest.
+</p>
+<p>
+Half an hour later they were in the presence of
+the American Consul, Mr. Edwards, to whom they
+explained the matter.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_184'></a>184</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“What are they, a band of robbers?” asked Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should say they are probably revolutionists,”
+replied the consul. “The situation here is peculiar.
+All factions are at war with each other. The
+latest so-called patriots are followers of Carranza,
+and I happen to know are without funds. If they
+can’t pay their men they will lose them. I wouldn’t
+be surprised if they were the ones who had captured
+your daughters.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, what are we going to do about it?” demanded
+Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“To tell the truth, there isn’t much we can do.
+Officially, I am powerless. The United States
+hasn’t recognized the Carranza faction, and for that
+reason I cannot call on its agents officially. However,
+I can pay a personal call upon Señor Jorge
+Hernandez. He may know something.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then let’s get busy at once,” cried Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t suppose you care to pay this ransom,
+Mr. Willing?” asked the consul.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll pay it if I can’t get my daughter back any
+other way. If she is in danger I shall pay it anyhow.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am sure that she is in no danger of violence,”
+returned the consul. “They would not harm an
+American at this crisis. All they will do is to hold
+her in the hope that eventually you will pay. I
+would advise against paying the ransom at once.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall follow your advice, sir,” said Mr. Willing.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_185'></a>185</span>
+“You know more about these brutes than I
+do.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then we shall call on Hernandez,” said the consul.
+“Come.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He called a cab, and all were soon at the home
+of Señor Hernandez, who Consul Edwards explained,
+was one of the foremost of the revolutionists
+in western Mexico.
+</p>
+<p>
+Señor Hernandez received them cordially, and
+expressed surprise at the story Mr. Willing related.
+He even called his wife into consultation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If our party is concerned in this matter I am
+not aware of it,” he told them. “I shall make inquiries,
+and if I find it is true, someone shall pay
+dearly.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, some of your fellows have captured them
+all right,” declared Dick angrily. “I wouldn’t be
+surprised if you know all about it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Sir!” exclaimed the Mexican, drawing himself
+up.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mr. Stanley!” exclaimed the consul. “You forget
+yourself!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Even Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton apologized
+to the Mexican for Dick’s outburst.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Say no more about it, señors,” was the suave
+reply. “Youth is always hot-headed, you know.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I didn’t say it because I am hot-headed,” declared
+Dick. “I said it because I mean it.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_186'></a>186</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez gazed at the others with an air of
+wounded dignity.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If I am to be insulted, I shall not continue the
+interview longer,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The boy meant no harm, señor,” said the consul.
+“He is just angry, that’s all.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then, I shall speak more with you if he is excused,”
+was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+The consul looked at Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You had better go outside,” he said. “You
+have already made trouble enough.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick was on the point of making an angry retort,
+but checked himself.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very well,” he said. “I shall wait for you without.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He left the room, and went out on to the street,
+where he stood gazing first this way and then that
+while he waited for the appearance of the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+A man swung sharply past him in the darkness.
+Dick was caught by the other’s erect carriage,
+plainly that of a military man.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Too tall for a Mexican,” muttered Dick. “I’ll
+have a look at him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He followed. Under a dim street light half a
+block away the man paused to light a cigar. The
+flare of the match lighted up his features.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Von Blusen!” exclaimed Dick. “I’ll bet he is
+mixed up in this in some way. I’ll follow him.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_187'></a>187</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Taking pains to avoid being discovered, he set
+out on Von Blusen’s trail.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXXIV' id='chXXIV'></a>CHAPTER XXIV.—FLIGHT.</h2>
+<p>
+When Mrs. Sebastian entered the room where
+Shirley and Mabel were held prisoners, followed
+by Captain Von Blusen, she immediately addressed
+her fellow conspirators.
+</p>
+<p>
+“This,” she said, indicating the German officer,
+“is Captain Von Blusen, a German naval officer.
+He informs me that he is seeking, for his government,
+a naval base on the Pacific. In return for
+this the German government will pay handsomely.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“In that event,” replied the Mexican, who it now
+developed was none other than Miguel Martinez,
+“we may do business. Take a seat, señor.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Von Blusen did so, and for the first time his
+eyes fell upon the two girls.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Miss Ashton! Miss Willing!” he exclaimed.
+“What are you doing here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We are prisoners,” replied Shirley bitterly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why?” demanded the captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Held for ransom,” replied Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain smiled.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_188'></a>188</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“A good idea,” he said turning to the others.
+“An excellent manner in which to raise money, providing
+you are not caught.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I was not aware that you were acquainted with
+these young ladies,” said Mrs. Sebastian.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, yes indeed! I know them well,” was the
+reply. “In fact I have a little score to settle with
+them myself. One of our best laid plans was foiled
+because of them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“So?” queried Martinez. “Will you explain,
+captain?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“With pleasure.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain did so, and the others listened with
+amazement to the story of the plot to capture the
+<em>Yucatan</em>, and its ultimate outcome.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They are smart girls,” declared Mrs. Sebastian,
+“but this time I believe we have them safe.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I sincerely hope so,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+An hour later the girls were left alone.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What on earth shall we do?” exclaimed Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There is nothing we can do,” replied Shirley.
+“We must wait for some one to rescue us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Do you suppose there is anything in what Captain
+Von Blusen gave as his reason for being here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course; but the thing that puzzles me is how
+he got here so soon. You remember how we left
+him?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes. But he’s a very resourceful man. I wish
+he were on our side.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_189'></a>189</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“So do I. If he were, we might get away.”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was after seven o’clock when Mrs. Sebastian,
+Martinez and his wife reentered the room.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We have had no reply from your fathers as yet,”
+said the former. “However, we did not really expect
+one. It is to be hoped for your sakes that
+they leave the money to-night.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t believe they will,” replied Shirley quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So much the worse for you then.”
+</p>
+<p>
+At this moment a native boy came in and announced
+that the American consul was without, accompanied
+by two strangers, and that he desired
+immediate communication with Señor Hernandez.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, they are on the trail,” said Martinez, with
+a laugh. “I wonder what the consul would think
+if he knew that Hernandez and Martinez were one
+and the same person. Well, I shall see the consul.
+You be very quiet in here, for you know how
+sounds carry in this house.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian nodded, and Martinez, alias Hernandez,
+made his way from the room.
+</p>
+<p>
+He returned an hour later with a smile on his
+face.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ve thrown them off the track, all right,” he said
+gleefully. “I was startled for a moment, though.
+There was a little whipper-snapper with the two
+Americanos—Señor Stanley is his name—and he
+accused me of knowing the whereabouts of the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_190'></a>190</span>
+prisoners. I denied it, and Consul Edwards rebuked
+him and sent him from the room.”
+</p>
+<p>
+At this moment there came footsteps running
+rapidly down the hall, and a moment later Captain
+Von Blusen burst in excitedly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Quick!” he cried. “We must get away from
+here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Here! here!” said Hernandez calmly. “What
+is the matter? Give an account of yourself.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I was walking along the street,” said Von Blusen,
+“when I came across one of the Americans
+from aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Who?” demanded Mrs. Sebastian anxiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Young Stanley,” cried the captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Stanley?” repeated the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes. I heard someone following me, and I
+waited for him to come up. When I saw who it
+was I hit him with my fist and knocked him down.
+He was up in a moment, though, and pitched into
+me. We had quite a tussle, but I finally managed
+to get away and come here to warn you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And were you followed?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“The Kaiser must be proud of you,” sneered
+Hernandez. “If you have botched his plans as you
+have ours, he would have you shot. Come,” he
+turned to the two women, “the game is up. We
+shall have to fly. If the Americano has followed
+this man here, my connection must soon be discovered.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_191'></a>191</span>
+Consul Edwards will suspect. We must
+fly!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where?” exclaimed Mrs. Sebastian.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mazatlan. We have just time to catch the
+night train. Hurry!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The two women turned and dashed from the
+room and Hernandez turned to the girls.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Put on your hats,” he said gruffly.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls obeyed without a word, for they could
+see the man was very angry.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then he turned to Captain Von Blusen.
+</p>
+<p>
+“As for you,” he said, “you keep out of my
+sight in the future. Approach me again and I
+will have you shot.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But—” began the captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez produced a revolver which he levelled
+at the German.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess I had better do it now,” he declared.
+“It will save trouble.”
+</p>
+<p>
+His finger tightened on the trigger.
+</p>
+<p>
+But before he could fire, Shirley sprang forward
+with a cry and seized the arm that held the revolver.
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez whirled on her angrily, but as he did
+so, Captain Von Blusen sprang forward and struck
+the man a heavy blow on the head with his fist.
+Hernandez toppled over.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen turned to the girls.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I can do you no good here,” he said hurriedly.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_192'></a>192</span>
+“I’ll tell your friends where you are being taken
+and we shall save you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He darted from the room and disappeared.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel made as though to follow him,
+but before they reached the door, the two women
+reappeared. Mrs. Sebastian took in the situation
+with a quick glance and bent over Hernandez, who
+was now stirring feebly. Directly he sat up and
+his gaze roved about the room.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where did he go?” he cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Who?” asked his wife.
+</p>
+<p>
+“The German! The man who knocked me
+down.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He’s gone,” said Mrs. Sebastian. “Come, Hernandez,
+we have no time to lose.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez staggered to his feet, and his gaze
+rested on Shirley. He took a threatening step forward.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You—” he began.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian threw herself between them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There will be no harm done these girls while
+I am here,” she said quietly. “Please remember
+that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+As Hernandez still seemed on the point of trying
+to get at Shirley, the woman suddenly produced
+a revolver, which she levelled directly at him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Stand back!” she cried. “Haven’t you any
+sense? Don’t you know what would happen should
+harm befall either of these girls?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_193'></a>193</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“She is right,” said the man’s wife. “Come, let
+us go.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez muttered to himself, but he turned
+away.
+</p>
+<p>
+In response to his call the native boy again appeared
+and announced that a closed cab was at the
+door.
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez led the way, and Mrs. Sebastian motioned
+for the girls to follow him. The two women
+brought up the rear.
+</p>
+<p>
+Outside all climbed into the cab and were soon
+being driven away.
+</p>
+<p>
+Neither girl uttered a word as the cab bumped
+along the uneven street, but each was badly frightened.
+For half an hour the cab continued its way
+and then it came to a stop.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not a word!” ordered Hernandez of the two
+girls, as he prepared to alight.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls had sense enough to obey this injunction
+and went into the little station, dimly lighted,
+and boarded the waiting train without so much
+as speaking to each other.
+</p>
+<p>
+As Shirley glanced back over her shoulder while
+climbing up the steps, she caught sight of a familiar
+figure lurking in the shadows. She could not be
+certain, but she felt positive that the man was Captain
+Von Blusen.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captors and captives took seats at the rear end
+of the last car, where they sat in silence until the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_194'></a>194</span>
+train began to move. Then, for the first time, did
+Hernandez breath in relief.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Safe enough now,” he declared.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But they may telegraph ahead and have us detained,”
+said his wife.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No one knows we have come this way save Captain
+Von Blusen,” was the reply, “and it will not
+be to his interests to interfere with us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel now found themselves able
+to converse without being overheard by the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I saw Captain Von Blusen in the station as we
+climbed aboard,” said Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Do you think he will help us?” asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know, but some way I feel that he will.
+He seemed sincere enough when he spoke just before
+he left.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness gracious! I hope something
+turns up soon!” exclaimed Mabel. “Our Dads
+must be worried to death.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, if Dick is on the trail, I am sure we shall
+be rescued,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You have lots of confidence in Dick, haven’t
+you?” asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course. Why shouldn’t I have?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I hope we are rescued soon.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Some way, I believe we shall be,” declared
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+The train sped on through the darkness.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_195'></a>195</span><a name='chXXV' id='chXXV'></a>CHAPTER XXV.—ON THE TRAIL.</h2>
+<p>
+It will now be necessary to go back a little ways.
+</p>
+<p>
+When Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing, and U. S.
+Consul Edwards left the home of Hernandez, alias
+Martinez, following their brief interview, they
+looked about for Dick who had said he would wait
+for them on the outside; but having set forth on
+the trail of Captain Blusen, Dick, of course, was
+not in sight.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Guess the young man has gone back to the consulate
+in a huff,” said the consul with a slight smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He shouldn’t have spoken as he did,” declared
+Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is there any chance that he was right in his
+conjectures?” asked Colonel Ashton slowly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hardly,” replied the consul dryly. “Hernandez
+is a queer man, but he would hardly do a thing
+like that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I don’t know,” replied the colonel. “I
+have found that you never go far wrong when you
+listen to what a newspaper reporter says. They
+seem to smell out these things.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He’s on the wrong scent now,” declared Edwards.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_196'></a>196</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+At the consulate they could find no trace of Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What can have happened?” demanded Mr. Willing
+anxiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, he’ll turn up,” declared the consul. “We’ll
+wait.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They sat down to await the return of Dick, meanwhile
+talking over what was best to be done.
+</p>
+<p>
+Meantime, Dick, on the trail of Captain Von
+Blusen, was having troubles of his own. He had
+approached too close behind the German, and the
+latter had realized he was being followed.
+</p>
+<p>
+Rounding a corner, the German officer stopped
+abruptly. As Dick swung around the corner he
+recognized him instantly and struck out with his
+fist. The blow caught Dick on the side of the head
+and he went down.
+</p>
+<p>
+He was up in a moment, however, and grappled
+with his opponent. In this sort of fighting the
+German was no match for Dick, but he finally succeeded
+in breaking the latter’s hold, and took to his
+heels.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick ran after him.
+</p>
+<p>
+Unconsciously the German took the direction
+from which he had just come, and not stopping to
+think that he might be followed, had thus betrayed
+the rendezvous. He ran straight to Hernandez’
+home, as we already know, and Dick recognized it.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen entered by the back door,
+and there Dick stopped. He had seen enough to
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_197'></a>197</span>
+tell him just how the situation stood, and realizing
+that he could accomplish little himself and that
+haste therefore was essential, he hurried back to
+the consulate.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where have you been?” cried Mr. Willing
+jumping to his feet as Dick burst into the room.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ve been trailing Von Blusen, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Von Blusen!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, sir, and I have learned enough to warrant
+my belief that Hernandez is concerned in the
+disappearance of Shirley and Mabel.”
+</p>
+<p>
+In a few words he related what had occurred.
+</p>
+<p>
+Consul Edwards drummed upon the table with
+his fingers for several minutes. Then he rose to
+his feet.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You must be right,” he said, “although it seems
+impossible. Are you armed?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The others shook their heads. The consul left
+the room and returned a moment later with a revolver
+for each.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We may not need them, but it’s best to be prepared,”
+he said grimly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What are you going to do?” asked Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We shall go back and call on Hernandez. In
+my official capacity, of course, I could not do this,
+but I’m willing to take a chance. We’ll search the
+house from top to bottom.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They did not enter the home of Hernandez by
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_198'></a>198</span>
+the manner in which they had gone before. Dick
+led the way to the place he had seen Captain Von
+Blusen enter, and tried the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+To his surprise it opened easily, and Dick, with
+weapon ready, led the way in. From first one room
+to the other they went, Consul Edwards lighting the
+way with a pocket searchlight.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly Dick stooped and picked up something.
+The consul turned the light on it. It was a small
+handkerchief. Dick looked it over for a mark of
+identification. In the corner he saw two initials,
+“S. W.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He passed it to Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley’s!” exclaimed the latter, after a glance
+at it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We are on the right track,” declared the consul.
+</p>
+<p>
+They continued the search of the house, but not
+a soul could they find. From top to bottom and
+back again they went, but the result, of course, was
+the same.
+</p>
+<p>
+At last they were forced to give it up.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have it!” exclaimed Dick suddenly. “Von
+Blusen warned them and they have taken the girls
+some place else.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“That’s it, of course,” said the consul. “Well
+there is nothing more we can do to-night, but I’ll
+promise to have the town raked with a fine-tooth
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_199'></a>199</span>
+comb the first thing in the morning. If they are
+here, we shall find them before noon.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But where can they be to-night?” demanded
+Mr. Willing anxiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+The consul shrugged his shoulders.
+</p>
+<p>
+“<em>Quien sabe?</em> as the natives say,” he replied.
+“However, you may make sure they are in no danger.”
+</p>
+<p>
+With this the others were forced to be content,
+and Edwards led the way back to the consulate.
+Here he suggested cigars before all should turn in
+for the night, and they sat down to talk over the situation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll have every house in town searched from
+top to bottom in the morning,” said the consul.
+“They must be here, so we shall of course find
+them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wish there was something we could do to-night,”
+declared Dick. “This inaction makes me
+restless.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It makes me that way too, young man,” declared
+Mr. Willing, “but the consul undoubtedly
+knows best. We shall leave it to him.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Consul Edwards looked at Dick inquisitively.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What I would like to have you tell me,” he said,
+“is why you suspected Hernandez in the first place?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know exactly,” replied Dick slowly.
+“But he is a shifty-eyed old villain, and can’t look
+at you. I have learned that a man like that is not
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_200'></a>200</span>
+to be trusted. I was morally certain he was lying.
+I don’t know why, but I just seemed to feel it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, you figured it out and no mistake. I
+wouldn’t be surprised now to learn that Hernandez
+and Martinez are one and the same person.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“They are!” came a voice from one of the open
+windows.
+</p>
+<p>
+The four within the room started suddenly to
+their feet, and the consul advanced.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Who and what are you?” he called, with his
+hand resting on his revolver. “Come out and show
+yourself.”
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a sound of someone climbing in the
+window, and a moment later a man stood before
+them. Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and Dick
+leaped to their feet with cries of amazement.
+</p>
+<p>
+The newcomer was Captain Von Blusen.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick took a quick stride forward, and his hand
+grasped the young German by the collar of his
+coat.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll guarantee you won’t get away this time,” he
+said grimly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Who are you and what do you want here?” demanded
+the consul, who had never seen the officer
+before.
+</p>
+<p>
+“This,” said Dick to the consul, “is the man who
+gave the warning in time to allow the girls to be
+taken to some other hiding place.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_201'></a>201</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is that true, sir?” demanded the consul, taking
+a step forward.
+</p>
+<p>
+Von Blusen nodded.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is,” he replied briefly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then you shall answer to me for your part in
+this outrage,” declared Mr. Willing, advancing
+with great anger.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And to me,” declared Colonel Ashton, also advancing.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen raised a hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“One moment, gentlemen,” he said calmly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Give the man a chance to speak,” said the consul.
+“He shall not get away, and I’ll give you my
+word he’ll do no further mischief. What have you
+to say for yourself?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I can tell you where the two young ladies
+have been taken.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You can?” exclaimed the colonel eagerly.
+“Where?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mazatlan!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mazatlan? Where is Mazatlan?” demanded
+the consul.
+</p>
+<p>
+“As to that I cannot say. They left on the train
+not half an hour ago.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Are you sure?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Positive. I followed to make certain, that I
+might tell you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And why are you so interested in telling us?”
+asked Dick skeptically.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_202'></a>202</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“For one reason, because Miss Willing saved my
+life no longer than an hour ago,” was the calm reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is true,” he continued, seeing that the others
+eyed him in amazement.
+</p>
+<p>
+He then went into details of the scene that had
+occurred following his return to Hernandez
+after his fight with Dick in the street.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But how are we going to find them in Mazatlan?”
+exclaimed Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You might wire ahead and have them taken
+from the train,” suggested Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, I have a better plan than that,” declared
+the consul.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it?” asked the others eagerly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll kill two birds with one stone. I’ll wire
+the American consular agent there to have them
+shadowed when they leave the train. Then we’ll
+not only be able to rescue the young ladies, but the
+Mexican authorities will nab the plotters.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“An excellent plan,” declared Colonel Ashton.
+“Now how shall we get there?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“There is not another train till morning,” said the
+consul, “but,” and a twinkle came into his eyes,
+“if you have the price, I can guarantee to have a
+special engine and one car ready to go within the
+hour, and I can promise a clear track ahead.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Let’s have it no matter what the cost!” roared
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_203'></a>203</span>
+Mr. Willing. “I want my girl back as soon as I
+can get her!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And so do I,” shouted Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXXVI' id='chXXVI'></a>CHAPTER XXVI.—IN MAZATLAN.</h2>
+<p>
+It was a long tedious journey to Mazatlan, and
+it was after noon of the following day when Shirley
+and Mabel followed their captors from the train
+upon which they had spent the night and morning.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m glad to get off that train, I don’t care what
+happens,” said Mabel as the five made their way
+through the dingy-looking station.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should say so,” agreed Shirley. “I’m so sleepy
+I could fall right over here.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I managed to get a few winks during the night,”
+returned Mabel. “I curled up in the seat.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I couldn’t sleep that way. I tried, but it was no
+use.”
+</p>
+<p>
+They had now reached the street side of the station,
+and here Hernandez signalled a passing cab.
+Into this the girls were thrust and then the two
+women and the man climbed in. Hernandez gave
+an address to the driver, and the cab whirled away.
+</p>
+<p>
+None of the occupants saw a man, who had been
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_204'></a>204</span>
+loitering about the station when the train pulled in,
+hail a second cab and come after them. This was
+the man who had been delegated to shadow them
+upon the request, by wire, of Consul Edwards at
+Acapulco.
+</p>
+<p>
+To Shirley and Mabel it seemed that they rode
+through the streets of the city for hours before
+the cab stopped its bumping and drew up before a
+typical Mexican native house in the outskirts of the
+town. Hernandez and the two women climbed out,
+and the girls followed them into the house.
+</p>
+<p>
+The man in the pursuing cab ordered his driver
+to halt while still some distance away. Then he
+dismissed the driver and approached the house
+afoot. He saw the five figures enter the dwelling
+and approached no nearer, but took a stand some
+distance away, where from time to time, he looked
+at his watch.
+</p>
+<p>
+An hour passed, then two, and at length the man
+turned and walked away.
+</p>
+<p>
+Inside the house Shirley and Mabel had been
+shown to a back room, the windows of which they
+saw were heavily barred. Mrs. Sebastian accompanied
+them.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now girls,” she said, “if you are quiet and make
+no trouble, I am sure that you will be freed before
+long.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You mean we won’t have to wait for ransom?”
+asked Shirley eagerly.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_205'></a>205</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, I don’t mean that. But I am sure the
+money will be paid over within a day or two.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And we shall have to stay here all that time?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes. I wish I could interest you in our cause.
+You could do lots for us if you chose.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thanks, but I don’t care to listen to the troubles
+of criminals,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+The woman’s face turned red.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You do us an injustice,” she replied. “What
+I have done has been for my country.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I thought you were a Spaniard,” interrupted
+Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am, on my mother’s side,” was the reply.
+“My father was a Mexican.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, I wouldn’t be mixed up in any such business,”
+declared Mabel. “I think you should be
+punished for the manner in which you got us in
+your power.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But it was for my country. Surely you can
+understand that?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, I can’t understand it,” declared Shirley.
+“It’s robbery that you are attempting.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The woman shrugged her shoulders.
+</p>
+<p>
+“There is no use talking to you,” she said.
+</p>
+<p>
+She went out of the room, locking the door behind
+her.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, here we are,” said Mabel, with a wry look
+at her chum. “Now, what are we going to do?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wish we could escape,” declared Shirley.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_206'></a>206</span>
+“I’ll tell you what. The next time we hear any one
+coming, we’ll stand behind the door, and as soon
+as they come in we’ll slip out and run. If we can
+reach the street some one may help us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“There will be no harm trying,” Mabel agreed.
+“They won’t hurt us, I am sure.”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was several hours later before they had the
+opportunity of putting their plan to the test.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Quick! Here comes some one!” whispered
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+She took her stand behind the door and Mabel
+joined her there. A key turned in the lock, and
+the door swung slowly inward. The girls were out
+of sight behind the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian, being unable to see them, advanced
+into the room with a startled exclamation,
+and looked hurriedly about. Seizing a moment
+when the woman was looking the other way, Shirley,
+closely followed by Mabel, dashed from her
+place of concealment and out the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel was just disappearing through the door
+when Mrs. Sebastian wheeled suddenly about and
+caught sight of her. The woman sprang forward
+with a cry, but Mabel, in passing, had seized the
+knob of the door and pulled it to after her.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was the work of an instant to turn the key in
+the lock, and Mrs. Sebastian was safe in the girls’
+recent prison.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_207'></a>207</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Now what?” said Shirley when Mabel had come
+up to her.
+</p>
+<p>
+From the room they had just quitted a series of
+blows were rained on the door, and Mrs. Sebastian’s
+voice could be heard calling for help.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No one knows she’s in there so if the disturbance
+is heard they’ll think it is us,” declared Mabel.
+“If we are silent and careful now, we may be able
+to get out.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley advanced cautiously and peered into the
+next room. Then she returned to Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No getting out that way,” she whispered.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel advanced and looked into the room beyond.
+In it sat Hernandez and his wife.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley nodded her head.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, we can’t get out there,” she agreed.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls looked about for some other means of
+escape.
+</p>
+<p>
+They now stood in what appeared to be a long
+and narrow hall, and at Shirley’s whispered suggestion
+they went back along it. Far to the rear they
+could see a faint beam of light and Shirley’s heart
+beat faster with renewed hope.
+</p>
+<p>
+At last they came to a high window, through
+which the light streamed. It was out of reach of
+the girls, but Shirley found a chair which she
+dragged forth and mounted. Her shoulders now
+were on a level with the window.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girl uttered an exclamation of satisfaction.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_208'></a>208</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is it, Shirley?” asked Mabel breathlessly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We can get out here,” was the reply, “the window
+is not barred.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hurry then,” cried Mabel anxiously. “I’ll come
+right after you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley wasted no further words. She drew herself
+to the sill, and looked down. Then she shuddered
+slightly. It was a long drop, fully twenty
+feet.
+</p>
+<p>
+But Shirley did not hesitate, for she realized that
+the jump must be taken. She lowered herself until
+she clung to the window with her hands, then released
+her hold and dropped.
+</p>
+<p>
+She fell in a sprawling heap, and she felt a sharp
+pain in her ankle. In spite of this, she was up in
+an instant, however, and turned her eyes to the
+window, where Mabel’s head had just appeared.
+</p>
+<p>
+The latter drew herself to the window sill, and
+then glanced down at the ground.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I can’t do it, Shirley,” she exclaimed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course you can,” called her chum. “Lower
+yourself as far as you can and then drop.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel maneuvered about the window trying to
+get into such a position that she could lower herself.
+But her fright was such that she was afraid
+to loose her hold long enough to change her position.
+She looked down at Shirley helplessly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I tell you I can’t,” she declared.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_209'></a>209</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“But you must, Mabel,” replied Shirley anxiously.
+“Hurry!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Again Mabel moved about, but the result was
+the same.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Mabel! Jump!” cried Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel now began to cry, as she moved about a
+little on her perch.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I—I—can’t, Sh-Shirley,” she said. “I am
+afraid!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“My goodness!” muttered Shirley to herself.
+“What shall I do? I can’t climb back up there
+after her.”
+</p>
+<p>
+She considered the matter for several moments,
+the while Mabel sat in the window and sobbed.
+Then Shirley reached a decision, and acted immediately.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Quick, Mabel! Here comes Hernandez!” cried
+Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel’s hesitancy and fright vanished on the instant.
+Quickly she lowered herself by her hands
+and dropped to the ground. She fell in a heap,
+but was unhurt and was up again in a moment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where is he?” she asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley was forced to laugh.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I just said that to get you down,” she returned.
+“If I hadn’t you would have stayed up there all
+day.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel’s tension also relaxed, and the girls moved
+slowly away from the house, Shirley finding that her
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_210'></a>210</span>
+ankle had stopped hurting and was not even swollen.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where shall we go?” asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“American consulate, I reckon,” replied the girl,
+“if we can find it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We must find it,” said Mabel firmly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes but how. Neither of us can speak Spanish.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then we must find a Mexican who speaks English.
+We should have no trouble doing that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls had been walking along rapidly, for
+they wished to put as much space as possible between
+them and their recent prison; but at the same
+time they did not run for they did not wish to
+attract attention by the appearance of undue haste.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly there came a cry from behind. Unconsciously
+both girls stopped in their tracks and
+looked back over their shoulders. But one look
+was enough.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Run!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Run!” cried Shirley in the same breath.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dashing after them as fast as his stout body
+would permit, was Hernandez.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel wasted no time in deciding
+what was best to be done.
+</p>
+<p>
+Keeping as close to each other as possible, they
+took to their heels and dashed madly along the
+street.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_211'></a>211</span><a name='chXXVII' id='chXXVII'></a>CHAPTER XXVII.—DICK IN PERIL.</h2>
+<p>
+The special train bearing Mr. Willing, Colonel
+Ashton, Dick and Captain Von Blusen arrived in
+Mazatlan only two hours after that on which Shirley
+and Mabel had reached the city. The four went
+at once to the American consulate.
+</p>
+<p>
+Consul Edwards had been unable to accompany
+them, but after sending the telegram requesting that
+the fugitives be shadowed, he had written a note
+to Consul Harrington at Mazatlan and this he had
+given to Mr. Willing as a means of introduction.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing sent in the letter to the consul, and
+the latter received them immediately.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have a man shadowing the fugitives,” said the
+consul. “I told him to report here the minute he
+was sure he had run his quarry to earth.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is there no danger they will elude him?” asked
+Dick anxiously.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Not much,” was the smiling reply. “Fisher
+was formerly a newspaperman and has had considerable
+experience along that line.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And the consul was right. A short time later
+Fisher appeared.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Have you found their refuge?” was Colonel
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_212'></a>212</span>
+Ashton’s first question after the introductions had
+been made.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I followed a man, two women and two girls
+to a native house in the eastern extremity of the
+city,” was the reply. “I have no doubt they are
+the right ones.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good,” returned the consul. “Now the first
+thing to do is to enlist the support of General Seauterey,
+the commandant of the city. Without him
+we can do practically nothing. But he will be glad
+to capture Hernandez.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The consul took his departure, announcing that
+he would return as soon as possible.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick left the room announcing that he would
+take a little stroll outside. Mr. Willing enjoined
+him to be back by the time the consul returned.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick, thinking deeply, was unconscious of the
+passing of time and the distance which he had
+walked. At last he roused himself from his reverie
+and looked at his watch.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Great Scott!” he exclaimed. “I have been gone
+more than an hour. I had better hurry back.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He gazed about him, and saw that he was in an
+evil-looking part of the town. He swung about
+on his heel and set out in the direction from which
+he had come.
+</p>
+<p>
+As he passed a narrow street, even dirtier-looking
+than the rest, an arm suddenly shot out and dealt
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_213'></a>213</span>
+him a blow across the head, knocking him to the
+ground.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick was stunned by the force of the blow, but
+he was by no means deprived of his coolness nor
+resourcefulness. He rolled over quickly several
+times, seeking to put as much distance as possible
+between himself and his unseen opponent, and then
+scrambled quickly to his feet.
+</p>
+<p>
+Two men bore down on him. Short wiry Mexicans
+they were, and one held a knife in his hand.
+Dick took one look at them, then turned and ran.
+</p>
+<p>
+But the force of the blow he had just received
+made it impossible for him to run far, and soon
+he turned, and with his back to the wall of a
+house, faced his adversaries.
+</p>
+<p>
+Just out of striking distance the latter halted,
+and spoke to him in Spanish. Dick shook his hand,
+indicating that he did not understand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Speak English,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+The men conversed together in low tones, then
+one of them spoke a single English word to Dick:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Money!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, I see,” said Dick, “you want my money,
+eh? Well, you won’t get it. I need it myself.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He shook his head at the men, and they gesticulated
+angrily, one of them raising his knife.
+Then, with a cry, they sprang forward.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick was in a serious predicament and he realized
+it. But he determined to do his best. As the
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_214'></a>214</span>
+men closed on him, Dick struck out. One of the
+men staggered back.
+</p>
+<p>
+At that moment there came the sound of pattering
+feet down the street. The men drew back.
+A second later two running figures came into sight,
+and Dick cried out in amazement.
+</p>
+<p>
+The figures were Shirley and Mabel, and even as
+Dick recognized them a third form came into view,
+and this Dick immediately recognized as that of
+Hernandez.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Shirley! Mabel!” called Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+The girls half halted in their stride, and then,
+with glad cries, came toward him.
+</p>
+<p>
+The men who had attacked Dick, seeing the approach
+of another man, turned and made their way
+to the next corner, where they stood to watch developments.
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez, perceiving that he had but one to
+contend with, and this a young man, advanced
+confidently. Shirley and Mabel had now reached
+Dick’s side, and the three faced the Mexican.
+</p>
+<p>
+Without a word Hernandez’s hand went to his
+pocket, but Dick was too quick for him.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No you don’t,” he cried, and sprang forward.
+</p>
+<p>
+His right fist shot out with stunning force, and
+the Mexican rolled on the ground, his revolver,
+which he had succeeded in drawing, being hurled
+from his hand.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_215'></a>215</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick quickly took each girl by the arm and urged
+them along.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hurry!” he cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+What he feared came to pass.
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez got quickly to his feet, and perceiving
+the men who had so recently attacked Dick, he
+beckoned them to him.
+</p>
+<p>
+As the men came up, he waved his arm at the
+figures of the two girls and the young man.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Catch them!” he shouted. “Reward!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The men needed no further urging, but dashed
+after the three. Dick urged the girls along as
+swiftly as they could go, casting occasional glances
+over his shoulder. He hoped against hope that assistance
+would come from some quarter.
+</p>
+<p>
+But not a sign of a native officer did he see.
+The few people they passed looked at them curiously,
+and must have realized the aspect of things
+by the noise of the pursuers, but none offered to
+lend a helping hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+Several times Dick was on the point of turning
+back to face the pursuers, but he determined only
+to do this as a last resort to give the girls time
+to get away while he held the others back.
+</p>
+<p>
+He led the girls sharply around a corner and they
+ran as fast as they could along the dirty street.
+But the pursuers were gaining, as Dick perceived
+by a quick glance over his shoulder. Then Dick
+made his decision.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_216'></a>216</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+As he rounded the next corner he whispered to
+the girls:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Run hard!”
+</p>
+<p>
+He released their arms and stopped, just out of
+sight from the pursuers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A moment later they came into view, and Dick
+was upon them in an instant, striking right and left
+as swiftly as he could. Just as it seemed there was
+a chance of his overcoming his two foes, a third
+figure joined in the fray.
+</p>
+<p>
+This was Hernandez himself, and he turned the
+balance in the favor of Dick’s enemies.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley and Mabel had gone on a few feet when
+Dick had turned back, for they had not known what
+he was about to do. They missed him in a moment,
+however, and stopped to see what had become
+of him.
+</p>
+<p>
+They saw the struggling knot of men, and Shirley
+cried:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh! Dick will be hurt! What shall we do?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“What can we do?” demanded Mabel. “Dick
+said to run. I guess we had better run.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And leave him there like that? I should say
+not.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But what can we do?” asked Mabel, in consternation.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know. But I am not going to run away.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And Shirley resolutely made her way back toward
+the fighters. Mabel followed.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_217'></a>217</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+But aid came for Dick even as it had for his
+first two enemies. And the aid was from an unexpected
+source.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hello!” exclaimed a voice in English. “What’s
+going on here?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Help!” cried Dick in English.
+</p>
+<p>
+“An American, eh,” said the voice, “and three
+greasers attacking him with knives. Here goes.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick felt his enemies give way before him, all
+but one, and this one he sent to the ground with
+a hard blow to the face. Then he gazed about.
+Nearby stood Shirley and Mabel, and upon the
+ground were the other two Mexicans. Dick looked
+at the man who had come to his rescue, and gave
+a cry of astonishment.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain Anderson!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The commander of the <em>Yucatan</em> was no less surprised.
+He surveyed Dick and the two girls critically.
+</p>
+<p>
+“How in the name of all that’s wonderful did
+you all get together again and how did you beat
+me here?” demanded the captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick explained his arrival in a few words, and
+then Shirley took up the story.
+</p>
+<p>
+“But we had no idea of the <em>Yucatan</em> was here,”
+said Dick.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I landed not fifteen minutes ago,” replied the
+captain. “Of course a train runs faster than a boat,
+which is the reason you are here ahead of me.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_218'></a>218</span>
+Now I guess you had better return aboard with
+me.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll go to the consulate first,” declared Dick.
+“The others are probably still there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good idea,” replied the captain. “I was on my
+way there now.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He led the way, and the others followed.
+</p>
+<p>
+But when they reached there they learned, much
+to the disappointment of both girls, that neither
+the consul nor any of the others were about.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Consul Harrington and his visitors accompanied
+General Seauterey and a squad of soldiers,”
+a clerk explained. “They left not fifteen minutes
+ago.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Too bad,” declared Captain Anderson. He
+turned to the girls. “Will you remain here or come
+aboard?” he asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll go aboard, thanks,” replied Shirley. “I
+want to get out of this city and this country. We
+can leave word with the clerk here, and Mabel’s
+father and mine will come aboard as soon as they
+return.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Right you are,” agreed Captain Anderson. He
+addressed the clerk. “When Mr. Willing and Colonel
+Ashton return with the consul,” he said, “you
+tell them to come aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> immediately.
+I have important news for them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very well, sir,” said the clerk.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_219'></a>219</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why didn’t you tell him to tell Dad we had been
+rescued?” asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why,” replied the captain with a smile, “I was
+saving that for a little surprise.”
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXXVIII' id='chXXVIII'></a>CHAPTER XXVIII.—ALL ABOARD AGAIN.</h2>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton, to go back to
+the time that Dick left them after the departure
+of Consul Harrington, were greatly alarmed when
+the boy failed to return immediately. Half an hour
+after his departure Consul Harrington returned with
+General Seauterey and half a dozen troopers.
+</p>
+<p>
+The general announced that he was not only willing
+but eager to round up Hernandez, who, he said,
+was the real head of the revolution in Western
+Mexico. Mr. Willing expressed his alarm over
+Dick’s safety, and they waited ten minutes.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’ll have my clerk tell him to wait when he comes
+in,” said the consul. “There is no use delaying
+longer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+To this Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton agreed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dick is always turning up missing,” declared the
+colonel.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_220'></a>220</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“But he always turns up safe again,” replied
+Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, he’ll be back all right,” said the consul. “He
+can hardly have fallen into any danger this time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Fisher, the man who had trailed the conspirators
+to their lair, now summoned two automobiles, and
+the party climbed in. The trip to the house where
+the girls had been confined was made in record
+time, and a short distance away a halt was called.
+</p>
+<p>
+General Seauterey and his men now took the lead,
+and surrounded the house. The general himself
+approached the door and knocked on it loudly.
+There was no response, but a second sharp knock
+brought a voice from behind the door. It was a
+woman’s voice and it said:
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is wanted?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Open the door!” demanded the general.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Who are you?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“General Seauterey.”
+</p>
+<p>
+There was an exclamation of dismay from within,
+and the sound of retreating footsteps. Again the
+general pounded on the door. There was no response
+and he called to two of his men.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Break down the door,” he instructed them.
+</p>
+<p>
+The heavy rifle butts of the soldiers crashed
+against the wood, shattering it. Several hard kicks
+and it was in splinters. With drawn revolver General
+Seauterey led the way.
+</p>
+<p>
+Two soldiers, Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_221'></a>221</span>
+Captain Von Blusen followed him. The others remained
+on guard without to prevent the escape of
+the fugitives.
+</p>
+<p>
+Through the house strode the general, throwing
+wide the doors of the various rooms. And at last
+he brought up against another locked door. This
+was burst in as had been the first, and the general
+advanced first.
+</p>
+<p>
+Came a shot from the room, and the general staggered
+back, then moved forward again. At the far
+side of the room were two figures, the general could
+just make out in the darkness.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hands up!” he cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Don’t shoot!” came in a woman’s voice. “We
+surrender!”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come forward then,” said the general.
+</p>
+<p>
+Two women, who proved to be Mrs. Hernandez
+and Mrs. Sebastian, advanced shrinking.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where is Hernandez?” demanded the general.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He is not here,” was the reply. “We expect
+him back any moment.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where is he?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“He went after the two prisoners, who escaped.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Your prisoners have escaped?” demanded the
+general.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The general turned to one of his men.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Call the others within,” he ordered.
+</p>
+<p>
+The other four troopers came into the house,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_222'></a>222</span>
+followed by the Americans and the German captain.
+Mr. Willing was the first to see Mrs. Sebastian,
+and he sprang toward her.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What have you done with my daughter,
+madam?” he demanded.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mrs. Sebastian shrank back from him.
+</p>
+<p>
+Colonel Ashton also stepped forward and angrily
+demanded that Mabel be produced at once. Then
+Mrs. Sebastian spoke.
+</p>
+<p>
+“They have escaped!” she declared.
+</p>
+<p>
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were skeptical.
+Mrs. Sebastian saw that they did not believe her.
+</p>
+<p>
+“It is true,” she declared. “They locked me in
+a room and jumped from a window. Hernandez
+has gone after them.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll wait here for Hernandez to return,” decided
+General Seauterey. “We’ll get him when he
+comes back, and if he has the prisoners it will save
+us further search.”
+</p>
+<p>
+None doubted that this was the best plan, and so
+all sat down to wait, General Seauterey meanwhile
+keeping watch at the door himself.
+</p>
+<p>
+Suddenly he sprang to his feet.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Here he comes—alone!” he cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+He motioned his men to the door.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He’ll run when he sees the broken door,” he said.
+“I’ll command him to halt. If he doesn’t obey,
+fire.”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was as the general had predicted. When
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_223'></a>223</span>
+Hernandez saw the broken door, he stopped in surprise.
+Then he turned and would have run. General
+Seauterey stepped forward and shouted:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Halt!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez paid no heed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Fire!” cried the general.
+</p>
+<p>
+Two puffs of smoke and two sharp cracks. Hernandez
+fell to the ground, but sat up in a moment
+and seized his left foot in his hand, at the same
+time moaning with pain.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good work, men!” cried the general. “Go and
+bring him here!”
+</p>
+<p>
+Two of the soldiers obeyed, and Hernandez was
+soon in the house.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Where are the two prisoners?” demanded the
+general.
+</p>
+<p>
+Hernandez looked at him and sneered.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Find out,” he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+“So I will,” returned the general.
+</p>
+<p>
+He motioned to his men.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Bind the prisoners and put them in the car outside,”
+he ordered.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then he led the way from the house.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall have this man questioned more fully,”
+he said to the consul, “and I shall send you a message
+to the consulate within an hour. He will not
+fail to tell what he knows of the prisoners.”
+</p>
+<p>
+With this Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_224'></a>224</span>
+forced to be content, although the anxiety of each
+was growing at every minute.
+</p>
+<p>
+The Mexicans and their prisoners climbed into
+one of the automobiles, and the Americans and Captain
+von Blusen into the other. They were whirled
+back to the consulate.
+</p>
+<p>
+The clerk addressed Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain Anderson, of the Steamship <em>Yucatan</em>,
+was here a few moments ago, sir,” he said. “He
+desires your presence aboard immediately. He says
+he has important news for you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Regarding my daughter?” asked Mr. Willing
+eagerly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“He didn’t say, sir,” replied the clerk.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Come, Ashton,” cried Mr. Willing excitedly.
+“Perhaps Captain Anderson has learned something.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall accompany you,” said Captain von
+Blusen.
+</p>
+<p>
+The others offered no objection and the three
+hurried away together, Mr. Willing telling Consul
+Harrington that they would let him know the result
+of their trip.
+</p>
+<p>
+At the water front they were fortunate enough
+to find an unengaged boatman, who offered to put
+them aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> for a fair price.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Never mind the price,” said Mr. Willing.
+“Hurry and get us there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The boatman wasted no time, and soon they were
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_225'></a>225</span>
+heading for the big steamship as fast as they could
+go.
+</p>
+<p>
+Dusk was just falling as they went swiftly over
+the water, and none could but think what a pretty
+spectacle the great ship made with her thousands of
+electric lights shining brightly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And that’s the ship you attempted to get away
+with, Captain Von Blusen,” said Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes, and would have gotten away with but for
+Miss Ashton,” replied the captain. “However, I
+bear no ill will. It is the fortune of war.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And we bear you no ill will, captain,” declared
+Colonel Ashton. “It is true that you have made us
+considerable trouble, but I appreciate your position
+in the matter. I know that you were acting under
+orders.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thank you,” replied the captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I can say the same, sir,” declared Mr. Willing,
+“Here, at the last, you have been of service to us,
+and in view of that, things that have gone before
+must be overlooked.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thank you, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The little boat now scraped alongside the <em>Yucatan</em>.
+Several moments later the three were aboard
+the big steamship and rushing toward Captain
+Anderson’s quarters.
+</p>
+<p>
+Their arrival had been reported before they came
+aboard, and so they found Captain Anderson alone.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Glad to see you gentlemen again,” said the captain,
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_226'></a>226</span>
+shaking hands with Mr. Willing and Colonel
+Ashton. He looked Captain Von Blusen over
+coldly. “I shall talk to you later,” he added.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen bowed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, he is all right, captain,” said Mr. Willing.
+“He has been of great aid to us in searching for our
+daughters.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“So?” Captain Anderson’s stern expression relaxed
+a trifle. “I am glad to hear it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He held out his hand, and the young German
+grasped it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You but did your duty, as you saw it, I suppose,”
+said Captain Anderson.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What is the piece of news you have for us, Captain
+Anderson?” asked Colonel Willing, who had
+been waiting impatiently for the commander of the
+<em>Yucatan</em> to broach the subject that had called them
+aboard.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Have chairs, gentlemen,” said the captain, ignoring
+the question.
+</p>
+<p>
+The others sat down, the older men twisting about
+uneasily. At last Mr. Willing could stand it no
+longer.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain,” he cried, jumping to his feet, “if you
+have any words of our daughters, tell us. Don’t
+keep us in suspense any longer.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson gazed at him steadily for a few
+moments, then arose, and walked to a door in his
+cabin.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_227'></a>227</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have three prisoners here I would like you to
+see,” he said quietly.
+</p>
+<p>
+With a sudden movement he threw wide the door,
+and there stepped forth first Dick, then Shirley, then
+Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+The two men absolutely ignored Dick, who
+stepped aside.
+</p>
+<p>
+With glad cries the others rushed toward each
+other. Shirley found herself clasped in her father’s
+arms, and Mabel and her father also clung tight
+together. Then they stepped back and looked at
+each other.
+</p>
+<p>
+“This is my little surprise,” said Captain Anderson
+with a smile.
+</p>
+<h2><a name='chXXIX' id='chXXIX'></a>CHAPTER XXIX.—“CAPTAIN VON BLUSEN.”</h2>
+<p>
+“And when we found you had escaped we didn’t
+know where to look for you,” said Mr. Willing,
+in concluding the story of the search.
+</p>
+<p>
+“We never doubted that we should get away
+in some manner,” declared Shirley. “We were
+sure you would find us, but when the chance for
+escape came we took advantage of it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And where did you get to when you left the
+consulate?” demanded Colonel Ashton of Dick.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_228'></a>228</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick explained.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And if Captain Anderson had not arrived so opportunely,
+there is no telling what might have
+happened,” he declared. “He put the enemy to
+rout.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It wasn’t much of a job,” replied the captain,
+waving aside Mr. Willing’s thanks. “I just touched
+two of them with my fists and they went down.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I reckon you didn’t touch them very gently,
+captain,” said Colonel Ashton, with a grim smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, perhaps not,” answered Captain Anderson,
+“but it was no time for half way measures.”
+He turned to Captain Von Blusen. “And what am
+I to do with you?” he asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I should be glad if you would take me to San
+Francisco,” was the reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson turned this over in his mind.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You have made much trouble for me,” he said
+finally, “and besides, the United States authorities
+may be looking for you, for all I know. However,
+I have no such information, and as you seem
+to have turned over a new leaf, I shall do so.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thank you, captain.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I would advise you, however,” continued the
+captain, “to go ashore at the first American port
+instead of going to Frisco. The authorities may
+be on the lookout for you, and I don’t know what
+they would do with you. Your theft of the <em>Yucatan</em>
+was nothing short of piracy.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_229'></a>229</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I suppose you are right,” returned Captain Von
+Blusen, “and I shall act upon your advice. What is
+the first United States port at which you shall
+touch?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“San Diego.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then I shall go ashore there.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very well, unless, of course, in the meantime
+I should receive word to hold you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“But you won’t report the captain’s presence
+here?” exclaimed Shirley hopefully.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No; I shall say nothing about it unless I am
+asked.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Thank you again, captain,” said the young officer.
+</p>
+<p>
+He turned on his heel and left the room.
+</p>
+<p>
+“When shall we get under way again, captain?”
+asked Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“First thing in the morning,” was the reply.
+“We’ll probably be out of sight of land when you
+tumble out.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We can’t get away from here any too quick
+to suit me,” declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, indeed,” Mabel agreed. “We have had
+trouble enough to last us for a long time to come.
+The sooner we get back to civilization the better.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And that goes for all of us,” agreed Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I’m glad to have you back aboard the <em>Yucatan</em>,”
+declared Captain Anderson. “To tell the
+truth, I didn’t expect to see you in Mazatlan. I
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_230'></a>230</span>
+felt sure you would eventually find the young ladies
+safe and sound, but I feared I should have to make
+the rest of the trip without you. I tell you, it
+made me feel good to run across young Stanley
+here this afternoon.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It didn’t make you feel as good as it did me,
+captain,” returned Dick significantly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well, perhaps not under the circumstances,”
+laughed the captain. “The only one of our passengers
+who will not complete the trip is Mrs.
+Sebastian.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“And a good thing for all concerned,” declared
+Colonel Ashton. “I don’t see how she fooled us
+so completely, Willing.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“She did though,” returned Mr. Willing. “I
+would never have suspected her of having any
+ulterior motives.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You wouldn’t listen to me,” said Dick. “I suspected
+her from the first. Now I can say ‘I told
+you so.’”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We’ll place more confidence in your foresight
+in the future,” declared the colonel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t want to run you away,” said Captain
+Anderson, “but it’s my belief you had all better
+turn in. You look fagged out, the whole bunch of
+you. Sleep is the best remedy.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“You are right, captain,” declared Shirley. “I
+feel as though I could go to sleep standing on my
+feet.”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_231'></a>231</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+They bade the captain good-night, thanked him
+again for his assistance, and made their way to
+their cabin, where, after some further talk, all
+turned in.
+</p>
+<p>
+So completely were they exhausted that it was
+after eight o’clock the following morning when
+Shirley, the first to awake, sprang up. She glanced
+out the window of her stateroom. The sun shone
+brightly, and from the barely perceptible motion
+of the steamer she knew they were moving.
+</p>
+<p>
+She called Mabel, and the girls dressed quickly.
+Shirley knocked on the next door and aroused the
+others, and an hour later, after a hearty breakfast,
+all stood forward on the promenade deck enjoying
+the fresh morning breeze.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was not a speck of land in sight and
+would not be for hours. An hour later Captain
+Von Blusen joined them and after awhile Captain
+Anderson stopped to exchange a few words.
+</p>
+<p>
+It was while the commander of the <em>Yucatan</em>
+was there that there came a hail from the lookout.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Smoke to the leeward, sir!”
+</p>
+<p>
+All glanced in the direction indicated. There,
+upon the distant horizon, was a faint cloud of
+smoke. As they gazed it presently took shape, and
+half an hour later it did not take the second cry of
+the lookout to tell them the approaching vessel
+was a battle cruiser of the first class.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_232'></a>232</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Wonder what this one is?” said Shirley, as the
+vessel drew nearer.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know. It might be German. It has
+been supposed there were two German vessels in
+these waters, but we have already encountered one.
+This may be another.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“It’s hardly possible, though,” said Mr. Willing.
+“Captain Von Blusen, to your knowledge, are there
+any German ships of war in these waters?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I can’t answer that question definitely, sir,” he
+replied. “All I can say is that it is possible.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t believe this is a German,” said Dick.
+“But whatever she is she is coming right toward
+us.”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was true. The stranger was shaping a course
+that would intercept the <em>Yucatan</em> several miles
+ahead.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I wonder if she will stop us?” said Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Of course,” replied Captain Von Blusen. “The
+commander will probably come aboard to have a
+look at the ship’s papers.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Will he interfere with you?” asked Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Hardly,” was the reply. “In spite of the fact
+that I am a German, he will not dare to interfere
+with me aboard a neutral ship.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Boom!”
+</p>
+<p>
+It was the sound of a great gun aboard the
+cruiser.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Signal to heave-to,” said Captain Anderson.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_233'></a>233</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+He made his way to the bridge, and in response to
+his command, the <em>Yucatan</em> came to a pause.
+Then all eagerly waited for the cruiser to show her
+colors.
+</p>
+<p>
+“German!” was the audible gasp from the passengers
+as the red, white and black of the German
+Empire were unfurled at the masthead.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am coming aboard you,” was the message
+the German commander flashed to Captain Anderson.
+</p>
+<p>
+A small boat put off from the cruiser and soon
+bumped alongside the <em>Yucatan</em>. A moment later
+an officer in a smart uniform came over the side.
+He made his way at once to where Captain Anderson
+stood on the bridge.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Is this the way you meet a German naval officer?”
+he demanded angrily.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson looked at him in surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What would you have me do?” he demanded,
+taking a step forward.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And when you address me, say sir!” exclaimed
+the German, who seemed rather young and possessed
+of much self-importance. “You should have
+met me as I came over-side.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Say sir to you, eh?” exclaimed Captain Anderson.
+“If you don’t get off my ship in five minutes
+I’ll throw you over the rail.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The German officer stepped back, and half drew
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_234'></a>234</span>
+a revolver. Captain Anderson advanced another
+step.
+</p>
+<p>
+But interference came from an unexpected
+source.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen, who had stood close enough
+to overhear this conversation, suddenly ascended
+to the bridge. He walked quickly up behind the
+German officer, and seizing him by the shoulder,
+swung him around sharply.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You forget yourself, Lieutenant Von Meyers!”
+he said angrily. “Get back to your boat!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The German lieutenant gazed at this newcomer
+threateningly, then a look of the greatest astonishment
+passed over his face. He took three quick
+steps backward.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen stood perfectly erect, one
+hand pointing toward the small boat from which
+the German lieutenant had just climbed to the deck
+of the <em>Yucatan</em>. He said no further word.
+</p>
+<p>
+And while officers and passengers of the <em>Yucatan</em>
+looked on in amazement, the German lieutenant
+took two quick steps forward again, fell upon
+one knee, took Captain Von Blusen’s other hand
+and touched it with his lips!
+</p>
+<p>
+Then he arose, saluted, and walked rapidly away.
+</p>
+<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_235'></a>235</span><a name='chXXX' id='chXXX'></a>CHAPTER XXX.—THROUGH THE GOLDEN GATE.</h2>
+<p>
+There was an audible gasp from passengers and
+crew, and the same question was upon every lip:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Who is he?”
+</p>
+<p>
+As the German lieutenant reached the side of the
+ship, Captain Von Blusen spoke again:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Lieutenant Von Meyers!”
+</p>
+<p>
+The lieutenant turned about sharply, and came
+to attention.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You will wait with the boat. I shall go with
+you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+The lieutenant saluted again and stood stiffly
+erect in his tracks.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen turned to Captain Anderson.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I shall relieve you of the responsibility of my
+presence immediately, captain,” he said quietly.
+“I shall go aboard the cruiser.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson was too much taken by surprise
+to mutter more than:
+</p>
+<p>
+“Very well, sir.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Why he added the “sir” the captain could not
+have told, but there was something in the bearing
+of the man that faced him that called it forth involuntarily.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_236'></a>236</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen held out his hand, and the
+commander of the <em>Yucatan</em> grasped it.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Good luck to you, sir,” said the latter.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And to you,” returned Captain Von Blusen.
+</p>
+<p>
+He descended from the bridge, and made his way
+to where the Willing party stood gazing at him in
+open-eyed wonder.
+</p>
+<p>
+The German officer first addressed Mr. Willing
+and Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am sorry that I have been the means of putting
+you to so much trouble,” he said, with a slight
+bow, “but whatever I did I considered in line with
+my duty. Please believe that.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have no doubt of it,” replied Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Nor I,” agreed Colonel Ashton.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen now turned to Dick, and
+with the slightest of smiles he extended his hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+“As you and I had a little difficulty,” he said,
+“I pray you will overlook it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Dick grasped the extended hand, as he replied.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why, of course. I guess I am a bit hot-headed
+once in a while.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No more than I am,” returned Captain Von
+Blusen. “It has been my chief fault.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He pressed Dick’s hand once more, and then
+turned to the two girls, who had been too stunned
+by what they had witnessed, to speak.
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain extended a hand to each in turn
+and Shirley and Mabel shook hands with him.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_237'></a>237</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“I am pleased to have met you, Miss Ashton,”
+he said courteously, “and you, Miss Willing, and
+I regret that I have been the means of causing you
+unpleasantness. But as I have said to your fathers,
+what I did was but in the line of duty. Now I
+must say good-bye, but when the war is over,” he
+looked at Mabel, “I hope that I shall see you both
+again.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He bowed low, and before the girls could reply,
+he made his way toward the spot where the German
+lieutenant stood awaiting him. He motioned
+the latter to precede him over the side, and was
+just about to follow, when he seemed to think of
+something.
+</p>
+<p>
+He walked quickly back across the deck to where
+Shirley and Mabel stood, and spoke.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I suppose you all wonder who I am,” he said
+quietly, “and while I would greatly like to satisfy
+your curiosity, I fear it is impossible at this time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Now Shirley found her tongue.
+</p>
+<p>
+“You can at least tell us whether you are of
+royal birth,” she cried.
+</p>
+<p>
+Again Captain Von Blusen bowed low.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I cannot say yes, nor can I deny it,” he answered.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then your name is not really Captain Von
+Blusen?”
+</p>
+<p>
+The captain smiled and bowed, but made no reply.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now Mabel spoke.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_238'></a>238</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“Captain,” she said quietly, “for by such name
+only can we know you now, we should, of course,
+be honored with your confidence, but if you cannot
+speak at this time, I for one shall ask you no questions.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Von Blusen took her hand and bent over
+it gallantly.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I thank you, Miss Ashton,” he replied quietly.
+“Some day I hope to be able to confide in you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He bowed to the others, and turning sharply on
+his heel, made his way to the side of the ship and
+clambered over the rail.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now the passengers hurried to the side of the
+ship, and gazed with something like awe at the boat
+that made swiftly for the German cruiser.
+</p>
+<p>
+Captain Anderson did not give the signal to get
+under way until the cruiser’s launch was being
+hoisted aboard, when there broke out from the
+cruiser a salvo of guns.
+</p>
+<p>
+“A salute!” cried Captain Anderson, raising his
+voice to make himself heard. “He is some one of
+importance. Now I wonder——”
+</p>
+<p>
+He broke off suddenly, as he counted the number
+of guns and, in his mind, ran over the list of relatives
+of the German Emperor. Then his clouded
+brow cleared, and he smiled.
+</p>
+<p>
+“If he wishes to keep it a secret, I am not the
+man to betray it,” he said to himself.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_239'></a>239</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+That Captain Anderson knew who “Captain Von
+Blusen” really was there could be no doubt, but the
+commander of the <em>Yucatan</em> kept his promise to
+himself and confided to no one, in spite of the questions
+that were poured on him later.
+</p>
+<p>
+Now Captain Anderson gave the signal to get
+under way, and the <em>Yucatan</em> slowly gathered
+headway. The German cruiser remained stationary
+as the <em>Yucatan</em> approached, and the big steamship
+passed her less than a quarter of a mile away.
+</p>
+<p>
+There, on the bridge of the cruiser, with the
+commander of the vessel and his officers standing
+at attention, stood “Captain Von Blusen.” The
+passengers waved their hands at him, and he, in return,
+lifted his cap and made a low bow.
+</p>
+<p>
+Then the passengers aboard the <em>Yucatan</em> saw
+him turn to the man they could make out was the
+commander of the cruiser and give a sharp command.
+The latter repeated it to one of his officers,
+and a moment later a second salvo broke out from
+the cruiser. At the same time the German flag at
+the masthead was dipped in salute.
+</p>
+<p>
+“That,” said Captain Anderson calmly, “is a fine
+token of respect. Too bad we haven’t the guns with
+which to return it.”
+</p>
+<p>
+He gave an order, however, and the American
+ensign at the masthead of the <em>Yucatan</em> returned
+the salute.
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_240'></a>240</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+These courtesies having been exchanged, all became
+bustle and hurry aboard the German cruiser,
+as the passengers on the <em>Yucatan</em> could see. Men
+dashed hurriedly hither and thither, and a moment
+later the cruiser swung slowly about and headed
+due south.
+</p>
+<p>
+“And that is the last we shall see of Captain Von
+Blusen,” declared Shirley. “I wonder who he is.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I haven’t any idea,” returned Mabel slowly, “but
+there can be no question that he is of high rank.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No, there can be no question about that,” agreed
+Mr. Willing, who had overheard this conversation.
+“I should say that he is a member of the Imperial
+German family.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then what is he doing in the United States?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I have learned a couple of Mexican words,” replied
+Mr. Willing. “Quien sabe?” (Who knows.)
+</p>
+<p>
+“But he said we should hear from him when the
+war is over,” declared Mabel.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” said Shirley, “he said ‘we’ but he meant
+you.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Mabel’s face turned a trifle red.
+</p>
+<p>
+“What do you mean?” she asked in some confusion.
+</p>
+<p>
+Shirley laughed.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I guess you know what I mean, all right,” she
+made reply. “Do you remember saying something
+like that to me once?”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_241'></a>241</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+“But I had reason to,” protested Mabel. “It was
+so plain in Dick’s case.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“No more so than in Captain Von Blusen’s case,”
+declared Shirley.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t see——”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Oh, yes you do. You mean you just won’t
+admit it. Well, you don’t have to. Why, what
+makes your face so red, Mabel?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know what you are talking about,” declared
+Mabel, and turning about quickly, she rushed
+to her cabin, leaving Shirley laughing to herself.
+</p>
+<p>
+The steamship <em>Yucatan</em> was forging ahead at
+full speed now, and was rapidly lessening the distance
+to the first California port—San Diego.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Dad,” said Shirley, “isn’t there a second fair
+at San Diego?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Yes,” replied her father, “why?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Well then, why can’t we stop off there for a
+day or two and go on to San Francisco by rail?”
+</p>
+<p>
+“We can if you wish it,” replied Mr. Willing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Then let’s do, Dad.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“All right.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And so it was arranged. Shirley went below
+where she and Mabel immediately began gathering
+their things together so that they would be ready
+to leave the boat the moment it docked at San
+Diego.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was no question that the girls had become
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_242'></a>242</span>
+great favorites with all the passengers. Many
+pressed them to continue the trip to San Francisco,
+Captain Anderson being one of the most anxious to
+keep them aboard as long as possible.
+</p>
+<p>
+“I don’t know what I shall do without you,” he
+told Shirley and Mabel. “We have had lots of excitement
+on this voyage, more than ever before, and
+you two girls have been mainly responsible for it.
+I hope that I shall see you again some time.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“Why,” said Shirley, “there are many more summers
+coming, and if we ever decide to make this
+trip again we shall not ever think of taking any boat
+but yours.”
+</p>
+<p>
+“May the time come soon,” said the captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+The passengers bade them an affectionate good-bye
+as they left the <em>Yucatan</em> at San Diego, and
+then they entered a taxi and were driven to a hotel,
+where they once more made themselves comfortable
+for a stay ashore.
+</p>
+<p>
+They spent two days at the San Diego exposition,
+and then took a train for San Francisco to view,
+as Shirley expressed it, “the greatest sight they ever
+expected to see.”
+</p>
+<p>
+And none of the party was a whit disappointed
+in the great exposition. In fact, it was far beyond
+expectations. For two weeks they remained in
+the California metropolis, spending every minute
+possible upon the large exposition grounds overlooking
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_243'></a>243</span>
+the Golden Gate and the broad expanse to
+the Pacific.
+</p>
+<p>
+When the time came for them to betake themselves
+homeward, it was with regret that they
+realized it would be long before they could again
+hope to see the beauties of the far-off state of California.
+</p>
+<p>
+There remains yet one incident to be told.
+</p>
+<p>
+Two weeks after their return home, Mabel received
+a registered package postmarked Rome,
+Italy. Eagerly she ran to her room with it, where
+she opened it in solitude; nor could she repress a cry
+of admiration when she drew out a beautifully bejeweled
+cross, patterned after the Iron Cross of
+Germany—the Iron Cross with which the German
+Emperor decorates his troops for bravery.
+</p>
+<p>
+With it there was a brief note, with the signature
+“Captain Von Blusen.”
+</p>
+<p>
+Looking closer at the piece of paper on which
+the message was written, Mabel perceived a seal of
+peculiar design. She ran hastily for her dictionary,
+and turned to the seals of the various nations.
+</p>
+<p>
+There was a striking similarity between the seal
+on the paper and the Imperial German seal, as
+reproduced, in colors, in her big dictionary.
+</p>
+<p>
+For perhaps half an hour the girl sat silent, musing.
+</p>
+<p>
+“Can it be possible?” she asked herself at last
+“I wonder——”
+<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_244'></a>244</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+She rushed downstairs to consult Shirley, who
+at that moment was holding a tete-a-tete with Dick
+on the sunny front porch.
+</p>
+<div class='center'>
+<p>THE END.</p>
+</div>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The Blue Grass Seminary Girls Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By CAROLYN JUDSON BURNETT
+</p>
+<p>
+Handsome Cloth Binding, Price, 40c. per Volume
+</p>
+<p>
+<em>Splendid Stories of the Adventures
+of a Group of Charming Girls</em>
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS’ VACATION ADVENTURES; or, Shirley Willing to the Rescue.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS’ CHRISTMAS HOLIDAYS; or, A Four Weeks’ Tour with the Glee Club.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS IN THE MOUNTAINS; or, Shirley Willing on a Mission of Peace.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER; or, Exciting Adventures on a Summer’s Cruise Through the Panama Canal.
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The Mildred Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By MARTHA FINLEY
+</p>
+<p>
+Handsome Cloth Binding, Price, 40c. per Volume
+</p>
+<p>
+<em>A Companion Series to the Famous
+“Elsie” Books by the Same Author</em>
+</p>
+<table class='c' summary='centered block'><tr><td>
+<p style='margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0'>MILDRED&#160;KEITH</p>
+<p style='margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0'>MILDRED’S&#160;MARRIED&#160;LIFE</p>
+<p style='margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0'>MILDRED&#160;AT&#160;ROSELANDS</p>
+<p style='margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0'>MILDRED&#160;AT&#160;HOME</p>
+<p style='margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0'>MILDRED&#160;AND&#160;ELSIE</p>
+<p style='margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0'>MILDRED’S&#160;BOYS&#160;AND&#160;GIRLS</p>
+<p style='margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0'>MILDRED’S&#160;NEW&#160;DAUGHTER</p>
+</td></tr></table>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the publishers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York.
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The Camp Fire Girls Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By HILDEGARD G. FREY. The only series of stories
+for Camp Fire Girls endorsed by the officials of the Camp
+Fire Girls Organization.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 40 CENTS PER VOLUME
+</p>
+<p>
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or, The Winnebagos go Camping.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+This lively Camp Fire group and their Guardian go back to Nature in a
+camp in the wilds of Maine, and pile up more adventures in one summer
+than they have had in all their previous vacations put together. Before
+the summer is over they have transformed Gladys, the frivolous boarding
+school girl, into a genuine Winnebago.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT SCHOOL, or, The Wohelo Weavers.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+It is the custom of the Winnebagos to weave the events of their lives
+into symbolic bead bands, instead of keeping a diary. All commendatory
+doings are worked out in bright colors, but every time the Law of
+the Camp Fire is broken it must be recorded in black. How these
+seven live wire girls strive to infuse into their school life the spirit of
+Work, Health and Love and yet manage to get into more than their
+share of mischief, is told in this story.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT ONOWAY HOUSE; or, The Magic Garden.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+Migwan is determined to go to college, and not being strong enough to
+work indoors earns the money by raising fruits and vegetables. The
+Winnebagos all turn a hand to help the cause along and the “goings-on”
+at Onoway Homes that summer make the foundations shake with
+laughter.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS GO MOTORING; or, Along the Road that Leads the Way.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The Winnebagos take a thousand mile auto trip. The “pinching” of
+Nyoda, the fire in the country inn, the runaway girl and the dead-earnest
+hare and hound chase combine to make these three weeks the
+most exciting the Winnebagos have ever experienced.
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the publishers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York.
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The AMY E. BLANCHARD Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+Miss Blanchard has won an enviable reputation
+as a writer of short stories for girls. Her books are
+thoroughly wholesome in every way and her style is full
+of charm. The titles described below will be splendid additions to
+every girl’s library.
+</p>
+<p>
+Handsomely bound in cloth, full library size.
+Illustrated by L. J. Bridgman. Price, 60 cents per volume, postpaid.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE GLAD LADY. A spirited account of a remarkably pleasant
+vacation spent in an unfrequented part of northern Spain. This summer,
+which promised at the outset to be very quiet, proved to be exactly the
+opposite. Event follows event in rapid succession and the story ends with
+the culmination of at least two happy romances. The story throughout is
+interwoven with vivid descriptions of real places and people of which the
+general public knows very little. These add greatly to the reader’s interest.
+</p>
+<p>
+WIT’S END. Instilled with life, color and individuality, this story of
+true love cannot fail to attract and hold to its happy end the reader’s eager
+attention. The word pictures are masterly; while the poise of narrative and
+description is marvellously preserved.
+</p>
+<p>
+A JOURNEY OF JOY. A charming story of the travels and
+adventures of two young American girls, and an elderly companion in Europe.
+It is not only well told, but the amount of information contained will make it
+a very valuable addition to the library of any girl who anticipates making a
+similar trip. Their many pleasant experiences end in the culmination of two
+happy romances, all told in the happiest vein.
+</p>
+<p>
+TALBOT’S ANGLES. A charming romance of Southern life.
+Talbot’s Angles is a beautiful old estate located on the Eastern Shore of
+Maryland. The death of the owner and the ensuing legal troubles render it
+necessary for our heroine, the present owner, to leave the place which has
+been in her family for hundreds of years and endeavor to earn her own living.
+Another claimant for the property appearing on the scene complicates matters
+still more. The untangling of this mixed-up condition of affairs makes an
+extremely interesting story.
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent prepaid on receipt of price by the publishers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The Girl Chum’s Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.
+</p>
+<p>
+ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.
+</p>
+<p>
+A carefully selected series of books for
+girls, written by popular authors. These
+are charming stories for young girls, well
+told and full of interest. Their simplicity,
+tenderness, healthy, interesting motives,
+vigorous action, and character painting will
+please all girl readers.
+</p>
+<p>
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 60 CENTS.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+BENHURST, CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+BERTHA’S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+FUSSBUDGET’S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl’s Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+MARJORIBANKS. A Girl’s Story. By Elvirton Wright.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+MISS CHARITY’S HOUSE. By Howe Benning.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+MISS ELLIOT’S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring Corning.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+MISS MALCOLM’S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+ONE GIRL’S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+PEN’S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow.
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of
+price by the publishers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The Girl Comrade’s Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.
+</p>
+<p>
+ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.
+</p>
+<p>
+A carefully selected series of books for
+girls, written by popular authors. These
+are charming stories for young girls, well
+told and full of interest. Their simplicity,
+tenderness, healthy, interesting motives,
+vigorous action, and character painting will
+please all girl readers.
+</p>
+<p>
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 60 CENTS.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER. By I. T. Thurston.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+BUBBLES. A Girl’s Story. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+HELEN BEATON, COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+JOYCE’S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+MISS ASHTON’S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl’s Story. By Mrs. S. S. Robbins.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of
+price by the publishers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The Boy Spies Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+These stories are based on Important historical
+events, scenes wherein boys are prominent
+characters being selected. They are the
+romance of history, vigorously told, with careful
+fidelity to picturing the home life, and accurate
+in every particular.
+</p>
+<p>
+<span class='sc'>Handsome Cloth Bindings</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+A story of the part they took in its defence. By William P. Chipman.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+A boy’s story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots to drive the British from that State. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story of General Marion and his young spies. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette in the Siege of Yorktown. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story of how the young spies helped the Continental Army at Valley Forge. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story of the part they took in its brave defence. By William P. Chipman.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of General Washington. By James Otis.
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street. New York
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The Boy Scout Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By HERBERT CARTER
+</p>
+<p>
+New stories of Camp Life, telling the wonderful and
+thrilling adventures of the Boys of the Silver Fox Patrol.
+</p>
+<p>
+Handsome Cloth Bindings
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; or, Marooned Among the Game Fish Poachers.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+Through a queer freak of fate, Thad Brewster and his comrades of the Silver
+Fox Patrol find themselves in somewhat the same predicament that confronted
+dear old Robinson Crusoe; only it is on the Great Lakes that they are wrecked
+instead of the salty sea. You will admit that those Cranford scouts are a lively
+and entertaining bunch of fellows.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+New and startling experiences awaited the tried comrades of camp and
+trail, when they visit the Southland. But their knowledge of woodcraft enabled
+them to meet and overcome all difficulties.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SCOUTS’ FIRST CAMP FIRE; or, Scouting with the Silver Fox Patrol.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+This book is brimming over with thrilling adventure, woods lore and the story
+of the wonderful experiences that befell the Cranford troop of Boy Scouts when
+spending a part of their vacation in the wilderness.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+Those lads who have read The Boy Scouts’ First Camp Fire will be delighted
+to read this story. It tells of the strange and mysterious adventures that happened
+to the Patrol in their trip through the “mountains of the sky” in the
+Moonshiners’ Paradise of the old Tar Heel State, North Carolina.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; or, Scouting through the Big Game Country.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story recites the many adventures that befell the members of the
+Silver Fox Patrol with wild animals of the forest trails, as well as the desperate
+men who had sought a refuge in this lonely country.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or, The New Test for the Silver Fox Patrol
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+In the rough field of experience the tenderfoots and greenhorns of the Silver
+Fox Patrol are fast learning to take care of themselves when abroad. Thad and
+his chums have a wonderful experience when they are employed by the State of
+Maine to act as Fire Wardens.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; or, The Search for the Lost Tenderfoot
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+A serious calamity threatens the Silver Fox Patrol when on one of their
+vacation trips to the wonderland of the great Northwest. How apparent disaster
+is bravely met and overcome by Thad and his friends, forms the main theme of
+the story, which abounds in plenty of humor, and hairbreadth escapes.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; or, The Secret of The Hidden Silver Mine.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+By this time the boys of the Silver Fox Patrol have learned through experience
+how to rough it upon a long hike. Their tour takes them into the wildest region
+of the great Rocky Mountains, and here they meet with many strange adventures.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+A story of Burgoyne’s defeat in 1777.
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York
+</p>
+<p>
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+&#160;<br />
+</p>
+<p>
+<span style='font-size:1.2em;font-weight:bold;'>The Boy Chums Series</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+By WILMER M. ELY
+</p>
+<p>
+In this series of remarkable stories by Wilmer M.
+Ely are described the adventures of two boy chums—Charley
+West and Walter Hazard—in the great swamps
+of interior Florida and among the cays off the Florida
+Coast, and through the Bahama Islands. These are real,
+live boys, and their experiences are well worth following.
+</p>
+<p>
+<span class='sc'>In Handsome Cloth Bindings</span>
+</p>
+<p>
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY CHUMS ON INDIAN RIVER; or, The Boy Partners, of the Schooner “Orphan.”
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard meet deadly rattlesnakes: have
+a battle with a wild panther; are attacked by outlaws: their boat is towed by a
+swordfish; they are shipwrecked by a monster manatee fish, and pass safely
+through many exciting scenes of danger. This book should be read first.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY CHUMS ON HAUNTED ISLAND; or, Hunting for Pearls in the Bahama Islands.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+This book tells the story of the boy chums’ adventures on the schooner “Eager
+Quest,” hunting for pearls among the Bahama Islands. Their hairbreadth escapes
+from the treacherous quicksands and dangerous waterspouts, and their rescue
+from the wicked wreckers are fully told.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST; or, Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida Everglades.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+The story of the boy chums hunting the blue herons and the pink and white
+egrets for their plumes in the forests of Florida is full of danger and excitement.
+In this story is fully told how the chums encountered the Indians; their battles
+with the escaped convicts; their fight with the wild boars and alligators; and
+many exciting encounters and escapes. This is the third story of the boy chums’
+adventures.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY CHUMS’ PERILOUS CRUISE; or, Searching for Wreckage on the Florida Coast
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+This story of the boy chums’ adventures on and off the Florida Coast describes
+many scenes of daring and adventure, in hunting for ships stranded and cargoes
+washed ashore. The boy chums passed through many exciting scenes, their
+conflicts with the Cuban wreckers; the loss of their vessel, the “Eager Quest,”
+they will long remember. This is the fourth book of adventures which the boy
+chums experienced.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO; or, a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek Spongers.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+This story of the boy chums hunting for sponges is filled with many adventures.
+The dangers of gathering sponges are fully described; the chums meet with
+sharks and alligators; and they are cast away on a desert island. Their rescue
+and arrival home make a most interesting story. This is the fifth book of adventures
+of the boy chums.
+</p>
+<p>
+THE BOY CHUMS CRUISING IN FLORIDA WATERS; or, the Perils and Dangers of the Fishing Fleet.
+</p>
+<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'>
+In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard embark upon a new and
+dangerous quest for fortune. With their old and tried comrades, Captain Westfield
+and the little negro, Chris, they join the great army of fishermen that
+yearly search the Florida seas for the thousands of kinds of rare fish and water
+creatures that abound there. The Florida waters hide many strange and unknown
+dangers. The perils the chums encounter from weird fishes and creatures
+of the sea and the menace of hurricanes and shipwreck, make very interesting
+and instructive reading. This is the sixth book of adventures of the boy chums.
+</p>
+<p>
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+</p>
+<p>
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+</p>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the
+Water, by Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37310-h.htm or 37310-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/3/1/37310/
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/37310-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg b/37310-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ed7ed7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37310-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg
diff --git a/37310.txt b/37310.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9a379c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37310.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8618 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water, by
+Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the Water
+       Exciting Adventures on a Summer Cruise Through the Panama Canal
+
+Author: Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+Release Date: September 4, 2011 [EBook #37310]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: "I AM SORRY YOU INTERFERED WITH US," SAID THE MAN.
+"YOU'LL FIND BEFORE LONG THAT YOU HAVE DONE WRONG." _Page 57_.]
+
+
+
+
+                                  The
+                       Blue Grass Seminary Girls
+                              On the Water
+
+                                   OR
+
+                 Exciting Adventures on a Summer Cruise
+                        Through the Panama Canal
+
+                       By Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+                               AUTHOR OF
+
+         "The Blue Grass Seminary Girls' Vacation Adventures,"
+           "The Blue Grass Seminary Girls in the Mountains,"
+                        "The Blue Grass Seminary
+                      Girls' Christmas Holidays."
+
+                           A. L. BURT COMPANY
+
+                          PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+                            Copyright, 1916
+                         By A. L. Burt Company
+
+               THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER
+
+
+
+
+THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.--PLANNING A TRIP.
+
+
+"Dad, we want to take a trip."
+
+The speaker was Shirley Willing, a typical Kentucky girl, slender of
+figure, vivacious of manner, and extremely pretty. With her father, she
+stood on the big, sunny front porch of the Willing farmhouse. As she
+again was about to address her father, a second young girl, who, it
+could be seen at a glance, was of about Shirley's years, joined them.
+
+This was Mabel Ashton, Shirley's particular friend and life chum.
+Shirley greeted her with a smile, and Mr. Willing's face also wrinkled
+pleasantly.
+
+"I was just telling Dad that we want to take a trip this summer,"
+explained Shirley.
+
+Mabel smiled.
+
+"We have talked it all over," she agreed, "and we just want to go some
+place."
+
+"Where?" asked Mr. Willing briefly.
+
+"Why, we--we--want to go to--to--where is it we want to go, Shirley?"
+asked Mabel in some confusion.
+
+"We hadn't decided on that yet, Dad," laughed Shirley. "But we don't
+want to stay here on this old farm all summer."
+
+"And what are you going to do with both your old Dads--leave them
+behind?" asked Mr. Willing seriously.
+
+"We would like to have you go with us, Dad, but we know you won't."
+
+"Why won't we?"
+
+"Well, I--we,--I--you never have gone with us."
+
+"It's never too late to mend our ways," declared her father dryly.
+"Perhaps we shall this time."
+
+Both girls clapped their hands, and scampered about the porch eagerly.
+At last Shirley stopped her antics, and standing directly before her
+father, took him by the coat with both hands.
+
+"Do you mean it, Dad?" she asked.
+
+Mr. Willing nodded.
+
+"Yes. Ashton and I have decided that the next time you two youngsters go
+away from home we are going with you. When you are by yourselves you get
+into too much mischief. Now where is it you want to go?"
+
+"We haven't the slightest idea," was the reply.
+
+Mr. Willing turned to Mabel.
+
+"You call your father out here and we'll talk this thing over," he told
+her.
+
+Mabel hastened to obey, and while she is searching for her father, we
+shall take time to introduce Shirley Willing and Mabel Ashton more fully
+to the reader.
+
+The two girls had been friends ever since they could remember. Born and
+raised within a few doors of each other in the little town of Paris,
+Bourbon county, Kentucky, they had been inseparable companions from the
+time they were able to walk. This friendship was strengthened by the
+fact that their fathers had been bosom friends before them.
+
+While the girls were still young, Shirley's mother died, and a short
+time later Mr. Willing purchased a large farm on the Bethlehem Pike,
+three miles from town. It was less than a year later that Mabel's mother
+passed into the great Beyond, and Mr. Ashton bought a farm adjoining
+that of his old friend. And here they had lived ever since.
+
+When Shirley reached the age of fourteen, she conceived the idea of
+going away to school. Mabel announced that she was going with her. The
+objections of their fathers they soon overcame, and at last found
+themselves installed as pupils of the Bluegrass Seminary in Lexington.
+Here, because of their kind-heartedness and their many good deeds, they
+were soon among the most popular girls of the school.
+
+Being athletically inclined, they were prominent in all branches of
+girls' sports. Their chief pleasure was horseback riding, in which art
+there were few more proficient. In fact, Shirley once had saved her
+father's fortune by carrying the Willing colors to victory in the great
+Kentucky Derby, as related in "The Bluegrass Seminary Girls on
+Vacation."
+
+Naturally modest, they nevertheless had been made, soon after their
+arrival at the seminary, members of the Glee Club, for it was found that
+both possessed voices of rare excellence. During the second Christmas
+vacation, with other members of the Glee Club, they had toured the
+larger eastern cities, and through entertainments had lifted a large
+debt that threatened the end of the Seminary.
+
+Both girls also possessed great courage, as they had proved on more than
+one occasion, and they had had many exciting adventures, one of the most
+important of which was the settling of a mountain feud in which they had
+faced great danger unflinchingly, as related in "The Bluegrass Seminary
+Girls on Motorcycles."
+
+The summer vacation now had just begun. Shirley and Mabel had returned
+from Lexington two days before this story opens. At the Willing place
+they found Mr. Ashton, who had been very ill for some years, and had
+been making his home with his friend while his daughter was away at
+school.
+
+But now Mr. Ashton was greatly improved, as Mabel found to her great
+joy. He was gaining daily and recovering lost weight and strength.
+
+Mabel, searching for her father in response to Mr. Willing's request,
+found him in the sitting room. She went up to him and took him by the
+hand.
+
+"Come on Dad," she said.
+
+Mr. Ashton--"colonel" he was always called by his friends--allowed
+himself to be pulled toward the door.
+
+"What's up?" he asked.
+
+"Mr. Willing, Shirley and I want to have a talk with you," was the
+reply.
+
+"H-mm-m," muttered the colonel, "must be something you two want. Have
+you succeeded in twisting Willing around your fingers?"
+
+"The idea, Dad!" exclaimed Mabel. "You know neither Shirley nor I would
+think of trying to do a thing like that."
+
+Colonel Ashton grinned.
+
+"Wouldn't you?" he asked dryly. "I'm not so sure of that."
+
+Father and daughter made their way to the front porch, where Shirley and
+her father were deep in conversation. Colonel Ashton dropped into a
+chair, and Mabel sat down at his feet.
+
+"Ashton," said Mr. Willing, "these girls say they want to go some place.
+What do you think about it?"
+
+Mr. Ashton was silent for some moments. He did not seem to be surprised.
+
+"Where do they want to go?" he asked at length.
+
+"We don't know, Dad," said Mabel. "We just want to take a trip."
+
+"And," Shirley broke in, "my Dad says you and he might come with us."
+
+Mr. Ashton looked at his old friend in surprise.
+
+"You say that, Willing?" he demanded.
+
+"Yes, Colonel, I did. Why not, eh? You and I are getting along in years
+and have earned a vacation. I'm agreeable, if you are."
+
+"I don't know but you are right," was the slow reply. "I guess I am well
+enough to travel. I'll go."
+
+Mabel jumped quickly to her feet, and hugged him. Shirley performed a
+similar operation on her father.
+
+"Then," said Mr. Willing, disengaging himself at last, "the only
+question to be settled is, where shall we go?"
+
+"This is a pretty sizeable country, Willing," said the colonel, "I guess
+there are plenty of places to go."
+
+"I had thought of Atlantic City," said Mabel.
+
+"And what had you thought of?" demanded Mr. Willing of Shirley.
+
+"Well," was the reply, "there were two things I wanted to do, and I
+don't know which I shall choose."
+
+"Let's hear them," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"You know, Dad, ever since Mabel and I went away with the Glee Club, we
+have both been anxious to take a trip on one of the big ocean steamers.
+That is one thing I would like to do."
+
+"And where would you like to go?"
+
+"Any place. Across the ocean."
+
+"Well, we won't do that," said Colonel Ashton. "This European war makes
+it too risky. We might be sunk by one of those German submarines."
+
+"Right, Colonel," agreed Mr. Willing. He turned again to Shirley, "and
+the other thing you would like to do?" he questioned.
+
+"I should like to go to the Panama Exposition in San Francisco."
+
+Mabel jumped to her feet and clapped her hands.
+
+"That's where I should like to go, too," she cried. "Why didn't I think
+of it before?"
+
+Mr. Willing considered.
+
+"Well," he said at length, "I don't know why we can't do both of those
+things, Shirley."
+
+"But the ocean trip, Dad. Where would we go?"
+
+"To San Francisco," was the reply.
+
+"But, how--"
+
+"You must remember that the Panama Canal is open to traffic, daughter,"
+explained Mr. Willing. "We can take a steamer from New York direct to
+San Francisco. Besides, I should like to have a look at the canal, with
+its great locks and other interesting things. The construction of the
+canal is considered one of the greatest of all feats of engineering."
+
+Colonel Ashton nodded his head emphatically.
+
+"I should like to take that trip myself," he declared.
+
+"Then we shall consider that matter settled," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"And when can we start, dad?" asked Shirley eagerly.
+
+"Well, we will not be able to leave here for a week or ten days. I have
+some business affairs that must be put in order before I can get away.
+Besides, you two girls will want clothes and things, and you can't get
+those in a minute."
+
+"We'll go to town this afternoon and get some things," declared Mabel.
+
+"All right," laughed Mr. Willing, "but just the same it will take you at
+least a week to get yourselves ready. Then I shall have to make
+arrangements for our passage, find out when we leave New York and attend
+to other details. It will take time."
+
+"But we shall go as soon as possible, Dad?" asked Shirley.
+
+"Yes," was the reply. "You may make sure of that. We shall go as soon as
+possible. Hello--who's that?"
+
+The others gazed in the direction of his pointing finger. Through the
+pike gate, at that moment, came a solitary horseman.
+
+"I wonder who he is?" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.--AN ADDITION TO THE PARTY.
+
+
+The horseman came closer.
+
+Suddenly Shirley gave an exclamation of delight. She had recognized the
+visitor even at this distance, which was too great for the others to
+perceive his identity. Mabel looked at her chum in astonishment.
+
+"Dick!" cried Shirley.
+
+Now Mabel understood, and even Mr. Willing allowed a slight smile to
+steal across his face.
+
+Shirley ran down the steps from the porch and hurried toward the distant
+yard gate. The girl and the horseman arrived at about the same time, and
+those on the porch saw the rider lift his cap and dismount.
+
+Then he led the horse through the gate, closed it behind him and with
+the bridle in his hand continued his way to the house afoot, Shirley
+walking by his side.
+
+"Dick!" cried Shirley again, as the rider dismounted at the gate upon
+sight of her. "What are you doing here? I am glad to see you."
+
+"I was in Paris on a little business," replied the young man, "and I
+thought I wouldn't go away without paying my respects to you and your
+father."
+
+At the house Mr. Willing greeted the young man warmly, for, from
+previous meetings, he had taken a liking to Dick.
+
+Dick Stanley was a native of Cincinnati, O. He was without parents, and
+after having met Shirley under exciting circumstances, he had given up a
+rough set of companions and at length had obtained a place as office boy
+on one of the big Louisville newspapers. But Dick had not remained an
+office boy long, and he was now one of the most competent and best liked
+reporters on the paper.
+
+He had been sent to Paris for a certain piece of news--"on a story," in
+his words, the words of the newspaper world--and he had just completed
+his work successfully. Therefore he had hired a horse and come to the
+Willing farm for a few words with his friends before going back to
+Louisville.
+
+"I'm glad to see you, young man," said Mr. Willing in greeting. "It has
+been some time since we have had the pleasure of your company."
+
+"Thank you, sir," was the reply. "I am always glad to be here."
+
+He shook hands with Mr. Ashton and Mabel.
+
+Now Shirley proceeded to tell him of the trip they were going to take,
+and Dick was greatly interested.
+
+"I should like to see the canal," he said. "I have been reading quite a
+bit about it, and it is very interesting."
+
+"You are right, young man," agreed Mr. Willing.
+
+"It is one of the wonders of the world." He paused, struck by a sudden
+idea. Then he said slowly, looking squarely at Dick:
+
+"How would you like to go with us?"
+
+"I'd like it fine," declared Dick, with a smile. "I wish it could be
+done."
+
+"Well, it can be done," said Mr. Willing quietly.
+
+Dick, as well as Shirley and Mabel, looked at Mr. Willing in surprise.
+
+"Dad!" exclaimed Shirley. "What do you mean?"
+
+"Just what I say," was the reply. "I am going to take Dick with us."
+
+Dick shook his head slowly.
+
+"I appreciate your kindness, Mr. Willing," he said quietly, "but I
+cannot accept such generosity."
+
+"Can't, eh?" blustered Mr. Willing, "and why not, I'd like to know. I am
+not in the habit of having my invitations refused, sir!"
+
+Again Dick smiled.
+
+"It is very kind of you to ask me," he said, "but I do not feel that I
+should accept. Of course, I have the money for the trip, but I do not
+feel I can afford to spend it. Besides, I could not leave the paper for
+so long a time."
+
+"Couldn't leave the paper!" echoed Mr. Willing.
+
+"I'll speak a few words to my friend Col. Harperson, the owner, and he
+will see that you are given an indefinite vacation."
+
+"No, sir, thank you, I don't think it can be done."
+
+"I'll tell you," said Mr. Willing, trying a new line, for he had made up
+his mind to have Dick accompany them, "you will be able to do some
+writing on the trip. The sights you will see should mean money to you.
+You should be able to write many interesting articles when you get
+back."
+
+Dick apparently was impressed with this line of reasoning. And now
+Shirley added her voice to the colonel's.
+
+"Please, come, Dick?" she said.
+
+"Well," said the young man after hesitating a long while, "I'll tell you
+what I'll do. If I can make arrangements to get off indefinitely, I'll
+go."
+
+Shirley clapped her hands.
+
+"I'm sure you can," she cried.
+
+And Mr. Willing muttered to himself:
+
+"I'll fix it with Harperson!"
+
+The discussion of the trip now became general, and Dick was acquainted
+with the time they expected to depart.
+
+"You will remain here over night, of course," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"Thank you, sir, I shall be glad to."
+
+"Then we'll put off our shopping till to-morrow, Mabel," said Shirley.
+
+All day the three young people talked eagerly of the coming trip, and
+Shirley tried to get Dick to promise that he would go, whether he was
+able to get off or not. But this Dick would not do.
+
+"If they agree to let me off, all right," was his decision.
+
+They sat up and talked till late that night, but Mr. Willing finally put
+an end to this conversation.
+
+"Shirley," he said severely, "are you going to keep that young man
+talking all night? How do you expect him to catch the early train in the
+morning?"
+
+"Well, I would have gone any time he told me," pouted Shirley.
+
+"I don't suppose he would have told you if you had kept him talking all
+night," replied Mr. Willing dryly.
+
+Dick arose and bade the others good night. A few moments later Shirley
+and Mabel retired to their room, where they lay for a long time before
+sleep overcame them, so excited were they at the prospect of the great
+trip.
+
+"I'm glad Dick is going," said Mabel, "but I don't suppose I am half as
+glad as you are."
+
+"Why not?" demanded Shirley.
+
+"Oh, just because," replied Mabel, laughing.
+
+"I don't see anything to laugh at," declared Shirley.
+
+"You don't? No, I guess you don't. Do you know, I'd give a whole lot if
+some nice boy like Dick would come all this way to see me."
+
+"He came to see you as well as me," said Shirley.
+
+"Oh no he didn't. If I had been the only girl here, Dick would not have
+been on hand to-day. Besides, if it wasn't for you I'm sure he wouldn't
+even think of taking the trip to San Francisco."
+
+"But he wants to see something of the Panama Canal."
+
+"My goodness! you didn't use to be so dense," exclaimed Mabel.
+
+"Dense?" repeated Shirley. "What do you mean, Mabel?"
+
+"That's right, keep it up," exclaimed Mabel. "I won't say anything more.
+Are you going into town to-morrow?"
+
+"Yes, I thought we would go in as soon as Dick had gone."
+
+"That suits me. We'll have to get a lot of things."
+
+"I should say so. Why, I haven't a single decent thing to wear."
+
+"We'll put in a good supply, so we won't have to buy anything while we
+are away. My! but won't it be a nice trip?"
+
+"Won't it though. I can hardly wait for the time to come."
+
+"Nor I. But let's get some sleep or we won't want to get up in the
+morning."
+
+Both closed their eyes and tried to sleep. But they had too much on
+their minds to go to sleep immediately, and it was long minutes before
+drowsiness overcame them and they lost themselves, only to dream that
+they were sailing across the ocean.
+
+The following morning they accompanied Dick to Wright's station, where
+he took a train for Lexington. There he would have to change for
+Louisville.
+
+"Let us know as soon as possible?" called Shirley, as he climbed aboard.
+
+"I will," replied Dick. "I'll write immediately I have learned one thing
+or the other."
+
+The train moved away.
+
+Shirley and Mabel returned to the house, where Mr. Willing was waiting
+for them with the automobile.
+
+"Ashton and I have decided to do a little shopping on our own hook," he
+explained. "We want to spruce up a bit. Daughter, do you suppose there
+will be any nice-looking, middle-aged ladies aboard the boat? If so, why
+Ashton and I--"
+
+"Dad!" interrupted Shirley.
+
+"Well, all right. Of course if you object," said Mr. Willing.
+
+All the rest of the day the girls put in shopping. Dresses and frocks
+for all occasions they bought, besides a couple of outing costumes.
+
+"I don't know how long it takes to get to San Francisco from New York,"
+said Shirley, "so we had best be prepared."
+
+But when the day was over they found they had not completed their
+shopping, and would have to return again on the morrow.
+
+Mr. Willing, during the day, transacted his business and found out the
+date of sailing from New York. Taking it for granted that Dick would
+accompany them, he purchased a ticket and made accommodations for him as
+well as the others.
+
+"How long shall we be gone, Dad?" asked Shirley, as the automobile sped
+homeward.
+
+"Well, let's see. This is the fourth of June. We shall leave New York on
+the fifteenth. I should say we would be back by the middle of August."
+
+"And will we come back the same way?"
+
+"No; we'll come back by rail. One way by boat will be enough. You'll
+have seen plenty of water by the time you reach San Francisco."
+
+"I hope Dick decides to go with us," said Shirley.
+
+"And so do I," declared Mabel.
+
+"Oh, he'll go, all right," remarked Mr. Willing.
+
+And the latter was right. Three days later Shirley stood before her
+father with an open letter in her hand.
+
+"It's from Dick," she explained. "He says he is going with us."
+
+Mr. Willing chuckled.
+
+"I see Harperson is still a friend of mine," he muttered to himself.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.--OFF FOR NEW YORK.
+
+
+It was the morning of the twelfth of June that the party of five went
+early to Paris to catch the eight o'clock train for Cincinnati. Dick had
+arrived the night before, and in spite of the fact that they would have
+to be up very early in the morning, all sat up talking, for the young
+people were too excited to go to sleep.
+
+All through the long hours of the night the girls tossed about, scarcely
+closing their eyes. They were up with the break of day, which was soon
+after four o'clock.
+
+At last the time for departure came, and they jumped gaily into the
+large automobile which was to take them to town.
+
+"What time shall we leave Cincinnati, sir?" Dick asked of Mr. Willing,
+as the train pulled out from the station.
+
+"Twelve o'clock," was the reply. "We'll get there a little after eleven,
+which will give us time to get across town to the Pennsylvania station.
+I have made reservations on the New York train."
+
+Nevertheless it lacked only twenty minutes of the noon hour when the
+train pulled into Cincinnati.
+
+"Hurry girls," ordered Mr. Willing. "We have no time to lose. We can
+just about make it."
+
+They dashed through the station and out the Third street entrance, where
+Mr. Willing immediately engaged two taxicabs.
+
+"Pennsylvania Station!" he ordered, and they were off at a good gait.
+
+Through the narrow streets congested with traffic they were forced to go
+more slowly, and Mr. Willing looked at his watch impatiently from time
+to time.
+
+"Seven minutes!" he said, and they were still some distance from their
+destination, and then the first cab stopped to let a car pass in front
+of it.
+
+"Hurry!" commanded Mr. Willing of his driver. "We haven't got all day to
+get there. Let the street cars do the waiting after this."
+
+The chauffeur nodded and the cab leaped forward, scattering pedestrians
+right and left, darting in and out among other vehicles, avoiding a
+collision as though by a miracle. The second cab came close behind.
+
+At last the station was reached and all dismounted hurriedly. With Mr.
+Willing in the lead they ran through the station to the train shed. Here
+the conductor had just called "All aboard!"
+
+Mr. Willing heard him, and urged the others on faster. They passed
+through the gate, Mr. Willing assisted the girls and Colonel Ashton up
+the steps, then climbed up himself. And as he did so, Shirley, who had
+turned to look at him, cried:
+
+"Where's Dick?"
+
+Mr. Willing looked around, then stood nonplussed. Dick was not here. The
+train began to move.
+
+There came a shout from behind and a young man came dashing after the
+train. Shirley cried out in alarm. It was Dick.
+
+The train had gathered headway now and was slipping along beneath the
+shed more rapidly. Dick sprinted, gained, clutched the handrail of the
+car and swung himself aboard just as the train gathered even greater
+speed.
+
+He climbed to the platform, wiped the moisture from his brow, fanned
+himself vigorously and then smiled.
+
+"Close call, that," he exclaimed.
+
+"Young man," said Mr. Willing dryly, "hereafter let there be no
+loitering behind. You gave me a scare and I don't care for any more of
+the same."
+
+"Daddy!" exclaimed Shirley. "I am sure Dick didn't do it intentionally."
+
+"No, sir," agreed Dick. "As I followed after you I bumped into a lady
+and knocked her suitcase from her hand. It came open and the contents
+scattered about. For a moment I forgot all about the train and stopped
+to help her pick them up. Then I happened to remember we were late, and
+ran after you."
+
+"Your gallantry is bound to get you in trouble if you are not careful,"
+commented Mr. Willing.
+
+They went inside.
+
+Mr. Willing had engaged the two drawing rooms, one at either end of the
+car. Dick and the two older men were to occupy one and the two girls the
+other.
+
+It was almost eight o'clock when the train pulled into Pittsburgh. They
+had just finished dinner, so Dick stepped off to look about for a few
+moments.
+
+As he stood beside the steps of the Pullman, another man, probably
+several years his senior, approached and engaged him in conversation. He
+was an agreeable sort of a chap. He spoke English with the faintest of
+accents, however, and this Dick was not slow to notice.
+
+It appeared that the man had a berth on the same car, and they climbed
+aboard together. In the smoking compartment was Mr. Willing, to whom
+Dick introduced the newcomer. Mr. Ashton came in a few moments later,
+and all sat talking.
+
+The stranger, who introduced himself as Henry Bristow, made himself very
+agreeable and Mr. Willing took an instant liking to him.
+
+During the course of the conversation, Dick chanced to mention that they
+would sail from New York for San Francisco on the fifteenth.
+
+"On what ship?" demanded Bristow eagerly.
+
+"_Yucatan_," was the reply.
+
+"Is that so?" exclaimed the other. "I shall sail on the same vessel."
+
+"For San Francisco?" asked Dick in surprise.
+
+"That all depends," was the answer. "I shall only take passage as far as
+Colon. Whether I shall go further depends upon my--upon circumstances."
+
+"We shall be glad to have you as a fellow passenger," declared Mr.
+Willing. "As you are going to be such, you must meet my daughter, and
+the daughter of the colonel here."
+
+"I shall be pleased," was the reply.
+
+He accompanied the others to the drawing room, where introductions
+followed.
+
+Young Bristow conversed fluently upon many topics and the others were
+delighted with him. From his remarks it was gathered that he had
+traveled considerably.
+
+He spoke familiarly of New York, Chicago, San Francisco, and apparently
+had a personal knowledge of London, Paris, Berlin and other European
+cities. He was equally as well acquainted with the larger southern
+cities.
+
+The two girls were eager listeners to the tales of his travels, and even
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton gave an attentive ear to these stories.
+
+"And where do you live?" asked Mr. Willing suddenly. "What did you say
+your business is?"
+
+The young man's face suddenly turned red.
+
+"My home is in New York," he replied quietly, "and as for my business, I
+fear that must remain a secret for the present."
+
+"Daddy, you shouldn't be so inquisitive," said Shirley with a smile.
+
+"I'm sure I'm sorry," apologized her father. "I didn't mean--"
+
+"Say no more about it," replied the young man with a pleasant smile.
+"For certain reasons, I am not now able to reveal the nature of my
+business."
+
+Dick had been thinking rapidly. Suspicions had entered his head, and he
+could not shake them off. And still he knew that they would sound
+foolish to another.
+
+"I'll keep them to myself," he said, "but I'll keep an eye open."
+
+The train was just pulling into North Philadelphia when Shirley and
+Mabel opened their eyes the next morning. Mabel glanced at her watch.
+
+"Seven o'clock," she exclaimed. "We'll have to hurry, Shirley. You know
+these fast trains don't take long to reach New York from here. Besides,
+we want to get breakfast on the train."
+
+They dressed as rapidly as possible, and emerged from their drawing room
+just in time to see young Bristow stride down the aisle.
+
+He gave them a cheery "good morning" and turned as Mr. Willing came up.
+
+"I hope you will join us at breakfast, sir," said Mr. Willing.
+
+The young man accepted, and as Dick and Colonel Ashton appeared at this
+moment, all made their way to the diner together.
+
+"Where shall you stay in New York, sir?" asked Bristow of Mr. Willing.
+
+"At the McAlpin," was the reply. "We shall spend the two days looking
+about the city, going aboard the _Yucatan_ a couple of hours before time
+for her departure."
+
+Bristow turned to Dick.
+
+"I shall look you up either this afternoon or to-morrow, and we'll take
+a stroll," he said.
+
+"I'll be glad to walk with you," Dick replied.
+
+Breakfast over, they returned to the Pullman, where they began to get
+their things together, for they were close to New York.
+
+Half an hour later the train plunged into the tunnel under the Hudson
+river. Mr. Willing, who had been to New York before, explained how the
+tunnel had been constructed and gave other interesting information.
+
+"You wouldn't think we were in a tunnel," exclaimed Shirley. "There is
+no smoke."
+
+"Electric engine," replied Mr. Willing.
+
+"And we go right under the river?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"My goodness!" exclaimed Mabel. "Just to think that there is a river
+running right over the top of us. Suppose it would come through."
+
+Mr. Willing smiled.
+
+"It won't," he said quietly.
+
+And now the porter came for their baggage, and carried it to the
+vestibule. The conductor poked his head in the door and called out:
+
+"New York!"
+
+"Here we are," exclaimed Shirley eagerly. "The city I have always wanted
+to see. The greatest city in the world!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.--DICK HAS AN ADVENTURE.
+
+
+The two days spent in New York City were days of wonder to Shirley,
+Mabel and Dick. They were on the go every minute of the time,
+sightseeing. From one end of the city to the other they travelled with
+wide-open eyes.
+
+The great skyscrapers impressed them, perhaps, more than any one other
+thing, though they saw much to amaze them; and next to the great
+buildings they were impressed by the crowds.
+
+Crowds they had seen in some of the other large cities, but never
+anything like this.
+
+They took a trip to Coney Island on the second day, and the girls were
+for going back again that night. Mr. Willing agreed, and they were about
+to fare forth from the hotel, when young Bristow was announced.
+
+"I've come to take you for that promised stroll," he told Dick.
+
+Dick looked at the others inquiringly.
+
+"You go with him," nodded Colonel Ashton, "the rest of us can get along
+without you for one evening."
+
+"If I'm breaking up a party--" began Bristow.
+
+"Never mind," said the colonel with a wave of his hand. "You two young
+fellows run along. We don't need you."
+
+"All right, sir," agreed Dick.
+
+Personally he was glad to have a chance to look about the town a little
+with one of his own age. The others took their departure, and soon
+Bristow and Dick also left the hotel.
+
+"I would have looked you up sooner but I have been terribly busy,"
+explained Bristow. "I have had important matters to attend to, and this
+is the first time I have been at liberty. Where would you like to go?"
+
+"Any place you say," said Dick with a smile. "You know more about this
+place than I do."
+
+"I guess you're right," was the smiling response, "we'll wander up
+Broadway aways and watch the theater crowds."
+
+They did so, and continued to stroll about for an hour.
+
+Gradually the crowd thinned out, although there were many pedestrians on
+the street. As they stood for a moment in front of the Herald building
+on Herald square, Dick, chancing to turn suddenly, became conscious of a
+pair of eyes looking steadily at his companion. He called the other's
+attention to it, and as the latter glanced about the man turned and
+moved off.
+
+Dick thought no more of the matter until several blocks further along he
+perceived the same figure slinking furtively after them.
+
+"That man is following us," he said to Bristow.
+
+The face of the latter grew hard.
+
+"We'll see," he said.
+
+At that moment they were passing Forty-second Street, and Bristow swung
+sharply around the corner. Dick followed him. They walked several
+blocks, until they stood beneath the tracks of the Sixth Avenue
+elevated. Here Bristow again turned sharply, and drew up in a doorway.
+He stopped as Dick came up beside him.
+
+A moment later the figure of the man Dick believed was following them
+came around the corner. The man's hat was pulled over his eyes, and he
+did not glance up as he passed the doorway. Bristow and Dick turned and
+doubled back around the corner.
+
+"He was after us, all right," said Bristow with a laugh, "but I guess we
+have given him the slip."
+
+But in this he was mistaken.
+
+"I wonder what on earth we are being followed for?" muttered Dick to
+himself, as they turned down Broadway. "Something queer about this
+fellow Bristow. That man is not following us for nothing."
+
+Several hours later they stopped in a little restaurant for a bite to
+eat, "after which I'll take you home," said Bristow.
+
+The restaurant was crowded, and a little while later the waiter seated
+another man at their table. Dick gave him a quick glance and then
+stifled an exclamation of surprise.
+
+The newcomer was the same man who had followed them so recently.
+
+Dick leaned over and whispered to Bristow.
+
+"So?" said Bristow. "We'll see what he wants."
+
+He looked the man squarely in the eyes and demanded:
+
+"What are you following me for?"
+
+The man looked at him and smiled pleasantly.
+
+"I just want to keep you in sight," he replied.
+
+"Why?"
+
+"You know, I guess. You don't want me to speak right out, do you?"
+
+"Well, no," replied Bristow, "but I'll thank you to follow me no
+longer."
+
+"Sorry," was the reply, "but I am afraid I shall have to."
+
+"I warn you," said Bristow quietly, "to let me alone. Is that plain
+enough?"
+
+"Perfectly plain," was the reply. "I'm sorry I can't accommodate you."
+
+He resumed his eating.
+
+Dick and Bristow finished their meal first and rose to go. The other man
+waited until they were at the door, then picked up his check and
+followed them. And so when they passed out, he was right behind them
+once more.
+
+"I don't like this idea of being followed," said Dick. "What's he want,
+anyhow?"
+
+"We'll get rid of him," replied Bristow, absolutely ignoring Dick's
+second question.
+
+He turned down a side street, and they walked for three or four blocks,
+at length coming to a rather darker street. Here Bristow slipped around
+the corner and motioned Dick to silence.
+
+The footsteps of their pursuer came to their ears. He drew nearer.
+Bristow advanced close to the edge of the building.
+
+"What are you going to do?" asked Dick.
+
+"You'll see," was the brief response.
+
+As the man came into view, Bristow suddenly struck out with his right
+fist, and the man toppled over.
+
+Bristow turned to Dick.
+
+"Come!" he said quietly.
+
+With one look at the fallen man Dick obeyed, and they were soon beyond
+pursuit.
+
+Dick had been taken by surprise by the suddenness of Bristow's attack.
+Try as he would he could see no reason for it. He, as well as Bristow,
+objected to being followed, but Dick would not have taken such measures
+to elude his pursuer.
+
+He followed his companion without a word, however, and soon they were
+back at the hotel.
+
+The others had not returned, but Bristow sat down, announcing that he
+had something important to say to Mr. Willing when the latter did get
+back.
+
+Half an hour later, Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and the two girls came
+in.
+
+"Well, I see you beat us," exclaimed Mr. Willing. "Have a good time?"
+
+"Yes, sir," replied Dick.
+
+"Mr. Willing," said Bristow, "I have something of importance to say to
+you."
+
+"All right, sir," came the answer, "out with it."
+
+"Will you all promise to repeat nothing of what I may say?"
+
+"Why all this air of secrecy?" demanded Mr. Willing.
+
+"That I cannot tell you, sir."
+
+"Of course we'll promise, Mr. Bristow," declared Shirley. "Surely, Dad,
+there is no reason why we should tell any one anything."
+
+Mr. Willing nodded.
+
+"I will promise for myself and the others," he said.
+
+"Very well, sir. What I would say is this: Take my advice, and under no
+circumstances sail on the _Yucatan_ to-morrow!"
+
+Mr. Willing gazed at the young man in perfect amazement, as did the
+others in the room. Mr. Willing was the first to regain his composure.
+
+"Why?" he asked quietly.
+
+"I can't go into explanations," replied the young man hurriedly; "all I
+can do is warn you that it is not safe."
+
+"And why isn't it safe?" asked Shirley, now taking a hand in the
+conversation.
+
+"That I cannot tell you, either. But you all know that a state of war
+exists between the countries of Europe."
+
+"What has that to do with us?" asked Shirley.
+
+"You are asking me hard questions," said Bristow, "and I cannot answer
+as I would like to. Let it be enough that there is danger because of it.
+And if there should even be no danger aboard the _Yucatan_, it will
+exist in Colon."
+
+"In Colon?"
+
+"Yes. One week from to-day Colon will no longer be safe!"
+
+"It is my belief you are out of your head, young man," declared Mr.
+Willing grimly.
+
+Bristow shook his head positively.
+
+"I am telling you facts," he declared. "I can't say any more."
+
+"And why won't we be safe aboard the _Yucatan_?" demanded Shirley. "The
+ship isn't going to sink, is it?"
+
+"No, but--"
+
+"No European country will dare to molest it," declared Dick, "and I can
+see no reason why there should be danger at Colon."
+
+"I was afraid I couldn't convince you," said Bristow. "However, I have
+done my best. Good night."
+
+He bowed and left the room.
+
+"What do you suppose he is talking about, Dad?" asked Shirley.
+
+"I don't know," was the reply, "and I don't care."
+
+"All buncombe," agreed Colonel Ashton.
+
+"Well, I don't care what it is," exclaimed Shirley. "We have set our
+hearts on this trip, and we are going to take it. That's all there is
+about that."
+
+"Good for you, Shirley," agreed Mabel.
+
+Dick Stanley was the only member of the party who did not speak. He sat
+quietly in his chair, thinking.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.--ABOARD THE YUCATAN.
+
+
+The _Yucatan_, upon leaving New York, did not head straight for Colon.
+Her route took her down the coast, where she would make several stops.
+The first would be at Savannah, then Jacksonville, and the third, and
+last before touching at Colon, would be Havana, Cuba.
+
+Mr. Willing had selected this vessel for the simple reason that it did
+put in at these southern ports, for he wished to give the girls an
+opportunity of seeing as much as possible on the journey. After rounding
+into the Pacific, following her passage of the Panama Canal, the vessel
+was scheduled to put in at the seaports of several of the Central
+American republics and one or two Mexican ports.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton, Dick and the two girls stood forward on the
+gallery deck of the great ship as she got under way and slowly backed
+out of her slip into the North River.
+
+It was early afternoon, the sun shone brightly and it was very warm. All
+day the city had sweltered beneath the terrible heat, but as the ship
+gradually gathered headway a breeze sprang up and blew refreshingly
+across the deck.
+
+"This is something like it," declared Mr. Willing, removing his yachting
+cap and passing his handkerchief over his forehead.
+
+The awnings were stretched, and all took the steamer chairs they had
+secured. These they pulled close to the rail, and then gazed off across
+the water.
+
+Directly the Statue of Liberty came into view. The girls gazed at it
+curiously as they passed and headed for the open sea.
+
+Gradually the lofty spires of the great buildings faded from view, and
+then the Statue of Liberty disappeared. To starboard could be seen the
+distant shore of New Jersey, and to port nothing but the broad expanse
+of the Atlantic.
+
+Darkness descended and with it a cooler breeze.
+
+"Time to eat," said Mr. Willing.
+
+They made their way to the dining room below, where they were seated at
+the captain's table. The supper was excellent, far beyond Shirley's
+expectations. The meal over they returned on deck.
+
+Mr. Willing had secured a suite of four rooms well forward on the
+promenade deck, and after enjoying the cooling breeze for some time, all
+made their way there.
+
+The strains of a band now floated to them from the main salon. They made
+their way out. Then the three young people started on a tour of the
+ship. They took in everything with breathless interest.
+
+"This is indeed a floating palace," commented Shirley.
+
+"Isn't it though," agreed Mabel.
+
+Dick was no less enthusiastic in his praise.
+
+After a stroll about they rejoined the two elder men in the salon. Then
+it was that Shirley bethought herself of the fact that young Bristow had
+said he would be aboard.
+
+"I haven't seen anything of him," she said.
+
+Neither had the others.
+
+"Perhaps he missed the boat," said Mabel.
+
+"I'll have a look at the passenger list," said Dick.
+
+He did so, and there he saw "Henry Bristow, New York," and the number of
+his stateroom. He went up and knocked on the door.
+
+"Come in," called a voice.
+
+Dick entered the room, then started back in surprise.
+
+Bristow lay propped up in bed, reading. Around his head was a white
+bandage. Dick hastened to his side.
+
+"Why, what is the matter?" he exclaimed.
+
+"Accident," replied Bristow, with a slight smile, and volunteered no
+further information.
+
+Dick did not press him for an explanation. After some little talk, in
+the course of which Bristow said he did not require anything and
+announced that he would be perfectly fit on the morrow, Dick took his
+leave and rejoined the others.
+
+"And how was he hurt?" asked Mr. Willing, after Dick had reported what
+he had learned.
+
+"He didn't say and I didn't ask him," he replied. "But I am sure there
+is something strange about it, sir."
+
+"I am beginning to think that myself," agreed Colonel Ashton. "He's a
+queer one. Now, I wonder why he warned us not to sail on this ship?"
+
+"It's too deep for me," declared Dick.
+
+"I have it," exclaimed Shirley suddenly. "Perhaps he is an agent of one
+of the foreign countries, England or Germany."
+
+Dick looked at the girl in unfeigned surprise.
+
+"What makes you think that?" he asked.
+
+"I don't know. I don't really believe it; I just happened to think of
+it. Wouldn't it be fun if he was?"
+
+"Well, that all depends," replied Dick. "It depends on what his business
+aboard would be."
+
+"But what could it be in such a case?" questioned Mabel.
+
+"Well, it might be lots of things. But I don't put any stock in such an
+explanation."
+
+"Nor I," declared Mr. Willing. "It's my belief the young man is in
+trouble of some kind, and I'd like to help him out if I could. I like
+him."
+
+"And so do I," agreed Mabel.
+
+"To tell the truth, I don't know whether I do or not," said Dick slowly.
+"He's agreeable, and all that; but there is something very peculiar
+about him. I am sure there is something wrong."
+
+"If I get a good chance, I shall ask him," declared Mabel.
+
+"You'll have about the same luck Dad did when he asked him his
+business," retorted Shirley, "and that wasn't much."
+
+"Take my advice, all of you, and let him alone," remarked Colonel
+Ashton.
+
+"That is good advice, Ashton," declared Mr. Willing. "But come, it's
+bedtime and we shall want to be about early in the morning to enjoy some
+of this ocean breeze."
+
+An hour later all were asleep.
+
+Had they been about they would have seen a strange sight.
+
+On the upper deck aft, as the ship's bell chimed midnight, three men sat
+in deep conversation. Two of them were strangers, but the third Shirley
+or any of her party would immediately have recognized as Henry Bristow.
+
+And there would also have been something else noticeable. The bandage
+had been removed from his head, nor was there wound nor swelling to show
+why it should have been tied up in the first place.
+
+The three men talked for perhaps fifteen minutes in low whispers and
+then parted, going their several ways.
+
+As he had promised, Bristow was about the ship the following morning,
+but his head was once more bandaged. Mabel, true to her words of the
+night before, seized the first opportunity and asked him how he had been
+injured.
+
+"That," was the quiet reply, "I cannot say."
+
+Mabel was highly indignant, and took herself off, leaving the young man
+smiling after her. Then he shrugged his shoulders and walked away.
+
+All morning the sun shone warm and bright, though it was not too hot for
+comfort. It was shortly after noon when the passengers were treated to
+an interesting sight.
+
+Some distance to port came the smoke of another ship, and as it drew
+nearer an air of subdued excitement became apparent on the _Yucatan_.
+
+"Armed cruiser off the port bow, sir!" came the hail from the lookout.
+
+All rushed toward the rail, and stood looking at the large ship of war,
+as she bore down toward them. There was no flag at her masthead, and so
+the passengers were unable to determine her nationality.
+
+"What can she be?" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"British, I suppose," was Dick's answer. "She'll show her colors
+presently, I guess."
+
+Dick was right. Five minutes later the British ensign was run up the
+masthead and fluttered in the breeze.
+
+A great cheer broke from most of the passengers aboard the _Yucatan_.
+Shirley and Mabel joined in it.
+
+At that moment Dick caught sight of the face of Bristow, who stood near.
+His lips were compressed, and he scowled fiercely.
+
+"He's no Englishman, that's sure," muttered the young man to himself.
+
+Suddenly, from across the water, came the sound of a big gun, and a
+solid shot struck the water dead ahead of the _Yucatan_.
+
+Immediately her engines were stopped, and the passenger steamer came to
+a stop.
+
+Instantly wild alarm spread over the ship.
+
+"We've been fired on," cried Shirley. "Will they sink us?"
+
+Dick smiled.
+
+"Oh, I guess not," he replied. "That's just a signal to heave-to and
+give an account of ourselves."
+
+"But what business have they stopping an American ship?" exclaimed
+Shirley.
+
+"It is permissible under the laws of war," explained Dick. "You see, the
+_Yucatan_ might be an enemy flying the American flag. As soon as they
+find out we are all right, they will allow us to proceed."
+
+"And would we have to stop just the same for a German?"
+
+"Of course."
+
+"I wouldn't like that," declared Shirley. "I don't mind the English. My
+grandmother was English, you know."
+
+"Well, I guess my sympathies are a little that way, too," agreed Dick.
+
+The wireless now began to sputter as messages were exchanged between the
+_Yucatan_ and the British cruiser. The latter had approached close
+enough to make out the _Yucatan_, and now signalled her to proceed on
+her course.
+
+As the big ship of war turned and made off, a second ovation was given
+her by the passengers. Men waved their hats and women their
+handkerchiefs.
+
+Suddenly Shirley seized Dick by the arm, and pointed, whispering:
+
+"Look at that!"
+
+Far aft, Henry Bristow gazed across the water at the British cruiser,
+and Shirley had perceived that there was hate in his eyes. Even as Dick
+looked in the direction Shirley pointed, Bristow raised a fist and shook
+it fiercely at the receding war vessel, while strange words issued from
+between his lips.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.--SHIRLEY LENDS AID.
+
+
+"Look, Mabel, did you see that woman steal that bolt of silk?"
+
+It was Shirley who spoke. They stood among the crowd that thronged the
+largest department store in Savannah, Ga. The _Yucatan_ had put into
+Savannah early that morning, and learning that the vessel would not get
+under way again until late in the afternoon, Shirley and Mabel had gone
+uptown to purchase a few souvenirs of the Georgia city.
+
+It was just after entering the store that Shirley's attention was
+attracted by the peculiar actions of a young woman who darted somewhat
+furtively from one counter to another. While the attention of the clerks
+was given to customers, Shirley had seen the woman slip a bolt of
+expensive silk from the counter and hide it under a long flowing cape,
+which she wore in spite of the heat.
+
+Mabel shook her head negatively in response to Shirley's question.
+
+"Which one?" she asked.
+
+Shirley pointed to the figure of the woman who was now gazing at a
+pretty array of expensive laces. Both girls watched her carefully; and
+directly, as the crowd about her became more dense, they saw her hand go
+stealthily forth and take several small bolts of the high-priced
+material.
+
+"Well what do you think of that?" demanded Mabel. "I have heard of such
+things, but I never expected to see it. What shall we do?"
+
+"Nothing," replied Shirley decidedly. "It's none of our business."
+
+"But won't the poor clerks have to make good the loss?"
+
+"I don't know about that. But if we get mixed up in it we are likely to
+gain too much notoriety. Let's move away from here."
+
+They pushed their way through the crowd when Shirley came suddenly into
+violent contact with a figure hurrying from the opposite direction. The
+latter drew back and lifted his cap.
+
+"Miss Willing," he said. "I beg your pardon. I didn't look where I was
+going."
+
+Shirley glanced up in surprise at hearing her name spoken. Then she
+recognized the figure with whom she had collided.
+
+"Why, Mr. Bristow," she said. "I thought I left you aboard the
+_Yucatan_?"
+
+"I came ashore to do a little shopping, as you young ladies call it,"
+replied Bristow with a laugh. "I shall have to hurry on."
+
+He lifted his cap and was gone.
+
+The two girls continued to stroll about through the store, eyeing the
+bargains appreciatively.
+
+"Well, I guess we have seen enough," said Mabel finally. "We may as well
+return to the ship."
+
+As they started toward the door they became aware of the sounds of
+confusion behind them. For a moment they hesitated, then their curiosity
+overcame them and they turned back.
+
+Far down the aisle a large crowd had gathered. The girls could hear the
+loud tones of one of the floor walkers calling for the store detective.
+Shirley and Mabel elbowed their way through the crowd, and presently
+were able to see what was going on.
+
+Shirley uttered an exclamation of amazement and clutched Mabel by the
+arm.
+
+"Look at that!" she cried in a low voice.
+
+And well might she have been amazed. For there, in the center of the
+crowd, his arm grasped tightly by the big floor walker, was Henry
+Bristow.
+
+His face was red and he was plainly very angry. However, he was making
+no effort to release himself. He controlled himself with an effort and
+spoke.
+
+"I tell you you are making a mistake," he said quietly, and his voice
+carried to the two girls.
+
+"Is that so?" sneered the floor walker. "So you deny you are a
+shop-lifter, eh? Well, I didn't suppose you would admit it. How do you
+account for the possession of this valuable piece of lace the clerk saw
+you getting away with?"
+
+"It must have caught on my coat," was the reply. "I didn't try to steal
+it."
+
+"You didn't, eh? We'll see as soon as the house detective arrives. I
+reckon you have plenty of stuff stowed away in your pockets."
+
+"Well, I haven't," declared Bristow angrily. "You're going to be sorry
+for this before you get through."
+
+"Well what do you think of that?" demanded Mabel, who had stood with
+open mouth during this conversation.
+
+"I think that he is innocent," declared Shirley.
+
+She glanced quickly around the store, and as she did so her eyes fell
+upon the woman she had so recently seen appropriating articles from the
+counter.
+
+"There goes the woman who did it," she declared, pointing.
+
+Mabel looked and nodded her head.
+
+The woman was coming directly toward them, pushing her way through the
+crowd vigorously. Shirley stepped forward and barred her progress.
+
+At the same moment Shirley raised her voice and called out:
+
+"That man is innocent, Mr. Floorwalker. Here is the shop-lifter."
+
+The woman again tried to push by Shirley, but the latter maneuvered so
+as to be directly in front of her at every step.
+
+Shirley's words caused a commotion. Willing hands darted out and seized
+the woman, and she was taken before the man who still grasped young
+Bristow by the arm.
+
+Shirley and Mabel pushed their way forward.
+
+"I saw this woman steal a bolt of silk and some laces," declared
+Shirley. "I would have said nothing about it had not Mr. Bristow, whom I
+know, been accused."
+
+"It isn't true!" cried the woman. "The girl is in the plot with the
+man."
+
+Shirley's face grew red.
+
+"I am not!" she declared. "This woman is guilty. She put the things
+under that long cape."
+
+The floor walker was plainly mystified. He glanced from one to the
+other.
+
+"Well, it will do no harm to have a look," he declared. He turned to the
+woman. "Will you remove your cape, madam?"
+
+The woman drew back, and pulled the garment closer about her.
+
+"No, I won't!" she declared, "I--"
+
+"Very well," said the floor walker. "I shall have the floor matron
+search you."
+
+He turned and called to one of the clerks. But the woman waited for no
+more. With a single move she took off her cape, and threw it to the
+floor.
+
+"There," she said, throwing out her arms, "you may see that I have
+nothing."
+
+"I saw her take them," declared Shirley, looking at the woman in
+surprise, for she could not see a sign of a stolen article.
+
+A frown gathered on the floor walker's face as he glanced at Shirley.
+
+"This looks rather bad for you." he said to her pointedly.
+
+Shirley took a step back.
+
+"What do you mean?" she asked in no little alarm.
+
+"It seems that the lady is telling the truth. What was your object in
+accusing her?"
+
+"I tell you I saw her take them," declared Shirley again.
+
+The floor walker shrugged his shoulders.
+
+It was Mabel who finally cleared up the situation. The woman's cape
+still lay on the floor where she had thrown it. Mabel stooped down to
+pick it up, and as she did so the woman also snatched at it.
+
+But Mabel was the quicker of the two and captured the garment. Quickly
+she turned it wrong side out, and as she did so there was a gasp from
+the crowd.
+
+For the inside of the coat was literally filled with secret pockets.
+Mabel thrust her hand in and pulled out the bolt of silk. She held it
+above her head.
+
+"Here it is!" she cried.
+
+"I bought and paid for that," sputtered the angry woman.
+
+One after another Mabel now produced other articles of value, which she
+exposed to the view of the crowd. And in each case the woman's
+explanation was the same:
+
+"I paid for that!"
+
+But the floor walker was not to be fooled, nor was the manager of the
+store, who came up at that moment. The former released his hold on young
+Bristow and made him an abject apology.
+
+One of the women detectives was called, and the shop-lifter turned over
+to her. Then the manager addressed Shirley and Mabel.
+
+"I owe you two young ladies a debt of gratitude," he said. "This
+shop-lifting has been going on for a month or more and we have lost
+heavily. Thanks to you I believe we have the culprit at last. Without
+your assistance she would have escaped."
+
+Shirley and Mabel acknowledged this praise with slight inclinations of
+the heads, and then Shirley spoke to Young Bristow, who stood near.
+
+"Are you going back to the boat, Mr. Bristow? We shall be glad of your
+company."
+
+The young man accepted this invitation, and the three made their way
+from the store.
+
+"I can't thank you enough, either of you," he declared as they walked
+along. "I was in a ticklish position, and but for your assistance might
+have been put to no end of trouble."
+
+"How did you happen to be accused?" asked Shirley.
+
+"Why, I was walking through the aisle, and because of the crowd I was
+shoved against the counter. A piece of lace caught on a button of my
+coat, and I dragged it with me as I went by. Then the girl behind the
+counter cried out that some one had stolen something. The floor walker
+saw the lace caught in my coat and collared me. That's all."
+
+"I see," said Shirley, and added with a smile: "You certainly did look
+funny there!"
+
+"Did I? Well, I didn't feel very funny. I was afraid I would be held
+long enough to make me miss the ship, and I can't afford to do that."
+
+"Then your business in Colon is very important?" asked Mabel.
+
+Young Bristow looked at her in silence for some moments, and Mabel grew
+red as she thought she was to be rebuffed again. But she wasn't. Bristow
+finally answered her question.
+
+"Very important," he said quietly.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.--MABEL SHOWS HER COURAGE.
+
+
+"By the way," said Shirley as they walked along, "how is your wound? I
+see you have removed the bandage."
+
+A startled expression flitted across the young man's face, but neither
+girl perceived it.
+
+"It's much better," he made answer. "Not even a scar left. It didn't
+amount to much, after all."
+
+Fifteen minutes later they were back aboard the _Yucatan_, where Shirley
+related their experiences to others of their party.
+
+"I'll have to keep a closer watch on you two," declared Mr. Willing.
+"Every time you get away by yourselves you run into trouble. And you
+won't always come out of it so easily."
+
+Several hours later the big steamship moved majestically out of the
+harbor and soon was headed down the coast once more. She came to anchor
+again the following morning at Jacksonville, the last American port at
+which she would touch until she reached San Diego, California. The
+Willing party went ashore again, but this time, true to his word, Mr.
+Willing would not permit the girls to wander away by themselves.
+
+As they strolled about, Shirley became suddenly ill. She knew it was
+nothing serious, brought on probably by the excessive heat. Therefore
+she informed the others that she was going back aboard the ship, as she
+wished to lie down. Mabel agreed to go with her.
+
+The fathers saw the two girls into a taxicab, which soon dropped them at
+the pier, where they immediately went to their suite.
+
+Shirley felt much better now that she was out of the sun, and lying down
+on the sofa picked up a book and commenced to read. Mabel sat down at a
+little desk to write a letter.
+
+In spite of the cooling breeze made by the electric fan in the room, it
+was still rather warm, and Mabel left the outer door open to get what
+breeze they could from over the water. Mabel was in the first room, and
+Shirley in the one beyond.
+
+Suddenly Mabel heard footsteps running down the deck toward their suite.
+She glanced up idly, wondering why any one should put himself to so much
+exertion on such a hot day, and even as she looked up a figure darted
+into the room and closed the door behind him.
+
+Mabel jumped quickly to her feet and faced the newcomer, who, she now
+perceived, held a revolver in his hand.
+
+Mabel was not frightened by the sight of the weapon, for she was not
+unacquainted with the use of firearms and had faced more than one
+dangerous situation; but as the man turned and faced her, she uttered a
+cry of amazement.
+
+The man was Henry Bristow.
+
+Bristow, who had not perceived that the room was occupied, turned at the
+sound of Mabel's voice, his revolver half raised. At sight of Mabel he
+dropped his arm, and removed his cap.
+
+"Please pardon me for this intrusion," he said quietly. "I did not know
+the cabin was occupied nor whose it was. I just happened to see the door
+open, and I slipped in."
+
+"What is the matter?" asked Mabel, who realized that something must be
+wrong.
+
+"Oh, nothing," was the reply.
+
+Before Mabel could utter another word, there was a loud knock on the
+closed door.
+
+Shirley, in response to the knock, came in from the next room. She took
+in the situation at a glance, but did not betray her surprise by so much
+as an exclamation. She advanced quickly toward Mabel and young Bristow.
+
+"What is wrong?" she asked in a low voice.
+
+Bristow waved his revolver toward the door.
+
+"They want me," he said. "I can't allow you girls to be drawn into this,
+so I shall go out."
+
+A dark expression passed over his face, and his hand tightened on the
+revolver. Shirley became alarmed.
+
+She motioned him to the room beyond.
+
+"You go in there," she said. "No one will bother you."
+
+For a moment Bristow hesitated, then he bowed and passed in. As he went
+by her, Mabel reached out and relieved him of his revolver. Bristow
+started to protest, then changed his mind and said nothing.
+
+Mabel motioned to Shirley.
+
+"You go in too," she said. "I'll stay here."
+
+Shirley obeyed without a word. Then Mabel walked to the little center
+table, and put the revolver in the drawer.
+
+Came another sharp knock on the door. Mabel advanced and threw it open.
+
+Three men stood in the doorway, and all removed their hats at sight of
+her.
+
+"What is it?" demanded Mabel.
+
+"We are searching for a man named Von Blusen, who is aboard this ship.
+We trailed him down the deck here, and he disappeared. Have you seen
+him?"
+
+"I know no one by that name," returned Mabel.
+
+"He's a young fellow," went on the spokesman of the three, "and a very
+smooth-spoken chap. All the other cabins are locked but this one. I
+happen to know that this door was open a few minutes ago. I thought he
+might possibly have come in here?"
+
+He looked at Mabel inquiringly.
+
+"I know no one by that name," declared the girl again.
+
+"Perhaps you know him by some other name, then?"
+
+Mabel did not reply.
+
+The man became suspicious.
+
+"I am afraid we shall have to search this cabin, miss," he said. "I am
+not convinced he is not in here."
+
+"What is it you want with this man?" asked Mabel, her curiosity getting
+the better of her.
+
+"Well, I don't mind telling you. Von Blusen is a German and I have been
+tipped off that he is up to some mischief, I don't know just what. My
+orders are to take him ashore and turn him over to the U. S.
+authorities."
+
+"And who are you?" demanded Mabel.
+
+"Me? Why, I'm a United States special officer."
+
+He threw back his coat and exposed a badge, which he covered hurriedly.
+Mabel, therefore, did not see it clearly. Something seemed to tell her,
+however, that the man was not telling the truth.
+
+She stepped back quickly to the little center table, and as the first
+man advanced after her, she quickly opened the drawer and produced
+Bristow's revolver, which she levelled at the three men.
+
+"You can't come in here," she said quietly.
+
+The foremost man drew back, as did the others.
+
+"But, miss," said the spokesman, "we must search the cabin. I am sure
+Von Blusen came in here. Will you deny it?"
+
+"I don't have to deny it," declared Mabel angrily. "If you are United
+States officers, as you claim, you will have some means of
+identification."
+
+"I showed you my badge," said the man.
+
+"Yes, and you were careful that I didn't get a good look at it."
+
+"But we must make the search."
+
+"Then you must have an order. I know that much. I know you have to have
+a piece of paper, or something--a warrant I believe it is called."
+
+"I haven't any warrant now," was the reply, "but I am going to make the
+search just the same."
+
+He stepped forward, but Mabel covered him with her revolver.
+
+"You have come in here against my command," she said quietly, "and I
+should be perfectly justified in shooting you, as I would a burglar."
+
+The man sought to temporize.
+
+"Now, see here miss--" he began.
+
+Mabel took a step forward. She was growing angry.
+
+"You just get right out of here," she exclaimed.
+
+The man drew back a step and scratched his head perplexedly.
+
+"Miss," he said, "you are making a big mistake to shield this man. I
+tell you he is plotting mischief which may involve the United States in
+war. We must have him before the ship sails."
+
+"Well, you won't get him in here," declared the girl.
+
+Again the man hesitated, then seemed on the point of moving forward
+again.
+
+"I warn you for the last time to get out of here," said Mabel very
+quietly.
+
+Once more her revolver came to bear on the man, and he drew back,
+throwing up his hands with a gesture of dismay. Then he turned to his
+companions.
+
+"What can we do against that?" he asked. "We can't use a girl roughly,
+and if the ship gets beyond the three-mile limit, we can't get him till
+we reach Colon."
+
+"Guess we'll have to wait then," said one of the others.
+
+"Yep, guess we will."
+
+The leader turned to Mabel and made her a low bow.
+
+"I'm sorry you interfered with us," he said. "You'll find before long
+that you have done wrong."
+
+"Perhaps I shall," said Mabel; "but I couldn't permit you to invade my
+cabin."
+
+"Tell you what, Tim," said one of the men, "we'll just camp out here and
+get him when he comes out. He's likely to come out before we sail."
+
+"Good idea," agreed the leader. "We'll do it."
+
+Again he made a low bow to Mabel and followed his men out.
+
+"Sorry to have troubled you," he muttered as he took his departure.
+
+Shirley and Bristow now came in from the other room.
+
+"You did splendidly, Miss Ashton," declared Bristow warmly. "I was
+afraid you would allow them to enter."
+
+Before Mabel could reply there came the sound of voices outside. One,
+raised in anger, was that of Mr. Willing. A moment later, followed by
+Colonel Ashton and Dick, he entered the room.
+
+His gaze fell upon Henry Bristow.
+
+"So," he growled, "it's you they're after, eh?"
+
+"Yes, sir," returned Bristow quietly.
+
+"Well, you sit down over there, young man," said Mr. Willing, pointing
+to a chair. "I'm going to tell you a few things, and I don't care
+whether you like them or not."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.--THEIR FIRST QUARREL.
+
+
+Shirley and Mabel glanced at Mr. Willing in surprise. Young Bristow took
+the seat indicated, and the others also sat down.
+
+"First," said Mr. Willing to Bristow, "I am going to ask you a question
+or two. If you refuse to answer, I shall, of course, draw my own
+conclusions."
+
+The young man nodded.
+
+"Proceed, sir," he said.
+
+"All right. Now, in the first place, are you connected, in any capacity,
+with the German government?"
+
+"That I cannot answer," was the reply.
+
+"Very good! Now, then, are you aboard this ship at the command of the
+German government?"
+
+"I cannot answer that question, either, sir."
+
+"Suit yourself. Is it not a fact that those with whom you come in
+contact--those who seem to be your friends--are in danger because of
+their associations with you?"
+
+"I suppose you are right, sir."
+
+"Just as I expected," declared Mr. Willing. "Now I've got this to say.
+Already you have been the means of getting my daughter and the colonel's
+daughter into your scrapes. They have come to your assistance twice.
+Also Dick has been with you on one adventure. You will admit that, of
+course?"
+
+"Of course, sir."
+
+"Good. Then here is my ultimatum: I want you to keep away from me and
+mine. I don't want you to cross this threshold again; and I don't want
+you to speak to any of us should you chance to encounter us. Do I make
+myself plain?"
+
+"Perfectly, sir," replied Bristow rising from his chair, his face pale.
+
+"I am glad I do," declared Mr. Willing. "I haven't any use for a spy, be
+he German or English. Now you can get out of here."
+
+Without a word Bristow moved toward the door. But Mabel leaped forward
+and barred his path. She turned to Mr. Willing.
+
+"Surely you wouldn't send him out to be captured?" she exclaimed. "Those
+men are waiting for him out there."
+
+"That is none of our affair," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"I agree with Mabel in that," declared Shirley. "If he goes out before
+we are beyond the three-mile limit, he will be taken prisoner."
+
+"And if he isn't there is no telling what may happen," commented Mr.
+Willing.
+
+"Dad," said Shirley, "please let him stay until we have passed the
+three-mile limit? Please!"
+
+Mr. Willing hesitated.
+
+"Well, I agree," he said at length.
+
+Bristow spoke to Mr. Willing.
+
+"I shall stay, sir," he said, "but it is because I must avoid capture if
+it is possible. Otherwise I wouldn't stay in the same room with you."
+
+Mr. Willing smiled. He didn't mind that kind of talk, but not so
+Shirley. She sprang to her feet and faced Bristow angrily.
+
+"How dare you speak to my father like that?" she demanded. "How dare
+you?"
+
+Bristow turned his head away, and made no reply.
+
+Mabel quickly came to the support of Bristow.
+
+"And why shouldn't he?" she asked. "He hasn't done anything and your
+father was very mean."
+
+"Why, Mabel," exclaimed Shirley in surprise.
+
+"I mean it," declared Mabel. "Your father was mean."
+
+"He couldn't be too mean to a German," exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"You people make me tired," declared Mabel angrily. "Why are you forever
+jumping on the Germans? They are in the right and they are going to
+win."
+
+"They are not!" This from Shirley. "The English are going to win, and I
+hope they do!"
+
+"And I hope the Germans win," declared Mabel.
+
+"Shirley! Mabel!"
+
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton had now taken a hand in the conversation.
+But both girls were too angry to heed them.
+
+"And just because this man is a German you are all against him. If he
+were English you would be shaking hands with him."
+
+Mabel was losing control of herself.
+
+"Why, Mabel," said Shirley. "You know that is not true."
+
+"I know it is true," declared the girl.
+
+Colonel Ashton took her firmly by the arm.
+
+"Mabel, I am surprised at you," he said. "Go to your room."
+
+"It's Shirley's room, it's not mine," cried Mabel.
+
+Shirley advanced toward her friend.
+
+"Mabel, what do you mean?" she asked quietly.
+
+"You know what I mean. You told me I wasn't telling the truth."
+
+Shirley compressed her lips and stepped back.
+
+Mr. Willing took a hand in the conversation.
+
+"Unless this foolishness ceases we shall leave the boat at Havana and
+return home immediately," he said quietly. "I will have none of this."
+
+"I don't care," declared Shirley, also now very angry.
+
+"Neither do I," this from Mabel.
+
+"Shirley, go to your room," ordered Mr. Willing. "I am your father and I
+will be obeyed."
+
+Shirley glanced at her father's stern face, and obeyed. She knew that
+when he looked like that he was not to be trifled with.
+
+"Mabel, you go with her," said Colonel Ashton quietly.
+
+Mabel hesitated.
+
+"Do you hear me?" asked the colonel.
+
+Mabel also realized that she had gone too far. She made her way after
+Shirley.
+
+Inside their room the girls did not speak to each other. In the heart of
+each there was a peculiar feeling, and each knew that, in a measure, she
+was to blame. But neither was ready to give in yet.
+
+It was their first quarrel.
+
+Outside Mr. Willing turned to young Bristow.
+
+"This," he said, "is your doing. And when you once set foot outside this
+cabin, don't you ever cross my path again."
+
+The _Yucatan_ was under way now, and from the window Mr. Willing could
+see the three men still waiting on the outside. But at last they took
+their departure and Mr. Willing knew they had passed beyond the
+three-mile limit. He turned again to Bristow.
+
+"Now Bristow or Von Blusen or whatever your name is," he said, "get
+out."
+
+Bristow turned a dark look upon him.
+
+"You have insulted me," he said, "and you shall pay for it."
+
+"I couldn't insult you, you little whipper-snapper," said Mr. Willing
+angrily. "Are you going to get out of here?"
+
+"When I've had my say," declared the young man angrily. "If it were not
+that I am on important business I would chastise you right now."
+
+"Is it because you have important business or because you are a child?"
+asked Mr. Willing smiling.
+
+Bristow took a threatening step forward, but now Dick took a hand.
+
+"That's enough of this," he said sternly, and putting forth a hand he
+pushed Bristow back.
+
+The latter's face turned a dull red, and he struck at Dick, who promptly
+slapped him across the face. Dick also was angry now.
+
+"You shall pay for that blow," shouted Bristow. "I can't fight you now,
+but when I have completed my work I shall seek you out."
+
+"I won't be very hard to find," declared Dick. "Now get out."
+
+He took the infuriated Bristow by the neck and the bottom of the coat
+and ran him out the door. Then he closed it after him.
+
+"Rather a fiery young man, that," remarked Colonel Ashton grimly.
+
+"Rather," agreed Mr. Willing dryly. He turned to the other room and
+called: "Shirley! Mabel!"
+
+A moment later the two girls came forth. Mr. Willing looked at them
+severely for some moments before he spoke.
+
+"You should both be ashamed of yourselves," he said at last. "The idea
+of such foolishness. Why, you have never quarreled before."
+
+"And there will be no more of it," declared Colonel Ashton grimly. "At
+the next sign of trouble we shall turn right around and go home."
+
+"Well, Mabel started it," declared Shirley.
+
+"I did not, you started it," exclaimed Mabel.
+
+"Shirley!" said Mr. Willing.
+
+"Mabel!" exclaimed Colonel Ashton.
+
+The girls became silent, but continued to glare at each other.
+
+Then, suddenly, a smile broke over Shirley's face. Her father breathed
+more freely. Even Colonel Ashton looked at the two girls eagerly.
+
+Then Shirley advanced toward Mabel and held out her hand.
+
+"I'm sorry for what I said, Mabel," she declared earnestly.
+
+For a moment Mabel hesitated, but for a moment only. Then she jumped
+quickly forward, and ignoring her friend's outstretched hand, threw her
+arms around her and broke into tears.
+
+"It was all my fault," she sobbed. "You didn't say anything."
+
+"Yes I did, too," said Shirley. "It was as much my fault as it was
+yours."
+
+"No it wasn't."
+
+"Yes it was."
+
+"It was not."
+
+The two girls drew back from each other.
+
+"I say it was," declared Shirley.
+
+"And I say it wasn't," declared Mabel.
+
+"What is the matter with you two?" demanded Mr. Willing, stepping
+between them.
+
+"Nothing, Dad," said Shirley, smiling again. She turned again to Mabel.
+
+"I'm sorry," she said quietly.
+
+"And so am I," said Mabel.
+
+Once more they fell into each other's arms, laughing happily. Then, arm
+in arm, they turned and made their way to their own rooms, absolutely
+ignoring the presence of the others.
+
+Dick, who had felt decidedly uncomfortable during this scene, grinned
+foolishly. Colonel Ashton laughed aloud, and Mr. Willing smiled.
+
+"Funny things happen, my boy," exclaimed the latter, slapping Dick on
+the back. "You learn something every minute."
+
+And in the other room Mabel said:
+
+"We shall never, never quarrel again."
+
+"Never!" agreed Shirley.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.--ADRIFT.
+
+
+In the distance the Cuban city of Havana was slipping slowly from sight.
+Aft on the promenade deck Shirley, Mabel and the others of the party,
+together with many other passengers, were casting last looks at the
+island metropolis.
+
+The sun was just sinking below the horizon, but there were still several
+hours before darkness would fall. The view was indeed picturesque and
+the passengers were impressed with it.
+
+The steamship _Yucatan_ was now on the last leg of her journey toward
+Colon.
+
+In the main salon a crowd of men had gathered. On the upper deck, the
+gallery deck, the promenade deck and the main deck they had also
+gathered in knots. They blocked the main staircase and the exits from
+the engine room below.
+
+A group somewhat larger than the rest had assembled about the captain's
+cabin. A close observer would have noticed that each man among these
+different groups wore a peculiar little button in the lapel of his coat.
+
+Each group was silent. It appeared that they were waiting for something.
+Now a young man appeared and spoke to the first group holding his open
+watch in his hand. Then he passed on to the next, then to the next,
+until he had approached all. Then he took his place with the others near
+the bridge, and waited, watch in hand.
+
+Suddenly he pulled a little whistle from his pocket, put it to his lips,
+waited a moment, and then blew a shrill blast, that penetrated to the
+farthest part of the ship.
+
+Instantly the various groups of men wearing the button of peculiar
+design came to action.
+
+The passengers on the promenade deck, the Willing party among them,
+found themselves under the muzzles of many revolvers. On the gallery,
+the deck, the main salon, the grand stairway a like condition prevailed.
+
+Only the men who guarded the exit from the engine and boiler rooms were
+inactive, but these stood with drawn revolvers.
+
+A dozen men swarmed from the bridge into the wheel house, where they
+confronted the pilot, the Captain, the first and second officers, who
+chanced to be there together. Officers in other parts of the ship also
+had been held up.
+
+The surprise had been complete. The _Yucatan_ was at the mercy of this
+army of conspirators, whoever they chanced to be.
+
+Shirley and Mabel had eyed the strange proceedings upon their section of
+the ship with no less amazement than the rest of the passengers. Mr.
+Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick were equally astonished.
+
+"What is it, a wholesale hold-up?" demanded the colonel.
+
+"Worse, I'm afraid," declared Mr. Willing.
+
+"I know!" exclaimed Shirley suddenly. "Mr. Bristow is concerned in
+this."
+
+"My goodness! I believe you are right Shirley," declared Mabel.
+
+"I know I am right," returned Shirley positively. "This is why he sailed
+on the _Yucatan_."
+
+In the meantime the captors of the vessel had relieved all on board of
+whatever weapons they had. They had made a systematic search of the
+cabins, while some of their number kept the crew and passengers covered.
+Of the many aboard the ship the only ones who did not know what had
+happened were the engine crew and stokers.
+
+The wireless had been among the first points seized, and the operator
+had had no opportunity of sending a message.
+
+And now a young man moved about among the passengers, assuring them that
+there was no danger so long as they kept quiet. This young man came aft
+on the promenade deck where the Willing party stood.
+
+Even as Shirley had surmised, he was Henry Bristow.
+
+He smiled as he approached them.
+
+"Well," growled Mr. Willing, "I see you have put the thing through."
+
+"Part of it sir, part of it," was the reply. "The rest is to come."
+
+"What are you going to do now, Mr. Bristow?" asked Mabel.
+
+The latter smiled at her.
+
+"Captain Von Blusen, if you please, Miss Ashton," he said, "I am no
+longer Henry Bristow, but Captain Friederich Von Blusen, of His Imperial
+Majesty's service."
+
+"And what are you going to do with the ship?" asked Shirley.
+
+"Why, we shall do a little cruising," was the reply. "We have
+established a naval base off the coast of Cuba, but we have no ships on
+this side of the Atlantic. Therefore we must have ships. This is the
+first."
+
+"And what are you going to do with us, captain?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Ah, that is the hard part," was the reply, "but, before starting, we
+came to a conclusion, though none of the passengers is likely to be
+pleased. We shall set you adrift in small boats."
+
+The others staggered back in dismay.
+
+"Impossible," declared Mr. Willing. "Surely you are not barbarians."
+
+"The law of necessity must be obeyed," replied the captain.
+
+He took his departure.
+
+"The cold-blooded scoundrel," declared Colonel Ashton. "This is what we
+get for helping him to escape."
+
+"And that is my fault," declared Mabel.
+
+"Well, there is no use talking about it now," said Dick. "It's too
+late."
+
+An hour later the new crew began getting out the boats, and all the
+passengers provided themselves with life preservers. Fortunately, the
+weather was calm and the sea smooth and there was little likelihood of a
+storm at this time of year.
+
+With everything in readiness, Captain Von Blusen once more approached
+the Willing party, and drew Mabel slightly to one side in spite of the
+protests of the others.
+
+"Miss Ashton," he said, "in your cabin the other day you spoke of your
+sympathies to the German cause. Now I shall tell you something, for you
+have done much for me. Advise the others to make no attempt to reach
+Colon, should they be picked up."
+
+"And why not?" demanded Shirley.
+
+The captain hesitated.
+
+"Well, there is no harm in telling you," he said at last. "Of course,
+you may not know that Germany is trying to bring the United States into
+this war on her side. We have at last found a way. Just off Colon are
+several Japanese warships. We shall near them unobserved, and signal by
+wireless that a certain thing must be done, representing ourselves as
+one of the Japanese battleships.
+
+"Naturally, we shall be refused permission. Now we have a new invention
+that would enable us to destroy Colon from a distance, and in our
+message we shall threaten this unless the supposed Japanese demand is
+granted. Do you understand?"
+
+Mabel nodded her head slowly. She was beyond words.
+
+"And when the demand is refused," continued the captain "we shall use
+some of this new explosive. That will mean war between Japan and the
+United States, and therefore, England also, as she is Japan's ally. Do
+you see?"
+
+"Yes, I see," said Mabel quietly.
+
+"And what do you think of the plan?"
+
+"I think it is contemptible," declared Mabel.
+
+"But, but--" began the captain.
+
+"I don't care to hear any more," said Mabel. "But you will not succeed,
+I am sure of that. You can not succeed."
+
+She turned on her heel and made her way back to the others, the captain
+standing as if rooted to the deck as he stared after her.
+
+Mabel turned the matter over in her mind. She felt certain that the
+captain had been boasting, and the more she thought it over the more she
+became convinced of it. Therefore, she decided to say nothing about it
+to the others.
+
+Under the muzzles of the revolvers of the captors of the big steamship,
+captain, officers, crew and passengers now took their places in the
+small boats, and were lowered over the side.
+
+Each boat was well stocked with provisions and water, for the Germans
+had no mind to set their prisoners adrift and let them starve or perish
+of thirst.
+
+The shore of Cuba was not far away, and, with steady rowing by the men,
+it would be possible for them to reach there within twelve hours.
+Besides, there was always the chance they would be picked up by a
+passing vessel.
+
+Fortunately, the passenger list was not large. The bulk of it had been
+made up of the men who had later captured the ship. Therefore, officers,
+passengers and crew included, there were not more than three hundred set
+adrift.
+
+The engine room crew had been impressed into service by the Germans.
+
+The Willing party found themselves in the boat with the captain and
+perhaps a dozen other passengers. As the boat struck the water, and the
+men began to row away from the big steamship at the captain's command,
+Shirley and Mabel were badly frightened.
+
+In spite of the cheering words spoken by their fathers, Dick and other
+male passengers, they did not bear up very well. As they looked first in
+one direction and then the other and saw nothing but water, they broke
+into tears. The small boat looked very small indeed to be at large upon
+the water.
+
+Presently all the boats were launched, and rowed some distance from the
+steamer. There they stopped as a sudden blast signified that the big
+ship was about to get under way and leave them.
+
+It began to grow dark. The electric lights aboard the large vessel
+glowed suddenly, and slowly the brilliantly lighted floating palace made
+off in the gathering darkness.
+
+As it went away and left them to the mercies of the sea, cries of
+anguish, despair and condemnation were hurled after the men who had thus
+set the passengers and crew adrift. Women sobbed, and men stood up in
+the boats and shook their fists after the steamship _Yucatan_.
+
+And then the great ship disappeared from sight. The men in the small
+boats renewed their work at the oars, and the boats moved toward the
+distant Cuban coast.
+
+Adding to the fearfulness of their condition, darkness descended upon
+them like a pall.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.--COLON.
+
+
+At a word from Mr. Willing, after several hours of rowing, Shirley and
+Mabel cuddled up in their end of the boat and tried to sleep; but this
+they found impossible, and all through the night they gazed out over the
+dark waters.
+
+Here and there the lights in the other boats were visible, but before
+morning they had lost sight of these. When the first faint streaks of
+dawn appeared in the east there was not another boat to be seen. They
+had become separated in the night.
+
+The almost twenty passengers in the little craft ate of the food that
+had been provided and drank of the water. Thus refreshed, and with the
+sun now appearing above the horizon, their predicament did not seem as
+serious as it had during the blackness of the night.
+
+There was not an object in sight to break the monotony of the water, and
+the boat rocked gently on the easy swell of the sea. The men bent to the
+oars again and sent the little craft skimming through the water.
+
+Came a cry from the man at the rudder, and the eyes of the others
+followed his gaze toward the distant horizon. They beheld a faint cloud
+in the otherwise clear sky.
+
+"Steamer!" cried the first man.
+
+The cloud approached nearer and at last the outline of a ship, appearing
+very small at that distance, could be made out. It was headed on a
+course that would bring it almost directly in the path of the smaller
+boat.
+
+As the hull of the vessel grew larger by its approach, occasional cheers
+broke from the lips of those in the little craft. So far it was
+impossible to tell whether the castaways had been sighted or not; but as
+the big ship neared them--now scarcely more than a mile away--the shrill
+blast of the steamer's whistle split the air. The small boat with its
+passengers had been discovered. The passengers raised another cheer.
+
+Rapidly the large vessel bore down on them, and the little craft bobbed
+swiftly toward it. At last they came alongside.
+
+"Ladies first!" cried the captain of the _Yucatan_.
+
+Shirley and Mabel were the first over the rail, where they stood
+awaiting the arrival of the others.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick were the last to go aboard, and no
+sooner were the refugees all on deck than the big vessel resumed her
+course. The captain motioned them to his cabin.
+
+The ship upon which they now found themselves proved to be the
+_Reliance_, with a cargo of freight from New Orleans for Colon.
+
+This the captain explained when he learned where the erstwhile refugees
+were bound.
+
+"We can't offer you the same accommodations you had aboard the
+_Yucatan_," he said, "but you are welcome to the best we have."
+
+"And we are indeed glad to get it, captain," Shirley spoke up.
+
+"No doubt, no doubt," smiled the captain. "All night in an open boat is
+no pleasure trip, even if this is the month of June," and he ordered
+them assigned quarters forward.
+
+While by no means as large and pretentious as those on the _Yucatan_,
+the cabins were nevertheless clean and comfortable.
+
+"We can thank our stars that we were fortunate enough to be picked up so
+soon," declared Dick.
+
+"What can have become of the other boats?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Probably reached the Cuban shore," replied Colonel Ashton. "We are
+doubtless the only ones that lost our course. The others more than
+likely stuck close together."
+
+"I hope they are all safe," declared Shirley.
+
+"I am sure they are," returned her father.
+
+"Now," said Colonel Ashton, "the thing to be considered is, what to do
+when we reach Colon. Shall we take another steamer and continue our
+course, or shall we turn about and go home?"
+
+"We don't want to go home, Dad," exclaimed Shirley. "You won't give up
+the trip to San Francisco, will you?"
+
+"No, I think not," was the reply. "We can replenish our wardrobes in
+Colon sufficiently to get to Frisco, and we can do the rest of our
+buying there. No, we shall go on."
+
+The girls clapped their hands in delight. Both had feared that the
+disaster might put an untimely end to their summer vacation.
+
+"What do you suppose the Germans intend doing with the _Yucatan_?" asked
+Dick.
+
+"Well, you heard the captain speak of a naval base on the coast of Cuba.
+They probably will run in there, put some big guns aboard and start out
+on a privateering cruise. There have been a couple of such German
+raiders, and they did considerable damage to British merchant ships
+before they were chased to the safety of internment in Newport News."
+
+"I guess that is about what they plan to do," agreed Dick. "I'll surely
+have one experience of which to write when I get back to work."
+
+An hour later the party was gathered on deck, when the captain of the
+_Yucatan_ approached.
+
+"The first thing I shall do is to report this to General Fullaway, at
+Colon," he declared.
+
+"General Fullaway!" exclaimed Mr. Willing. "You don't mean General Hugh
+Fullaway?"
+
+"The same," replied the captain. "Do you know him?"
+
+"Well, rather," replied Mr. Willing. "We were schoolmates years ago, and
+have been close friends since. He comes from my home town. I shall look
+him up. But I didn't know he was in command in Colon."
+
+"He has only been recently put in command," was the reply. "I too know
+him well."
+
+The _Reliance_ proved to be a very slow vessel, and it was days before
+the city of Colon was sighted.
+
+At the entrance to the Panama Canal, Colon is a very picturesque city.
+Since work on the canal was begun, bringing thousands of Americans to
+the country, it has been more or less metropolitan in character, at the
+same time retaining its South American atmosphere.
+
+Shirley and Mabel looked about with wonder as they made their way
+through the dirty narrow streets toward the hotel. This, however, they
+found to be strictly up to date in all respects, and they were soon
+installed in comfortable quarters.
+
+Several hours later, Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton left the hotel,
+announcing that they were going to pay their respects to General
+Fullaway. They were back several hours later and informed Shirley, Mabel
+and Dick that they were to dine with the general in his quarters that
+night.
+
+The girls were naturally excited at this prospect, and spent most of the
+day in the purchase of suitable garments. Dick, as well as Mr. Willing
+and Colonel Ashton, also purchased more clothing to take the place of
+what had been lost when they were set adrift from the _Yucatan_.
+
+General Fullaway had already heard the story from the captain of the
+_Yucatan_, but supper over, he desired to hear it once more from his
+guests.
+
+Mr. Willing related their first meeting with the German commander, who
+had introduced himself as Henry Bristow when they had first met. He told
+of the experience aboard the _Yucatan_ while the vessel was tied up at
+Jacksonville.
+
+"You did wrong not to let the men take him, no matter who they were,"
+was General Fullaway's verdict.
+
+"I realize that now," said Mr. Willing, "but who could have suspected
+such a gigantic plot?"
+
+"It was a gigantic plot," agreed the general, "and was carried out
+excellently. It must have been well planned."
+
+"Mr. Bristow warned us not to come to Colon, general," spoke up Shirley.
+
+"He did?" exclaimed the general in surprise. "And why, pray?"
+
+"Well, he said it wasn't safe," replied Shirley.
+
+"Hm-m-m," muttered the general, with a smile. "And did he tell you why?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"I thought not," laughed the general.
+
+"But he told me, general," put in Mabel.
+
+The others looked at the girl in surprise, but Mabel bore up steadily
+under their scrutiny.
+
+"What do you mean, Mabel?" demanded Colonel Ashton.
+
+"You remember when he took me aside just before we were set adrift,
+father?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Yes, of course."
+
+"That's when he told me, but it seemed so absurd and impossible that I
+didn't repeat it."
+
+"What was it, Miss Ashton?" asked General Fullaway. "Will you tell us?"
+
+"He said that Colon was in danger," replied Mabel, and she repeated the
+conversation she had had with Captain Von Blusen aboard the _Yucatan_.
+
+The others listened to her with breathless interest, and there were
+exclamations of surprise when she concluded.
+
+"Absurd," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"Impossible," Colonel Ashton agreed.
+
+"It would seem so, on the face of it," said General Fullaway, "and I
+suppose it is. It is true, there are two Japanese warships off the
+entrance to the Canal. They have not been allowed to pass through
+because several German merchant vessels are here. As soon as they have
+cleared, of course we shall permit the Japs to go through."
+
+"And have the Japs objected to the delay?" asked Mr. Willing.
+
+"They have indeed. They have demanded permission to pass, which has been
+refused. That was yesterday. But this tale of yours," the general turned
+to Mabel, "is incredible. I suppose the German commander told it to you
+to frighten you."
+
+"I suppose that was his reason," Mabel agreed.
+
+At this moment an orderly entered the room and gave a message to General
+Fullaway. The latter read it, and then turned to Mabel again.
+
+"It seems that your warning may bear fruit, after all," he said quietly.
+
+"Why, sir?" asked the girl eagerly.
+
+"Why, this message I have here," said the general, tapping the paper
+with his finger, "is, or seems to be at least, a communication from the
+Japanese commander. He says if his ships are not allowed to pass through
+the canal to-morrow, he will destroy the city of Colon!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.--A WAR SCARE.
+
+
+An air of intense anticipation pervaded the General's dining room.
+
+Shirley finally broke the silence.
+
+"And will you give them permission, general?" she asked.
+
+"Not without such instructions from Washington," was the reply. "My
+duties are clearly defined. The Japanese ships cannot pass through the
+canal while German merchantmen are in Colon harbor. However, I am not at
+all sure the message is from the Japs."
+
+"You mean--the _Yucatan_," asked Dick.
+
+General Fullaway nodded.
+
+"I wouldn't be at all surprised," he replied quietly. "I shall
+communicate with Washington at once, repeating the story you have told
+me."
+
+He left the room, and returned in a few moments with a slip of paper
+which he gave to the officer who had brought the message.
+
+"I should have a reply in a couple of hours," he told the others. "Would
+you care to wait and hear the result?"
+
+"Indeed we would," declared Shirley.
+
+It was almost three hours later before the reply came. General Fullaway
+read the message in silence, then turned to the others.
+
+"Your story must be true, Miss Ashton," he said. "Washington seems to
+have had some rumor of it. The cruiser _Tennessee_, now stationed here,
+has been ordered to take the _Yucatan_ in charge."
+
+"Will there be a battle?" demanded Mabel anxiously.
+
+"I do not think so. The _Yucatan_, armed though she probably is by this
+time, would hardly be a match for the _Tennessee_."
+
+"I wish we could go with her," declared Shirley.
+
+"So do I," agreed Dick.
+
+General Fullaway was silent for some moments, and then he said:
+
+"Perhaps it can be done. There will be no danger. I don't believe
+Captain Ainslee would object. The _Tennessee_ will not sail before
+morning. I shall communicate with the captain immediately, and let you
+know before morning. He will probably wish to hear your story anyhow."
+
+Shirley, Mabel and the others returned to the hotel, where they prepared
+for bed. Mr. Willing was just about to retire when there was a knock at
+the door. Opening it, a bellboy passed him a message. It was from
+General Fullaway and said that Captain Ainslee would expect the Willing
+party aboard the _Tennessee_ by 8 o'clock in the morning.
+
+Mr. Willing called this piece of news to Dick and the two girls, and all
+were greatly pleased.
+
+"Just think of taking a trip on a warship!" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+All were about early the next morning and were soon at the pier, where
+they found that a cutter from the _Tennessee_ had been sent to meet
+them. Captain Ainslee himself greeted them as they made their way over
+the side of the cruiser, and conducted them to his cabin.
+
+Here he left them for a few minutes while he gave orders to get the ship
+under way. Directly it began to move slowly through the waters of the
+harbor, Captain Ainslee returned to the others.
+
+"Now," he said to Mabel, "I should be glad to hear your story at first
+hand."
+
+Mabel repeated it and the captain listened attentively.
+
+"To tell the truth," he said, "this may be more serious than I supposed.
+If Germany is bent upon drawing the United States into the war, the
+_Yucatan_ may not surrender so easily."
+
+"You don't mean she is likely to fight?" asked Mr. Willing in some
+alarm.
+
+"That's just what I mean," was the reply.
+
+And Captain Ainslee proved a good prophet.
+
+It was well after noon when a cry from the lookout brought all to deck.
+
+"Steamer off the port bow!" it came.
+
+The two girls rushed to the deck with the others. The ships were still
+too far apart for those aboard the cruiser to make out the other
+plainly, and the wireless was immediately put in action.
+
+"German converted cruiser _Kaiserin_!" came the reply to Captain
+Ainslee's message.
+
+"I desire to come aboard you," was the message flashed back. "Heave to!"
+
+The vessels drew nearer together, until at last Captain Ainslee knew the
+other vessel was in range of the _Tennessee's_ big guns.
+
+"I was afraid he would run," he explained. "Now I shall make my demand
+for surrender. It's the _Yucatan_ as you can see."
+
+The wireless was again put to working, and a demand made upon the German
+to surrender.
+
+"What for?" came the question.
+
+"Theft of United States vessel and threatening destruction of Colon,"
+was the reply flashed back.
+
+Captain Von Blusen must have realized that the game was up. The
+_Yucatan_ was brought quickly about and turned to run.
+
+"Clear for action!" came the command aboard the _Tennessee_.
+
+Shirley, Mabel and the others of the party found themselves hurried back
+into the Captain's private cabin. There, through the port-hole, they
+watched the preparations for battle.
+
+The girls were greatly interested, and in spite of the fact that they
+knew they were in danger, they did not lose their coolness nor their
+courage.
+
+Realizing that the passenger ship was probably faster than the cruiser,
+Captain Ainslee wasted no further time. The great forward turret gun
+spoke with a roar, and Shirley and Mabel cried out at the terrific
+noise.
+
+They could watch the progress of the big shell as it sped toward the
+_Yucatan_, where it kicked up the water but a few yards to port. Again
+and again the big gun spoke, and then there was a cheer from the crew as
+a shell struck home.
+
+Twice more the _Yucatan_ was hit, and, while not in a vital spot, her
+speed was suddenly reduced. The _Tennessee_ dashed on.
+
+Then came the first shot from the enemy. The spray flew high beside the
+cruiser as a shell struck the water to larboard. Before she could fire
+again, another shell from the _Tennessee's_ forward turret gun crashed
+aboard her.
+
+Then a white flag was run up the _Yucatan's_ masthead.
+
+The firing aboard the _Tennessee_ ceased, and the cruiser bore down on
+the enemy.
+
+Boats were hurriedly lowered, manned and darted across the water to take
+charge of the _Yucatan_. Half an hour later one of them returned bearing
+the German commander and his officers. They were conducted to the
+captain's cabin immediately.
+
+Henry Bristow--now Captain Von Blusen--at first did not see the members
+of the Willing party in the cabin, and he faced Captain Ainslee angrily.
+
+"What is the meaning of this outrage?" he demanded.
+
+Captain Ainslee smiled.
+
+"Come, come, captain," he said. "Why this air of wounded dignity? Surely
+you won't attempt to deny that you stole the _Yucatan_?"
+
+"Of course I deny it," was the reply.
+
+"And I suppose you will also deny sending a message to the commandant at
+Colon, threatening to blow up the city?"
+
+"That is absurd," was the reply.
+
+Captain Ainslee motioned to Mabel, and she stepped forward.
+
+"Do you recognize this young lady, captain?" demanded the commander of
+the _Tennessee_.
+
+As the other's eyes rested upon Mabel, he stepped back in surprise and a
+look of genuine alarm passed over his face. Then it grew dark. He was
+very angry.
+
+"So," he exclaimed, "this is the way you show your sympathy for Germany,
+eh?"
+
+"What is Germany to me?" demanded Mabel hotly. "I'm no German."
+
+"But you said--"
+
+"I said that because I was angry at the time. You have made trouble
+enough for us. I'm glad you have been captured."
+
+"Further denial is useless, captain," declared Captain Ainslee. "I don't
+believe you will dispute the young lady's words."
+
+Von Blusen turned away angrily, and his gaze rested on Dick and the
+others for the first time.
+
+"I see you are all here," he said. Then to Dick, "And I have not
+forgotten that I have a debt to settle with you."
+
+He stepped quickly across the cabin and before the others were aware of
+what he intended to do, he struck Dick sharply across the face with the
+back of his hand.
+
+Dick was on his feet in an instant and would have leaped upon his
+assailant had not the others stayed him.
+
+"Captain!" cried the commander of the _Tennessee_, "you forget yourself!
+If that is the way you Germans conduct yourselves no wonder the whole
+world is against you. Another move like that and I'll have you put in
+irons!"
+
+The German captain drew back but said nothing.
+
+"Now," continued Captain Ainslee, "I would like to know the meaning of
+this affair you have been mixed up in. Is Germany seeking war with the
+United States?"
+
+"Why not?" was the reply. "The United States has been against us, why
+shouldn't we be against her?"
+
+"It's your own evil consciences that make you think that," replied
+Captain Ainslee. "The United States has been strictly neutral in this
+war. But an accounting for this will be demanded of the Kaiser."
+
+"And he'll give it," thundered the captain, striking the table with his
+fist. "He'll give it!"
+
+"Maybe he will, but he'll be sorry," declared Shirley, who could keep
+quiet no longer. "Uncle Sam will stand no foolishness from the Kaiser."
+
+Captain Von Blusen smiled at her scornfully.
+
+"We shall come over here some day and take the United States," he said.
+
+"You'll be surprised when you try it," said Shirley angrily.
+
+"Shirley!" exclaimed Mr. Willing. "Keep quiet!"
+
+"I don't care," cried Shirley. "Anybody knows Uncle Sam can whip
+Germany, and all the rest of them, too, for that matter."
+
+Again Mr. Willing would have enjoined the girl to silence, but Captain
+Ainslee stayed him with uplifted hand.
+
+"Let her alone," he chuckled. "That is the spirit I like to see!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.--ABOARD THE YUCATAN.
+
+
+The _Tennessee_ returned immediately to Colon, followed by the
+_Yucatan_, now manned by a crew of American sailors. The run was made
+quickly, and darkness had just descended when the ships came to anchor
+and the Willing party made their way ashore and returned to their hotel.
+
+Captain Von Blusen and the members of his crew were immediately turned
+over to the Canal Zone authorities, pending orders from Washington.
+
+What was the surprise of Shirley and the others, upon reaching the
+hotel, to find there others of the passengers who had been set adrift
+when the _Yucatan_ was captured by the German conspirators. They greeted
+each other warmly.
+
+"We were picked up by a steamer and just reached here this afternoon,"
+one of the women passengers explained to Shirley and Mabel. "We had
+about given you up for lost. The rest of us are all here."
+
+"And so is the _Yucatan_," replied Shirley.
+
+In response to exclamations of astonishment, she related the story of
+the recapture of the vessel.
+
+"Then we shall be allowed to continue our trip, I suppose," remarked one
+of the passengers.
+
+"Unless the government decides to hold on to the steamer," said another.
+
+But the government did not, and the following day the full crew of the
+_Yucatan_ was once more aboard the vessel, and it was announced that she
+would resume her journey the following morning.
+
+The day was spent by most of the passengers viewing the sights of
+interest in the canal zone and in the city of Colon proper.
+
+A few words concerning the Panama Canal will not be amiss here.
+
+The canal was opened to smaller vessels on August 5, 1914, but the
+official opening did not take place until much later, being attended
+with elaborate ceremonies.
+
+The canal is about fifty miles in length from deep water in the
+Caribbean Sea to deep water in the Pacific Ocean. It ranges in width
+from 300 to 1,000 feet with an average bottom width of almost 700 feet.
+The Gatun dam along its crest is 8,000 feet long.
+
+The construction of the canal is considered one of the greatest feats of
+engineering of all time and was accomplished at a tremendous cost. The
+land was secured by treaty from Colombia at great expense and resulted
+in considerable trouble between the United States and the South American
+republic.
+
+It is provided by treaties that the canal shall be open to the vessels
+of all nations, merchantmen, or ships of war, in times of war as well in
+times of peace; but strict rules of neutrality have been provided for
+the passage of war vessels.
+
+All this Mr. Willing explained to the others during the day. With the
+coming of night, the passengers began to go aboard the _Yucatan_ for the
+ship was to sail at an early hour and it was deemed advisable to be
+aboard the night before.
+
+Therefore, when Shirley and Mabel arose and went on deck, the _Yucatan_
+already had started its passage through the canal. The girls stood upon
+the upper deck aft and looked about with interest; but after an hour of
+this they grew tired and went down to breakfast.
+
+The passage of the canal would require about ten hours and Shirley
+remarked to Mabel that she would be glad when they were on the Pacific
+and sailing up the coast.
+
+"And so will I," agreed Mabel. "Of course it is nice to see all these
+things, but they don't interest me a whole lot."
+
+"I feel the same way. To tell the truth I shall be glad to get to San
+Francisco. From what I have heard, the Exposition must be beautiful."
+
+"Indeed it must. By the way, I wonder what will be done with Henry
+Bristow--I mean Captain Von Blusen?"
+
+"I don't know," replied Shirley. "However, I suppose he will be taken to
+Washington."
+
+"He seemed a very nice young man. I wouldn't have thought he was a
+German."
+
+"Well, I suppose there are nice Germans as well as any other kind,"
+replied Shirley with a laugh. "But I wonder why they took such chances?"
+
+"Orders, I reckon. The Germans have shown great daring and bravery in
+this war."
+
+"I should say they have. I wonder if the United States will be drawn
+into the war."
+
+"My goodness gracious! I hope not! Why, Daddy might have to go."
+
+"Oh I guess not," laughed Shirley. "He is too old for that, except as a
+last resort."
+
+"But Dick might have to go."
+
+"That's so; but I don't think there will be any war between the United
+States and Germany. We could whip them easily."
+
+"I suppose the Germans think they could whip us just as well as we
+believe we can whip them."
+
+"But I know we can whip them."
+
+"Well, I'm not so sure. But one thing is certain, we won't have to go to
+war. That's the advantage of being a girl."
+
+"Oh I don't know," said Shirley, "I believe I would like to go."
+
+"Not for me," declared Mabel. "Still, I might be willing to go as a Red
+Cross nurse."
+
+"That's what I meant," replied Shirley.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick now joined them, and they discussed
+recent happenings.
+
+"You don't suppose there is any chance of Von Blusen getting away, sir?"
+asked Dick of Mr. Willing.
+
+Mr. Willing looked at him and smiled.
+
+"Afraid he'll come after you?" he asked.
+
+"No, not exactly sir," replied Dick. "I just wondered, that's all."
+
+"I don't think there is. I'm sure I don't want to be on the same ship
+with him again. He'll make mischief wherever he is."
+
+But Mr. Willing was to be disappointed in this wish, as it turned out
+later.
+
+Noon came and passed and still the big steamship was in the canal; but
+with the coming of the supper hour the Pacific ocean became visible in
+the distance.
+
+It was the first time that Dick, Shirley or Mabel had seen the Pacific,
+and they stared ahead for a long time.
+
+"I don't see as it looks any different from the Atlantic," declared
+Shirley.
+
+"What did you expect?" asked Mabel. "Think you were going to see the
+name on it?"
+
+"Not exactly. I don't know just what I expected, but I thought it would
+look different."
+
+The others laughed.
+
+"It might feel a little different in case a big storm came up," said
+Dick.
+
+"I don't want to be in a storm on any water," declared Shirley with
+decision.
+
+"I should say not," Mabel agreed. "A storm is bad enough with lots of
+dry land under your feet."
+
+The sun was just disappearing below the horizon when the _Yucatan_ at
+last stuck her nose into the waters of the Pacific ocean.
+
+"Well, here we are in the Pacific at last," said Colonel Ashton. "Do you
+feel any difference, Shirley?"
+
+"Not a bit," replied the girl with a smile.
+
+Mr. Willing looked at the sky.
+
+"I guess there will be no storm on this trip," he said.
+
+Half an hour later all went below to supper.
+
+They had almost finished a delightful meal when their attention was
+attracted by the sound of a scuffle on deck. All rushed hastily up.
+
+There, struggling with a knot of sailors, was a single man. His back was
+turned to the girls as they made their way on deck, and at first they
+did not recognize him.
+
+He was giving a good account of himself, striking out with such force
+and skill as gave evidence of much training in the use of his fists; but
+the sailors were too many for him, and he was at last overpowered and
+thrown to the deck.
+
+Rude hands jerked him to his feet and it was then that Shirley and Mabel
+obtained their first look at his face.
+
+Shirley started back with a cry of utter amazement. Then a name leaped
+to her lips, and was repeated by all the passengers within sight.
+
+"Captain Von Blusen!"
+
+"How in the world did he get here?" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"I can't imagine," declared Mabel, staring with open mouth.
+
+Captain Anderson of the _Yucatan_ now hastened down from the bridge and
+confronted the prisoner.
+
+"What are you doing on my ship and how did you get here?" he demanded
+angrily.
+
+Captain Von Blusen smiled at him.
+
+"I just escaped, that's all," he replied. "You treated me so well before
+that I thought I would take passage with you. Besides it was the least
+likely place I would be looked for."
+
+"But how did you escape?" demanded the captain.
+
+"That would be telling," was the reply, and the young man smiled
+tantalizingly. "However, it will do no harm to say that I have good
+friends in Colon."
+
+"Well, I'll guarantee you won't do any more harm aboard my ship,"
+declared the captain angrily.
+
+He turned to his first officer. "Have him put in irons!"
+
+"Very good, sir," replied the first officer, and advanced toward the
+prisoner.
+
+"One moment," said the latter drawing himself up. "I did not come here
+with any ill motive," still addressing the captain, "and I desire to
+give my parole."
+
+"And what good is your parole?" demanded Captain Anderson.
+
+"One gentleman is always ready to accept the word of another gentleman,"
+said Von Blusen slowly. "I give my word to make no attempt to escape."
+
+The captain hesitated, then waved an arm expressively.
+
+"Very well," he said. "Your parole is accepted."
+
+He returned to the bridge, and the sailors released Von Blusen. The
+latter walked over to where the Willing party were gathered.
+
+"Well, here I am again," he said with a smile.
+
+"I see you are," replied Mabel, and deliberately turned her back on him.
+
+The young man's face became red. He turned on his heel and walked off
+without another word.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.--ASHORE IN COSTA RICA.
+
+
+The steamship _Yucatan_ was swinging slowly into a little harbor. Land,
+visible for the first time since leaving the Panama Canal, was now close
+at hand.
+
+"What place is this?" asked Shirley of Dick, who stood forward gazing
+over the rail by her side.
+
+Dick consulted his guide book, remarking: "I can't remember the name of
+these outlandish places."
+
+"It's Punta Arenas," he said at last, looking up. "Costa Rica, you
+know," he added in explanation.
+
+"And what are we putting in here for?"
+
+"You'll have to ask the captain about that," replied Dick. "It's too
+deep for me."
+
+The vessel came to anchor some distance from shore. It was announced
+that the ship would lay there for several hours, and the captain gave
+notice that those desiring to land would be taken off in the small
+boats.
+
+Shirley immediately announced her intention of being one of the landing
+party, and loath to let the girl go alone, Mr. Willing and the others
+also determined to go ashore.
+
+Half an hour later found them strolling about the dirty looking narrow
+streets of the little town.
+
+Poorly-dressed natives, men, women and children, eyed them queerly as
+they walked along, the latter following them for blocks begging for
+money. Shirley would have given one of the children a piece of silver
+but for the first officer of the ship, who stayed her.
+
+"Give money to one of them and the rest will follow you forever," he
+explained.
+
+"But they look so dirty and hungry," protested Shirley.
+
+"Perhaps they are," was the officer's reply, "but take no chances with
+them."
+
+Shirley followed his advice, as did the others of the party, and the
+dirty native children soon let them alone. When the party started back,
+however, the children trailed them once more, begging piteously for
+money.
+
+At the wharf Shirley, unheeding the advice of the officer, turned and
+tossed a silver quarter toward them.
+
+Instantly the place became a scene of wild confusion. There was a
+scramble as boys and girls dived headlong for the piece of silver. Loud
+cries filled the air.
+
+A little girl raised up with the piece of money clutched tightly in her
+hand and started to run. But the others were upon her in an instant, and
+threw her to the ground, striking and clawing as they tried to take the
+quarter away from her.
+
+Shirley looked at the disorder she had caused in amazement.
+
+"My goodness!" she exclaimed. "I had no idea they were so savage."
+
+She watched the struggle.
+
+Now a boy had secured the quarter and tried to escape with it. But he
+fared no better than had the girl, and soon was beneath the pile of
+struggling bodies. The children fought savagely, biting, screaming,
+kicking and scratching.
+
+The party from the steamship watched with interest.
+
+"See what you did, Shirley," cried Mabel. "Just watch them fight."
+
+"I won't do it again," declared Shirley. "Some of them will be badly
+hurt."
+
+At this moment a newcomer appeared upon the scene. He walked slowly, and
+plainly was in no particular hurry. Shirley glanced at him curiously.
+
+He was attired in a dark blue uniform. A revolver and sword hung at his
+side. He was short but stout, and a black mustache curled fiercely
+upward.
+
+He was just what Shirley took him to be, an officer of the Costa Rican
+army.
+
+He advanced into the mass of struggling children and pushed the
+combatants aside without ceremony. As they looked up and perceived him,
+the fighters turned and fled.
+
+The sight was indeed comical and Shirley and all the others laughed long
+and loud.
+
+One little boy, before taking to his heels, stooped quickly and picked
+up the quarter, which had rolled a short distance away. But even as he
+started to run, the native officer reached out a hand and caught him by
+the shoulder.
+
+In vain did the boy struggle to free himself, biting and kicking. He was
+no match for the man, and at last he dropped the piece of silver. The
+officer then released him and looked around.
+
+While the Americans still watched him he stooped, picked up the quarter,
+turned it over in his hand once or twice, spun it in the air, caught it
+as it came down and thrust it in his pocket. Then, without a glance to
+right or left, he turned and stalked away.
+
+"There!" exclaimed the ship's officer, "you can see what has happened to
+your quarter. It's what happens to most of those thrown to the children
+by tourists."
+
+"It's an outrage!" declared Shirley. "I wouldn't have given him
+anything. Isn't there something we can do about it?"
+
+"Not a thing," was the reply. "It is legitimate graft. But watch, now,
+you'll see what the little folks do."
+
+As the native officer continued to swagger along, from behind houses and
+from down streets a hail of rocks and stones dropped upon him. The
+children, divided in the fight for the quarter, had joined forces
+against this common enemy and were pelting him vigorously.
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Mabel. "I am glad of it. I hope they hurt him, the big
+coward."
+
+The native officer stopped and glared around angrily at his small
+assailants for a moment, while the rocks and stones fell on him faster
+than before. One struck him in the face. This was too much for his
+courage. He took to his heels, and with the mob of children in close
+pursuit, was soon lost to sight.
+
+"I hope they get him," declared Shirley vehemently.
+
+"They won't, though," replied the officer of the _Yucatan_. "If he were
+to turn on them they'd stop and, from a safe place, continue their
+bombardment. He'll find shelter some place."
+
+Before they could return to the launch which would take them back to the
+ship, the swarm of children again came into view, rushing for them.
+
+"Quick!" cried the officer, "into the boat. They'll run right over us.
+They've caught a sight of silver and they won't let us alone until we
+give them some, or until we are out of reach."
+
+He hustled the others toward the small boat at a run, and succeeded in
+getting them in before the native children reached the water's edge.
+Then the boat put off for the ship.
+
+A cry of anger went up from the shore.
+
+"Duck!" cried the officer, himself taking his place in the stern and
+grasping the rudder.
+
+His warning came not a moment too soon.
+
+A shower of missiles, hurled with unerring aim, fell upon the little
+craft. Disappointed in their quest, the native children were now bent on
+revenge.
+
+As fast as they could pick them up and throw, rocks went skimming across
+the water, falling on both sides, and in front and behind the boat.
+Several dropped aboard.
+
+One, in falling, just skimmed the back of Shirley's head as she stooped
+over in the boat. Dick immediately squeezed in behind her, and another,
+thrown with unerring aim, carried away his hat. Fortunately however,
+this broke the force of the stone, and it fell to the bottom of the boat
+without doing any further damage.
+
+The boat was drawing out of danger now, and the occupants sat up again
+and drew breaths of relief. Only the stronger of the tots could now
+reach them with their missiles, and the distance was too great for
+accurate throwing, so those in the boats felt perfectly safe.
+
+Upon the shore the crowd of native boys and girls gave vent to cries of
+rage at thus being deprived of their revenge. They danced about
+excitedly and waved their hands in angry gestures.
+
+At this juncture another native officer hove in sight, and the crowd
+turned on him. Again rocks, stones and other weapons came into play as
+the children turned upon him to vent their wrath. For a moment the
+officer seemed on the point of charging into the crowd, then changed his
+mind, wheeled on his heel and took to flight. The young ones gave chase,
+their shouts and cries carrying across the water to the occupants of the
+boat.
+
+"Well!" exclaimed Shirley, now that they were out of harm's way at last,
+"they are vicious little things, aren't they?"
+
+"Rather," replied the officer dryly. "If a person fell into their hands
+it would go hard with him."
+
+"But what makes them so fierce?" asked Mabel, greatly interested.
+
+"That's hard to say. However, it probably is because they are half
+starved and look upon the whole world as a common foe. More than one
+tourist has received rough treatment at their hands."
+
+"And will they attack any one like that?" asked Dick.
+
+"Not unless he shows money," was the reply. "That is the remarkable part
+about it. No matter how much a man may have in his pocket they will not
+attack him unless they catch sight of silver or gold. One glimpse of it,
+however, seems to drive them wild."
+
+The officer gave his attention to the boat for a moment, and then
+continued:
+
+"Another thing, as you have just observed. They will fight each other,
+but let a third party interfere and they will all jump on him."
+
+"Just like a quarrel between a man and his wife, eh?" asked Mr. Willing
+with a smile.
+
+"Exactly. They're a queer lot, and you will find them about the same in
+all Central and South American countries."
+
+The small boat now rubbed gently against the side of the _Yucatan_ and
+the passengers scrambled up the ladder to the deck.
+
+"We were lucky to get out of that with whole skins," declared Shirley,
+when all once more stood on deck.
+
+"I should say we were," agreed Mabel.
+
+"Perhaps this experience will teach you to heed the advice of others,
+daughter," said Mr. Willing dryly.
+
+"I won't try and play the good Samaritan to native children any more,
+Dad," said Shirley smiling.
+
+A long blast from the ship's whistle, followed by the clanking of chains
+as the anchor was drawn in, the vibrations of the engines became
+noticeable, and, with her nose pointed to the open sea, the steamship
+_Yucatan_ resumed her journey.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.--U. S. S. PRAIRIE.
+
+
+"Steamship off the port bow, sir!"
+
+It was the cry of the lookout.
+
+All eyes were turned in the direction indicated. There, showing dimly
+through the gathering darkness, steamed a dark gray shape. Another
+glance from the lookout was enough to convince him of the vessel's
+identity.
+
+"United States cruiser, sir!" came his call.
+
+"Can you make her out?" asked the captain's voice from the bridge.
+
+The lookout was silent for several minutes, and then called back:
+
+"Cruiser _Prairie_, sir."
+
+There was a muttered ejaculation from the captain. Shirley, standing
+near, caught the words:
+
+"Wonder what she's doing in these waters? She was in Bluefields the last
+I heard of her. Must be trouble of some kind or she wouldn't be here."
+
+The two ships exchanged messages, the nature of which were unknown to
+the passengers, however. Both continued on their course.
+
+Morning showed to the passengers the cruiser proceeding ahead of them.
+All day the two ships retained their relative positions and when night
+came on they were unchanged.
+
+When Shirley awoke the following morning the _Yucatan_ was stationary.
+Shirley and Mabel dressed quickly and went on deck. There they found
+that they were in a little harbor. Shirley asked a question of one of
+the other passengers.
+
+"Where are we?"
+
+"Port of Corinto, Nicaragua," was the reply.
+
+At this moment a small boat was just about to be lowered. Shirley and
+Mabel rushed up to the first officer, who was in command of it.
+
+"Can we go with you?" she asked.
+
+The officer hesitated, then: "I see no reason why you cannot," with a
+smile. "Jump in."
+
+The girls obeyed and a few moments later were being rowed toward the
+not-far-distant shore. There the boat drew up at the wharf, and,
+signalling to the girls to accompany him if they so desired, the officer
+leaped lightly ashore and lent them a helping hand. The sailors were
+ordered to await his return.
+
+"Where are you going?" asked Shirley.
+
+"American consulate," was the reply. "There has been some trouble here,
+and Captain Anderson has sent me to find out what it's all about."
+
+At the consulate Shirley and Mabel remained outside, while the first
+officer was closeted with the consul.
+
+"We might as well walk around a bit," Shirley decided. "There is no
+telling how long he may remain there."
+
+Mabel was nothing loath, and they made their way to the street. Here
+they walked along slowly, looking curiously at the native Nicaraguans
+and the queer buildings, all of old Spanish architecture and design.
+
+"None of this for me," was Shirley's decision half an hour later.
+
+"Nor me," agreed Mabel. "I want to live in civilization."
+
+Unconsciously the girls had wandered further from the consulate than
+they realized, and as they were on the point of turning back Mabel
+caught sight of a familiar figure.
+
+"Captain Von Blusen!" she exclaimed, catching Shirley by the arm.
+
+Shirley caught her breath and gazed in the direction Mabel pointed.
+
+It was true. There, slinking along furtively, was the gallant captain
+and he was walking along at a rapid rate.
+
+"Wonder where he is going and why he's in such a hurry?" asked Mabel.
+
+"I don't know," returned Shirley, "but I'll warrant he is up to no
+good."
+
+"But he has given his parole to make no attempt to escape."
+
+"I don't imagine he'll set much store by that if he sees a good
+opportunity to get away."
+
+Shirley would have continued her way back, but Mabel said:
+
+"Wait a moment, Shirley. Perhaps, by following him a bit, we may learn
+something useful. What do you say?"
+
+For a moment Shirley hesitated, but for a moment only.
+
+"Perhaps we can," she said then. "There can be no danger if we keep out
+of sight. Come on."
+
+The German was now some distance ahead of them, and taking care to avoid
+being seen should he turn suddenly, the girls followed him.
+
+But apparently Captain Von Blusen had no idea that he would be followed.
+He strode rapidly along and not once did he turn his head.
+
+"He must have been here before," Shirley decided. "He seems to know
+where he is going."
+
+For another ten minutes they followed him, and then Shirley halted.
+
+"I am afraid we had better go back," she said. "We may get lost."
+
+"Oh I guess not," declared Mabel. "And besides we have plenty of time.
+The ship will probably stay here most of the day. Come on, Shirley."
+
+Shirley allowed herself to be led along.
+
+They had now approached the outskirts of the little town, and the young
+German struck off through a clump of trees. At the edge of these Shirley
+stopped abruptly.
+
+"We won't follow him any further," she said decisively. "It might be
+dangerous."
+
+"I guess you are right," agreed Mabel. "I wish he had stayed where we
+could keep track of him."
+
+"So do I. But he didn't. We had better be getting back."
+
+They turned and started to retrace their footsteps, but even as they did
+so the footsteps of a large body of men came toward them. They were not
+yet in sight, but the men were coming right down the street through
+which the girls must go on their way back.
+
+Mabel looked at Shirley in alarm.
+
+"What shall we do?" she exclaimed.
+
+"We'll just have to put on a bold face and walk right along," declared
+Shirley. "Come."
+
+She started out slowly, Mabel walking by her side.
+
+A moment later there appeared ahead of them, advancing at a rapid march,
+a body of armed men. Shirley and Mabel shrank close to the side of the
+street to give the marchers as much room as possible.
+
+At first it seemed the girls would get by without trouble, for the first
+troop had passed them, paying no attention to their presence.
+
+But as the officer in command of the troop came abreast of them, a
+command suddenly rang out:
+
+"Halt!"
+
+The troop stopped abruptly, and grounded their arms. Shirley and Mabel
+also paused, as they believed the words were meant for them. Then,
+seeing the soldiers pause, they moved on again. But again came the cry
+of "Halt."
+
+The girls halted in their tracks.
+
+The commander, whom they perceived was a man well along toward seventy,
+but who nevertheless walked perfectly erect and who looked very imposing
+in his bright military uniform, advanced toward them.
+
+"What are you young ladies doing here?" he asked courteously, in
+English.
+
+"We were just walking about the city, sir," replied Shirley, her voice
+trembling somewhat in spite of the efforts she made to keep it steady.
+
+"Where do you come from?"
+
+"Steamship in the harbor, sir."
+
+"You mean the cruiser?"
+
+"No, sir," replied Mabel. "The passenger steamer, sir."
+
+"H-m-mm-m," muttered the officer.
+
+Before he could speak further there came, from the town, the sound of
+more rapidly approaching footsteps.
+
+"Come with me," cried the Nicaraguan officer quickly, "if you go on you
+will be hurt. Come quickly."
+
+He urged his men on with a sharp command.
+
+Shirley and Mabel hung back.
+
+"Quick!" cried the general again. "There will be fighting here in a few
+minutes, and if you are in the way you are likely to be hurt."
+
+A squad of men, at his command, surrounded the two girls, and they were
+forced to go along whether or no.
+
+The troop dashed quickly for the shelter of the woods in which the girls
+had seen Captain Von Blusen disappear a few moments before.
+
+Once in the shelter of the trees, the officer in command gave several
+sharp orders, and the troop divided into three parts. Then they flitted
+rapidly further in among the trees.
+
+Shirley and Mabel, now badly frightened, found themselves with the
+commanding officer's section. They could see that they were bearing off
+to the right and several times would have spoken, but the officer
+silenced them with a gesture.
+
+"I shall answer your questions later," he said once.
+
+Although the girls did not know just what was the matter, they realized
+that the Nicaraguans were fleeing from another, and, supposedly, a
+larger body of men.
+
+"I hope they overtake us. I want to get back to Dad," cried Mabel.
+
+"And I hope they don't," exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"Why, Shirley!"
+
+"I mean it. If they do overtake us it may mean a battle, and then we
+would be in danger. As long as we keep away from them we are safe.
+Besides, Dad will find us some way. Our fathers and Dick won't permit us
+to be carried off."
+
+"I reckon you are right, Shirley," Mabel agreed finally. "Besides, there
+is an American cruiser near. They'll have the bluejackets out searching
+for us."
+
+"And they will find us, too," declared Mabel.
+
+"I hope they hurry up and come," exclaimed Shirley. "I'm badly
+frightened, but I don't want to show it. The thing to do is to make the
+officer think we are not a bit scared."
+
+"We'll try," said Mabel calmly.
+
+For an hour they continued on their way, and then suddenly the force
+began to increase as men appeared from other directions and joined the
+main body.
+
+Although the girls did not know it, these were the same men who had
+scattered at the first sign of pursuit. They had made a detour to throw
+the pursuers off the track.
+
+At last the commander called a halt. Then he approached the two girls.
+
+"I guess I had better explain why I insisted on your coming with us," he
+said with a pleasant smile.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.--AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE.
+
+
+"If you please," said Shirley.
+
+The officer gazed at both girls admiringly.
+
+"You take it coolly enough," he declared. "Many in your places would be
+badly frightened."
+
+"Surely there is nothing to be afraid of," said Mabel, determined to
+show as bold a front as possible.
+
+"No," said the officer, "there isn't." He looked at them closely. "I
+wonder if either of you happen to know who I am?" he asked.
+
+Shirley shook her head negatively.
+
+"I'm sure I don't," said Mabel.
+
+"Then I must introduce myself," was the reply. "I am General Pedro
+Garcia, President of the republic of Nicaragua."
+
+Both girls looked at him in the utmost surprise.
+
+"You may well be surprised," said the general, a touch of bitterness in
+his tone, it seemed to Shirley, "and no doubt you are to see the
+President of the country in such a predicament?"
+
+Shirley didn't know much about Nicaragua, but she decided she might as
+well agree with him, as he seemed to expect it.
+
+"Yes, sir," she said.
+
+"And I am surprised to find myself in such a position," said the
+President. "I shall explain. With my men I am fleeing from the
+revolutionists."
+
+"Revolutionists?" echoed Shirley.
+
+"Exactly. I was in Corinto with some of my army for diplomatic purposes.
+While absent from Managua there was an uprising. It seems to have been
+well planned, for it broke out in all parts of the republic at once,
+even here in Corinto."
+
+"I was surprised with my men this morning and was forced to flee. That's
+about all there is to it."
+
+"But why did you bring us with you?" demanded Shirley. "Why didn't you
+allow us to return to our ship."
+
+"Because you might never have reached there," replied the President
+quietly. "You would probably have fallen into the hands of the
+revolutionists. While you are with me you are safe."
+
+There was no doubting the sincerity in the President's voice, and both
+girls unconsciously breathed easier.
+
+"Besides," continued the general, "your presence may help me a bit."
+
+"In what way sir?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Well, there is a United States cruiser in Corinto harbor. When you are
+missed the natural supposition will be that you have fallen into the
+hands of the revolutionists. The U. S. sailors will be sent after you,
+and will be likely to attack my foes."
+
+"I see," said Shirley with a slight smile. "Then you did not save us
+from an altogether unselfish motive."
+
+"My dear young ladies, consider," said the President, "it is better for
+both of us."
+
+"I don't doubt you, sir," replied Shirley; "but just the same I would
+rather be safe aboard our ship."
+
+"And so you shall be, if it is within my power to put you there,"
+declared the President of Nicaragua warmly.
+
+At this moment two of the general's troopers approached, dragging a
+third man between them. Shirley and Mabel fell back a few feet.
+
+"Hello! Who have we here?" demanded President Garcia.
+
+"Prisoner, sir," replied one of the men.
+
+"Release him," said the President. "I shall talk to him myself. Who are
+you, and what are you doing here?" he demanded sharply.
+
+Shirley and Mabel both started at the sound of the prisoner's voice. He
+was none other than Captain von Blusen.
+
+"I'm Captain von Blusen, of the German navy," was the reply. "I have
+been held prisoner aboard an American ship, and have but recently
+escaped. I am seeking Colonel Hernandez."
+
+"Hernandez!" exclaimed President Garcia, stepping back in surprise. "The
+leader of the revolutionists!"
+
+"And may I ask your name, sir?" said Captain von Blusen.
+
+"I," said the general, "am the President of Nicaragua."
+
+The prisoner gave vent to a long whistle and a look of dismay passed
+over his face. It was gone in a moment, however, and he turned to the
+President with a smile.
+
+"I am fortunate in finding you, sir," he said. "I am authorized by my
+government to make you a proposition."
+
+"Well, I shall hear it," said the President.
+
+"I am authorized to offer you a large sum of money for the privilege of
+establishing a German naval base on the Pacific coast of Nicaragua."
+
+"Enough!" cried the general with a wave of his hand. "It shall not be
+done if I can prevent it. Germany indeed. Were I able, I myself should
+draw a sword against her. You will find no German sympathy in these
+parts."
+
+Captain von Blusen bowed his head. He said nothing further on the
+subject.
+
+"What will you do with me?" he asked.
+
+"I shall hold you until the rebels have been put down," was the reply.
+"Then you shall be released. I wouldn't trust you now."
+
+He signalled two of his men and the young German officer was led away
+between them.
+
+At this moment another officer rushed up to the general.
+
+"Our presence has been discovered, sir," he gasped. "The enemy is
+approaching."
+
+Shirley and Mabel now perceived that the President of the Republic of
+Nicaragua, in spite of his advanced years, was a man of action.
+
+He turned rapidly from one to another of his officers, and these dashed
+quickly away. A moment later the few troops began to move, and the girls
+realized that President Garcia had taken some steps to offset the
+advance of the revolutionists.
+
+They found themselves going along with the troops.
+
+"My goodness! I wish we were back on the ship," exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"You don't wish it any more than I do," declared Mabel. "I am more
+frightened than you are. Suppose there should be a battle. What would
+happen to us?"
+
+Shirley shrugged her shoulders.
+
+"You know as much about it as I do," she made answer.
+
+Mabel looked at her in amazement.
+
+"Why, Shirley Willing!" she exclaimed. "Aren't you afraid? I am scared
+half to death."
+
+"I am just as badly frightened as you are," declared Shirley. "I may not
+look it, but I am."
+
+"I don't believe you are frightened at all," said Mabel.
+
+In spite of the seriousness of the situation and her declaration that
+she was badly frightened, Shirley was forced to smile at her friend's
+words.
+
+"Well, perhaps I'm not so awfully scared," she confessed. "I'm anxious
+to see what is going to happen."
+
+"I know what is going to happen," was the reply. "We are going to get
+hurt!"
+
+Mabel broke down and began to cry.
+
+Shirley took her chum gently in her arms, and stroked her hair.
+
+"There, there!" she said. "Stop crying. No one is going to hurt us. You
+are just overwrought, that's all."
+
+"I just know we are going to be shot--and--and killed," sobbed Mabel.
+
+"Nonsense," said Shirley sharply. "Look up now and stop that crying. We
+are perfectly safe. Stop crying."
+
+Mabel looked up suddenly at the sharpness in her chum's tone, but her
+tears soon were dried away. Shirley, in speaking as she had, had done
+the best thing possible. She had realized that it was time for sharp
+words and not for sympathy.
+
+After a march of perhaps a half hour, President Garcia called another
+halt, and then summoned his officers into consultation.
+
+The two girls stood close, but they could not make out what was being
+said. At length the general dismissed his officers with a gesture, and
+as they scattered to their respective posts, the general approached the
+two girls.
+
+"We are going to make a sharp turn to the south here," he said quietly,
+"and then we shall move back and engage the enemy. That will put you
+safely behind us. Now, if I were you, I would bear off slightly to the
+right, and then go straight ahead. In that way you will be out of
+danger. If the firing comes closer to you, make another wide detour,
+turn about and try to make your way back to the ship. But I would not do
+that until after the battle ceases."
+
+"Thank you, sir," said Shirley. "We shall do as you suggest. We thank
+you for your thoughtfulness in keeping us from falling into the hands of
+the revolutionists. May you come through the battle unharmed, and may
+you be successful."
+
+She extended her hand, and the President bent over it gravely.
+
+"I thank you for your good wishes," he said quietly.
+
+Mabel also now advanced and extended her hand, and the President bent
+over it.
+
+"Good luck to you, Mr. President," said Mabel.
+
+"I thank you, too, young lady," said the President simply. "Now heed my
+injunction and betake yourselves to a place of safety. We shall advance
+at once."
+
+Once more he bowed low to them, swung sharply about on his heel and was
+gone. With hoarse commands from the officers, the troops faced to the
+left and marched off.
+
+"I guess we had better be moving, Shirley," said Mabel.
+
+Instead of turning to the right, they went straight back.
+
+"It should be safer here," said Mabel as they hurried along. "The
+revolutionists are liable to advance on the right as well as on the
+left!"
+
+"I wish we could get some place where we could see," declared Shirley.
+
+Mabel stooped in her tracks and gazed at her friend in the utmost
+astonishment.
+
+"Shirley!" she exclaimed. "Surely you don't mean that?"
+
+"Of course I mean it. If we could only find some place where it is
+safe."
+
+Unconsciously the girls had borne off to the left, and now suddenly they
+came upon a clearing in the midst of the woods. And as they glanced
+back, they saw the Nicaraguan government troops advancing across it.
+
+But even as they looked the troops came to a halt, and most of them fell
+to their knees. Shirley looked around quickly. Directly behind her was a
+large tree.
+
+"If we haven't forgotten our tomboy days we'll climb up there and watch
+the battle," she declared.
+
+She led the way, and in spite of her misgivings, Mabel followed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.--THE GIRLS SEE A BATTLE.
+
+
+As Shirley and Mabel, from their shelter among the branches, peered
+across the plain, they saw puffs of smoke issue from the now kneeling
+body of men. Sharp reports came to their ears. The only man still
+standing erect, as they could see plainly, was President Garcia, who,
+with upraised sword, was directing the movement of his men.
+
+A man dropped his rifle and fell to the ground, and Mabel shrieked.
+
+"My goodness!" she exclaimed a moment later. "This is terrible,
+Shirley!"
+
+Shirley's lips were compressed, and for a moment she turned her eyes
+away.
+
+The firing became louder now, and for the first time the girls noticed
+that President Garcia and his men were retreating toward them.
+
+"We had better get down out of here!" exclaimed Mabel. "We may be
+struck."
+
+Shirley agreed, and they were about to descend, when, from behind them,
+came rapid footsteps, indicating the approach of a considerable number
+of men. Shirley and Mabel became silent.
+
+A moment later a score of dark-visaged Nicaraguans, with rifles ready
+for instant use, appeared and took up their position at the edge of the
+little woods, several of them falling flat under the very tree in which
+the two girls were perched.
+
+Mabel uttered an exclamation as the first volley was fired by these
+newcomers. In spite of the fact that she was prepared for it, the sharp
+reports of the weapons had wrung a cry of surprise from her. Shirley,
+more calm, uttered no sound.
+
+The girls could now see that the men beneath them were a part of
+President Garcia's force, for they were shooting over the heads of their
+companions, apparently in an effort to cover the retreat of the main
+body.
+
+The latter now retreated more rapidly and at length joined forces with
+the men beneath the trees. Shirley and Mabel could hear their
+conversation plainly, but as it was carried on in Spanish, they could
+not make out the trend of it.
+
+For perhaps fifteen minutes President Garcia's men held their position,
+firing at the enemy from the shelter of the trees.
+
+The plight of the two girls was much more serious than either realized,
+for a chance bullet was likely to hit one of them at any moment. And yet
+they felt safer in the tree than they would have felt among the soldiers
+on the ground.
+
+So far the enemy had contented themselves with lying flat on the ground
+some distance away and firing at the trees, but now, as Shirley
+perceived by peering across the plain, they were preparing for a charge.
+
+A moment later there was a wild yell, and they came forward on the run.
+They spread out as they came on, and here and there a man fell over,
+struck down by a rifle bullet.
+
+In spite of their great danger both girls became lost in wonder at the
+sight, and stared ahead with straining eyes. Shirley was brought to
+herself by the sound of something buzzing past her head. She knew in a
+moment what is was.
+
+"Mabel!" she cried. "Climb as high as you can or we shall be shot!"
+
+She scrambled higher up among the branches, and Mabel followed suit.
+
+Here no bullets flew past them, and looking down they saw that President
+Garcia was ordering his men to retreat.
+
+The government troops disappeared further back in the woods, and now the
+danger came from their bullets rather than from those of the enemy. The
+girls were in a ticklish situation and they were fully alive to their
+peril.
+
+The enemy pushed further into the woods, pursuing the government troops.
+The bullets flew less thick, the sound of firing became fainter and
+fainter, and then died away in the distance.
+
+Shirley roused herself from the trance in which she seemed to have
+fallen.
+
+"Come, Mabel," she said. "Let's get down and get back to the ship before
+some of them come back."
+
+Mabel was nothing loath, and quickly the girls slid to the ground and
+advanced to the edge of the clearing. Here they stopped for a moment,
+looking about them.
+
+Several figures were sprawled about on the ground. The girls shuddered.
+
+"It is terrible," said Shirley.
+
+"Don't look at them," urged Mabel. "Let's run."
+
+But as they were about to take to their heels, they were startled by the
+sound of a voice directly behind them.
+
+"Ha!" it said.
+
+The girls wheeled in their tracks to confront a man with rifle levelled
+directly at them. A cry of fear was rung from Mabel's lips, but Shirley
+said nothing.
+
+The man advanced and the girls shrank back. A torrent of words poured
+from the man's lips, but it was absolutely unintelligible to either of
+the girls.
+
+Shirley made a gesture, indicating that they did not understand, and the
+man said:
+
+"Americanos?"
+
+"Yes," replied Shirley. "Do you speak English?"
+
+"Si!" replied the man, "a leetle!"
+
+"We want to go away," said Shirley eagerly. "We belong on the ship in
+the harbor."
+
+"No! Stay here. General Orizaba will return soon," said the man in
+broken English.
+
+Shirley started to protest, but the man made a threatening gesture with
+his rifle.
+
+The two girls looked at each other in dismay.
+
+"Out of the frying pan into the fire, Mabel," declared Shirley. "I guess
+we shall have to stay."
+
+There was apparently no help for it. They sat down upon the grass to
+await the arrival of General Orizaba, who, they rightly guessed, was the
+commander of the revolutionary forces.
+
+Their captor stood vigilant guard. Apparently he was determined to allow
+them no chance to escape. He sat some distance away, with his rifle
+across his knees. The two girls settled themselves with their backs to a
+large tree, and made themselves as comfortable as they could under the
+circumstances.
+
+There was a snapping of a twig behind them, and Shirley glanced about
+uneasily.
+
+"S-s-h-h," came a low voice. "Keep still and show no surprise."
+
+Both girls recognized the voice in an instant.
+
+They maintained their composure well, and spoke only to each other.
+
+"It's Dick!" whispered Shirley.
+
+"I know it," replied Mabel.
+
+"Then we are safe."
+
+The girls' guard now put an end to their conversation. Rising he
+approached them and commanded:
+
+"Silence!"
+
+He did not hear soft footsteps passing beyond him, nor did he turn in
+time to see a figure leap from behind a tree and spring at him. The
+first he realized of his danger was when a pair of strong arms went
+round him, and he was hurled violently to the ground, his rifle flying
+from his hands.
+
+"Get the rifle, Shirley!" called Dick, as he and his opponent struggled
+for mastery.
+
+Shirley leaped forward, stopped, and when she arose she held the rifle.
+
+For a moment she considered the advisability of advancing and lending
+Dick a hand, then concluded that he was more than a match for the
+Nicaraguan. Besides, the figures were locked in such close embrace that
+she couldn't have aided Dick if she would.
+
+Now Dick succeeded in shaking off the grip of his opponent, and sprang
+to his feet. The Nicaraguan did likewise, and sprang back.
+
+As Dick leaped forward again, the man's hand went to his holster, and a
+revolver flashed in his hand.
+
+But before he could bring the weapon to bear, Shirley stepped quickly
+forward, levelled her rifle at him, and in a clear sharp voice, cried:
+
+"Halt!"
+
+The man wheeled quickly and as he did so, Dick sprang upon him from
+behind. A quick blow sent the revolver hurling several feet away, and
+then Dick stepped back to give free play to his boxing skill.
+
+The Nicaraguan rushed at him, but Dick stepped lightly aside, and as the
+man went by, carried on by the impetus of his rush, Dick struck out
+straight and true from the shoulder.
+
+The Nicaraguan crumpled up in a heap on the ground.
+
+Shirley and Mabel ran quickly to Dick's side.
+
+"Are you hurt, Dick?" asked Shirley anxiously.
+
+"No!" was the smiling rejoinder, "but I would have been if you had not
+been prompt with that rifle. That's all that saved me."
+
+"How did you find us?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Followed you. We became alarmed at your absence and I said I thought I
+could find you. I imagined you had gone for a stroll, and when I saw
+this bunch of pirates going through the town I guessed that you would
+fall into their hands. I came along after them and just as I was about
+to go on I saw you climbing down from the tree."
+
+"Well, you didn't arrive a minute too soon," declared Shirley. "We were
+badly frightened, weren't we Mabel?"
+
+"I know I was," was her chum's reply. She turned to Dick. "But how----"
+
+"I'll explain later," interrupted Dick. "The thing to do now is to get
+away from here before they return. Come on."
+
+The girls started on ahead of him, and Dick turned for a glance over his
+shoulder.
+
+Then he uttered an exclamation of alarm, and shouted:
+
+"Run!"
+
+For in that quick glance over his shoulder he had perceived the return
+of the revolutionists.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.--MABEL BRINGS THE BLUEJACKETS.
+
+
+Shirley and Mabel needed no further urging, and took to their heels.
+Dick followed close behind.
+
+In the one brief glance in which he had perceived the return of the
+soldiers, Dick had been unable to determine whether their presence had
+been discovered, but he believed it wise to take a chance. Hence his
+command to run.
+
+The three sped lightly over the ground and had gone some distance when
+they heard a shout from behind, followed by the sharp reports of several
+rifles.
+
+Dick stopped suddenly and called to the girls to halt. They obeyed
+instantly.
+
+"There is no use being shot," said Dick quietly, "and although they are
+poor shots they would be sure to hit one of us sooner or later."
+
+"Then what shall we do?" cried Mabel.
+
+"There is only one thing to do," was the reply. "Surrender."
+
+"Dick is right," agreed Shirley. "It is foolish to attempt to escape."
+
+In the meantime the band of revolutionists had been coming toward them,
+and at length surrounded the three figures. A man, who appeared to be
+the leader, though he wore no uniform nor mark of distinction, advanced
+and addressed Dick.
+
+"Who are you and what are you doing here?" he demanded in English.
+
+Dick explained, and the man heard him through quietly.
+
+"And who was it hurt Pedro back there?" and the leader waved toward the
+spot where Dick had struggled with the Nicaraguan.
+
+"I did," he replied quietly, and explained the cause of the fight.
+
+"Well, you will have to stand trial for attacking one of my men," said
+the leader. "I am General Orizaba."
+
+He signalled for his men to surround the three, which was soon done, and
+they continued their march back toward the city.
+
+"Every step in this direction is better for us," said Dick to the two
+girls, as they marched along. "We'll get out of this trouble some way,
+be sure of that."
+
+"Oh, I know no harm will come to us as long as you are here," replied
+Shirley.
+
+"Thanks," said Dick dryly. "But I don't see how I can do much for any of
+us right now."
+
+"Something will turn up," said Shirley positively.
+
+"I hope it turns up soon," declared Mabel.
+
+But if the prisoners hoped to be taken directly back to town they were
+doomed to disappointment.
+
+After crossing the clearing in the woods, General Orizaba led his men to
+the left, where after an hour's march, he called a halt. Then he again
+approached the prisoners.
+
+"We shall camp here," he said. "Here, also, you shall be tried for
+attacking Pedro."
+
+Dick made no reply, but Shirley did
+
+"We are Americans," she said, "and you don't dare to interfere with us."
+
+"I don't, eh?" was the reply. "You shall see."
+
+Pedro, it now appeared, had been revived and brought along. The general
+motioned for him to approach. He pointed to Dick and spoke in Spanish.
+It was impossible to tell what they were talking about, but all three
+were keen enough to know that it boded no good for them.
+
+The general turned again to Dick.
+
+"Pedro says you struck him without warning and without provocation," he
+said. "I have decided, therefore, to dispense with the trial, and to fix
+your punishment myself."
+
+"I warn you----" began Dick.
+
+"Caramba!" roared the leader, becoming very angry. "What do I care for
+your warnings, or for your friends either?"
+
+"There is an American cruiser in the harbor," said Dick quietly. "The
+commander knows where I am, and if I am not back within two hours, he
+will land a force of sailors to see why."
+
+General Orizaba seemed to hesitate, following these words. Then he
+became even angrier than before. He was about to speak, when a horseman
+clattered up.
+
+The general turned to him and they conversed in low tones. Then the
+horseman dismounted, and leaving his horse, made his way to where the
+rest of the revolutionists sat upon the ground some distance away.
+
+General Orizaba again faced Dick.
+
+"Dog of an Americano!" he thundered. "You shall be shot for daring to
+interfere with one of my men."
+
+Dick only smiled.
+
+"I guess you don't mean that," he replied quietly.
+
+"I don't, eh? You shall see." He paused a moment. "But you shall live
+until sunset."
+
+He turned to call one of his men; and at that moment, Mabel, who stood
+closest to the riderless horse, suddenly leaped forward and sprang upon
+the animal's back.
+
+So sudden was her movement that for a moment the Nicaraguans failed to
+realize her intention.
+
+That moment was sufficient for Mabel to seize the reins and turn the
+horse's head toward the city. Then she dug her heels into his flanks and
+away they went.
+
+Dick and Shirley were no less surprised than the Nicaraguans, and both
+uttered cries of alarm.
+
+General Orizaba darted forward with an ejaculation, and called to his
+men.
+
+"Shoot!" he cried.
+
+Rifles were brought to bear, but the horse had gained his stride and was
+galloping along like the wind. Volley after volley was fired after the
+girl, but thanks to the movement of the horse and the poor marksmanship
+of the Nicaraguans, Mabel was not touched.
+
+Rapidly she rode, nor did she draw rein when she entered the town but
+galloped straight to the pier. Here still lay the small boat of the
+_Yucatan_, manned by its crew. Rapidly explaining the situation, the
+girl urged the sailors back to the ship without waiting the return of
+the first officer, who was some place in the town.
+
+About the ship, Mabel found that Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were
+ashore searching for the girls, and so she went straight to Captain
+Anderson. That worthy acted promptly. He quickly signalled the cruiser
+_Prairie_, which Mabel, saw for the first time, perceived lay close by.
+
+The _Prairie_ signalled for the captain and Mabel to come aboard, which
+they did without loss of time. In a few words Mabel explained the
+situation to the commander of the cruiser.
+
+Action came quickly.
+
+A bugle sounded, piping the crew to quarters. The commander detailed a
+landing party of one hundred and fifty marines and sailors. These were
+quickly rowed to the shore--Mabel going with them as a guide, for she
+refused to be left behind.
+
+Once ashore, the girl led the way toward where she had left her friends,
+the men going forward at the double-quick, their weapons ready for
+instant use.
+
+When General Orizaba perceived that Mabel had made good her flight, his
+anger knew no bounds. He berated his men roundly and danced about like a
+madman. Then he turned to Dick.
+
+"But you shall not escape!" he declared.
+
+"You'll have a squad of marines down on you in a few minutes," replied
+Dick with a cheerful smile. "Then where will you be?"
+
+"Bah!" said the angry general. "What are a few marines? We can drive
+them back."
+
+"Think so, do you?" asked Dick. "I'm afraid you'll be surprised."
+
+"You shall see," declared the angry leader. "You shall live until you
+see your countrymen defeated."
+
+"Guess I shall live a long time then," said Dick, with a smile.
+
+The smile angered the leader, and he stepped close to Dick and slapped
+him across the face.
+
+Dick's anger boiled up and he promptly sent his fist crashing into the
+general's face, knocking him down.
+
+The young man regretted this act the next moment, for he knew that
+probably he had brought matters to a crisis.
+
+General Orizaba sprang to his feet and with a shout drew his revolver
+and covered Dick.
+
+Shirley screamed. Then General Orizaba lowered his revolver.
+
+"No, I won't do it yet," he said. "I promised you should see your
+countrymen defeated, and so you shall. I shall kill you later."
+
+"Thanks," said Dick.
+
+In spite of his apparent nonchalance, he breathed easier, however, for
+he had been at the point of death, and none knew it better than he did.
+
+"We are all right now," he told Shirley in a low voice. "The marines and
+sailors will soon be here, and these fellows can't stand up against
+them."
+
+Shirley smiled at him bravely.
+
+"I know it," she replied quietly.
+
+Now the leader of the revolutionists signalled two of his men to bind
+the prisoners. This was soon done, and they were taken well to one side
+of what proved to be the line of battle.
+
+"I do this so I may be sure you will be saved for me," said General
+Orizaba with an evil smile. "It would be nice to have you shot down by
+American bullets, but I would rather do it myself. Besides, from here,
+you can see us defeat the Americanos."
+
+"Many thanks for your kindness," returned Dick. "I'll speak a word for
+you when you are in the hands of the Americanos, as you call them."
+
+"That," was the reply, "will never be."
+
+Dick shrugged his shoulders.
+
+"Have it your own way," he said.
+
+Came a shout from one of the men who had been sent forward on scout
+duty.
+
+"The Americanos!" he cried.
+
+General Orizaba hurried toward him. Dick and Shirley drew a breath of
+relief.
+
+An instant later a long line of hurrying blue figures came into view.
+Shirley and Dick looked at them with pride in their eyes.
+
+The marines and sailors advanced at the double.
+
+"Crack! Crack! Crack! Crack!"
+
+The battle had begun!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.--END OF THE REVOLT.
+
+
+The Nicaraguans met the first charge of the bluejackets bravely enough,
+but they were now opposed to men who knew not the meaning of the word
+defeat, nor what it meant to retreat. Under the first fire from the
+Americans they wavered; at the next they began to fall back and at the
+third they turned and fled.
+
+Dick and Shirley, bound as they were, nevertheless could see how the
+fighting progressed, while thanks to the thoughtfulness of the
+revolutionary leader they were out of danger themselves.
+
+But now that the day was going against the enemy, Dick feared that
+General Orizaba, mindful of his threat, would return to his prisoners
+before seeking safety in flight. Therefore he began to devise a way of
+escape.
+
+After some effort he succeeded in getting out his pocket knife. Then,
+holding it in one of his bound hands, he bent his head and opened the
+big blade with his teeth. Fortunately the rope with which he was bound
+was not thick, and the knife was sharp.
+
+For perhaps ten minutes, holding the knife in his mouth by the handle,
+Dick sawed at the bonds on his hands. At last the rope parted. Quickly
+he untied his feet, and then unbound Shirley, who also arose to her
+feet.
+
+The Nicaraguan forces were now in full retreat, and as Dick would have
+led Shirley forward toward the town, a single figure burst into sight.
+As the man came closer Shirley and Dick could see anger and hate written
+large on his features. They recognized him upon the instant.
+
+"Orizaba!" exclaimed Shirley.
+
+"And come to fulfill his promise, I guess," agreed Dick quietly.
+
+"Run!" cried Shirley.
+
+"What's the use?" asked Dick. "He has a gun."
+
+It was true. In the hands of the defeated revolutionary leader was a
+revolver of heavy caliber, and he flourished it as he came toward them.
+
+Dick turned to Shirley.
+
+"You get back out of sight!" he commanded. "I can handle this fellow!"
+
+Shirley protested.
+
+"But--but,----" she began.
+
+"Quick!" exclaimed Dick. "He is very angry and for that reason will be
+easier to handle. I don't believe he could hit a barn door now."
+
+Shirley followed Dick's command and withdrew a short distance, although
+she was still in plain sight of the infuriated Nicaraguan.
+
+Standing quietly, with his hands on his hips, Dick awaited the attack of
+the Nicaraguan. A full hundred yards away, but still running, the latter
+opened fire with his revolver.
+
+"Good!" thought Dick to himself. "He can't hit me that way, and his
+shells will soon be gone."
+
+Five times Orizaba fired, and each time the bullet went wild.
+
+Shirley, from her place of safety, watched the encounter breathlessly.
+She stood with clenched fists and awaited the outcome of each shot
+anxiously.
+
+A sixth time Orizaba's revolver spoke.
+
+Dick staggered, and Shirley gave utterance to a scream, while a laugh of
+derision came from the Nicaraguan.
+
+But the latter's mirth was destined to be short-lived. Dick, still with
+a smile on his face in spite of the dull pain in his left arm where
+Orizaba's last bullet had struck, stepped forward to meet his enemy in
+his mad rush.
+
+They came together with a shock and tumbled to the ground, where Orizaba
+clawed desperately at Dick's face and eyes.
+
+
+"So that's your game, eh?" muttered Dick to himself.
+
+He protected his face with his injured arm, while with the uninjured one
+he rained a shower of blows upon the Nicaraguan's face. The latter soon
+tired of this and sprang to his feet. Dick also arose.
+
+There was a cry of alarm from Shirley as Orizaba stepped back. His hand
+went to his belt, and a knife flashed in the air. But Dick, quick as a
+cat, gave him no time to use it.
+
+He realized his danger in an instant and acted promptly. With a shout he
+sprang forward, and seized the upraised arm with his right hand. He
+twisted it fiercely, and the Nicaraguan gave a cry of pain as he
+released his hold on the knife and stepped back.
+
+As he did so, Dick drove his right fist into his face, and General
+Orizaba tumbled to the ground, where he lay still.
+
+At the same moment there was a cheer from close at hand and, turning,
+Dick saw a dozen marines who had gathered about to watch the contest.
+Shirley came forward anxiously.
+
+"Are you hurt Dick?" she asked.
+
+"Not much, I guess," was the reply. "He winged me with the last shot,
+but I am sure it is nothing serious."
+
+"He's all right," shouted one of the marines, as they gathered about him
+and congratulated him upon his fight.
+
+Shirley turned on them angrily.
+
+"And you stood off and left him to be killed," she exclaimed. "You ought
+to be ashamed of yourselves."
+
+"Oh, we know he could handle that fellow," was the response, but the men
+looked at one another somewhat sheepishly.
+
+Their reason for not interfering was perfectly apparent. They had
+enjoyed the spectacle of Dick and Orizaba locked in combat, and had felt
+morally certain Dick would come out on top.
+
+"Just the same, he might have been badly hurt!" said Shirley, by no
+means convinced.
+
+"Oh, they did all right," said Dick with a laugh. "Come Shirley, let's
+get back to the ship and I'll have the surgeon look at this arm."
+
+"Are you hurt, Jack?" asked one of the men stepping forward.
+
+"Bullet in the arm," was Dick's reply; and he added: "But my name is not
+Jack."
+
+"Everybody is Jack to us," was the answer. "But had we known you were
+wounded we would have taken that fellow off your hands. Come on, there
+is Dr. Thomas over there."
+
+Dick and Shirley followed the marines to where the surgeon was engaged
+in bandaging the wounds of an American sailor, the only man who had been
+touched by one of the enemy's bullets.
+
+He bound Dick's arm up quickly, remarking that it would be as good as
+new in a day or two.
+
+"Shirley!"
+
+It was Mabel's voice, and turning, Shirley saw her chum rushing toward
+her. She ran to meet her and the greeting was affectionate.
+
+"How dared you take such a chance, Mabel?" demanded Shirley.
+
+"Well, somebody had to do it, and I was closest the horse," was the
+reply. "I knew they couldn't hit me."
+
+"Nevertheless, it was a desperate risk," said Dick, who came up at that
+moment. "I expected to see your horse go tumbling."
+
+"But how did you get aid so quickly?" demanded Shirley.
+
+Mabel explained.
+
+"And they made me go back when the fighting began," she continued. "I
+wanted to hunt you up immediately, but the lieutenant wouldn't let me."
+
+"I should say not," declared Dick.
+
+"Shirley was in danger. Why shouldn't I have been there?" demanded
+Mabel. "I saw Dick and the general fighting and I came forward as fast
+as I could," the girl continued, "and when I saw the Nicaraguan go down
+I knew our troubles were over."
+
+"And where is Dad?" asked Shirley.
+
+"I didn't see him," replied Mabel. "I suppose they are looking for us in
+some other part of the town. I'll bet they are badly frightened."
+
+"I fear so too," replied Shirley. "I guess we had better get back as
+soon as we can. But we shall have to thank the lieutenant first."
+
+That officer declared that he wanted no thanks.
+
+"We are glad to have been able to take a shot at those fellows," he
+said. "We have been wanting to do it for a long time, but this is the
+first opportunity we have had. We--Hello!"
+
+He broke off suddenly. Riding rapidly toward them was a large body of
+men, and above them floated a white flag. They dismounted some distance
+away, and one approached.
+
+The girls recognized this man immediately. He was President Garcia.
+
+He rode up to the lieutenant, and introduced himself.
+
+"And I would like the person of Orizaba delivered to me," he said
+quietly.
+
+"You shall have him," replied the lieutenant. "It will save us trouble."
+
+The unfortunate revolutionist, fully recovered now, was turned over to
+the President of Nicaragua and marched away. Then President Garcia
+appeared to perceive Shirley and Mabel for the first time. He raised his
+hat to them.
+
+"I am pleased that the senoritas have escaped safely," he said quietly,
+and making a low bow to them, he turned his horse about, and a moment
+later was gone.
+
+The lieutenant in command of the marines now ordered his men back to
+their ship, and the girls accompanied them on their return march through
+the town. Dark looks were cast at them from all sides, but none ventured
+a word.
+
+"You may see they don't love us very much in these parts," said the
+lieutenant with a smile. "They would welcome a chance to shoot us all."
+
+At the pier the two girls saw their fathers approaching rapidly, and
+they ran forward to meet them. The meeting was affectionate, for both
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton had been greatly alarmed at their long
+absence.
+
+"I am going to keep my eye on you in the future," declared Mr. Willing.
+
+The girls only laughed. Both men were profuse in their praise of Dick's
+gallant actions, and Colonel Ashton declared:
+
+"It's a good thing we brought him along, Willing."
+
+The marines gave the Willing party a rousing cheer as they stepped into
+the _Yucatan's_ small boat and were rowed back to the vessel.
+
+"I'm glad to see you back," declared Captain Anderson. "We're late now.
+We shall leave here at once." He turned to the first officer. "You may
+get under way immediately, sir!"
+
+And as the _Yucatan_ steamed from the harbor, the passengers gathered
+about the two girls, demanding an account of their experiences.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.--A GUATEMALA ADVENTURE.
+
+
+"This," said Captain Anderson, waving his hand, as the steamer entered a
+little harbor, "is Champerico, the only Guatemalan port at which we
+shall touch. It is the last Central American republic we shall see.
+Would you care to go ashore?"
+
+"I would like to go," said Shirley, with a sidelong look at her father.
+
+"You won't go unless I do," was Mr. Willing's ultimatum. "You have been
+in trouble enough. I'm going to keep you in sight." He turned to Colonel
+Ashton. "Would you care to go ashore, Ashton?"
+
+"Why, yes," was the reply.
+
+"Good. Then we shall all go," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"You can go with me," said Captain Anderson. "I am going to pay my
+respects to the American consul."
+
+An hour later a small boat put off from the ship and headed shoreward.
+In it, besides Captain Anderson and the crew, were Mr. Willing, Colonel
+Ashton, Dick, Shirley and Mabel.
+
+"We'll keep out of trouble this time," commented Mr. Willing.
+
+They accompanied Captain Anderson to the United States consulate, where
+they were introduced to the consul. An hour later they all started back
+toward the boat.
+
+As they walked down one of the dirty streets Captain Anderson espied a
+figure slinking along.
+
+"Hey!" he cried. "There goes that scoundrel Von Blusen, who broke his
+parole and ran away at Corinto. I'll get him!"
+
+He darted hurriedly across the street, and laid a hand on the young
+man's shoulder. The latter looked up in surprise, and then perceiving
+Captain Anderson, jerked suddenly free and took to his heels, running
+directly toward the Willing party.
+
+"Head him off!" cried Captain Anderson, and Dick and the two men leaped
+to obey.
+
+Straight at them rushed the young German officer, and a few feet away
+hurled himself forward with a powerful spring. He struck the three
+squarely, and all went to the ground in a tangled heap.
+
+Von Blusen was the first to regain his feet. He raised a hand as though
+to strike one of his fallen adversaries, but the approach of Captain
+Anderson at that moment caused him to turn and flee quickly.
+
+The captain made after him at top speed, calling upon him to halt.
+Around the block they ran, and then, unconsciously doubling back, Von
+Blusen once more found himself bearing down on Dick and Mr. Willing and
+Colonel Ashton.
+
+A moment later Captain Anderson, panting, hove in sight and gasped out:
+
+"Stop him!"
+
+This time the three spread out, so they would have a better chance of
+halting the fugitive. The latter ran straight at Mr. Willing and the
+force of the contact sent both to the ground. As Von Blusen arose
+Colonel Ashton leaped for him.
+
+But the German was too quick for the colonel, and missing his grasp, the
+latter sprawled on the street. Von Blusen turned just in time to meet
+Dick with a hard blow to the face, and Dick toppled over.
+
+Then Von Blusen darted up a little alleyway.
+
+Unmindful of his intention to keep a close eye on the girls, Mr.
+Willing, now red with anger, made after him, as did the colonel, Captain
+Anderson and Dick.
+
+The girls found themselves alone in the street.
+
+The noise of the chase had attracted many spectators, among them several
+members of the native police.
+
+Suddenly Captain Von Blusen emerged from the alleyway on the dead run,
+his pursuers close on his trail.
+
+Perceiving one man thus followed by many, the native officers decided to
+interfere. Von Blusen darted past them, evading their outstretched arms
+by dodging neatly; but the others were not so fortunate.
+
+Pursuers and native police collided with a shock, and there was a tangle
+of arms and legs as they rolled in the dirty street. The officers freed
+themselves first, and drawing their revolvers stood by while the others
+arose.
+
+One of them broke into a torrent of Spanish.
+
+Captain Anderson, the only member of the party who spoke the language,
+halted in his tracks.
+
+"I'm an American citizen," he told the policeman. "Take your hands off
+me," this to one of the officers who insisted upon holding him by the
+arm.
+
+The officer chattered volubly and clung to the arm.
+
+Captain Anderson freed his arm with a quick wrench, and tapped the
+officer lightly on the shoulder with his hand.
+
+"Caramba!" roared the Guatemalan, and levelled his revolver at the
+captain.
+
+"Caramba yourself!" cried the captain, and extending his arm suddenly,
+he took the pistol away from the little officer.
+
+The latter stamped the ground angrily and broke into another torrent of
+unintelligible words.
+
+But Captain Anderson now perceived he had acted rashly in thus giving
+way to his temper. The blood of the other native officers was aroused,
+and they surrounded the Americans gesticulating vigorously.
+
+At that moment Captain Von Blusen, who had been hovering just around the
+corner, reappeared, and approaching the officers, addressed them in
+Spanish.
+
+"These men tried to rob me," he declared. "I want them arrested!"
+
+"Si senor! It shall be done!" replied one of the officers.
+
+"I'll go with you to make the charge," continued the young German.
+
+"Si senor!" said the native officer.
+
+Turning, he motioned for the four to precede him. Captain Anderson was
+inclined to hang back, as were the others, but a word from Captain Von
+Blusen decided them to go on.
+
+"They'll shoot if you don't go," declared Von Blusen with a smile.
+
+Shirley and Mabel, who had been standing nearby while all this was going
+on, now made as though to approach, but Mr. Willing waved them back.
+
+"Go back to the consulate and tell the consul what has happened," he
+called to her.
+
+The girls turned to go, but Von Blusen, realizing what was going on,
+called to the officers to stop them.
+
+"Run!" cried Captain Anderson, who was the only one who understood the
+import of the German's words.
+
+"Halt!" cried one of the Guatemalans, as the girls broke into a run.
+
+But the girls did not understand him, and if they had, their actions
+would have been the same.
+
+They set out for the consulate at top speed and they did not stop, in
+spite of pursuit and cries of "Halt!" until they dashed in the door.
+
+The consul greeted them with an exclamation of surprise.
+
+"What's the matter?" he demanded.
+
+Shirley explained.
+
+"And hurry," she added tearfully, "they will lock them up in a dirty old
+jail."
+
+The consul was forced to smile.
+
+"Oh, well, I guess it won't hurt them any," he replied.
+
+The girls looked at him in astonishment, and Shirley opened her mouth to
+speak. The consul silenced her with a gesture.
+
+"I'll get them out, all right," he assured them.
+
+He looked at his watch and continued.
+
+"It is now ten o'clock. I think I can safely promise to have them back
+aboard the _Yucatan_ by five o'clock."
+
+"Five o'clock!" repeated Shirley. "And where will they be all that
+time?"
+
+"Jail," was the brief reply.
+
+Shirley could not repress an exclamation of dismay.
+
+"But can't you hurry?" she exclaimed.
+
+"Now don't you fret," said the consul. "There is certain red tape that
+must be gone through, and it will take time. Besides, it is needless to
+hurry. In this country no one hurries. If I seem unduly excited it will
+take longer than ever."
+
+"Please do the best you can, then," said Shirley.
+
+"I shall," replied the consul. "In the meantime, you two girls return
+aboard the _Yucatan_. I'll call my secretary and have him escort you
+back."
+
+In response to his summons a young man appeared and the consul
+instructed him to see them back aboard their ship.
+
+"Yes, sir," said the young man. "Come," to the girls.
+
+He accompanied them to the wharf, where he instructed the sailors to
+take them aboard and then return and await the arrival of the captain
+and the others.
+
+It was almost six o'clock when Shirley and Mabel, gazing toward shore,
+perceived the little boat of the _Yucatan_ bobbing toward them. As it
+drew close they could make out the faces of their fathers, Dick and
+Captain Anderson.
+
+A short time later all appeared on deck. Their clothing was ruffled and
+dirty, and it was plain to the girls that their fathers were not in the
+best of temper. Nevertheless Shirley could not repress a slight dig at
+them.
+
+First she approached Captain Anderson.
+
+"And did you capture Captain Von Blusen?" she asked.
+
+"No," grumbled the captain. "I hope I never set eyes on him again."
+
+"Dad," said Shirley, "do you remember what you said to us about getting
+into trouble?"
+
+Mr. Willing growled some unintelligible reply.
+
+"We've never been in jail yet, Dad," continued Shirley slyly. "Were
+you?"
+
+Mr. Willing glanced at his daughter and seemed about to make some sharp
+response. Then he controlled himself and spoke:
+
+"Yes, we were in jail," he growled. "We spent the best part of the day
+there."
+
+"Well," said Shirley, "you are always getting in trouble. I reckon Mabel
+and I will have to keep closer watch on you."
+
+"I am sure of it," declared Mabel.
+
+Dick smiled, but there was no amusement on the faces of Mr. Willing nor
+Colonel Ashton. They scowled at their daughters.
+
+"Now, Dad," continued Shirley, "did Captain Von Blusen--"
+
+"Will you be quiet?" demanded Mr. Willing. "Haven't we had enough
+trouble for one day without all this chatter. Come, Ashton, we'll go to
+our cabin."
+
+Shirley, Mabel and Dick broke into a loud laugh as the two stalked away
+arm in arm, looking neither to the right nor left.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.--UP THE MEXICAN COAST.
+
+
+The passengers aboard the _Yucatan_ gazed curiously at the approaching
+battle cruiser.
+
+It was the morning following the departure from Champerico, and the
+_Yucatan_ had been halted by a shot fired across her bow. Officers and
+passengers alike were curious as to the identity of the cruiser.
+
+So far she had shown no colors.
+
+"Do you suppose she is English?" asked Shirley of Dick, as they gazed
+over the rail at the oncoming stranger.
+
+"Must be either English or Japanese," replied Dick. "Not much chance of
+any other vessel being in these waters, unless, of course, she is a
+United States cruiser. But that can't be, because she would not have
+halted us."
+
+Signs of activity became apparent aboard the cruiser, and the colors
+were run up the masthead. For a moment they could not be distinguished,
+but as the breeze caught the ensign, a gasp went up from the passengers,
+with here and there a cheer.
+
+For the colors thus displayed were the red, white and black of Germany!
+
+"My goodness! Will she shoot us?" exclaimed Shirley in some dismay.
+
+"Hardly," declared Dick. "I don't believe Germany wants to go to war
+with the United States."
+
+There came a message from the German to Captain Anderson:
+
+"I am coming aboard!"
+
+A few moments later a boat put off from the cruiser, and soon scraped
+alongside the _Yucatan_. An officer appeared over the side and was
+greeted by Captain Anderson.
+
+"How did you get here?" was his first question. "I had reason to believe
+the _Yucatan_ was now in other waters."
+
+"Well," replied Captain Anderson dryly, "your little piracy scheme
+didn't work, you see."
+
+The German officer controlled his temper with an effort.
+
+"Have you a passenger by the name of Bristow aboard?"
+
+"Oh," said the captain, "you mean Von Blusen. We did have him aboard, in
+irons. I released him on parole, and he broke it. I'll never trust
+another German."
+
+The German officer drew himself up angrily.
+
+"Have a care, sir!" he exclaimed. "You seem to forget that I can sink
+you on a moment's notice."
+
+"Oh, no I don't. But I'm sure you won't. Already you have troubles
+enough. I'll thank you to dispose of your business immediately and then
+get off my ship."
+
+"I'll have a look at your papers," said the German shortly.
+
+Captain Anderson led the way to his cabin.
+
+As they talked, the passengers on deck noticed smoke upon the horizon.
+Save for this little blur and the German cruiser there was nothing else
+in sight but water.
+
+The blur became larger, and at last took the shape of a vessel. As it
+drew nearer it could be seen that it was a battle cruiser. It bore down
+toward the German cruiser at full speed.
+
+"I hope it's an Englishman," declared Shirley.
+
+"Probably is," said her father, "although it may be a Jap."
+
+Still the German officer was in the cabin with Captain Anderson.
+
+Suddenly the head of another German officer appeared over the rail of
+the _Yucatan_ and dashed toward the captain's cabin. A moment later both
+reappeared, dropped over the side and the boat made back toward the
+cruiser.
+
+The _Yucatan_ was very close, and now, at a command from Captain
+Anderson, she got under way.
+
+"If that other cruiser is a Britisher, there is bound to be a fight, and
+we don't want to be in the way," explained the captain. "We'll stand off
+at a distance and look on."
+
+This plan met the approval of the passengers, and as the _Yucatan_
+steamed toward a safe spot all eyes were turned upon the second cruiser
+waiting for her to show her colors.
+
+And at last they were unfurled, and a cheer rang the length of the ship.
+The British ensign fluttered from the mast.
+
+The German cruiser, immediately the identity of the other was
+determined, turned to flee. She seemed fully as large as the British
+ship, and there were comments of surprise aboard the _Yucatan_ that she
+didn't offer to accept battle.
+
+But there was to be no escape for the German. The British cruiser gave
+chase, and it was soon apparent that she was much faster than the foe.
+
+There was a heavy crash as her big guns opened fire on the stern of the
+enemy. The _Yucatan's_ passengers watched eagerly for the result.
+
+The German cruiser seemed to stagger in her stride, and a cloud of wood
+and steel flew in the air. The first shot had struck home, and in some
+manner had disabled the engines of the German. Escape being impossible,
+the latter turned to give battle.
+
+Immediately the British cruiser reduced her speed.
+
+Shirley and Mabel stood at the rail of the _Yucatan_ with clasped hands
+and strained faces.
+
+"And to think that we shall see a real sea fight!" exclaimed Mabel.
+
+"But think of the poor sailors," said Shirley.
+
+"Of course," said Mabel, "but they may be saved. Perhaps the German
+commander will surrender."
+
+"I am sure he won't," declared Shirley.
+
+"No, he won't surrender," said Dick. "Whatever else you may say of the
+Germans, their bravery cannot be doubted."
+
+Now the first gun on the German cruiser spoke, and a shell plowed up the
+water alongside the Britisher.
+
+"They'll have the range in a minute," said Dick, "and then they'll go at
+it hammer and tongs."
+
+He was right. The next shot from the German burst squarely over her
+enemy's forward turret, putting it out of commission.
+
+There was a cheer from the few German passengers aboard the _Yucatan_.
+
+But the British cruiser more than evened up the score with her next
+shot.
+
+A shell burst squarely amidships on the German. A moment later there was
+a terrific explosion.
+
+The German cruiser seemed to part in the middle. It staggered crazily.
+She had been wounded unto death, as every passenger aboard the _Yucatan_
+realized.
+
+Men flung themselves into the sea, and struck out in the direction of
+the _Yucatan_.
+
+Captain Anderson was a humane man, and while the matter possibly was
+none of his business, he determined to aid the unfortunate victims. He
+ordered the ship's lifeboats manned and lowered.
+
+"Look!" cried Shirley.
+
+Another terrific explosion drowned her voice. The German cruiser
+suddenly sprang into a brilliant sheet of flame, seemed to leap in the
+air, then disappeared.
+
+The calm waters of the Pacific closed over her. She was gone.
+
+Shirley and Mabel held their breath in speechless amazement. It seemed
+to them incredible that such a great ship could have been sent to the
+bottom in such a short time.
+
+"The poor sailors!" exclaimed Shirley. "I hope they will all be saved."
+
+"They won't be," declared Captain Anderson, who had come up and now
+stood among the others. "With my glass I saw the commander on the bridge
+a moment before the ship went down. He has gone with her, and so,
+probably, have most of his officers."
+
+He lifted his cap from his head, as did the passengers.
+
+"It's a terrible thing, this war," continued the Captain. "How many went
+down I do not know; but how many of those who did knew what they were
+fighting for? Not many."
+
+Meanwhile the little lifeboats of the _Yucatan_ were helping the crews
+of the British cruiser pick up the survivors. The work went on with the
+utmost haste, for there were many who could not swim.
+
+Fortunately most of those who had jumped just before the explosion were
+saved. These were all taken aboard the British cruiser, and a short time
+later the British commander came aboard the _Yucatan_.
+
+Shirley and Mabel looked with some awe at this British sea fighter. He
+seemed a veritable hero in their eyes. Once on deck, he strode toward
+Captain Anderson with quick steps, his carriage erect.
+
+"I thank you for your assistance in saving many helpless sailors," he
+said to Captain Anderson. "Without your aid many would have perished."
+
+"How badly is your ship damaged, sir?" asked Captain Anderson, asking
+the question that was uppermost in the minds of all aboard the
+_Yucatan_.
+
+"Very little, sir," was the reply. "Two guns shot to pieces, and five
+men injured. No man was killed. There was also some slight damage to the
+engine room. It was a notable victory."
+
+"Indeed it was!" cried Shirley, who could keep silent no longer.
+
+The British sea captain gazed at her for a moment, then bowed slightly.
+
+Shirley's face grew red at her own boldness, but she said nothing more.
+
+The commander of the British cruiser followed Captain Anderson to the
+latter's cabin, where he inspected the ship's papers. Half an hour later
+he made his way over the side of the _Yucatan_ and was soon back aboard
+the cruiser.
+
+Immediately he had left, the _Yucatan_ got under way and continued her
+journey up the Mexican coast.
+
+All the passengers remained on deck gazing after the British cruiser,
+which had turned in the opposite direction; and until she was lost to
+sight in the distance, a faint smoke marking her location, hardly an eye
+was taken from her.
+
+"Well, Shirley," said Mr. Willing, "what did you think of the battle?"
+
+"It was wonderful," replied the girl, clasping her hands. "I am glad the
+English won."
+
+"And so am I," agreed her father. "How do you think you would like to be
+a sailor aboard a man-o'-war."
+
+"I'd love it!" declared Shirley with enthusiasm.
+
+Dick looked at her peculiarly.
+
+"I believe you would," he said quietly at last, and, turning on his
+heel, he went below.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.--A WOMAN PLOTTER.
+
+
+Aboard the _Yucatan_ was a woman passenger, who, on the trip up the
+Pacific, had made herself very agreeable to the members of the Willing
+party. She was not an American although she spoke English fluently, with
+the slightest of accents. Neither Shirley nor Mabel had asked her
+nationality, but they had agreed that she must be a Spaniard.
+
+The woman had given her name as Mrs. Miguel Sebastian and this
+strengthened the belief of the members of the Willing party that she was
+a native of one of the Latin countries. She had come aboard the ship for
+the first time at Colon, but for several days had kept to her stateroom,
+so the passengers had not seen much of her.
+
+She was young, hardly more than twenty-five, slender, rather light
+complexioned for a Spaniard, and extremely pretty. Since leaving
+Champerico she had been much in the company of Shirley and Mabel, and
+both girls had taken an instinctive liking to her.
+
+She had travelled much, apparently, and told them tales of many lands.
+Her husband, she said, was abroad in Europe, but would join her in San
+Francisco within a month. She was well posted on current events, and
+seemed to have the history of Mexico at her finger tips.
+
+It was while the _Yucatan_ was steaming into the harbor of Acapulco, the
+first Mexican port at which they were to touch, that Mrs. Sebastian
+related some of the history of the revolution-torn republic.
+
+"I have always been greatly interested in Mexico," she told the girls,
+as the three leaned over the rail this morning. "I have spent several
+years in the country. I have friends here in Acapulco, and I shall make
+an effort to see them while here. Would you care to go with me?"
+
+"We would love to," declared Shirley, "but I don't know whether Dad will
+consent to our going without him."
+
+"We shall see," returned Mrs. Sebastian. "I can promise you a dinner
+that you will never forget. Nowhere outside of Mexico can you get real
+Mexican food, and it will be something to remember."
+
+Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and Dick now joined the others on deck, and
+Shirley asked for permission to accompany Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+Mr. Willing appeared somewhat dubious, but Mrs. Sebastian also asked him
+to consent.
+
+"I'll promise to return them to you safely," she said with a smile.
+
+"In that event, I shall give my consent to their going, madam," returned
+Colonel Ashton gallantly.
+
+"And I," agreed Mr. Willing.
+
+"Thanks so much," said Mrs. Sebastian, "and I'll go and ask Captain
+Anderson just how long we shall remain here."
+
+She walked away.
+
+"Mr. Willing," said Dick, "it may appear wrong, but somehow or other I
+don't exactly trust that woman."
+
+"Pooh!" replied Mr. Willing. "What does a youngster like you know?"
+
+"Perhaps I am wrong," replied Dick, "but something tells me she is not
+to be trusted. She is up to some mischief."
+
+"Why, Dick!" exclaimed Shirley. "Don't you want us to go?"
+
+"To tell the truth I don't," was the reply.
+
+"Young man," said Colonel Ashton, "you will learn, as you grow older,
+not to jump to such rash conclusions. Mrs. Sebastian is a gentlewoman."
+
+"Right you are, Ashton," declared Mr. Willing. "We're old enough to
+know, eh?"
+
+The two men smiled at each other and walked away, leaving the young
+people together.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian returned a few moments later.
+
+"Captain Anderson says we shall be here until evening," she said, "so we
+shall have plenty of time for our trip ashore. He says we may go in the
+first boat, so you girls had better run along to your cabin and get
+ready. Mr. Stanley will entertain me until you return."
+
+Shirley and Mabel hurried away, and Dick and Mrs. Sebastian stood
+together looking across the water at the shore, which was drawing closer
+rapidly.
+
+"Where are you going when you get ashore?" asked Dick abruptly.
+
+"Why, I am going to call upon a friend," was the smiling reply.
+
+"Then you have been here before?" questioned Dick.
+
+"Many times."
+
+"Mrs. Sebastian," said Dick quietly, "are you a Mexican?"
+
+The woman started back in surprise.
+
+"Why, no," she replied at last. "I was born in Spain. Why do you ask?"
+
+"I just wondered," was Dick's evasive answer. "By the way, I suppose it
+is perfectly peaceful here now?"
+
+"Yes, indeed," was the reply. "I guess the fighting is all over, now
+that General Villa has been successful in Chihuahua and other northern
+states."
+
+"But there has been trouble down here?"
+
+"Oh yes, but it is all over. Besides, the revolutionists probably have
+not enough money to buy arms and ammunition."
+
+"Why don't they steal them? It wouldn't be the first time."
+
+Mrs. Sebastian's face turned red.
+
+"What do you mean?" she asked angrily.
+
+"I am sorry I offended you," Dick apologized. "I spoke thoughtlessly."
+
+"Say no more about it," said Mrs. Sebastian with a laugh. "I am
+naturally touchy on that subject, for I have friends who were of the
+revolutionary party."
+
+"I see," replied Dick, and the subject was changed as Shirley and Mabel
+returned to them.
+
+Half an hour later the _Yucatan_ dropped anchor a mile off shore and the
+small boats were lowered for such passengers as desired to land.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian, Shirley and Mabel soon found themselves in the first
+boat and making shoreward at a good clip.
+
+"We shall be back in plenty of time," Mrs. Sebastian had called to Mr.
+Willing just before they took their places in the boat.
+
+The men nodded and waved their hands, and the occupants of the boat
+returned the salute.
+
+Now the small boat scraped the shore, and an officer sprang out and lent
+a hand to the passengers. Mrs. Sebastian was the first to go ashore, and
+Shirley and Mabel followed a moment later.
+
+The little street that ran along the water front was crowded with
+natives, dirty, ragged and unkempt, with here and there a gaily bedecked
+Mexican. They did not present a very inviting aspect, and the two girls
+shrank close to Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+The latter paid no attention to the natives, but pushed her way through
+the crowd with never a glance to right or left. She continued along the
+street until they came upon a long line of dilapidated cabs.
+
+She signalled to one of the drivers, who opened the door. Mrs. Sebastian
+motioned the girls to climb in, spoke a few quick words in Spanish to
+the driver and entered the cab. A moment later they were being driven
+through the dirty streets as fast as the old horse could go.
+
+"I thought my friend might be at the landing to meet me," the woman
+explained, "but as I didn't see anything of her, I thought best to drive
+right to her home."
+
+Shirley and Mabel nodded their understanding of this, and turned to view
+the passing sights.
+
+After an hour's drive the cab pulled up before a house somewhat larger
+than the rest, and the cabman dismounted and threw open the door.
+
+"Here we are at last," said Mrs. Sebastian as she alighted and motioned
+the girls to follow. Then she gave the cabman a single piece of silver
+and turned to the heavy door.
+
+This she opened without the formality of a knock, and led the way across
+a small patio--a courtyard--in the center of what appeared to be the
+house itself. Here they brought up against another door, and Mrs.
+Sebastian knocked sharply three times.
+
+There was a moment's delay, then the door swung open and a man's face
+appeared.
+
+At sight of Mrs. Sebastian the man stepped back with a bow, and Mrs.
+Sebastian, followed by the two girls, swept by him.
+
+The door slammed behind them.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian led the way into a small but luxuriously furnished room
+off the main hall, where she turned to the man who had followed them,
+and spoke a few words in Spanish. The man bowed and departed.
+
+"I told him to announce our arrival," explained Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+The girls surveyed the interior of the handsome apartment curiously.
+
+"I had no idea they lived so well in Mexico," said Shirley.
+
+"Nor I," declared Mabel.
+
+"The upper classes live as well in Mexico as elsewhere," replied Mrs.
+Sebastian. "It is only the poorer--or peon--class that you have heard
+about, apparently."
+
+Footsteps sounded without and a moment later a handsomely attired woman
+entered the room, followed a moment later by a fancifully garbed man.
+The woman rushed up to Mrs. Sebastian and they greeted each other
+affectionately. The man also appeared glad to see the visitor.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian then presented the girls, and it developed that both Don
+Miguel and his wife--for so they were introduced--spoke English. They
+made the girls welcome, and told them to make themselves at home.
+
+"I have promised them a real Mexican dinner," explained Mrs. Sebastian
+with a little laugh.
+
+"They shall have it," replied Don Miguel, throwing wide his arms.
+
+"And now," said Mrs. Sebastian, "where can we have a talk?"
+
+"In the next room," was the reply.
+
+"Good! I am sure my young friends will excuse me for half an hour."
+
+She looked inquiringly at the two girls. The latter nodded, and the Don
+and two women made their way from the room.
+
+The moment they were gone, Shirley and Mabel began an inspection of the
+room. There were two windows, both of which looked on the street and
+both of which were barred.
+
+Shirley uttered an exclamation.
+
+"Barred!" she said.
+
+"That's nothing," laughed Mabel. "Surely you remember all windows are
+barred in Mexico."
+
+"That's so," agreed Shirley.
+
+After some further inspection of the room, Mabel crossed to the door
+through which they had come, and turned the knob. Then her face paled
+and she stepped back with an exclamation of alarm.
+
+"What's the matter, Mabel?" asked Shirley.
+
+For a moment Mabel did not reply. Again she turned the knob and then she
+stepped back and looked at Shirley.
+
+"It's locked!" she declared.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.--CAPTAIN VON BLUSEN BOBS UP AGAIN.
+
+
+"Are you sure?" asked Shirley, her face also turning a shade whiter.
+
+"Try it yourself," replied Mabel.
+
+Shirley advanced and laid hold of the knob, but the door would not open.
+
+The girls looked at each other in alarm.
+
+"I never heard that they always locked the doors in Mexico," said Mabel.
+
+"Nor I," agreed Shirley. "Do you suppose it was an accident?"
+
+"I don't know what to think," replied Mabel.
+
+There was no denying the fact that both girls were badly frightened.
+They darted hither and thither about the room, seeking a means of
+egress; but there was none and they finally sat down.
+
+"It must have been an accident," said Shirley at last. "Surely Mrs.
+Sebastian would have no reason for wishing to keep us prisoners."
+
+"That's what I think," Mabel agreed. "The door must have locked itself."
+
+"Well, all we can do is wait for some one to return," said Shirley.
+
+And so they waited.
+
+As the minutes passed, each seemingly more slowly than the one that had
+gone before, the fright of the girls increased.
+
+An hour passed and still Mrs. Sebastian had not returned.
+
+Shirley was about to speak, when they heard the sounds of footsteps
+outside and the doorknob turned. The door opened and Mrs. Sebastian
+stepped in smiling.
+
+"I had no idea I had been gone so long," she exclaimed. "Why didn't you
+call me? You have been as quiet as mice."
+
+Shirley and Mabel each drew a breath of great relief.
+
+"Then you didn't lock us in purposely?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Lock you in? What do you mean?"
+
+"The door was locked and we couldn't get out. That's why we were so
+quiet," replied Shirley, laughing. "We thought you had locked us in."
+
+"The idea!" exclaimed Mrs. Sebastian. "The door locked?" She approached
+and examined it. Then she looked up with a smile. "Why, the catch is
+on," she exclaimed, smiling. "And were you frightened?"
+
+"No, not much," replied Mabel slowly. "We knew it must have been locked
+accidentally."
+
+"Of course," replied the woman. "Now would you care to wash up a bit?
+Dinner will be ready in fifteen minutes."
+
+The girls nodded and the woman led the way. Fifteen minutes later all
+were seated in the cozy dining room, where Shirley and Mabel had their
+first introduction to Mexican cooking.
+
+Each girl sampled everything that was placed before her, and in spite of
+their efforts to try and enjoy the meal, disappointment was written
+large on their features. Mrs. Sebastian noticed this and laughed, while
+the donna and her husband smiled slightly.
+
+"So you don't like the Mexican dishes," said Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+"Well, they are a little too hot for me," said Shirley, somewhat
+ruefully.
+
+"Try some of these tortillas," said the man, "perhaps you will find them
+to your liking, though they are warm."
+
+The girls tried some, but with no better result. They finally gave up in
+despair.
+
+The meal over, Mrs. Sebastian led the way back to the other room, which
+apparently was the parlor. Here all sat down to talk and the girls spent
+a very pleasant afternoon.
+
+Finally Shirley looked at her watch. "What time did Captain Anderson say
+we would leave?" she asked of Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+"Soon after five o'clock," was the reply. "Why?"
+
+"It's almost four now," replied Shirley. "Hadn't we better be going?"
+
+"Oh, no, we have plenty of time," was the answer. "It will not take us
+so long to get back."
+
+Shirley subsided, and the others continued the conversation.
+
+At half past four Shirley again mentioned the time. Mrs. Sebastian
+arose, spoke a few words to the others in Spanish, and then came over to
+Shirley.
+
+"I have decided," she said, laying a hand on the girl's shoulder, "to
+remain here over night and go on by train to-morrow. Will not you and
+Mabel stay with me?"
+
+"I am sorry, but we can't do that," replied Shirley. "If you will call a
+cab for us and direct the driver, we shall not trouble you to take us
+back to the boat."
+
+"But we should like to have you stay," said the donna.
+
+"We would indeed be glad to do so, but father would worry," said Mabel.
+
+The Don also added his voice, but the girls turned a deaf ear. Both
+arose and put on their hats. Then they approached to tell their hosts
+good-bye.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian spoke quickly to the Don and his wife in Spanish. Then
+she turned to the girls.
+
+"Come," she said, "remove your hats and stay."
+
+"It is impossible," replied Mabel.
+
+"We would be glad to if we could," said Shirley, "but we must hurry now,
+or we shall be too late, and the ship will go without us."
+
+The girls turned toward the door.
+
+"One moment," said Mrs. Sebastian, raising a hand.
+
+The girls halted in their tracks.
+
+"We must insist upon your staying over with us," said the woman quietly.
+
+"But--" began Shirley.
+
+"I said we must insist," repeated Mrs. Sebastian. "You may as well
+remove your hats."
+
+Both girls stared at her in utter astonishment. Shirley was the first to
+grasp the significance of the situation.
+
+"Then it is true!" she exclaimed; "the door was locked! We are
+prisoners!"
+
+The man of the house bowed low.
+
+"Prisoners, or guests," he said. "It shall be as you prefer."
+
+Shirley did not reply, but leaped quickly toward the door. The others
+were across the room and could not interfere. The door swung open, and
+Shirley called out:
+
+"Quick, Mabel! Run!"
+
+Mabel sprang after her friend.
+
+But the time taken to open the door proved costly. Before Shirley could
+dart through it, Mrs. Sebastian had her by both shoulders, while the
+other woman held Mabel powerless.
+
+Then they led the girls back into the room and bade them sit down.
+Perceiving the uselessness of resistance, the girls obeyed.
+
+Mabel immediately broke into tears, and Shirley threw her arms about
+her.
+
+"Don't cry, dearie," she exclaimed. "We are in no danger. They will not
+dare to harm us."
+
+She gazed at their three captors angrily.
+
+"What do you want with us?" she demanded.
+
+"You shall know in good time," replied Mrs. Sebastian gruffly.
+
+Her manner had undergone a sudden change. She was no longer the
+good-natured, smiling companion of the steamer. Her face was hard, and
+she seemed to have aged ten years.
+
+She turned to the other woman.
+
+"Bring paper, pen and ink," she commanded.
+
+The latter hurried away to obey this order, and returned a few moments
+later, bearing the required articles, which she placed on a table.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian drew up several chairs and motioned the two girls, who
+had been staring at them curiously, to take the seats.
+
+Both realized it would be useless to refuse and did as commanded. Mrs.
+Sebastian passed the paper, pen and ink to Shirley.
+
+"Write as I dictate," she ordered.
+
+Here Shirley protested.
+
+"What is it you wish me to write?" she asked.
+
+"You'll hear quick enough," was the reply. "Write."
+
+Shirley replaced the pen gently on the table.
+
+"Not until you tell me what you want me to write, and to whom," she
+replied quietly.
+
+The others looked at her in surprise, then conversed a few moments in
+Spanish. At last Mrs. Sebastian said:
+
+"The letter is to your father and to Colonel Ashton. It will contain a
+demand for $20,000--$10,000 apiece--for your return."
+
+Shirley rose suddenly to her feet and gave a cry of amazement.
+
+"You mean that we are to be held for ransom?" she exclaimed in unbelief.
+
+"Exactly," replied the man.
+
+"And so you are robbers," exclaimed Shirley scornfully.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian's face flushed.
+
+"No," she replied quietly. "But the patriotic forces in Mexico are in
+need of money. We have taken this means of getting it for them. Your
+fathers are rich. They will not miss the money, and it will mean so much
+to us."
+
+"And if we refuse to write?" asked Shirley.
+
+"You probably will spend the remainder of your days in Mexico. But you
+won't refuse. Come now, write as I dictate."
+
+"May I speak to my friend in private first?" asked Shirley.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian hesitated. Then:
+
+"Yes, but be quick."
+
+Shirley and Mabel put their heads close together.
+
+"Shall I write the letter, Mabel?" asked Shirley.
+
+"Yes," was the instant reply. "Then Dad will know we are in danger and
+just what sort of danger. It is the only way we can get word to the
+others. I know they will find us."
+
+"I guess you're right," agreed Shirley.
+
+She returned to her place at the table, and picked up the pen.
+
+"Dictate and I shall write," she said.
+
+"I am glad to see you are so sensible," smiled Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+She dictated and Shirley wrote. When she had finished she had both girls
+affix their signatures, and then address an envelope.
+
+She clapped her hands and a young native boy entered the room. To him
+Mrs. Sebastian gave the letter and spoke in Spanish, whereupon the boy
+hurried away.
+
+Hardly had he gone when there came three sharp knocks at the door
+without. The conspirators looked at each other in alarm, and the hopes
+of Shirley and Mabel rose suddenly.
+
+But the latter were doomed to disappointment. Mrs. Sebastian left the
+room, only to return a few moments later followed by the figure of a
+man.
+
+Shirley took one look at him, and gave a cry of surprise.
+
+The newcomer was Captain Von Blusen!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.--THE SEARCHING PARTY.
+
+
+A long blast from the whistle of the _Yucatan_ broke the stillness of
+late afternoon.
+
+Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Dick, who were peering shoreward from
+the deck of the steamer with straining eyes, looked anxiously at each
+other.
+
+"What can be detaining them?" exclaimed the former.
+
+"I am sure I don't know," returned Colonel Ashton. "They probably will
+be here in a few minutes."
+
+A boat put off from shore; it was the last of the _Yucatan's_ small
+craft, which had been awaiting the return of late passengers. It was too
+far away for the watchers to identify those aboard it.
+
+Mr. Willing breathed a sigh of relief.
+
+"I guess they are coming at last," he said.
+
+The three watched the approach of the boat eagerly. At last it came
+close enough to make out the occupants. There was not a woman aboard.
+
+Cries of alarm issued from the lips of the three watchers. At the same
+moment there came another blast from the steamer's siren.
+
+"They are not in the boat!" exclaimed Dick. "What shall we do?"
+
+Mr. Willing did not stop to reply. He hurried toward the bridge where
+Captain Anderson stood, ready to give the signal to up-anchor
+immediately the small boat was hoisted aboard.
+
+Mr. Willing, closely followed by Colonel Ashton and Dick, rushed up to
+him.
+
+"Captain!" exclaimed Mr. Willing. "My daughter and the colonel's
+daughter and Mrs. Sebastian are still ashore. They are not in the last
+boat. What is to be done?"
+
+The captain turned the matter over in his mind.
+
+"We should be on our way now," he replied at last. "I am afraid we shall
+have to go without them."
+
+Mr. Willing let out a roar of protest.
+
+"No you don't!" he cried. "You can't go and leave my daughter behind
+like that."
+
+"Well, what would you have me do?" asked the captain.
+
+"Wait!" was the reply. "Wait for them!"
+
+The captain looked at his watch.
+
+"It's five thirty now," he said. "I shall wait until six thirty."
+
+With this the others were forced to be content.
+
+"If they haven't come then, we'll have the captain set us ashore," said
+the colonel.
+
+The passengers from the last boat came over the side, and Mr. Willing
+questioned them eagerly. None had seen any sign of the missing ones.
+
+Dick, gazing over the rail, uttered a cry and pointed across the water.
+
+A boat was putting off from shore and coming toward the steamer.
+
+"I guess they are coming at last," said Colonel Ashton. "I'll read Mabel
+a lecture when she gets here."
+
+As the boat approached closer it became evident that it had but a single
+occupant; and as it drew still nearer, that the occupant was a young
+native.
+
+Captain Anderson hailed him through his megaphone.
+
+"What do you want?" he shouted in Spanish.
+
+"Message for Senor Willing!" came the reply.
+
+Five minutes later, bowing and scraping, the boy put a message into Mr.
+Willing's hands.
+
+The latter tore it open quickly and his eyes devoured the words in a
+moment. Then he gave a cry of rage.
+
+"What's the matter?" asked Colonel Ashton and Dick in a single voice.
+
+For reply, Mr. Willing read them the contents of the letter--a demand
+for $20,000 if the girls were ever to be seen again.
+
+Mr. Willing and the others rushed again toward the captain on the
+bridge. The captain read the letter gravely.
+
+"I wish I could help you, sir," he said at last. "But it is impossible.
+I must get under way within half an hour.
+
+"Hey! Where you going?" This last to the native boy who had suddenly
+leaped into the water, climbed into his boat and was making off toward
+the shore.
+
+"Get him!" cried the captain to his first officer.
+
+One of the _Yucatan's_ boats put off and gave chase.
+
+But the distance was too great to overtake the fugitive, and it was soon
+apparent that he would make his escape.
+
+"If we had laid hold of him we might have learned something," said
+Captain Anderson. "He knows where the girls are. But it's too late now."
+
+"What can we do?" demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+
+"My advice," said the captain, "is that you stay behind and put the
+matter in the hands of the American consul. He can tell you better what
+to do than I can."
+
+"Where did the message say to leave the money, Willing?" asked Colonel
+Ashton.
+
+Mr. Willing passed him the letter.
+
+"Nine o'clock, southeast corner San Francisco street, Tuesday. Check
+payable to Miguel Martinez will do. Come alone," read the colonel.
+
+"H-m-m, must have lots of confidence in themselves if they can use a
+check."
+
+"Now gentlemen," said Captain Anderson, "the best I can do is to set you
+ashore. I must get under way immediately. I'm sorry, but I have my other
+passengers to think of."
+
+Mr. Willing acknowledged the justice of this.
+
+"Give us ten minutes to get some things together and a boat to set us
+ashore then," he said.
+
+The captain consented, and Dick and the two men hastened to their
+cabins, where they gathered what few belongings they could.
+
+"We'll have the captain dispose of the rest in Frisco," said the
+colonel. "We'll get them when we get there."
+
+This the captain agreed to do, and ten minutes later the three were
+rushing shoreward in the steamer's powerful gasoline launch. Immediately
+they clambered out, the launch put back to the ship.
+
+"Reckon we had better go straight to the consulate, colonel," said Mr.
+Willing.
+
+"Right. But how are we going to find it?"
+
+"I'll try some of these natives. Some of 'em must speak English."
+
+After two unsuccessful attempts, Mr. Willing was successful in his
+quest.
+
+Half an hour later they were in the presence of the American Consul, Mr.
+Edwards, to whom they explained the matter.
+
+"What are they, a band of robbers?" asked Dick.
+
+"I should say they are probably revolutionists," replied the consul.
+"The situation here is peculiar. All factions are at war with each
+other. The latest so-called patriots are followers of Carranza, and I
+happen to know are without funds. If they can't pay their men they will
+lose them. I wouldn't be surprised if they were the ones who had
+captured your daughters."
+
+"Well, what are we going to do about it?" demanded Mr. Willing.
+
+"To tell the truth, there isn't much we can do. Officially, I am
+powerless. The United States hasn't recognized the Carranza faction, and
+for that reason I cannot call on its agents officially. However, I can
+pay a personal call upon Senor Jorge Hernandez. He may know something."
+
+"Then let's get busy at once," cried Dick.
+
+"I don't suppose you care to pay this ransom, Mr. Willing?" asked the
+consul.
+
+"I'll pay it if I can't get my daughter back any other way. If she is in
+danger I shall pay it anyhow."
+
+"I am sure that she is in no danger of violence," returned the consul.
+"They would not harm an American at this crisis. All they will do is to
+hold her in the hope that eventually you will pay. I would advise
+against paying the ransom at once."
+
+"I shall follow your advice, sir," said Mr. Willing. "You know more
+about these brutes than I do."
+
+"Then we shall call on Hernandez," said the consul. "Come."
+
+He called a cab, and all were soon at the home of Senor Hernandez, who
+Consul Edwards explained, was one of the foremost of the revolutionists
+in western Mexico.
+
+Senor Hernandez received them cordially, and expressed surprise at the
+story Mr. Willing related. He even called his wife into consultation.
+
+"If our party is concerned in this matter I am not aware of it," he told
+them. "I shall make inquiries, and if I find it is true, someone shall
+pay dearly."
+
+"Oh, some of your fellows have captured them all right," declared Dick
+angrily. "I wouldn't be surprised if you know all about it."
+
+"Sir!" exclaimed the Mexican, drawing himself up.
+
+"Mr. Stanley!" exclaimed the consul. "You forget yourself!"
+
+Even Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton apologized to the Mexican for Dick's
+outburst.
+
+"Say no more about it, senors," was the suave reply. "Youth is always
+hot-headed, you know."
+
+"I didn't say it because I am hot-headed," declared Dick. "I said it
+because I mean it."
+
+Hernandez gazed at the others with an air of wounded dignity.
+
+"If I am to be insulted, I shall not continue the interview longer," he
+said.
+
+"The boy meant no harm, senor," said the consul. "He is just angry,
+that's all."
+
+"Then, I shall speak more with you if he is excused," was the reply.
+
+The consul looked at Dick.
+
+"You had better go outside," he said. "You have already made trouble
+enough."
+
+Dick was on the point of making an angry retort, but checked himself.
+
+"Very well," he said. "I shall wait for you without."
+
+He left the room, and went out on to the street, where he stood gazing
+first this way and then that while he waited for the appearance of the
+others.
+
+A man swung sharply past him in the darkness. Dick was caught by the
+other's erect carriage, plainly that of a military man.
+
+"Too tall for a Mexican," muttered Dick. "I'll have a look at him."
+
+He followed. Under a dim street light half a block away the man paused
+to light a cigar. The flare of the match lighted up his features.
+
+"Von Blusen!" exclaimed Dick. "I'll bet he is mixed up in this in some
+way. I'll follow him."
+
+Taking pains to avoid being discovered, he set out on Von Blusen's
+trail.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.--FLIGHT.
+
+
+When Mrs. Sebastian entered the room where Shirley and Mabel were held
+prisoners, followed by Captain Von Blusen, she immediately addressed her
+fellow conspirators.
+
+"This," she said, indicating the German officer, "is Captain Von Blusen,
+a German naval officer. He informs me that he is seeking, for his
+government, a naval base on the Pacific. In return for this the German
+government will pay handsomely."
+
+"In that event," replied the Mexican, who it now developed was none
+other than Miguel Martinez, "we may do business. Take a seat, senor."
+
+Von Blusen did so, and for the first time his eyes fell upon the two
+girls.
+
+"Miss Ashton! Miss Willing!" he exclaimed. "What are you doing here?"
+
+"We are prisoners," replied Shirley bitterly.
+
+"Why?" demanded the captain.
+
+"Held for ransom," replied Shirley.
+
+The captain smiled.
+
+"A good idea," he said turning to the others. "An excellent manner in
+which to raise money, providing you are not caught."
+
+"I was not aware that you were acquainted with these young ladies," said
+Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+"Oh, yes indeed! I know them well," was the reply. "In fact I have a
+little score to settle with them myself. One of our best laid plans was
+foiled because of them."
+
+"So?" queried Martinez. "Will you explain, captain?"
+
+"With pleasure."
+
+The captain did so, and the others listened with amazement to the story
+of the plot to capture the _Yucatan_, and its ultimate outcome.
+
+"They are smart girls," declared Mrs. Sebastian, "but this time I
+believe we have them safe."
+
+"I sincerely hope so," was the reply.
+
+An hour later the girls were left alone.
+
+"What on earth shall we do?" exclaimed Mabel.
+
+"There is nothing we can do," replied Shirley. "We must wait for some
+one to rescue us."
+
+"Do you suppose there is anything in what Captain Von Blusen gave as his
+reason for being here?"
+
+"Of course; but the thing that puzzles me is how he got here so soon.
+You remember how we left him?"
+
+"Yes. But he's a very resourceful man. I wish he were on our side."
+
+"So do I. If he were, we might get away."
+
+It was after seven o'clock when Mrs. Sebastian, Martinez and his wife
+reentered the room.
+
+"We have had no reply from your fathers as yet," said the former.
+"However, we did not really expect one. It is to be hoped for your sakes
+that they leave the money to-night."
+
+"I don't believe they will," replied Shirley quietly.
+
+"So much the worse for you then."
+
+At this moment a native boy came in and announced that the American
+consul was without, accompanied by two strangers, and that he desired
+immediate communication with Senor Hernandez.
+
+"Well, they are on the trail," said Martinez, with a laugh. "I wonder
+what the consul would think if he knew that Hernandez and Martinez were
+one and the same person. Well, I shall see the consul. You be very quiet
+in here, for you know how sounds carry in this house."
+
+Mrs. Sebastian nodded, and Martinez, alias Hernandez, made his way from
+the room.
+
+He returned an hour later with a smile on his face.
+
+"I've thrown them off the track, all right," he said gleefully. "I was
+startled for a moment, though. There was a little whipper-snapper with
+the two Americanos--Senor Stanley is his name--and he accused me of
+knowing the whereabouts of the prisoners. I denied it, and Consul
+Edwards rebuked him and sent him from the room."
+
+At this moment there came footsteps running rapidly down the hall, and a
+moment later Captain Von Blusen burst in excitedly.
+
+"Quick!" he cried. "We must get away from here."
+
+"Here! here!" said Hernandez calmly. "What is the matter? Give an
+account of yourself."
+
+"I was walking along the street," said Von Blusen, "when I came across
+one of the Americans from aboard the _Yucatan_."
+
+"Who?" demanded Mrs. Sebastian anxiously.
+
+"Young Stanley," cried the captain.
+
+"Stanley?" repeated the others.
+
+"Yes. I heard someone following me, and I waited for him to come up.
+When I saw who it was I hit him with my fist and knocked him down. He
+was up in a moment, though, and pitched into me. We had quite a tussle,
+but I finally managed to get away and come here to warn you."
+
+"And were you followed?"
+
+"I don't know."
+
+"The Kaiser must be proud of you," sneered Hernandez. "If you have
+botched his plans as you have ours, he would have you shot. Come," he
+turned to the two women, "the game is up. We shall have to fly. If the
+Americano has followed this man here, my connection must soon be
+discovered. Consul Edwards will suspect. We must fly!"
+
+"Where?" exclaimed Mrs. Sebastian.
+
+"Mazatlan. We have just time to catch the night train. Hurry!"
+
+The two women turned and dashed from the room and Hernandez turned to
+the girls.
+
+"Put on your hats," he said gruffly.
+
+The girls obeyed without a word, for they could see the man was very
+angry.
+
+Then he turned to Captain Von Blusen.
+
+"As for you," he said, "you keep out of my sight in the future. Approach
+me again and I will have you shot."
+
+"But--" began the captain.
+
+Hernandez produced a revolver which he levelled at the German.
+
+"I guess I had better do it now," he declared. "It will save trouble."
+
+His finger tightened on the trigger.
+
+But before he could fire, Shirley sprang forward with a cry and seized
+the arm that held the revolver.
+
+Hernandez whirled on her angrily, but as he did so, Captain Von Blusen
+sprang forward and struck the man a heavy blow on the head with his
+fist. Hernandez toppled over.
+
+Captain Von Blusen turned to the girls.
+
+"I can do you no good here," he said hurriedly. "I'll tell your friends
+where you are being taken and we shall save you."
+
+He darted from the room and disappeared.
+
+Shirley and Mabel made as though to follow him, but before they reached
+the door, the two women reappeared. Mrs. Sebastian took in the situation
+with a quick glance and bent over Hernandez, who was now stirring
+feebly. Directly he sat up and his gaze roved about the room.
+
+"Where did he go?" he cried.
+
+"Who?" asked his wife.
+
+"The German! The man who knocked me down."
+
+"He's gone," said Mrs. Sebastian. "Come, Hernandez, we have no time to
+lose."
+
+Hernandez staggered to his feet, and his gaze rested on Shirley. He took
+a threatening step forward.
+
+"You--" he began.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian threw herself between them.
+
+"There will be no harm done these girls while I am here," she said
+quietly. "Please remember that."
+
+As Hernandez still seemed on the point of trying to get at Shirley, the
+woman suddenly produced a revolver, which she levelled directly at him.
+
+"Stand back!" she cried. "Haven't you any sense? Don't you know what
+would happen should harm befall either of these girls?"
+
+"She is right," said the man's wife. "Come, let us go."
+
+Hernandez muttered to himself, but he turned away.
+
+In response to his call the native boy again appeared and announced that
+a closed cab was at the door.
+
+Hernandez led the way, and Mrs. Sebastian motioned for the girls to
+follow him. The two women brought up the rear.
+
+Outside all climbed into the cab and were soon being driven away.
+
+Neither girl uttered a word as the cab bumped along the uneven street,
+but each was badly frightened. For half an hour the cab continued its
+way and then it came to a stop.
+
+"Not a word!" ordered Hernandez of the two girls, as he prepared to
+alight.
+
+The girls had sense enough to obey this injunction and went into the
+little station, dimly lighted, and boarded the waiting train without so
+much as speaking to each other.
+
+As Shirley glanced back over her shoulder while climbing up the steps,
+she caught sight of a familiar figure lurking in the shadows. She could
+not be certain, but she felt positive that the man was Captain Von
+Blusen.
+
+Captors and captives took seats at the rear end of the last car, where
+they sat in silence until the train began to move. Then, for the first
+time, did Hernandez breath in relief.
+
+"Safe enough now," he declared.
+
+"But they may telegraph ahead and have us detained," said his wife.
+
+"No one knows we have come this way save Captain Von Blusen," was the
+reply, "and it will not be to his interests to interfere with us."
+
+Shirley and Mabel now found themselves able to converse without being
+overheard by the others.
+
+"I saw Captain Von Blusen in the station as we climbed aboard," said
+Shirley.
+
+"Do you think he will help us?" asked Mabel.
+
+"I don't know, but some way I feel that he will. He seemed sincere
+enough when he spoke just before he left."
+
+"My goodness gracious! I hope something turns up soon!" exclaimed Mabel.
+"Our Dads must be worried to death."
+
+"Well, if Dick is on the trail, I am sure we shall be rescued," declared
+Shirley.
+
+"You have lots of confidence in Dick, haven't you?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Of course. Why shouldn't I have?"
+
+"Well, I hope we are rescued soon."
+
+"Some way, I believe we shall be," declared Shirley.
+
+The train sped on through the darkness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.--ON THE TRAIL.
+
+
+It will now be necessary to go back a little ways.
+
+When Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing, and U. S. Consul Edwards left the home
+of Hernandez, alias Martinez, following their brief interview, they
+looked about for Dick who had said he would wait for them on the
+outside; but having set forth on the trail of Captain Blusen, Dick, of
+course, was not in sight.
+
+"Guess the young man has gone back to the consulate in a huff," said the
+consul with a slight smile.
+
+"He shouldn't have spoken as he did," declared Mr. Willing.
+
+"Is there any chance that he was right in his conjectures?" asked
+Colonel Ashton slowly.
+
+"Hardly," replied the consul dryly. "Hernandez is a queer man, but he
+would hardly do a thing like that."
+
+"Well, I don't know," replied the colonel. "I have found that you never
+go far wrong when you listen to what a newspaper reporter says. They
+seem to smell out these things."
+
+"He's on the wrong scent now," declared Edwards.
+
+At the consulate they could find no trace of Dick.
+
+"What can have happened?" demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+
+"Oh, he'll turn up," declared the consul. "We'll wait."
+
+They sat down to await the return of Dick, meanwhile talking over what
+was best to be done.
+
+Meantime, Dick, on the trail of Captain Von Blusen, was having troubles
+of his own. He had approached too close behind the German, and the
+latter had realized he was being followed.
+
+Rounding a corner, the German officer stopped abruptly. As Dick swung
+around the corner he recognized him instantly and struck out with his
+fist. The blow caught Dick on the side of the head and he went down.
+
+He was up in a moment, however, and grappled with his opponent. In this
+sort of fighting the German was no match for Dick, but he finally
+succeeded in breaking the latter's hold, and took to his heels.
+
+Dick ran after him.
+
+Unconsciously the German took the direction from which he had just come,
+and not stopping to think that he might be followed, had thus betrayed
+the rendezvous. He ran straight to Hernandez' home, as we already know,
+and Dick recognized it.
+
+Captain Von Blusen entered by the back door, and there Dick stopped. He
+had seen enough to tell him just how the situation stood, and realizing
+that he could accomplish little himself and that haste therefore was
+essential, he hurried back to the consulate.
+
+"Where have you been?" cried Mr. Willing jumping to his feet as Dick
+burst into the room.
+
+"I've been trailing Von Blusen, sir."
+
+"Von Blusen!"
+
+"Yes, sir, and I have learned enough to warrant my belief that Hernandez
+is concerned in the disappearance of Shirley and Mabel."
+
+In a few words he related what had occurred.
+
+Consul Edwards drummed upon the table with his fingers for several
+minutes. Then he rose to his feet.
+
+"You must be right," he said, "although it seems impossible. Are you
+armed?"
+
+The others shook their heads. The consul left the room and returned a
+moment later with a revolver for each.
+
+"We may not need them, but it's best to be prepared," he said grimly.
+
+"What are you going to do?" asked Colonel Ashton.
+
+"We shall go back and call on Hernandez. In my official capacity, of
+course, I could not do this, but I'm willing to take a chance. We'll
+search the house from top to bottom."
+
+They did not enter the home of Hernandez by the manner in which they had
+gone before. Dick led the way to the place he had seen Captain Von
+Blusen enter, and tried the door.
+
+To his surprise it opened easily, and Dick, with weapon ready, led the
+way in. From first one room to the other they went, Consul Edwards
+lighting the way with a pocket searchlight.
+
+Suddenly Dick stooped and picked up something. The consul turned the
+light on it. It was a small handkerchief. Dick looked it over for a mark
+of identification. In the corner he saw two initials, "S. W."
+
+He passed it to Mr. Willing.
+
+"Shirley's!" exclaimed the latter, after a glance at it.
+
+"We are on the right track," declared the consul.
+
+They continued the search of the house, but not a soul could they find.
+From top to bottom and back again they went, but the result, of course,
+was the same.
+
+At last they were forced to give it up.
+
+"I have it!" exclaimed Dick suddenly. "Von Blusen warned them and they
+have taken the girls some place else."
+
+"That's it, of course," said the consul. "Well there is nothing more we
+can do to-night, but I'll promise to have the town raked with a
+fine-tooth comb the first thing in the morning. If they are here, we
+shall find them before noon."
+
+"But where can they be to-night?" demanded Mr. Willing anxiously.
+
+The consul shrugged his shoulders.
+
+"_Quien sabe?_ as the natives say," he replied. "However, you may make
+sure they are in no danger."
+
+With this the others were forced to be content, and Edwards led the way
+back to the consulate. Here he suggested cigars before all should turn
+in for the night, and they sat down to talk over the situation.
+
+"I'll have every house in town searched from top to bottom in the
+morning," said the consul. "They must be here, so we shall of course
+find them."
+
+"I wish there was something we could do to-night," declared Dick. "This
+inaction makes me restless."
+
+"It makes me that way too, young man," declared Mr. Willing, "but the
+consul undoubtedly knows best. We shall leave it to him."
+
+Consul Edwards looked at Dick inquisitively.
+
+"What I would like to have you tell me," he said, "is why you suspected
+Hernandez in the first place?"
+
+"I don't know exactly," replied Dick slowly. "But he is a shifty-eyed
+old villain, and can't look at you. I have learned that a man like that
+is not to be trusted. I was morally certain he was lying. I don't know
+why, but I just seemed to feel it."
+
+"Well, you figured it out and no mistake. I wouldn't be surprised now to
+learn that Hernandez and Martinez are one and the same person."
+
+"They are!" came a voice from one of the open windows.
+
+The four within the room started suddenly to their feet, and the consul
+advanced.
+
+"Who and what are you?" he called, with his hand resting on his
+revolver. "Come out and show yourself."
+
+There was a sound of someone climbing in the window, and a moment later
+a man stood before them. Colonel Ashton, Mr. Willing and Dick leaped to
+their feet with cries of amazement.
+
+The newcomer was Captain Von Blusen.
+
+Dick took a quick stride forward, and his hand grasped the young German
+by the collar of his coat.
+
+"I'll guarantee you won't get away this time," he said grimly.
+
+"Who are you and what do you want here?" demanded the consul, who had
+never seen the officer before.
+
+"This," said Dick to the consul, "is the man who gave the warning in
+time to allow the girls to be taken to some other hiding place."
+
+"Is that true, sir?" demanded the consul, taking a step forward.
+
+Von Blusen nodded.
+
+"It is," he replied briefly.
+
+"Then you shall answer to me for your part in this outrage," declared
+Mr. Willing, advancing with great anger.
+
+"And to me," declared Colonel Ashton, also advancing.
+
+Captain Von Blusen raised a hand.
+
+"One moment, gentlemen," he said calmly.
+
+"Give the man a chance to speak," said the consul. "He shall not get
+away, and I'll give you my word he'll do no further mischief. What have
+you to say for yourself?"
+
+"Well, I can tell you where the two young ladies have been taken."
+
+"You can?" exclaimed the colonel eagerly. "Where?"
+
+"Mazatlan!"
+
+"Mazatlan? Where is Mazatlan?" demanded the consul.
+
+"As to that I cannot say. They left on the train not half an hour ago."
+
+"Are you sure?"
+
+"Positive. I followed to make certain, that I might tell you."
+
+"And why are you so interested in telling us?" asked Dick skeptically.
+
+"For one reason, because Miss Willing saved my life no longer than an
+hour ago," was the calm reply.
+
+"It is true," he continued, seeing that the others eyed him in
+amazement.
+
+He then went into details of the scene that had occurred following his
+return to Hernandez after his fight with Dick in the street.
+
+"But how are we going to find them in Mazatlan?" exclaimed Colonel
+Ashton.
+
+"You might wire ahead and have them taken from the train," suggested
+Dick.
+
+"No, I have a better plan than that," declared the consul.
+
+"What is it?" asked the others eagerly.
+
+"We'll kill two birds with one stone. I'll wire the American consular
+agent there to have them shadowed when they leave the train. Then we'll
+not only be able to rescue the young ladies, but the Mexican authorities
+will nab the plotters."
+
+"An excellent plan," declared Colonel Ashton. "Now how shall we get
+there?"
+
+"There is not another train till morning," said the consul, "but," and a
+twinkle came into his eyes, "if you have the price, I can guarantee to
+have a special engine and one car ready to go within the hour, and I can
+promise a clear track ahead."
+
+"Let's have it no matter what the cost!" roared Mr. Willing. "I want my
+girl back as soon as I can get her!"
+
+"And so do I," shouted Colonel Ashton.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.--IN MAZATLAN.
+
+
+It was a long tedious journey to Mazatlan, and it was after noon of the
+following day when Shirley and Mabel followed their captors from the
+train upon which they had spent the night and morning.
+
+"I'm glad to get off that train, I don't care what happens," said Mabel
+as the five made their way through the dingy-looking station.
+
+"I should say so," agreed Shirley. "I'm so sleepy I could fall right
+over here."
+
+"I managed to get a few winks during the night," returned Mabel. "I
+curled up in the seat."
+
+"I couldn't sleep that way. I tried, but it was no use."
+
+They had now reached the street side of the station, and here Hernandez
+signalled a passing cab. Into this the girls were thrust and then the
+two women and the man climbed in. Hernandez gave an address to the
+driver, and the cab whirled away.
+
+None of the occupants saw a man, who had been loitering about the
+station when the train pulled in, hail a second cab and come after them.
+This was the man who had been delegated to shadow them upon the request,
+by wire, of Consul Edwards at Acapulco.
+
+To Shirley and Mabel it seemed that they rode through the streets of the
+city for hours before the cab stopped its bumping and drew up before a
+typical Mexican native house in the outskirts of the town. Hernandez and
+the two women climbed out, and the girls followed them into the house.
+
+The man in the pursuing cab ordered his driver to halt while still some
+distance away. Then he dismissed the driver and approached the house
+afoot. He saw the five figures enter the dwelling and approached no
+nearer, but took a stand some distance away, where from time to time, he
+looked at his watch.
+
+An hour passed, then two, and at length the man turned and walked away.
+
+Inside the house Shirley and Mabel had been shown to a back room, the
+windows of which they saw were heavily barred. Mrs. Sebastian
+accompanied them.
+
+"Now girls," she said, "if you are quiet and make no trouble, I am sure
+that you will be freed before long."
+
+"You mean we won't have to wait for ransom?" asked Shirley eagerly.
+
+"No, I don't mean that. But I am sure the money will be paid over within
+a day or two."
+
+"And we shall have to stay here all that time?"
+
+"Yes. I wish I could interest you in our cause. You could do lots for us
+if you chose."
+
+"Thanks, but I don't care to listen to the troubles of criminals,"
+declared Shirley.
+
+The woman's face turned red.
+
+"You do us an injustice," she replied. "What I have done has been for my
+country."
+
+"I thought you were a Spaniard," interrupted Mabel.
+
+"I am, on my mother's side," was the reply. "My father was a Mexican."
+
+"Well, I wouldn't be mixed up in any such business," declared Mabel. "I
+think you should be punished for the manner in which you got us in your
+power."
+
+"But it was for my country. Surely you can understand that?"
+
+"No, I can't understand it," declared Shirley. "It's robbery that you
+are attempting."
+
+The woman shrugged her shoulders.
+
+"There is no use talking to you," she said.
+
+She went out of the room, locking the door behind her.
+
+"Well, here we are," said Mabel, with a wry look at her chum. "Now, what
+are we going to do?"
+
+"I wish we could escape," declared Shirley. "I'll tell you what. The
+next time we hear any one coming, we'll stand behind the door, and as
+soon as they come in we'll slip out and run. If we can reach the street
+some one may help us."
+
+"There will be no harm trying," Mabel agreed. "They won't hurt us, I am
+sure."
+
+It was several hours later before they had the opportunity of putting
+their plan to the test.
+
+"Quick! Here comes some one!" whispered Shirley.
+
+She took her stand behind the door and Mabel joined her there. A key
+turned in the lock, and the door swung slowly inward. The girls were out
+of sight behind the door.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian, being unable to see them, advanced into the room with a
+startled exclamation, and looked hurriedly about. Seizing a moment when
+the woman was looking the other way, Shirley, closely followed by Mabel,
+dashed from her place of concealment and out the door.
+
+Mabel was just disappearing through the door when Mrs. Sebastian wheeled
+suddenly about and caught sight of her. The woman sprang forward with a
+cry, but Mabel, in passing, had seized the knob of the door and pulled
+it to after her.
+
+It was the work of an instant to turn the key in the lock, and Mrs.
+Sebastian was safe in the girls' recent prison.
+
+"Now what?" said Shirley when Mabel had come up to her.
+
+From the room they had just quitted a series of blows were rained on the
+door, and Mrs. Sebastian's voice could be heard calling for help.
+
+"No one knows she's in there so if the disturbance is heard they'll
+think it is us," declared Mabel. "If we are silent and careful now, we
+may be able to get out."
+
+Shirley advanced cautiously and peered into the next room. Then she
+returned to Mabel.
+
+"No getting out that way," she whispered.
+
+Mabel advanced and looked into the room beyond. In it sat Hernandez and
+his wife.
+
+Shirley nodded her head.
+
+"No, we can't get out there," she agreed.
+
+The girls looked about for some other means of escape.
+
+They now stood in what appeared to be a long and narrow hall, and at
+Shirley's whispered suggestion they went back along it. Far to the rear
+they could see a faint beam of light and Shirley's heart beat faster
+with renewed hope.
+
+At last they came to a high window, through which the light streamed. It
+was out of reach of the girls, but Shirley found a chair which she
+dragged forth and mounted. Her shoulders now were on a level with the
+window.
+
+The girl uttered an exclamation of satisfaction.
+
+"What is it, Shirley?" asked Mabel breathlessly.
+
+"We can get out here," was the reply, "the window is not barred."
+
+"Hurry then," cried Mabel anxiously. "I'll come right after you."
+
+Shirley wasted no further words. She drew herself to the sill, and
+looked down. Then she shuddered slightly. It was a long drop, fully
+twenty feet.
+
+But Shirley did not hesitate, for she realized that the jump must be
+taken. She lowered herself until she clung to the window with her hands,
+then released her hold and dropped.
+
+She fell in a sprawling heap, and she felt a sharp pain in her ankle. In
+spite of this, she was up in an instant, however, and turned her eyes to
+the window, where Mabel's head had just appeared.
+
+The latter drew herself to the window sill, and then glanced down at the
+ground.
+
+"I can't do it, Shirley," she exclaimed.
+
+"Of course you can," called her chum. "Lower yourself as far as you can
+and then drop."
+
+Mabel maneuvered about the window trying to get into such a position
+that she could lower herself. But her fright was such that she was
+afraid to loose her hold long enough to change her position. She looked
+down at Shirley helplessly.
+
+"I tell you I can't," she declared.
+
+"But you must, Mabel," replied Shirley anxiously. "Hurry!"
+
+Again Mabel moved about, but the result was the same.
+
+"Mabel! Jump!" cried Shirley.
+
+Mabel now began to cry, as she moved about a little on her perch.
+
+"I--I--can't, Sh-Shirley," she said. "I am afraid!"
+
+"My goodness!" muttered Shirley to herself. "What shall I do? I can't
+climb back up there after her."
+
+She considered the matter for several moments, the while Mabel sat in
+the window and sobbed. Then Shirley reached a decision, and acted
+immediately.
+
+"Quick, Mabel! Here comes Hernandez!" cried Shirley.
+
+Mabel's hesitancy and fright vanished on the instant. Quickly she
+lowered herself by her hands and dropped to the ground. She fell in a
+heap, but was unhurt and was up again in a moment.
+
+"Where is he?" she asked.
+
+Shirley was forced to laugh.
+
+"I just said that to get you down," she returned. "If I hadn't you would
+have stayed up there all day."
+
+Mabel's tension also relaxed, and the girls moved slowly away from the
+house, Shirley finding that her ankle had stopped hurting and was not
+even swollen.
+
+"Where shall we go?" asked Mabel.
+
+"American consulate, I reckon," replied the girl, "if we can find it."
+
+"We must find it," said Mabel firmly.
+
+"Yes but how. Neither of us can speak Spanish."
+
+"Then we must find a Mexican who speaks English. We should have no
+trouble doing that."
+
+The girls had been walking along rapidly, for they wished to put as much
+space as possible between them and their recent prison; but at the same
+time they did not run for they did not wish to attract attention by the
+appearance of undue haste.
+
+Suddenly there came a cry from behind. Unconsciously both girls stopped
+in their tracks and looked back over their shoulders. But one look was
+enough.
+
+"Run!"
+
+"Run!" cried Shirley in the same breath.
+
+Dashing after them as fast as his stout body would permit, was
+Hernandez.
+
+Shirley and Mabel wasted no time in deciding what was best to be done.
+
+Keeping as close to each other as possible, they took to their heels and
+dashed madly along the street.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.--DICK IN PERIL.
+
+
+The special train bearing Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton, Dick and Captain
+Von Blusen arrived in Mazatlan only two hours after that on which
+Shirley and Mabel had reached the city. The four went at once to the
+American consulate.
+
+Consul Edwards had been unable to accompany them, but after sending the
+telegram requesting that the fugitives be shadowed, he had written a
+note to Consul Harrington at Mazatlan and this he had given to Mr.
+Willing as a means of introduction.
+
+Mr. Willing sent in the letter to the consul, and the latter received
+them immediately.
+
+"I have a man shadowing the fugitives," said the consul. "I told him to
+report here the minute he was sure he had run his quarry to earth."
+
+"Is there no danger they will elude him?" asked Dick anxiously.
+
+"Not much," was the smiling reply. "Fisher was formerly a newspaperman
+and has had considerable experience along that line."
+
+And the consul was right. A short time later Fisher appeared.
+
+"Have you found their refuge?" was Colonel Ashton's first question after
+the introductions had been made.
+
+"I followed a man, two women and two girls to a native house in the
+eastern extremity of the city," was the reply. "I have no doubt they are
+the right ones."
+
+"Good," returned the consul. "Now the first thing to do is to enlist the
+support of General Seauterey, the commandant of the city. Without him we
+can do practically nothing. But he will be glad to capture Hernandez."
+
+The consul took his departure, announcing that he would return as soon
+as possible.
+
+Dick left the room announcing that he would take a little stroll
+outside. Mr. Willing enjoined him to be back by the time the consul
+returned.
+
+Dick, thinking deeply, was unconscious of the passing of time and the
+distance which he had walked. At last he roused himself from his reverie
+and looked at his watch.
+
+"Great Scott!" he exclaimed. "I have been gone more than an hour. I had
+better hurry back."
+
+He gazed about him, and saw that he was in an evil-looking part of the
+town. He swung about on his heel and set out in the direction from which
+he had come.
+
+As he passed a narrow street, even dirtier-looking than the rest, an arm
+suddenly shot out and dealt him a blow across the head, knocking him to
+the ground.
+
+Dick was stunned by the force of the blow, but he was by no means
+deprived of his coolness nor resourcefulness. He rolled over quickly
+several times, seeking to put as much distance as possible between
+himself and his unseen opponent, and then scrambled quickly to his feet.
+
+Two men bore down on him. Short wiry Mexicans they were, and one held a
+knife in his hand. Dick took one look at them, then turned and ran.
+
+But the force of the blow he had just received made it impossible for
+him to run far, and soon he turned, and with his back to the wall of a
+house, faced his adversaries.
+
+Just out of striking distance the latter halted, and spoke to him in
+Spanish. Dick shook his hand, indicating that he did not understand.
+
+"Speak English," he said.
+
+The men conversed together in low tones, then one of them spoke a single
+English word to Dick:
+
+"Money!"
+
+"Oh, I see," said Dick, "you want my money, eh? Well, you won't get it.
+I need it myself."
+
+He shook his head at the men, and they gesticulated angrily, one of them
+raising his knife. Then, with a cry, they sprang forward.
+
+Dick was in a serious predicament and he realized it. But he determined
+to do his best. As the men closed on him, Dick struck out. One of the
+men staggered back.
+
+At that moment there came the sound of pattering feet down the street.
+The men drew back. A second later two running figures came into sight,
+and Dick cried out in amazement.
+
+The figures were Shirley and Mabel, and even as Dick recognized them a
+third form came into view, and this Dick immediately recognized as that
+of Hernandez.
+
+"Shirley! Mabel!" called Dick.
+
+The girls half halted in their stride, and then, with glad cries, came
+toward him.
+
+The men who had attacked Dick, seeing the approach of another man,
+turned and made their way to the next corner, where they stood to watch
+developments.
+
+Hernandez, perceiving that he had but one to contend with, and this a
+young man, advanced confidently. Shirley and Mabel had now reached
+Dick's side, and the three faced the Mexican.
+
+Without a word Hernandez's hand went to his pocket, but Dick was too
+quick for him.
+
+"No you don't," he cried, and sprang forward.
+
+His right fist shot out with stunning force, and the Mexican rolled on
+the ground, his revolver, which he had succeeded in drawing, being
+hurled from his hand.
+
+Dick quickly took each girl by the arm and urged them along.
+
+"Hurry!" he cried.
+
+What he feared came to pass.
+
+Hernandez got quickly to his feet, and perceiving the men who had so
+recently attacked Dick, he beckoned them to him.
+
+As the men came up, he waved his arm at the figures of the two girls and
+the young man.
+
+"Catch them!" he shouted. "Reward!"
+
+The men needed no further urging, but dashed after the three. Dick urged
+the girls along as swiftly as they could go, casting occasional glances
+over his shoulder. He hoped against hope that assistance would come from
+some quarter.
+
+But not a sign of a native officer did he see. The few people they
+passed looked at them curiously, and must have realized the aspect of
+things by the noise of the pursuers, but none offered to lend a helping
+hand.
+
+Several times Dick was on the point of turning back to face the
+pursuers, but he determined only to do this as a last resort to give the
+girls time to get away while he held the others back.
+
+He led the girls sharply around a corner and they ran as fast as they
+could along the dirty street. But the pursuers were gaining, as Dick
+perceived by a quick glance over his shoulder. Then Dick made his
+decision.
+
+As he rounded the next corner he whispered to the girls:
+
+"Run hard!"
+
+He released their arms and stopped, just out of sight from the pursuers.
+
+A moment later they came into view, and Dick was upon them in an
+instant, striking right and left as swiftly as he could. Just as it
+seemed there was a chance of his overcoming his two foes, a third figure
+joined in the fray.
+
+This was Hernandez himself, and he turned the balance in the favor of
+Dick's enemies.
+
+Shirley and Mabel had gone on a few feet when Dick had turned back, for
+they had not known what he was about to do. They missed him in a moment,
+however, and stopped to see what had become of him.
+
+They saw the struggling knot of men, and Shirley cried:
+
+"Oh! Dick will be hurt! What shall we do?"
+
+"What can we do?" demanded Mabel. "Dick said to run. I guess we had
+better run."
+
+"And leave him there like that? I should say not."
+
+"But what can we do?" asked Mabel, in consternation.
+
+"I don't know. But I am not going to run away."
+
+And Shirley resolutely made her way back toward the fighters. Mabel
+followed.
+
+But aid came for Dick even as it had for his first two enemies. And the
+aid was from an unexpected source.
+
+"Hello!" exclaimed a voice in English. "What's going on here?"
+
+"Help!" cried Dick in English.
+
+"An American, eh," said the voice, "and three greasers attacking him
+with knives. Here goes."
+
+Dick felt his enemies give way before him, all but one, and this one he
+sent to the ground with a hard blow to the face. Then he gazed about.
+Nearby stood Shirley and Mabel, and upon the ground were the other two
+Mexicans. Dick looked at the man who had come to his rescue, and gave a
+cry of astonishment.
+
+"Captain Anderson!"
+
+The commander of the _Yucatan_ was no less surprised. He surveyed Dick
+and the two girls critically.
+
+"How in the name of all that's wonderful did you all get together again
+and how did you beat me here?" demanded the captain.
+
+Dick explained his arrival in a few words, and then Shirley took up the
+story.
+
+"But we had no idea of the _Yucatan_ was here," said Dick.
+
+"I landed not fifteen minutes ago," replied the captain. "Of course a
+train runs faster than a boat, which is the reason you are here ahead of
+me. Now I guess you had better return aboard with me."
+
+"We'll go to the consulate first," declared Dick. "The others are
+probably still there."
+
+"Good idea," replied the captain. "I was on my way there now."
+
+He led the way, and the others followed.
+
+But when they reached there they learned, much to the disappointment of
+both girls, that neither the consul nor any of the others were about.
+
+"Consul Harrington and his visitors accompanied General Seauterey and a
+squad of soldiers," a clerk explained. "They left not fifteen minutes
+ago."
+
+"Too bad," declared Captain Anderson. He turned to the girls. "Will you
+remain here or come aboard?" he asked.
+
+"We'll go aboard, thanks," replied Shirley. "I want to get out of this
+city and this country. We can leave word with the clerk here, and
+Mabel's father and mine will come aboard as soon as they return."
+
+"Right you are," agreed Captain Anderson. He addressed the clerk. "When
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton return with the consul," he said, "you
+tell them to come aboard the _Yucatan_ immediately. I have important
+news for them."
+
+"Very well, sir," said the clerk.
+
+"Why didn't you tell him to tell Dad we had been rescued?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Why," replied the captain with a smile, "I was saving that for a little
+surprise."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.--ALL ABOARD AGAIN.
+
+
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton, to go back to the time that Dick left
+them after the departure of Consul Harrington, were greatly alarmed when
+the boy failed to return immediately. Half an hour after his departure
+Consul Harrington returned with General Seauterey and half a dozen
+troopers.
+
+The general announced that he was not only willing but eager to round up
+Hernandez, who, he said, was the real head of the revolution in Western
+Mexico. Mr. Willing expressed his alarm over Dick's safety, and they
+waited ten minutes.
+
+"I'll have my clerk tell him to wait when he comes in," said the consul.
+"There is no use delaying longer."
+
+To this Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton agreed.
+
+"Dick is always turning up missing," declared the colonel.
+
+"But he always turns up safe again," replied Mr. Willing.
+
+"Oh, he'll be back all right," said the consul. "He can hardly have
+fallen into any danger this time."
+
+Fisher, the man who had trailed the conspirators to their lair, now
+summoned two automobiles, and the party climbed in. The trip to the
+house where the girls had been confined was made in record time, and a
+short distance away a halt was called.
+
+General Seauterey and his men now took the lead, and surrounded the
+house. The general himself approached the door and knocked on it loudly.
+There was no response, but a second sharp knock brought a voice from
+behind the door. It was a woman's voice and it said:
+
+"What is wanted?"
+
+"Open the door!" demanded the general.
+
+"Who are you?"
+
+"General Seauterey."
+
+There was an exclamation of dismay from within, and the sound of
+retreating footsteps. Again the general pounded on the door. There was
+no response and he called to two of his men.
+
+"Break down the door," he instructed them.
+
+The heavy rifle butts of the soldiers crashed against the wood,
+shattering it. Several hard kicks and it was in splinters. With drawn
+revolver General Seauterey led the way.
+
+Two soldiers, Mr. Willing, Colonel Ashton and Captain Von Blusen
+followed him. The others remained on guard without to prevent the escape
+of the fugitives.
+
+Through the house strode the general, throwing wide the doors of the
+various rooms. And at last he brought up against another locked door.
+This was burst in as had been the first, and the general advanced first.
+
+Came a shot from the room, and the general staggered back, then moved
+forward again. At the far side of the room were two figures, the general
+could just make out in the darkness.
+
+"Hands up!" he cried.
+
+"Don't shoot!" came in a woman's voice. "We surrender!"
+
+"Come forward then," said the general.
+
+Two women, who proved to be Mrs. Hernandez and Mrs. Sebastian, advanced
+shrinking.
+
+"Where is Hernandez?" demanded the general.
+
+"He is not here," was the reply. "We expect him back any moment."
+
+"Where is he?"
+
+"He went after the two prisoners, who escaped."
+
+"Your prisoners have escaped?" demanded the general.
+
+"Yes."
+
+The general turned to one of his men.
+
+"Call the others within," he ordered.
+
+The other four troopers came into the house, followed by the Americans
+and the German captain. Mr. Willing was the first to see Mrs. Sebastian,
+and he sprang toward her.
+
+"What have you done with my daughter, madam?" he demanded.
+
+Mrs. Sebastian shrank back from him.
+
+Colonel Ashton also stepped forward and angrily demanded that Mabel be
+produced at once. Then Mrs. Sebastian spoke.
+
+"They have escaped!" she declared.
+
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were skeptical. Mrs. Sebastian saw that
+they did not believe her.
+
+"It is true," she declared. "They locked me in a room and jumped from a
+window. Hernandez has gone after them."
+
+"We'll wait here for Hernandez to return," decided General Seauterey.
+"We'll get him when he comes back, and if he has the prisoners it will
+save us further search."
+
+None doubted that this was the best plan, and so all sat down to wait,
+General Seauterey meanwhile keeping watch at the door himself.
+
+Suddenly he sprang to his feet.
+
+"Here he comes--alone!" he cried.
+
+He motioned his men to the door.
+
+"He'll run when he sees the broken door," he said. "I'll command him to
+halt. If he doesn't obey, fire."
+
+It was as the general had predicted. When Hernandez saw the broken door,
+he stopped in surprise. Then he turned and would have run. General
+Seauterey stepped forward and shouted:
+
+"Halt!"
+
+Hernandez paid no heed.
+
+"Fire!" cried the general.
+
+Two puffs of smoke and two sharp cracks. Hernandez fell to the ground,
+but sat up in a moment and seized his left foot in his hand, at the same
+time moaning with pain.
+
+"Good work, men!" cried the general. "Go and bring him here!"
+
+Two of the soldiers obeyed, and Hernandez was soon in the house.
+
+"Where are the two prisoners?" demanded the general.
+
+Hernandez looked at him and sneered.
+
+"Find out," he said.
+
+"So I will," returned the general.
+
+He motioned to his men.
+
+"Bind the prisoners and put them in the car outside," he ordered.
+
+Then he led the way from the house.
+
+"I shall have this man questioned more fully," he said to the consul,
+"and I shall send you a message to the consulate within an hour. He will
+not fail to tell what he knows of the prisoners."
+
+With this Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton were forced to be content,
+although the anxiety of each was growing at every minute.
+
+The Mexicans and their prisoners climbed into one of the automobiles,
+and the Americans and Captain von Blusen into the other. They were
+whirled back to the consulate.
+
+The clerk addressed Mr. Willing.
+
+"Captain Anderson, of the Steamship _Yucatan_, was here a few moments
+ago, sir," he said. "He desires your presence aboard immediately. He
+says he has important news for you."
+
+"Regarding my daughter?" asked Mr. Willing eagerly.
+
+"He didn't say, sir," replied the clerk.
+
+"Come, Ashton," cried Mr. Willing excitedly. "Perhaps Captain Anderson
+has learned something."
+
+"I shall accompany you," said Captain von Blusen.
+
+The others offered no objection and the three hurried away together, Mr.
+Willing telling Consul Harrington that they would let him know the
+result of their trip.
+
+At the water front they were fortunate enough to find an unengaged
+boatman, who offered to put them aboard the _Yucatan_ for a fair price.
+
+"Never mind the price," said Mr. Willing. "Hurry and get us there."
+
+The boatman wasted no time, and soon they were heading for the big
+steamship as fast as they could go.
+
+Dusk was just falling as they went swiftly over the water, and none
+could but think what a pretty spectacle the great ship made with her
+thousands of electric lights shining brightly.
+
+"And that's the ship you attempted to get away with, Captain Von
+Blusen," said Mr. Willing.
+
+"Yes, and would have gotten away with but for Miss Ashton," replied the
+captain. "However, I bear no ill will. It is the fortune of war."
+
+"And we bear you no ill will, captain," declared Colonel Ashton. "It is
+true that you have made us considerable trouble, but I appreciate your
+position in the matter. I know that you were acting under orders."
+
+"Thank you," replied the captain.
+
+"I can say the same, sir," declared Mr. Willing, "Here, at the last, you
+have been of service to us, and in view of that, things that have gone
+before must be overlooked."
+
+"Thank you, sir."
+
+The little boat now scraped alongside the _Yucatan_. Several moments
+later the three were aboard the big steamship and rushing toward Captain
+Anderson's quarters.
+
+Their arrival had been reported before they came aboard, and so they
+found Captain Anderson alone.
+
+"Glad to see you gentlemen again," said the captain, shaking hands with
+Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton. He looked Captain Von Blusen over
+coldly. "I shall talk to you later," he added.
+
+Captain Von Blusen bowed.
+
+"Oh, he is all right, captain," said Mr. Willing. "He has been of great
+aid to us in searching for our daughters."
+
+"So?" Captain Anderson's stern expression relaxed a trifle. "I am glad
+to hear it."
+
+He held out his hand, and the young German grasped it.
+
+"You but did your duty, as you saw it, I suppose," said Captain
+Anderson.
+
+"What is the piece of news you have for us, Captain Anderson?" asked
+Colonel Willing, who had been waiting impatiently for the commander of
+the _Yucatan_ to broach the subject that had called them aboard.
+
+"Have chairs, gentlemen," said the captain, ignoring the question.
+
+The others sat down, the older men twisting about uneasily. At last Mr.
+Willing could stand it no longer.
+
+"Captain," he cried, jumping to his feet, "if you have any words of our
+daughters, tell us. Don't keep us in suspense any longer."
+
+Captain Anderson gazed at him steadily for a few moments, then arose,
+and walked to a door in his cabin.
+
+"I have three prisoners here I would like you to see," he said quietly.
+
+With a sudden movement he threw wide the door, and there stepped forth
+first Dick, then Shirley, then Mabel.
+
+The two men absolutely ignored Dick, who stepped aside.
+
+With glad cries the others rushed toward each other. Shirley found
+herself clasped in her father's arms, and Mabel and her father also
+clung tight together. Then they stepped back and looked at each other.
+
+"This is my little surprise," said Captain Anderson with a smile.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.--"CAPTAIN VON BLUSEN."
+
+
+"And when we found you had escaped we didn't know where to look for
+you," said Mr. Willing, in concluding the story of the search.
+
+"We never doubted that we should get away in some manner," declared
+Shirley. "We were sure you would find us, but when the chance for escape
+came we took advantage of it."
+
+"And where did you get to when you left the consulate?" demanded Colonel
+Ashton of Dick.
+
+Dick explained.
+
+"And if Captain Anderson had not arrived so opportunely, there is no
+telling what might have happened," he declared. "He put the enemy to
+rout."
+
+"It wasn't much of a job," replied the captain, waving aside Mr.
+Willing's thanks. "I just touched two of them with my fists and they
+went down."
+
+"I reckon you didn't touch them very gently, captain," said Colonel
+Ashton, with a grim smile.
+
+"Well, perhaps not," answered Captain Anderson, "but it was no time for
+half way measures." He turned to Captain Von Blusen. "And what am I to
+do with you?" he asked.
+
+"I should be glad if you would take me to San Francisco," was the reply.
+
+Captain Anderson turned this over in his mind.
+
+"You have made much trouble for me," he said finally, "and besides, the
+United States authorities may be looking for you, for all I know.
+However, I have no such information, and as you seem to have turned over
+a new leaf, I shall do so."
+
+"Thank you, captain."
+
+"I would advise you, however," continued the captain, "to go ashore at
+the first American port instead of going to Frisco. The authorities may
+be on the lookout for you, and I don't know what they would do with you.
+Your theft of the _Yucatan_ was nothing short of piracy."
+
+"I suppose you are right," returned Captain Von Blusen, "and I shall act
+upon your advice. What is the first United States port at which you
+shall touch?"
+
+"San Diego."
+
+"Then I shall go ashore there."
+
+"Very well, unless, of course, in the meantime I should receive word to
+hold you."
+
+"But you won't report the captain's presence here?" exclaimed Shirley
+hopefully.
+
+"No; I shall say nothing about it unless I am asked."
+
+"Thank you again, captain," said the young officer.
+
+He turned on his heel and left the room.
+
+"When shall we get under way again, captain?" asked Colonel Ashton.
+
+"First thing in the morning," was the reply. "We'll probably be out of
+sight of land when you tumble out."
+
+"We can't get away from here any too quick to suit me," declared
+Shirley.
+
+"No, indeed," Mabel agreed. "We have had trouble enough to last us for a
+long time to come. The sooner we get back to civilization the better."
+
+"And that goes for all of us," agreed Mr. Willing.
+
+"I'm glad to have you back aboard the _Yucatan_," declared Captain
+Anderson. "To tell the truth, I didn't expect to see you in Mazatlan. I
+felt sure you would eventually find the young ladies safe and sound, but
+I feared I should have to make the rest of the trip without you. I tell
+you, it made me feel good to run across young Stanley here this
+afternoon."
+
+"It didn't make you feel as good as it did me, captain," returned Dick
+significantly.
+
+"Well, perhaps not under the circumstances," laughed the captain. "The
+only one of our passengers who will not complete the trip is Mrs.
+Sebastian."
+
+"And a good thing for all concerned," declared Colonel Ashton. "I don't
+see how she fooled us so completely, Willing."
+
+"She did though," returned Mr. Willing. "I would never have suspected
+her of having any ulterior motives."
+
+"You wouldn't listen to me," said Dick. "I suspected her from the first.
+Now I can say 'I told you so.'"
+
+"We'll place more confidence in your foresight in the future," declared
+the colonel.
+
+"I don't want to run you away," said Captain Anderson, "but it's my
+belief you had all better turn in. You look fagged out, the whole bunch
+of you. Sleep is the best remedy."
+
+"You are right, captain," declared Shirley. "I feel as though I could go
+to sleep standing on my feet."
+
+They bade the captain good-night, thanked him again for his assistance,
+and made their way to their cabin, where, after some further talk, all
+turned in.
+
+So completely were they exhausted that it was after eight o'clock the
+following morning when Shirley, the first to awake, sprang up. She
+glanced out the window of her stateroom. The sun shone brightly, and
+from the barely perceptible motion of the steamer she knew they were
+moving.
+
+She called Mabel, and the girls dressed quickly. Shirley knocked on the
+next door and aroused the others, and an hour later, after a hearty
+breakfast, all stood forward on the promenade deck enjoying the fresh
+morning breeze.
+
+There was not a speck of land in sight and would not be for hours. An
+hour later Captain Von Blusen joined them and after awhile Captain
+Anderson stopped to exchange a few words.
+
+It was while the commander of the _Yucatan_ was there that there came a
+hail from the lookout.
+
+"Smoke to the leeward, sir!"
+
+All glanced in the direction indicated. There, upon the distant horizon,
+was a faint cloud of smoke. As they gazed it presently took shape, and
+half an hour later it did not take the second cry of the lookout to tell
+them the approaching vessel was a battle cruiser of the first class.
+
+"Wonder what this one is?" said Shirley, as the vessel drew nearer.
+
+"I don't know. It might be German. It has been supposed there were two
+German vessels in these waters, but we have already encountered one.
+This may be another."
+
+"It's hardly possible, though," said Mr. Willing. "Captain Von Blusen,
+to your knowledge, are there any German ships of war in these waters?"
+
+"I can't answer that question definitely, sir," he replied. "All I can
+say is that it is possible."
+
+"I don't believe this is a German," said Dick. "But whatever she is she
+is coming right toward us."
+
+It was true. The stranger was shaping a course that would intercept the
+_Yucatan_ several miles ahead.
+
+"I wonder if she will stop us?" said Mabel.
+
+"Of course," replied Captain Von Blusen. "The commander will probably
+come aboard to have a look at the ship's papers."
+
+"Will he interfere with you?" asked Mabel.
+
+"Hardly," was the reply. "In spite of the fact that I am a German, he
+will not dare to interfere with me aboard a neutral ship."
+
+"Boom!"
+
+It was the sound of a great gun aboard the cruiser.
+
+"Signal to heave-to," said Captain Anderson.
+
+He made his way to the bridge, and in response to his command, the
+_Yucatan_ came to a pause. Then all eagerly waited for the cruiser to
+show her colors.
+
+"German!" was the audible gasp from the passengers as the red, white and
+black of the German Empire were unfurled at the masthead.
+
+"I am coming aboard you," was the message the German commander flashed
+to Captain Anderson.
+
+A small boat put off from the cruiser and soon bumped alongside the
+_Yucatan_. A moment later an officer in a smart uniform came over the
+side. He made his way at once to where Captain Anderson stood on the
+bridge.
+
+"Is this the way you meet a German naval officer?" he demanded angrily.
+
+Captain Anderson looked at him in surprise.
+
+"What would you have me do?" he demanded, taking a step forward.
+
+"And when you address me, say sir!" exclaimed the German, who seemed
+rather young and possessed of much self-importance. "You should have met
+me as I came over-side."
+
+"Say sir to you, eh?" exclaimed Captain Anderson. "If you don't get off
+my ship in five minutes I'll throw you over the rail."
+
+The German officer stepped back, and half drew a revolver. Captain
+Anderson advanced another step.
+
+But interference came from an unexpected source.
+
+Captain Von Blusen, who had stood close enough to overhear this
+conversation, suddenly ascended to the bridge. He walked quickly up
+behind the German officer, and seizing him by the shoulder, swung him
+around sharply.
+
+"You forget yourself, Lieutenant Von Meyers!" he said angrily. "Get back
+to your boat!"
+
+The German lieutenant gazed at this newcomer threateningly, then a look
+of the greatest astonishment passed over his face. He took three quick
+steps backward.
+
+Captain Von Blusen stood perfectly erect, one hand pointing toward the
+small boat from which the German lieutenant had just climbed to the deck
+of the _Yucatan_. He said no further word.
+
+And while officers and passengers of the _Yucatan_ looked on in
+amazement, the German lieutenant took two quick steps forward again,
+fell upon one knee, took Captain Von Blusen's other hand and touched it
+with his lips!
+
+Then he arose, saluted, and walked rapidly away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX.--THROUGH THE GOLDEN GATE.
+
+
+There was an audible gasp from passengers and crew, and the same
+question was upon every lip:
+
+"Who is he?"
+
+As the German lieutenant reached the side of the ship, Captain Von
+Blusen spoke again:
+
+"Lieutenant Von Meyers!"
+
+The lieutenant turned about sharply, and came to attention.
+
+"You will wait with the boat. I shall go with you."
+
+The lieutenant saluted again and stood stiffly erect in his tracks.
+
+Captain Von Blusen turned to Captain Anderson.
+
+"I shall relieve you of the responsibility of my presence immediately,
+captain," he said quietly. "I shall go aboard the cruiser."
+
+Captain Anderson was too much taken by surprise to mutter more than:
+
+"Very well, sir."
+
+Why he added the "sir" the captain could not have told, but there was
+something in the bearing of the man that faced him that called it forth
+involuntarily.
+
+Captain Von Blusen held out his hand, and the commander of the _Yucatan_
+grasped it.
+
+"Good luck to you, sir," said the latter.
+
+"And to you," returned Captain Von Blusen.
+
+He descended from the bridge, and made his way to where the Willing
+party stood gazing at him in open-eyed wonder.
+
+The German officer first addressed Mr. Willing and Colonel Ashton.
+
+"I am sorry that I have been the means of putting you to so much
+trouble," he said, with a slight bow, "but whatever I did I considered
+in line with my duty. Please believe that."
+
+"I have no doubt of it," replied Mr. Willing.
+
+"Nor I," agreed Colonel Ashton.
+
+Captain Von Blusen now turned to Dick, and with the slightest of smiles
+he extended his hand.
+
+"As you and I had a little difficulty," he said, "I pray you will
+overlook it."
+
+Dick grasped the extended hand, as he replied.
+
+"Why, of course. I guess I am a bit hot-headed once in a while."
+
+"No more than I am," returned Captain Von Blusen. "It has been my chief
+fault."
+
+He pressed Dick's hand once more, and then turned to the two girls, who
+had been too stunned by what they had witnessed, to speak.
+
+The captain extended a hand to each in turn and Shirley and Mabel shook
+hands with him.
+
+"I am pleased to have met you, Miss Ashton," he said courteously, "and
+you, Miss Willing, and I regret that I have been the means of causing
+you unpleasantness. But as I have said to your fathers, what I did was
+but in the line of duty. Now I must say good-bye, but when the war is
+over," he looked at Mabel, "I hope that I shall see you both again."
+
+He bowed low, and before the girls could reply, he made his way toward
+the spot where the German lieutenant stood awaiting him. He motioned the
+latter to precede him over the side, and was just about to follow, when
+he seemed to think of something.
+
+He walked quickly back across the deck to where Shirley and Mabel stood,
+and spoke.
+
+"I suppose you all wonder who I am," he said quietly, "and while I would
+greatly like to satisfy your curiosity, I fear it is impossible at this
+time."
+
+Now Shirley found her tongue.
+
+"You can at least tell us whether you are of royal birth," she cried.
+
+Again Captain Von Blusen bowed low.
+
+"I cannot say yes, nor can I deny it," he answered.
+
+"Then your name is not really Captain Von Blusen?"
+
+The captain smiled and bowed, but made no reply.
+
+Now Mabel spoke.
+
+"Captain," she said quietly, "for by such name only can we know you now,
+we should, of course, be honored with your confidence, but if you cannot
+speak at this time, I for one shall ask you no questions."
+
+Captain Von Blusen took her hand and bent over it gallantly.
+
+"I thank you, Miss Ashton," he replied quietly. "Some day I hope to be
+able to confide in you."
+
+He bowed to the others, and turning sharply on his heel, made his way to
+the side of the ship and clambered over the rail.
+
+Now the passengers hurried to the side of the ship, and gazed with
+something like awe at the boat that made swiftly for the German cruiser.
+
+Captain Anderson did not give the signal to get under way until the
+cruiser's launch was being hoisted aboard, when there broke out from the
+cruiser a salvo of guns.
+
+"A salute!" cried Captain Anderson, raising his voice to make himself
+heard. "He is some one of importance. Now I wonder----"
+
+He broke off suddenly, as he counted the number of guns and, in his
+mind, ran over the list of relatives of the German Emperor. Then his
+clouded brow cleared, and he smiled.
+
+"If he wishes to keep it a secret, I am not the man to betray it," he
+said to himself.
+
+That Captain Anderson knew who "Captain Von Blusen" really was there
+could be no doubt, but the commander of the _Yucatan_ kept his promise
+to himself and confided to no one, in spite of the questions that were
+poured on him later.
+
+Now Captain Anderson gave the signal to get under way, and the _Yucatan_
+slowly gathered headway. The German cruiser remained stationary as the
+_Yucatan_ approached, and the big steamship passed her less than a
+quarter of a mile away.
+
+There, on the bridge of the cruiser, with the commander of the vessel
+and his officers standing at attention, stood "Captain Von Blusen." The
+passengers waved their hands at him, and he, in return, lifted his cap
+and made a low bow.
+
+Then the passengers aboard the _Yucatan_ saw him turn to the man they
+could make out was the commander of the cruiser and give a sharp
+command. The latter repeated it to one of his officers, and a moment
+later a second salvo broke out from the cruiser. At the same time the
+German flag at the masthead was dipped in salute.
+
+"That," said Captain Anderson calmly, "is a fine token of respect. Too
+bad we haven't the guns with which to return it."
+
+He gave an order, however, and the American ensign at the masthead of
+the _Yucatan_ returned the salute.
+
+These courtesies having been exchanged, all became bustle and hurry
+aboard the German cruiser, as the passengers on the _Yucatan_ could see.
+Men dashed hurriedly hither and thither, and a moment later the cruiser
+swung slowly about and headed due south.
+
+"And that is the last we shall see of Captain Von Blusen," declared
+Shirley. "I wonder who he is."
+
+"I haven't any idea," returned Mabel slowly, "but there can be no
+question that he is of high rank."
+
+"No, there can be no question about that," agreed Mr. Willing, who had
+overheard this conversation. "I should say that he is a member of the
+Imperial German family."
+
+"Then what is he doing in the United States?"
+
+"I have learned a couple of Mexican words," replied Mr. Willing. "Quien
+sabe?" (Who knows.)
+
+"But he said we should hear from him when the war is over," declared
+Mabel.
+
+"Yes," said Shirley, "he said 'we' but he meant you."
+
+Mabel's face turned a trifle red.
+
+"What do you mean?" she asked in some confusion.
+
+Shirley laughed.
+
+"I guess you know what I mean, all right," she made reply. "Do you
+remember saying something like that to me once?"
+
+"But I had reason to," protested Mabel. "It was so plain in Dick's
+case."
+
+"No more so than in Captain Von Blusen's case," declared Shirley.
+
+"I don't see----"
+
+"Oh, yes you do. You mean you just won't admit it. Well, you don't have
+to. Why, what makes your face so red, Mabel?"
+
+"I don't know what you are talking about," declared Mabel, and turning
+about quickly, she rushed to her cabin, leaving Shirley laughing to
+herself.
+
+The steamship _Yucatan_ was forging ahead at full speed now, and was
+rapidly lessening the distance to the first California port--San Diego.
+
+"Dad," said Shirley, "isn't there a second fair at San Diego?"
+
+"Yes," replied her father, "why?"
+
+"Well then, why can't we stop off there for a day or two and go on to
+San Francisco by rail?"
+
+"We can if you wish it," replied Mr. Willing.
+
+"Then let's do, Dad."
+
+"All right."
+
+And so it was arranged. Shirley went below where she and Mabel
+immediately began gathering their things together so that they would be
+ready to leave the boat the moment it docked at San Diego.
+
+There was no question that the girls had become great favorites with all
+the passengers. Many pressed them to continue the trip to San Francisco,
+Captain Anderson being one of the most anxious to keep them aboard as
+long as possible.
+
+"I don't know what I shall do without you," he told Shirley and Mabel.
+"We have had lots of excitement on this voyage, more than ever before,
+and you two girls have been mainly responsible for it. I hope that I
+shall see you again some time."
+
+"Why," said Shirley, "there are many more summers coming, and if we ever
+decide to make this trip again we shall not ever think of taking any
+boat but yours."
+
+"May the time come soon," said the captain.
+
+The passengers bade them an affectionate good-bye as they left the
+_Yucatan_ at San Diego, and then they entered a taxi and were driven to
+a hotel, where they once more made themselves comfortable for a stay
+ashore.
+
+They spent two days at the San Diego exposition, and then took a train
+for San Francisco to view, as Shirley expressed it, "the greatest sight
+they ever expected to see."
+
+And none of the party was a whit disappointed in the great exposition.
+In fact, it was far beyond expectations. For two weeks they remained in
+the California metropolis, spending every minute possible upon the large
+exposition grounds overlooking the Golden Gate and the broad expanse to
+the Pacific.
+
+When the time came for them to betake themselves homeward, it was with
+regret that they realized it would be long before they could again hope
+to see the beauties of the far-off state of California.
+
+There remains yet one incident to be told.
+
+Two weeks after their return home, Mabel received a registered package
+postmarked Rome, Italy. Eagerly she ran to her room with it, where she
+opened it in solitude; nor could she repress a cry of admiration when
+she drew out a beautifully bejeweled cross, patterned after the Iron
+Cross of Germany--the Iron Cross with which the German Emperor decorates
+his troops for bravery.
+
+With it there was a brief note, with the signature "Captain Von Blusen."
+
+Looking closer at the piece of paper on which the message was written,
+Mabel perceived a seal of peculiar design. She ran hastily for her
+dictionary, and turned to the seals of the various nations.
+
+There was a striking similarity between the seal on the paper and the
+Imperial German seal, as reproduced, in colors, in her big dictionary.
+
+For perhaps half an hour the girl sat silent, musing.
+
+"Can it be possible?" she asked herself at last "I wonder----"
+
+She rushed downstairs to consult Shirley, who at that moment was holding
+a tete-a-tete with Dick on the sunny front porch.
+
+                                THE END.
+
+
+
+
+The Blue Grass Seminary Girls Series
+
+By CAROLYN JUDSON BURNETT
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding, Price, 40c. per Volume
+
+_Splendid Stories of the Adventures of a Group of Charming Girls_
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS' VACATION ADVENTURES; or, Shirley
+  Willing to the Rescue.
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS' CHRISTMAS HOLIDAYS; or, A Four Weeks'
+  Tour with the Glee Club.
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS IN THE MOUNTAINS; or, Shirley Willing
+  on a Mission of Peace.
+
+  THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER; or, Exciting Adventures
+  on a Summer's Cruise Through the Panama Canal.
+
+The Mildred Series
+
+By MARTHA FINLEY
+
+Handsome Cloth Binding, Price, 40c. per Volume
+
+_A Companion Series to the Famous "Elsie" Books by the Same Author_
+
+                        MILDRED KEITH
+                        MILDRED'S MARRIED LIFE
+                        MILDRED AT ROSELANDS
+                        MILDRED AT HOME
+                        MILDRED AND ELSIE
+                        MILDRED'S BOYS AND GIRLS
+                        MILDRED'S NEW DAUGHTER
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The Camp Fire Girls Series
+
+By HILDEGARD G. FREY. The only series of stories for Camp Fire Girls
+endorsed by the officials of the Camp Fire Girls Organization.
+
+PRICE, 40 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or, The Winnebagos go Camping.
+
+  This lively Camp Fire group and their Guardian go back to Nature in
+  a camp in the wilds of Maine, and pile up more adventures in one
+  summer than they have had in all their previous vacations put
+  together. Before the summer is over they have transformed Gladys,
+  the frivolous boarding school girl, into a genuine Winnebago.
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT SCHOOL, or, The Wohelo Weavers.
+
+  It is the custom of the Winnebagos to weave the events of their
+  lives into symbolic bead bands, instead of keeping a diary. All
+  commendatory doings are worked out in bright colors, but every time
+  the Law of the Camp Fire is broken it must be recorded in black. How
+  these seven live wire girls strive to infuse into their school life
+  the spirit of Work, Health and Love and yet manage to get into more
+  than their share of mischief, is told in this story.
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT ONOWAY HOUSE; or, The Magic Garden.
+
+  Migwan is determined to go to college, and not being strong enough
+  to work indoors earns the money by raising fruits and vegetables.
+  The Winnebagos all turn a hand to help the cause along and the
+  "goings-on" at Onoway Homes that summer make the foundations shake
+  with laughter.
+
+THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS GO MOTORING; or, Along the Road that Leads the Way.
+
+  The Winnebagos take a thousand mile auto trip. The "pinching" of
+  Nyoda, the fire in the country inn, the runaway girl and the
+  dead-earnest hare and hound chase combine to make these three weeks
+  the most exciting the Winnebagos have ever experienced.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The AMY E. BLANCHARD Series
+
+Miss Blanchard has won an enviable reputation as a writer of short
+stories for girls. Her books are thoroughly wholesome in every way and
+her style is full of charm. The titles described below will be splendid
+additions to every girl's library.
+
+Handsomely bound in cloth, full library size. Illustrated by L. J.
+Bridgman. Price, 60 cents per volume, postpaid.
+
+THE GLAD LADY. A spirited account of a remarkably pleasant vacation
+spent in an unfrequented part of northern Spain. This summer, which
+promised at the outset to be very quiet, proved to be exactly the
+opposite. Event follows event in rapid succession and the story ends
+with the culmination of at least two happy romances. The story
+throughout is interwoven with vivid descriptions of real places and
+people of which the general public knows very little. These add greatly
+to the reader's interest.
+
+WIT'S END. Instilled with life, color and individuality, this story of
+true love cannot fail to attract and hold to its happy end the reader's
+eager attention. The word pictures are masterly; while the poise of
+narrative and description is marvellously preserved.
+
+A JOURNEY OF JOY. A charming story of the travels and adventures of two
+young American girls, and an elderly companion in Europe. It is not only
+well told, but the amount of information contained will make it a very
+valuable addition to the library of any girl who anticipates making a
+similar trip. Their many pleasant experiences end in the culmination of
+two happy romances, all told in the happiest vein.
+
+TALBOT'S ANGLES. A charming romance of Southern life. Talbot's Angles is
+a beautiful old estate located on the Eastern Shore of Maryland. The
+death of the owner and the ensuing legal troubles render it necessary
+for our heroine, the present owner, to leave the place which has been in
+her family for hundreds of years and endeavor to earn her own living.
+Another claimant for the property appearing on the scene complicates
+matters still more. The untangling of this mixed-up condition of affairs
+makes an extremely interesting story.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent prepaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street, New York
+
+
+
+
+The Girl Chum's Series
+
+ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.
+
+ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.
+
+A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular
+authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full
+of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives,
+vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers.
+
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS.
+
+  BENHURST, CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning.
+
+  BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris.
+
+  BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison.
+
+  DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row.
+
+  FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham.
+
+  HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings.
+
+  JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage.
+
+  KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow.
+
+  LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder.
+
+  MARJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright.
+
+  MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning.
+
+  MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring
+  Corning.
+
+  MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow.
+
+  ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning.
+
+  PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright.
+
+  RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne.
+
+  THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The Girl Comrade's Series
+
+ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.
+
+ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.
+
+A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular
+authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full
+of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives,
+vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers.
+
+HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS.
+
+  A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER. By I. T. Thurston.
+
+  ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+
+  ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L.
+  Rouse.
+
+  BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+
+  HELEN BEATON, COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse.
+
+  JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S.
+  Robbins.
+
+  NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+  SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Spies Series
+
+These stories are based on Important historical events, scenes wherein
+boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of
+history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home
+life, and accurate in every particular.
+
+Handsome Cloth Bindings
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS.
+
+  A story of the part they took in its defence. By William P. Chipman.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY.
+
+  A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL.
+
+  A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT.
+
+  A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE.
+
+  The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. By James
+  Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY.
+
+  The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS.
+
+  The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots to drive
+  the British from that State. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX.
+
+  The story of General Marion and his young spies. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN.
+
+  The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette in the Siege of
+  Yorktown. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA.
+
+  The story of how the young spies helped the Continental Army at
+  Valley Forge. By James Otis.
+
+THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD.
+
+  The story of the part they took in its brave defence. By William P.
+  Chipman.
+
+THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK.
+
+  The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of General
+  Washington. By James Otis.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street. New York
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Scout Series
+
+By HERBERT CARTER
+
+New stories of Camp Life, telling the wonderful and thrilling adventures
+of the Boys of the Silver Fox Patrol.
+
+Handsome Cloth Bindings
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; or, Marooned Among the Game Fish
+Poachers.
+
+  Through a queer freak of fate, Thad Brewster and his comrades of the
+  Silver Fox Patrol find themselves in somewhat the same predicament
+  that confronted dear old Robinson Crusoe; only it is on the Great
+  Lakes that they are wrecked instead of the salty sea. You will admit
+  that those Cranford scouts are a lively and entertaining bunch of
+  fellows.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp.
+
+  New and startling experiences awaited the tried comrades of camp and
+  trail, when they visit the Southland. But their knowledge of
+  woodcraft enabled them to meet and overcome all difficulties.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMP FIRE; or, Scouting with the Silver Fox
+Patrol.
+
+  This book is brimming over with thrilling adventure, woods lore and
+  the story of the wonderful experiences that befell the Cranford
+  troop of Boy Scouts when spending a part of their vacation in the
+  wilderness.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners.
+
+  Those lads who have read The Boy Scouts' First Camp Fire will be
+  delighted to read this story. It tells of the strange and mysterious
+  adventures that happened to the Patrol in their trip through the
+  "mountains of the sky" in the Moonshiners' Paradise of the old Tar
+  Heel State, North Carolina.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; or, Scouting through the Big Game Country.
+
+  The story recites the many adventures that befell the members of the
+  Silver Fox Patrol with wild animals of the forest trails, as well as
+  the desperate men who had sought a refuge in this lonely country.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or, The New Test for the Silver Fox
+Patrol
+
+  In the rough field of experience the tenderfoots and greenhorns of
+  the Silver Fox Patrol are fast learning to take care of themselves
+  when abroad. Thad and his chums have a wonderful experience when
+  they are employed by the State of Maine to act as Fire Wardens.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; or, The Search for the Lost
+Tenderfoot
+
+  A serious calamity threatens the Silver Fox Patrol when on one of
+  their vacation trips to the wonderland of the great Northwest. How
+  apparent disaster is bravely met and overcome by Thad and his
+  friends, forms the main theme of the story, which abounds in plenty
+  of humor, and hairbreadth escapes.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; or, The Secret of The Hidden Silver Mine.
+
+  By this time the boys of the Silver Fox Patrol have learned through
+  experience how to rough it upon a long hike. Their tour takes them
+  into the wildest region of the great Rocky Mountains, and here they
+  meet with many strange adventures.
+
+THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA.
+
+  A story of Burgoyne's defeat in 1777.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York
+
+
+
+
+The Boy Chums Series
+
+By WILMER M. ELY
+
+In this series of remarkable stories by Wilmer M. Ely are described the
+adventures of two boy chums--Charley West and Walter Hazard--in the
+great swamps of interior Florida and among the cays off the Florida
+Coast, and through the Bahama Islands. These are real, live boys, and
+their experiences are well worth following.
+
+In Handsome Cloth Bindings
+
+PRICE, 60 CENTS PER VOLUME
+
+THE BOY CHUMS ON INDIAN RIVER; or, The Boy Partners, of the Schooner
+"Orphan."
+
+  In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard meet deadly
+  rattlesnakes: have a battle with a wild panther; are attacked by
+  outlaws: their boat is towed by a swordfish; they are shipwrecked by
+  a monster manatee fish, and pass safely through many exciting scenes
+  of danger. This book should be read first.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS ON HAUNTED ISLAND; or, Hunting for Pearls in the Bahama
+Islands.
+
+  This book tells the story of the boy chums' adventures on the
+  schooner "Eager Quest," hunting for pearls among the Bahama Islands.
+  Their hairbreadth escapes from the treacherous quicksands and
+  dangerous waterspouts, and their rescue from the wicked wreckers are
+  fully told.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST; or, Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida
+Everglades.
+
+  The story of the boy chums hunting the blue herons and the pink and
+  white egrets for their plumes in the forests of Florida is full of
+  danger and excitement. In this story is fully told how the chums
+  encountered the Indians; their battles with the escaped convicts;
+  their fight with the wild boars and alligators; and many exciting
+  encounters and escapes. This is the third story of the boy chums'
+  adventures.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS' PERILOUS CRUISE; or, Searching for Wreckage on the
+Florida Coast
+
+  This story of the boy chums' adventures on and off the Florida Coast
+  describes many scenes of daring and adventure, in hunting for ships
+  stranded and cargoes washed ashore. The boy chums passed through
+  many exciting scenes, their conflicts with the Cuban wreckers; the
+  loss of their vessel, the "Eager Quest," they will long remember.
+  This is the fourth book of adventures which the boy chums
+  experienced.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO; or, a Dangerous Cruise with the
+Greek Spongers.
+
+  This story of the boy chums hunting for sponges is filled with many
+  adventures. The dangers of gathering sponges are fully described;
+  the chums meet with sharks and alligators; and they are cast away on
+  a desert island. Their rescue and arrival home make a most
+  interesting story. This is the fifth book of adventures of the boy
+  chums.
+
+THE BOY CHUMS CRUISING IN FLORIDA WATERS; or, the Perils and Dangers of
+the Fishing Fleet.
+
+  In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard embark upon a new and
+  dangerous quest for fortune. With their old and tried comrades,
+  Captain Westfield and the little negro, Chris, they join the great
+  army of fishermen that yearly search the Florida seas for the
+  thousands of kinds of rare fish and water creatures that abound
+  there. The Florida waters hide many strange and unknown dangers. The
+  perils the chums encounter from weird fishes and creatures of the
+  sea and the menace of hurricanes and shipwreck, make very
+  interesting and instructive reading. This is the sixth book of
+  adventures of the boy chums.
+
+For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the
+publishers.
+
+A. L. BURT COMPANY. 52-58 Duane Street, New York.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Blue Grass Seminary Girls on the
+Water, by Carolyn Judson Burnett
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37310.txt or 37310.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/3/1/37310/
+
+Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/37310.zip b/37310.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00bb0c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37310.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1106cfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #37310 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/37310)